








4 ^ ** *^ 





- **o« :■ 









> v .. 




,0* o°" e . *b 



5 »1^L% 







4> .<■'. 



W 
& ^V 















/\ 






















f 1 £&rtl//72^ - •3^,- 






'•*•■■ o< :'«^»'-. '»>* 










<$> o « « 



f> 



„< a 



NEW METHOD 



OP LEARNING 



THE FRENCH LANGUAGE; 



EMBRACING BOTH THJB 



2VnaIgtic anft Bgntljetic ittobes of Instruction ; 



A PLAIN AND PRACTICAL WAY OP ACQUIRING THE ART 



READING, SPEAKING, AND COMPOSING FRENCH. 



OH THE PLAN OF WOODBURY'S METHOD WITH GERMAN 



BY LOUIS FASQUELLE. LL.D. 

PROFESSOR OF MODERN LANGUAGES IN THE UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN 

FORTIETH EDITION. 

NEW YORK: 
IVISON A PHINNEY, 321 BROADWAY. 

CHICAGO : S. C. GKIGGS & CO., 39 & 41 LAKE ST. 

CINCINNATI I MOORE, WILSTACH, KEYS & CO. 8T. LOUIS : KEITH & WOODS. 

PHILADELPHIA : SOWER, BARNES & CO. DETROIT : RAYMOND & 8ELLEOK. 

AUBURN: GOS8 & WILLIAMS, buffalo: PHINNEY ic CO. 

newburg: T. 8. QUACKENBUSH. 

1858. 



• F3fT 

VTe have published "or the use of Teachers, 

U A KEt TO THE EXKRCTSKS ,N FaSQX, ELLe' S NkW^U KEN IB 

MaftoD, with occasional Notes .ft References to the itu e,, by 
Louis F^ q uelk-,LL.D., & c." Price 75 ct, The "Key" can be sen 
v mail, by sending the publisher the price in P. 0. stamps. 
Ivison & Phinney, 321 Broadway. 



;ces' 






Kmtbrib according to Act of Congress, in the year 1851, 

BY LOUIS FAS QUELLE, 

to «* Clerk', Offl=a of the District Curt of the United ftata* for lb . 

District of Michigan. 



PRINTED BY 
STEREOTYPED BY ^ BEI)F0 RD & CO. 

thomas b. smith ^ Fra oklin Street 

82 & 84 Beekman Street 



» 



€%t t^ntt nf t^f /niri|j £angtugt 

AND LITEKATUKE, 

THROUGHOUT THE UNITED STATES, 
18 MOST BKBPBCTFULLY DEDICATED 



WOODBURY'S GERMAN SERIES. 



L HEW METHOD WITH GERMAN. 

623 pp. 12mo.— Price, $1 50. 

II. KEY TO NEW METHOD. 

80 pp. 12mo. — Price, 50 cents, 

III. SHORTER COURSE WITH GERMAN. 

230 pp. 12mo. — Price, 75 cents. 

VI. KEY TO SHORTER COURSE. 

80 pp. 12mo. — Price, 50 cents. 

V. ELEMENTARY GERMAN READER. 

250 pp. 12mo. — Price, 75 cents. 

VI. ECLECTIC GERMAN READER. 

280 pp. 12mo.— Price, $1. 

VD. GERMAN-ENGLISH AND ENGLISH-GERMAN READER. 

70 pp. 12mo. — Price, 25 cents. 

vin. w$mh^m$§ Wtut Wittyvht 
jur Srlernung t>er englif^en ©pradje* 

3>m$ $!♦ 



«| H » I I » 



fasqutiit's fxtntl) 0erie0. 



I. FRENCH COURSE. 

500 pp. 12mo.— -Price, $1 25. 

H. KEY TO FRENCH COURSE. 

140 pp. 12mo. — Price, 75 cents. 

HL COLLOQUIAL FRENCH READER. 

260 pp. 12mo. — Price, 75 cents. 

IV. TELE MA QUE. 

890 pp. 12mo. — Price, 75 cents. 

V. NAPOLEON. 

274 pp. 12mo. — Price, 75 cents* 



PREFACE 



The universality of the French language furnishes sufficient 
proof of its utility. Throughout Europe, in many parts of Asia, 
Africa, and America, no education is complete without a knowledge 
of that tongue ; which in more than one countiy of Europe is 
emphatically called " the language." Its merits are becoming so 
well appreciated in tins country, that it is almost unnecessary to 
particularize them, — to speak of its unsurpassed precision and clear- 
ness, and of its capability of expressing every idea in the m jst 
laconic and in the most ornamental style. The language of 
France, that happy compound of the Celtic, the Romanic and the 
Teutonic elements, is equally adapted to the lightest literature 
and to the most profound diction of science. The rich mines of 
French literature, too long but imperfectly known here, offer in 
every department of knowledge treasures equal to those presented 
by the literature of any other nation. 

Many works have been published, in this country and in Eng 
land, to facilitate the acquisition of the French language ; but. 
during his more than twenty years' practice in teaching the mod- 
ern languages, the author of this volume has in vain looked for 
the appearance of a book which, like several of the French gram- 
mars published in Germany, should unite in due proportions the- 
ory and practice. To the high merits of several of the theoretical 
grammars, he bears his most cheerful testimony ; yet, the student 
might go through them, and know but little of the idiomatic or 
Dractical part of the language. Several of the practical works, 
though well executed according to the plans which their authors 
had laid, neglect grammatical rules, if not entirely, at least, far 
too much ; and the student may, after having devoted a long t'ime 
to the mere memorizing of sentences, find himself in possession of a 



VI PREFACE. 

number of set phrases, valuable, it is true, but from which, desti- 
tute of landmarks, the slightest deviation must lead him into 
unknown regions. 

A work which, unit/ng practice with theory, should attempt to 
avoid the difficulties mentioned above, had been long contem- 
plated by the author of these pages, when " Woodbury's New 
Method with the German" made its appearance. Finding in that 
work the two systems, the analytic and the synthetic, beautifully 
lended and well elaborated, he had no hesitation in adopting the 
u New Method," so successfully applied by Mr. Woodbury to 
the German, as the model on which to construct his long intended 
treatise on the French. The result is the present work. 

The work commences with a comprehensive treatise on pro- 
nunciation. The power of the letters, as initials, medials and 
finals, is fully explained under the different letters. Peculiar care 
has been taken to render this part sufficiently full, to provide the 
student with a satisfactory guide and adviser, in the principal 
difficulties of the French pronunciation. The words presenting 
peculiarities of pronunciation, are placed as exceptions* to the rules 
given in this part. 

In the commencement of the First Part of this grammar, the 
rules are given in the most simple form, and the idioms are grad- 
ually introduced and explained ; copious references to the Second, 
or more theoretical Part, render further information easily attain- 
able. After the rules of every lesson, comes a resumi of ex 
amples in illustration of them, as also of preceding ones, con- 
taining often new idioms and conversational phrases. The 
examples on the rules, the resumes and the French exercises 
to be rendered into English consisting almost entirely of ques- 
tions and answers, combine, it is thought, all the benefits pre- 
sented by the practical grammars, while the rules in the lessons, 
and the ease with which reference may be had to the Second 
Part, present all the advantages of the theoretical treatises. It 
will be easily seen that the teacher and student will find here the 
practice, with as little or as much of the theory as they may desire. 

The grammatical rules and idioms are introduced gradually, so 
as not to offer too many difficulties at once. Care has been 
taken no* to present the rules as abstract and arbitrary laws, while 



PREFACE. Vfi 

tlie resemblance or difference of construction between the two 
languages is carefully pointed out. 

Exercises to be rendered into French are placed at the end of 
every lesson. The materials for these are found in the examples 
to the rules, in the resumes, in the French exercises and ia the 
vocabularies preceding the same. Besides all this, in accordance 
with an admirable feature of Mr. Woodbury's system, the student 
is furnished with the means of carrying on in connection with the 
regular course already indicated, a series of exercises in French 
composition, at once easy, interesting, and profitable in the highest 
degree. 

The grouping of the tenses of the verbs and the classification 
of the irregularities, will, it is hoped, simplify this part of gram- 
mar. In the former, the student will see that by learning a tense 
in one conjugation, he often learns it in the others ; in the lattei 
he will perceive that the deviations of the irregular verbs are 
often very trifling and confined to particular tenses. 

An attempt is made in the " Practical Resumes," Lessons 98 
and 99, to simplify as much as possible the somewhat complex 
subject of the past participle. 

The rules of the Second, or theoretical Part, are deduced from 
the most reliable sources ; they are nearly ail illustrated by short 
extracts from the best French authors. This will, it is hoped, 
while giving classical authority to the rules, inspire the student 
with a desire of becom'ng more intimately acquainted with the 
authors from whose works the examples are taken. It will be 
perceived, also, that the sentiments contained in the extracts, have 
not been overlooked. 

In the Second Part, the verbs are given in their fullest form, 
The irregular, defective, peculiar (See § 49), and unipersonal 
verbs are placed alphabetically. 

The author would here respectfully suggest, not with a view of 
offering advice to experienced teachers, but as a mode which he 
has found beneficial in practice, that the student commence to 
learn the verbs from the paradigms in the Second Part as soon as 
he has acquired some little knowledge of the pronunciation, and 
this simultaneously with his learning the lessons of t^e First Part 
The verbs in the French, and in the other, so called Romanic 



languages, are more complicated and require more study than tin 
verbs in the German and other Teutonic languages. Having in 
this manner acquired some knowledge of the verbs, the student 
will, by the time he, in his progress through the first part, reaches 
the groupings of the tenses mentioned above, be able to recognize 
the verbs as old friends, and better to appreciate the classification 
f the irregularities. This course is advised not as indispensable, 
but as beneficial. 

The reading lessons, in prose and in verse, extracted from the 
best sources, and containing grammatical references to both parts 
of the work, will not be unacceptable to the student. A vocabu- 
lary for these lessons is placed immediately after them. 

Among the numerous works which have been consulted during 
the preparation of this grammar, the author would mention with 
gratitude the labors of the French Academy, Laveaux, Lemare, 
Bescher, Girault-Duvivier, Boniface, Beseherelle, Landais, etc. 

With a sincere hope that the present volume m* y assist tha 
American student in obtaining a knowledge of tlie beautiful 
language of France, it is respectfully submitted. 

L R 

University of Michigan, \ 
Ann Arbor, Sept. Ifitt, 1861. § 



GENERAL INDEX. 



A, prep $142,. (2). 

Abbreviations; p. 275. 

Accents, Lesson 2. 

Aeheter, to buy, § 49, (5) ; its gov- 
ernment, L. 50, 1. 

Accorder, s', to agree; said also of 
watches. L. 92, c '3. 

Active verb. $ 43, (2), (3.) 

Active Voice used in French in 
cases where the passive is used in 
English. L. 35, 2; L. 46 3- 6128, 
(5.); §113,(1.) 

Adjectives, § 14, (1). (Jurying 
adjectives, § 14, (2). Degrees of 
signification, % 14, (2). Gender 
and number of, § 15. Formation! 
of feminine of () 16. L. 13. Irregu- j 
lar adjectives, \\1 6 (8). Adjectives! 
having no feminine, fy 16, (9.) 
Plural of, % 17, L. 14. Agree- j 
ment of adjective with nouns, 
§ 18 ; § 83 ; L. 13, L. 14. Relat- 
ing to several nouns, § 18, (3) ; 
L. 14, 1, 2. Determining adjec- 
tives, § 19. Demonstrative, § 20 ; 
§ 93. Possessive, § 21 ; § 94 ; Re- 
marks on, § 95. Agree with ob- 
ject possessed, § 21, (2) ; L. 9, 3. 
Numeral adjectives, § 22 ; place of, 
§ 96. Cardinal adjective, § 22, (1), 
(2), (4); Variations of, § 23; Ob- 
servation on, § 24. Ordinal num- 
bers, § 23, (3), (5). Observation on, 
§ 25. Indefinite adjectives, § 30 ; 
§ 97. Verbal adjectives, syn- 
tax of, § 65. Remarks on feu, 
nu, &c, § 84. Adjective used ad- 
verbially, § 67, (3); § 84, (5). 
Place of; § 85 ; § 86 ; L. 15. Ad- 
jective preceding noun, § 85, (11). 
Adjective differing in meaning be- 
fore and after, § 86. Regimen or 
government ofj § 87 ; § 88 ; § 89 ; 
§ 92 ; L. 79. Adjective requiring 
a different preposition in French 
and English, § 90. 

Adverbs, § 67. Formed from adjec- 
tives, § 68. Degrees of significa- 
tion, § 69. Adverbs forming a 
comparison of themselves, § 70. 



Syntax of, § 136. Place of, § 138 ; 
L. 34 ; L. 41. Observation on, 
§ 137. Adverls of negation, 
§ 138. 

A droits, to the right, L. 70, 6. 

A gauche, to the left, L. 70, 6. 

A fleur de, even with, L. 80, 2. 

A force de, by dint of, L. 80, 2. 

A l'egard de, with regard to, L. 80, % 

A raison de, at the rate of, L. 80, 2. 

Au dehors, outside, L. 80, 2. 

Au dedans, inside, L. 80, 2. 

Au dela, beyond, L. 80, 2. 

Age, avoir used for, L. 20, 6. 

A la campagne, in the country t 

m L. 34, 8. 

A la chasse, hunting, L. 34, 8. 

A la pe he, fishing, L. 34 , 8. 

A 1'anglaise. a la i x^aise, after the 
English, French fashions, L. 69. 3. 

A l'ecole, at school; a l'e^lise, at 
church, L. 25, 6. 

A l'endroit, right side out; a. rea- 
vers, wrong side out, L. 69, 1. 

A l'insu, unknown to, L. 82. 

AJphabet, L. 1. 

Aller, to go, used for proximate fu- . 
ture, L. 26, 1. Aller trouver, to 
go to, L. 26, 3. S'en aller, to go 
away, L. 40 ; 1, 2 ; L. 47, 1. Aller, 
to fit, to sit, L. 47, 2. Aller a pied, 
a cheval^ en voiture, to walk, ride f 
go in a carriage, L. 62, Exam- 
ples. 

Amis (un de mes), a friend of mine, 
L. 67, 3. 

Amuser, (s',) to take pleasure in, etc 9 
L. 38, 6. 

Analogy between many French and 
English w T ords, § 147. 

Answers in French should be ex- 
plicit, L. 24, 12. 

Apporter, amenor, to bring, carry, 
L. 44, 6. 

Approcher, (s' 5 ) to draw near, L. 
39, 6. 

Articles, § 13 ; L. 4, 1, 2. Eiision 
of L. 4, 2 ; § 13, (7); § 146. Con- 
traction of; § 13, (8* ; L. 5, 1 ; L. 25, 
6. English article, a or an, § 14 • 



GENERAL INDEX. 



(9). Recapitulation of articles, 
$ 13. Syntax of, § 77. Use of, 
$ 77, (1), (2), (3). etc. Before 
words used in partitive sense, 
j 78 (2). (3), (4), (5), (6), (7); 
$13.(10); L.6, 1; L. 7, 5 ; L. 8, 
4, L 12, 3 ; L. 29, 8. Article used 
before words in general sense, 
and abstract nouns, $ 77. (1), (2) ; 
L. 8, 2, 3 ; L. 23, 11 ; L. 29 and 30. 
Article omitted before number of 
a sovereign, L. 30, 3. Article le used 
before parts of the body, L. 63, 5. 
Use of article instead of possessive 
adjective ; % 77, (9) ; L. 37 ; 1 ; 
L. 63, 5; L. 66, 3. Repetition, 
of, § 80. Remarks on use of, 
§ 81. Idioms in which the article 
is omitted, § 82. 

Aspirate H, L. 3, 11, — H not aspirate 
in heroine, &c., L. 3, 11, note. 

Asseoir, (s',) to sit down, L. 36, 4. 

Assez, enough ; its place, L. 34, 3. 

Aujourd'hui, to-day, its place, L. 
41,5. 

Au lieu de, instead of, L. 35, 4. 

Au revoir, till I see you again, L. 89. 4. 

Auxiliary verbs, § 43, (8) ; § 46. 
Use of, § 46. Paradigms of, § 47. 

Avancer, to gain, said of clocks, etc., 
L. 92, 1. 

Avant, before, prep. § 142, 1. 

Avoir, to have, used idiomatically 
with quelque chose, chaud, froid, 
4*c., L. 8. 1. With coutume, besoin, 
<K> L. 21, 4. Used for the day 
of the month, L. 19, 6 ; for age. 
L. 20, 6. Avoir lieu, to take place, 
L. 35, 3. Avoir mal, to have a 
pain, etc., L. 66, 1. Avoir desdou- 
leurs, L. 66, 2. Avoir, to hold, 
L. 66, 3. Avoir chaud aux mains, 
L. 66, 3. Avoir beau, to be in vain, 
L. 67, 1. Avoir, used for dimen- 
sion, size, L. 68, 1. Avoir, nega- 
tively, § 47, (2). Interrogatively, 
§ 47, (3). Interrogatively and 
negatively, § 47 (4). 

Be4U, bel, handsome, fine, L. 13, 6. 

Capitals, use of, § 145. 

Cardinal numbers, fy 22, 2;.§ 24. 
Variations of, () 23. Use of, after 
names of sovereigns, L. 30, 3; ^ 26, 
(3). For the day of the month, 
$ 26, (1). 



Cases, § 2. 

Ce, demons, prn. § 87, (6) ; § 108 
$ 116 ; L. 81. Used for he, she 
before etre, L. 82, 1. C est moi 
L. 81, 1. 

— , demons, adj., § 20, (1) j L. 10, 1, 2 

Cedilla, L. 3, 6. 

Ce que, what, L. 31, 4. 

Celui qui, he who, L. 81, 4. 

Chacun, each one, fy 41, (2). 

Chaque, each, \) 30, (4). 

Changer d'habit, to change one's coat; 
changer de maison, to move, L. 58, 
1. Changer, to exchange, L. 58, 2. 

Chez, prep, at the house of, % 142, (3)j 
L. 24, 9. 

Collective nouns, % 3, (5), (6). Num- 
ber of verbs after collective nouns, 
L.85. 

Collocation of words, () 144. 

Combien de temps, how long; com- 
bien de fois % hovj often ? L. 44, 1. 
Combien y a-t-iH how far? how 
long since ? L. 57 ; 4. 

Comparison of adjectives, L. 17. 

Compound nouns, § 3, (7). § 9 ; L. 
59. Gender of, § 5, (15). 

Conditional mode, () 45, 2d, (3). 
Use of, § 125. Formation and 
termination of, L. 62, 1, 2. Irre- 
gularities of, L. 62. 4. Not used 
after si, if L. 62, 6 ; % 125. 

Conjugation of verbs. First conju- 
gation, paradigm, ty 48. Peculiari- 
ties of some verbs, () 49. Second 
conjugation, paradigm, § 50. 
Third conjugation, paradigm, <) 
51. Peculiarities of verbs of 
third conjugation, § 49 ; ty 52. 
Fourth conjugation, paradigm. <J 
53. Passive verbs, paradigm, ty 54. 
Rule, § 55. Reflective v-erbs, para- 
digm, <J> 56. Negative form of, 
^ 57. Interrogative form, {) 58. 
Interrogative and negative form, 
ty 59. Unipersonal verbs, para- 
digm, () 61, 2. Terminations of reg- 
ular verbs, % 60. Table of irregu- 
lar verbs, § 62. 

Connaitre, to be acquainted with, L. 
30, 6. Connaitre quel yii'un a la 
voix, to know some one by the voice, 
L. 87, 4. Connaitre de vue, to 
know by sight, etc., L. 87, 5. Se 
connaitre a, to be a judge of, L. 
87, 6. 

Conjunctions, § 73. Lists of, § 72^ 



GENERAL INDEX. 



2). Syntax of, § 143. Govern- 
ment of, $ 127 ; $ 143. Requir- 
ing subjunctive, § 143, (2) ; infin- 
itive, § 143, ^1) ; conditional or 
indicative, $ 143, (3) ; si. if, § 125, 
(3) ; L. 62, 6. Examples of con- 
junctions, L. 100. 

Conveuir, to be becoming, L. 49, 2. 

Coucher (se), to retire, go to bed, L. 
37,5. 

Bins, prep, in, § 142, (2). 

Davantage, more, note, L. 16. 

Pay of month, week, not preceded 

by preposition, L. 26. 10. 
Degrees of comparison of adjectives 

L. 16; L. 17. 
Deraain, to-morrow, its place. L. 41, 5. 
Demander, to ask, its government, 

L. 50, 1. 
Demettre (se), le bras, &c., to dislo- 
cate one's arm, &c, L. 93, 1. To 

resign a place, L. 93, 2. 
Demonstrative adjective, § 20. See j 

Adjective. 
Demonstrative pronoun, § 36. See 

Pronoun. 
Depecher (se), to make haste, L. 

40, 7. 
Devant, prep, before, § 142, (1). 
Devenir, to become, L. 85, 5. 
Devoir, to owe, expressing future, 

obligation, L. 35. 5. 
Dimension, etc., L. 68. 
Diphthongs, sounds of, L. 2, 14. 
Dont. prn. of whom, of which, L. 

31,8. 

Elision, § 146. Of article L. 4, 2 ; 
% 13. (7). Of pronoun je, L. 4, 5. 
Of preposition de, L. 6, 3. Of ne, 
L. 7, 3. Of pronouns le, la, L. 

,9,2. 

Eloigner (s 1 ), to go from, to leave, L. 
39,6. 

Emparer (s'), to seize, lay hold of, L. 
93, 3. 

Empecher (s'), to kelp, to prevent 
one's self L. 93, 4. 

Emporter, Emmener. to taks away. 
L. 44, 6. 

En, pronoun, § 39, (17) ; § 95, (5) ; 
§110; % 103, (1); $ 104; L. 
15, 7 ; L. 22, 3. Before a past 
participle, % 135, (7) ; L. 42, 11, 
12. Used instead of possessive 
adjective, § 96, (5); L. $6, 1, 2. 



En, prep. § 142, (2) ; L. 34, 5, 6, 7. 

Endormir (s'), to fall asleep, L. 39, 5« 

Ennuyer, to weary, L. 38, 4. S'en- 
nuyer, to become weary, L. 38. 5. 

Entendre parler, to hear about, of, L. 
35, 7. 

Entendre, to understand, L. 96, 3. Se 
faire entendre, to make one's self 
understood, L. 96, 4. Followed by 
i another verb. L. 97, 4. 

Envoyer chercher. to send for. L. 
I ^ 26, 5. 

| Epouser, to marry, said only of par- 
ties, L. 67, 2. 
j Essayer, to try on, L. 47, 4. 

Est-ce-que, prefixed to the verb. § 

A 98 ; L. 25. 

Etre, conjugation of, § 47, (5). 
Number of etre after ce, % 116. 
Used for aller, to go. L. 43, 5. For 
to belong, L. 47, 5 ; L. 91, 2. Etre 
riche de, to be worth, L. 49, 5. 
Etre en retard, to be late, and 
other idioms with etre, L. 91, 1. 
Y etre, to be at home, in, L. 91, 3 

Euphonic t, L. 4, 6. 

Eveiller (s'), to awake, L. 39, 5. 

Every day, tons les jours, L. 26, 8. 

FIcher (se), to be or become angry, 
L. 40, 4. 

Faire. before another verb, to cause, 
to have, L. 32, 3, 4 ; L. 97, 4. 
Faire faire. to have made, L. 32, 4 ; 
L. 63, 1. Faire raccommoder, to 
have mended. Faire la cuisine, 
faire cuire, to cook. Faire bouillir, 
to boil, L. 63, 1. Faire peur, to 
frighten ; faire attention, to pay 
attention; faire tort, to injure; 
faire du mal, to hurt, L. 63, 3. 
-, used unipersonally, in speak- 



ing of the weather, L. 33, 5. 

Falloir, to be necessary, L. 48. 

Feminine terminations, § 6, (2), (3), 

Feu, adj., late, § 84, (1). 

Future absolute, § 45. (2). Use of, 
§ 124. Formation of, () 61 ; L. GO, 
1, 2, 3. Irregularities of. L. 61. 
1, 2, 3, 4. Future anterior, § 45, 
(2), 8. Use of, § 124. Forma- 
tion of L. 60, 4. Future used in 
French where the present is used 
in English, L. 61. 6. 

Gender, $ 4. By the meaning, $ 5 
By the termination § 6. 



xii 



GENERAL INDEX. 



G&iier, to incommode, trouble, &c, L. 
83, 5. Se gdner to constrain or 
troubte one's self, L. 83, 6. 

Gens, people, L. 95, 2, 3, 4. 

Government. See Regimen. 

Gre, will. Bon gre, mal gre, &c. 
L. 88, 5. 

Guere (ne;, but Mile, L. 17, 6. 

Hater (se), to hast m, L. 40, 7. 
Hier, yesterday, its place, L. 41, 5. 
Hour of the day, L. 20 ; L. 92. 

Imperative mode, § 45, 3d, (4). Use 
of, ^ 126. Terminations of, L. 
70, 1. Irregularities, L. 70, 3, 4. 
Two imperatives coming together, 
§ 100, (6). Imperative followed 
by a verb, L. 71, 1. 

Imperfect of indicative, ty 45, (2), 2d. 
Use of, § 119 ; L. 53. Formation 
and termination, L. 53. Irregu- 
larities, L. 54. 

Imperfect of subjunctive, § 45, (5), 
2. Use of, L. 75. Terminations 
of, L. 75, 1. 2, 3. Formation of, 
L. 75, 4. Irregularities, L. 75, 5. 

Importer, n'importe, no mailer, 
qu'importe % what matters ill L. 
94, 1, 2. 

In, dans, en, a, L. 34, 5, 6. 

Indicative mode, () 45. 1st, (2). 

Indicative present, ty 45. (2), 1. Use 
of. {) 118. Terminations, L. 23. 5. j 

Infinitive mode, () 45. 5th, (6). Use j 
of, § 128. Important rules, § 128, 
(4), (5). Verb preceded by an- 
other, put in infinitive, L. 21, 2. 

In order to, pour, L. 28, 8. 

Inquieter, (s'), to be uneasy, L. 93, 5. 

Interjections, () 74. 

Interrogative form of verbs, L. 23, 
9 ; L. 25, 1 ; () 98, (5), (6). 

Interrogative sentences, form of, L. 
6,4; $76, (4), (5); L. 56 ; 1. 

Irregular verbs, L. 24. Table of, 
$62. 

It, coming before verb to be followed 
by /. &c. L. 81. It used absolutely 
before verb to be, L. 81, 1. 

Jusau'ou how far? L. 44, 3. 
Jusqu'a, until, as far as, L. 44, 4. 

Lajsser. to leave, to neglect, to forget 
to bring, L. 86, 4. Followed by 
another verb, L. 97, 4. 



La plupart, most. Number >f verl 

after, L. 85, 3. 
Le. meaning so, it, &c, L. 46, 4, 5. 
Le mien, mine, &c, L. 9, 6 ; L. 12, 6. 
Lequel. &c, which, L. 18, 6 ; L. 31, 7 
Lever (se), to rise, L. 37, 6. 
L'un, Tautre, one another, $ 41, (10) ; 
L'un et Tautre, both, <\ 41, (11) : L. 

19, 3. 

Madame, Mademoiselle, used before 
names of kindred, L. 24, note. 
Before titles, L. 29, 6. Plural o/ 
L. 29, 7. 

Mal, sore, pain, etc., L. 66. Mal de 
dents, toothache, mal de tete, head- 
ache, L. 66. 

Marcher, to walk, L. 36, 6. 

Marier, to marry, to reform the cere- 
mony, L. 67 ; 2. Se A marier, to gel 
married, L. 67, 2, Etre marie, to 
be married, L. 67, 2. See Epouser. 

Measure, weight, price by, L. 68, 3. 

Meme, same, even, tf*c, <\ 30, (5) : 
$ 97, (2).. 

Mener, porter, to take, to carry, L. 
44.6. 

Mettre, to put on, L. 32, 1. Mettre 
le couvert, to lay the cloth, L. 32, 1. 
Mettre a meme, to eatable ; mettre 
pied a terre, to alight ; mettre a. 
la porte, to turnout of doors ; met- 
tre au fait, to acquaint, etc., L. 
69. 1. Se mettre, to dress one'< 
self, to sit down, L. 69, 2. 

Mettre a l'heure, to set a watch, L, 
92,2. 

Midi, minuit, noon, midnight, L. 
20,2. 

Modes, § 45. Indicative, § 45, 1st, 
(2). Conditional, $ 45, 2d, (3). 
Imperative, § 45, 3d, (4). Sub- 
junctive, § 45, 4th, (5). Infinitive, 
§ 45, 5th, (6). Participle, <a 45. 
6th. (7). 

Moi, toi, etc., used instead of nomi- 
native pronouns, L. 17, 6. 

Mon, ma, poss. adj., agree with ob- 
ject possessed, L. 9, 3. 4. 

Monde, world, people, L. 95. 1. Tout 
le monde, every body, L. 95. 

Monsieur, used before names of kin- 
dred, L. 24. note. Before titles, 
L. 29, 6. Plural of, L. 29, 7. 

Month, day of L. 1$, 6; L. 26 
10. 

Mustjalloir, &c., L. 48; $ 62. 



GENERAL INDEX. 



XlB 



Naitm, to hi bm% Je suis ne, I was 
born. L. 43. note. 

Ne, negative,' § 138. Place of, L. 7, 
1. Ne— que, only. L. 19, 2. Ne, 
idiomatic, % 127, 3 ; <j 138, (4), 
(5) ; L. 72, 9. Ne — plus, no — 
more, L. 17, 4. Ne — guere, L. 
17, 5. 

Ni, neither, nor, L. 7, 4. Article 
used or rot after ni, L. 8, 3, 4. 

Ni l'un, ni l'autre, neither, L. 84, 4, 5. 

Negative, second, suppressed after 
certain verbs. § 138 (2). 

Neuter verbs, ty 43 (5). Their aux- 
ffiaiy, L. 43 ; § 46. 

Nominative. See Subject. 

Non, no, Je dis que non, / say no, 
L. 82, 3. 

Notre, votre, our, your, &c., L. 9, 5. 
Le notre, ours, L. 9, 6. 

Noun, ty 3. Proper, (3). Common, 
(4). Collective, % 3. (5), (fi). 
Compound, <) 3, (7). Taken in a 
partitive sense, § 13, (10) ; § 78, 
(1), (2); L. 6, 1; L. 29, 8. 
Taken in a general sense. § 77, 
(1), (2) ; L. 8, 2. Gender by the 
meaning. § 5. By the termina- 
tion, § 6. Plural of, § 8; L. 11. 
- Plural of compound, § 9 ; L. 59. 
Syntax of, § 76. Place of sub- 
ject in affirmative and negative 
sentences, § 76, (1), (2). In inter- 
jected sentences, () 76, (3). In 
interrogative sentences, § 76, (4), 
(5); L. 6, 4; L. 56,1. Place of 
regimen, $ 76, (6), (7), (8), (9) ; 
L. 56, 2, 3. Respective places of 
possessor and object possessed. 
() 76, (10) ; L. 5, 3. Of object and 
its substance, () 76, (11) ; L. 5, 4; 
L. 5i), 6. Of object and its use, 
() 76, (12), (13), (14) ; L. 59, 7. 

Nouveau, nonvel. new, L. 13, 6. 

Nu. bare, adj., % 84, (2). 

Nul, no, % 30, (7). 

Nuile part, no where, L. 25, 8. 

Number, § 1, (5). See Different 
Parts ol Speech. 

Number. See Numeral Adjectives. 
Ordinal adverbs of number, § 29. 

Numeral collective nouns, § 27". 

Numerals, fractions, § 28. 

On, one, veople, they, $ 41. (4), (5) ; 
§113; L. 35, 1/2. 

Ordinal numbers, % 22, (3), (5). Not 



used after names of sovereigns Of 

for days of the mcnth. L. 30, 3 ; % 

26, (1),(3). 
Oter, to take off, to ta%e avian, L. 32, 2. 
Ou, or, agreement of verb with 

nouns connected by, L. 84, 2, 3. 
Oui, yes, Je dis que oui, / say yes, L 

82, 3. 

Paradigms of auxiliary verbs, § 47 
For others, see Conjugations. 

Par ou 7 which yjay ? L 44, 5. 

Participle past, $ 45, 6th, (7). With- 
out an auxiliary, § 66. (3) ; L. 42, 
10; L. 98, 1. Accompanied by 
etre, § 134, (2) ; L. 42, 6 ; L. 98, 3, 
In reflective verbs. () 135. (1). (2) ; 
L. 45, 2; L. 98, 6; L. 99, 4. In 
neuter verbs, L. 98, 3. Accompa- 
nied by avoir, § 134, (3) ; L. 42. 5 ; 
L. 98, 4. Never agrees with indi- 
rect regimen, L, 42, 9. Neuter 
verbs with avoir, () 135, (6); L, 
99, 2. Of unipersonal verbs. L. 
45. 6; L. 99, 3. Never agrees 
with en, % 135. (7) ; L. 42, 11, 12 ; 
L. 99, 8. Followed by an infini- 
tive, % 135, (3) ; L. 98, 7 ; L. 99, 
5. Of passive verbs, L. 46 ; L. 98, 
2. Fait always invariable before 
an infinitive, L. 63, 2 ; L. 99, 7. 
After le feu, % 135, (8). 

present, % 64 ; L. 97. 



Partitive sense, nouns taken in, L. 
6,1; §13,10; % 78, (1), (2); L. 
29, 8. 

Pas, point, not, difference, % 138. (1). 
Place of, L. 7, 1, 2. Omitted when 
a second negative occurs, § 138, 
(3) ; L. 7. 4. Omitted after certain 
verbs, % 138, (2). 

Passer (se), to do without, L. 39, 1. 

Passive voice, § 113 (1). 

Passive verb, % 43 (4) : L. 46. Con- 
jugation of, § 54. Rule, % 55. Its 
participle, L. 46, 2 ; L. 98, 2. 

Past anterior, % 45, (2), 5. Use of 
% 122 ; L. 55. 

Past definite, % 45, (2), 3. Use of 
% 120; L. 51. Its termination! 
and irregularities, L. 52. 

Past indefinite. % 45, (2). 4. Use of, 
% 121 ; L. 41. 

Past of subjunctive, § 45. (5), 3. 

Payer, to pay, its government, L. 50. 

Personne. no body, § 41, (C \\ L. 7, T 

Persons, $31, (3). 



XIV 



GENERAL INDEX. 



Place, respective, of noun, direct 
und indirect regimen, L. 56. 2, 3 ; 
$ 76, (7). (V). (9). In interjected 
sentences. ^ 76, (3.) Of noun in in- 
terrogative sentences, $ 76, (4), 
(5); L. 56, 1 ; L. 6.4. Of adjec- 
tive, L. 8. 5 ; L. 15 ; $ 85 ; § 86. Of 
pronoun subject or nominative, $ 
98. Of regimen pronoun, L. 9, 1 ; 
L. 27; L. 28; $101; 5 102 - 
Place of e?i and y, $ 104 ; L. 57. 
Of adverb, $ 136; L. 34; L. 41, 
4,5. Of verb, $144. 

Plaire (se), to take pleasure in, L. 
40, 6. Used unipersonallly, comme 
il vous plaira, as you please, L. 89, 3. 

Pleuvoir, to rain, L. 33, 3. 

Pluperfect of indicative. $ 45, (2), 6. 
Use of, $ 123 ; L. 55 ; 4. 

of subjunctive, $ 45, (5), 

4; L. 75, 6. 

Plural of nouns, $ 8 ; L. 11. Of com- 
pound nouns, ty 9 ; L. 59. Nouns 
having no plural, $ 10. Nouns 
having no singular, $ 11. Plural 
of adjectives, $ 17 ; L. 14, 3. Moral 
or physical properties of man, 
single in the individual, not put 
in the plural, L. 66, 5. 

Plus de, more than, before a number, 
L. 20 7. 

Plusieurs, several, §30, (9); L. 18, 7. 

Pour, in order to, L. 28, 8. 

Porter, to carry, to loear, L. 23, 10 ; 
L. 44. 6. Se porter, to be, to do, 
L. 36, 3. 

Preposition, $ 71. Table of princi- 
pal, $ 72 Regimen or govern- 
ment of $ 139. Governing with- 
out another preposition, $ 139. 
By means of de, $ 139, 2. By a, 
$ 139. 3. Rules or government 
of, $ 140. Repetition of, $ 141, 
Observations on, $ 142. 

Promener (se), to walk, ride, &c., 
for pleasure. L. 36, 5. 

Prendre, to take, its government, L. 
50,1. 

Prendre garde, to take care ; prendre 
le deuil, to go into mourning; 
prendre la peine, to take the trou- 
ble ; prendre leis devants, to go be- 
fore ; prendre un parti, to take a 
■resolution; prendre du the, du 
cafe, to take tea, coffee, L. 71, 3. 

Prendre le the, to l .oke one's tea, 
note, L. 71. 



Pronouns, $ 31. Personal, $ 32. Re- 
marks on, $ 33. Use of moi, tot, 
instead of subject or nominative 
pronouns, $ 33, (8). etc. Reflective 
pronoun se, $ 33, (12), (13). Soi, 
(14). Possessive pronoun, $ 34. 
Remarks on. () 35. Demonstrative 
pronouns, $ 36. Remarks on, $ 37. 
Ce, demonstrative pronoun, () 37, 
(6); $ 108; $116; L. 81. Used 
for he, she, L. 82. Celui, celle, ce- 
lui-ci, celle-ei, $ 20 ; L. 10. Ceci, 
cela, L. 10. 6. Relative pronouns, 
$ 38. Remarks on, $ 39. En, 
$39, (17); $95. (5) ; $ 110 ; $ 103, 
(1). Place of En,i) 104. Y. $.39, 
(18) ; $ 103 (2). Place of y, () 104 ; 
$ 111. Dont, L. 81, 8. Syntax of 
pronouns, $ 98. Place of subject 
or nominative, $ 98. Repetition 
of, $ 99 ; L. 87. Place of regimen 
pronouns, $ 100 ; L. 9, 1 ; L. 27. 
Respective place of regimen pro- 
nouns, $ 101 ; L. 28. Rule on this 
subject, $ 102. Repetition of regi- 
men pronoun, $ 105 ; L. 27, 7. 
Rules on possessive pronouns, $ 
106. On demonstrative pronouns, 
$ 107. On relative pronouns, $ 
109. 

Que, rel. prn., $ 109. Never sup- 
pressed, L. 19, 1 ; L. 31, 3. Que, 
interrogative, L. 18, 5 ; L. 31, 5. 

Que, conj., never suppressed, L. 19, 
1. Que, idiomatic. L. 82, 3. 

Quel, which., what, $ 30, (10) ; $ 109 ; 
L. 18, 4. 

Quelque, $ 30, (12) ; $ 97 ; L. 18, 
7; L.88. 

Quel — que, quelque — que, govern 
the subjunctive, L. 88, 3. 

Quelque chose, something, anything. 
L. 7 ; 6. Require ^before an ad- 
jective, L. 18, 3. Not used in neg- 
ative sentences, L. 7, 6. 

Quelque part, somewhere, anywhere, 
L. 25, 8. 

Quelqu'uu $ 41, 7. 

Qu'est-ce-que. used idiomatically foi 
what ? L. 82, 2. 

Quiconque, whoever, § 41, (9). 

Quitter, to leave, abandon, &c., It 
86.3. 

Quoi, what, L. 31, 6. 

Qui. who, whom,, used absolutely, $ 
39, (5). 



GENERAL INDEX. 



XV 



Rappeler (se), to remember, recollect, 
L 37, 2. 

Reading lessons, p. 466. 

Recevoir des nouvelles, to hear from, 
■ L. 35. 6. 

Reflective verbs, § 43, (6). Conjuga- 
tion of. § 56 ; L. 36. Often used 
ji French for the English passive, 
L. 36, 2. Its auxiliary is etre, L. 
45; § 46. Its participle, § 135: 
L. 45; L. 98, 5; L. 99,4. ' 

Regarder. tocon-cern, L. 94, 5. 

Rernercier, to thank, Je vous remer- 
cie, eq uivalent to a refusal, L . 89, 2. 

Resume of rules on participle past, 
L. 98; L. 99. 

Rien, nothing, etc., L. 7, 7 ; L. 18, 3. 

Regime, regimen or object, § 2. 
Direct, % 2. (2) ; % 42. (4) ; L. 56, 
2, 3 ; () 76. Indirect, § 2, (3) ; § 
42, (5); L. 56, 2, 3; §76. 

Regimen or government of adjec- 
tives, § 87 ; L. 79. After etre 
unipersonal, § 87, (4) ; L. 79, 3. 
Adjective followed by de, § 88. 
By a, § 89. By different preposi- 
tions in bot> languages, § 90. 
Regimen of verbs. § 129 ; L. 21, 4 ; 
L. 50. Verbs followed by no 
preposition. % 130 ; L. 76, 1. Bv 
a, § 131. By de, 132 ; L. 21, 4"; 
L. 77. By a preposition in French 
and by none in English, L. 78, 1, 
2. By a different prep, in both. 
L. 78. 3. Regimen of prepositions, j 
§ 139 ; L. 80. Important rules on j 
regimen, §92; § 133 ; § 140; L. 
80, 5. 

Regimen of prendre, to take ; voler, 
to steal ; acheter, to buy ; deman- 
der, to ask ; payer, to poAf, L. 50, 1. 

Rejouir (se). to rejoice, L. 40. 5. 

Remettre, to set a dislocated bone, 
&c, L. 93, examples. 

Repetition of demonstrative adjec- 
tives, § 93. Of possessive adjec- 
tives, () 21. (4). Of articles. §*80. 
L. 6, 5. Of subject or nominative 
pronouns. § 99; L. 87. Of regimen 
or objective pronouns, § 105 ; L. 
87. Of adverbs, §137. Of prep- 
ositions, § 141. 
Rester. used unip. to remain, to have 

left, L. 85, 4. 
R«ste de, left, L. 85, 4. 

Retarder, to lose, to put back t said of 
watches, &c., L. 92, 1. 



Savoir, to knew, and connaitre, to 
be acquainted, with, L. 30, 5. 

Seoir, to suit, become, L. 47, 3. Used 
unipersonally, L. 49, 1. 

Servir (se), to use, L. 39, 2. Servir, 
to help at table, L. 89. 1.- 

S'il vous plait, if you please, L 89, 3. 

Si, conj., § 125,(3). Should not pre- 
cede conditional mode, L 62, 6. 

Souvenir (se), to remember, recollect 
L. 37, 2. 

So, rendered by le, L. 46, 4. 

Speech, parts of § 1. (1). 

Stem of a verb, L. 23. 

Subject or nominative, § 2, (1) ; 
§ 42 (2). Verb having several sub- 
jects indifferent persons, L. 83, 2. 
Agreement of verbs with subjects, 
L.83, 1; L. 84; § 114; % 115. 

Subjunctive mode. § 45, 4th. (5). 
Use of, § 127; § 143; L. 72. 8, 9. 
10. Present of, § 45, (5), 1. Ter- 
mination of, L. 72. Subjunctive 
used after verbs expressing con- 
sent, command, etc., followed by 
que, L. 72 8. After severaluniper- 
sonal verbs followed by que. L. 73, 
1. After certain conjunctions, § 
143 ; L. 73. 4. After croire, cspe- 
rer, &c.. interrogative or negative, 
L. 74. 2. After another verb, un- 
certain, and preceded by relative 

. pronoun or a superlative, L. 74. 3, 
4. Past of subjunctive. L. 72, 7. 

Substantive. See Noun. 

Superlative absolute, § 14, (11) ; L. 
17, 1. Superlative relative, § 14, 
(9); L. 17, 2. 

Syntax, § 75. Of noun, § 76. Arti- 
cle, () 77. Adjective, fy 83. Pro- 
noun, § 98: Verb, § 114. Parti- 
ciple, § 134. Adverb. <) 136.' Pre- 
position, § 139. Conjunction, 
§ 143. 

Taire, to conceal, L. 96,5. Se taire, 
to be silent, L. 96, 5. 

Tarder, to tarry, to Ions:, L. 58. 3. 

Tel, such, % 41 (12), (13). Monsieur 
un tel, Mr. such a one, § 41, 13. 

Tenir, to hold, used in the sense of to 
keep. Tenir sa parole, to keep 
one's word,, tenir la porte ouverte, 
to keep the door open, etc., etc, L. 
90, 1. Tenir un langage, to make 
use of language, expressions, etc., 
L. 90, 2. Tenir, to be attached, 



XVI 



GENERAL INDEX 



etc., L. 90, 3 Faire tenir, to for- 
ward, L. 90, 6. Se tenir to re- 
main, to abide by, etc., L. 90, 6. 

Tenses of verbs, () 45. Formation of, 
(<)61). See Different Tenses. 

Terminations of regular verbs, § 60. 
Of indicative, L. 23, 5. Of imper- 
fect of indicative, L. 53, 6. Of 
past definite, L. 51. Of future, 
L. 60. Of conditional, L. 62. Of 
imperative, L. 70. Of subjunc- 
tive, L. 72. Of imperfect of sub- 
junctive, L. 75. Of infinitive, L. 
21, 1. Of present participle, L. 
23, 3. Of past participle, L. 23. 4. 

Times, number of. in a given space, 
L. 68, 4. 

Tout, all, etc., $ 30, (15), (16) ; § 97, 
(4), (5). (6). Tout, every, L. 26, 
3 Tout, the whole, L. 26, 9. 
Tout, entirely, quite, variable by 
euphony, L. 88, 4. 

Tromper, to deceive, L. 38, 1. Se 
tromper, to be mistaken , etc., L. 
38,2. 

Un, une, a, an, one, () 13, (4) ; (11) ; 
L. 6, 2. Not used before nouns 
placed in apposition, L. 30, 4. 

Unipersonal verbs, ty 43, (7). Para- 
digm of, § 61-2. Auxiliary of 
unipersonal verbs, L. 45, 3, 4. 

Valoir, to be worth, L. 49, 3 ; to be 
better, L, 49, 6. 

Venir, to come, used to indicate past 
just elapsed, L. 26, 2. Venir 
trouver, to come to, L. 26. 3. 

Verbal adjectives, § 65 ; L. 97. 

Verbs, % 42. Subject or nominative 
of, § 42. (2). Regimen or object 
of, % 42 (3). Different sort of 
verbs, § 43. Active, % 43. (2), 
(3) ; L. 43. Passive. % 43, (4) ; L. 
46. Neuter, % 43, (6);' L. 43. 



Refiecti7e,§ 41 (6); § 56; L. 36 
2. Unipersonal, % 43, 7 ; $ 61-2. 
Auxiliary verbs, ty 43, (8). Usa 
of, § 46 ; L, 43, 45. Modes and 
tenses of, § 45. See Different 
Modes and Tenses. Irregulai 
verbs. L. 24. Table of, $ 62. Syn- 
tax of the verb, § 114. Agreement 
of the verb with subject, <j 114; 
L. 83 ; L. 84 ; L. 85. Verb after 
a collective noun, ^ 115 ; L. 85, 1 
2. 3. Number of verb after ce 
§ 116. Verb after nouns in ditferen 
persons, § 117. Use of tenses, 
§118. See Different Tenses. Regi- 
men or government of verbs. 
See Regimen. 

Veuillez, be so kind, L. 70, 4. 

Vocabulary to the reading lessons, 
p. 485. 

Voici, here is, L. 34, 4. 

Voila, there is, L. 34, 4. 

Voler. to rob, steal, its government, 
L. 50, 1. 

Vouloir dire, to mean, L. 32, 5, 6. 

(en), to bear a grudge &c.j 

L. 94, 6. 

Vowels, L. 2. 

What. rel. prn., ce que, L. 31, 4 ; qu^ 

L. 31, 5. 
, interrogative, rendered by, 

qu'est-ce-que, L. 82, 2. 
Whole (the), le tout, L. 26, 9. 
Will, used in the sense of wisn, ren* 

dered by vouloir, L. 60. 5. 
Words, variable, §1, (3). Invariable, 

§ 1, W. 

Y avoir, to be there, § 61-2 ; L. 33, 4. 
Used for ago, L. 41, 6. Y avoir , 
followed by the present. when th« 
action continues, L. 57, 2. 

Y,prn.&adv4 39, (18); $ 103 [2> 
Place of , § 104 ; $111: L. 24, 11 



NEW FRENCH COURSE 



PAET FIEST. 





LESSON I. 


LEgON 


I. 




THE 


LETTERS. 




Hie Frjnch alphabet contains twenty-five letters :- 






Old names. 


New names. 


Examples. 


A a 


ah 


ah 


amas. 


B b 


bay 


be|) 


barre. 


C c 


say 


ke$ 


cas, ciL 


D d 


day 


de§ 


dard. 


E e 


a 


a 


effet. 


F f 


eff 


fe 


frere. 


G g 


jay* 


ghe 


grele. 


H h 


ash 


he 


haie. 


I i 


e 


e 


idee. 


J J 


jee* 


3 e 


jais. 


K k 


kah 


ke . 


kali. 


L 1 


ell 


le 


lit. 


M m 


emin 


me 


mat. 


N n 


enn 


ne 


natte. 


o 


o 


o 


orge. 


P p 


pay 


pe 


pere. 


Q q 


ku 


ke 


quadre. 


R r 


err f 


re 


rat. 


S s 


ess 


se 


soie. 


T t 


tay 


te 


tort. 


U a 


ut 


u 


urne. 


Y y 


vay 


V 


vase. 


X x 


eeks 


xe 1 


rixe. 


Y y 


egrec 


egrec 


yeux. 


Z z 


zed 


ze** 


zele. 



W, cabled in French double V, might be added, as many for 
eign words which have that letter have been adopted intc the 
French language. 

* Like s in pleasure. -f Nearly like err in error. 

\ No corresponding sound in English. || Nearly like be in globe. 
\ Nearly like ke and de in cake and grade. The e of the c ther let- 
ters has the same sound. 
Tf kse ** se in rose. 



18 LESSON II. 

LESSON II. LECON JI 

THE VOWELS. 

Vowels are rendered long or short by certain marks placed over 
them These marks, which are three in number, are called ascents. 

The acute accent ( ' ) is placed over the e to give it a sharp or close 
sound (See 4, e.) 

The grave accent ( ' ) is placed over a, e, u, to give to those vowels 
ft grave or open sound. (See 5, e.) 

The circumflex accent ( * ) is placed over a, e, % o, u to give to those 
letters a long and broad sound.* 

1. a like a in mass. Ex. face, face; bateau, boat; tableau, picture; 

patte, paw ; malade, sick. 

2. a like a in bar, far. Ex. age, age; chateau, castle; pate, paste; 

blame, blame; crdne, cranium. 

3. e nearly like u in bud, and frequently silent at the end of poly- 

syllables. Ex. \e, the ; me, me ; te, thee ; que, that ; meuble, 
piece of furniture ; peuple, people ; rime, rime. 

4. e like a in fate. Ex. ete, summer ; amitie, friendship , e'kve, 

raised ; epee, sword. 

5. e like ai in pair. Ex. pere, father ; frere, brother; mere, mother; 

eleve, pupil. 

6. e nearly like e in there. Ex. reve, dream ; extreme, extreme ; 

creme, cream ; crepe, crape; for 'et, forest. 

7. i nearly like i in pin. Ex. mtdi, mid-day ; ' ici, here ; fini, finished; 

credit, credit. 

3. i like ee in bee. Ex. tie, island ; gite, lodging ; epitre, epistle ; 
dime, tithe ; abtme, abyss. 

9. o nearly like ova rob. Ex. robe, robe; globe, globe , cachot,o'wn- 

geon; haricot, bean. 
10. 6 like o in bone. Ex. depot, deposit ; prevot, provost , bientot, 
soon ; suppot, supporter. 

1. u. The exact French sound of this letter is not found in Eng- 
lish. The position of the lips in whistling, is very nearly th 
position which they should have in emitting the French u. Ex. 
wrne, urn ; lime, moon ; hut, aim ; tribw, tribe ; tribirt, tribute ; 
e\u, elected. 

* This accent indicates the suppression of the letter s after the vowel 
on which it is placed, thus : fete, tete, bete, were formerly written, feste, 
teste, teste; the s was not sounded, but gave to the preceding vowel tfcat 
prolonged sound now represented by the circumflex accent. 



LESSON II. 19 

12. i\ is the u with a prolonged sound. Ex. mwre, mulberry ; &u f 

due ; ctu, growth ; brwler, to burn. 

13. y See 28, y. 

THE DIPHTHONGS. 

14. A vowel surmounted by a diaeresis ( * * ) cannot form a diph- 
thong with another vowel, it is pronounced separately. Ex 
hair — Exception : e at the end of a few words, such as cigue, 
hemlock, is silent^ the u being pronounced like u. — E accented 
(e) and followed by a vowel, is pronounced separately. Ex. 
ob<?ir, to obey] geant, giant 

15. ai, ei, preceding a liquid I (see Consonants, 13) do not form a 

diphthong ; a is then pronounced as in mass, and e as ai in 
pair. The i seems merely to indicate the liquid sound of the 
I. Ex. paille, straw ; omlle, ear. 

16. ai is like a in fate. Ex. j'cw, / have; je ferai, I will make; baie, 

bay ; mai, May ; balcw, broom. 

When the diphthong ai is followed by s, d, or t, it assumes a 
broader sound, resembling the French e or ai in the English 
word^>cm\ Ex. j'avcws, I had; je ferais, I should make ; lait, 
. milk ; laid, ugly. 

17. au nearly like oh I hi English. Ex. ta^x, rate ; chaud, warm. 

e preceding au is blended with that diphthong without chang- 
ing its sound. Ex. beau, handsome ; chateau, castle ; tableau, 
picture; eau, water. 

18. ei nearly like a in fate. Ex. beige, serge ; neige, snow ; seigle, 

rye ; reme, queen; pagne, comb. 

19. eu approaches the sound of u in tub. Ex. ]eu, play ; lieu, place : 

ipeu, little ; pewr, fear ; chalewr, heat. Exceptions, in eu, had ; 
yeus, &c, I had; j'ewsse, etc,, I might have; eu is pronounced 
like u alone. 

20. ia nearly like ia in medial. Ex. il \ia, he bound ; il crm, he cried ; 

dialogue, dialogue. 

21. ie like ee in bee. Ex. il lie, he binds ; il etudie, he studies ; harpte, 

harpy ; xme j the soft part of bread. 

22. o nearly like wa in was. Ex. croix, cross ; il boit, he drinks ; 

roi, king. 
13. ou like oo in cool. Ex. dowx, soft ; cowp, blow ; nous, we ; ycus } 
you; cou, neck. 



20 



LESSON II. 



24. ua 

25. ue 

26. ui 

27. uo 

■->8. y 



s 



> I 



8! 



i 



30. 



1. am 



an 



em 



en 



II saiua, he saluted; il remua, he moved; il 

contribwa, 7ie contributed. 
II salne, /ie salutes; il remne, 7ie moves; iJ 

contribwe, he contributes. 
prodnit, produce ; condnite, conduct; \m, htm; 

"bruit, noise ; il rednit, Tie reduces, 
duo, duet. 

when initial, when coming between two consonants, or when 
forming a syllable of itself, has the sound of the French t. 
Ex. style, style; type, type ; yeux, eyes ; Fpres, Ypres ; y, there, 
between two vowels y has the power of two i's, one of which 
forms a diphthong with the preceding, and the other with the 
following vowel ; the syllabic division taking place between 
the i's. Ex. moyen, means ; essayer, to try ; nettoyer, to clean ; 
citoyen, citizen ; abbaye, abbey-; these words are pronounced 
as if they were written moi-ien, essai-ier, nettoi-ier, citoi-ien, 
abbai-ie. The words pays, country ; pay sage, landscape ; pay- 
san, peasant, are pronounced pe-is, pe-isage, pei-san. 

THE NASAL SOUNDS. 

The combination of the vowels with the consonant m or n, 
produces what the French call le son nasal, the nasal sound. 
When the consonant m or n is doubled, or is immediately fol- 
lowed by a vowel* the nasal sound does not take place. 
Ex. innocent, innocent ; immobile, immovable ; inutile, useless ; 
inoui, unheard of. The syllables in and im in the words in- 
nocent and immobile, are pronounced as in English ; the syl- 
labic division of i-nu-ti-le and i-nou-i will explain the reason 
of the absence of the nasal sound in those words. 

ample, ample ; chambre, chamber ; lawipe, 
lamp. 

pronounced «5 an, year; banc, bench; dans, in. man~ 
anh\ nearly J H, teau, clock. 

like an in | membre, limb ; exporter, to carry away, 
pant. P3 trembler, to tremble. 

en, in; dent, tooth; prendre, to take.\ 
rendre, to render. 



* The words ennui, ennuyer, emmener, enivrer, enorgueittir, form excep- 
tions to this rule. The first syllable of ennui, ennuyer, emmener is nasal ; 
$nivrer,enorgueillir are pronounced en~nivrer, en-orgueilir. 

f This combination, it seems to us, rerders the French nasal sound 
more accurately than ang, the g giving ar unpleasant twang not existing 
in the French nasal syllables. 



LESSON III. 



21 



32. en final is sometimes pronounced like en in then. Ex. Eden, 

Eden. 

33. en in the th.rd person plural of verbs is silent. Ex. ils liscnt, 

ils portent, ils donnent ; pronounce ils Hz, ils port, ils donn. 



34. im 1 



in 



somewhat 

► like an in < 

crank. 



85. om 



on 



pronounced 
onh, nearly- 
like on in 

SOng. 

36 um'J somewhat 
I like un in 
un J hunting. 



r timbre, stamp ; impossible, impossible ; im* 
portant, important. 
\in, flax ; pm, pine ; crin. horse-hair ; Yir 
wine. 

tombe, tomb ; comble, height ; sombre, dark 

tomber, to fall, 
mon, my ; ton, thy ; son, his ; bond, bound 

pont, bridge. 
hwmble, humble ; parfwm, perfume. 
un, one; chaewn, each one; importim, inu 

portunate. 



lesson m. 



leqon m 



THE CONSONANTS. 

1. A final consonant is generally silent. 

2. The letters c, f, 1, r, however, when final, are generally pro- 
nounced. 

3. The final consonant of a word is generally carried to the next 
word, when that word begins with a vowel or an h mute. (See 
11, h.) 

4. For illustrations and exceptions, see the several letters. 

5. B initial is pronounced as in English. In the middle of words, 

and at the end of proper names, b is sounded. Ex. a&diquer 
to abdicate, Job, Calefr, &c. B is also pronounced in radoufr, 
refitting of a vessel, and rumfr, (pronounced romb,) point of th 
compass. It is silent in plomft, lead; aplomfr, perpendicular. 
When b is doubled, only one of these letters is pronounced 
Ex. abbe, abbot ; sa&Jat. 

6. C has its proper sound (k) before a, o, u, 1, n, r. Ex. cabane, 

cottage; cou, neck; ecu, crown; endin, inclined; Cneius, 
Cneius ; croire : to believe. 
c before e and i, and with the cedilla (9) before a, 0, or u, has 
the sound of s; ceci,this; cendres, ashes; facade, front; fa- 
c.on w fashion ; recu, re reived. 



22 LESSON III. 

ch is pronounced like sh in she. Ex. char, car; cfraiton, coal ) 
cftangement, change. 

o in the words vermicelle and violoncelle, is pronounced like cL 

ch is pronounced like k in a few words derived from the Greek* 
Ex. c7iaos, anac/ironisme, cTironique, patriarc/iat, crcTiestre, &c, 
In patriarc7ie, arcfteveque, Acheron, ch is pronounced like sh, 
In Mic/iel-Ange, Michael-Angelo, it sounds like k. 

c final is sounded, except when preceded by n. Ex. avec, with ; 
arc, bow; sac, bag; sue, juice; Turc, Turk. 
Exceptions: it is silent in accroc, rent; hroc,jug ; clerc, clerk, 
estomac, stomach ; lacs, snares ; marc, mark ; uorc,pork ; tabas. 
tobacco — ch is silent in almanacL 

c preceded by n is silent. Ex. banc, bench ; fianc, flank. 

c is pronounced like g in second, second, and fecond, fruitful. 

c final is seldom pronounced upon the next word. 

7. D has the same sound as in English. Ex. dame, lady. D is pro- 

nounced in the middle of words. Ex. adverbe, adverb ; ad- 
mirer, to admire. 

a is silent at the end of words, except in prop** routes : as in 
David, David; also in the word sud, south, and in a few for- 
eign words, as le Cid, the Cid; le Talmud, the Talmud, &c. 

d final, coming before a word commencing with a vowel or an 
h mute, assumes the sound of t — un grand homme, is pro- 
nounced grand tomme ; coud-il, does he sew 1 vend-il, does he 
sell 7 are pronounced cou-til, ven-til. 

8. F is pronounced as in English. Ex.fiexre,fever;fiacre, hackney* 

coach. 
f final is generally sounded. Ex. soi/, thirst ; chef, chief; sui/J 

tallow. 

Exceptions: clef, key; chef-d'oeuvre, master-piece; oeu/-dur, 

hard egg ; ceu/-frais, fresh egg ; bceuf-frais, fresh beef; bceu/. 

sale, salt beef. In the plural of the words oeu/ and boeu/, f 

is always silent. 

The f of neu/, nine, is silent before a consonant, and scunds 

like v before a vowel or h mute; neu/ livres, pronounce neu 

livres — neu/ hommes, neu/ enfants, pronounce neu-vomme, 

neu~venfants. 
& G is always hard (that is like g in game) before a, o, u. Ex. 

garde, guard ; gx>nd, hinge; aiga, acute. 
g before e and i has always the soft sound, (that of s in pleasure) 

Ex. gerbe, sheaf; g-endre, son-in-law ; gibier, game ; giiei, vest. 
gua, gu<r, gue, gui, are pronounced gha, gho ghe, ghi } L e., the 



LESSON III. 



23 



u is silent. Ex. il Vegua, he bequeathed; leguons, let us 
bequeath; guerre, war, guitare, guitar. 
Exceptions : In aiguille, needle, Guise, &c, the two vowels 
are sounded. The we of gue final is mute, unless a diaeresis 
is on the e, as in cigue, hemlock. 

10 gn is pronounced like ni in union. Ex. regne, reign ; peig7?^ 
comb ; daigTier, to deign ; saigTzer, to bleed. 
Exceptions : (xnide, Prog"?ze, stag-want, ignee, &c. 
g final takes the sound of k before a vowel or an h mute;— 
sang- humain, human blood, is pronounced san kumain. 

11. H is mute or aspirate — h mute (having of itself no sound) when 
preceded by a word subject to elision, (§ 146) is treated as 
a vowel — h aspirate is always initial, the breathing or aspi- 
ration is very sligh* but not entirely absent, as is advanced 
by some grammarians. 

As it is important, on account of elision and of the pro- 
nunciation of the last consonant of a word preceding h, to 
know when it is aspirate or not, we will give a list of the 
words which commence with h aspirate, omitting however 
the derivatives and a few words seldom used. 





Hableur 


Haras 


Have 


Hors 




Haehe 


Harasser 


Havre 


Hotte 




Hagard 


Harceler 


Havresac 


Hottentot 




Haie 


Hardes 


Heler 


Houblon 




Haillons 


Hardi 


Hennir 


Houille 




Haine 


Harem 


Henri 


Houiette 




Hair 


Hareng 


Heraut 


Houppe 




Haire 


Hargneux 


Herisson 


Houri 




Halage 


Haricot 


Herisser 


Houppelande 




Hale 


Haridelle 


Heron 


Housse 




Halle 


Harnais 


Heros* 


Houx 




Hallebarde 


Harpe 


Herse 


Huche 




Hallier 


Harpie 


Heurtei 


Huee 




Halte 


Harpon 


Hibou 


Huguenot 




Hamac 


Hasard 


Hideux 


Huit 




Hameau 


Hater 


Hierarchie 


Humer 




Hanche 


Hausser 


Hollandef 


Huppe 




Hangar 


Haut 


Homard 


Hure 




Hanneton 


Haut-bois 


Honte 


Hurler 




Hanter 


Hautesse 


Horde 


Hussard 




Harangue 








12. J 


is pronounced 


like s in pleasure. Ex. your, day 


; jamais, never. 



* The h of the other words having the same derivation, heroine, noro- 
isme, heroique, &c., is not aspirated. 

f We say, however, du fromage d'Hollande, I hitch cheese; de la toilo 
d'Hollande, Dutch linen. 



24 LESSON III. 

K sounds like k in English. Ex. kan, khan; kilogramme, 4 
French weight. 
13. L in the combinations il, ill, not initial, but in the middle or at 
the end of words, has the liquid sound found in the English 
word brilliant. Ex. paiZZe, straw ; fille, daughter ; baiZ, lease 
travaiZ, labor. 

Exceptions: iil, thread; BresiZ, Brazil ; Nil, Nile; miZ,mt#e 
th/rusand; civil, civil; profiZ, profile ; yille, town, and its deriv 
atives ; tranquiZZe, tranquiZZite, &c, quiet, quietness, <SfC 

I is silent in bariZ, barrel ; cheniZ, kennel ; coutiZ, ticking ; fiZs 
son ; fourniZ, bakehouse ; fusiZ, gun ; griZ, gridiron ; outiZ, tool 
persiZ, parsley. 

II in SuZZy h s the liquid sound — 1 is silent in pouZs, pulse; and 
gentiZshommes, noblemen. 

The 1 marked as silent in the words above, is never carried to 
the next word. 
14L M ) initial are pronounced as in English. For these letters in 

15. N S combination with the vowels, see nasal sounds, (page 20.) 

Final consonants after m and n are generally silent. Ex. temps 
weather ; je romps, je prendfs, I break, I take. 

m is silent in condamner, to condemn; automne, autumn. 

n final, and not belonging to a noun, is carried to the next word, 
when this word begins with a vowel or an h mute, if the two 
words are closely connected. Ex. un bon enfant, a good child m 
mow ami, my friend; pronounce bon nenfant, mon nami. 

16. P is generally sounded as in English. P is however silent in 

bapteme, baptism ; ba^tiser, to baptize ; eompte, account ; 

Compter, to subdue ; exempt, exempt ; sept, seven ; septiem*, 

seventh. 
p final is silent. Ex. coup, blow ; drap, cloth. 

Exceptions : cap, cape ; and proper names generally. 
p final is not carried to the next word. 
7. Q qu is pronounced like k. Ex. question, question ; qu\,wfo> 

qusMte, quality : — ue final is silent after q. Ex. pratique, pro, 

tice. 

Exceptions: qu is pronounced as in English in a^watiqut, 

equ&tem, equestrc, e^witation, equation, in-quarto, ligwefiei > 

gt/adragenaire, gwadruple, qu&drune&e, Qwinte-Curce, Quia 

tilien, quintuple, qumnsl. 
q, final is sounded. It is however mute in co^-d'Inde, turkey • 

and in cinq, five, when followed by a word commencing with § 

consonant. 



LESSON III. 25 

18. E. The French r is pronounced with greater force than the 
English. 

rr is pronounced like r. Ex. arriver* to arrive ; arranger, to ar- 
range. 

Exceptions : in the future and conditional of acquerir, to ac- 
quire ; courir, to run, and mourir, to die, the two r's are dis- 
tinctly sounded. Ex. je courrai, je mourrai, je courrais, je 
mourrais, j'acquerrais, &c. 

r final is pronounced when preceded by a, i, o, u. Ex. car, for 
finir, to finish; cor, hunting horn; pur, pure. 
Exception : Monsieur, Sir. 

r preceded by e is generally sounded in monosyllables. Ex. 
fer, iron ; cher, dear. 

r preceded by e is silent in words of more than one syllable. 
Ex. parler, to speak ; manger, to eat ; chercher, to seek. 
Exceptions : r is sounded in amer, belveder, cancer, cuiller, 
ether, enfer, hiver, Jupiter, Lucifer, magister. 
The final r of an infinitive is not often carried to the next 
word in conversation. In serious reading it is generally 
carried to the next word. 
19. S has generally the same sound as in English. 

s between two vowels is pronounced as in the English words 
rose, prose. Ex. base, base ; vase, vase ; pause, pause ; chose, 
thing. 

Exceptions: s in words composed of a particle, or an adjective, 
and a word commencing with s, preserves the hissing sound. 
Ex. parasol, parasol; vraisemblable, likely; desuetude, desue- 
tude; prese ance, precedence, &c. 

sc is pronounced as in English. Ex. scandale, scandal; science, 
science. 

sch is pronounced like sh, in the words scMsme, sc7zismatique, 
scMste, scherif, sch eik, sc Aelling — It is pronounced sk in 
scheme. 

g final is generally silent Ex. pas, step ; niais, but ; jus, juice. 
Exceptions : s is pronounced in aloes, aloes ; atlas, atlas ; 
blocus, blockade; cens, census ; en sus, besides ; gratis, gra- 
tis; lapis, lapis ; iris, iris ; mai's, maize ; mceurs, manners ; 
prospectus, prospectus ; Rheims, Rheims ; vis, screw ; and in 
Latin and Greek names ending in s — Delos, Romulus, &c. 

8 is carried to the next word when the word commences with 
a vowel or an h mute ; it has then the sound of z — bons 
amis, good friends, is pronounced bon zami. In conversation 
2 



26 LESSON III. 

the final s of verbs is not generally carried to the next 
word. 
30 T is pronounced like t in table. Ex. fard, late ; tort, -.vrng. 

t has the sound of the English c in cedar, in the combinations 
tial, tiel, tion. final or in the middle of words. Ex partial, 
partial ; essentiel. essential ; observation, observation. Words 
in which those terminations are preceded by s or x, are ex- 
cepted; the t therefore in bastion, question, mixtion, &c. 
retains its proper sound. 

t has the sound of c in cedar, in the words ineptie, absurdity , 
minutie, minutia ; prophetie, prophecy ; and in words ending 
in atie, derived from the Greek, and having in English the ter- 
mination cy, aristocratie, democratic, &c. ; also in initier, to 
initiate. 

In o flier words ending in tie, and in those ending in tie and 
tier, the t has its proper sound. Ex. garantie, guarantee ; 
moitie, half; amitie, friendship ; chantier, dock-yard; metier, 
trade. 

th sounds always like t alone. Ex. the, tea ; these, thesis. 

t final is generally silent. Ex. hut, aim ; mot, word ; sort, fait* 
Exceptions: t is sounded in bruZ, chuZ, correcr, o\ot, direc/, 
deficit, faZ, exac^, net, preterit, suspect, strict, &c. 

t in sept, huit, vingt, is sounded except when it comes before 
a consonant. 

t is seldom carried to the next word ; t in et (and) is always 
silent. 

21. V is a little softer than the English v. Ex. riande, meat ; roile, 

veil. 

22. W which is found only in foreign words, is pronounced like v. 

Ex. Wurtemberg, Westphalie. In a few other words it has 
the pronunciation of the English w. Ex. whig, whist. 

23. X initial, which in French is only found in a few words, is pro- 

nounced like gz. Ex. #ylon, cotton-plant ; Xavier, Xenophon, 

Xante, Xantippe. 

Xerxes is pronounced gzercess. 
x following an initial e, and preceding a vowel or an h, is also 

sounded like gz. Ex. e.zil, exile; examiner, to examine; ea> 

hiber, to exhibit. 
x not following an initial e, but coming between two vowels, 

sounds like ks. Ex. axe, axis; luxe, luxury ; Alegar dre, 

Alexander ; maxim e, maxim ; sexe, sex 
i sounds like ss in the following words : six, six dbf, ten , 



LESSON III. 27 

soirante, sixty; Bnurelles, Brussels; Au.rorine, Au^erre, 

Aitf-en-Provence, 

In siarieme, dkcieme, deua;ieme, dix-sept, dia>huit, diaMieu£ 

it is pronounced like z in zone. 
x final is generally silent. Ex. prior, price ; cro>, cross ; voLr, 

voice. 

Exceptions : x is sounded like ks at the end of names of 

Greek and Latin origin. Ex. Ajao?, Sty a;, etc. In Ai#-la-Cha- 

pelle it has the same sound. 

The x of deua?, sia?, di,r, coming before a consonant is silent, 

except in the cases mentioned above ; i. e., in diar-sept, dia> 

huit, diavneuf. 
x when carried to the next word, sounds like z. 
24 Z sounds as in the English words zinc, zone. Ex. zele, zeal g 

zenith, zenith. 
z final is generally silent. Ex. nez, nose; chez, with, dfc. , 

allez, go. 

Exceptions : gaz, gas. In Metz, Suez, &c. it sounds like ss. 
z final is generally carried to the next word when that word 

commences with a vowel, or an h mute. 

Exercise 1. — The Vowels. 

(a) Table, table ; fable, fable ; chat, cat ; eclat, splendor ; arbre, 

tree ; tard, late ; balle, ball. 
(&) ame, soul; blame, blame; batir., to build ; pate, paste; age, 

age ; mat, mast. 
(e) me, me; de, of; que, that; elle, she; malle, mail; parle, 

speak; fourche, fork; salle, TiaZZ. 
(e) pre, meadow ; alle, gone; donne, given; passe, passee, past 

eleve, raised ; armee, army. 
(e) tres, very ; apres, after ; achete, buy ; mere, mother ; espere, 

hope; leve, raise; chere,/are; chevre, goa*. 
(e) meme, same ; careme, Lent ; arret, arrest ; tempete, tempest ; 

tete, head; bete, beast. 
(i) lit, bed; dit, said; dire, to say ; lire, to read; lime, file ; cire, 

wax ; rite, rite. 
(i) diner, to dine ; ile, isle ; dime, tithe ; abime, abyss ; epitre, 

episCe ; gite, lodging. 
(o) mot, word ; cachot, dungeon ; repos, rest ; trot, trot ; globe, 

globe ; carrosse, coach. 
(6) t6t, soon; plutot, rather; roti, roast meat; dep6t, deposit; 

prevot, provost. 



21 LKSSON III. 

(u) Ira, drank; cru, believed; du, of the; elu, ilected ; menu^ 

minute; pre^u, foreseen ; ecu, crown. 
(u) chute, fall; brulot, fireship ; mur, ripe; dument, duly ; il 

f ut, he ?night be ; nous fumes, we were. 

The Diphthongs. 

(ai) je donnai, I gave ; je parlerai, J will speak; j'allai, I went; 

je cherchai, / sought ; je menai, / led ; j'irai, J will go. 
(ais) je donnais, / was giving ; je parlerais, I would speak ; j'allais, 

J was going ; je cherchais, J was seeking ; je menais, J was 

leading ; j'irais, I would go. 
(au, eau) maux, evils ; chameau, camel ; chevaux, horses ; beau, 

handsome ; nouveau, new ; troupeau, flock. 
(ei) neige, snow ; veine, vein ; reine, queen ; Seine, Seine ; je 

peigne, I comb ; sein, bosom. 
(eu) peu, little; peur,/ear; leur, their; il meurt, he dies; soeur, 

sister ; ceuf, egg ; lueur, light. 
(eu) like u. J'eus, / had ; tu eus, thou hadst ; il eut, he had ; eu, 

had. 
(ia) liant, binding ; il lia, he bound ; partial, partial ; il cria, he 

cried ; il nia, he denied ; il pria, he prayed. 
(ie) garantie, guarantee ; il prie, he prays ; il lie, he binds ; il rie 

he may laugh ; il nie, he denies. 
(oi) loi, law ; moi, me ; il voit, he sees ; il boit, he drinks ; ro:, 

king ; droit, rig*/i^ ; il croit, he believes. 
(ou) bout, end ; il coud, he sews ; il moud, he grinds ; coupe, cup; 

loup, wolf; coup, Z>Zow ; croute, crust. 
(ua) nuage, cloud; nuance, shade ; il salua, he saluted ; il remua, 

Tie moved ; il contribua, /ie contributed. 
(ue) nue, cloud; lue, f. read; recue, f. received; il salue, /ie so- 

jwtes ; il remue, he moves. 
(ui) lui, him ; luisant, shining ; cuire, to bake ; cuit, bahd ; nuire, 

to injure ; produire, to produce. 
(y) thyrse, thyrsus ; type, type ; style, style ; yeux, eyes ; Yvetot, 

Yvetot ; payer, to pay ; envoyer, to send ; abbaye, abbey , 

essayer, to try ; pays, country; pay sago, landscape; paysi^ 

peasant. 

Exercise 2. — The Nasal Sounds. 

feet 

30 Innocent, innocent ; inutile, iseless ; diner, dinner ; immortel, 

immortal ; une, one ; lune, moon ; dunes, downs. 



LESSON III. 29 

fee 

31. am ambre, amber; chambre, chamber; A^am Adam; ramper, to 

creep ; ample, ample ; lampe, lamp, 

an tante, aunt ; manteau, cloak ; plan, pear, ; plancher, floor ; 
rang, rank ; sang, blood ; enfant, child. 

em remplir, to fill ; temple, temple; temps, weather; assemblee, 
assembly ; trembler, to tremble ; membre, dmb. 

en sentir, to feel ; tente, tent ; pente, dechviiy ; je rends, I ren- 
der ; je prends, I take; je sens, I feel. 

32. en amen, amen ; specimen, specimen ; examen, examination. 

33. en ils donnent, they give; ils parlent, they speak; i2s ecrivent 

they ivrite ; ils cherchent, they seek. 

34. im simple, simple; timbre, stamp; daim, deer; faim, hunger 

imposteur, impostor ; important, important. 
in fin, fine ; pain, bread ; demain, to-morrow ; crin, horse-hair ; vin 
wine ; bain, bath; teindre, to die; peindre, to paint. 

35. om sombre, dark ; nora, name ; ombre, shadow ; tombe, tomb , 

nombre, number; comble, height. 
on pont, bridge ; honte, shame ; montre, watch ; raison, reason , 
maison, house ; fondre, to melt ; non, no. 

36. um uumbre, humble; parfum, perfume ; humblement, humbly. 
un lundi, Monday; brun, brown; alun, alum; emprunter, to 

borrow ; importun, importunate ; un, one. 

Exercise 3. — The Consonants. 

lb) baume, balsam ; blessure, ivound ; brun, brown ; absolution. 
absolution ; abstrait, abstract ; abbaye, abbey ; Jacob, Jacob. 

(c) cacher, to conceal ; coin, corner ; decuple, decuple ; cire, 
wax ; cinq, five ; chercber, to seek ; je cache, I conceal ; pa- 
triarche, patriarch ; patriarchat, patriarchate ; chambre, cham- 
ber ; arche, arch; changer, to change; orchestre, orchestra; 
charbon, coal ; sac, bag ; sue, juice ; clerc, clerk ; banc, bench ; 
Ranc, flank ; second, second; fecond, fruitful ; fa^on, fashion ; 
recu, received. 

(d) daim, deer ; don, gift ; admirer, to admire ; bord, border; nord, 
north; sud, south; Obed, Obed; Talmud, Talmud; grand 
age, advanced age ; rend-il, does he render ? prend-il, does he take ? 

(f) foin, hay; faim, hunger; froid, cold; href, short; soif, thirst; 
suif, tallow ; clef, key ; chef, chief; chef-d'oeuvre, master- 
piece; oauf, egg; ceuh^eggs; ceuf frsds, fresh egg ; boeuf, ox, 
beef; boeufs, oxen ; neuf maisons, nine houses ; neuf chevaux, 
nine horses ; neuf amis, nine friends. 

(g) g a g er > to bet ; gosier, throat ; gibier, game ; guide, guide ; 



80 LESSON III 

• ligue, league; il ligua, he leagued; nous liguons, we league, 
aiguil e, needle ; aiguil Ion, goad ; eigue, hemlock ; digne, 
worthy ; regne, reign ; Espagne, Spain ; Pologne, Poland ; 
brugnon, nectarine ; soignant, taking care ; joignant, joining ; 
stagnant, stagnant ; rang honorable, honorable rank. 

|h) hate, haste; honte, shame; haut, high ; herbe, herbage ; al- 
manach, almanac. 

( J) jujube, jujube ; jeune, young ; juger, to judge ; jurer, to swear 
jonc, rush ; joindre, to join ; dejeuner, to breakfast ; Juif, Jew 
jeu, play. 
(1) lame, blade; loi, law; illegal, illegal; illicite, unlawful, 
paille, straw; soleil, sun ; pareil, similar ; bail, lease; railler, 
to rail; souiller, to soil; caille, quail; canaille, rabble; ville, 
town; village, village; mille, mile, thousand; peril, peril; 
pointilleux, punctilious; baril, barrel; fusil, gun; gentil- 
homme, nobleman; gentilshommes,no6Zeme7i; bouteille, bottle. 

Exercise 4. — The Consonants Continued. 

(nn) mon, my; marge, margin ; nom, name ; champ, field; moine, 
monk; prompt, quick; condamner, to condemn ; f aim, hunger ; 
son argent, his money ; bon appetit, good appetite ; lien eiroit, 
close connecti/m. 

(p) partir, to go away ; coup, blow ; temps, weather ; drap, cloth ; 
sept, seven; bapteme, baptism; cap, cape; Alep, Aleppo. 

(q) querir, to fetch ; quitter, to leave ; musique, music ; logique, 
logic ; quarante,/orfr/; quoi, what; aquatique, aquatic; Quin- 
tilien, Quintilian; cinq, five; cinq llvres, jive books. 

(r) ranger, to arrange; errer, to err; arriver, to arrive; verser, 
to pour; je courrai, I will run; je courais, I was running; 
jouir, to enjoy ; car, for ; plaisir, pleasure ; amer, bitter ; parler 
to speak; changer, to change; fer, iron; hiver, winter. 

(s) silen }e, silence ; soin, care ; sans, without ; base, base , rose, 
rose , chose, thing ; observer, to observe ; rasoir, razor ; para 
sol, parasol ; science, science ; schisme, schism ; scie, saw 
scheme, scheme ; gras, fat ; pas, step ; lambris, wainscot 
Barras, Barras ; Romulus, Samos ; vous avez, you have 
nous aimons, we love. 

(t) tiers, third; tiare, liar a; tort, wrong; portion,* portion; 



* T, in the English words corresponding to the French words, in which 
this letter is pronounced like c in cedar, has generally the sound of sh ; 
as in motion, partial, &c. 



LESSOR IV. 31 

sanction, sanction; essentiel, essential; partialite, pa ^iality ; 
section, section; question, question; bastion, bastion; obser- 
vation, observation; minutie, minuiia; democratic, democracy, 
amitie, friendship ; initiation, initiation; mot, word; lot, lot; 
sept, seven; sept livres, seven books; et, and; vingt livies, 
twenty books, 

voir, to see; va.,go; leve, raise; lever, to raise; visage, face 
vive, f. lively. 

Westphalie, Weimar, Wurms, Wurtemberg. 
xyl on, cotton plant; Xenophon; exiler, to exile; excuser, to 
excuse ; luxe, luxury ; Alexandre, Alexander ; maxime, 
maxim ; soixantieme, sixtieth ; six, six ; sixieme, sixth ; six 
livres, six books ; Bruxelles, Brussels ; Aix-la-Chapelle ; 
dix, ten ; Phenix ; Ajax ; deux hommes, two men ; dix amis, 
ten friends. 

zele, zeal; zone, zone; zoologie, zoology; vous lisez, you 
read; nez, nose; Metz; allez-y, go there; venez ici, come 
here. 



LESSON IV. LEQON IV. 

i. !n French the article [$ 13, (2.)] has, in the singular, a dis- 
rinct brm for each gender. Ex. 

Le fils, the son ; La fille, the daughter, the girl ; 

Le frere, the brother; La soeur, the sister. 

2. Before a word commencing with a vowel or an h mute, [L. 3, 11,] 
the article is the same for both genders. [§ 13, (7.)] Ex. 

L'aieul, the grandfather ; L'aieule, the grandmother ; 

L'hote, the landlord; L'hotesse, the landlady. 

3. There are in French only two genders, the masculine and the 
feminine. [§ 4.] Every noun, whether denoting an animate or an 
inanimate object, belongs to one of these two genders. 

Masc. L'homme, the man; Le lion, the li-on; 

Le livre, the book; Le papier, the paper; 

L'arbre, the tree; Le bois, the wood; 

Fem. La femme, the woman; La lionne : the lioness 1 

La table, the table ; La feuille, the leaf; 

La plume, the pen : La porte, the d*>r. 



32 



LESSON IT. 



4. Avoir, to have, in the Present op the Indicative. 



J'ai, 

Tuas, r}33.(l.)(2.)] 
II a, 

Elle a, 
Nous avons 
Vous avez, 
lis out, m. 
Elles out, f. 



Affirmatively. 

I have ; 



Interrogatively. 



T/iou hast ; 
He has ; 
She has; 
We have ; 
You have; 
They have ; 
They have ; 



Ai-je * ■ 
As-tu 7 
A-t-il 1 
A-t-ellel 
Avons nous 7 
Avez vous 1 
Ont ils % m. 
Ont elles ? f. 



Have I? 
Hast oiou? 
Has he ? 
Has she ? 
Have wc ? 
Have you ? 
Have they ? 
Have they? 



5. The e of the pronoun je is elided when that pronoun comes 
befo-e a vowel or an h mute. [} 146.] 

6. In interrogative sentences, when the third person singular of a 
"'erb ends with a vowel, and is immediately followed by a pronoun, a 
/, called euphonic, must be placed between the verb and the pronoun. 

A-t-il 1 Has he? A-t-elle? Has she? 



Eesume of Examples. 



Le pere a la viande, vous avez le 

cafe, et j'ai l'eau. 
L'homme a le pain, l'enfant a le sel, 

et nous avons le poivre. 



The father has the meat, you have tlu 
coffee, and I have the water. 

The man has the bread, the child has 
the salt, and we have the pepper. 



Avoine, f. oats; 
Ble, m. wheat ; 
Boucher, m. butcher ; 
Boulanger, m. baker ; 
Cheval, m. horse; 
Et, and; 
Farine, f. flour ; 
Frere, m. brother ; 
Livre, m. book ; 



Exercise 5. 

Madame, Madam ; 
Mademoiselle, Miss ; 
Meunier, m. miller; 
Monsieur, Mr. Sir; 
Non, no ; 
Oui, yes ; 
Pain, m. bread ; 
Plume, f. pen ; 



Qui, wJw; 
Sel, m. salt ; 
Seulement, only ; 
Table, f. table ; 
The, m. tea ; 
Viande, f. meat; 
Vin, m. wine ; 
Vinaigre, m. vinegc 



1. Qui a le pain? 2. Le boulanger a le pain. 3. A-t-il la farine ? 4. 
Oui, Monsieur, il a la farine. 5. Avons nous la viande ? 6. Oui, Monsieur, 
vous avez la viande et le pain. 7. Le meunier a la farine. 8. L« 
boulanger a la farine et le ble. 9. Avons ncus le livre et la 
plume ? 10. Oui, Mademoiselle, vous avez le livre et la plume 
11. Le boucher a la viande. 12. Le meunier a la viande et j'ai 
le cafe. 13. Avez vous l'eau et le sel ? 14. Oui, Monoieur, noua 
avons l'eau, le sel et l'avoine. 15. Avons nous le the ? 16. Non, 
Monsieur, la fille a le the, le vinaigre et le sel. 17. Ai-je le vin? 

18. Non, Madame, vous avez seulement le vinaigre et *a viande. 

19. Avez vou3 la table? 20. Oui, Madame, jV la tf ble. 



LESSOR v. 33 



Exercise 6. 



1. Have you the wheat? 2. Yes, Sir, I have the wheat 3. Wno 
nas the meat ? 4. The butcher has the meat and the salt. 5. Has 
he the oats ? 6. No, Madam, the horse has the oats. 7. Have we 
*he wheat ? 8. You have the wheat and the flour. 9. Who has the 
Bait? 10. I have the salt and the meat. 11. Have we the vinegar 
the tea and the coffee? 12. No, Sir, the brother has the vinegar 
13 Who has the horse ? 14. The baker has the horse. 15. Have 
we the book and the pen ? 16. No, Miss, the girl has the pen, and 
the miller has the book. 17. Have you the table, Sir? 18. No, Sir, 
I have only the book. 19. Who has the table ? 20. We have the 
table, the pen, and the book. 



LESSON V, LEgON V. 

1. The article le, with the preposition de preceding, must be con- 
tracted into du, when it comes before a word in the masculine singu- 
lar, commencing with a consonant or an h aspirated. [L. 3, 11. $ 13, 
(8.) (9.) 

Du frere, of the brother ; Du chateau, of the castle ; 

Du heros, of tlie hero / Du chemin, of the way. 

2. Before feminine words, and before masculine words commencing 
with a vowel, or an h mute, the article is not blended with the pre- 
position. 

Dela dame, f. of the lady; De l'amie, f. of the female friend / 

De l'argent, m. of the money ; De l'honneur, m. of the honor. 

3. In French, the name of the possessor follows the name of the 
object possessed. [} 76, (10.)] 

La maison du medecin, The physician's house ; 

L'arbre du jardin, The tree of the garden ; 

La lettre de la soeur, The sister's letter. 

4. The name of the material of which an object is composed follows 
always the name of the object; the two words being connected by 
the preposition de. (d? before a vowel or an h mute.) [J 76. (11.)] 

L'habit de drap, The cloth coat ; 

La robe de soie, The silk dress : 

La montre d'or, T?>£ gcli watch. 

2* 



34 



LESSON V. 



Resume of Examples. 



Le tailleur a Phabit de drap du 

medecin. 
Vous avez la ettre de la sceur du 

boulanger. 
A-t~il le livre de la dame 1 



The tailor has the physician's cloth 

coat. 
You have the baker's sister's letter, 

(the letter of the sister of the baker.) 
Has he the lady's book ? 



Exercise 7. 

Argent, m. silver, money ; Couteau, m. knife; 
Bas, m. stocking ; Cuir, m. leather; 

Bois, m. wood ; Dame, f. lady ; 

Chapeau, m. hat; Drap, m. cloth; 

Charpentier, m. carpen- Foin, m. hay ; 

ter ; Habit, m. coat ; 

Cordonnier, m. shoema- Laine, f. wool, woowen ; 

ker ; Mais, but ; 

Cototi, m. cotton ; Or, m. gold ; 



Porte-crayon, m. pencil 

case ; 
Robe, f. dress; 
Satin, m. satin; 
Soeur, f. sister ; 
Soie. f. silk; 
Soulier, m. shoe; 
Table, f. table ; 
Tailleur, m. tailor. 



1. Avez vous la montre d'or? 2. Oui, Madame, j'ai la montre d'or 
et le chapeau de soie. 3. Monsieur, avez vous le livre du tailleur 1 
4. Non, Monsieur, jai le livre du medecin. 5. Ont ils le pain du 
boulanger ? 6. Ils ont le pain du boulanger et la farine du meunier. 
7. Avez vous le porte-erayen d'argent? 8. Oui, Monsieur, nous avons 
le porte-crayon d'argent. 9. Avons nous l'avoine du cheval? 10. 
Vous avez l'avoine et le foin du cheval. 11. Qui a l'habit de drap 
du charpentier? 12. Le cordonnier a le chapeau de soie du tailleur. 
13. Le tailleur a le Soulier de cuir du cordonnier. 14. Avez vous la 
table de bois? 15. Oui, Monsieur, j'ai la table de bois du charpentier. 
16. Ont ils le couteau d'argent? 17. Ils ont le couteau d'argeat. 
18. Le frere du medecin a la montre d'argent. 19. La soeur du 
cordonnier a la robe de soie. 20. A-t-elle le Soulier de cuir ? 21. Non, 
Madame, elle a le Soulier de satin. 22. Avons nous lebas de laine? 
23. Non, Monsieur, vous avez le bas de soie du tailleur. 24. Qui 
a le bas de coton ? 25. Le medecin a le bas de coton. 26. La dame 
a le Soulier de satin de la soeur du boulanger. 

Exercise 8. 

1. Have you the tailor's book? 2. No, Sir, I have the physiciaii's 
watch. 3. Who has the gold watch? 4. The lady has the gold watch 
and tne silver peneii-ease. 5. Have you the tailor's shoe ? 6. I have 
the tailor's clotn shoe. 7. Have we the wooden table ? 8. Yes, Sir, 
you have the wooden table. 9. Have, they the silver knife ? 10. They 
have the silver knife. 11. The lad v has the silver knife and the 
gold pencil-case. 12. Has she the satin dress? 13. The physician's 
sister has the satin iress. 14, Who has the wood? 15. The car- 



LE8S0K VL 35 

penter's brother has the wood. 16. Have you the woollen stock- 
ing? 17. No, Sir, but 1 have the cotton stocking. 18. Who has the 
baker's bread? 19. We have the baker's bread and the miller's 
flour, 20. Have we the horse's hay? 21. You have the horse's 
oats. 22. Have we the tailor's silk hat? 23. Yes, S : r, you have the 
tailor's silk hat and the shoemaker's leather shoe. 24. Have you the 
cloth shoe of the physician's sister ? 25. No, Madam, I ha\ ■* the lady's 
silk d/ess. 



LESSON VL LEgON VL 

1. The article, preceded by or contracted with the preposition de, 

according to Rules 1 and 2 of Lesson 5, is placed in French before 

words used in a partitive sense. Such words may generally be 

known in English when some or any is or may be prefixed to them. 

[5 13, (10.) \ 78, (1.)] 

Du pain, Bread, or some bread ; 

De la viande, Meat, or some meat ; 

De l'argent, Money, or some money. 

2. The French numeral adjective, un, m. une, /., answers to the 
English indefinite article, a or an. [§ 13, (4.) (11).] 

Un homme, A man ; 

Une femme, A woman. 

3. The e of the preposition de is elided before un and une. [§ 146.1 

D'un livre, m. Of or from a book; 

D'une maison, £ Of or from a nouse. 

4. When the nominative or subject of an interrogative sentence is 
a noun, it should be placed before the verb ; and immediately after 
the verb in simple tenses, and after the auxiliary in compound tenses, 
a pronoun must be placed, agreeing with the nominative in gender, 
number and person. [§ 76, (4.) (5.)] 

Le medecin a-t-il de l'argent 1 Has the physician money 7 

Le boucher a-t-il de la viande 1 Has the butcher meat ? 

Le libraire a-t-il du papier % Has the bookseller paper f 

La dame a-t>elle de la soie 1 Has the lady silk ? 

Resume of Examples. 



Avez vous du pain 1 

Vous avez du pair., du beurre, et 

du fromage. 
Votre fr^re a-Ml une livre de 

beurre 1 



Have you bread ? 

You have bread, butter, and cheese. 

Has your brother % pound of butter f 



30 LESSON VI. 

Avez vous le livre d'un libraire ? I Have you a bookseller's bonk? 

Non, j'ai le livre d'une dame. | No, I have a lady's book. 

La soeur du medecin a-t-elle du Has the physician's sistei paper and 



papier et de l'encre 1 ink ? 

5. It will be seen by some of the above examples, that the ar. 
tide must be repeated before every noun used in a partitive sense. 

Exercise 9. 

Acajou, m. mahogany; Encre, f. ink; Livre, f. found; 

Acier, m. steel ; Epicier, m. grocer ; Morceau, m. piece ; 

Aujourd'hui, to-day ; Fils, m. son ; Papier, m. paper ; 

Beurre, m. butter; Fourchette, f.fork; Plume, f. pen ; 

Biore, f. beer ; Fromage, m. cheese ; Sucre, m. sugar • 

Bceuf, m. beef ; Gant, m. glove ; Vin, m. vnne ; 

Cafe, m. coffee ; Libraire, m. bookseller ; Votre> your ; 

Cuiller, f. spoon; Livre, m. book ; The, m. tea. 
De, m. thimble; 

1. Avez vous de la viande? 2. Oui, Monsieur, j'ai une livre de 
viande. 3. Votre fils a-t-il un morceau de pain ? 4. Oui, Madame, 
il a un morceau de pain. 5. Le libraire a-t-il un livre ? 6. II a de 
l'encre et du papier. 7. Votre soeur a-t-elle une montre d'or? 8. 
Elle a une montre d'or et un de d'argent. 9 Le boulanger a-t-il du 
vin ou de la biere? 10. Le boulanger a du the et du cafe. 11. 
Votre frere a-t-il du fromage? 12. II a du fromage et du beurre. 
13. La dame a-t-elle une cuiller d'argent? 14. La dame a une 
cuiller et une fourchette d'argent. 15. Le boucher a-t-il de la 
viande aujourd'hui ? 16. Oui, Monsieur, il a un morceau de bceuf. 
17. Le charpentier a-t-il une table? 18. Oui, Monsieur, il a une 
table d'acajou. 19. Avez vous le livre du medecin? 20. Non, 
Madame, mais j'ai le livre de votre sceur. 21. Qui a du cafe et du 
sucre ? 22. L'epicier a du cafe et du sucre. 23. La soeur du 
libraire a-t-elle un gant ? 24. Non, Monsieur, mais elle a un livre 
25. A-t-elle une plume d'acier ? 26. Non, Monsieur, elle a une plume 
d'or. 27. Vous avez le porte-crayon du medecin. 

Exercise 10. 
1. Have you any tea? 2. Yes, Madam, I have a pound of tea 
3. Who has bread ? 4. The baker has bread, butter, and cheese 
5. Has the tailor cloth ? 6. The tailor has a piece of cloth. 7 
Has the physician gold? 8. Yes, Sir, the physician has gold and 
silver. 9. Has the lady a silver watch ? 10. Yes, Miss, the lady 
has a silver watch and a gold pen. 11. Has your sister silk ? 12. 
Yes, Sir, she has silk and cotton. 13. Have you a knife ? 14. Yes. 
Sir, I have a steel knife and a silver fork. 15. Have you meat 
to-day, Sir ? 16. Yes, Sir, I have a piece of beef 17. Has youi 



LESSON VII. Si 

carpenter a mahogany table? 18. Yes, Sir, he has a mahogany 
table. 19. Has your sister a glove? 20. No, Sir, your sister has a 
silk glove. 21. Has the bookseller's son a gold pencil case? 22. 
Yes, S ; r, he has a gold pencil case and a steel pen. 23. Wlio has 
your sister's watch? 24. Your brother has the gold watch and the 
silk hat. 25. We have gold, silver, and steel. (See Rule 5.) 



LESSON VII. LEgON VII. 

1. To render a sentence negative, ne is placed before the verb, and 
pas after it. 

Je n'ai pas le cheval. / have not the horse. 

Vous n'avez pas la maison. You have not the house. 

2. When the verb is in a compound tense [§ 45, (8.)] the first 
negative ne is placed before the auxiliary, and the second between 
the auxiliary and the participle. 

Je n'ai pas eu le cheval. I have not had the hoi'sc. 

Vous n'avez pas eu la maison. You have not had the house. 

3. It will be seen in the above examples that the e of ne is elided, 
when the verb begins with a vowel. \_\ 146.] 

4. When the words ni, neither ; rien, nothing ; jamais, never ; per- 
sonne, no one, nobody, occur, the word ne only is used, and those 
words take the place of pas. [§ 41, (6.)] 

Je n'ai ni le livre ni le papier. J have neither the book nor the paper. 

Avez vous quelque chose 1 Have you any thing ? 

Nous n'avons rien. We have nothing, or not any thing, 

Personne n'a le livre. No one has the book. 

Vous n'avez jamais le couteau. You never have the knife. 

5. A noun used in a partitive sense (Lesson 6, Rule 1), and being 

the object of a verb, conjugated negatively, should not be preceded 

t) the article, but by the preposition de only. [§ 78, (7.)] 

Nous n'avons pas d'argent. We have no money, 

Vous n'avez pas de viande. You have no meat. 

6. Quelqu'un, some one, any one ; [§ 41, (7.)] quelque chose, s rnie- 
thing, any thing ; should only be used in an affirmative or interroga- 
tive sentence, or in a sentence which is negative and interrogative at 
the same time. 

Avons nous quelqu'un 1 Have we any one ? 

Avez vous quelque chose 1 Have you any thing ? 

N 'avons nous pas quelque chose ? Have we not something ? 



38 



LESSON VII. 



7. In a negative sentence, ne — personne, signifies nobody, not <m$ 
ft idy ; and ne — rien, nothing, not any thing. 



Je n'ai personne. 
Vous n'avez rien. 

8. Avoir, to have, in the 

Negatively. 



Je n'ai pas, 
Tu n'as pas, 
II n'a pas, 
Ells n'a pas, 
Nous n'avons pas, 
Vous n'avez pas, 
Us n'ont pas, 
EUes n'ont pas, 



/ have no one, not any one. 

You have nothing, or not any thing. 

Present of the Indicative. 

Negatively and Interrogatively. 
I have not ; N'ai je pas 1 Have I not ? 

Thou hast not ; N'as tu pas 1 Hast thou not 1 

He has not ; N'a-t-il pas 1 Has he not ? 

She has not ; N'a-t>elle pas 1 Has she not ? 

We have not ; N'avons nous pas 1 Have we not ? 

You have not ; N'avez vous pas 1 Have you not ? 
They m. have not ; N'ont ils pas 1 Have they m. notl 
They f. have not ; N'ont elles pas ? Have they f, not ? 

Resume of Examples. 



Le tailleur a-t-il le bouton 1 
Le tailleur n'a pas le bouton. 
II n'a pas eu le drap. 
II n'a eu ni le drap ni le cuir. 

Ai-je de la viande 1 

Vous n'avez pas de viande, (R. 5.) 

Avons nous quelque chose 1 

Nous n'avons rien. 

Nous n'avons jamais de cafe, (R. 5.) 



Has the tailor the button ? 

The tailor has not the button. 

He has not had the cloth. 

He has had neither the cloth nor the 

leather. 
Have I meat ? 
You have no meat. 
Have we any thing ? 
We have nothing, or not any thing. 
We never have coffee. 



Exercise 11. 

Ami, m. friend; Drap, m. cloth; 

Angleterre, f. England; Du tout. adv. at all; 



Aussi, also; 
Autre, other ; 
Chapelier, m. hatter; 
Chien, m. dog; 
Coton. m. cotton; 
Cousin, m. cousin; 
Deux, two; 



France, f. France; 
Histoire, f. history ; 
Libraire, m. bookseller; 
Marchand, m. merchant; 
Mon, m. my ; 
Ni, conj. neither, nor; 



Personne, m. nobody; 

Quelque chose, m. some- 
thing, any thing ; 

Quelqu'un, m. some one, 
any one; 

Soie, f. silk; 

Velours, m. velvet; 

Voisin, m. neiglihor. 



1. Le chapelier a-t-il de la soie? 2. Le chapelier na pas de soie 
mais il a du velours. 3. A-t-il du velours de coton? 4. Non, Mon 
sieur, il n'a pas de velours de coton, il a du velours de soie. 5. Avez 
vous de la viande? 6. Oui, Monsieur, j'ai de la viande. 7. Le me 
decin n'a pas d'argent. 8. Qui a de l'argent ? 9. Le marchand n'a 
pas d'argent, mais il a du drap, du velours et de la soie. 10. Avez 
vous quelque chose? 11. Non, Monsieur, je n'ai rien du tout. 12. L3 
tailleur a-t-il deux boutons d'argent? 13u Non, Monsieur, il a deux 
bouton** de soie. 14. Qui a votre chien? 15. Le voisin a le chien de 
mon ceusin. 16. N'a-t-il pas votre cheval aussi? 17. Non, Monsieur 



LESSON VIII. 39 

i) a le c.ieval de voire ami, 18. Avez vous l'histoire de France' 
19. Non, Madame, je n'ai ni l'histoire de France ni l'histoire d'Angle- 
terre. 20. N'avez vous ni le livre ni le papier? 21 Non, Mademoi- 
selle, je n'ai ni Tun ni l'autre. 22. Qui a du papier? 23. Le libraire 
n'a pas de papier. 24. Quelqu'un a-t-il un livre ? 25. Personne n'a 
de livre. 

Exercise 12. 

1. Has the baker velvet? 2. No, Sir, the baker has no velvet 
3. Who has silk velvet? 4. The hatter has silk velvet and a silk hat. 
5 Have you two silver buttons? 6. No, Sir, I have a cloth coat, a 
silk hat, and a velvet shoe. 7. Has your neighbor a wooden table ? 
8. Yes, Sir, he has a mahogany table. 9. Has your cousin a history 
of England? 10. No, Sir, he has a history of France. 11. I have 
neither the cloth nor the velvet. 12. We have neither the meat nor 
the coffee. 13. Has any one a book? 14. Your cousin has a book, 
a velvet coat, and a silk hat. 15. Have you the physician's book ? 

16. Yes, Madam, I have the physician's book, and the lady's gold pen. 

17. Has the merchant cloth? 18. The merchant has no cloth, but he 
has money. 19. Who has your neighbor's dog? 20. Nobody has 
my neighbor's dog. 21. Has any one my book? 22. No one has 
your book. 23. Has your cousin's brother any thing? 24. No, Sir, 
he has nothing 25. Who has your friend's book ? 26. Your brother 
has my cousin's book. 27. Has he the tailor's coat? 28. He has not 
the tailor's coat. 29. We have neither the cloth nor the silk. 



LESSON VHI. LECON VIII. 

1. The verb avoir is used idiomatically in French, with the words 
^uelque chose, chaud, froid, faim, honte, peur, raison, tort, soif, som- 
oaeil. 

J'ai quelque chose. Something is the matter with rrt€. 

II a chaud. He is warm. 

Elle a faim. Sh& is hungry. 

Nous avons honte. We are ashamed. 

Vous avez peur. You are afraid. 

lis ont tort. They are ivrong. 

Avez vous raison 1 Are you right ? 

J'ai sommeil. J am sleepy. 

2. A noun, whether taken in a general or in a part'cular sense, 
Is, in French, commonly preceded by the article le, in its different 
forms, [} 77, (1.) (2.)1 



40 



LESSOR VIII. 



Le pain est necessaire. 
II a le pain. 



Bre^d is necessary. 
He has the bread. 



3. A noun, preceded by the article le, retains that article afW ni* 
nor, neither ; but a noun taken in a partitive sense, [L. 5, 1,] takei 
after m, neither article nor preposition. 



Je n'ai ni l'arbre ni le jardin. 
ous n'avons ni arbre ni jardin. 



/ have neither the tree n ir the gai Men ; 
We have neither tree net garden. 



4. A noun, taken in a partitive sense, and preceded by an adjec- 
tive, takes merely the preposition de. [§ 78, (3.)] 

5. The following adjectives are generally placed before the nouj 

Beau, handsome; Cher, dear ; Jeune, young; Meilleur, better; 

Bon, good; Grand. great, large ; Joli, pretty ; Petit, small; 

Brave, worthy; Gros, large; Mauvais, bad; Vieux, old; 

Vilain, ugly. 

R£sum£ of Examples. 



Avez vous quelque chose ? 
Jen'airien, (literally, Ihave nothing.) 
Votre frere a-t-il chaud ? 
II n'a ni froid ni chaud. 
Votre sceur a-t-elle faim ou soif 1 
Elle n'a pas faim. ma is honte. 
Votre ami a-t-il sommeil 1 
Mon ami n'a ni sommeil ni peur. 
Avez vous raison ou tort 1 
Avez vous du lait ou du vin ? 
Je n'ai ni lait ni vin, [R. 3.] 
Avez vous le lait ou le vin ? 
Je n'ai ni le lait ni le vin. [R. 3. J 
Avez vous de beau drap et de bon 
cafe 7 



Is any thing the matter with you ? 
Nothing is the matter vnth me. 
Is your brother warm ? 
He is neitJier warm nor cold. 
Is your sister hungry or thirsty ? 
She is not hungry, but ashamed. 
Is your friend sleepy? 
My friend is neither sleepy nor afraid 
Are you right or wrong ? 
Have you milk or wine ? 
I have neither milk nor wine. 
Have you the milk or the wine ? 
I have neither the milk nor the wine f 
Have you handsome cloth and good 
coffee ? 



Exercise 13. 

Au contraire, on the con- Fusil, m. gun ; Petit, small, little ; 

trary ; Froid, m. cold; Peur, f 'fear, afraid; 

Bouton, button; Gros, large; Quel, uhat, which; 

Capitaine, captain; Honte, f. shame, ashamed; Raison, f. reason, righi; 

Cousin, m. cousin; Mais, but; Rien, nothing; 

Chaud, m. heat, warm; Marteau, m. hammer ; Tort, m. wrong; 

Faim, f. hunger, hungry; Menuisier, m. joiner ; Sel, m. salt; 

Ferblantier, m. tinman; Poivre, m. pepper ; Sommeil, m. shep, sleepy 

1. Qui a sommeil'? 2. Mon frere a faim, mais il n'a pas sommeil 
3. Avez vous raison ou tort? 4. J'ai raison, je n'ai pas tort. 5. Avez 
vous le bon fusil de mon frere ? 6. Je n'ai pas le fusil. 7. Avez vous 
froid aujourd'hui? 8. Je n'ai pas f ua, au contraire, j'ai chaud. 
9. Avez vous de bon pain? xQ. Je n'ai pas de pain. 11. N'avez 
vous pas faim? 12. Je n'ai ni faim ni soif. 13. Avez vous hints' 



LESSON IX. 41 

i4. Je 17 ai ni honte ni peur. 15. Avons nous du poivre ou du sel? 
16. Vous n'avez ni pohre ni sel. 17. Quel livre avez vous? 18. J'ai 
le livre de mon cousin. 19. Avez vous le marteau de fer ou le mar- 
teau d'argent ? 20. Je n'ai ni le marteau de fer ni le marteau d'argent, 
j'ai le marteau de bois du ferblantier. 21. Avez vous quelque chose? 
22 Je n'ai rien. 23. Avez vous le gros livre du libraire? 24. Je n'ai 
ni ie gros livre du libraire, ni le petit livre du menuisier, j'ai le boa 
livre du capitaine. 

Exercise 14. 

1. Are you sleepy, Sir? 2. No, Sir, I am not sleepy, but I am 
hungry. 3. Have you pepper or salt? 4. I have neither pepper nor 
salt : I have cheese. 5. Is your brother thirsty or hungry ? 6. My 
brother is neither thirsty nor hungry. 7. Is your sister right or 
wrong? 8. She is not wrong, she is right. 9. Is the good joiner 
afraid 2 10 He is not afraid, but ashamed. 11. Have you milk or 
cheese? 12. I have neither milk nor cheese, I have butter. 13. Have 
you the fine cloth or the good tea? 14. I have neither the fine cloth 
nor the good tea. 15. Is anything the matter with you, my good 
friend? 16. Nothing is the matter with me, my good Sir. 17. Have 
you no bread? 18. Yes, Madam, I have good bread, good butter, and 
good cheese. 19. Is the carpenter sleepy? 20. The carpenter is not 
sleepy, but the tinman is hungry. 21. Have you the tinman's wooden 
hammer? 22. I have not the wooden hammer. 23. Which hammer 
Have you? 24. I have the steel hammer. 25. Have you a good cloth 
coat ? 26. No, Sir, but I have a silk dress. 27. Has the tailor the 
good gold button? 28. Yes, Sir, he has the good gold button. 
29. Who has my brother's gold watch ? 30. Some one has the gold 
watch. 



LESSON IX. LEgON IX. 

1. The pronouns le, Mm, it^la, her, it, are, in French, placed before 

the verb.* These pronouns assume the gender of the nouns which 

they represent. 

Voyez vdus le couteau ? m. Do you see the knife? 

Je le vois. I see it. 

Voyons nous la fourchette 1 f. Do we see the fork ? 

Nous la voyons. We see it. 

* Except in the second person singular, and in the first and second 
persons plural of the imperative used affirmatively. 



42 LESSON IX. 

2 The vom el of the pronouns le and la, is elided before a verfc 
commencing with a ^owel or an h mute. [§ 146.] 

Avez vous le baton 1 m. Have you the stick? 

Je l'ai. / have it. 

Avons nous la canne ? f. Have -we the cane ? 

Nous l'avons. We liave it. 

3. The possessive adjectives mon, m. ma, f. my ; ton, m. ta, f. thy , 
en, m. sa, f. his, hei, agree in gender with the object possessed, that 
b with the noun following them. [} 21, (1.) (2.)] 

Mon pupitre, m. My desk ; 

Avez vous ma lettre 7 f. Have you my letter ? 

II a son fusil, m. He has his gun. 

II a sa cravate, f. He has his cravat. 

4. Before a feminine noun in the singular, commencing with a 

vowel or an h mute, the masculine form, mow, ton, son is used 

[{21,(3.)] 

J'ai mon epee, f. J have my sword. 

C'est son habitude, f. It is his or her habit. 

Le general a son armee, f. The general has his army. 

5. The adjectives notre, our ; votre, your ; leur, their, are used 
without variation before a noun of either gender, in the singular. 

u 21, (i.)] 

Notre argent, m. Our silver. 

Votre canne, f. Your cane. 

Leur terre, f. Their land. 

6. The possessive pronouns le mien, m. la mienne, f. mine ; le 
tien, m. la tienne, f. thine ; le sien, m. la sienne, f. his or hers, can 
never be prefixed to nouns. The article preceding those pronouns, 
and forming an indispensable part of them, takes the gender of the 
object possessed ; mien, tien, sien, vary for the feminine — notre and 
vdtre used as pronouns have the circumflex accent. 

J'ai votre livre et le mien. / have your book and mine . 

Elle a sa robe et la mienne. S/ie has her dress and mine. 

Vous avez votre plume et la nctre. Vou have your pen and ours. 

Resume of Examples. 



V otre ami a-t-il le mouton ? 

II Pa, elle Ta. 

II ne l'a pas. 

N'avez vous pas l'er.crier d'argent 1 

Nous ne l'avons pas. 

Avez vous votre fusil ou le mien 1 

Je n'ai ni le votre ni le mien. 

Son epouse a-t-elle sa robe ou la 

votre 1 
Elle n'a ni la sienne ni la votre. 



Has your friend the sheep or m\vttm 

He has it, she has it. 

He has it not. 

Have you not the silver inkstand ? 

We have it not. 

Have you your gun or mine 1 

I have neither yours nor mine. 

Has his wife her dress or yours ? 

She has ?ieUher hers nor yours. 



LES80NIX. 43 

Ne l'avez vous pas ? Have you it net? 

Votre frere ne l'a-t-il pas 1 Has not your brother it ? 

Exercise 15. 

Assiette, f. plate ; Crayon, m. pencil ; Parent, m. relation ; 

Biscuit, m. biscuit ; Cuisinier, m. cook ; Plat, m. dish ; 

Boeuf m. beef; Fourchette, f. fork ; Poisson, m.fish; 

Boucher, m butcher ; Matelot, m. sailor; Porcelaine, f. china; 

Commode, f. chest of Mouton, m. mutton, Sofa, m. sofa ; 

drawers; sheep; Tout, all; 

Couteau, m. knife; Mir oir,m. looking-glass; Veau, m. veal, calf 

1. Avez vous la fourchette d'argent? 2. Oui, Monsieur, je l'ai. 
3. Le cuisinier a-t-il le boeuf? 4. Non, Monsieur, il ne l'a pas. 5, 
Quel mouton avez vous ? 6. J'ai le bon mouton et le bon veau du 
boucher. 7. Votre parent a-t-il la commode ? 8. Non, Monsieur, 
il ne Pa pas. 9. A-t-il mon poisson? 1C Qui a tout le biscuit du 
boulanger? 11. Le matelot n'a ni son pain ni son biscuit. 12. 
A-t-il son couteau et sa fourchette ? 13. II n'a ni son couteau ni sa 
fourchette, il a son assiette [R. 4]. 14. Quel plat a-t-il? 15. II a 
le joli plat de porcelaine. 16. Avez vous le mien oulesien? 17. 
Je n'ai ni le votre ni le sien, j'ai le notre. 18. Avez vou* peur, 
Monsieur? 19. Non, Madame, je n'ai pas peur, j'ai faim. 20. 
Quelqu'un a-t-il ma montre d'or ? 21. Non, Monsieur, personne ne 
l'a. 22. Qu'avez vous, Monsieur ? 23. Je n'ai rien. 24. Avez vous 
le sofa d'acajou de mon menuisier ? 25. Non, Monsieur, je ne l'ai 
pas. 26. J'ai son joli miroir et son bon crayon. 

Exercise 16. 

1. Have you the silver pencil case? 2. No, Sir, I have it not. 3. 
Have you my brother's plate ? 4. Yes, Madam, I have it. 5. Has 
the butcher the good biscuit ? 6. He has it not, he has the good 
beef the good mutton, and the good veal. 7. Have you my knife 
and my fork ?* 8. I have neither your knife nor your fork. 9. 
Who has the good sailor's biscuit ? 10. The baker has it, and I have 
mine. 11. Have you mine also? 12. I have neither yours nor his. 
13. Are you hungry ? 14. I am not hungry, I am thirsty and sleepy 
15. Are you not ashamed? 16. No, Sir, I am not ashamed, but 
am sold. 17. Is your relation right or wrong? 18. My relation is 
nght, Sir. 19. Has he my china dish or my silver knife? 20. He 
has neither your china dish nor your silver knife, he has your china 
yiate. 21. Has any one my silver pencil-case? . 22. No one las it, 

* The possessive adjective must in French be repeated before every 
*mn. ft 21, (4.)] 



44 LESSON K. 

but your toother has your cloth coat. 23. Have you mine or his! 
24. I have yours. 25. Has the baker the mahogany c 'nest of draw- 
ers ? 26. He has it not, he has the mahogany sofa. 27. Has the 
tinman my plate ? 28. He has not your plate, he has mine. 29. 
Which sofa have you ? 30. I have my brother's sofa. 31 1 have 
neither his nor yours, I have mine. 



LESSON X. LEQON X. 

1. The demonstrative adjectives ce, m. cette, f. this or that are al- 
ways placed before nouns ; they agree in gender with these nouns. 
H 20, (1.)] 

Avez vous ce parapluie 1 m. Have you this or that umbrella ? 

Vous n'avez pas cette bouteille, f. You hive not this or that bottle. 

2. Before a word masculine singular, commencing with a vowel, or 

an h mute, cet takes the place of ce. [§ 20, (1.)] 

N'avez vous pas cet argent 7 Have you not this or that money ? 

V jus avez eu cet honneur. You have had this or that honor. 

3. When it is deemed necessary to express in French, the differ- 
ence existing in English between the words this and that, the adverbs 
ci and la may be placed after the nouns. [} 20, (2.)] 

Je n'ai pas ce parasol-ci j'ai ce pa- I have not this parasol, I have that 
rasol-la, parasol. 

4. The demonstrative pronouns, celui, m. celle, f. this or that, are 
used to represent nouns, but are never joined with them like adjec- 
tives. [$ 36, § 37, (1.)] 

J'ai mon parapluie et celui de votre / have my umbrella and your brother's, 

frere, i. e., thai of your brother. 

Vous avez ma robe et celle de ma You have my dress and my sister's^ i. e., 

soeur, that of my sister. 

5. The pronouns celui, celle, with the addition of the words ci and 
la, are used in the sense of this one, that one, the latter, the former. 
[§ 37, (4.)] They agree in gender with the word which they iepre- 
sent. 

Vous avez celui-ci mais vous n'avez You have this one {the latter), but you 
pas celui-la. have not that one {the forme- ). 

6. The pronouns ceci and cela. are used absolutely, that is, without 
a noun, in pointing out objects. 

Nous n'avons pas ceci, nous avons We have not this, we lave that 

cela. 
Ceci ou cela, Thi or that- 



IESSUN 7. 



46 



Resume of Examples. 



Avez vous le luTe de cet homme 1 
Je n'ai pas son livre, j'ai le mien. 
Le cuisinier a-t-il ce parapluie 1 
II n'a pas ce parapluie-ci, il a ce 

parapluie-la, (R. 3.) 
Avez vous celui de votre frere 1 

Je n 1 ai pas celui de mon frere, j'ai 
celui de ma soeur, (R. 4.) 

Avea vous celui-ci ou celui-la 1 
Je n'ai ni celui-ci ni celui-la. 
Quelle robe avez vous 1 f. 
J'ai eelle-ci. 
Avez vous ceci ou cela? (R. 6,) 



Have you that mail's book ? 

I have not his book, I have mine. 

Has the cook that umbrella ? 

He has not this umbrella, he has thai 

umbrella. 
Have yau your brother's ? that of youf 

brother. 
I have not my brother's, I have my 

sister's ; i. e., that of my brother, thai 

of my sister. 
Have you this one or that one ? 
I have neither the latter nor the former. 
Which dress have you ? 
I have this {one.) 
Have you this or that ? 



Exercise 17. 



Ardoise, f. slate ; 
Balai. m. broom ; 
Bois. m. wood; 
Bouteiile, f. bottle; 
Dame, f. lady ; 
Fromage, m. cheese; 



Encrier, m. inkstand; 
Etranger, m. stranger, 

foreigner ; 
Lait, m. milk ; 
Parapluie. m. umbrella ; 
Volaille, f. poultry. 



Lettre, f. letter ; 
Malle, f. trunk; 
Parasol, m. parasol ; 
Poulet, m. chicken ; 
Plomb, m. lead; 
Plus, no longer ; 
Jardinier, m. gardener ; Saliere, f. salt stand ; 

1. Votre frere a-t-il son encrier d'argent? 2. II ne l'a plus il a un 
encrier de plomb. 3. Avons nous la lettre de l'etranger ? 4. Oui, 
Monsieur, nous avons celle de l'etranger [R. 4.]. 5. Votre soeur n'a 
pas son ardoise, mais elle a son chapeau de satin. 6. Le menuisier 
a-t-il votre bois ou le sien ? 7. II n'a ni le mien ni le sien, il a celui 
du jardinier. 8. Avez vous mon bon parapluie de soie? 9. J'ai 
votre parapluie de soie et votre parasol de satin. 10. Avez vous ma 
bouteiile? 11. Je n'ai pas votre bouteiile, j'ai la malle de votre 
soeur. 12. Le domestique a-t-il cette saliere 1 ? 13. II n'a pas cette 
saliere-ci, il a celle-la. 14. Avez vous le bon ou le mauvais poulet ? 
15. Je n'ai ni celui-ci ni celui-la. 16. Quel poulet avez vous % 17. J'ai 
celui du cuisinier. 18. Le boulanger a-t-il de la volaille? [L. 6 
R. 1.] 19. Le boulanger n'a pas de volaille, il adu lait [L. 7. R. 5.] 
20 Avez vcus votre fromage ou le mien 1 21. Je n'ai ni le votre ni 
le mien, j'ai celui du matelot. 22. Quelqu'un a-t-il faim ? 23. Per- 
gonnen'a faim. 24. Avez vous quelque chose? 25. Non, Monsieur, 
je n'ai rien. 

Exercise 18. 

1. Has your b -other that lady'& umbrella? 2. My brother has that 
lady's umbrella. 3. Have you this parasol or that one ? 4. I have 



46 LESSON II. 

neit-her this (one) nor that (one). 5. Have yoa the stranger's gold 
watch? 6. No, Sir, I have the baker's. 7. Who has my slate! 
8. I have your slate and your brother's. 9. Has the cook a siher 
salt stand? 10. The cook has a silver salt stand, and a silver dish. 
11. Has the cook this poultry or that? 12. He has neither this nor 
that. 13. Has he this bread or that? 14. He has neither this ncr 
that, he has the baker's good bread. 15. Have you my cotton para- 
sol? 16. I have not your cotton parasol, I have your silk parasol. 
17. Has the gardener a leather trunk ? 18. The gardener has a leather 
trunk. 19. Who has my good cheese? 20. Nobody iias your 
cheese, but some one has your brother's. 21. Have you mine or 
his ? 22. I have neither yours nor his, I have the stranger's. 23. Haa 
the cook this bottle or that broom ? 24. He has this bottle. 25. Have 
you a lead inkstand? 26. No, Sir, I have a ehina inkstand. 27. Has 
the stranger poultry? 28. The stranger has no poultry, but he has 
money. 29. Your brother is hungry and thirsty, afraid and sleepy. 
30. Is any one ashamed? 31. No, Sir, nobody is ashamed. 32. la 
your brother right or wrong? 33. My brother is right, and yours is 
wrong. 34. Your sister has neither her satin hat nor her velvet hat 



LESSON XL LEQON XL 

PLURAL OF NOUNS (§ 8.) 

1. The plural in French is generally formed, as in English, by &e 

addition of s to the singular. 

Un homme, une femme, A man, a woman ; 

Deux hommes, deux femmes, Two men, two women. 

The form le of the article becomes plural by the addition of $, 

and may be placed before plural nouns of either gender. 

Les hommes, les femmes, The men, the women. 

2. 1st Exception to Rule 1. Nouns ending in s, x, % remrriB 

nchanged for the plural. 

Le bas, les bas, The stocking, the stockings ; 

La voix, les voix, The voice, the voices ; 

Le nez, les nez, The nose, the noses. 

3. 2d Exception. Nouns ending with au> and eu, take x for tht 

plural. 

Le bateau, les bateaux, The boat, the boats ; 

Le lieu, les lieux, T%e place, tie places. 



LESSON XI. 



47 



4. 3d Exception. The following nouns ending ii ow, take x for 

the plural, bijou, jewel; caillou, pebble ; chou, cabbage ; genou, knee , 

hibou, owl; joujou, plaything. 

Les bijoux, les cailloux, les choux, The jewels, the pebbles, the cabbages; 
Les hiboux, les genoux, les joujoux, The owls, the knees, the playthings. 

5. 4th Exception. The following nouns ending in ail change thai 

termination into aux for the plural; bail, lease; corail, coral; email 

enamel; soupirail, air-hole; sous-bail, under-lease; travail, labor. 

Les baux, les coraux, les emaux, The leases, the corals, the enamels; 
Les soupiraux, les travaux, les sous- The air-holes^ the labors, the under* 
baux, leases. 

6. 5th Exception. Nouns ending in al form their plural in jiux* 

Le cheval, les chevaux, The horse, the horses ; 

Le general, les generaux, The general, the generals. 

Bal, ball; carnaval, carnival; chacal, Jackal; regal, treat, follow the 
general rule. 

7. 6th Exception: Ciel, heaven; ceil, eye; and aieul, ancestor % 
form their plural irregularly. 

Les cieux, les yeux, les aieux. The heavens, the eyes, the ancestor*. 
For further rules see \ 8, \ 9, and \ 10 of the Second Part. 

Resume^ op Examples. 



Les Anglais ont ils les chevaux 
du general 1 

Les generaux n'ont pas les bijoux. 
Les enfants ont ils les oailloux 1 
Les yeux de l'enfant. 
Les tableaux de cette eglise. 
Avez vous les oiseaux de ce bois 1 
Avez vous les encriers d'argent de 

ma sceur 1 
J'ai les bijoux d'argent et d'or de 

l'etranger. 
Les rois n'ont ils pas les palais de 

marbre 1 



Have the English the general's horses? 

The generals have not the jewels. 

Have the children the pebbles ? 

The child's eyes. 

The pictures of that church. 

Have you the birds of that wood ? 

Have you my sister's silver inkstands? 

I have the gold and silver jewels of th% 

foreigner. 
Have not the kings the marble pal* 

aces? 



Baril m. barrel ; 
Bas na. stocking ; 
f'hocolat, m. chocolate ; 
Bijou, m. jewel; 
ChoU, m. cabbage; 
Dans, in; 
Enfant, m. child; 
Fer, m. iron; 
Fils m. son; 



Exercise 19. 

General, m. general ; Meunier, m. miller ; 
Gilet, m. waistcoat; Morceau, m. piece; 

Grand, adj. large, great; Oiseau, m. bird; 
Jardin, m. garden; Petit, adj. small; 

Joujou. m. plaything; Paire, f.pair; 
Legume, m. vegetable ; Poivre, m. pepper ; 
Marehand, m. merchant; Qu', que, what; 
Marechal, m. blacksmith ; Rien, nothing. 
Mauvais, e, bad; 



1. Avez vous les raarteaux du charpentier ? 2. Nous avons les mar 



48 LESSONXI. 

teaux du marechal ? 3. Les marechaux ont ils deux marteaux de 
bois? 4. Ils ont deux marteaux de fer. 5. Les generaux ont ils 
les chapeaux de soie de l'enfant ? 6. Ils ont les bijoux et les joujoux 
de l'enfant. 7. Les enfants ont ils les oiseaux de votre bois ? 8. lift 
n'ont pas les oiseaux de mon bois, mais ils ont les chevaux de mon 
general. 9. Le marechal a-t-il une paire de bas de laine? 1C. Le 
marechal a deux paires de bas de laine. 11. Monsieur, n'aveL vous 
pasfroii? 12. Non, Monsieur, j'ai chaud. 13. Avez vous du cafe 
ou du chocolat? 14. Je n'ai ni cafe ni chocolat. 15. N'avez vcus 
pas les choux demon grand jardin? 16. J'ai les legumes de votre 
petit jardin. 17. Votre flls, qu'a-kil ? 18. Mon fils n'a rien. 
19. Avez vous deux morceaux de pain? 20. Le meunier a un mor- 
ceau de pain et deux barils de farine. 21. L'epicier a-t-il du cafe, du 
the, du chocolat, et du poivre ? 22. II a du the et du cafe, et le cho- 
colat et le poivre de votre ^archand. 23. Qui a de l'argent ? 24. Je 
n'ai pas d'argent, mais j'ai du papier. 25. Avez vous de bon papier? 
26. J'ai de mauvais papier. 

Exercise 20. 

1. Have you my brother's horses ? 2. I have not your brother's 
horses, I have your cousin's hats. 3. Have the blacksmiths good 
iron ? 4. The blacksmith has two pieces of iron. 5. Have you two 
pairs of stockings ? 6. I have one pair of stockings and two pairs 
of gloves. 7. Has your sister the gold jewels ? 8. My sister has 
the gold jewels and the paper playthings. 9. Have you the cabbages 
in your garden ? 10. We have two cabbages in our garden. 1 1. Have 
you t'he silk hats? 12. The generals have the silk hats. 13. Have 
you coffee or sugar? 14. We have neither coffee nor sugar. 
15. Is your brother ashamed? 16. My brother is neither 
ashamed nor afraid. 17. Who has two barrels of flour ? 18. The 
miller has two barrels of flour. 19. Have the birds bread ? 20. The 
bird 3 have no bread. 21 . Has the merchant tea, chocolate, sugar and 
pepper ? 22. He has sugar and pepper, but he has neither tea nor 
chocolate. 23. Whit has your sister ? 24. She has nothing. 25. 
What is the matter with your brother ? 26. Nothing is the matter 
with him. 27. Is he not cold? 28. He is not cold, he is warm. 
29. Is he wrong? 30. He is not wrong, he is right. 31 . Have you 
two cioth coats? 32. I have only one cloth coat, but I hare two 
satin waistcoats. 33. Who has my brother's letter? 34 Y>ur sis- 
ter has it. 35. Your sister has it not 



LK6S0K XII. 



LESSON XII. LEQO^ XII. 

1. The plural form of the pronouns le, him or it ; la, her or tt } is 

les, them, for both genders. Its place is also before tLe verb. 

Vous les avez. Les avez vous 1 You have them. Have you them ? 
Nous ue les avons pas. We have them not. 

2. The plural of the article, preceded by the preposition de, of, or 

from, is des for both genders. 

Des livres. des plumes, Of or from the books, of the pens ; 

Des freres, des soeurs, Of ox from the brothers, of the sisters. 

3. The same form of the article is plaeed before plural nouns used 

in a partitive sense. [L. 6, R. 1.] 

J'ai des habits. / have clothes. 

Vous avez des maisons. You have houses. 

4. Rule 5, Lesson 7, and Rule 4, Lesson 8, apply also to plural 
nouns used partitively. 

Nous n'avons pas de livres. We have no books. 

Vous avez de bons crayons. You have good pencils. 

5. The plural form of the possessive adjectives, mon, ton, son, 
notre, votre, leur, is mes, my ; tes, thy ; ses, his, her ; nos, our ; vos, 
your ; leurs, their, for both genders. 

Mes freres, mes soeurs, My brothers, my sisters ; 

Nos livres. nos plumes, Our books, our pens. 

6. The possessive pronouns, le mien, la mienne, etc. [L. 9, R. 6,] 
form their plural as follows : 

Mas. Fern. Mas. Fern. 

Les miens,* Les miennes, mine; Les tiens, Les tiennes, thine ; 
Les siens, Les siennes, his or hers; Les notres, Les notres, ours; 

Les votres, Les votres, yours ; Les leurs, Les leurs, theirs. 

Vos maisons et les miennes, Your houses and mine ; 

Vos champs et les siens, Your fields and Ids ; 

Les siens, les votres et les notres. His, yours and ours. 

7. The demonstrative adjectives, ce, cet, cette, have ces for thei 
plural. 

Ces hommes, ces feinmes. These men, these women. 

8. The demonstrative pronoun, celui, m. this, or that, makes ceux it 
the plural. The feminine form, celle, merely takes the s in the 
plural. 

Mes chandeliers (m.) et ceux de vos My candlesticks and those bf you* 

freres. brothers. 

Vos chandelles Cf.) et celles de nos Your candies and those of our ntigh- 

voisins. tors. 

8 



50 LK860N III 



E.ESUME OF ExAMrLCtf. 

Votre frere a-t- il mes chevaux ? | Has your brothei my horse t? 

II n'a ni les votres ni les siens. j He has neither ytmrs nor his. 

A-t-il ceux de nos voisins ? Has lie those of our neighbor* * 

II ne les a pas 1 | He has them not. 

Ma soeur a-t-elle vos plumes ou ! Has my sister your fens or my to** 



celles d* ma cousine 1 
Elle n'a ni les miennes ni celles de 

ma cousine, elle a les siennes. 
Avons nous des marteaux 1 
Vous n'avez pas de marteaux. 
Vous avez de jolis crayons. 
Avez vous les habits des enfants 1 
Je n'ai pas les habits des enfants. 
Vous avez les chapeaux des dames. 
Avez vous ceux-ci ou ceux la 1 



in's, f. ? (or t/wse of my cousin). 
She has neither mine nor my cousin*s 

she has her own. 
Have vie hammers ? 
You have no hammers. 
You have pretty pencils. 
Have you the children's clothes ? 
I have not the children's clothes. 
You have the ladies' hats. 
Have you tliese or those ? 



Exercise 21. 

Acajou, m. mahogany ; Chandelle, f. candle ; Fusil, m. gun ; 
Aubergiste, m. innkeep- Cousine, f. cousin; Laine, f. wool; 

er; Crin, m. horse-hair; Marbre, m. marble; 

Blanc, he, white ; Ebeniste, m. cabinet- Mate las, m. mattress ; 

Chaise, f. chair ; maker ; Meilleure, adj. f. better ; 

Chandelier, m. candle- Ferblanc. m. tin ; Ouvrier, m. workman ; 

stick ; Ferblantier, m. tinman ; Voyageur, m. traveller. 

1. Avez vous les marteaux des mareehaux ? 2. Oui, Monsieur, je 
les ai. 3. Ne les avez vous pas? 4. Non, Monsieur, nous ne lea 
avons pas. 5. L'ouvrier les a. 6. L'aubergiste a-t-il vos chevaux ? 
7. L'aubergiste n'a ni mes chevaux ni les votres, il a les siens. 8. 
Le medecin a-t-il deslivres? 9. Oui,' Monsieur, il a de bons livres. 
10. N'avez vous pas mes meilleures plumes? 11. Oui, Monsieur,; 
j'ai vos meilleures plumes, les miennes et celles de votre cousine 
12. Le voyageur a-t-il de bons fusils ? 13. II n'a pas de bons fusils, 
11 a des fusils de fer. 14. Le matelot n'a-t-il pas mes matelas de 
crin? 15. II ne les a pas. 16. Qu'a-Ul? 17. II a les matelas de 
laine de l'ebeniste. 18. L'ebeniste a-t-il des tables d'acajou? 19. 
Oui, Madame, il a des tables d'acajou et des tables de marbre blanc 
20. Avez vous mes chaises ou les votres? 21. Je n'ai ni les v6tres 
tri les miennes, j'ai celles de l'ebeniste. 22. N'avez vous pas som 
tiieil? 23. Non, Monsieur, je n'ai ni sommeil ni faim. 24. Le fer- 
blantier a-t-il vos chandeliers de fer ? 25. Non, Monsieur, il « ceux 
du marechal. 

Exercise 22. 

1. Have you my tables or yours? 2 I have neither youra nor 
mine, I have the innkeeper's. 3. Have you them ? 4, No, Sir, I hav* 



LESSON XIII. 51 

them not. 5. Has your sister my horses ? 6. Yes, Sir, she has 
your two horses and your brother's. 7. Are you right or wrong ? 
8. I am right, I am not wrong. 9. Has the tinman my silver can- 
dlesticks or yours? 10. He has neither your silver candlesticks nor 
mine. 11. What has he? 12. He has the cabinet-maker's wooden 
tables. 13. Has he your mahogany chairs ? 14. No, Sir, he has my 
white marble tables. 15. Have you these tables or those ? 16. I have 
neither these nor those, I have the cabinet-maker's. 17. Have you 
good pencil-cases ? 18. No, Sir, but I have good pencils. 19. Has 
the traveller iron guns ? 20. Yes, Sir, he has mine, yours, and his. 
21. Has he not your brother's? 22. He has not my brother's. 23. 
Has the workman my iron hammers ? 24. Yes, Sir, he has them. 
25. Has my brother your pens or my cousin's ? 26. He has mine 
and yours. 27. Have you the children's clothes ?• 28. Yes, Madam, 
I have them. 29. Have you your sister's hat? 30. I have my 
cousin's, f. 31. Is any thing the matter with your brother ? 32. 
He is cold and hungry. 33. Have you horses ? 34. Yes, Sir, I have 
two horses. 35. I have two horse-hair mattresses and 'one wool 
mattress. 



LESSON XHI. LEgON XHL 

AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES FEMININE OF ADJECTIVES. 

1. The adjective in French, whatever may be its place,* agrees in 
gender and number with the noun which it qualifies [§ 15,(1.) (2.)]. 

2. Adjectives ending with e mute, i. e. not accented, retain th^t 

termination for the feminine. 

TJn gar9on aimable, An amiable boy ; 

Une fille aimable. An amiable girl. 

3. Adjectives not ending in e mute, take e for the feminine. 

Un gar£on diligent, A diligent boy ; 

Une fille diligente, A diligent girl. 

4. Exceptions. Adjectives ending in el, eil, en, et 9 on, as, and o* 
aoublu the last consonant and take e for the femmine. 

Mas. Fern. Mas. Fern. 

Essentiel, essentielle, essential; Sujet, sujette, subject; 

Vermeil vermeille, vermilion; Bon, bonne, good; 

Ancien, ancienne, ancient; Bas, basse, low; 

* For the place of adjectives see L, 15, and Rule 5, L. 8. 



52 



LESSON XIII. 



5. Adjectives ending in /change the /into ve; those ending in « 
change that hitter into se for the feminine. 



Un habit neuf, 

A new coat; 

Un homme heureux, 

A happy man ; 



Une robe neuve, 
A new dress ; 
Une femme heureuse, 
A happy woman ; 



6. The adjectives beau, handsome; fou, foolish; mou, sift; nouveau 
new ; vieux, old, become bel, fol, mol, nouvel, and vieil, before a nouB 
masculine commencing with a vowel or an h mute ; the last conso 
nant of the latter form is doubled, and e added for the feminine, Ex , 
belle, folle, nouvelle, vieille. 

7. Additional rules and exceptions will be found, \ 15 of the 
Second Part of this grammar. 

8. Conjugation of the Present of the Indicative op 

Etre, to Be 



Affirmatively 


Interrogatively 


Je suis, 


J am ; 


Suis-je 1 


Ami? 


Tu es, 


Tknu art ; 


Es-tu 1 


Art thou ? 


11 est, 


He is ; 


Est-il 7 


Is he? 


Elle est, 


She is ; 


Est elle 1 


Is she? 


Nous sommes, 


We are ; 


Sommes nous 1 


Are we ? 


Vous etes, 


You are ; 


Etes vous 1 


Are you ? 


Us sont, m. 


They are ; 


Sont ils % 


Are they ? 


Elles sont f. 


They are ; 


Sont elles 1 


Are they ? 



Resume of Examples. 



Avez vous un gar^on diligent et une 

fille diligente 1 
Mon gar9on est diligent, mais ma 

fille est paresseuse [R. 5.] 
Cette coutume est elle ancienne 1 
Cette coutume n'est pas ancienne. 

elle est nouvelle [R. 6.] 
Votre plume /. est elle bonne ou 

mauvaise 1 
Ma soeur est tres vive, [R. 5.] 
Votre maison est elle meilleure que 

la mienne 1 
La maison de ma sceur n'est pas si 

bonne que la votre. 



Have you a diligent boy and a dik 

gent girl ? 
My boy is diligent, but my daughter 

is idle. 
Is this custom ancient ? 
This custom is not ancient, it is new, 

Is your pen good or bad ? 

My sister is very lively. 

Is your house better than mine ? 

My sister's house is not so good Mi 

yours. 



Beau, bel, belle, hand- 

some t 
Bon, m, good ; 
Content,-e, pleased; 
Cravate. f. cravat ; 
Dame, f. lady ; 
Encrier, m. inkstand. 
Excellent,-^, excellent j 



Exercise 23. 

Fille, f. daughter ; 
Habit, m. coat ; 
Heureux,-se, happy ; 
Ici, here; 

Meilleur, e. better ; 
Neuf,-ve, new ; 
Parapluie, m. umbrella \ 



Parasol, m. parasol ; 
Petit,-e. small ; 
Paresseux,-se, idle ; 
Porcelaine, f. china; 
Que, than; 
Vieux, vieille, old; 
Vif, vive, quick, lively , 



LESSON XIII. 53 

1. Cette dame est elle contente? 2. Non, Monsieur, cette dame 
n'estpas contente. 3. Votre fille est elle vive? 4. Mon fils esttres 
vif et ma fille est paresseuse. 5. N'a-t-elle pas tort? 6. Elle n'a 
pasraison. 7. Votre cousine est elle heureuse? 8. Oui, Madame, elle 
est bonne, belle et heureuse. 9. A-t-elle des amis? 10. Oui, Monsieur, 
elle a des parents et des amis. 11. A-t-elle une robe neuve et de vieux 
souliers ? 12. Elle a de vieux souliers et une vieille robe. 13. Votre 
frere n'a-t-il pas un bel habit [R. 6.] ? 14 II a un bel habit et une 
bonne cravate. 15. Avez vous de bonne viande, Monsieur ? 16. J'ai 
de la via^de excellente. 17. Cette viande-ci est ejle meilleure que 
celle-la? 18. Celle-ci est meilleure que celle-la. 19. Votre ami a-t-il le 
bel encrier de porcelaine ? 20. Son encrier est beau ; mais il n'est 
pasde porcelaine. 21. Quelqu'un a t-il faiin? 22. Personne n'afairo. 
23. Les generaux sont ils iei ? 24. Les generaux et les marechaux 
sont ici. 25. J'ai vos parasols et vos parapluies, et ceux de vos 
enfants. 

Exercise 24. 

1. Is your little sister pleased ? 2. Yes, Madam, she is pleased. 
3. Is that little girl handsome? 4. That little girl is not handsome, 
but she is good. 5. Have you good cloth and good silk ? 6. My 
cloth and* silk are here. 7. Is your sister happy? 8. My sister is 
good and happy. 9. Has that physician's sister friends? 10. No, 
Madam, she has no friends. 11. Is your meat good? 12. My meat 
is good but my cheese is better. 13. Has the bookseller a hand- 
some china inkstand? 14. He has a fine silver inkstand and a pair 
of leather shoes. 15. Have you my silk parasols ? 16. I have your 
cotton umbrellas. 17. Is your brother's coat handsome? 18. My 
brother has a handsome coat and an old silk cravat 19. Have you 
relations and friends ? 20. I have no relations but I have friends, 
21. Is that handsome lady wrong ? 22. That handsome lady is not 
wrong. 23. Have you handsome china? 24. Our china is hand- 
some ana good. 25. It is better than yours. 26. Is not that little 
girl hungry? 27. That handsome little girl is neither hungry nor 
thirsty. 28. What is the matter with her ? 29. She has neither re- 
lations nor friends. 30. Is this gold watch good? 31. This one is 
good, but that one is better. 32. Have you it ? 33. I have it, but I 
have not your sister's. 34. I have neither yours nor mine, I have 
your mother's. 

* The article, the possessive and the demonstrative adjective are re- 
peated before every noun. Mon frere et ma sceur, my brother and sister. 



54 LESSON XIV. 

LESSON XIV. LEgON XIV. 

AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES PLURAL OF ADJECTIVES. 

1. An adjective qualifying a plural noun, or two or more singula 

nouns of the same gender, assumes the gender of the noun or noun« 

and is put in the plural. 

Les arbres et les fruits sont beaux. The trees and fruits are fine. 
Les fleurs et les plantes sont belles. The flowers and plants are fine. 
Vos jardins sont tres beaux. Your gardens are very fine. 

2. An adjective qualifying two or more nouns of different genderi 
is put in the plural masculine (§ 18.) 

Mon frere et ma soeur sont contents. My brother and sister are pleased. 
Le canif et la plume sont bons. The penknife and pen are good. 

3. The plural of the feminine of adjectives is invariably formed by 
the addition of an s. 

Vous avez de jolies maisons. You have pretty houses. 

Ces demoiselles sont attentives. Those young ladies are attentive. 

4. The plural of the masculine of adjectives is generally formed by 
the addition of an s. 

Ces ecoliers sont attentifs. Those scholars are attentive. 

Vos bois sont magnifiques. Your woods are magnificent. 

5. The terminations s and x are not changed for the plural mascu- 
line. 

Nos fruits sont mauvais. ftn/r fiuits are bad. 

Vos oiseaux sont hideux. Your birds are hideous. 

6. To the termination eau, x is added for the plural masculine. 

Vos champs sont tres beaux. Your fields are very fine. 

7. The termination al is generally changed into aux for the plural 
nasculine [§ 17 (3.)]. 

Les hommes sont egaux. Men are equal. 

8. For more explicit rules and for exceptions, see {17, Second Part 

9. Present of the Indicative of etre, to be. 

Negatively. Negatively and Interrogatively 

Je ne suis pas, / am not ; Ne suis-je pas 1 Am I not ? 

Tu n'es pas, Thou art not ; N'es tu pas'? Art thou not% 

II n'est pas, He is not ; N'est il pas 1 Is he not ? 

Elle n'est pas, She is not; N'est elle pas ^ Is she not? 

Nous ne sommes pas, We are not ; Ne sommes nous pas 1 Are we not ? 

Vous netes pas, You are not; N'etes vous pas 1 Are you not? 

lis ne sont pas m. They are not ; Ne sont ils pa3 ? m. Are they not ? 

EJes ne sont pas f. They are not ; Ne sont elles pas 1 f. Are they not ? 



LESSON XIV. 



56 



Resume of Examples. 



Aver; vous des ecoliers attentifs 1 
Mes ecoliers et mes ecolieres sont 

tres attentifs et tres studieux. 
Ces demoiselles sont elles studi- 

euses 1 
Elles ne sont pas tres studieuses. 
Ces regies sont elles generates 1 
(Jes principes sont generaux. 
Leurs habillements sont superbes. 
Avez vous peur de ces chevaux 

retifs 1 
Vos montres d'or sont excellentes. 
Les miennes sont elles meilleures 

que les votres 1 
Les votres sont meilleures que les 

miennes. 



Have you attentive $ahola/i s ? 

My scholars (male and jemale) oa% 

very attentive and, very studious. 
Are those young ladies studious ? 

They are not very studious. 

Are those rules general ? 

Those principles are general. 

Their clothes are superb. 

Are you afraid of those restive korses ) 

Your gold watches are excellent 
Are mine better than yours ? 

Yours are better than mine 



Souvent, often; 
Travail, m. labor ; 
Tres, very ; 
Utile, useful; 
Velours, m. velvet; 
Vif, ve, quick, lively. 



Exercise 25. 

Agreable, agreeable; Mauvais, e, bad; 
Ain», e, elder; Mule, f. mule; 

Allemande, f. German; Oisif, ve, idle; 
Jamais, never ; Pantoufles f. slippers ; 

Indulgent, e, indulgent ; Personne, m. nobody; 
Laine, f. wool, woollen; Retif, ve, restive; 
Maroquin, m. morocco ; 

1 . Les chevaux de notre ami sont ils retifs ? 2. Ses chevaux ne 
sont pas retifs mais ses mules sont tres retives. 3. Les chevaux et 
les mules de votre frere sont excellents. 4. Vos soeurs sont elles 
tres vives? 5. Mes freres et mes soeurs sont tres vifs. 6. Sont ils 
souvent oisifs 1 7. Non, Monsieur, mes scaurs ne sont jamais oisives. 
8. Avez vous peur de votre frere 1 9. Non, Monsieur, je n'ai peur 
de personne. 10. Ne sommes nous pas indulgents? 11. Vous etes 
indulgents, et vous avez raison*. 12. Ai-je vos livres? 13. Vous ne 
les avez pas, vous avez ceux de mon frere aine. 14. Ne les avez 
vous pas 1 15. Je ne les ai pas. 16. Avez vous une bonne paire de 
bas de laine ? 17. J'ai une belle paire de bas de soie. 18. Avez vous 
le3 bonnes maisons ou les inaiwaises? 19. Je n'ai ni les bonnes ni 
les mauvaises, j'ai celles de ma cousine. 20. Le. travail est il agre- 
able! 21. Le travail est utile et agreable. 22. Avez vous me 
beaux souliers de maroquin ? 23. Je n'ai pas vos beaux soutiers d 
maroquin, j'ai vos belles pantoufles de velours. 24. Avez vous les 
pantoufles de votre sceur, ou les miennes .< 25. Je n'si ni les votrea 
ni celles de votre sceur, j'ai celles de 1' Allemande. 

Exercise 26. 
1. Are your brothers and sisters very (bien) quick? (Note, p. &$J 



58 LESSONXV. 

2. My brothers are quick, but my sisters are not quk«. 3. Have you 
n^t two restive horses ?t 4. No, but I have a restive mule. 5. Have 
you not two good pairs of silk gloves? 6. 1 have a good pair of 
cotton gloves, and two pairs of silk gloves. 7. Are you not afraid 
of vour friends ? 8. No, Sir, I am never afraid of my friends. 9. ] 
am afraid of nobody. 10. Are you right or wrong? 11. lam right 
12. Have you my beautiful leather slippers, or my old satin slip, 
pers ? 13. I have your old leather shoes and your velvet slippers* 
J4. Are those ladies pleased? 15. Those ladies are pleased and they 
are right. 16. Has the German lady your father's shoes or mine ? 
17. She has neither his nor yours, she has my sister's. 18. Has 
your elder brother good houses or bad ? 19. His houses are better 
than yours and than mine.* 20. Are his houses old? 21. His 
houses are old, but they are good. 22. Have you them ? 23 8 No, 
Sir, I have them not, I have no houses. 24. Have you my brother's 
or my sister's? 25. Your sister has hers and my mother's. 26. Are 
your scholars attentive ? 27. My scholars are very attentive and very 
studious. 28. Are those German ladies studious? 29. They are 
very studious and very attentive. 30. Are you often wrong? 31. 
Yes, Sir, I am often wrong. 32. Is labor agreeable ? 33. Yes, Sir, 
labor is agreeable and useful. 34. We have them and you have 
them not. 



LESSON XV. LEgON XV, 

PLACE OF THE ADJECTIVES. KELATIVE PRONOUN EN. 

1. The adjective in French, follows the noun much more fre- 

quently than it precedes it. [§ 85, (1.)] 

Vous avez des amis fideles. You have faithful friends. 

Ma sceur a des livres instructifs. My sister has instructive books. 

2. Those adjectives which generally precede the nouns, have been 

entioned [L. 8, R. 5.], and will be found [} 85, (11.)] 

Nous avons de belles maisons. We have beautiful houses. 

Votre jolie petite fille est studieuse. Your pretty little girl is studious. 

5. The adjectives which are placed after nouns are: — 1st, All par- 
ticiples, present and past, used adjectively. 

* Que meaning which and que conjunction are never understood in 
French, they must be repeated before every noun, pic noun and verb. 
See L. 19, R. 1. f See Rnle 5 of next L. 



LESSON XV. 



6V 



Nous avons une histoire interessante. We have an interesting history. 
Vous avez des enfants polis. You have polite children. 

4. 2d, All such as express form, color, taste ; such as relate to 
hearing and touching ; such as denote the matter of which an object is 
composed ; as also such as refer to nationality, or to any defects of 
the body. [} 85, (4.) (5.) (6.) (7.)] 

Kos parents ont des chapeaux noirs. Our relations have black hats. 

Vous avez des pommes douces. You have sweet apples. 

Voite. de la cire molle. There is soft wax. 

Cette dame espagnoie a un enfant That Spanish lady has a lame child. 
boiteux. 

5. 3d, Almost all adjectives ending in al, able, ible, ique and if. 



Ces hommes liberaux sont aimes. 
Voila un esprit raisonnabie. 
Voila un esclave fugitif. 



Those liberal men are loved. 
That is a reasonable mind. 
That is a fugitive slave. 



6. Some adjectives have a different meaning according to theii 
position before or after the noun. [■} 86.] 

Un brave homme, a worthy man. Un homme brave, a brave man, 

7. En is used for the English words some or any, expressed or 
understood, but not followed by a noun; en has also the sense of 
of it, of them, thereof, generally understood in English sentences, 
particularly in answers to questions. [§ 39, (17.) } 104, § HOj 
(2.) (3.)] 

Avez vous des souliers de cuir 1 Have you leather shoes ? 

J'en ai. J have some, I have (of them). 

Votre flls en-a-t-il 1 Has your son any ? 

8. An adjective used substantively, and having a partitive significa- 
tion (in a sentence containing the pronoun en), must be preceded by 
the preposition de in the same manner as if the noun were expressed. 
[See R. 4. Lesson 8.] 

Avez vous de bonnes plumes 1 Have you good pens? 

Non, mais j'en ai de mauvaises. No, but I have bad ones. 

Resume of Examples. 



Avez vous de beaux jardins 1 
Oui, j'en ai de beaux. [R. 7.] 
Votre frere n'a-t-il pas des souliers 

noirs ! 
II n'en a pas, mais ma soeur en a. 
N'a-t-elle pas aussi une robe 

blanche 1 
Oui, elle en a une. 
Non. elle n'en a pas. 
Qui en a une 1 
Qui n'en a pas 1 



Have you fine gardens ? 

Yes, I have fine ones. 

Has not your brother black shoes ? 

He has none, but my tisier has somt. 
Has she not also a while dress ? 

Yes, she has one. 
No, she has none. 
Who has one ? 
Wh/> has none. ? 



58 



IE8S0K XV, 



Le boicher n a-trfl pas de la viande 

fraiche 1 
II en a, il n'en a pis. 
II en a beaucoup. 
II n'en a guere. 
II en a deux livres. 



Has not the butcher fresh, meatf 

He has some, he has none. 
He lias wttch {of it). 
He has but little {of it). 
He has two pounds {of it). 



Laine, f. wool; 
Mademoiselle, f. Mis* , 
Monsieur, m. Sir, Mi f 

Gentleman ; 
Parent, m. relation; 
Soldat, m. soldier; 
Terre, f. land. 



Exercise 27. 

Amusant, e, amusing ; Bijou, m. jewel; 
Americain, e, American; Blanc, he, white; 
Anglais, e, English ; Brave, brave, worthy ; 
Arabe, Arabian; Chale, m. shawl; 

Aubergiste, m. innkeep- Couteau, m. knife ; 

cr ; Francais, e, French; 

Beaucoup, much, many ; Guere, little, but little; 
Beige, Belgian ; Guitare, f. guitar ; 

1. Avez vous une bonne guitare ? 2. Oui, Monsieur, j'ai une 
guitare excellente. 3. Avez vous de bons habits ? 4. Oui, Madame, 
j'ai de bons habits noirs et de belles robes blanches. 5. Votre mere 
n'a-t-elle pas un chale de soie ? 6. Oui, Mademoiselle, elle en a un 
de soie et un de laine. 7. L'aubergiste a-t-il de bons chevaux 
anglais? 8. L'aubergiste a des chevaux anglais, francais et 
arabes. 9. II en a de superbes. 10. L'ami de votre frere a-t-il des 
bijoux d'or? 11. Oui, Monsieur, il en a. 12. A-t-il aussi des bijoux 
d'argent? 13. II en a aussi. 14. En a-t-il beaucoup? 15. Non, 
Monsieur, il n'en a guere. 16. Votre ami a-t-il des parents? 17. 
Oui, Monsieur, il en a. 18. Ce Monsieur a-l-il une bonne plume 
d'acier ou une belle plume d'or? 19. II en a une d'acier et nous en 
avons une d'or. 20. Le general n'a-t-il pas de bons soldats ? 21. 
II en a de tres braves. 22. Les Americains n'ont ils pas de bonne 
terre? 23. lis en ont d'excellente. 24. Le marchand a-t-il des cou- 
teaux anglais ou francais? 25. Les couteaux du marchand ne sont 
ni anglais ni francos, ils sont beiges. 

Exercise 28. 

1. Has your brother Arabian horses ? 2. Yes, Sir, he has some. 
3. Has he handsome ones ? 4. Yes, Sir, he has handsome ones. 
6. Are the good Americans wrong? 6. No, Miss, they aie not 
wrong, they are right. 7. Have you a French shawl ? 8. Yes, Sir, 
I have one, I have a handsome French shawl. 9. Has your innkeeper 
your silver knife or mine? 10. He has neither yours nor mine, he 
has his sister's handsome steel knife. 11. Has the Belgian a good 
guitar? 12. He has an excellent French guitar. 13. He has an ex- 
cellent one. 14. Has the gentleman amusing books ? 15. Yes, Sir 
he has two. 16. Has the general French or Arabian horses ? 17 



LESSON XVI. 69 

He has neither French nor Arabian horses, he has English horses. 
18. Who has Arabian horses? 19. The Arabian has some. 20. 
Has the Englishman any ? 21. The Englishman has some. 22. Has 
yonr friend's sister a good steel pen? 23. My friend's sister has 
one, but my relations have none. 24. Are you not wrong, Sir ? 
25. Yes, Madam, I am wrong. 26. Are those knives English? 27. 
No, Sir, they are Belgian. 28. Have you relations ? 29. I have 
two, and they are here (ici). 30. Has the English butcher meat? 
81. Yes, Sir, he has much. 32. Has he much money? 33. He has 
but little. 34. Has the Belgian general brave soldiers ? 35. Yes, 
Sir he has good ones. 



LESSON XVI. LECON XVI 

PLAN OF THE EXERCISES IN COMPOSING FRENCH. 

Hitherto the student has been occupied exclusively in acquiring 
facts, forms and principles, and in translating, by the aid of these, 
French into English and again English into French. Following still 
the plan of the work, let him now undertake the higher business of 
endeavoring to compose in French. With this intent, let him take 
some of the words, given for this purpose, in the lists at page 267, 
and seek to incorporate them in sentences entirely his own. The 
words taken from the lists./ are to be used merely as things suggest- 
ive of thought. The form which, in any given case, the sentence 
may assume, should be determined by the models found in the Les- 
sons preceding ; for, every sentence which the pupil has once mas- 
tered in the regular course of the Lessons, is or should be to him a 
model, on which he may at pleasure build other constructions of his 
own. Indeed, this constructing sentences according to models, that 
is, shaping one's thoughts according to the forms and idioms pecu- 
liar to a foreign tongue, is the true and only secret of speaking and 
writing that language well. The pupil, therefore, as he passes along 
in the ordinary course of the Lessons, should frequently be found 
applying his knowledge in the way of actually composing independ- 
ent sentences. In this way, he will soon acquiro a facility and ao- 
curacy in the language, which are hardly otherwise attainable at all 



60 LESSON XYJ 



Comparison. 

1. Adjectives and adverbs are always compared in French, as 
they often are in English, by means of adverbs. 

Plus beau, plus souvent, More beautiful, oftener. 

2. T\iq first part of the comparison for the degree in quality is 
made by : 

Aussi, as, or as much; 1 , , , 

Plus more ■ 1 ^ nese adverbs come almost always be- 

Pas aussi, pas si, not so, not as; \ fore an active, a participle, or an ad- 

Moins, less; J verb. 

Aussi grand, as tall. Plus grand, taller. 

Pas aussi grand, not as tall. Moins grand, less tall, not as taU. 



3. For the degree in quantity we use: 



Autant de, as much, as many ; 

Plus de, more; 

Pas autant de, not as much or as many ; 

Moins de, less, fewer ; 



Coming almost always before a 
noun, an adjective used 'sub- 
stantively, or a possessive or de- 
monstrative pronoun. 



Autant de livres, as many books. Autant de bons, as many good ones. 
Plus de ceux-ci, more of these. Moins des miens, less of mine. 

4. The second part of the comparison is expressed by : 
Que, as, than : when it does not precede a word expressing a quantity 
compared with the word following the first adverb of the comparison. 

Autant de livres que votre frere, A9 many books as your brother. 

Tout autant d'or que sa sceur, Quite as much gold as his sister. 

Plus diligent que sa sceur, More diligent than his sister. 

Que de, as, than: before a word expressing a quantity compared with 
that expressed by the word following the adverb of the first part. 

Plus de livres que de maisons, More books than houses, 

Autant d'or que d'argent, As much gold as silver. 

J'ai tout autant de sucre que de I have quite (or just) as much sugar as 
cafe, coffee. 

Resume or Examples. 



Avez-vous autant de livres anglais, 

que de livres italiens ? 
J 'en ai tout autant. 
J'ai autant de ceux-ci que de ceux- 

la. 
H est aussi heureux que vous. 
Avez vous plus d'assiettes que de 

plats? 



Have you as many English books at 

Italian books f 
I have just as many. 
1 have as many of these as of those. 

He is as happy as you. 

Have you more plates than dishes? 



LESSOR XVI. 



61 



J'ai pl'is de ceux-ci me de ceux-la. 
Est-il plus complaisant que ses 

frercs 1 
Le Fra^ais a-t-il moins de legumes 

que de fruits 1 
II a moins de livres que de manu- 

scrits. 
II n'a pas autant de ceux-ci que 

de ceux-la 1 
En a-t-il moins que yotre frere 1 



I have more of these than of those. 
Is he more obliging than his brothers? 

Has the Frenchman fewer vegetable* 

than fruits? 
He has fewer books than manuscripts. 

He has not so many of tliese as of 

those. 
Has he less (of them) than yowf 

brother ? 
He has quite as many. 



Exercise 29. 

Fer, m. iron ; Manuscrit, m. manu- 

Fromage, m. cheese ; script ; 

Hollandais, m. Zh^cA-Marechal, m. blacksmith; 

man ; Modestie, f. modesty ; 

Italien, ne, Italian; Soie, f. silk; 



11 er a tout autant. 



Bleu, e, blue ; 

Courage, m. courage ; 

Davantage,* more ; 

Drap. m. cloth; 

Ennemi. m. enemy ; 

Espagnol, e, Spaniard, ; Jardin. m. garden ; Tres, very; 

Estampe, f. engraving ; Manteau, m. cloak; Verre, m. glass. 

1. Etes vous aussi content que votre frere? 2. Je suis aussi con- 
tent que votre frere. 3. Votre pere a-t-il autant de courage que de 
modestie ? 4. II a moins de modestie que de courage. 5. Le 
libraire a-t-il autant de manuscrits que d'estampes? 6. II a plus de 
celles-ci que de ceux-la. 7. A-t-il autant d'amis que d'ennemis? 
8. II a plus de ceux-ci que de ceux-la. 9. A-t-il autant de pain que 
de fromage ? 10. II a tout autant de celui-ci que de celui-la. 
11. Le marechal a-t-il plus de chevaux que votre frere? 12. II en a 
plus que mon pere et plus que mon frere. 13. N'avez vous pas 
froid ? 14. Non, Monsieur, je n'ai pas froid, j'ai tres chaud. 15. Avez 
vous deux manteaux de drap? 16. .Pen ai un de drap et un de ve- 
lours bleu. 17. N'avez vous pas plus de verres que . d'assiettes ? 
18. Nous en avons davantage.* 19. Le marechal a-t-il plus de fer 
que d'acier? 20. II n'a pas autant de celui-ci que de celui-la. 
21. Ii a moins de celui-ci que de celui-la. 22. Les Hollandais ont ils 
de beaux jardins? 23. Leursjardins sont tres beaux. 24. Lea 
jardins des Italiens sont plus beaux que ceux des Espagnols. 

Exercise 30. 

1 . Are you more attentive than your sister ? 2. I am not so atten- 
tive as your brother. 3. Have you more courage than my brother 1 
4. I have quite as much. 5. Has the blacksmith as much money as 
iron? 6. He has more of the latter than of the former. [L. 10, R. 5.] 

* Davantage means more. It cai# lever be placed before a u oun ; it may 
be used instead of plus, at the end of a sentence. 



62 LKSSON IVII. 

7. Has Le more modesty than the Spaniard? 8. He has more. 9. He 
has m^re than your friend's sister. 10. Are you not cold, Sir 1 
11. No, Sir, but I am afraid and sleepy. 12. Has the Dutchman 
more cheese than the Italian? 13. He has more cheese and more 
money. 14. Have you as much English silk as Italian silk? 15. I 
have more of this than of that. 16. Who has more friends than the 
Spaniard? 17. Your friend has more. 18. Has the Spaniard as much 
of your money as of his? 19. He has less of mine than of his. 20. 
Have we more silk cloaks than cloth cloaks? 21. We have more of 
these than of those. 22. Have you good cloaks? 23. Yes, Sir, 
have good cloaks, good hats, and good leather shoes. 24. Have you 
more plates than dishes? 25. I have not more plates than dishes; 
but I have more glasses than plates. 26. Are you not very cold ? 
27. No, Sir, I am neither cold nor warm. 28. Has your carpenter 
wood? 29. Yes, Sir, he has wood, money, cheese and meat. 30. Who 
has more money than the carpenter? 31. The Dutchman has more. 
32. Who has more engravings than books ? 33. The bookseller has 
more of these than of those. 34. Arc you as attentive as your 
friend ? 35. I am more attentive than my friend. 



LESSON XVII. LEgON" XVII. 

COMPARISON, ENCORE, <feC. 

t. The superlative absolute is formed by placing tres, fort, orbien, 
vtry, before the adjective. [§ 14, 11.] 

Ces chandeliers sont tres utiles. These candlesticks are very useful. 

Notre tailleur est bien obligeant. Our tailor is very obliging. 

2. The superlative relative is formed by adding the article le, la 
ies, to a comparative. [{ 14, (9.)] 

Votre neveu est le plus savant de tous. Your nephew is the most learned ofaU. 

3. kn^ore is used in French in the sense of more, some more s stny 
more, still, — used affirmatively and interrogatively, but not nega- 
tively. 

Avez vous encore du cafe 1 Have you any more coffee ? 

J'ai encore du cafe. / have more (or some more) coffee 

J'en ai encore. i" hav-e some more, or some left. 

4. Ne — plus is used in the sense of not any more, and no more, oi 
n<?n* left. 

Je n'ai plus de livres. / have no more books. 

Je n'ai plus de choc« N lat. / have no chocolate left 



LESSON XVII. 



63 



5. Ne — guere means but little, but few. 

Je n'ai guere d'aniis. 
Je n'en ai guere. 

6. The pronouns moi, toi, lui, eux, are used instead of lie noim- 
native pronouns je, to, il, ils, after the que of a comparison, and when 
the verb is understood. 



/ have but few friends. 
I have but few — but little. 



Vous etes plus heureux que moi. 
Vous avez plus de merite que lui. 



You are happier than I. 
You have more merit I fain ve. 



Resume of Examples. 



I )tre marchand est bien obligeant. 
V jila le meilleur de ees gallons. 
Nous avons encore des amis. 
Vous avez encore du credit. 

Avez vous encore une piastre ? 

Le ma^ona-t-il encore des briquesl 

II n'en a plus. 

II n'a plus de briques. 
II n'en a guere. 
II n'en a plus guere. 
Je n'ai guere de livres. 
Avez vous plus de courage que lui ? 
II a moins de courage que moi. 
Combien de piastres avez vous en- 
core'? 



Your merchant is very obliging. 
That is the best of those boys. 
We have some more (or still) friends. 
You have still (or yet) credit. 
Have you a dollar left ? 
Has the mason more bricks ? 
He has no more — he has none left. 
He has no more bricks. 
He has but few. 
He has but few left. 
I have but few books. 
Have you more murage than he ? 
He has less courage than I. 
How many dollars have you still, or 
have you left ? 



Exercise 31. 

Correct, e, correct; Neveu, m. nephew; Soeur, f. sister ; 

Credit, m. credit; Niece, f. niece ; Salade, f. salad; 

Beaucoup, much; Nouvelles, f. news; Tante, f. aunt; 

Boyer. Boyer ; Quel, whwh : which one; Tous, all; 

Dictionnaire, m. diction- Savant, e, learned; Ville, f. tovm, city, 
ary; 

1. Votre dictionnaire est il tres correct ? 2. II est plus correct que 
celui de Boyer. 3. Votre dictionnaire est le plus correct de tous. 
4. Quel est le meilleur de ces jardins? 5. Celui-ci est le meilleur de 
tous les jardins de la ville. 6. Avez vous encore de l'argent? 7. Je 
n'ai plus d'argent,mais j'ai encore du credit. 8. Avons nous encore de 
h salade 1 ? 9. Nous n'en avons plus. 10. Nous n'avons plus de 
Viande. 11. Qui en a encore? 12. Mes freres et mes soeurs en ont 
encore. 13. En avez vous encore beaucoup? 14. Je n'en ai plus 
guere. 15. Votre tante a-t-elle plus de robes que votre niece? 16. 
Elle n'en a pas beaucoup. 17. Votre neveu est il plus savant que 
votre niece? 18. II n'est pas aussi savant qu'elle. 19. Elle est plus 
Bavante que lui. 20. Avez vous encore froid? 21. Je n'ai plus froid, 
j'ai bien chaud. 22. N'avez vous plus.de nouvelles? 23. Je n'en ai 
plus. 24 En ivez vous beaucoup? 25. Je n'en ai guere. 



64 lesson xviii. 

Exercise 32. 

1. Has your brother a very good dictionary? 2. His dictionary is 
not very correct. 3. Has your father more courage than he? 4. He 
has much mo~e courage than your nephew. 5. Have your brothers 
credit ? 6. They have but little credit, but they have money. 7. Is 
our aunt obliging? 8. My aunt is very obliging. 9. Have you stili 
ooks, pens, and paper? 10. I have no more books, but I have still 
good pens and excellent English paper. 11. Who has still paper? 
12. I have no more, but my brother has some raor,. 13. Have you 
any news, Sir? 14. No, Madam, I have none to-day. 15. Have you 
as much wood as my brother's son ? 16. I have more than you or he. 
17 Are you still wrong? 18. No, Sir, I am no longer (plus) wrong, 
I am right. 19. Are your sisters still hungry? 20. They are neither 
hungry nor thirsty, but they are still sleepy. 21. Is your niece as 
learned as he? 22. She is more learned than he and (que) his aunt. 
23. Have you no news, Sir ? 24. No, Madam, I have no more news 
25. Who has news? 26. I have no more. 27. Have you them all I 
28. Yes, Sir, I have them all. 29. Has your aunt much of it left? 
30. She has but little more of it. 31. Has your brother any more 
English horses ? 32. He has no more. 33. He has two more. 34. 
Have you a handsome French shawl left? 35. I have no more French 
shawls, but I have an English one. 



LESSON XVHI. LEgON" XVHL 

1. The adverbs of quantity, combien, how much, how many; tro/>, 

too much, too many ; beaucoup, much, many ; assez, enough ; peu, llu 

tie, few; guere, but little, few; and the word pas, meaning no, when 

coming before a noun or an adjective, are followed ty the preposi. 

lion de. 

Combien de fleurs avez vous ? How many flowers have vol ? 

J'ai beaucoup de fleurs. I have many flmvers. 

Vous avez trop de loisir. You have too much leisure. 

Votre scaur a assez de temps. Your sister has time enough. 

2. The adverb bien, used in the sense of beaucoup (much, many,) la 
followed by the preposition de, joinec to or blended with the articte 
le, la, les. [L. 6.] 

Vous avez bien de la complaisance. You have much kindness. 
Elle a bien des amis. She has many friends. 



LESSON XVIII. 



65 



3. Que] uie chose, something, any thing [L. 7, 6.] and rien, nothing, 

mti any thing, take de before an adjective. 

Votreami a quelque chose d'agre- Your friend has something pleasant. 

able. 

Avez vous quelque chose de bon 7 Have you any thing good ? 

Je n'ai rien de bon. / have nothing {not any thing) good. 

4. Quel, m., quelle,/., quels, m. p., quelles,/.^?., are used interro- 
gatively for which or what before a noun. 

Quelle serviette avez vous 1 What or which napkin have you ? 

Quelles bourses votre ami a-t-il 1 What purses has your friend ? 

5. Que is used for what before a verb. 

Qu'avez vous 1 What is the matter with you ? 

6. Lequel, m., laquelle, /, lesquels, m. p., lesquelles, /. p., are 
used absolutely for the word which, not followed by a noun, and 
equivalent to which one, which ones. 

Lequel votre tils a-t-il 1 Which {one) has your son ? 

Lesquelles avons nous 1 Which {ones) have we ? 

7. Quel ques is used before a plural noun for a few, some; quelque? 
uns, m., quelques unes,/., are used absolutely, with the same mean 
ing — Plusieurs means several, and is invariable. 

Le Danois a-t-il quelques pommes 1 Has the Dane a few apples? 
II en a quelques unes. He has a few. 

II en a plusieurs. He has several. 

Kesume of Examples. 



Sombien de poires avez vous 1 
Nous avons beaucoup de poires. 
Nous en avons beaucoup. 
Nous avons assez de cerises. 
Nous n'en avons pas assez. 
Vous n'avez guere de peches. 
Votre jardinier a bien des peches. 
N'avez vous pas de peches 1 
J'ai beaucoup de peches et d'abri- 

cots. 
Le boucher a-t-il quelque chose de 

bon. 
II a quelque chose de bon et de 

mauvais. 
II n'a rien de bon. 
Quelles poires /. avez vous 1 
Nous avons celles de votre sceur. 
Quel habit m. avez vous 1 
Nous avons celui du tailleur. 
Qu'avez vous de bon 1 
Lequel avez vous 1 
Lesquels votre frere a-t-il 1 
J'ai du fruit mur 1 



Hmo many pears have you ? 

We have many pears. 

We have many {of them). 

We have cherries enough. 

We have not enough {of them). 

You have but few peaches. 

Your gardener has many peaches. 

Have you no peaches ? 

I have many peaches and apricots. 

Has the butcher any thing good ? 

He has something good and bad. 

He has not any thing (nothing) good 

What or which pears have you ? 

We have your sister's. 

Which or what coat have you ? 

We have the tailor' 's. 

What have you good ? 

Which {one) have you ? 

Which (ones) has your brother ? 

I have ripe fruit. 



66 LESSON XVIII. 



Exercise 33. 

Abricot, m. apricot; Fleur, f. flower; Pommes, f. apple ; 

Anana, m. pineapple; Legume, m. vegetable ; Pomme-de-terre, f. po* 

Beurre, m. butter ; Magasin, m. warehouse ; tato ; 

Cerise, f. cherry ; Oncle, m. uncle; Prune, f plum; 

Epicier, m. grocer ; Poire, f. pea/r ; Sucre, m. sugar; 

fitranger, e, foreign ; Poivre, m. pepper ; The, m. tea. 
Jardin, m. garden ; 

1. Combien de pommes-de-terre votre frere a-t-il ? 2. II n'en 
pas beaucoup. 3. L'epicier a-t-il beaucoup de sucre dans son ma- 
gasin ? 4. II n'en a guere, mais il a beaucoup de beurre et de poivxe. 
5. Votre jardinier a-t-il beaucoup de cerises ? 6. Ila plus de cerises 
que de prunes. 7. Les prunes sont elles meilleures que les cerises ? 
8. Les cerises sont meilleures que les prunes. 9. Avez vous quel- 
ques poires mures? 10. Nous en avons quelques unes, nous avons 
aussi beaucoup d'ananas et d'abricots. 11. Votre oncle a-t-il quel- 
que chose de bon dans son jardin? 12. II a quelque chose de bon 
et de beau. 13. II a de beaux legumes et de belles fleurs. 14. Avez 
vous des fleurs etrangeres ? 15. J'en ai quelques unes. 16. Les- 
quelles avez vous ? 17. Tai celles de votre frere et celles de votre 
jardinier. 18. N'avez vous pas aussi les miennes? 19. Non, Mon- 
sieur, je ne les ai pas. 20. Qui en a beaucoup? 21. Personne n'en 
a beaucoup. 22. J'en ai quelques unes. 23. Avez vous assez de 
the ? 24. J'en ai assez. 25. J'en ai plus que lui. 

Exercise 34. 

1. Has your gardener many vegetables? 2. Yes, Sir, he has many. 
3. How many gardens has he ? 4. He has several gardens and seve- 
ral houses. 5. Have you many books ? 6. I have but few, but my 
friend has many. 7. What coat has your brother? 8. He has a good 
cloth coat. 9. Has your uncle many peaches ? 10. He has but few 
peaches, but he has many cherries. 11. How many plums has the 
tailor? 12. The tailor has no plums, he has cloth and silk. 13. What 
silk has your friend the merchant? 14. He has a great deal (beau* 
coup) of silk, and a great deal of money. 15. Has the gardener any 
thing good ?ti (dans) his garden? 16. He has many pineapples. 
17. Has he more vegetables than fruit? 18. He lias more of this than 
of those. 19. Has your uncle many pears and cherries? 20. He has 
a few, and he has many apples and plums. 21. Have you a few? 
22. I have still many, but my brother has no more. 23. Which 
peaches has he? 24. He has large (grosses) peaches. 25. Which 
(cnes) have you? 26. Ihav3 the best peaches. 27. Has the mer- 



LESSON XIX, 



67 



uhant any thin g gooo in his warehouse ? 28. He has nothing good in 
nis warehouse, but he has something good m his garden. 29. How 
many potatoes has the foreigner? 30. He has not many. 31. Has he 
good vegetables ? 32. He has good vegetables. 33. Is he right or 
wrong ? 34. He is right, but you are wrong. 35. He has neither 
this book nor that, he has the bookseller's. 



LESSON XIX. 



LEQON XIX. 



1. The relative pronoun, que, whom, which, that, and the conjunc- 
tion, que, that, are never omitted in French, a ad must be repeated be- 
fore every verb depending on them. [} 109.J 

Les crayons que j'ai sont meilleurs The pencils (which) I have, are better 
que ceux que vous avez. than those (which) you have. 

2. Ne, before the verb, and que after it, are used in the sense of 
only, but. 

Je n'ai qu'un ami. I have but one friend. 

3. L'un et l'autre, means both; les uns et les autres, these and 
those, the latter and the former. [{41, (11.)] 

Vous avez Tun et l'autre. You have both. 

4. Cardinal and ordinal numbers as far as twenty. [§ 22, 23.] 



Cardinal. 


Ordinal 




Un, m. vne, f. 


One, 


Premier, m. e, f. 


First, 


Deux, 


Two, 


Second, m. e,/. 
Deuxieme, 


Second, 


Trois, 


Three, 


Troisiefme, 


Tltird, 


Quatre, 


Four, 


Quatrieme, 


Fourth, 


Cinq, 


Five, 


Cinquieme, 


Fifth, 


Six, 


Six, 


Sixieme, 


Sixth, 


Sept, 


Seven, 


Septieme, 


Seventh, 


Huit, 


Eight, 


Huitieme, 


Eighth, 


Neuf, 


Nine, 


Neuvieme, 


Ninth, 


Dix, 


Ten, 


Dixieme, 


Tenth, 


Onze, 


Eleven, 


Onzieme, 


Eleventh, 


Douze. 


Twelve, 


Douzicme, 


Twelfth, 


Treize, 


Thirteen, 


Treizieme, 


Thirteenth, 


Quatorze 


Fourteen, 


Quatorziemo, 


Fourteenth, 


Quinze, 


Fifteen, 


Quinzieme, 


Fifteenth, 


Seize, 


Sixteen, 


Seizieme, 


Sixteenth, 


Dix-sept, 


Seventeen, 


Dix-septieme, 


Seventeenth % 


Dix-huit. 


Eighteen, 


Dix-huitieme, 


Eighteenth, 


Dix-neuf, 


Nineteen, 


Dix-neuvieme, 


Nineteenth, 


Vingt, 


Twenty. 


Vingtieme, 


Twentieth. 



08 LESSON XII. 

5. The cardinal numbers are used, in French, for the day of tne 
month, except the first, for which the ordinal number premier is 
substituted : — 

Le dix aout, le cinq juillet, The tenth of August, tJie fifth of July. 

Le premier du mois prochain, The first of next month. 

6. The verb avoir, to liave, is used actively, [} 26, (1.)] for the day 
of the month. The verb etre may also be used : — 

Quel jour du mois avons nous 1 Wliat day of the month is it ? 

Nous avons le vingt. It is the twentieth. 

C'est aujourd'hui le dix. To-day is the tenth. 

7. Before the word onze, the article le or la is not elided. [§ 146.] :— 
Nous avons le onze de decembre. We have (it is) the 11th of December, 

Resume of Examples. 

L'ouvrier a-t-il les outils que vous Has the workman the tools which you 

avez 7 I have ? 

Les maisons que j'ai sont elles aussi j Are the houses which I have as good 



bonnes que celles que vous avez 1 
Combien de francs avez vous 1 
Jen'ai que dix francs, mais mon 

frere en a plus de vingt. 
Avons nous le quatorze du mois 7 

Non, Monsieur, nous n'avons que le 

onze. 
Lequel de ces deux volumes avez 

vous 7 ? 
J'ai l'un et l'autre. 
Avez vous la premiere place ou la 

deuxieme 1 
J'ai la premiere, et mon frere a la 

deuxieme. 



as those which you have ? 
How many francs have you? 
I have only ten francs, but my brother 

has more than twenty (of them). 
Is it the fourteenth day of the. 

month? 
No, Sir, It is only the eleventh. 

Which of those two volumes have you? 

I have both. 

Have you the first or the second 

place? 
I have the first, and my brother has 

the second. 



Exercise 35. 

Aujourd'hui, to-day; Fevrier. m. February; Outil, m. tool; 

Canelle, f. cinnamon; Franc, m. franc; Ouvrage, m. work; 

Centime, m. centime — Histoire, f. history; Oeuvres, f. work\. 

the 10(M part of a Italien. m. Italian; Place, f. place; 

franc ; Kilogramme, m. kilo* Quart, m. quarter ; 

Oombien, how m uch, how gramme — about two Septembre, m. Septem* 

many ; pounds ; ber ; 

Cravate, f. cravat; Menuisier, m. joiner; Volume, m. volume. 

Demi, half; Mousseline, f. muslin; 

1. Le cheval que vous avez est il bon? 2. II est meilleur que ceiui 
que vous avez et que celui de notre ami. 3. Combien d'enfants avez 
vous ? 4. Je n'en ai qu'un, mais lTtalien en a plus que moi. 5. Avons 
nous le dix septembre? 6. Non, Monsieur, nous avons le neuf 



LERBOK XIX. 69 

fevrier. 7, Avez vous ma cravate de soie on ma cravate de mousse- 
line? 8. J'ai l'une et l'autre. 9. Avez vous huit kilogrammes de 
canelle? 10 Non, Monsieur, je n'en ai qu'un demi kilogramme. 11. 
Combien de francs avez vous, Monsieur? 12. Je n'ai qu'un demi franc, 
mais mon ami a un franc et demi. 13. Votre soeur a-t-elle vingt cinq 
centimes? 14. Oui, Monsieur, elle a un quart de franc. 15. N'avons 
nous pas le premier aout ? 16. Non, Monsieur, nous avons le six sep- 
tembre. 17. Est-ce aujourd'hui le dix ? 18. Non, Monsieur, c'est le 
onze. 19. Votre frere a-t-il la premiere place? 20. Non, Monsieur, 
il a la dixieme. 21. Votre menuisier a-t-il beaucoup d'outils? 22. 
Oui, Monsieur, il en a beaucoup. 23. Cet ouvrage a-t-il dix volumes ? 
24. Non, Monsieur, il n'en a que neuf. 25. J'ai le sixieme volume 
des oeuvres de Moliere et le premier volume de Phistoire de France 
de Michelet. 

Exercise 36. 

1. Is that cinnamon good? 2. That cinnamon is better than yours 
and your brother's. [R. 1.] 3. What day of the month is it to-day? 
4. It is the sixth. 5. Has your father twenty francs ? 6. No, Sir, he 
has only six francs fifty centimes. 7. How many volumes has your 
work ? 8. It has many, it has fifteen. 9. Has the joiner read (lu) the 
second volume of Michel et's history of France? 10. Yes, Sir, he has 
read the second volume (of it). 11. Has your friend,Moliere's works? 
12. He has only two volumes of them. 13. Have you my cloth coat 
or my velvet coat? 14. We have both. 15. We have this and that. 
16. How much cinnamon have you? 17. We have two kilogrammes. 
18. How many centimes has the merchant? 19. He has twenty- six. 
20. Have you the third or the fourth place? 21. I have neither the 
third nor the fourth, I have the tenth. 22. Are you not ashamed to- 
day ? 23. No, Sir, I am not ashamed, but I am afraid. 24. Have you 
a quarter of a franc ? 25. No, Sir, but I have half a franc. 26. Is 
it the sixth of July? 21. No, Sir, it is the fourth of March. 
28. Has your uncle six children? 29. No, Sir, he has cnly one 
30. Have you ten kilogrammes of meat? 31. I lure only five kilo- 
grammes. 32. Is the butcher's meat good ? 33. It (elle) is not very 
good. 34. How many kilogrammes have you (of it) ? 35 ] have 
only two, but my brother has four. 



VO LESSON XX. 



LESSON XX. LEgON XX. 

1. For the time of the day, the verb £tre, is used unipersonaily is 
French, in the same manner as the verb to be is used in English for 
the same object. The word heure, sing, heures, plur represents 
the English expressions, o'clock, or time, and must always be ex- 

ressecl 

Quelle heure est il 1 What o'clock (time) is it? 

II est une heure. It is one o'clock. 

II est dix heures. It is ten, it is ten o'clock. 

2. Midi is used for twelve o'clock in the day, and minuit, for mid- 
night, or twelve at night. Douze heures is never used except in the 
sense of twelve hours. 

Est il midi 1 Est il minuit % Is it noon ? Is it midnight ? 

3. Et quart, et demie, [§ 84, (2.)] answer to the English expres- 
fiions, a quarter, half-past, after, &c. 

II est neuf heures et quart It is a quarter after nine. 

II est midi et demi. It is half after twelve. 

II est une heure et demie. It is half after one. 

4. Moins un quart, moins vingt minutes, answer to the English 
expressions, a quarter before, twenty minutes before, &c. 

II est dix heures moins un quart. It wants a quarter of ten. 

II est neuf heures moins dix mi- It is ten minutes before nine. 

nutes. 

5. The word demi, preceding the word heure, does not vary. 
Placed after it, it is variable. [{ 84, (2.)] 

Une demi heure. Half an hour. 

Une heure et demie. An hour and a half 

6. The verb avoir, is used actively [$ 43, (2,) (3,)] in French in 
speaking of age, and the word an, year, is always expressed. 

Quel age avez vous % How old are you ? i. e., What age 

have you ? 
J'ai plus de vingt ans. / am more than twenty. 

7. Plus de, moins de, are used for more than, less than, before a 
number. 

Avons nous plus de dix metres de Have we more than ten metres of this 

cette toile d'Hollande 1 Holland (Holland linen) ? 

Vous en avez moins de six aunes. You have less than six ells of it. 



I E 8 S N XX. 



71 



Resume of Examples. 



II n'est pas encore deux heures. 

Est il une heure et demie 1 

II est midi et quart ou midi et demi. 

II est huit heures moins un quart. 

Quel age votre fils a-t-iU 

[] n'a que dix-huit ans. 

Votre beau-frere n'a-t-il pas plus de 
dix-neuf ans 1 

Ma belle soeur n'a pas moins de dix- 
huit ans et demi. 

fist il plus de dix heures a votre 
montre ? 

II n'est que neuf heures a mon 
horloge. 

Votre fils est il plus age que le 
mien'? 

II est plus jeune que le votre. 



It is not yet two o'clock. 

Is it half-past one 1 

It is a quarter or half-past twelve. 

It wants a quarter of eight. 

How old is your son ? 

He is only eighteen years old. 

Is not your brother-in-law more than 

nineteen years old ? 
My sister-in-law is not less than eigh* 

teen years and a half. 
Is it more than ten o'clock by yov* 

watch ? 
It is only nine by my clock. 

Is your son older than mine ? 

He is younger than yours. 



Exercise 37. 

Age, e, old ; Cela, that ; 

Aune, f. ell; Cinquante. fifty ; 

Beau-frere, m. brother- Cousin-germain, m. first 

in-law ; cousin ; 

Beau-fils, m. son-in-law; Enfant, m. child; 
Beau-pere, m. father-in- Fevrier, m. February ; 

law ; Horloge, f. clock; 

Belle-mere, f. mother-in- Indienne, f. printed cal- 

law ; ico ; 

Belle-soeur, f. sister-in- Jeune, young ; 

law; 



Jour, m. day ; 

Maintenant, now ; 

Mars, m. March ; 

Metre, m. metre, a 
French measure about 
three French feet ; 

Mois, m. month; 

Ruban, m. ribbon ; 

Tard, late ; 

Verge, f. yard. 



1. Votre beau-frere est il plus age que le mien? 2. Le v6tre est 
plus jeune que le mien. 3. Quel age a votre belle-mere ? 4. Elle 
a pres de einquante ans. 5. Quelle heure est il maintenant ? 6. 
Tl est six heures passees. 7. £tes vous certain de cela? 8. Oui, 
Monsieur, j'en suis certain. 9. Est il plus de deux heures a votre 
montre? 10. II n'est que midi a ma montre. 11. Avez vous plus 
de elnq ans, mon enfant ? 12. Je n'ai pas encore quatre ans. 13. 
Avez vous plus de six verges d'indienne? 14. J'en ai moins de trois 
metres. 15. Combien d'aunes de ruban votre beau-pere a-t-il? 16. 
il n'a guere de ruban, il n'en a qu'une demi-aune. 17. Est il midi 
moins un quart ? 18. II est plus tard, Monsieur, il est midi et quart. 
19 Quel jour du mois avons nous? 20. Nous avons le six octobre. 
21 N'est-ce pas le huit fevrier que . . . ? 22. Non, Madame, c'est le hufi 
mars. 23. Combien de jardins a votre cousin-germain ? 24. II n'e*i 
a qu'un, mais il est tres beau. 25. II en a plus de dix. 



72 



ifiSSON XXI. 



Exercise 38. 



1. How old is your brother-in-law? 2. He is fifty years old. & 
Is your sister-in-law o'der than mine ? 4. No, Sir, my sister-in-law 
is younger than yours. 5. Is your son twenty-five years old ? 6. 
No, Madam, he is only sixteen. 7. What day of the month have we 
to-day ? 8. We have the eleventh. 9. Have you the twentieth vol- 
ume of Chateaubriand's works? 10. No, Madam, we have the 
eleventh. 11. What o'clock is it, Sir? 12. It is only twelve o'clock. 
13. Is it not later? 14. It wants a quarter of one. 15. It is a quar- 
ter after five. 16. How many yards of this holland (toile d' Hol- 
lander f.) have you ? 17. I have ten ells and a half. 18. I have six 
metres of it, and sixteen yards of Italian silk. 19. Is your mother- 
in-law younger than your father-in-law ? 20. She is younger than 
he. 21. Are you twenty years old? 22. No, Sir, I am only nine- 
teen and a half. 23. Are you sure (stir) that it is ten o'clock. 24. 
Yes, Madam, I am sure of it. 25. Is it twenty minutes of ten ? 26 
No, Sir, it is a quarter before twelve (midi). 27. How many houses 
have you ? 28. I have only one, but my sister-in-law has two. 29. 
Have you mine (f.) or yours ? 30. I have neither yours nor mine, I 
have your son-in-law's. 31. Has your mother-in-law five yards of 
that printed calico ? 32. She has only two yards of it. 83. What 
o'clock is it by (d) your watch? 34. It is half-past four by my 
watch. 35. It is more than seven o'clock by mine (d la mienne). 



LESSON" XXI. LEgON XXI. 

THE FOUR CONJUGATIONS OF VERBS. 

1. The four classes or conjugations, into which the French verba 
are divided are distinguished by the endings of the present of the In- 
finitive [§ 44]. The first conjugation ends in er ; as chanter, to sing ; 
donner, to give ; parler, to speak ; chercher, to seek. 

The second conjugation ends in rc ; as, cherir, to cherish ; punir, to 
punish; munir, to provide ; finir, to finish. 

The termination of the infinitive of the regular verbs of the third 
conjugation, is evoir; as, devoir. <,o owe; recevoir, to receive; that of. 
cue irregular verbs is oir, as valoir, to be worth. 

The fourth conjugation ends in re : as, rendre, to render; fendm 
to split ; tendre, to stretch ; vendre, to sell 



LESSON xx r. 



78 



2. A verb preceded by another verb (other than the auxiliaries 
avoir and etre), or bv a preposition (other than en), is put in the present 
of the iniinitive. 

II va travailler ou lire, He is going to work ar t>o read. 

3. In French, verbs are often connected with others by prepositions 
not answering literally to those which accompany the same verbs in 
English. They also often come together without prepositions. The 
stud< nt will find in \ 129, and the following sections of the Second 
Part, lists of verbs, with the prepositions which they require after 
them. 

4. The following idioms are followed by the preposition de when 

they come before a verb : (§ 132) avoir besoin, to want; avoir cou- 

tume, to be accustomed ; avoir dessein, to intend, to design ; avoir envie, 

to have a wish, a desire ; avoir honte, to be ashamed ; avoir intention, 

or, I'intention, to intend ; avoir le temps, to have time or leisure ; avoir 

le courage, to have courage ; avoir peur, to be afraid ; avoir raison, to 

be right ; avoir regret, to regret ; avoir tort, to be wrong ; avoir sujet 

to have reason ; avoir soin, to take care. 

Cet enfant a besoin de dormir, That child wants to sleep. 

Vous avez honte de eourir, You are ashamed of running 

Resume of Examples. 



Avez vous quelque chose a dire 1 
Je n'ai rien a dire. 
Votre soeur n'a-t-elle rien a ecrire % 
Elle a deux lettres a ecrire. 
A-t-elle le temps de les ecrire 1 
Elle n'a pas dessein de les ecrire. 
Elle n'a pas l'intention de les ecrire. 
Elle n'a pas envie de les ecrire. 
Avez vous peur de danser % 
Je n'ai pas honte de danser. 
Votre cousin a raison de sortir. 
N'avez vous pas soin d 'ecrire 1 
Avez vous le courage d'aller a la 
guerre. 



Have you any thing to say ? 

I have nothing to say. 

Has your sister noViing to write ? 

She has tico letters to write. 

Has she time to write them ? 

She does not design to write them. 

She does not intend, to write them. 

She has no desire to write them. 

Are you afraid to dance ? 

I am not ashamed to dance. 

Your cousin is right to go out. 

Do you not take care to write ? 

Have you the courage to go to the war ? 



Exercise 39. 

Faire, to make ; Marcher, to walk ; 

Fatigue, e, tired, weary ; Mars, m. March ; 

Gazette, f. newspaper ; Ne — rien, nothing ; 

Juillet, m. July ; Page, f. page ; 

Juin, m. June ; Seize, sixteen ; 

Lire, to read; Travailler, toviorfc, labor. 

1. Vfl tre belle-mere a-t-elle quelque chose a faire 1 2. Elle n'a rien 
a fair©. 3. A-t-elle deux pages a ecrire ? 4 Non, Monsieur, elle 



Acheter, to buy ; 
Champ, m. field; 
Danser, to dance; 
De bonne heure, eaily; 
Dormir, to sleep ; 
Ecrire, to write; 



74 ^ LB830N AXI. 

n'en a qu'une. 5. Avez vous l'intention de lire cette gazette ? 6. Oui 
Madame, j'ai l'intention de la lire. 7. Avez vous raisor d'aeheter uu 
habit de velours ? 8. J'ai raison d'en acheter un. 9. V^otre petite 
fille a-t-elle besoin de dormir? 10. Oui, Monsieur, elle a besoin de 
dormir, elle est fatiguee. 11. Avez vous peur de toinber? 12. Jo 
li'ai pas peur de tomber. 13. Le jardinier a-t-il le temps de travailler 
dans les champs ? 14. II n'a pas envie de travailler dans les champs. 
15 Vos champs sont ils aussi grands que les miens? 16. Ilssont 
pms grands que les votres. 17. Avez vous honte de marcher? 
18. Je n'ai pas honte de marcher, mais j'ai honte de danser. 19. Quel 
&ge a votre fils? 20. II a seize ans. 21. Avons nous le deux mars 
ou le cinq juin? 22. Nous avons le vingt-huit juillet. 23. Est il 
midi ? 24. Non, Monsieur il n'est pas encore midi, il n'est que onze 
heures et demie. 25. II est encore de bonne heure. 

Exercise 40. 

1. What has your brother-in-law to do? 2. He has letters to 
write. 3. Does he want to work? 4. Yes, Sir, he wants to work. 
5. Does he intend to read my book ? 6. He does not intend to read 
your book, he has no time. 7. Is your sister ashamed to walk ? 
8. My sister is not ashamed to walk, but my brother is ashamed to 
dance. 9. Has your cousin any thing to say? 10. My cousin has 
nothing to say, she is afraid to speak (jparler). 11. Is it late ? 12. No, 
Madam, it is not late, it is early. 13. Have you a wish to read my 
sister's letter (f.) ? 14. Have you the courage to go to the war ? 15. I 
have not the courage to go to the war. 16. Is your sister right to 
buy a silk dress (f.) ? 17. Yes, Sir, she is right to buy one. 18. Does 
that child want to sleep? 19. No, Sir, that child does not want to 
sleep, he is not tired. 20. Has your brother's gardener a wish to 
work in my garden? 21. He has a wish to work in (dans) mine. 
22. How old is that child ? 23. That child is ten years old. 24. What 
is the day of the month ? 25. It is the ninth of March. 26. Are you 
afraid to walk ? 27. I am not afraid to walk, but I am tired. 28. Have 
you time to read my brother's book? 29. I have time to read his 
book. 30. Has the joiner a wish to speak? 31. He has a wish to 
work and to read. 32. Is your son afraid of falling? 33, He is not 
afraid of falling, but he is afraid of working. 34. What o Jock is it * 
35. It is twelve. 



LESSON XXII, 75 



LESSON" XXII. LEgON XXII. 

1. The expressions avoir besoin, to want ; avoir soin, to take care; 

avoir honte, to be ashamed ; avoir peur, to be afraid, require also tka 

preposition de before a noun. Those idiom3 mean literally, to have 

need, to have care, &c. 

Avez vous besoin de votre frere ? Do you want your brother ? 

J'ai soin de mes efFets. / take care of my things. 

II a honte de sa conduite. He is ashamed of his conduct. 

Elle a peur du chien. She is afraid of the dog. 

2. As these expressions require the preposition de before their ob. 

jeet, they will, of course, require the same preposition before the 

pronoun representing that object. 

J'ai besoin de vous. J want you. 

J'ai soin de lui. / take care of him. 

De qui avez vous besoin 7 Whom do you want ? 

De quoi a-t-elle besoin 1 What does she want? 

3. When the object is not a person, and has been mentioned before 
the pronoun en takes the place of the preposition de, and that of the 
pronoun representing the object. 

Avez vous besoin de votre cheval 1 Do you want your horse ? 

J'en ai besoin. / want it. 

4. The expressions etre fache, to be sorry ; etre etonne, to be as- 
tonished ; etre content, to be satisfied, require the preposition de be- 
fore a noun or pronoun. [{ 88.] 

Je suis fache de son malheur. J am sorry for his misfortune. 

Je suis etonne de sa conduite. lam astonished at his conduct. 

Je suis content de lui. J am pleased with him. 

5. Etre fache, in the sense of to be angry, requires the preposition 
eontre. 

Vous etes fache eontre moi. You are angry with me. 

6. For rules on the government of adjectives, see \ 87, and fol 
lowing Sections. 

Resume of Examples. 



Avez vous besoin d 'argent 1 

J'ai besoin d' argent. 

Je n'en ai pas besoin. [R. 3.] 

En avez vous besoin 1 

J'en ai besoin, et mon frere en a 

besoin aussi. 
Avez vous besoin de votre frere 1 



Do you want money ? 

I want money. 

I do not want any. 

Do you want any ? 

I want some 9 and my brother want* 

some too. 
Do you want your brother ? 



76 



LESSON XXI I. 



J'ai besoin de lui * 

De quoi avez vous besoin'? 

J'ai besoin d'un dietionnaire. 

Avez vous soin de votre livre 1 

J'en ai soin. 

Avez vous soin de votre pere 1 

J ai soin de lui.* 

Votre frere est il fache contre moi ! 

II est fache contre votre sceur. 

Avez vous peur de ce chien 1 

J'en ai peur. 

De qui avez vous honte ? 

Je n'ctl bonte de personne. 

Avez vous besoin de quelque 

chose 1 
Je n'ai besciL de rien. 



I want him. 

What do you want ? 

I want a dictionary. 

Do you take care of your hoak ? 

I take care of it. 

Do you take care of your father 7 

I take care of him. 

Is your brother angry with me ? 

He is angry with your sister. 

Are you afraid of this dog ? 

I am afraid of him. 

Of whom are you asliamed ? 

I am ashamed of nobody. 

Do you want any thing ? 

I want nothing. 



Exercise 41. 

Besoin, m. want, ncd; Fatigue, e, iveary, tired, ,-Parler, to speak; 
Conduite. f. conduct ; Garcon, m.boy ; Reposer, to rest; 

Domestique, m. servant; Jeune homme, m. young Soid m. care ; 
Effets, m. things, clothes; m/M ; Travailler, to work ; 

E tonne, e, astonished; Lire, to read; Vieux, old. 

Fache, e, sorry, angry; 

1. Qui a besoin de pa'n? * Personne n'en a besoin. 3. N'aves 
vous pas besoin de vctre domestique? 4. Oui, Monsieur, j'ai besoin 
de lui.* 5. Votre jtrdiriier a-t-il soin de votre jardin ? 6. Oui, 
Madame, il en a soin. 7 A-t-il bien soin de son vieux pere ? 8. Oui, 
Monsieur, il a bien s<>in ie lui. 9. Votre garcon a-t-il honte de sa 
ccnduite? 10. Oui Mo, isieur, il en a honte. 11. Avez vous peur 
de ce cheval-ci ou c 1 3 celui-la ? 12. Je n'ai peur ni de celui-ci ni de 
celui-la. 13. Notre domestique a-t-il soin devos effets? 14. II en 
a bien soin. 15. Avez vous peur de parler ou de lire ? 16. Je n'ai 
peur ni de parler ni de lire. 17. Etes vous etonne de cette affaire? 
18. Je n'en suis pas etonne. 19. En etes vous fache? 20. Oui, 
Monsieur, j'en suis bien fache. 21. Avez vous besoin de ce garcon? 
22. Oui, Madame, j'ai besoin de lui. 23. N'avez vous pas besoin de 
son iivre? 24. Je n'en ai pas besoin. 25. Avez vous envie de 
travailler ou de lire ? 26. Je n'ai envie ni de travailler ni de lire, 
j'ai envio de me reposer car je suis fatigue. 

Exercise 42. 

1. Do you want your servant? 2. Yes, Sir, I want him. 3. Does 
your brother-in-law want you ? 4. He wants me and my brother.f 

* The word en should be avoided as much as possible in relation te 
persons, 
f Repeat the preposition de. 



LESSOR XXIII. 77 

5. Does he not want money ? 6. He does not want money, he has 
enough. 7. Is your brother sorry for his conduct] 8. He is ver) 
sorry for h's conducw and very angry against you. 9. Does he take 
good (Men) care of his books? 10. He takes good care of them. 
11. How many volumes has he? 12. He has more than you, h^ nas 
more than twenty. 13. What does the young man want? 14. He 
wants his clothes. 15. Do you want to rest (vous reposer)1 16. 
[s not your brother astonished at this? 17. He is astonished at it. 
L8. Have you a wish to read your brother's books? 19. I have a 
wish to read them, but I have no time. 20. Have you time to work ? 
21. I have time to work, but I have no time to read. 22. Does the 
young brother take care of his things? 23. He takes good care of 
them. 24. Is that little boy afraid of the dog? 25. He is not afraid 
of the dog, he is afraid of the horse. 26. Do you want bread? 27. 
I do not want any. 28. Are you pleased with your brother's con- 
duct ? 29. I am pleased with it. 30. Has your brother a wish to 
read my buok ? 31. He has no desire to read your book, he is 
weary. 32. Is that young man angry with you or with his friends) 
33. He is neither angry with me nor with his friends. 34. Do you want 
my dictionary ? 35. I want your dictionary and your b» timer's. 



LESSON XXIH. LEgON XXHi. 

1. If the ending or distinguishing character «tic of the conjugation 
of a verb, in the present of the infinitive, be removed, the part re- 
maining will be the stem of the verb: — 

Chant-er Fin-ir Rec-evoir Rend-re 

2. To that stem are added, in the different simple tenses of a reg- 
ular verb, the terminations proper to the conjugation to which jt be 
ongs [§ 60.] 

3. Participle Present. 

Chant-ant Fin-issant Rec-evant Rend-ant 

Singing Finishing Receiving Rendering 

4. Participle Past. 
Chant-e Fin-i Re 9 -u Rend-u 



Sung Finished Received 



Rendered 



78 



LESSON XXIII. 



5. Terming tion of the Present of the Indicative. 



Je 


chant 


-e 


fin -is 


re^ -ois 


rend 




sing 




finish 


receive 


render 


Tu 


pari 


-es 


cber -is 


aper$ -ois 


vend 




spcakest 




cherishes t 


perceivest 


sellest 


11 


donn 


-e 


fourn -it 


per9 -oit 


tend 




gives 




furnishes 


gathers 


tends 


Nous 


cherch 


-ons 


pun -issons 


cone -evons 


entend 




seek 




punish 


conceive 


hear 


Vous 


port 


-ez 


sais -issez 


d -evez 


perd 




carry 




seize 


otoe 


lose 


lis 


aim 


-ent 


un -issent 


de9 -oivent 


mord 




lo v e, liks 




unite 


deceive 


bite 



-on* 



-ez 



6. The present of the indicative has but one form in French, there- 
fore Je chante, may be rendered in English by, I sing, I do sing, or 
J am singing. 

7. The plural of the present of the indicative may be formed from 
the participle present by changing ant into ons, ez ent. Ex : chantant, 
nous chantons ; finissant, nous finissons ; recevant, nous recevons ; 
rendant, nous tendons. 

8. This rule holds good not only in all the regular, but in almost 
all the irregular verbs. 

9. Verbs may be conjugated interrogatively in French (except in 
the first person singular of the present of the indicative,) [§ 98 (4.) (5.),] 
by placing the pronoun after the verb in all the simple tenses, and 
between the auxiliary and the participle in the compound tenses. 



Chantez vous bien 1 

Avez vous bien chante 1 

N'avez vous pas bien chante 1 

[L. 7, R. 2.] 
Ne chantez vous pas bien ? 
Votre pere parle-t-il bien 1 [L. 4, R. 

6— L. 6, R. 4.] 



Do you sing well ? 
Have you sung well ? 
Have you not sung well ? 

Do you not sing well ? 
Does your father speak well? 



10. The verb porter means to carry. It means also to wear, in 
speaking of garments ; apporter means to bring, and emporter to carry 
away ; aimer means to love, to like, lo be fond of, and takes the prepo- 
sition d before another verb. 



Quel habit portez vous 1 

Je porte un habit de drap noir. 

Votre frere qu' apporte-t-il? [L. 4, 

R. 6.] 
II apporte de l'argent a son ami. 



What coat do you vjear ? 
I wear a coat of black cloth. 
What does your brother bring ? 



He brings money to his friend. 

11. A noun used in a general sense [J 77 (1.)] takes the article le, 
la, F, or les. 

Aimez vous le bceuf ou le mouton 1 Do you like beef or mutton ? 
Je n'ainie ni le bceuf ni le mouton. 1 like neither bsefnor mutton* 



LESSON XXIII. 



?• 



Resume of Examples. 



une chanson ita- 
alle- 



Chantez vous 
lienne 1 

Nous chantons des chansons 
mandes. 

Portez vous ce livre a Thonime % 

Non : je le porte a mon frere. 

Emportez vous tout votre argent 1 

J 'en emporte seulenient une partie. 

Finissez vous votre le9on aujour- 
d'huil 

Nous la finissons ce matin. 

N'aimez vous pas les enfants atten- 
tat i 

Je les aime beaucoup. 

Ne recevez vous pas beaucoup dc 

lettres 1 
Nous en recevons beaucoup. 
Vendez vous beaucoup de marchan- 

dises 1 
Nous en vendons beaucoup. 
Votre frere aime le boeuf et le mou- 

ton. 



Do 



you sing an Italian song 7 



We sing German songs. 

Do you carry this book to the man 7 
No, I carry it to my brother. 
Do you carry away all your money? 
I carry away only a part of it. 
Do you finish your lesson to-day ? 

We finish it this morning. 

Do you not like attentive children 7 

I like them much. 

Do you not receive many letters 7 

We receive many letters. 
Do you sell many goods 7 

We sell many. 

Your brother likes beef and mutUn 



Exercise 43. 

[ We shall hereafter put a hyphen between the stem and the termination oj 
Lie verbs placed in the vocabularies. The nu*mber indicates the conjugation'] 
Aim-er, 1. to love, to Donn-er, 1. to give; Non seulement, not only ; 

like, to be fond of; Fin-ir, 2. to finish; Lecture, f. reading ; 

Autre, other ; Fourn-ir, 2. to furnish; Paille, f. straw ; 

Assez, enough; Gard-er, 1. to keep.; Perd-re, 4. to lose ; 

Chapeau, m. hat; Guere, but little ; Port-er 3 1. to carry, to 

Cher-ir, 2. to cherish ; Habits, m. p. clothes ., wear; 
Cherch-er, 1. to seek, to garments; Rec-evoir, 3. to receive ; 

look for ; Mais, but; Souvent, often; 

Compagnon ; m. compan- Maison. f. house; Toujours, alvjays; 

ion ; Marchand, m. merchant ; Travail, m. labor ; 

Dame, f. lady; Marchandises.f.p.^c^/Trouv-er, 1. to find; 

De bonne heure, early ; Neveu, m. nephew ; Vend-re, 4. to sell. 

D-evoir, 3. to owe ; 

1. Votre mere aime-t-elle la lecture 1 [R. 11.] 2. Oui, Mademoi 
selle, elle l'aime beaucoup plus que sa soeur. 3. Quel chapeau votre 
neveu porte-t-il ? 4. II porte un chapeau de soie, et je porte un cha 
peau de paille. 5. Cette dame aime-t-elle ses enfants? 6. Oxi 
Monsieur, elle les cherit. 7. Fournissez vous des marchandises a 
ces marchands ? 8. Je fournis des marchandises a. ces marchands, et 
ils me donnent de l'argent. 9. Vos compagnons aiment ils les beaux 
habits? [R. 11.] 10. Nos compagnons aiment les beaux habits et 
les bons livres. 11. Cherchez vous mon frere ? 12. Oui, Monsieur, 
je le cherche mais je ne le trouve pas. 13. Votre frere perd-il son 



80 LESSON XXIII. 

temps. 14. U perd son temps et son argent. 15. Perdons noua 
toujours notre temps? 16. Nous le perdons tres eouvent. 17. De* 
vez vous beaucoup d'argent? 18. J'en dois assez, mais je n'en doia 
pas beaucoup. 19. Vendez vous vos deux maisons a notre mede- 
cin ? 20. Je n'en vends qu'une, je garde l'autre pour ma belle-soeur. 
21. Recevez vous de 1'argent aujourd'hui ? 22. Nous n'en recevona 
guere. 23. Votre menuisier finit il son travail de bonne heure ? 
24. II le finit tard. 25. A quelle heure le nnit il ! 26. II le finit a 
midi et demi. 27. Nous finissons le notre a dix heures moins vingt 
minutes. 

Exercise 44. 

1. Does your companion like reading? 2. My companion does 
not like reading. 3. Does your father like good books? [R. 11.] 
4. He likes good books and good clothes.* 5. Do you owe more 
than twenty dollars ? 6. I only owe ten, but my brother owes more 
than fifteen. 7. Are you wrong to finish your work early? 8. I am 
right to finish mine early, and you are wrong not to (de ne pas) fin- 
ish yours. 9. Do you receive much money to-day ? 10. I receive 
but little. 11. Do we give our best books to that little child ? 12. 
We do not give them, we keep them because (parceque) we want 
them. 13. Do you sell your two horses? 14. We do not sell our 
two horses, we keep one of them. 15. Do you finish your work 
this morning (matin) ? 16. Yes, Sir, I finish it this morning early. 
17. Does your brother-in-law like fine clothes? 18. Yes, Madam, he 
likes fine clothes. 19. Do you seek my nephew? 20. Yes, Sir, we 
seek him. 21. Does he lose nistime? 22. He loses not only his 
time, but he loses money. 23. How much money has he lost to- 
day ? 24. He has lost more than ten dollars. 25. Does your joiner 
finish your house ? 26. He finishes my house and my brothers. 
27. Do you sell good hats? 28. We sell silk hats, and silk hats are 
good. [R. 11.] 29. How old is your companion ? 30. He is twelve 
years old, and his sister is fifteen. 31. Does your brother like meat? 
2. He likes meat and bread. 33. Do you recehe your goods at 
two o'clock ? 34. We receive them at half after t ivelve. 35. We 
receive them ten minutes before one. 



Repeat the article. 



LESS OH XXIV. 81 



LESSON XXIV. LEQON XXIV. 

1.. There are in French, as in other languages, verbs which are 
called irregular, because they are not conjugated according to the 
rule, or mode? verb of the conjugation to which they belong. [$ 62.] 

2 Many irregular verbs have tenses which are conjugated regu- 
larly. 

3. The singular of the present of the indicative of the irregular 
verbs, is almost always irregular. 

4. In verbs ending in yer, the y is changed into i before an e mute. 

r« 49.] 

5. Present of the Indicative of the Irregular Verbs. 

Aller, 1. to go; Envoyer, 1. to send; Yenir, 2. to come ; 

Je vais, I go, do go, or J'envoie [R. 4.] I send, do Je viens, / come, do come, 

am going ; send, or am sending ; or am coming ; 

Tu vas, Tu envoies, Tu viens, 

11 va, 11 envoie, 11 vient, 

Nous allons, Nous envoyons, Nous venons, 

Vous allez, Vous envoyez, Vous venez, 

lis vont, lis envoient [R. 4.] lis viennent. 

6. All verbs ending in enir are conjugated like venir. 

7. The student will find in { 62 the irregular verbs alphabetically 
arranged. He should always consult that table, when meeting with 
an irregular verb. 

8. The expression, a. la maison, is used for the English at home, at 

his or her house, &c. 

Le chirurgien est il a la maison 1 Is the surgeon at home ? 

Mon frere est a la maison. My brother is at home. 

9. The preposition chez, placed before •» noun or pronoun, answers 
to the English, at the house of, with (meaning ai the residence of), 
among, etc. [§ 142, (3.)] 

Chez moi, chez ?ui, chez elle, At my house, at his house, at her house. 

Chez nous, chez vous, chez eux, m. At our house, at your house, at their 
chez elles, f. house. 

That is literally, at the house of me, at the house of him, &c. 

Chez mon pere, chez ma soeur, At my father's, at my sister's. 

10. The word avec answers to the English with, meaning merely 
in the company of 

Venez avec nous, ou avec lui. Come with us, or with him. 

11. The word y means to it, at it, at that place, there. It ia gene** 

4* 



62 



LESSON XXIV. 



Is your sister at your house ? 
Yes, Sir, she is there. 



ally placed before the verb, and refers always to something men 
tioned. [\ 39, j 103, \ 104.] 

Votre soeur est elle chez vous 1 
Oui, Monsieur, elle y est. 

12. In French, an answer cannot, as in English, consist merely of 
an auxiliary or a verb preceded by a nominative pronoun ; as, Do 
you come to my house to-day? / do. Have you books? J have. 
The sentence in French must be complete; as, / go there; I haw, 
some. The words oui or non, without a verb would however suffice 

Yenez vous chez moi aujourd'hui ? Do you come to my house to-day ? 

Oui, Monsieur, j'irai. Yes, Sir, I will. 

Avez vous des livres chez vous 1 Have you books at home ? 

Oui, Monsieur, nous en avons. Yes, Sir, we have. 

Resume of Examples. 



Ou est le colonel 1 

II est chez son frere aine. 

N'est il pas chez nous 1 

Non, Monsieur, il n'y est pas. 

Madame votre mere est elle a la 

maison 1* 
Non, Madame, elle n'y est pas. 
Allez vous chez nous, ou chez lui 1 

Nous allons chez le capitaine. 
N'est il pas chez votre frere % 
Non, Monsieur, il est chez nous. 
N'envoyez vous pas vos habits chez 

vos soeurs 1 
Je les envoie chez elles. 
N'allez vous pas chez ce monsieur 1 
Je n'y vais pas, je n'ai pas le temps 

d'y aller aujourd'hui. 



Where is the colonel ? 

He is at his eldest brother's. 

Is he not at our house ? 

No, Sir, he is not. 

Is your mother at home ? 

No, Madam, she is not. 

Do you go to our house, or to hi* 

house ? 
We go to the captain's. 
Is he not at your brother's ? 
No, Sir, he is at our house. 
Do you not send your clotlies to your 

sisters 1 f 
I send them to their house. 
Do you not go to that gentleman's ? 
I do not, [R. 12.] / have not time to 

go there to-day. 



Exercise 45. 

All-er, 1. ir, to go ; Horloger, m. watch-ma- Relieur, m. book-binder ; 

Ami, m. friend; ker ; Rest-er, 1. to remain, 

Assoeie, m. partner ; Hollandais, e, Dutch; live; 

Capitaine, m. captain; Magasin, m, warehouse ; Russe, Russian ; 

Deineur-er, 1. to live, Maison, f. house; Ven-ir, 2. ir, to come; 

dwell; Matin, m. morning ; Voisin, e, neighbor. 

Gilet, m. toaistcoat ; Peintre, m. painter ; 

1. Oa allez vous mon ami ? 2. Je vais chez Monsieur votre pere, 
est il a la maison? 3. II y est ce matin. 4. D'ou venez vous? 5, 
Nous venons de chez vous et de chez votre soeur. 6. Qui est chez 



* The French in speaking to a person whom they respect, prefix the 
word Monsieur. Madame, or Mademoiselle to the word representing theii 
interlocutor's relations, or friends. 



LE SS N XXIV. 83 

nous? 7. Mon voisin y est aujourd'hui. 8. Od arez vous Pinter.- 
tion de porter ces livres ? 9. J'ai l'intention de les porter chez le fils 
du medecin. 10. Avez vous tort de rester chez vous ? 11. Je n'ai 
pas tort de rester a la maison. 12. L'horloger a-t-il de bonnes 
montres chez lui? 13. II n'a pas de montres chez lui, il en a dans 
son magasin. 14. Chez qui portez vous vos livres? 15. Je les 
porte chez le relieur. 16. Allez vous chez le capitaine hollandais? 
17. Nous n'allons pas chez le capitaine hollandais, nous allons chez 
le major russe. 18. Est il chez vous ou chez votre frere? 19. II 
demeure chez nous. 20. Ne demeurons nous pas chez votre tail- 
leur? 21. Vous y demeurez. 22. Votre peintre d'oti vient il? 23. 
II vient de chez son associe. 24. Ou portez vous mes souliers et 
mon gilet ? 25. Je porte vos souliers chez le cordonnier et votre 
gilet chez le tailleur. 

Exercise 46. 

1. Where does your friend go ? 2. He is going [L. 23, R. 6.J to 
your house or to your brother's. 3. Does he not intend to go to 
your partner's ? 4. He intends to go there, but he has no time to-day. 
5. What do you want to-day ? 6. I want my waistcoat, which (qui) 
is at the tailor's. 7. Are your clothes at the painter's ? 8. They are 
not there, they are at the tailor's. 9. Where do you live, my friend ? 
10. I live at your sister-in-law's. 11. Is your father at home? 12. 
No, Sir, he is not. 13. Where does your servant carry the wood? 
14. He carries it to the Russian captain's. 15. Does the gentleman 
who (qui) is with your father live at his house? 16. No, Sir, he 
lives with me. 17. Is he wrong to live with you ? 18. No, Sir, he is 
right to live with me. 19. Whence (d'ou) comes the carpenter? 
20. He comes from his partner's house. 21. Has he two partners? 
22. No, Sir, he has only one, who lives here (id). 23. Have you 
time to go to our house this morning ? 24. We have time to go 
there. 25. We intend to go there and to speak to your sister. 26. 
Is she at your house ? 27. She is at her (own) house. 28. Have you 
bread, butter, and cheese at home ? 29. We have bread and butter 
there. 30. We have no cheese there, we do not like cheese. 31. 
Is your watch at the watchmaker's? 32. It (elle) is there. 33 
Have you two gold watches ? 34. I have only one gold watch. 35. 
Who intends to go to my father's this morning ? 38. Nobody in- 
tends to go there. 



84 LESSON XXV 



LESSON XXV. LEgON XXV 

1. In the first person singular of the present of the indicative o* 

almost all those French verbs, which in that person have only one 

syllable, the common interrogative form [L. 23. 9.] is not allowed. 

To render the verb interrogative, the expression est-ce que is prefixed 

to the affirmative form. [} 98, (5.) (6.)] 

Est-ce que je vends du drap 1 Do I sell cloth ? 

Est-ce que je joue souvent 1 Do I play often ? 

2. The first person singular of the indicative of avoir, to have, 

etre, to be ; aller, to go ; pouvoir, to be able ; devoir, to owe ; savoir> 

to know, etc., may, however, be conjugated interrogatively according 

to the general rules. 

Ai-je vos mouchoirs 1 Have I your handkerchiefs ? 

Combien vous dois-je 1 How much do I owe you ? 

3. The form est-ce que is always allowable, and sometimes prefer- 
able, when the first person singular of the present of the indicate e 
of a verb has several syllables, [§ 98, (6.)] 

Est-ce queje vous envoie des livres 1 Do I send you books ? 

Est-ce que je commence a parler 1 Do I begin to speak ? 

4. Est-ce que may, in familiar conversation, be used with all the 
persons of those tenses susceptible of being conjugated interroga- 
tively : — Qu'est-ce que vous lisez ? may be said, instead of, que hsez 
vous? What do you read? 

5. Interrogative Form of the Indicative Present c^' 

Aller, to go. Envoyer, to send. Venir, to coritc. 

S^ce que je vais 1 do I Est-ce que j 'envoie 1 do Est-ce que je vieiLi ? do 
go. or am I going ? I send, or am I sending? I come, or am Ice. dng'i 

Vas-tu ] Envoies-tu 1 Viens-tu % 

Va-t-il 1 Envoie-t-il 7 Vient-il 1 

Allons nous ? Envoy ons nous ? Venons nous ? 

Allez vous 1 Envoy ez vous 1 Venez vous 7 

Vont ils ^ Envoient ils 1 Viennent ils 1 

6. The article le, preceded by the preposition a is contracted into 
au before a noun masculine commencing with a consonant, or an fc 
aspirate; and into aux before a plural noun. [§ 13, (8.)] 

Allez vous au bal ou au marche 1 Do you go to the ball or to market ? 

7. A Teglise means at or to church ; a l'ecole, at or to school : — 
Nous allons a l'eglise et a l'ecole. We go to church and to s:hool. 

8. Quel que part, means somewhere, anywhere; liulle part, no> 
where 



LESSON XXV. 



85 



V}tre naveu ou est ill 
11 est quelque part. 
II n'est nulle >art. 



Where is your nephew ? 
He is somewhere. 
He is nowhere. 



Resume of Examples. 



Est-ce que je vais a l'ecole 1 

Vous allez a l'eglise aujourd'hui. 

Est-ce que je commence mon tra- 
vail ? 

Eet-ce que je parle anglais ? 

Est-ce que j'envoie ce livre a mon 
frere % 

Allez vous au marche- demainl 

J y vais apres-demain. 

Envoyez vous vos enfants a l'ecole ? 

Je les envoie chez le professeur. 

Je les y envoie cette apres-midi. 

Vos habits ou sont ils 1 

ils sont quelque part. 

lis ne sont nulle part. 

Est-ce que je demeure chez vous 1 

Est-ce que je mange trop 1 



Do I go to school? 

You go to church to-day. 

Do I begin my work ? 

Do I speak English ? 

Do I send this book to my brother ? 

Do you go to market to-morrow ? 

I go there the day after t?-morrow. 

Do you send your children to school 1 

I send them to the professor's. 

I send them there this afternoon. 

Where are your clothes ? 

They are somewhere. 

They are nowhere. 

Do I live at your house ? 

Do I eat too much ? 



Exercise 47. 

Cuir, m. leather ; 
Depuis, since; 
Ecole, f. school; 
Ecolier, m. scholar ; 
Eglise, f. church; 
Marche, m. market; 
Noir, e, black; 



Perruquier, m. hair-dre** 

ser ; 
Point, not; 
Poste, f. post-office ; 
Rouge, red; 
Village, m, village; 
Vert, e, green. 



Absent, e, absent; 
Adresse, f. address; 
Banque, f. bank; 
Banquier, m. banker ; 
Billet, m. note; ticket; 
Chapelier, m. hatter; 
Concert, m. concert; 
Coup-er, 1. to cut; 

1. Oa est-ce que je vais? 2. Vous allez chez le chapelier. 3. Est-ce 
que je vais a la banque ? 4. Vous allez a la banque et au conci 
5. Est-ce que je coupe votre bois? 6. Vous ne coupez ni mon b< 
ni mon habit. 7. Est-ce que je porte un chapeau vert? 8. Vous ne 
portez pas un chapeau vert, vous en portez un noir. 9. Votre 
ecolier va-t-il quelque part? 10. II va a l'eglise, a l'ecole et au 
marche. 11. Ne va-t-il pas chez le perruquier? 12. II ne va nulle 
part. 13. Ne portez vous point des bottes de cuir rouge? 14. J'e^ 
porte de cuir noir. 15. N'allez vous pas chez le banquier? 16. Je 
ne vais pas chez lui, il est absent depuis hier. 17. Vient il a la 
banque ce matin? 18. II a l'intention d'y venir, s'il a le terups.* 19. 
A-t-il envie d'aller au concert? 20. II a grande envie d'y aller, mais 
il n'a pas de billet. 21. Demeurez vous dans ce village? 22. Qui, 



* The i of n is elided before il, ils, but in no other case, 
only instance of the elision of i. 



This is the 



86 LESSON XXVI. 

Monsieur, j y demeure. 24. Envoyez vous ce billet a la poste? 25 
Je l'envoie a son adresse. 

Exercise 48. 

1 Do I wear my large black hat ? 2. You wear a handsome greon 
I. at. 3. Does the banker go to the hair-dresser's this morning] 4. 
He goes there this morning. 5. Does he intend to go to the bank 
this morning ] 6. He does not intend to go there, he has no time 
7. Do you send your letters to the post-office? 8. I do not sen 
them, they are not yet written (tcrites). 9. Do I send you a note 

10. You send me a ticket, but I have no wish to go to the concert. 

11. Does your brother go to school to-morrow? 12. He goes (there) 
to-day, and remains at home to-morrow. 13. Do I go there ? 14. You 
do not go anywhere. 15. Where do you go? 16. I am going to 
your brother's, is he at home? 17. He is not at home, he is absent 
since yesterday. 18. Does your brother live in this village? 19. He 
does not, [L. 24. 12.] he lives at my nephew's. 20. Are you wrong 
to go to school? 21. No, Sir, I am right to go to church and to 
schooL 22. Do you wish to come to my house? 23. I like to go to 
your house, and to your brother's. 24. When are you coming to 
our house? 25. To-morrow, if I have time. 26. Does the banker 
like to come here ? 27. He likes to come to your house. 28. Is the 
hair-dresser coming? 29. He is not yet coming. 30. What are you 
sending to the scholar? 31. I am sending books, paper, and clothes. 
32. Where is he ? 33. He is at school. 34. Is the school in the vil- 
lage ? 35. It is there. 



• 



LESSON XXVI. LEgON XXVI. 



1. The verb aller, is used, in French, in the same manner as the 
verb to go, in English, to indicate a proximate future. 

Allez vous ecrire ce matin'? Are you going to write this morning ? 

Je vais ecrire mes lettres. / am going to write my letters. 

2. The verb venir is used idiomatically, in French, to indicate a 

past just elapsed. It requires, in this signification, the preposition 

de before another verb. 

Je viens d'6crire mes lettres. I have just written my letters. 

Nous venons de recevoir des lettres. We have just received letters. 

3. Aller trouver, venir trouver, are used in the sense of to go to, 



LESS ON XX VI. 87 

to come to, in connection with nouns or pronouns representing per 
eons •— 

Allez trouver le ferblantier. Go to the tinman. 

J 5 ai envie d'aller le trouver. / have a desire to go to Mm. 

Venez me trouver a dix heures. Come to me at ten o'clock. 

4. Aller chercher, means to go for ; to go and fetch : — 

Allez chercher le medecin. Go and fetch the physician. 

Je vais chercher du sucre et du cafe. / am going for coffee and sugar 

5. Envoyer chercher, means to send for, to send and fetch : — 

Envoyez chercher le marchand. Send for the merchant. 

J'envoie chercher des legumes. I send for vegetables. 

6. The iirst and second persons of the plural of the imperative) 
are, with few exceptions, the same as the corresponding persons of 
the present of the indicative. The pronouns nous, vous, are not 
used with the imperative. 

7. Plural of the Imperative of Aller, Envoyer, and 

Venir. 

Allons, let us go ; Envoyons, let us send ; Venons, let us come ; 

Allez, go; Envoyez, send ; Venez, come. 

8. Tous, m. tjutes, f. followed by the article les and a plural noun, 
are used in French in the same sense as the word every in English. 

Votre frero vient tous les jours. Your brother comes every day. 

Vous allez a l'ecole tous les matins. You go to school every morning. 

9. Tout, m. toute, f. followed by le or la and the noun in the 
singular, are used for the English expression the whole coining before 
a noun. 

II reste ici toute la journee. He remains here the whole day. 

10. A day of the week or of the month, pointed out as the time 
of an appointment or of an occurrence, is not preceded by a preposi- 
tion in French. 

Venez lundi ou mardi. Come on Monday or Tuesday. 

Venez le quinze ou le seize avril. Come on the fifteenth or siccteentk 

of April. 

11. When the occurrence is a periodical or customary one, tire 

article le is prefixed to the day of the week or the time of the day. 

II vient nous trouver le lundi. He comes to us Mondays. 

II va trouver votre pare l'apres-midi. He goes to your father in the of tei noon 

Resume of Examples. 



Je vais parler & M. votre pere. 
Nous venons de recevoir de l'argent. 
Que venez vovs de faire \ 



I am going to speak to your father. 
We have just received money. 
What have you just done? 



88 



LESSON XXVI. 



Je viens de dcchirer mon habit. 
Votre frere va-t-il trouver son ami % 
II va le trouver tons les jours. 
II vient me trouver tous les lundis. 
Allez vous chercher de l'argent 1 
Je n'en vais pas chercher. 
Envoyez vous chercher des livres 

arabes 7 
Allez vous chez cette dame lundi 7 

J'ai l'intention d'y aller mardi. 
J'y vais ordinairement le mercredi. 
II va a l'eglise le dimanche. 



/ have just torn my coed. 

Does your brother go to hie friend 1 

He goes to him every day. 

He comes to rue every Monday. 

Do you go and fetch money ? 

I do not. [L24. 12] 

Do you send for Arabic books ? 

Do you go to thai lady's house 9% 

Monday ? 
I intend to go titer e on Tuesday. 
I generally go there Wednesdays. 
He goes to chuich Sundays. 



Mardi, m. Tuesday ; 
Mercredi, m. Wednez 

day ; 
Musique, f. music ; 
Prochain. e, next; 
Vendredi, m. Friday ; 
Resteer, 1. to remain, 

live ; 
Samedi, Saturday ; 
Teinturier, m. dyer. 



Exercise 49. 

Annee, f. year ; D imanche. m. Sunday ; 

Apprend~re,4.ir.fr?Ze«r?i; Ecossais, e, Scotch; 
Apres-midi, f. afternoon ; Ecri-re, 4. ir. to write ; 
Commenc-er, 1. to com- Enseign-er, 1. to teach; 

mence ; Excepte, except; 

Conipagne, f. compan- Jeudi, m. Thursday; 

ion ; Journee, f. day ; 

Connaissanees, f. ac- Irlandais, e, Irish ; 

quaintances ; Lundi, m. Monday ; 

Deniain, to-morrow ; Malade, sick; 

1. Qu'allez vous faire ? 2. Je vais apprendre mes lecons 
3. N'allez vous pas eerire a vos connaissances? 4. Je nevais ecrir* 
a personne. 5. Qui vient de vous purler ? 6. L'Irlandais vient da 
nous parler. 7. Quand l'Ecossaise va-t-elle vous enseigner la mu- 
sique ? 8. Elle va me l'enseigner l'annee proehaine. 9. Va-t-elle 
commencer mardi ou mercredi? 10. Elle ne va commencer ni mard? 
ni mercredi, elle a Fintention de commencer jeudi, si elle a le temps. 
11. Votre compagne va-t-elle a l'eglise tous les dimanches ? 12. Elle 
y va tous les dimanches et tous les mercredis. 13. Qui allez vous 
trouver? 14. Je ne vais trouver personne. 15. N'avez vous pas 
l'intention de venir me trouver demain ? 16. J'ai 1'intenticn d'aller 
trouver votre teinturier. 17. Envoyez vous chercher le medecin? 
18. Quand je suis malade, je l'envoie chercher. 19. Reste-t-il avec 
vous toute la journee? 20. II ne reste chez moi que que^ques 
minutes. 21. Allez vous a l'ecole le matin? 22. J'y vais le matin 
et 1'apres-midi. 23. Y allez vous tous les jouis? 24. J'y vais tous 
les jours excepte le lundi et le dimanche. 25. lie samedi je reste chez 
nous, et le dimanche je vais a l'eglise. 

Exercise 50. 

i. What is the Irishman going to do? 2. He is going to teach 
music. 3. Has he just commenced his work? 4. He has just com 



LESSON XXVI 1. 89 

me iced it 5. Who has just written to you ? 6. The dyer has just 
written to me. 7. Does your little boy go to church every day? 
8. No, Sir, he goes to church Sundays and he goes to school every 
day. 9. Do you go for the physician ? 10. I send for him because 
(parceque) my sister is sick. 11. Do you go to my physician or to 
yours? 12. I go to mine, yours is not at home. 13 Where is he ? 
1 4. He is at your father's or at your brother's. 15. Do you inten 
to send for the physician ? 16. I intend to send for him. 17. Am 1 
rigr.it to send for the Scotchman? 18. You are wrong to send for 
him. 19. Do you go to your father in the afternoon? 20. I go to 
niin in the morning. 21. Does your brother go to your uncle's e\ery 
Monday? 22. He goes there every Sunday. 23. Are you going to 
learn music ? 24. My niece is going to learn it, if she has time. 
25. Am I going to read or to write ? 26. You are going to read to 
morrow. 27. Does he go to your house every day? 28. He comes 
to us every Wednesday. 29. At what hour? 30. At a quarter 
before nine. 31. Does he come early or late? 32. He comes at a 
quarter after nine. 33. What do you send for? 34. We send for 
wine, bread, butter and cheese. 35. What do you go for ? 36. We 
go for vegetables, meat and sugar. 37. We want sugar every 
morning. 



LESSON xxvn. LEgON XXVII. 

PLACE OF THE PRONOUNS. 

i. The personal pronoun used as the direct regimen [§ 2, (2.) § 42, 
(4.)] or object of a verb,* is in French placed before the verb, except in 
the second person singular or in the first and second persons plural 
of the imperative used affirmatively. 

II me voit, il l'aime. He sees me, he loves him. 

II nous aime, il vous aime. He loves us, he love$ you. 

2. The personal pronoun representing the indirect regimen of the 
verb, [§ 2, (3.) § 42, (5.)] answering to the dative of the Latin, and to 
the indirect object of the English with the preposition to expressed 
or understood, is also in French placed before the verb : — 

* The young student will easily distinguish the personal pronoun used 
as the direct regimen of a verb, by the fact that there is in English ns 
preposition between the verb and this pronoun. 



90 LESSON XXVII. 

II me parle, il lui parle. He speaks to me, he speahs to him 

II nous donne une fleur. He gives us a flower* 

11 vous jnrle, il leur parle. He speaks to you, he speaks to them. 

3. Thejersonal pronoun is generally placed after the following 

verbs: aller, to go; accourir, to run to; courir, to run; venir s to 

come ; penser a, songer a, to think of: — 

II vient a raoi. He comes to me. 

II pense a vous, a. eux. He thinks of you, of them. 

4 In the imperative used affirmatively, the pronouns follow the 
verb : — 

Aimez les, parlez leur. Love them, speak to them. 

5. The words en and y follow the above rules, except the 3d. 
J'en parle, j'y pense. J speak of it, I think of it. 

6. The pronoun used as indirect regimen, answering to the geni- 
tive or ablative of the Latin, and to the indirect object which in 
English is separated from the verb by a preposition other than to, is 
in French always placed after the verb : — 

Je parle de lui, d'elle, d'eux. I speak of him, of her, of item. 

Je reste avec vous et avec eux. I remain with you and with them. 

7. All pronouns used as objects of verbs, must be repeated : — 

Je les aime, je les respecte, je les / love them, respect and honor tlvem 
honore. 

Resume of Examples. — See § 32. 



M'entendez vous 1 

Je ne vous entends pas. 

Les entendez vous 1 

Je les vois et je les entendfr 

II nous aime et il nous honore, 

Me parlez vous de votre ami 1 

Je vous parle de lui. [R. 6.] 

Nous parlez vous de ces dames 1 

Je vous parle d'elles. 

Ne leur parlez vous pas ? 

Je n'ai pas envie de leur parler. 

Parlez lui, — ne lui parlez pas. 

Allez a. lui, courez a lui. 
Parlez leur, — ne leur parlez pas. 



Do you hear or understand me ? 

7 do not understand or hear you. 

Do you hear them ? 

I see them, and understand them. 

He loves and honors us. 

Do you speak to me of your friend ? 

I speak to you of him. 

Do you speak to us about those ladies ? 

I speak to you of them. 

Do you not speak to them ? 

I have no ivish to speak to them. 

Speak to him or her — do not speak U 

him. 
Go to him — run to him. 
Speak to therrt, — do not speak to then. 

Exercise 51. 

Affaire, f. affair ; Compagnon, m. compan- Nouvelle, f. neivs; 

Arbre, m. tree; ion; Pens-er, 1. to think; 

Avis, m. advice ; Deja, already ; Pokier, m. pear-tree ; 

Cerisier, m. cherry-tree ; Ecri-re, 4. ir. to write ; Pommier, m. a,pple-fo ee \ 
i tommuniqu-er, 1. to com- Exemple, m. example ; Respect-er, 1. to respect, 
« municate ; 

* The preposition to is understood. He gives a flower to us. 



LESSON XXVII. 91 

1. Aliez vous lui ecrire? 2. Je vais lui ecrire et lui communiquer 
cette nouvelle. 3. Allez vous lui parler de moi ? 4. Je vais lui par- 
ler de vous et de voire compagnon. 5. Leur envoyez vous de beaux 
arbres ? 6. Je leur envoie des pommiers, des poiriers, et des censiers ? 
7. Ne m'envoyez vous pas des cerisiers ? 8. Je ne vous en envoie 
pas, vous en avez deja. 9. Avez vous raison de leur parler de cette 
affaire? 10. Je n'ai pas tort de leur parler de cette affaire. 11. Ve- 
nez a nous demain matin. 12. Venez nous trouver, cette apres-midi. 
13. Ailez vous les trouver tous les jours? 14. Je vais les trouvtr 
tous les soirs. 15. Leur donnez vous de bons avis? 16. Je leur 
donne de bons avis et de bons exemples. 17. Nous parlez vous de 
vos soeurs ? 18. Je vous parle d'elles. 19. Ne nous parlez vous pas 
de nos freres? 20. Je vous parle d'eux. 21. Ne les aimez vous 
pas ? 22. Nous les aimons et nous les respe*-tons. 23. Pensez vous 
a. ee livre ou n'y pensez vous pas? 24. Nuus y pensons et nous en 
parlons. 25. Nous n'y pensons pas. 

Exercise 52. 
1. When are you going to write to your brother ? 2. I am going 
to write to him to-morrow morning. 3. Do you intend to write to 
him every Monday ? 4. I intend to write to him every Sunday. 5. 
Have you a wish to speak to him to-day ? 6. I have a wish to speak 
to him, but he is not here. 7. Where is he ? 8. He is at his house. 
9. Do you speak to them ? 10. Yes, Sir, I speak to them about (de) 
this affair. 11. Do they give you good advice? 12. They give me 
good advice and good examples. 13. Do you go to your sister every 
day ? 14. I go to her every morning at a quarter before nine. 15. 
Does she like to see (voir) you? 16. She likes to see me and she 
receives me well. 17. Do you think of this affair? 18. I think of it 
the whole day. 19. Do you speak of it with (avec) your brother? 
20. We speak of it often. 21. Do you send your companion to my 
house ? 22. I send him every day. 23*. Are you at home every 
day ? 24. I am there every morning at ten o'clock. 25. Do ycu like 
to go to church ? 26: I like to go there every Sunday and every 
Wednesday. ' 27. Do you speak of your houses ? 28. I speak of 
them (en). 29. Does your brother speak of his friends ? 30. Yes 
Sir, he speaks of them (d'eux). 31. Does he think of them ? 32. 
Yes, Sir, he thinks of them (d eux). 33. Does he think of this aews 1 
B4. Yes, Sir, he thinks of it (y) 35. I love and honor them. 



92 LESS ON XXVIII. 

LESSON XXVIII. LEgON XXVIII. 

RESPECTIVE PLACE OF THE PRONOUNS. See $ 101 

1. When two pronouns occur, one used as a direct regimen or ob- 
ject (accusative), the other used as the indirect regimen or object 
('dative), the indirect object, if not in the third person singular or plu. 
ral, must precede the direct object. [§ 101, (1.)] 

Je vous le donne. I give it to you. 

II me le donne. He gives it to me. 

II nous le donne. He gives it to us. 

2. When the pronoun used as an indirect object [dative, Rule 2 

L. 26.] is in the third person singular or plural, it must be placed 

after the direct object. [$ 101, (2.)] 

Nous le lui donnons. We give it to him. 

Nous le leur donnons. We give it to them. 

3. The above rules of precedence apply also to the imperative used 
negatively : — 

Ne nous le donnez pas. [R. 1.] Do not give it to us. 

Ne le lui donnez pas. [R. 2.] Do not give it him. 

4. With the imperative used affirmatively, the direct object pre- 
cedes in all cases the indirect object. [§ 101, (5.)] 

Donnez le nous. Give it to us. 

Montrez le leur. Show it to them. 

6. En and y always follow the other pronouns : — 

Je lui en donne. I give him some. 

II nous y envoie. He sends us thither. 

6. Present of the Indicative of the Irregular Verbs, 

Voir, to see; Voulotr, to will, be wil- Pouvoir, to be able; 
ling ; 

Je vois, / see, do see, or Je veux, J will or am Je puis, J can, I may, J 

am seeing ; willing ; am able ; 

Tu vois, ' Tu veux, Tu peux,* 

II voit ; II veut, II peut, 

Nous voyons, Nous voulons, Nous pouvons, 

Vous voyez, Vous voulez, Vous pouvez, 

lis voient, lis veulent, lis peuvent. 

7. The above verbs take no preposition before another*verb. , 

8. The preposition, pour, is used to render the preposition &>, whei 

the latter means in order to. 

Je vais chez vous pour parler a vo- / go to ytmr house to speak to yo\» 
tre frere et pour vous voir. brother and to see you. 

* After the verbs pouvoir, to be able ; osei to dare savoir, to know 
the negative pas may be omitted. 



LESSON XXVIII. 



93 



J'ai besoin d 'argent pour acheter 
des marehandises. 



/ want money to (in ordei to) buy 
goods. 



Resume of Examples. 



Voulez vous nous le donner 1 

Te veux vous le preter. 

Pouvez vous me les donner /? 

Je ne puis vous les donner. 

Votre frere peut il le lui envoyer 1 

11 ne veut pas le lui envoyer. 

Qui veut le leur preter ? 

Personne ne veut le leur preter. 

Envoyez les nous. 

Ne nous les envoyez pad 

Donnez nous en. 

Ne leur en envoyez pas. 

Envoyez le leur, pour les conJenter. 

Je puis vous l'y envoyer. 



Will you give it to us? 

I will lend it to you. 

Can you give them to me ? 

I cannot give them to you. 

Can your brother send it to him* 

He will not send it to him. 

Who will lend it to them ? 

No one will lend it to them. 

Send t/iem to us. 

Do not send them to us. 

Give us some (of it). 

Do not send them any. 

Send it to them (in order) to satisfy 

them. 
I can send it to you there. 



Exercise 53. 

Commis, m. clerk; Guere, but little; Poisson, m. fish; 

Connaissance, f. acquain- Marchande de modes, f. Pologne, f. Poland; 

tance; milliner ; Preter, 1. to lend; 

Croi-re, 4. ir. to believe ; Montr-er, 1. to show; Semaine,/. yjeek ; 
Dette, f. debt ; Oubli-er, 1. to forget ; Souvent, often ; 

D-evoir, 3. to owe ; Pay-er, 1. to pay ; Voyage, m. journey. 

1. Voulez vous donner ce livre a mon frere? 2. Je puis le lui 
tfreter, mais je ne puis le lui donner. 3. Voulez vous nous les en- 
voyer ? 4. La marchande de modes peut vous les envoyer. 5. Les 
lui montrez vous? 6. Je les vois et je les lui montre. 7. Avez vous 
peurde nous les preter? 8. Je n'ai pas peur de vous les preter. 9 
Ne pouvez vous nous envoyer du poisson? 10. Je ne puis vous en 
envoyer, je n'en ai guere. 11. Voulez vous leur en parler? 12. Je 
veux leur en parler, si je ne l'oublie pas. 13. Venez vous souvent 
les voir ? 14. Je viens les voir tous les matins, et tous les soirs. 15. 
Ne leur parlez vous point de votre voyage en Pologne? 16. Je leur 
en parle, mais ils ne veulent pas me croire. 17. Est-ce que je vois mes 
connaissances, le lundi? 18. Vous les voyez tous les jours de la 
eemaine. 19. Vous envoient elles plus d'argent que le commis de 
notre marchand? 20. Elles m'en envoient plus que lui. 21. En 
envoyez vous au libraire? 22. Je lui en envoie quand je lui en dois. 
23. N'avez vous pas tort de lui en envoyer ? 24. Je ne puis avoir 
tort de payer mes dettes. 25. Ils vous en donnent, et ils vou? en 
Oretent quand vous en avez besoin 



94 LESSON XXIX. 



Exercise 54. 

1. Will you send us that letter? 2. I will send it to you, if you 
will read it. 3. I will read it if (si) I can. 4. Can you lend me your 
pen ? 5. I can lend it to you, if you will take care of it. [L. 22, (3.)] 
6. May I speak to your father ? 7. You may speak to him, he ia 
here. 8. Are you afraid of forgetting it? [L. 21, (4.)] 9. I am 
not afraid of forgetting it. 10. Will y ^>u send them to him ? 11. I 
intend to send them to him, if I have time. 12. Do you speak to 
him of your journey? 13. I speak to him of my journey. 14. I 
speak to them of it. 15. Can you communicate it to him? 16. I 
have a wish to communicate it to him. 17. Do you see your ac- 
quaintances -every Monday ? 18. I see them every Monday and every 
Thursday. 19. Where do you intend to see them ? 20. I intend to 
see them at your brother's and at your sister's. 21. Can you send 
him there every day ? 22. I can send him there every Sunday, if he 
wishes (sHl le veut). 23. Can you give them to me? 24. lean 
give them to you. 25. Who will lend them books ? 26. No one' 
will lend them any. 27. Your bookseller is willing to sell them 
good books and good paper. 28. Is he at home ? 29. He is at his 
brother's. 30. Are you wrong to pay your debts? 31. I am right 
to pay them. 32. Will you send it to us ? 33. I am willing to send 
it to you, if you want it. 34. Are you willing to give them to us ? 
35. We are willing to give them to your acquaintances. 



LESSON XXIX. LEQON XXIX. 

USE OF THE ARTICLE (§ 77.) 

1. The article le, la, les, as already stated, is used in French befoie 

nouns taken in a general sense : — 

Les jardins sont les ornements des Gardens are the ornaments of vil 
villages e i des campagnes. lages and of rural districts. 

2. The article is also used in French, as in English, before nouns 

taken in a particular sense : — 

Les jardins de ce village sont su- The gardens of this village are si*, 
perbes. perb. 

3. It is also used before abstract nouns, before verbs and adjective* 
used substantively : — 



LESSON XXIX. 



95 



La paresse est odieuse. 
La jeunesse nest pas toujours do- 
cile. 

Le boire et le manger sont neces- 
saires a la vie. 



Idleness is odious. 

Youth is not always tractable. 



Eating and, drinking are necessary to 
life. 

4. The article is used before the names of countries, provinces 

rivers, winds and mountains : — [{ 77, (3.) (4.)] 

La Francs est plus grande que France is larger than Italy. 

ritalie. 
La Normandie est tres fertile. Normandy is very fertile. 

5. The article is used before titles : — 



General Cavaignac. 
Marshal Ney. 



Le general Cavaignac. 
Le marechal Ney. 

6. In respectful address or discourse, the words, Monsieur, Ma 

dame, Mademoiselle are placed before titles and designations of 

relationship : — 

Monsieur le president. {Mr.) President. 

Madame la comtesse. (Madam) Countess, 

Mademoiselle votre soeur. (Miss) your sister. 

7. The plural of Monsieur, Madame and Mademoiselle, is Messieurs, 
Mesdames, and Mesdemoiselles. 

8. The student should be careful to distinguish a noun taken in a 
general or in a particular sense from one taken in a partitive sense 
[J 78.] 

General or particular sense. Partitive sense. 

Nous aimons les livres, Nous avons des livres, 

We like books. We have books i. e. some book* 

Nous avons les livres, Vous avez ecrit des lettres. 

We have the books. You have written letters, I e. some 

letters. 



Resume of Examples. 



La modestie est aimable. 

Le courage est indispensable au 
general. 

Les fleurs sont 1'ornement des jar- 
dins. 

Les fleurs des jardins de ce chateau. 

Avez vous l'intention de visiter la 

France 1 
J'ai l'intention de visiter l'ltalie. 
Le capitaine Duinont est il ici 7 
Le major Guillaume est chez lui. 
Voyez vous Madame votre mere? 
Je vois Monsieur votre frere. 
Mvn frere n'aime pas les louanges. 



Modesty is amiable. 
Courage is indispensable to /he gene- 
ral. 
Ilxnoers are the ornament of gardens* 

The flowers of the gardens of tkit 

villa. 
Do you intend visiting F'ance ? 

I intend visiting Italy. 

Is captain Dumimt here? 

Major Willia-m is at home. 

Do you see your mother ? 

I see your brother. 

My brotJier is not fond of presses, 



86 LESSON XXIX. 

Exercise 55. 

Aim-er, 1. to be fond of, Demeur-er, 1. to dwell. Legume, m. vegetable / 

to tike ; live ; Loin, far ; 

Apport-er, 1. to bring ; fitudi-er, 1. to study ; Lundi, m. Monday; 
Bois. m. wood, forest ; Fleur, f. flower ; Peche, f. peach; 

Capitaine, m. captain; Fraise, f. strawberry ; Prune, £ plum. 
Caporal, m. corporal; Framboise, f. raspberry ; 

1. Aimez vous le pain ou la viande ? 2. J'aime le pain, la viande, 
et le fruit. 3. Avons nous des peches dans notre jardin ? 4. Nous y 
avons des peches, des fraises, des framboises et des cerises. 5. Mon- 
sieur votre frere aime-t-il les cerises ? 6. II n'aime guere les cerises, 
il prefere les prunes. 7. Avez vous des legumes? 8. Je n'aime 
point les legumes. 9. Nous n'avons ni legumes ni fruits. [L. 8. 3, 4.] 
10. Nous n'aimons ni les legumes ni les fruits. 11. Allez vous tous 
les jours dans le bois de Monsieur votre frere? 12. Je n'y vais pas 
tous les jours. 13. Votre soeur apporte-t-elle les fleurs ? 14. Elle 
les apporte. 15. Madame votre mere apporte-t-elle des rleurs ? 

16. Elle en apporte tous les lundis. 17. Voyez vous le general Ber- 
trand? 18. Je ne le vois pas, je vois le caporal Duchene. 19. Mes- 
demoiselles vos soeurs sont elles fatiguees? 20. Mes soeurs sont 
fatiguees d'etudier. 21. Monsieur le president est-il chez lui? 
22, Non, Monsieur, il est chez Monsieur le colonel Dumont. 23. De- 
meure-t-il loin d'ici? 24. II ne demeure pas loin d'ici. 25. Ou 
demeure-t-ii ? 26. II demeure chez Monsieur le capitaine Lebrun. 

Exercise 5Q. 
1. Does your sister like flowers? 2. My sister likes flowers, and 
my brother is fond of books. 3. Is he wrong to like books ? 4. No, 
Sir, he is right to like books and flowers. 5. Have you many flowers 
in your gardens? 6. We have many flowers and much fruit. 7. Is 
your cousin fond of raspberries ? 8. My cousin is fond of raspberries 
and * strawberries. 9. Is the captain fond of praises? 10. He is not 
fond of praises. 11. Has the gardener brought you vegetables* 
12. He has brought me vegetables and fruit.* 13. Is he ashamed to 
bring you vegetables? 14. He is neither ashamed nor afraid to sell 
vegetables. 15. Is your mother tired? 16. My mother is not tired. 

17. Is your brother at colonel D's? 18. He lives at colonel D's, but 
he is not at home at present (a present). 19. How many peaches 
have you ? 20. I have not many peaches, but I have many plums. 
21. Does Capt. B. like peaches? 22. He likes peaches,* plums, 

* The student must not forget that the article is repeated before every 
ooun. 



LESiON XXL 9? 

raspberries, and strawberries. 23. Are you g< /ag ii to (dans) your 
brother's wood? 24. I go there every morning. 25. Is genera] L. 
here? 26. No, Sir, he is not here, he is at your cousin's. 27. Does 
your friend, General H. live far from here? 28. He does not live far 
from here, he lives at his brother's. 29. Have you fine flowers in 
your garden? 30. We have very fine flowers; we are fond of 
flowers. 31. Do you give them to him? 32. I give them to you. 
33. I give you some. 34. I give them some. 35. Give us some. 
$6. Do not give us any. 



LESSON XXX. LEgOJST XXX. 

USE OF THE ARTICLE CONTINUED. 

1. Adjectives of nation will, according to R. 3 of the last lesson, 
be preceded by the article : — 

II apprerid le fran^ais, l'anglais, He learns French, English, German 
l'alleniand et l'italien. and Italian. 

2. After the verb parler, the article may be omitted before an ad- 
jective of nation, taken substantively : — 

Votre frere parle espagnol et portu- Your brother speaks Spanish and 
gais. Portuguese. 

3. The article is not used in French before the number which fol- 
lows the name of a sovereign. This number, (unless it he first and 
second) must be the cardinal, and not the ordinal: — [§ 26, (3.)] 

Vous avez Thistoire de Henri qua- You have the history of Henry the 
tre. Fourth. 

4. A word placed in apposition with a noun or pronoun is not in 
French preceded by un, une, a or an, unless it be qualified by an ad- 
jective or determined by the following part of the sentence. 

Votre ami est medecin. Your friend is a physician. 

Notre frere est avocat. Our brother is a barrister. 

Votre ami est un bon medecin. Your friend is a good physician. 

Notre frere est un avocat celebre. Our brother is a celebrated advocate* 

5. Present of the Indicative of the If.regular Verbs; 

Apprendre, to learn; ConnaItre, to know • Savoir, to know ; 

J'apprends, J learn, do Je connais, / know, Dr Je sais, I k?v?w. or do 

learn, or am learning ; do know ; know ; 

Tu apprends, Tu connais Tu sais, 

II apprend. II connait, II sait, 

Nous apprenons, Nous connaissons, Nous savons, 

Vous apprenez, Vous connaissez, Vous savez, 

lis apprennent. lis connaissent. lis saveDt. 

6 



93 



LESSON XXX. 



6. ConnaUre means to he acquainted with ; savoir, to know, is said 



only of things. 

Connaissez vous ce Francais, cet 
Anglais, cet Allemand, et cet 
JEspagnol ? 

Savez vous le francais, l'anglais, 
l'aUemand, et l'espagnol ? 



Do you know that Frenchman, that 
Englishman, that German, and 
that Spaniard? 

Do you know French, English, Ger* 
man, and Spanish f 



Resume of Examples. 



Le capitaine G-. sait il le francais ? 

Jl ne le sait pas, mais il l'apprend. 

Connaissez vous le Docteur L. ? 

Je ne le connais pas, mais je sais ou 
il demeure. 

Ce monsieur est il peintre ? 

Non, il est architects 

Ce monsieur est un architecte dis- 
tingue. 

Ce Francais parle grec et arabe. 

H parle le grec, 1' arabe et l'italien. 

Avez vous vu Charles dix, frere de 
Louis dix-huit ? 



Does captain G. know French t 
He does not know it, hut learns it 
Do you know Dr. L, 1 
I am not acquainted with him, but I 

know where he lives. 
Is that gentleman a painter ? 
No, he is an architect. 
That gentleman is a distinguished 

architect. 
That Frenchman speaks Greek and 

Arabic. 
He speaks the Greek, Arabic, and 

Italian languages. 
Have you seen Charles the Tenth, a 

brother of Louis the Eighteenth t 



Exercise 57. 



Allemand, e, German; 

Ancien, ne, ancient; 

Anglais, e, English; 

Chinois, e, Chinese; 

Danois, e, Danish, Dane ; Quatorze, fourteen ; 

Grec, que, Greek; 



Hongrois, e, Hungarian ; Quatre, four ; 
Langue, f, language; Russe, Russian; 
Modern e, modern; Suedois, e, Swedish, 

Polonais, e, Polish, Pole ; Swede ; 

Tapissier, m, upholsterer. 



1. Connaissez vous ce Monsieur ? 2. Oui, Madame, je le connais 
fort bien. 3. Savez vous de quel pays il est ? 4. II est hongrois. 
5. Parle-t-il allemand? 6. II parls allemand, polonais, russe, sue- 
dois, et danois. 7. N'est il pas medecin ? 8. Non, Monsieur, avant 
la revolution, il etait capitaine, 9. Avez vous envie d'apprendre le 
russe ? 10. J'ai envie d'apprende le russe et le grec moderne. 11. 
Connaissez vous les messieurs qui parlent a votre sceur? 12. Je 
ne les connais pas. 13. Savez vous ou ils demeurent? 14. lis de- 
meurent chez le tapissier de votre frere. 15. N'avez vous pas This- 
toire de Louis quatorze, dans votre bibliotheque ? 16. Je n'ai ni 
celle de Louis quatorze, ni celle de Henri quatre. 17. Avez vous 
tort d'apprendre le chinois ? 18. Je n'ai, pas tort d'apprendre le cn> 
nois. 19. Vos compagnons apprennent ils les langues anciennes ? 
20. Ils savent plusieurs langues anciennes et modernes. 21. Parlez 
vous anglais ? 22. Je sais l'anglais et je le parle. 23. Connaissez 



LESSON XXXI. 99 

vous l'Anglaia que nous voyons? 24. Je ne le connais pas. 25. L 
ne me connait pas et je ne le connais pas. 

Exercise 58. 
1. Does our physician know French ? ' 2. He knows French, Eng- 
lish, and German. 3. Does he know the French physician ? 4. He 
knows him very well. 5. Are you acquainted with that lady ? 6. I 
am not acquainted with her. 7. Is she a German or a Swede ? 8. 
She is neither a German nor a Swede, she is a Russian. 9. Do you 
intend to speak to her ? 10. I intend to speak to her in (en) English. 
11. Does she know English? 12. She knows several languages; 
she speaks English, Danish, Swedish, and Hungarian. 13. Is your 
brother a colonel ? 14. No, Sir, he is a captain. 15. Is your up- 
holsterer a Dane? 16. He is not a Dane, he is a Swede. 17. Are 
you a Frenchman? 18. No, Sir, I am a Hungarian. 19. Do you 
know Chinese ? 20. I know Chinese, Russian, and modern Greek. 
21. Are you wrong to learn languages ? 22. I am not wrong to 
karn languages. 23. Do you know the Englishman who lives at 
your brother's ? 24. I am acquainted with him. 25. I am not ac- 
quainted with him. 26. Do you like books? 27. I am fond of 
books. 28. Have you a desire to learn Russian ? 29. I have no de- 
sire to learn Russian. 30. Have you no time ? 31. I have but little 
time. 32. What do you learn ? 33. We learn Latin, Greek, French, 
and German. 34. Do you not learn Spanish? 35. We do not 
learn it. 



LESSON XXXI. LEgON XXXi. 

RELATIVE PRONOUNS, ($ 38). 

1. Qui, used as nominative, may relate to persons or to things :—> 
Les fleurs qui sont dans votre jardin. The flowers which are in your garden. 

2. Qui, used as the object of a verb, can only be said of persons. 

It is used interrogatively with or without a preposition : — 

Qui votre frere voit il 7 Whom does your brother see ? 

De qui paries vous ce matin 1 Of whom do you speak this morning ? 

S. Que may be said of persons or things. It can never be under* 
stood, and must be repeated before every verb. [L. 19. 1.] 

Les personnes que nous voyons. The persons whom we see. 

Les langues que nous apprenons. The languages which we lezrn. 

4. Ce que is employed for that which, or its equivalent what : — 

Ce que vous apprenez est utile. That which you learn is useful. 

Trouvez vous ce que vous cherchez. Do you find what you seek? 



100 



LESSON XXXI. 



De quoi voulez vous parler 1 
A quoi pensez vous % 



Lequel avez vous apporte 1 
Duquel parlez vous ^ 



5. Que answers to the English pronoun what, used absolutely be- 
fore a verb: — 

Que pensez vous de cela 1 What do you think of that ? 

6. Quoi, when not used as an exclamation, is generally preceded 
\ y a preposition, and relates only to things : — 

Of tohal do you wish to speak ? 
Of what do you think ? 

7. Lequel, m., laquelle, f., lesquels, m. p., lesquelles, f. y., which, oi 

which one, [L. 18. 6.] or which ones, relate to persons or things. They 

may be preceded by a preposition : — 

Which one have you brought ? 
Of which one do you speak ? 

8. Dont, of which, or of whom, whose, may relate to persons or 

things, in the masculine or feminine, singular or plural. It can never 

be used absolutely and must always be preceded by an antecedent. 

It is preferable to de qui or duquel, &c, 

Les fleurs dont vous me parlez. The flowers of which you speak to me. 

Les demoiselles dont votre soeur vous The young ladies of whom your sister 
parle. speaks to you. 

9. Present of the Indicative of the Irregular Verbs, 

Di-re, 4. to say. Fai-re, 4. to make, to do. Mett-re, 4. to put. 

Je dis, / say, do say, or Je fais, / make or do, I Je mets, I put, do put, oi 

am saying. am making or doing. am putting. 

Tu dis, Tu fais, Tu mets, 

II dit, II fait, II met, 

Nous disons, Nous faisons, Nous mettons, 

Vous dites, Vous faites, Vous mettez, 

lis disent. lis font. lis mettent. 



Kesume of Examples. 



Connaissez vous le monsieur qui 

parle a notre cousin 1 
Je connais celui qui lui parle. 
Comprenez vous ce que je vous disl 
Qui vous a parle de cette affaire 1 
L : Anglais dont vous parlez est ici. 

L'Espagnol dont la soeur est ici. 
Que faites vous ce matin 1 
Que dites vous a notre ami 7 
Nous faisons ce que vous nous dites. 
Pour qui faites vous cet habit % 
De quoi parlez vous a votre frere 1 
Nous faisons ce qie nous pouvons. 
Nousparlons de ce dont vous parlez. 



Do you know the gentleman wht 

speaks to our cousin ? 
I know him who speaks to him. 
Do you understand what I say to you ? 
Who has spoken to you of this affair 1 
The Englishman of wham you speak 

is here. 
The Spaniard whose sister is here. 
What do you do this morning ? 
What do you say to our friend? 
We do that which you say to us. 
For whom do you make this coat ? 
Of what do you spea k to your brother 1 
We do what ive can. 
We speak ofthut ofiozich you speak, 



LESSON XXXI. 101 



Exercise 59. 



Arriv-er, 1. to an we; Habillement, m. dress, Plaisir, rr.. pleasvjre: 
Avec, with, clvthes; Presque. almost; 

Coffre r m. t^unk; Hollandais, e, Dutch; Rien, nothing ; 

Command-er, 1. to oi der; Linge, m. linen; Soulier, m. shoe; 

Ecossais, e, Scotch; Monsieur, m. gentleman ; Vrai. e. true. 
Enfant, m. child; - Noni, m. name; 

1. Qui connaissez vous? 2. Nous connaissons les Hollandais dont 
vous nous parlez. 3. Quelles lemons apprenez vous ? 4. Nous ap» 
prenons les lecons que vous nous recommandez. 5. Ce que je vous 
dis est il vrai ? 6. Ce que vous nous dites est vrai. 7. De qui nous 
parlez vous? 8. Nous vous parlons des Ecossais qui viennent d'arri- 
ver. 9. Savez vous qui vient d'arriver? 10. Je sais que le monsieur 
}ue votre frere eonna ; t vient d'arriver. 11. Vos soeurs que font 
illes? 12. Elles ne font presque rien, elles n'ont presque rien a faire. 
13. Que mettez vous dans votre coffre? 14. Nous y raettons ce que 
nous avons, nos habillements et notre linge. 15. N'y mettez vous 
pas vos souliers? 16. Nous y mettons les souliers dont nous avons 
besoin. 17. De quoi avez vous besoin? 18. Nous avons besoin de 
ce que nous avons. 19. Cet enfant sait il ce qu'il fait? 20. II sait 
ce qu'il fait et ce qu'il dit. 21. Ne voulez vous pas le leur dire? 
22. Avec beaucoup de plaisir. 23. Faites vous ce que le marchand 
vous commande ? 24. Nous faisons ce qu'il nous dit. 25. H parle 
de ce dont vous parlez. 

Exercise 60. 

1. Have you what (ce dont) you want? 2. We have what we want 
3. Is the gentleman whom you know, here ? 4. The lady of whom 
you speak is here. 5. Is she just arrived ? [L. 26. 2.] 6. She is just 
arrived. 7. Do you know that gentleman ? 8. I know the gentleman 
who is speaking with your father. 9. Do you know his name ? 10. 1 do 
not know his name, but I know where he lives (demeure). 11. What 
do you do every morning? 12. We do almost nothing; we have very 
ittle to do. 13. Does the tailor make your clothes? 14. He makes 
my clothes, my brother's, and my cousin's. 15. Do you know what 
you say? 16. I know what I say, and what I do. 17. Do you know 
the Scotchman of whom your brother speaks ? 18. I know him well. 
19 What does he put into his trunk? 20. He puts his clothes, 
21. Is that which you say, true? 22. What I say is true. 23. Do 
you understand that which I say to you ? 24. I understand all that 
you say. 25. Of whom does your brother speak ? 26. He speaks of 
the gentleman whose sister is here. * 27. Is your brother wrong to 



102 LESSON XXXII. 

do what he do39 ? 28 He cannot be wrong to do it. 29. What ar« 
youdoiig? 30 I am doing that which you do. 31. Where do you 
put my books? 32. Into (dans) your brother's trunk. 33. Is your 
orother here ? 34. He is not here. 35. He is at my brother's, or at 
my father's. 



LESSON XXXE. LEgON XXXIL 

In The verb mettre is used in the same sense as the English to put 

on, in speaking of garments. Mettre le couvert, means to lay the 

cloth, or set the table : — 

Quel chapeau mettez vous 1 What hat do you put on ? 

Votre frere met son habit noir. Your brother puts on his black coat. 

Le domestique va mettre le couvert. The servant is going to lay the cloth, 

2. Oter means to take off, to take away, to take out : — 

Mon domestique ote son chapeau. My servant takes off his hat. 

Otez ce livre de la table. Take away that book from the table. 

N'a-t-on pas ote le diner 1 Have they not taken away the dinner? 

3. The verb faire is used before another verb, in the sense of to 
have, to cause, 

Votre frere fait il batir une maison 1 Does your brother have a house built f 
II en fait batir plus d'une. He has more than one buiM t 

4. It may be used in the san * sense before its own infinitive:— 

Je fais faire un habit de drap. / have a cloth coat made. 

Vous faites faire des souliers de c ir. You have leather shoes made* 

5. Vouloir [L. 28. 6.] followed t dire is used in the sense of to 
mean : — 

Que voulez vous dire % What do you mean ? 

Votre soeur que veut elle dire 1 What does your sister mean ? 



'■& 



Resume of Examples. 



Ne mettez vous pas vos habits 1 

J'ai peur de les gater. 

Ne portez vous jamais votre habit 

noir 1 
Je le mets tons les samedis. 
Pourquoi n'otez vous pas votre 

manteau 7 
J'ai trop froid, j'ai peur de Voter. 

Faites vous raccommoder vos sou- 
liers 1 
Je fais raccommoder mes habits. 
Je fais faire une paire de bottes. 



Do you not put on your clothes / 

J am afraid of spoiling them. 

Do you never wear your black coat ? 

I put it on every Saturday. 

Why do you not take off your cloak f 

I am too cold, I am afraid to take U 

off. 
Do you have your slwes mended ? 

I have my clothes mended, 
I have a fair of boots made. 



LESSON XXXII. 



103 



Je fais Preiser un pnits. 

Votre frere que veut il dire 1 

Que veut dim cela ? 

Cela ne veut rien dire. 

6tez vous vos souliers et vos bas 1 

Je n } 6te ni les uns ni les autres. 
Le dinei est pret ; le domestique va 

mettre le couvert. 
Vouiez vous oter le couvert ? 

Je vais mettre le couvert. 
Je vais oter le couvert. 



/ have a weU dug. 

What does your brother mean ? 

What does that mean ? 

That means nothing. 

Do you take off your shoes and stock • 

ings ? 
I take off neither these nor those. 
Dinner is ready; the servant is 

going to lay the cloth. 
Will you take away the things h om 

the table ? 
I am going to lay the cloth. 
I am going to take away the things* 



to 



Pret, e, ready ; 

Raccommod-er, 1 
mend ; 

Tout-a-Pheure, immedi- 
ately ; 

Uniforme, m. uniform ; 

Velours, m. velvet 



Exercise 61. 

Apothicaire, m. dn^-Gat-er, 1, to spoil ; 

gist ; Gilet, m. waistcoat ; 

Apres, after; Grand, e, large, very / 

Cave, f. cellar; Manteau. m. cloak ; 

Creus-er, 1. to dig ; Noir, e, black; 

Dimanche, m. Sunday ; Pantoufle, f. slipper; 

Diner, m. dinner ; Pourquoi, why ; 
Fache, e ; sorry, angry ; 

1. Le general N. met il son uniforme! 2. II ne le met point. 
3. Pourquoi ne portez vous point votre manteau noir 1 4. J'ai peur 
de le gater. 5. Mettez vous vos souliers de satin tous les matins ? 
6. Je ne les mets que les dimanches. 7. II est midi ; le domestique 
met il le couvert? 8. II ne le met pas encore ; il va le mettre tout-a- 
Pheure. 9. Le diner n'est il pas pret ? 10. Le domestique 6te-t-M 
le couvert? 11. II ne Pote pas encore, il n'a pas le temps de P6ter. 
12. Otez vous votre habit quand vous avez chaud? 13. Je Pote 
quand j'ai tyop chaud. 14. Faites vous faire un habit de drap? 15. 
Je fais faire un habit de drap et un gilet de satin noir. 16. Ne faites 
vous point raccommoder vos pantoufles de velours ? 17. Ne faites 
vous pas creuser une cave? 18. Je fais creuser une grande cave. 
19. L'apothicaire que veut il dire? 20. II veut dire qu'il a besoin 
d'argent. 21. Savez vous ce que cela veut dire? 22. Cela veut dire 
que votre frere est fache contre vous. 23. Avez vous envie de met- 
tre votre manteau ? 24. J'ai Pintention de le mettre, car j'ai grand 
froid. 25. Je vais Poter, car j'ai chaud 

Exercise 62. 

1. Do you take off your coat? 2. I do not take off my coat, 1 put 
St on. 3. Do you take off your cloak when j ou are cold ? 4. When 
I am cold I put it on. 5. Does your little boy take off his shoes and 
stockings ? [J 21, (4.)] 6. He takes them off, but he is going to put 
them on again (remetire) . 7. Does that little girl lay the cloth? 8, 



104 LESSON XXXIII. 

She lays the cloth every clay at noon (midi). 9. Dooe she take awaj 
tne things after dinner? 10. She takes away the tnhigs every day, 
11. Do you intend to have acoat made? 12. I intend to have a coat 
made. 13. I am going to have a coat and a vest made. 14. Does 
your brother have his boots mended? 15. He has them mended. 
16. What does your son mean? 17. I do not know what he means. 
18, Is he angry with me or with my brother? 19. He is neither 
ngry with you nor with your brother. 20. Is he afraid to spoil his 
coat? 21. He is not afraid to spoil it. 22. Does the druggist want 
money ? 23. He does not want money. 24. Has your sister taken 
my book from the table ? 25. She has not taken it away. 26. Why 
do you take off your shoes ? 27. I take them off because they hurt 
me (gtnent). 28. Do you intend to have a house built? 29. I in- 
tend to have one built. 30. Does the tailor spoil your coat? 31. 
He does not spoil it. 32. Who spoils your clothes ? 33. No person 
spoils them. 34. What hat do you wear ? 35. I wear a black hat 



lesson xxxm. LEgON 

UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 

1 The unipersonal verb is conjugated only in the third person 
singular of a tense. Its nominative pronoun il, it, is used absolutely, 
i. e. it represents no noun previously expressed. 

II pleut aujourd'hui. It rains to-day. 

2. The unipersonal verb assumes the termination of the class or 
conjugation to which it belongs. Some verbs are always uniper- 
sonal, and will be found in § 62. Others are only occasionally so, 
and if irregular, will be found in the personal form in the same § 62. 

3. Present of the Indicative of the Unipersonal Verbs, 

Y avoir, to be there : Pleuvoir, to rain : Neiger, to snow ? 

II y a, there is, there are. II pleut, il rains, it is II neige, it snows, it is 
raining. snowing. 

Greler, to hail. Geler, to freeze. Degeler, to thaw. 

l\ grele (§ 49.) it hails, it II gele (§ 49.) it freezes, II degele ($49.) it lhaws ) 
is hailing. it is freezing. it is thawing. 

4. II y a, means tfiere is, or there are, and may be followed try s 
singular or plural noun, [} 61, 2.] 

II y a du gibier au marche. There is game in the market. 

II y a des pommes dans votre jardin. Thne are apples in your garde* 



LESSON XXXIII. 



105 



5. In relation to the weather, the verb faire is used unipersonally 

In the same manner as the English verb to be. 

II fait beau temps aujourd'hui. It is fine weather to-iay. 

II fait chaud, il fait troid. It is warm, it is cold. 



Resume oe Examples. 



I lent il ce matin 1 

II ne pleut pas, il neige. 
11 va pleuvoir ce matin. 
Ne gele-t-il pas ce matin 1 

li ne gele pas, il fait du brouillard. 

Y a-t-il du sucre chez vous % 

II y en a beaucoup chez mon frere. 

Y a-t-il plusieurs personnes chez 
moil 

II y a plus de cent personnes. 

N'y a-t-il personne a l'eglise 7 

II n'y a encore personne. 

Est il trop tot ] 

Au contraire, il est trop tard. 

Fait il froid ou chaud aujourd'hui 3 

II fait chaud et humide. 

Fait il du vent ou du brouillard 7 

II fait un temps bien desagreable. 



Does it rain this morning ? 
It does not rain, it snows. 
It is going to rain this morning. 
Does it not freeze this morning ? 
It does not freeze, it is foggy. 
Is there any sugar at your house ? 
There is a great deal at my brother's. 
Are there several persons at my lw%se ? 

There are more than one hundred 

persons. 
Is there nobody at church ? 
There is as yet no one there. 
Is it too soon ? 

On the contrary, it is too late. 
Is it cold or warm to-day ? 
It is warm and damp. 
Is it windy or foggy ? 
It is very disagreeable weather. 



Manuscrit, m. man*, 

script ; 
Veau, m. veal ; 
Vent. m. wind; 
Volaille, f. poultry. 



Exercise 63. 

Assemblee. f. assembly, Couvert, e, cloudy ; 

party, E curie, f. stable; 

Bibliotheque, i. vdtrary ; Epais, se, thick ; 
Brouillard, va. fog ; Foin, m. hay ; 
Chambre, f. room; Gibier, m. game; 

Cinquante, fifty ; Humide, damp ; 

1. Quel temps fait il aujourd'hui? 2. II fait un temps superbe. 
3. Fa 1 '*, il tres beau temps aujourd'hui? 4. II fait un temps ccuvert 
et hMnide. 5. Pleut il beaucoup ce matin ? 6. II ne pleut pas en- 
core, mais il va pleuvoir. 7. Fait il du vent ou du brouillard ? 8. II 
ne fait pas de vent. 9. Le brouillard est tres epais. 1C Com bien 
de personnes y a-t-il a. l'assemblee? 11. II y a plus de deux cents 
[L. 20. 7.] personnes. 12, N'y a-t-il pas beaucoup de manuscrits 
dans votre bibliotheque? 13. II n'y en a pas beaucoup, il n'y en a 
que cinquante-cinq. 14. Fait il trop froid pour vous dans cette 
Jiambre? 15. II n'y fait ni trop froid ni trop chaud. 16. Y a-t-il 
beaucoup de foin dans votre ecurie? 17. II y en a assez pour mon 
cheval. 18. Restez vous a la maison quand il pleut? 19 Quand il 
pleut je reste a la maison, mais quand il fait beau temps je vais chez 
mon cousin. 20. Y a-t-il de la viande an marche? 21. II y en a 

5* 



106 LESSON XXXIV. 

beaucd up il y a aussi du gibier. 22. II y a du veau, du mouton et 
de la vohulle. 23. N'y a-t-il pas aussi des legumes et des fruits? 
24. II n'y en a pas. 25. II y en a aussi. 

Exercise 64. 

1. Are you cold this morning? 2. I am not cold, it is warm this 
morning. 3. Is it foggy or windy ? 4. It is neither foggy nor windy, 
it rains in torrents (d verse). 5. Is it going to rain or to snow ? 6. 
It is going to freeze, it is very cold. 7. It is windy and foggy. 8. 
Is there any body at your brother's to-day ? 9. My brother is at 
nome, and my sister is at church. 10. Is there any meat in the mar- 
ket? 11. There is meat and poultry. 12. Is it too warm or too 
cold, for your sister, in this room? 13. It is not so warm in this 
room, as in your brother's library. 14. Are there good English 
books in your sister's library? 15. There are some good ones. 16. 
Are there peaches and plums in your garden? 17. There are many. 
18. Do you remain at your brother's, when it snows? 19. When it 
snows we remain at home. 20. Are there ladies at your mother's 1 
21. Your two sisters are there to-day. 22. Have you time to go 
and fetch them? 23. I have no time this morning. 24. Is your 
horse in the stable ? 25. It is not there, it is at my brother's. £6. 
Does it hail this morning? 27. It does not hail, it freezes. ^ 28. 
What weather is it this morning? 29. It is very fine weather. 
30. Is it too warm? 31. It is neither too warm nor too cold. 32, 
Is it going to freeze ? 33. It is going to snow. 34. Does it snow 
every day ? 35. It does not snow every day, but it snows very often 
(souvent). 



LESSON XXXIV. LEgON XXXIV. 

PLACE OF THE ADVERB. (§ 136.) 

1. In simple tenses, the adverb generally follows the \erb, and i 

placed as near it as possible : — 

Votre commis ecrit tres bien. Your clerk torites very well. 

Cette demoiselle lit tres mal. That young lady reads very badly. 

2. Wlien a verb is in the infinitive, the two negatives ne and pas, 
Re aad rien, should be placed before it: — 

N> paB parler, ne pas lire. Not to speak, not to react,. 



LESSON XXXH. 10? 

3. The adverb assez, enough, tolerably, precedes generally the 

other adverbs. It precedes also adjectives and nouns : — 

Vous ecrivez assez correctement. You write pretty correctly. 

Vous avez assez de livres. You have books enough. 

Cet enfant est assez attentif. That chili is attentive enough. 

4. Voici means, here is ; voila, there is : — 

Voici le livre que vous aimez. Here is the book which you like. 

Voila le monsieur dont vous parlez. There is the gentleman of whom ym 

speak. 

5. Dans is used for in or into, when the noun which follows it is 

preceded by an article, or by a possessive, demonstrative, or numeral 

adjective. [{ 142, (2.)] :— 

Le crayon est dans le pupitre. The pencil is in the desk. 

Mettez cette lettre dans votre malle. Put this letter into your trunk. 

6. En renders to, in, or into, coming after the verbs to be, to go, to 

reside, followed by the name of a part of the earth, a country, or 

province : — 

Notre ami est en France. Our friend is in France. 

Vous allez en Italic You go to Italy. 

7. The preposition a is used for the words at or to, in or into, be- 
fore the name of a town, city, or village, preceded by the verbs men- 
tioned above : — 

II va a Paris le mois prochain. He is going to Paris next month. 

8. The same preposition is used in the expressions, a la campagne* 
a la ville, a la chasse, a la peche, &c. 

Nous allons a la campagne. We go into the country. 

Vous n'allez pas a la ville. You do not go to the city. 

Je vais a la chasse et a la peche. I go hunting and fishing. 

9. Indicative Present of the Irregular Verbs, 

Condui-re, 4. to conduct. ficiti-RE, 4. to write. Li-re, 4. to read. 

Je conduis, / conduct, do J'ecris, J write, do write, Je lis, / read, do read or 



conduct, or am 


con- or am writing ; 


am readin t 


ducting ; 






Tu conduis, 


Tu 6cris, 


Tu lis, 


11 conduit, 


11 ecrit, 


11 lit, 


Nous conduisons, 


Nons ecrivons, 


Nous lisons. 


Vous conduisez, 


Vous ecrivez, 


Vous lisez, 


lis conduisent 


lis ecrivent. 


lis lisent. 



Resume of Examples. 



Votre parent 6crit il bien 1 

II ecrit assez bien et assez vite. 

Nous avons assez de livres. 



Does your relation wriU well ? 

He writes well enough smd *'apuu$ 

enough. 
We have books enoug h. 



108 



LESSON XXXIV. 



Nous soinmes assez attentifs a nos 

1090ns. 
Voila la demoiselle dontvous parlez. 

Votre cheval n'est il pas dans le 

champ 1 
II n'y est pas, il est dans le jardin. 
Allez vous en France cette annee 7 
Nous allons a Paris et a Lyon. 
Ou conduisez vous ce jeune homme 1 
Je le conduis en Allemagne. 
Demeurez vous a la ville 1 
Nous demeurons a la campagne. 
Allez vous souvent a la cbasse 7 
Nous allons quelquefois a la peche. 



We are attentive enough to our le* 

sons. 
Tliere is the young lady of whom yo% 

speak. 
Is not your horse im the field ? 

It is not there, it is in the garden. 
Do you go to France this year ? 
We go to Paris and to Lyons. 
Where do you take this young man ? 
I take him*to Germany. 
Do you live in the town ? 
We live in the country. 
Do you go often hunting ? 
We sometimes go fishing. 



Associe, m. partner; 
Canif. in. penknife; 
Canipagne, f. country; 
Chasse, f. hunting ; 
Commis, m. clerk; 



Exercise 65. 

Fort, very ; 
Peche, f. fishing ; 
Prusse, f. Prussia; 
Rapi dement, rapidly; 
Rend-re, 4. to return ; 



Suisse, f. Switzerland; 
Terre, f. farm, estate; 
Ville, f. town, city ; 
Vite, quickly; 
Voyage, m. jou^^ey. 



1. Eerivez vous encore la meme lecon ? 2. Je n'ecris pius la meme, 
j'en ecris une autre. 3. Votre commis ecrit il rapidement? 4. II 
ecrit fort bien, mais il n'ecrit pas vite. 5. N'avez vous pas assez 
d'argent, pour acheter cette terre? 6. J'ai assez d'argent, mais j'ai 
1'intention de faire un voyage en France. 7. Voila votre livre, en 
avez vous besom? 8. Je n'en ai pas besoin, j'en ai un autre. 9. Avez 
vous encore besoin de mon canif] 10. Je n'en ai plus besoin, je vais 
vous le rendre. 11. Notre cousin demeure-t-il a la ville? 12. II no 
demeure plus a la ville, il demeure a. la campagne. 13. Aime-t-il a 
aller a la chasse? 14. II n'aime pas a aller a la chasse. 15. II va 
tous les jours a la peche. 16. Notre associe est il a Paris ou a 
Rouen? 17. II est a Marseille. 18. Ou avez vous 1'intention de con- 
duire votre fils? 19. Je vais le conduire en Italic 20. Demeurez 
vous a Milan ou a Florence? 21. Je ne demeure ni a Milan ni a 
Florence, je demeure a Turin. 22. Votre ami demeure-t-il en Suisss? 
23. II ne demeure plus en Suisse, il demeure en Prusse. 24. Votre 
domestique est il a l'eglise? 25. Non, Monsieur, il est a-1'ecole. 

Exercise 66. 

1. Does your clerk write as well as your son? 2. He wriles toler- 
ably well, but not so well as my son. 3. Have you books enough 
in your library ? 4. I have not books enough, but I intend to buy 
some more. 5. Here is your sister's letter, will you iead it? 6. I 
intend to read it. 7. Does your son like to go n>.hirg ? 8. He likes 



LESSON XXXV. 109 

to go fishing and hunting. 9. When does he like to go fishing? 
10. When I am in the country. 11. What do you do when you are 
in the city ** 12. When I am in the city, I read and learn my lesson. 
13. Do you intend to go to France this year? 14. I intend to go to 
Germany. 15. Will you go to the city if it (s'il) rains? 16. When it 
rains I always remain at home. [R. 1 J 17. How many friends have 
vou in the city? 18. I have many friends there. 19. Are there many 
English in France? 20. There are many English in France and in 
Italy (ltalie). 21. Are there more English in Germany than in Italy ? 
l 4% There are more English in Italy than in Germany. 23. Is it tine 
weather in Italy ? 24. It is very fine weather there. 25. Does it 
often freeze there ? 26. It freezes sometimes there, but not often. 
27. Does that young lady read as well as her sister? 28. She reads 
better than her sister, but her sister reads better than I. 29. Is there 
anyone at your house? 30. My father is at home. 31. Is your 
brother-in-law absent? 32. My brother-in-law is at your house 
33, There is no one at home to-day. 



LESSON XXXV. LEgON XXXV. 

1. The indefinite pronoun on has no exact equivalent in Englisn. 
It may be rendered by one, we, they, people, &c, according to th^ 
context. On has, of course, no antecedent, and seldom refers to a 
particular person, [$ 41, £4.) (5.) § 113.] : — 

On doit honorer la vertu. We should honor virtue. 

On nous apporte de l'argent. Money is brought to us. 

2. As may be seen in the last example, on is often the nominative 

of an active verb, which is best rendered in English by the passive, 

[jl 13,(1.)]:- 

On dit que votre epouse est ici. It is said that your wife is Jierc. 

On raconte des histoires singulieres. Singular histories are related. 
On recolte beaucoup de ble en Much wheat is harvested (grmcn) m 
France, i France. 

3. Avoir lieu, answ ers to the English expression, to take place : — 
Cela a lieu tous les jours. That takes place every day. 

4. Au lieu de, answers to the English, instead of. The verb which 
follows it must, according to Rule 2, L. 21, be put in the infinitive: — 

Au lieu d'etudier, il joue. Instead o* studying, he plays. 



110 



LESSON XXXV. 



5. Devoir, in owe, is used before an infinitive, like the English verb, 
to be> to express obligation :— 

Je dois ltd ecrire demain. / am to write to him to-morrow. 

Nous devons y aller demain. We are to go there to-morrow. 

6. Recevoir des nouvelles, means, to hear from : — 

Devez vous recevoir des nouvelles Are you to hear from your sister? 
de votre soeur. 

7. Entendre parler, answers to the English phrase, to hear of ci 
about. 

Entendez vous souvent parler de Do you often hear of yow friends ? 
vos amis 'J 



Resume of Examples. 



Que dit on de nous dans la ville 3 

On ne parle pas de vous, 

Ne mange-t-on pas tous les jours 1 

On mange quand on a faim. 

On trouve beaucoup d'or en Cali- 

fornie. 
Dit on quelque chose de nouveau 1 
On ne dit rien de nouveau. 
A-t-on re^u des nouvelles de George 1 ? 

On n'a point entendu parler de lui. 
On n'a point re$u de ses nouvelles. 
Devez vous ecrire a notre ami 1 
Je dois mi ecrire demain. 
Le concert doit il avoir lieu ce soir 7 

VI doit avoir lieu ce matin. 
Je viens au lieu de mon frere. 
II danse au lieu de marcher. 



What do they say of us in the city ? 
People do not speak of you. 
Do not people eat every day ? 
People eat when they are hungry. 
Much gold is found in California. 

Do they {people) say any thing new 7 

Nothing new is said. 

Has any thing been heard from 
George ? 

Nothing has been heard of him. 

They have not heard from him. 

Are you to write to our friend ? 

I am to write to him to-morrow. 

Is the concert to take place this even- 
ing ? 

It is to take place this morning. 

I come instead of my brother. 

He dances instead of walking. 



Afrique, f. Africa; 
Alger, Algiers; 
Apport-er, 1. to bring ; 
Demain, to-morrow; 
Diamant, m. diamond, 



Exercise 67. 

Fourn-ir, 2. to furnish ; Part-ir, 2. ir. to depart, tu 
Habits m. p. clothes ; set out, to leave ; 

Malade, sick ; Prochain, e. next; 

Mois, m. month; Sav-oir, 3. ir. to know i 

Or, m. gold ; Voyage, m. journey. 

1. Vous apporte-t-on de l'argent tous les jours? 2. On ne m'ea 

apporte pas tous les jours. 3. Vous fournit on des habits quand 

vous en avez besoin 1 [L. 22.] 4. On m'en fournit toutes les foia 

(every time) que j'en ai besoin. 5. A-t-on besoin d'argent quand on 

est malade ? 6. Quand on est malade, on en a grand besoin. 7. 

Avez vous recu des nouvelles de mon fils ? 8. Je n'ai point re^u de 

ses nouveCles. 9. Ne dit on pas qu'il est en Afrique? 10. On dit 

qu'ii doit partir pou: Alger. 11. Quand doit il commencer son 

voyage? 12. On dit qu'il doit le commencer le mois prochain. 13. 



LESSON XXXV r. Ill 

Ce mariage a-t-il lieu aujourd'hui ou demain? 14. On nous dit qu'iJ 
doit avoir lieu cette apres-midi. 15. II aura lieu a cinq heures et 
demie. 16. Avez vous envie de venir au lieu de votre frere? 17. 
Mon frere doit venir au lieu de notre cousin. 18. Avez vous Tin 
tention de lui dire ce qu'il doit faire? 19. II sait ce qu». doit faire. 
20. Savez vous ce qu'on dit de nouveau? 21. On ne dit rien de 
nouveau. 22. Trouve-t-on beaucoup d'or en Californie ? 23. On y 
en trouye beaucoup. 24. Y trouve-t-on aussi des diamants \ 25 
On n'y en trouve point, on n'y trouve que de Tor. 

Exercise 68. 

1. What do people say of me? 2. People say that you are not 
very attentive to your lessons. 3. Is it said that much gold is found in 
Africa ? 4. It is said that much gold is found in California. 5. Do they 
bring you books everyday? 6. Books are brought to me [R. 2.] 
every day, but I have no time to read them. 7. What should one do 
(doit on faire) when one is sick? 8. One should send for a physician. 
9. Do you send for my brother? 10. I am to send for him this 
morning. Xll. Do you hear from your son every day? 12. I hear 
from him every time that your brother comes. 13. Does the sale 
(rente, f.) take place to-day? 14. It takes place this afternoon. 15 
At what time (heare) does it take place ? 16. It takes place at half 
after three. 17. I have a wish to go there, but my brother is sick. 
18. What am I to do ? 19. You are to write to your brother, who, 
it is said (dit on), is very sick. 20. Is he to leave for Africa? 21. 
He is to leave for Algiers. 22. Do you come instead of your father ? 
23. I am to write instead of him. 24. Does the concert take place 
this morning ? 25. It is to take place this afternoon. 26. Do you 
know at what hour? 27. At a quarter before five. 28. Is your 
brother coming? 29. My brother is not coming, he has no time 
30. Are you angry with your brother? 31. I am not angry with 
him. 32. Is any thing new said? (Is there any thing new?) 33 
There is nothing new. 34. What is said of him ? 35. Nothing i 
said of him. 



LESSON XXXVI. LEgON XXXVI. 

REFLECTIVE VERBS. (§ 43, (6.) § 56.) 

1. A verb is called reflective or pronominal, when it is conjugated 
frith two pronouns of the same person, i. e., the usual nominative 



112 LESSON XXXVI. 

pronoun and the pronouns me, te, se, &c. [$ 56.] Io these verbs tn* 
subject is represented as acting upon itself: — 

Je m'applique a 1'etude. 1 apply {myself) to study. 

Je me propose de voyager. I propose {to myself) to travel, i. e a 

is my intention to travel. *> 

In these verbs, the second pronoun is in fact only the objective 
pronoun direct or indirect, which, according to Rules 1 and 2, Lesson 
27, is placed before the verb. 

2. The reflective form of the verb, which is much more frequently 
used in French than in English, often answers to the passive fori i 
so common in the latter language : — 

Cela se voit tons les jours. \ ™?\ is ™ n t T°» day-\M^\\ 7 , 

J ( That sees itself every day. 

Cette marchandise se vend facile- \ That merchandise is easily sold. 
ment. \ That merchandise sells itself easily 

Cela se fait ainsi. j Iff ™ don f ff- 

( That does itself so. 

3. The verb se porter, literally to carry one's self, is used idiomati- 
cally for to do or to be in speaking of health : — 

Comment vous portez vous 1 How do yon do ? 

Je me porte tres bien. / am very well. 

4. S'asseoir, [4. ir. see } 62.] to sit down, is also a reflective verb :— • 
Voire frere s'assied. Your brother sits doivn. 

5. Se promener means to walk, to ride, &c. for pleasure, or health :— 

Je me promene tous les jours. J take a walk every day. 
Je me promene a cheval. J take a ride. 

6. Marcher, aller a cheval, aller en voiture, signify to walk or to 

ride, when we wish to express simply the manner of progressing :-— ■ 

Marehez vous beaucoup tous les Do you walk much every day? 

jours % 
Je vais a cheval et en voiture, I ride on horseback anH in a carriage, 

7. Conjugation of the Present of the Indicative of the 

Reflective Verbs, 

Se port-er, 1. to be orSE promen-er, 1. ta w#Z& S'asse-oir, 3. ir. to sti 

do ; or ride ; down ; 

Je me porte, Ia?nordo;Je me promene, I take aJt m'assieds, I sit down, 

walk or ride ; or am sitting down ; 

Tu te portes, Tu te promenes, [§ 49.] Tu t'assieds, 

II se porte, II se promene, II s'assied, 

Nous nous portons, Nous nous promenons, Nous nous asseyons, 

Vous vous portez, Vous vous promenez, Vous voas asseyez, 

lis se portent. lis se promenent. lis s'asseient. 

8. The reflective pronouns in the imperative of jeflective votds, 



LESSON XXXYI. 



113 



follow Rule 4, of L 27 and Rules 3, 4, of Lesson 28 and also, } 100. 
C2.)(3):— 



Asseyons nous, asseyez vous. 
Ne nous asseyons pas. 



Let us sit down, sit dawn. 
Let us not sit down. 



Resume of Examples. 



A quoi vous appliq* ez vous ? 

Je m'occupe de mes affaires. 

Je m'adresse a mes amis, 

Vous adressez vous a votre pere. 

Je m'adresse alui [§ 100, (4.)] 

Comment se porte Monsieur votre 

pere % 
II se porte passablement bien. 
Pourquoi ne vous asseyez vous pas 1 
Je m'assieds quand je suis fatigue. 
Je n'ai pas le temps de m'asseoir. 
Vouspromenez vous tous les jours'? 
Je me promene en voiture au- 

jourd'hui. 
Vos amis se promenent ils a cheval % 
N'aimez vous pas a marcher % 
J'aime beaucoup a aller a cheval. 
Aimez vous a vous promener 1 
Asseyons nous, s'il vous plait. 
Ne nous asseyons nous pas 1 
Ne nous asseyons pas, il est trop 

tard. 
Combien ce drap se vend il la* 

verge ? 
II se vend vingt-cinq francs le 

metre. 
Comment cela s'appelle-t-il 1 

Comment vous appelez [§ 49, (4.)] 
vous'? 



To what do you apply yourself? 

I occupy myself with my affairs, 

I apply to my friends. 

Do you apply to your father? 

I apply to him. 

How is your father ? 

He is tolerably well. 

Why do you not sit down ? 

I sit down when I am weary. 

I have no time to sit down. 

Do you take a walk every day ? 

I take a ride to-day (in a carriage). 

Do your friends take a ridel 

Do you not like walking ? 

I like riding much. 

Do you like walking (for pleasure} ? 

Let us sit down, if you please. 

Do we not sit down ? 

Let us not sit down, it is too late. 

How much is that cloth sold a yard ? 

It is sold twenty-five francs the 

metre. 
How is that called? What is the 

name of that ? 
What is your name ? How do you 

call yourself? 



Exercise 69. 

Banquier, m. banker ; Magnifique, magnificent; Pied, m. foot ; 
Comment, how ; Matin, m. morning ; Port-er, to carry, wear; 

Cheval, m. horse ; Mieux, better ; Quelquefois, sometimes; 

Drap, m. cloth; Oblige, e, obliged; Quitt-er, 1. tc leave ; 

Fatigue, e, weary, tired ; Part-ir, 2. ir. to set out; Voiture, f. carriage. 

1. Comment ce monsieur s'appelle-t-il? 2. Je ne sais comment 
_ s'appelle. 3. Cette dame ne s'appelle-t-elle pas L. ? 4. Non, 
Madame, elle s'appelle M. 5. Monsieur votre pere se porte-t-il bien 
ce matin ? 6. II se porte beaucoup mieux. 7. Fait il beau temps 
aujourd'hui? 8. II fait un temps magnifique, n'allez vous pas vous 

* The English a or an before a measure is rendered into French by the 
article le, or 'la, &c. 



114 LESSON XXXVII. 

pron en3r 9. Nous n'avons ni cheval ni voiture. 10. Ne pouvei 
vous martner? 11. Je suis trop fatigue pour marcher. 12. N'allez 
vous pas a cheval tous les matins? 13. Je me promene tous lea 
matins. 14. Comment vous promenez vous? 15. Quelquefois a 
pied et quelquefois en voiture. 16. A qui vous adressez vousquand 
vous avez besoin d'argent? 17. Je m'adresse a mon banquier'? 
18. Ne voulez vous pas vous asseoir? 19. Nous vous sommes bien 
obliges. 20. Ce drap se vend il fort bien? 21. II se vend fortcher. 

22. Ne devez vous pas aller a la campagne, s'il fait beau temps] 

23. Votre frere doit il quitter la ville aujourd'hui? 24. II doit partir 
demain matin. 25. Ma soeur se promene tous les matins. 

Exercise 70. 

1. Does your sister walk everyday? 2. She takes a walk every 
morning. 3. She likes riding on horseback and in a carriage. 
4. What is that little girl called ? 5. She is called L. 6. Is not that 
gentleman called L. ? 7. No, Sir, he is called G. and his cousin is 
called H. 8. How is your brother ? 9. My brother is very well, but 
my sister is not well. 10. How are your two daughters ? 11. They 
are tolerably well to-day. 12. Will you not sit down, gentlemen? 

13. We are much obliged to you, Madam, we have not time. 

14. Does that book sell well? 15. It sells very well. 16. How is 
that silk sold an ell (Vaune) ? 17. It is sold six francs an ell. 
18. Is it fine weather to-day? 19. It is very fine weather, will you 
not take a walk? 20. I have no time to walk. 21. To whom does 
your brother apply? 22. He applies to his brother. 23. Is his 
brother at home ? 24. No, Sir, he is at Paris. 25. When does he 
intend to go to France? 26. He intends to go to France in one 
month. 27. Is your sister to leave to-morrow morning ? 28. She 
is to leave to day if (s'il) it is fine weather. 29. What do people 
say of this ? 30. Nothing is said about it [L. 35]. 31. Are you too 
much fatigued to walk? 32. I am not too much fatigued, but I havo 
no wish to walk. 33. Do you like walking or riding? 34, I like 
riding, when I have a good horse. 35. I do not like walking. 



LESSON XXXVH. LEgON XXXVH. 

1. The reflective pronoun is often used to express possession, in- 
stead of the possessive adjective. In such cases the article takes the 
place of this adjective, before the noun. [$ 77, (9.)] 



LESSON XXXVII. 



115 



VoiJ3 chauffez vous les pieds 1 Do you warm your feet ? 

Je me chauffe les mains et les pieds. / warm my hands and feet. 

2. Se souvenir [2. ir. See § 62.], se rappeler [} 49, (4.)], correspond to 

\he English verb to remember. Se rappeler takes a direct object, that 

is, no preposition intervenes between the verb and its object, if the 

same be a noun or a pronoun : — 

Vous rappelez vous ces demoiselles'? Do you remember those young ladies? 
Je ne me les rappelle pas. / do not remember them. 

3. Custom seems, however, to sanction the use of the prepositio 
de between the verb se rappeler and an infinitive : — 

Nous ne nous rappelons pas d'en 
avoir 6te prives (Condillac). 

4. Se souvenir, takes the preposition de before a noun or pronoun 
as well as before an infinitive : — 

Vous souvenez vous de cette affaire % Do you remember that affair ? 

Je ne m'en souviens pas. / do not remember it. 

Je me souviens de lui avoir ecrit. / remember having written to him. 

5. Se coucher, corresponds to the English verbs to retire, to go to 
bed:— 

Je me couche de bonne heure. / retire early. 

6. Se lever [{ 49, (6.)] means to rise, to get up : — 

Je me leve au point du jour. J rise at the break of day. 



We do not remember having been de- 
prived of it. 



Resume of Examples. 



Vous coupez vous les ongles 1 

Je me coupe les ongles et les che- 

veux. 
Vous coupez vous les doigts 1 
Je me coupe souvent les doigts, 

quand je taille ma plume. 
Vous rappelez [§49, (4.)] vous les 

malheurs du frere de votre ami 1 
Je me rappelle ses malheurs. 
Je me les rappelle distinctement. 
Je me rappelle de l'avoir vu. 
Vous souvenez vous de cela 7 
Je ne m'en souviens pas du tout. 
A quelle heure vous couchez vous 7 
Nous nous couchons tous les jours 

au coucher du soleil. 
Nous nous levons de meilleure heure 

que vous, — au lever du soleil. 
J.1 S3 leve a cinq heures du matin, et 

il se couche a dix heures et de- 

mie du soir. 



Do you cut your nails ? 
I cut my nails and hair. 

Do you cut your fingers ? 

I often cut my fingers, when I men* 

my pen. 
Do you remember the misfortunes af 

your friend's brother ? 
I remember his misfortunes. 
I recollect them distinctly. 
I remember having seen him. 
Do you remember that ? 
I do not remember it at all. 
At what hour do you retire ? 
We go to bed every day at sunset. 

We rise earlier than you, — at swtir 

rise. 
He rises at five o'clock in the morn* 

ing, and goes to bed at half afitf 

ten in the evening. 



116 



LESSON XXXVII. 



Associe, m. partner ; 
Bois, m. wood; 
Boucher, m. butcher ; 
Se brul-er, 1. ref. to 

burn one's self. 

Charpentier, m. carpen- 
ter. 

Be chauff-er, 1. ref. to 
y^trm one's self. 



Exercise 71. 

De meilleure heure, 

earlier ; 
Doigt, ra. finger; 
Fer, m. iron; 
Feu, m. fire ; 
Main, f. hand ; 
S'occuper, 1. to occupy 

one's self. 
Parfaitement, perfectly ; 



lerruquier, m. tuwr» 

dresser ; 
Poele. m. stove; 
Pouce, m. thuw.b; 
Promesse, f. promise; 
Se souvenir, to reinem- 

ber (see Venir, §62.)/ 
Travaill-er, 1. to work. 



1. Le perruquier se coupe-t-il le pouce? 2. Non, Monsieur, il se 
coupe les cheveux. 3. Le charpentier ne se coupe-t-il pas la main ! 
4. II ne se coupe pas la main, il coupe le bois. 5. Ne vous rappelez 
vous pas cette dame ? 6. Je me rappelle cette dame et ces messieurs. 
7. De quoi vous occupez vous? 8. Nous nous occupons de nos af- 
faires. 9. Vous souvenez vous des fusils qu'a votre pere ? 10. Je 
ne m'en souviens point du tout. 11. Cette petite fille ne se brule-t- 
elle pas? 12. Elle ne se brule pas, il n'y a pas de feu dans le poele. 
13. Pourquoi le boucher ne se chauffe-t-il pas? 14. Parcequ'il n'a 
pas froid. 15. Ces enfants se levent ils de meilleure heure que moi? 
16. Ils se couchent de bonne heure, et ils se levent tous les matins a 
six heures. 17. Votre associe ne veut il pas s'asseoir? 18. II n'a 
pas le temps de s'asseoir. 19. Vous souvenez vous de vos promes- 
ses? 20. Je m'en souviens parfaitement. 21. Ne vous chauffez 
vous pas quand vous avez froid? 22. Je ne me chauffe presque ja- 
mais. 23. Ne se couche-t-on pas, quand on a sommeil ? 24. On se 
couche quand on a sommeil, et on mange quand on a faim. 25. 
Quand on se porte bien, se leve-t-on de bonne heure ? 26. Quand 
on se porte bien, on doit (should) se lever de bonne heure. 



Exercise 72. 

1. Do you rise early when you are well ? 2. When I am well, I 
ruse every morning at five o'clock. 3. Do you remember your cousin 
L.? 4. I remember him perfectly well. 5. Do you go to bed early? 
6, We go to bed at ten o'clock. 7< Does not the tailor burn his 
lingers ? 8. He does not burn his fingers, his iron is not warm. 9. 
Does the carpenter cut his thumb? 10. He cuts neither his thumb 
nor his hand./ 11. Why do you not warm yourself? 12. I do not 
warm myself, because I am not cold. 13. Is it not very cold to-day? 
14. It is not cold to-day, it rains. 15. Does your hair-dresser rise at 
sunrise? 16. The carpenter rises at sunrise and goes to bed at sun- 
set. 17. Do you rise earlier than P 18. We rise every morning at 



LESSON XXXVIII. 117 

the break of day. 1 9. Do you cut your hair often ? 20. I sut my 
nair and my nails every month. 21. Do you remember that gentle- 
man ? 22. 1 remember him very well. 23. I do not remember him. 
24. Do you 3ut your fingers when you mend a pen ? 25. I cut my 
hand when I work. 26. Do you remember what you learn ? 27. 1 
do not remember all that (tout ce que) I learn. 28. Do you know if 
your father is well ? 29. He is very well to-day. 30. Is not your 
mother well? 31. She is not very well. 32. Do you remember 
your friend's misfortunes ? 33. I remember them. 34. I remember 
that. 



LESSON XXXVin. LEgON XXXVHL 

1. The verb tromper, conjugated actively, corresponds to the Eng- 
lish verb to deceive : — 

II trompe tout le monde. He deceives every body. 

2. Conjugated reflectively, se tromper means to be mistaken ; lite- 
rally, to deceive one's self: — 

On se trompe bien souvent One is often mistaken. 

3. Ennuyer, [{ 49, (2.)] used actively, means to weary the mind, tc 
tease, to bore : — 

Cet homme ennuie ses auditeurs. That man wearies his hearers. 
Vous nous ennuyez par vos de- You tease, or weary us by your ques- 
mandes. turns. 

4. S'ennuyer has no exact correspondent in English. It signifies 

generally, to be or to become mentally weary of any thing or place : — 

Nous nous ennuyons ici. We are weary of being here. 

Vous ennuyez vous a la campagne % Are you weary of being in the country 1 

Je m' ennuie partout. I find no amusement anywhere. 

5. Je m'ennuie means in fact, Tarn mentally weary, I want change, 
amusement, occupation, &c. : — 

6. S'amuser, answers to the English expressions, to amuse one's self 
to take pleasure in, to spend one's time in, to find amusement tn, t& 
enjoy one's self : — 

Nous nous amusons a la campagne. We enjoy our saves in the country, 
Vous vous amusez a des bagatelles. You spend yarn time in trifles. 

Resume of Examples. 



On se trompe souvent soi-m&ine en 

cherchant a tromper les autres. 
Votre commis ne se trompe-t-il pas 1 
II se trompe bien rarement. 



We often deceive ourselves while seek* 

ing to deceive others. 
Is not your clerk mistaken ? 
He is very rarely mistaken. 



118 



LESSON XXXVIII. 



Ne vous trompez vous pas frequein- 

nient ? 
Tout le monde est sujet a se trom- 

per. 
Ce marchand trompe tout le moode. 
Sa conversation nous ennuie. 
Vous ennuyez vos amis par vos 

plaintes. 
Est-ce que je ne vous ennuie pas 1 
Vous ennuyez vous chez nous 1 
Je m'ennuie a la ville et je m'amuse 

a la campagne. 
A quoi vous amusez vous ? 
Je m'amuse a lire l'allemand. 



Are you nolfi rquenJly mistaken ? 

Every one is apt to be mistaken. 

That merchant deceives every body. 

His conversation ivearics us. 

You weary your friends by your con* 

plaints. 
Do I not weary you ? 
Are you weary of remaining with us ? 
I become weary of the city and find 

amusement in the country. 
In what do you amuse yourself? 
I amuse myself in reading German. 



Exercise 13. 

Apprend-re, 4. ir. to Entend-re, 4. to hear ; Quand, when ; 

learn ; Ennuyer, 1. See § 49, (2.) Quelquefois, sometimes; 

Banquier, m. banker; Langue, f. language ; Rec-evoh, 3. to receive; 
Client, m. client, cus- Malade, sick ; Rev-enir, 2. ir. to come 

tomer ; Memoire, m. bill ; back ; 

Demeur-er, 1. to dwell ; Prefer-er, 1. to prefer ; Tromp-er, 1. to deceive. 

1. Aimez vous a demeurer a la campagne? 2. Je prefere la cam- 
pagne a la ville. 3. Vous ennuyez vous souvent a la campagne ? 
4. Quand je m'ennuie a la campagne, je reviens a la ville. 5. Re^oit 
on des nouvelles du General L. ? 6. On n'entend pas parler de lui. 
7. Vous trompez vous quelquefois ? 8. Tout le monde se trompe 
quelquefois. 9. Le banquier trompe-t-il ses clients'? 10. II ne 
trompe ni ses clients ni ses amis, il ne trompe personne. 11. Ne 
vous trompez vous pas dans ce memoire'? 12. Je neme trompe pas, 
13. Vous amusez vous a lire ou a ecrire? 14. Je m'amuse a ap- 
prendre l'allemand et le francais. 15. Avez vous tort d'apprendre 
leslangues? 16. J'ai raison deles apprendre. 17. Vous ennuyez 
vous souvent 1 18. Je m'ennuie quand je n'ai rien a faire. 19. A 
quoi vous amusez vous quand vous etes a. la campagne ? 20. Nous 
nous promenons le matin, et nous travaillons le reste de la journee. 
21. Vous portez vous toujours bien? 22. Nous sommes quelque- 
fois malades. 23. Envoyez vous chercher le medecin ? 24. Nous 
i'enroyons chercher. 25. Je vais le chercher. 

Exercise 74. 

I. Are you not mistaken ? 2. I am not mistaken. 3. Is not the 
banker mistaken ? 4. He is not mistaken, but his clerk is certainly 
(certainement) mistaken. 5. Does he not deceive you? 6. He does 
not deceive me, he deceives nobody. 7. Are you not wro ng to de 
ceive your father? 8. I do not intend to deceive him. 9. Does not 



LESSON XXXIX. 119 

trie merchant make a mistake? 10. He makes a mistake in the I ill 
which he writes. 11. Do you like the country or the city? 12. J 
prefer the city ; I soon become weary of the country. 13. Does not 
that child weary you by his questions ? 14. Does not that long story 
(recit, m.) weary you? 15. It does not weary me, it amuses me. 
16. Do you amuse yourself when you are in the country? 17. 1 
amuse myself, I learn French and Italian. 18!" Are you not weary 
of remaining at your uncle's? 19. I am never weary of remaining 
there. 20 Is your brother often mistaken? 21. Every body ia 
sometimes mistaken. 22. Does his conversation weary you? 23. 
On the contrary, it amuses us. 24. Is your brother heard from ? 
25. Nothing is heard of him. [L. 35.] 26. Is your sister well ? 27. 
No, Sir, she is sick. 28. Do I weary you ? 29. You do not weary 
me. 30. Ami mistaken? 31. You are not mistaken. 32. Is he 
often mistaken ? 33. He is often mistaken. 34. Do ycu not rise 
late ? 35. No, Sir, I rise early. 



LESSON XXXIX. LEgON XXXIX. 

1. The reflective verb, se passer, is used idiomatically in the Seirte 
of to do without It is followed by the preposition de, when it 
comes before a noun or a verb : — 

Vous passez vous de ce livre 1 Do you do without that book ? 

Je ne puis m'en passer. J cannot do without it. 

2. Se servir [2. ir. see § 62.], to use, also requires the preposition 
de before its object : — 

Je me sers de votre canif. I use your penknife. 

Je ne m'en sers pas. I do not use it. 

3. The second example of the two rules above, shows that, when 
the object of those verbs is a thing, it is represented in the sentence 
by the pronoun en: — 

Je m'en sers, je m'en passe. / use it, I do without it. 

4. The pronoun* used as indirect object of a reflective verb, if rep. 
tesenting a person, follows the verb [§ 100, (4.)] : — 

Je puis me passer de lui. I can do without him. 

Je m'adresse a vous et a elle. J apply to you and to iter. 

5. S'endormir [2. ir. see § 62.] ; to fall asleep, an I s r eveiller, U 
awake, are also reflective. 

* The iale does not apply to the reflect' ve pronoun, whicfc is some* 
times an indirect object. 



120 



LESSON XXXIX. 



Je m'endors aussitot que je me I fall asleep as soon as I go to bed, 
eouche. 

Je m'eveille a six heures du matin. I awake at six 6 ^ clock in the morning 

6. S'approcher, to come near, to approach ; s'eloigner, to draw back^ 
to leave, take the preposition de before a noun. Their object, when 
a pronoun, is subject to Rules 3 and 4 above : — 

Votre fils s'approche-t-il du feu? Does your son draw near the fire? 

II ne s'en approche pas. He does not come near it. 

II s'eloigne de moi et de vous. He goes from mc and from you. 



Resume of Examples* 



Vous servez vous de ce couteau ? 
Je ne m'en sers pas, il ne coupe pas. 
De quels couteaux vous servez vous] 
Nous nous servons de couteaux 

d'acier. 
Pouvez vous vous passer d'argenf? 
Nous ne pouvons nous en passer. 
Vous passez vous de votre maitre ? 
Nous nous passons de lui. 
Vous adressez vous a ces messieurs 1 
Nous nous adressons a eux et a 

vous. 
Vous vous endormez facilement. 
Je m'eveille de tres bonne heure. 
Pourquoi vous approchez vous du 

feul 
Je rfl'en approche parceque j'ai 

froid. 
Nous nous eloignons du feu. 
Nous nous en eloignons. 
Nous nous approchons de notre 

pere. 
Nous nous approchons de lui. 



Do you use that knife ? 
I do not use it, it does not cut. 
What knives do you use ? 
We use steel knives. 

Can you do without money ? 

We cannot do without it. 

Do you do without your teacher ? 

We do without him. 

Do you apply, to those gentlemen 1 

We apply to them and to you. 

You go to sleep easily. 

I awake very early. 

Why do you come near tliefire % 

I come near it because I am cold. 

We go from the fire. 

We go from it. 

We go near our father. 

We go near him. 



Ordinairement, genera 

ally ; 
Plume, f. pen ; 
Pourquoi, why ; 
Pret-er, 1. to lend; 
Quart, m. quarter ; 
Taill-er, 1. to mend. 



Exercise 75. 

Aussi, also; Encre, f. ink ; 

Aussitot — que. as soon Fenetre, f. window; 

as; • Feu, vn.fire; 

Canif, m. penknife; Fourchette, f. fork ; 

Demoiselle, young lady; Heure. f. hour, o'clock; 
Domestique, m. ser- Moins, less, before; 

vant; Oblige, e, obliged; 

1. Pouvez vous vous passer d'encre? 2. Nous pouvons nous en 
passer, nous n'avons rien a ecrire. 3. Vous servez vous de votre 
plume ? 4. Je ne m'en sers pas ; en avez vous besoin % 5. Ne voulez 
vous pas vous approcher du feu? 6. Je vous suis bien oblige, je n'ai 
pas froid 7. Pourquoi ces demoiselles s'eloignent elles de la fene- 
tre ? 8. Elles s'en eloignent parcequ'il y fait trop froid. 9. Cea 
enfants ne s'adressent ils pas a vous ? 10. lis s'adressent a moi 



LESSON XL 121 

et a mon frere. 11. A quelle heuri vous eveillez vous le matin 
12. Je in'eveille ordinaire rnent a six heures moins un quart. 13. 
Vous levez vous aussitot que vous vous eveillez ? 14. Je me leve 
aussitot que je m'eveille. 15. De quels iivres vous servez vous* 

16. Je me sers des miens et des votres. 17. Ne vous servez vous 
pas de ceux de votre frere ? 18. Je m'en sers aussi. 19. Les plumes 
dent [L. 31. R. 8,] vous vous servez sont elles bonnes? 20. Pour- 
quoi votre ami s'eloigne-Uil du feu? 21. II s'en eloigne parcequ'il 
a trop ehaud. 22. Pourquoi votre domestique s'en appro.che-t-in 
23. II s'en approche pour se chauffer. 24. Vous ennuyez vous ici? 
15 Je ne m'ennaie pas. 

Exercise *76. 
1. Will you lend me your penknife ? 2. I cannot do without 
*t, I want it to mend my pen. 3. Do you want to use my book ? 
4. I want to use it, will you lend it to me ? 5. What knife does 
your brother use ? 6. He uses my father's knife and my brother's 
fork. 7. Will you not draw near the fire ? 8. We are much obliged 
to you, we are warm. 9. Is that young lady warm enough ? [L. 34, 
3.] 10. She is very cold. 11. Tell her (dites lux) to come near the 
fire? 12. Why do you go from the fire? 13. We are too warm. 
14. Does your brother leave the window? 15. He leaves the win- 
dow because he is cold. 16. To whom does that gentleman apply ? 

17. He applies to me and to my brother. 18. Why does he not ap- 
ply to me ? 19. Because he is ashamed to speak to you. 20. Do 
you awake early every morning? 21. I awake early, when I go to 
bed earlv. 22. Why do you go to sleep ? 23. I go to sleep because 
I am tired. 24. Are you afraid to go near your father ? 25. I am 
not afraid to approach him. 26. Can you do without us? 27. We 
cannot do without you, but we can do without your brother. 28. 
Do you want my brother's horse ? 29. No, Sir, we can do without 
it. 30. Do you intend to do without money ? 3-1 . You know very 
well that we cannot do without it. 32. Is your brother weary of 
being here ? 33. He is not weary of being here. 34. Come near 
the fire, mv child. 



LESSON XL. LE£ON XL. 

I. The verb aller (1. ir. \ 62.), conjugated reflectively, and pre 
«j*ded by the word en, i. e. s'en aller, corresponds to the English ex- 
pressions U go away, to leave : — 

6 



122 



LESSON XL. 



2. Indicative Present of the Verb s'en Aller, to Go awat 

We go away ; 



Je m'en vais, 
Tu t'en vas, 

II s'en va, 



/ go away ; 
Thou art going 

away ; 
He goes away ; 



Nous nous en al- 

lons, 
Vous vous en allez, You are going 

away ; 
lis s'en vont. They go aicty. 

3. Th2 same Tense Conjugated Interrogatively. 

Est-ce que je m'en Do I go away ? Nous en allons Do we go away ? 

vais 1 nous 1 * 

T'en 1 ? as tu? Art thou going Vous en allez Do you go away? . 

away? vous? Are they going 

S en va-t-il 7 Is he going away ? S'en vont ils ? away ? 

4. Se facher, to be or beci/me angry, requires the preposition contra 

or de before the noun or pronoun following it : — 

Se fache-t-il contre votre frere ? Docs he get angry with your brother ? 
II se fache contre lui. He is angry with him. 

Vous vous fachez d'un rien. You get angry at nothing* 

5. Se rejouir, to rejoice, is followed by the preposition de : — 
Je me rejouis de votre bonheur. I rejoice at your happiness. 

6. Se plaire [4. ir. see \ 62,] to take pleasure, to delight in any thing 
to like to be in a place, takes a before its object ;— - 

Je me plais a la campagne. / like to be in the counti y. 

Je me plais a etudier, a lire. 1 take pleasure in studying, in reusing. 

7. Se depecher, se hater, to make haste, take de before their ol> 

''ect:— 

Depechez vous de finir vos lemons. Make haste to finish yovr lessens, 
Pourquoi ne vous depechez vous pas? Why do you not make haste ? 

Resume of Examples. 



Le marchand s'en va-t-il aujour- 
d'hui % 

Nous nous en allons demain. 

Je m'en vais quand je suis fatigue. 

Pourquoi vous fachez vous contre 
lui? 

I) se plait a jouer, il n'etudie ja- 
mais. 

Vous plaisez vons chez vos parents ? 

De quoi vous rejouissez vous? 

Nous nous rejouissons de votre 
succes. 

Nous nous en rejouissons. 

Pourquoi vous depechez vous 1 

Nous nous depechons d'ecrire. 

Nous nous plaisons en Angleterre. 

Nous ne nous plaisons pas a Paris. 



Does the merchant go away to-day f 

We are going away to-morrow. 
I go away when I am tired. 
Why do you get angry with Jam ? 

He takes pleasure in playing, he navm 

studies. 
Do you Uke to be at your relations*? 
At what do you rejoice? 
We rejoice at your success. 

We rejoice at it. 
Why do you make haste ? 
We make haste to write. 
We like to be m England. 
We do not like to be in Paris, 



LESSON X h. 



123 



Nous ne nous y pIaiuon3 pas. 
Vous plaisez vous a New York 1 
Nous nous y plaisons. 



We do not like to be there. 

Do you like to be in New Yoik? 

We like to be there. 



Exercise 77. 

Ambassadeur, m. am- Jotier, 1. to play ; Prochain, e, next; 

bassador; Malheur, m. misfortune; Retourn-er, 1. to reUurni 

Arrivee, f. arrival; Mieux, better t Semaine, f. week; 

Autrui, m. others; Midi, noon; Tante, f. aunt; 

Cour-ir, 2. ir. to run; Parceque, because; Turc, turque, Turkish. 

Jamais, never ; 

1. Vous en allez vous bientdt? 2. Je m'en vais la semaine pro- 
chaine. 3. Pourquoi vous en allez vous ? 4. Parceque je ne me plais 
pas ici. 5. Vous plaisez vous mieux chez votre tante qu'ici ? 6. Je 
m'y plais mieux. 7. N'avez vous pas tort de vous en aller si tot ? 
8. J'ai raison de m'en aller. 9. Ne vous rejouissez vous pas des maL 
heurs d'autrui? 10. Nous ne nous en rejouissons point. 11. Cet 
homme se fache-t-il contre le jardinier? 12. II se fache contre lui parce 
qu'il ne veut pas se depecher. 13. Se fache-t-il bien souvent? 14. II 
se fache a tout moment, il se fache d'un rien. 15. Ne vous depechez 
vous jamais? 16. Je me depeche toujours quand j'ai quelque chose a 
faire. 17. Ne vous plaisez vous pas a courir et a jouer? 18. Je me 
plais a jouer et mon frere se plait a lire. 19. Vous rejouissez vous 
de l'arrivee de l'ambassadeur turc? 20. Je m'en rejouis. 21. Ne vous 
plaisez vous pas en Amerique ? 22. Je m'y plais beaucoup mieux 
qu'en France. 23. Votre ecolier ne se plait il pas chez vous ? 24. II 
se plait chez moi, mais il desire retourner chez son pere. 25. Depe- 
chez vous, il est deja midi. 

Exercise 78. 

1. At what hour does your friend go away? 2. He goes away 
every morning at nine o'clock. 3. Do you go away with (avec) him ? 
4. I go away with him when I have time. 5. Will you make haste 
to finish your letter ? 6. I make haste to finish it. 7. Does the gar- 
dener get angry with his brother ? 8. He gets angry against him when 
he does not make haste. 9. Make haste, my friend, it is ten o'clock; 
10. Why do you not make haste? 11. I like to play, but I do not like 
to study. 12. Do you like to stay at my house ? 13. I like to stay 
there. 14. Are you rejoiced at the arrival of your mother? 15. I 
rejoice at it. 16. Is not your brother wrong to go away so soon ? 
17. He is right to go away, he has much to do at home. 18. Do you 
rejoice at other people's misfortunes? 19. I do not rejoice at them. 
20. I rejoice at your success. 21. Does not your brother draw near 
the fire? 22. He goes from the fire, he is too warm. 23. Does that 



124 LESSON XL I. 

young lady get angry against you? 24. She gets angry at trifiea [J* 
rieri). 25. Do you like to be in Paris? 26. I like to be there. 27. 
Can you do without me to-day? 28. We caunot do without you — « 
make haste to finish your work (ouvrage). 29. Do you want your 
penknife? 30. I want to use it. 31. Make haste to rise, it is six 
o'clock. 32. Is it fine weather ? 33. No, Sir, it rains. 34. Is your 
father well this morning? 35. Yes, Sir, he is very well. 



LESSON XLI. LEQON XLL 

THE PAST INDEFINITE. [§ 121.] 

1. The past indefinite is composed of the present of the indicative 
of one of the auxiliary verbs, avoir and etre [} 45, (8.)], and the par- 
ticiple past of a verb. See the different paradigms of verbs, § 47 and 
following sections : — 

J'ai parle, je suis arrive. I have spoken, lam arrived. 

2. The past indefinite is used to express an action entirely com- 
pleted, but performed at a time of which a part is not yet elapsed, 
or at a time entirely past, but not specified. [§ 121, (1.) (2.)] : — 

J'ai vu votre pere ce matin. / liave seen your father this morning. 

Jene vous ai pas encore parle. / have not yet spoken to you. 

3. The past indefinite may also be used, when the time is speci- 
fied [} 121, (3.)] :— 

Je lui ai ecrit la semaine derniere. J virote to him last week. 
Je lui ai envoy c une lettre le mois / sent him a letter last month. 
dernier. 

4. In this tense and in other compound tenses, the adverb is gene- 
rally placed between the auxiliary and the participle [§ 136, (3.)] # — - 

Vous nous avez sou vent parle. You have often spoken to us. 

Je ne Fai pas encore vu. I have not yet seen him. 

5. The adverbs aujourd'hui, to-day ; demain, to-morrow ; hier, yesler* 
day ; polysyllabic adverbs of manner ending in merit, and long adverbs 
generally, do not come between the auxiliary and the participle, but 
follow Rule 1. L. 34. See { 136, (5.) :— 

Vous avez lu dernierement. You read lately. 

6 The unipersonal verb y avoir, [L. 33. R. 3. 4,] placed before a 

word expressing time, corresponds with the English word, ago : — 

J'ai re$u une lettre. il y a huit jours, i" received a Utter eight days ag& 
Vous avez achete une maison, il y a You bought, a douse a yeai ago. 
un an. 



LESSON XLI. 



125 



Resume of Examples. 



Vos neveux nous ont parle. 
Nous avons parle a votre pere. 
Le tailleur a-t-il fait mon habit 1 
Le boulanger a mis son chapeau. 
Le conlonnier a ote ses souliers. 
Votre frere a dit quelque chose. 
Votre soeur qu'a-t-elle dit 1 
N'avez vous rien dit a mon cousin 7 
Jo ne lui ai rien dit. 
Je ne l'ai jamais rencontre. 
Je ne leur ai jamais parle. 
Qu'avez vous fait aujourd'hui 1 
Hier, nous n'avons pas travaille. 

U> 136.] 
Leur en avez vous sou vent parle 1 

Je leur en ai souvent parle. 
Je ne le leur ai pas encore dit. 

N'avez vous pas assez ecrit "? 
I] m'a ecrit. il y a longtemps. 
II nous a repondu, il y a un mois. 



Your nephews spoke to us. 

We spoke lo your jather. 

Has t/ie tailor made my coat ? 

TJie baker has put on his hat. 

The shoemaker has taken his shoes of 

Your brotlier said something. 

What did your sister say ? 

Have you told my cousin nothing 7 

I have told him nothing. 

I have nevo, *rt him. 

I never spoke to them. 

Wliat have you done to-day ? 

We did not work yesterday. 

Have you often spoken to them about 

it? 
I have often spoken to them about it. 
I have not yet said any thing to them 

about it. 
Have you not written enough? 
He wroU to me a long time ago. 
He replied to us a month ago. 



Avocat, m. barrister; 
Oela, ceci, that, this ; 
Dit. from dire, said; 
Etudi-er. 1. to study; 
Gant, m. glove ; 



Exercise 79. 

Gargon, m. boy ; 
Hier, yesterday ; 
Journee, f. day ; 
Lu, from lire, read ; 
Ministre, m. minister; 



Mis, from mettre, put on 
Plant-er, 1. to plant ; 
Poirier, m. pear-tree ; 
Soulier, m. shoe ; 
YvL,from voir, seen. 



1. Qui vous a dit cela? 2. L'avocat me Pa dit. 3. Lui avez vous 
parle de cette affaire ? 4. Je ne lui en ai pas encore parle. 5. L'avez 
vous vu dernierement ? 6. Je l'ai vu il y a quelques jours. 7. N'avez 
vous pas ecrit hier % 8. Nous avons lu et ecrit toute la journee. [L. 
26, (9.)] 9. N'avez vous pas ote vos gants et vos souliers? 10. Je 
n'ai pas 6te mes gants, mais j'ai ote mon chapeau. 11. Le tailleur 
n'a-t-il pas mis son chapeau? 12. Oui, Monsieur, il a mis son cha- 
peau. 13. Qu'avez vous fait a ce petit garcon \ 14. Je ne lui ai rien 
fait. 15. Ne iui avez vous point dit que je suis ici] 16. Je ne le lui 
ai pas encore dit. 17. Qu'avez vous etudie ce matin ? 18. Nous avons 
etudie nosleconset nous avons lu nos livres. 19. Le jardinier du mi- 
nistre a-t-il plante le poirier % 20. II l'a plante il y a plus de hui^ jours. 
21 Avez vous achete un habit de drap noir? 22. J'en ai achete un. 
23. L'avez vous porte aujourd'hui ? 24. Je ne l'ai pas encore porta, 
25. Nous avons mis nos souliers et nos bas c€ matin. 

Exercise 80. 
1. Have you studied to-day ? 2. We have no time to study, we 



126 LESSON XLII. 

have read a page. 3. Have you not written to my brother? 4. I 
have not yet written to him. 5. Has not the German written to my 
mother ? 6. He har not yet written to her. 7. Have you told (a) 
my mother that I have taken (pris) this book ? 8. I have not yet 
seen your mother. 9. What have you done this morning? 10. We 
have done nothing. 11. Have you taken off your coat? 12. I have 
not taken off my coat, it is too cold. 13. Has the bookseller writ- 
ten to your brother? 14. He wrote to him a long time ago. 15. 
Did he write to him a month ago ? 16. He wrote to him more than 
a year ago. 17. H~ve you planted a pear-tree? 18. We have planted 
several. 19. Is it too cold to (pour) plant trees ? 20. It is too warm. 
21. What has the gardener done to your little boy ? 22. He has done 
nothing to him. 23. Has any one done any thing to him ? 24. No 
one has done any thing to him. 25. Is any thing the matter with him ? 
26. Nothing is the matter with him. 27. Has your father put on his 
black hat ? 28. No, Sir, he has not put on his black hat. 29. What 
has youi brother said ? 30. He has said nothing. 31. Has your sis- 
ter told you that? 32. She told it me. 33. Did you not work yes- 
terday ? 34. We did not work yesterday, we had nothing to do. 
35. Your little boy has done nothing to-day. 

«■ > » ■■-«•— 



LESSON XLII. LFJJON XLJL 

HIE FA8T KARTICIPLE. [$ 134.] 

1. The past participle, which in French forms a part of every com- 
pound tense, [} 45, (8.)] is susceptible of changes in its termination. 

2. The student will find in the table of the terminations of the 
regular verbs [{ 60.], the different changes which the past participle 
of those verbs undergoes. The feminine terminations of the past 
participle of the irregular verbs, will be found in the alphabetical 
table, § 62. 

3. The last letter of the feminine termination is always an e mute 

4. 1 >e plura. of a past participle not ending with an s, is formei 
by the addition of that letter to the singular, masculine or femi- 
nine. 

5. The participle past, accompanied by the auxiliary avoir, nevei 

agrees with the nominative or subject [§ 134, (3.)] : — 

Les demoiselles ont chante. The young ladies sang. 

Ces messieurs ont lu 1 oute la journSe. Those gentlemen read the whole day* 



LESSON XL II. 



127 



6. The participle past, having etre as its auxiliary, assumes in it* 

termination the gender and number of the subject [§ 134, (2.)] ■ — 

Ma fille est arrivee ce matin. My daughter arrived this n.oming 

Nos freres ne sont pas venus. Our brothers are not come. 

7. The participle, accompanied by the auxiliary avoir, agrees in 

gendei and number with its direct object or regime direct, \\ 2, (2.) 

j 42, (4 )] when that object precedes it [§ 134, (4.)] :-— 

Les dames que nous avons vues. The ladies -whom we have seen. 
Les lettres que nous avons lues. The letters which we have read. 

8. When the regime direct or objective (accusative) follows the 

participle, no agreement takes place [{ 134, (5.)] : — 

Avez vous vu les dames 1 Have you seen the ladies ? 

Avons nous lu les lettres 7 Have we read the letters ? 

9. A participle past never agrees with its regime indirect, or indi- 
rect object (dative or ablative) [} 2, (3.) 5 42, (5.)] : — 

Les dames a. qui nous avons parle. The ladies to vihom we have spoken. 

10. The participle past used adjectively, that is, without an aux 
ihary follows the rule of the adjective, [} 66, (3.,) } 134, (1 ) | : — 

Des livres bien imprimes. Well printed books. 

11. The participle, preceded by the relative pronoun en, remains 
invariable, although the en should relate to a feminine or plural 
noun [} 135, (7.)] :— 



Avez vous apporte des plumes 1 
J'en ai apporte. 



Have you brought pens ? 
I have brought some. 



12. The presence of en does not, however, prevent the agreement 
of the participle, when it is preceded by a direct regimen [} 135, 
(7.)] :- 
Les plumes que j'en ai apportees. The pens which I have brought from U. 



Resume of Examples. 



Vos soeurs ont elles ecrit 1 

Elles n'ont pas encore ecrit. 

Les lettres que nous avons ecrites. 

Avez vous ecrit vos lettres 1 

Je les ai lues, je les ai ecrites. 

Les avez vous apportees 1 

Je ne les ai pas apportees. 

Avez vous appele ces dames 1 

Je ne les ai pas appelees. 

Qui avez vous vu ce matin "? 

Nous avons vu ces demoiselles. 

Nous les avons vues. 

Nous ne leur avons pas parle. 

Avez vous des livres relies ? 



Have your sisters written ? 

They have not yet written. 

The letters which we have wrttien. 

Have you written your letter z 1 

I have read them, I have wrziten them 

Have you brought them ? 

I have not brought them. 

Have you called those ladies ? 

I have not called them. 

Whom have you seen this mormng J 

We have seen those young ladies. 

We have seen them. 

We hare not spoken to them. 

Haw! ytni bo^nd bosk%l 



128 



LESSON LXII. 



Jai des livres broches. 

Avez vous achete des pommes 1 
J 'en ai achete. 
Nous en avons achete. 
Nous les en avons persuades. 



I have ur, bound (ilitcked, in pap* 

covers,) books. 
Have you bought apples ? 
I have bought some. 
We have bought some. 
We have persuaded tJum of U. 



Gard-er, 1. to keep; 
Gravure, f. engraving g 
Oubli-er, I. to forget; 
Rec-evoir, 3. to receive , 
Keli-er, 1. to hind; 
Revenus, m. p. income; 
Tasse. f. cup; 
Yn,from voir. 3. ir. seen . 



Exercise 81. 

Achet-er, 1. to buy. [§ 49, Donn-er, 1. to give ; 

(5.)] Bit, from Dire, 4. ir. 

Apport-er, 1. to bring; said; 
Appel-er, 1. tocaU. [§49, Entend-re, 4. to hear ; 

(4.)] Examin-er, 1. to exam- 

Broch-er, 1. to stitch; ine ; 

Bourse, f. purse; Expres, on purpose; 

Cass-er, 1. to break; Fleur, f. flower ; 
Commission, f. errand; 

1 . Nous avez vous apporte nos habits ? 2. Nous ne )es avons pat 
encore apportes. 3. Les avez vous oublies ? 4. Nous ne les avons 
pas oublies, mais nous n'avons pas eu le temps de les apporter. 5 
Pourquoi n'avez vous pas appele les marchands ? 6. Je les ai appele s, 
mais ils ne m'ont pas entendu. 7. Avez vous entendu eette inu- 
sique 1 8. Je 1'ai entendue. 9. N'avez vous pas vu les jolies fleurs 
que j'ai apportees? 10. Je les ai vues; a qui les avez vous don- 
nees? 11. Je ne les ai donnees a personne, je les ai gardees pou? 
vous. 12. Avez vous bien examine ces gravures? IS. Je les ai 
bien examinees. 14. Les avez vous aehetees. 15. Je ne les ai point 
aehetees. 16. N'avez vous point recu vos revenus ? 17. Je ne lea 
ai point eneore recus. 18. La domestique a-t-elle casse ees tasses? 
19. Elle les a cassees. 20. A-t-elle casse des tasses expres? 21. 
Elle n'en a pas casse expres. 22. Avez vous achete des livres re» 
lies ou broches. 23. J'ai achete des livres relies. 24. Nous avez 
vous dit ces paroles ? 25. Nous vous les avons dites, mais vous les 
avez oubliees. 26. Je n'ai pas oublie votre commission. 

Exercise 82. 

1. Have you seen my cups ? 2. I have not yet seen therm. 3. 
Have you brought me my books ? 4. I have not forgotten them, I 
have left them (laiss-er, 1 .) at my brother's. 5. Has your mother called 
your sisters ? 6. She has not yet called them. 7. Has the servant 
told you this news 1 (nouvelle.) 8. She has told me this news. 9. 
She has told it me. 10. Have you forgotten my errand? 11. We 
have not forgotten it, we have forgotten your money. 12. Where 
have you left your purse? 13. We left it at the merchant's. 14. 
Have you bought the beautiful (belles) engre rings wbieh I saw ai 



LESSON XLIII. 129 

four bookseller's ? 15. I have not seen them. 16. Has yt ur mother 
bought them ? 17. She has bought books, but she has bought no 
engravings. 18. Has that little girl broken my cups? 19. She has 
broken them on purpose. 20. Does that lady receive her income 
every month? 21. She receives it every six months. 22. Is the 
house which you have bought large ? 23. I have bought no house. 
24. Did you receive a letter from your father yesterday ? 25. I re- 
ceived a letter from him four days ago. 26. Have you spoken to 
those ladies ? 27. I have spoken to them. 28. Have you given 
them flowers? 29. I have given them some (en). 30. Are the 
books which you have bought bound? 31. No, Sir, they are in 
paper covers. 32. Have you examined that house ? 33. I have not 
examined it. 34. Your brother (en) has examined several (plusieurs) 



LESSON XLUL LECON XLHL 

USE OF THE AUXILIARIES (§ 46), 

1. The active verb [§ 43, (2.) (3.)] that is, the verb which has 
Or may have a direct regimen or object, always takes avoir, as its 
auxiliary [(§ 46, (1.)] :— 

Nous avons ecrit a notre banquier. We have written to our banker. 

2. Almost all neuter verbs, i. e. verbs which cannot have a direct 
object, take the auxiliary avoir, when they express action :— 

Nous avons couru, marche, parle. We have run, walked, spoken. 

3. The compound tenses ^f a few neuter verbs, expressing action, 

are, however, conjugated with tire — aller, to go ; arriver, to arrive ; 

choir, tomber, to fall ; deceder, mourir, to die ; naitre, to be born ; 

venir, to come ; parvenir, to succeed ; devenir, to become ; revenir, to 

return :— 

A quelle heure 6tes vous venu 1 At what hour did you come ? 
Je suis * ne en France. / ivas born in France. 

4. A few neuter verbs [§ 46, (3.)] take avoir, when they express 
action, and etre, when they express situation :— 

* Observe that when the person spoken of is living, the French use the 
present and not the past of the auxiliary with the past participle of 
Daitre, to be born : -Cette dame est nee en Angleterre. T7cat bitty (is) 
was b&rn in England : — Mon frere est ne en France. My brothe° *is) was 
hern in France. 



130 



LESSON XLIII. 



Votre ft ere a-t-il sorti ce matin ? Has your brother gone out this nurrn. 

ing ? 
Votre frere est il s >rti 1 Is your brother gone out ? 

5 The pa*>t indefinite of the verb etre, [4. ir.] (J'ai et6, &c) ia 
used instead of the preterite indefinite of aller (Je suis alle ;) when 
speaking of a place where one has been : — 

Le medecin a etc a Paris. The physician has been at Paris. 

J'ai ete a l'eglise ce matin. / went to church this morning. 

6. When, however, we are still in a given place or on the road 
towards it, the expression, Je suis alle, &c. is used : — 

Le medecin est alle a Londres. The physician is gone to London 

Votre soeur est allee a l'eglise. Your sister is gone to church. 

Resume of Examples. 



Avez vous ete au bal hier au soir 1 
Nous n'y avons pas ete. 
Ou cette demoiselle a-t-elle ete 1 
Elle a ete chez son frere et chez 

nous. 
Ou votre soeur est elle allee ce 

matin 1 
Elle est allee trouver sa cousine. 
N'avez vous pas sorti aujourd'hui 1 
Je n'ai pas encore sorti. 
Ou est Monsieur le general 1 
Je ne sais pas, Monsieur, il 

sorti. 
Ou ce monsieur est il ne 1 
11 est n6 a Paris ou a Lyon. 
Votre niece a-t-elle ete voir 

frere % 
Elle a ete le voir hier. 



est 



son 



Elle est allee le voir hier. 



Did you go U '-/le foill last evening ? 

We did not' go. 

Whither did that young lady go ? 

She went to her brother's and to our 
house. 

Where is your sister gone this morn- 
ing? 

She is gone to her cousin. 

Did you not go out to-day ? 

I have not yet been out. 

Where is the general ? 

I do not know, Sir, he is gone out. 

Where was that gentleman bom ? 
He was born in Paris or Lyons. 
Did your niece go to visit her brother? 

She went to see him yesterday {and 

is back). 
She went to see him yesterday {and is 

not back.) 



Exercise 83. 



Bijouterie, f. jewelry ; Ma^on, m. mason; Orfevre, m. goldsmith; 

Chapelier, m. hatter ; Magasin, m. warehouse ; Part-ir, 2. ir. to set oui ; 
Ete, {from etre, 4. ir.)Malade, sick; Retourn-er, 1. to rt> 

been ; Marchandise, f. merchan- turn ; 

Espagne. f. Spain ; dise ; Sort-ir, 2. ir. to go ovi. ,• 

Horloger, rn. watch-ma-Ne, from Naitre, 4. ir.Venu, from venir, 2 

ker ; to be born ; ir. come, 

1. A quelle heure votre soeur est elle venue ? 2. Elle est venue 
a huit keures moins un quart. 3. Ces demoiselles sont elles nees a 
Rouen ou a Caen? 4. Elles ne sont nees ni a Rouen ni a CaeiH 
elles sont nees a Strasbourg. 5. L'horloger est il chez lui ? 6. Non, 
Monsieur, il est alle a son magasin. 7 A-t-il ete a Paris cette 



LESSON XI III. 131 

? 8. Oui, Madame, il y a ete. 9. Y a-t-il achete des marcnan- 
dises? 10. II y a achete de la bijouterie. 11. Avez vous ete trouver 
mon pere? 12. J'ai ete le trouver. 13. Votre ehapelier a-t-il sorti 
aujourd'hui ? 14. II n'a pas sorti, il est maiade. 15. Le mscon es>t il a 
lamaison? 16. Non, Madame, il est sorti. 17. Quand est il sorti ? 
18. II est sorti il y a une heure. 19. Votre ehapelier est il arrive 
aujourd'hui ou hier ? 20. II est arrive hier a quatre heures du matin. 
21. Notre tailleur a-t-il ete voir son pere aujourd'hui? 22. II est 
parti pour Lyon. 23. L'orfevre de mon cousin n'est il pas parti 
pour l'Espagne ? 24. Non, Monsieur, il est retourne en Allemagne. 
25. Ma soeur a ete a l'eglise ce matin, et elle est allee a l'ecole, il y a 
une demi-heure. 

Exercise 84. 

1. Is the physician at home 1 2. No, Sir, he is not at home; he is 
out. 3. Have you been out this morning ? 4. No, Sir, I have not 
been out ; I am sick. 5. Is your sister's little girl out ? 6. Yes, Sir, 
she is out, she is at my brother's. 7. At what hour did the hatter 
arrive ? 8. He arrived last evening at nine. 9. Did the jeweller go to 
Paris or to Lyons this year? 10. He went to Paris six months ago, 
but he is back {de retour). 11. Did you go to my brother or to my 
sister? 12. I have not had time to go to them. 13. Where was that 
gentleman born? 14. He was born in England, in Exeter or in Ports- 
mouth. 15. Was not your sister born in Paris? 16. No, Sir, she 
was born in Madrid, in Spain. 17. Did you tell me that your brother 
has bought a good house? 18. He has bought a very good house in 
London. 19. Do you know at what time the watchmaker arrived ? 20. 
He arrived this morning at a quarter before faz. 21. Has he brought 
much jewelry ? 22. He has not brought much jewelry, but he has 
brought many watches (montre, f.). 23. Has he been in France or 
in Germany ? 24. He has been in France, in Germany, and in Swit- 
zerland (Suisse), 25. Is your sister in (d la maisori), Sir? 26. No, 
Sir, she is out; she is gone to church. 27. Did she go to school 
yesterday 1 28. She went to school and to church. 29. Is she there 
now? 30. No, Sir, she is back. 31. Is the hatter arrived? 32. Yes, 
Sir, he is arrived. 33. When did he arrive? 34 He arrived yester* 
day at nine o'clock in the morning. 



132 



LESSON XLIT. 



LESSON XLIV. 



LEgON XLIV. 



1. Combien de temps corresponds with the Erigjsh expression 

kow long. 

Combien de temps avez vous de- How long did ym live in Italy ? 
meiirs en Italic? 

2. Combien de fois answers to the English, how often, how man% 
times 

C :>mbien de fois y avez vous ete 1 How many times have you been there ? 

3. Jusqu'ou is used for how far, what distance, &e. 
Jusqu'ou avez vous ete 7 How far have you been? 

4. Jusqu'a quelle heure (till what hour,) means also, how late. 

Jusqu'a quelle heure avez vous at- How late did you wait? 

tendu'? 

5. D'ou means whence ; par ou, which way, in what direction. 
B'ou venez vous mon ami 1 Whence do you come, my friend ? 
Par ou votre ami est il alle 1 Which way is ymir friend gone? 

6. Mener [§ 49.], porter, to take, to carry ; amener, apporter, to bring 

to take with one ; emmener, emporter, to take, to carry away. We use 

mener, amener, emmener, for to take, to bring, to take away, in tha 

sense of conducting, leading, guiding, on foot or in a vehicle. Porter 

apporter, emporter, mean to carry, to bear, to carry away, &e. 

Menez votre sceur a l'ecole. Take your sister to school. 

Portez ce livre a votre sceur. Take this hook to your sister. 

Kesume of Examples. 



Jusqu'ou votre frere est il alle 1 
II est alle jusqu'a Paris. 
Combien de temps va-t-il y r ester ? 
II va y rester jusqu'au printemps. 
Combien de temps avez vous de- 

meure a Londres 1 
Nous y avons demeure six ans. 
Jusqu'ou avez vous ete 7 
Nous avons ete jusqu'aux Champs 

Elysees, 
Jusqu'a quelle heure avez vous 

ecrit 7 
J'ai ecrit jusqu'a minuit. 
D'ou viennent ces Allemandes ? 
Elles viennent d'Aix-la-chapelle. 
Par ou sont elles venues 1 
Elles sont venues par Bruxelles. 
Menez vous cette petite fille a 

l'ecole 1 



How far is your brother gone? 
He is gone as far as Paris. 
How long is he going to stay there ? 
He is going to stay there until spring 
How long did you live in London ? 

We lived there six years. 

How far did you go ? 

We went as far as the Champs Elf 

sees. 
How late did you write, ? 

I wrote until midnight. 
Whence come those German ladies? 
They come from Aix-la-chapelle. 
WJdch way did they tome? 
TJiey came Iry Brussels. 
Do you taht (lead) that little girl & 
scho tI ? 



LESSON XLIV. 



133 



Je ne iVm&ne pas. je ly porte, elle 
est trop peti te pour marcher. 

Amenez vcus vos enfantsl 

Portez vo^s une lettre a la poste?* 

J'emuiene mon eheval, j emporte 
ma mont.*e. 



/ do not lead her there, I carry h& 
there ; ike is too .mall to walk. 

Do you bring your children ? 

Do you take a letter to the post-office ? 

I bring away my horse \ I bring away 
my watch. 



Exercise 85. 

Bruit, m. noise; lo\,here; Pied, m.foot; 

Drap, m. cloth; Loin, far ; Quitt-er, 1. to liave; 

Eieve, m. pupil; Magnifique, magnificent; Soieries, f. p. silk goods ; 

Fils. m. son; Midi, noon; Voiture, f. carriage; 

Fin, e,fine; Nouvelle, f. news; Voyageur, m. traveller. 

1. Le jeune homme est il alle loin? 2. II n'est pas alle bien loin, 
il n'est alle que jusqu'a. Paris, 3. Vos enfants font trop de bruit, 
pourquoi ne les emmenez vous pas ? 4. lis sont malades, ils ne peu- 
vent marcher. 5. Comment les avez vous amenes ici % 6. Je les ai 
amenes en voiture. 7. A quelle heure amenez vous le medecinl 
8. Je l'amene tous les jours a. midi.- 9. Combien de fois par jour 
menez vous vos eleves a. l'eglise? 10. Je les mene a. l'eglise deux 
fois par jour. 11. Combien de fois y avez vous ete? 12. J'y ai ete 
plusieurs fois. 13. Par ou ces voyageurs sont ils venus? 14. Ils sont 
venus par Amiens et par Rouen. 15. D'oa apportez vous cette nou- 
velle] 16. Je Papporte de Cologne. 17. D'oti avez vous amene 
ces superbes chevaux ? 18. Je les ai amenes d'Angleterre. 19. Si vous 
quittez la France, avez vous l'intention d'emmener votre fils ? 20. J'ai 
Imtention de 1'emmener. 21. Qu'avez vous apporte de France? 22. 
Nous avons apporte de magnifiques soieries, des draps fins et des cha- 
peaux de Lyon. 23. Avez vous amene votre fille a. pied ou a eheval? 24. 
Je l'ai amenee en voiture. 25. Vos freres nous ont apporte des livres. 

Exercise 86. 

1. How long did your son live in London? 2. He lived there 
ten years. 3. How far is the physician gone ? 4. The physician 
is gone as far as Cologne. 5. Has he taken his son with lum ? 6. 
He has not taken him. 7. How have you brought your two littl 
girls ? 8. I brought one in a carriage, and I carried the other. 9. 
Is she too little to walk? 10. She is not too small to walk, but she 
is sick. 11. Have you brought your horse? 12. We have brought 
two horses. 13. Have you brought the books which you have pro- 
mised me ( / promis)1 14. I have forgotten to bring them. 15. 
Has that lady brought her eldest (aine) son ? 16. She has brought 
all her children. 17. How did they come? 18. They came in & 
earriage. 19. WLieh way did your brother come from Germany? 



134 LESSOH XLV. 

20. Ho cl.me by Aix-la-Chapelle and Brussels. 21. Do yru intend 
fco take your ,ioir. to sc tool this afternoon ? 22. I do not intend to 
take him there, it is too cold. 23. Is that child too sick ',o walk ? 
24. He is too sick to walk, and I intend to carry him. 25 Why do 
you not take him in a carriage? 26. My brother has taken my 
horse away. 27. Have you brought the physician ? 28, T have not 
brought him, no one is sick at our house. 29. Will yoa take this 
book to church ? 30. I have another, I do not want it. 31. Have 
you taken my letter to the post-office ? 32. I have forgotten it 
33 How late did you write ? 34. I wrote until midnight (minuit) 
S5. Whence do your sisters come 1 36. They come from Paris. 



LESSON XLV. LEgON XLV. 

(See Lesson 36.) 

1. The reflective or pronominal verb always takes &tre as its 
auxiliary [§ 46] : — 

Votre cousin s'est promene. Your cousin has taken a walk. 

Nos amis se sont flattes. Our friends have flattered themselves. 

2. Although the past participle of a reflective verb be conjugated 
with etre, it agrees with its direct regimen, when that regimen pre- 
cedes it, and is invariable when the regimen follows it. The student 
should be careful to see, if the reflective pronoun be a direct or an 
indirect regimen [§ 135.] : — 

Vous vous etes flattees, Mesdemoi- You have flattered yourselves, young 

selles. ladies. 

Elles se sont donne la main They have given (to) each other the 

hand. 

It will be easily perceived that se in the first sentence is a direct 
regimen, and that the same word in the second represents an indu 
re>*t object. 

3. Verbs essentially unipersonal, i. e., verbs which cannot be cod* 
jugated otherwise, take avoir as an auxiliary: — 

II a plu, il a neige, il a gele. It rained,, it snowed, it froze. 

4. Verbs occasionally unipersonal, take etre as an auxiliary . — 
II lui est arrive un malheur. A misfortune has happened to him. 

5. Faire [4. ir.] used unipersonally, and Y avoir, to be there, taki 
the auxiliary avoir : — 

A-t^il fait beau temps le mois passe" 1 Was it fine weather last month ? 
Y a-t-il eu beau coup de monde 1 Were there many people there? 



LESSON XLV. 



136 



6. The participle past of a unipersonal verb is always invariabli 
[{ 135, (6.)] :- 

Les pluies qu'il yaeu cet ete. The rains which we ksve had thit 

summer. 



Resume of Examples. 



Leg Italiennes se sont elles prome- 

nees'? 
Oui, Monsieur, elles se sont prome- 

nees. 
Nous nous sommes ape^us de cela. 

Votre mere s'est elle bien portee 1 
Vos soeurs se sont elles assises % 
Cette marchandise s'est elle bien 

vendue 1 
Vos enfants se sont ils appliques a 

l'etude 1 
Ils s'y sont appliques. 
Nous nous sommes donne de .la 

peine. [§ 135, (1.)] 
Quel temps a-t-il fait ce matin 1 
N'a-t-il pas fait beau temps 1 
Quel malheur vous est il arrive 1 

Vous est il arrive quelque cbose 7 
U ne m'est rien arrive. 



Did the Italian ladies wvlk ? 

Yes, Sir, they have taken a walk. 

We perceived that, or we took notice 

of that. 
Has your mother been well ? 
Did your sisters sit doion ? 
Did that merchandise sell well ? 

Did your children apply to study ? 

They applied to it. 

We gave (to) ourselves much trouble, 

What weather was it this morning ? 

Was it not fine weather? 

What misfortune has happened to 

you? 
Has any thing happened to you ? 
Sothing has happened to me. 



Exercise 87. 

&.cier, m. steel; Grel-er, 1. pec. to hail ; Se tromp-er, 1. ref. to be 

S'adress-er, 1. ref. to ap- Hollandais, e. Dutch; mistaken ; 

ply ; Neig-er. 1. pec. to snow ; Se serv-ir, 2. ir. ref to 

S'aperc-evoir, 3. ref. to Peine, f. trouble ; use ; 

perceive ; Phi, from pleuvoir, rain- Se vend-re, 4. ref. to sell. 

S'asse-oir, 3. ir. ref. to ed; 

sit down ; Plume, f. pen ; 

S'ennuy-er, l.pec. [§49.] Se port-er, 1. ref. to be 

to groio weary ; or do ; 

1. A qui vos soeurs se sont elles adressees? 2. Elles se sonl 
adressees a moi. 3. Ne se sont elles pas trompees? [L. 38. 1.] 4. 
Elles se sont trompees. 5. Vous etes vous apercu de votre erreur? 
6. Je ne m'en suis pas apercu. 7. Vous etes vous ennuyes a la 
eampagne? 8. Nous nous y sommes ennuyes. [L. 38. 4.] 9. Ce* 
demoiselles se sont elles ennuyees chez vous? 10. Elles s'y sont 
ennuyees. 11. De quoi vous etes vous servie pour ecrire, Mademoi- 
selle ? [L. 39.2.] 12. Je me suis servie d'une plume d'or. 13. 
Ces ecolieres ne se sont elles pas servies de plumes d'acier? 14. 
Elles se sont servies de plumes d'argent. 15. La Hollandaise s'est 
elle assise? 16. Elle ne s'est point assise. 17. Lui est i arrive un 



LESSON X L \ I. 

malheur? 18. II m lui est rien arrive, elle ne se porle pas bien. 19 
No s'est elle pas donne [} 135, (1.)] de la peine pour rien? 2(\ 
Cette soie ne s'est elle pas bien vendue ? 21. Elle s'est tres bien 
vendue. 22. N'a-t-il pas fait beau temps toute la journee ? 23. 
Non, Monsieur, il a plu, il a neige et il a grele. 24. N'est-il rien 
arrive aux deux dames que nous avons vues ee matin V 25. Non, 
Madame, il ne leur est rien arrive. 

Exercise 88. 

1. Has it rained to-day? 2. It has not rained, but it has hailed 
and snowed. 3. Has any thing happened to your little boy ? 4. 
Nothing has happened to him, but he is sick to-day. 5. Did youi 
sister sit down at your house ? 6. She did not sit down, she was 
sick. 7. Did that cloth sell well ? 8. It sold very well, we have sold 
it all. 9. Did you perceive your error (erreur) ? 10. We perceived 
it. 11. Were not your sisters mistaken in this affair? 12. They 
were not mistaken. 13. Were not your cousins weary of being in 
the country? 14. They were weary of being at my brother's. 15. 
What have you used to write your exercises? 16. I used a gold 
pen, and my brother used a silver pen. 17. Have you used my pen- 
knife (canif) ? 18. I have used it. 19. What has happened to you? 
20. Nothing has happened to me. 21. Has your mother been well ? 22. 
She has not been well. 23. Did your brothers apply to their studies, 
at school ? 24. They applied to their studies and have finished their 
lessons. 25. What weather was it this morning ? 26. It was very 
fine weather. 27. Has your sister taken much trouble in this affair 1 
28. She has taken much trouble for nothing. 29. Did the Dutch 
ladies walk? 30. They walked this morning. 31. How far did they 
walk? 32. They walked as far as your brother's. 33. Have you 
given each other the hand? 34. We shook hands. 35. Those ladies 
flattered themselves very much (beaucoup). 



LESSON XLVL LE£ON XLVL 

THE PASSIVE VERB (§ 54). 

1. The passive verb is conjugated by adding to the verb etre in all 
its tenses, the past participle of an active verb. See model, } 54. 

2. This participle must agree in gender and number with tht> sub- 
ject [j 134. (2.) L. 42 P. 6,] :~ 



lESSON XLVI. 



137 



Ces ridllar J* sont respectes. Those old men are respected. 

Ces enfants sont aimes de tout le Those children are loved by every bodp, 
, monde. 

3, The genius of the French language seems to prefer the activs 
to the passive voice. Many expressions which are in the passive a 
English, are accordingly rendered into French by the active or r® 
flective [} 128, (5.) $ 113, (1.)]:— 



Cette maison est a louer ou a vendre. 

Ma sceur est a plaindre. 

Qf$ homme est a craindre. 

Get homme s'appelle H. [L. 36. It. 2.] 

Cet homme se trompe. [L. 38. R. 2.] 

On dit que cela est ainsi. [L. 35. R. 2.] 

On nous a dit cela. [L. 35. R. 2.] 



That house is to be let or sold. 
My sister is to be pitied. 
That man is to be feared. 
That man is called H. 
That man is mistaken. 
It is said that it is so. 
We have been told that. 



4. In an answer to a question [see L. 24. R. 12.], the pronoun It 
corresponds in signification with the English word so, or it, expressed 
or understood. Le refers then to a noun not determined (not pre- 
ceded by an article or a possessive adjective), to an adjective, to a 
verb or even to a whole sentence : — 



Ces enfants sont ils aimes % 
lis ne le sont pas. 
Ces demoiselles sont elles sceurs ? 
Elles ne le sont pas. 



Are those chilaren loved ? 
They are not (so). 
Are those young ladies sisters? 
They are not. 



5. When le refers to a determined noun, it often corresponds in 
signification to the pronoun he, she, or they, which may or may not be 
expressed in the English sentence, 
and number of the noun to which it refers 



Le must then assume the gender 



Etes vous la sceur de mon ami 1 
Je la suis. 



Are ymi the sister of my friend ? 
I am (she). 



Resume of Examples. 



Leur conduite est elle approuvee 1 

Elle.n'est approuvee de personne. 

Cette dame est elle estimee et res- 
pectee 1 

Elle n'est ni estimee ni respectee. 

Ces marchandises sont a vendre. 

Ces enfants sont bien a plaindre. 

A-t-on dit quelque chose a mon frere? 

On ne lui a rien dit. 

Savez vous comment cela s'appelle ? 

Madame, etes vous maitresse ici 1 

Je ne le suis pas, Monsieur. 

Etes vous la maitresse de la mai- 
son 7 

Je la sds. 



Is their conduct approved ? 

It is approved by nobody. 

Is that lady esteemed and respected ? 

She is neither esteemed nor respected. 
Those goods are to be sold (for sale}. 
Those children are to be pitied. 
Has any thing been said to my brother* 
Nothing has been said to him. 
Do you know how that is called 7 
Madame, are you mistress here ? 
I am not (so), Sir. 
Are you the mistress of tM house f 

I am (she). 



138 LESSON LXVI. 

Exercise 89. 

S'appel tr, 1. pec. to beCvoi-re, 4. ir. to believe ; Pun-ir, 2. to punish; 

catted [§49,(4.)]; Ecolier, m. scholar; Rarement, seldom ; 
Anteur, m author ; Jardin, m. garden ; Relieur, m. bookbinder , 

Blani-er, 1 . to blame ; Lou-er, 1. to let, to praise; Souvent, often ; 
Car, for ; Mere, f. mother ; Us-er, 1. to wear out; 

Conduitc, f. conduct ; Paresseux, se, idle ; Vend-re, 4. to sell. 

1. Votre mere est elle aimee de sa soeur? 2. Elle est aimee dt 
son frere et de sa soeur. 3. Lesltaliens sont ils aimes desFrancaia 
4. Vos ecoliers ne sont ils pas blames'? 5. Ils sont blames quelque 
fois. 6. Sont ils souvent punis? 7. lis sont rarement punis. 8. 
Par qui etes vous puni quand vous etes paresseux ? 9. Je ne suis 
jamais puni. 10. Sa conduite a-t-elle ete approuvee? 11. Elle a 
ete approuvee de tout le monde. 12. Elle a ete approuvee par* ses 
amis. 13. Cet auteur est il estime ? 14. II est estime de tout le 
monde. 15. Le jardin du relieur est il a vendre ou a louer? 16. 
On dit qu'il est a louer. 17. Le menuisier a-t-il fait faire un habit ? 
18. II en a fait faire deux. 19. Les habits que vous avez achetes 
sont ils uses {worn out) 1 20. Ils sont uses, j'en ai fait faire d'autres. 
21. Dit-on que nos amis sont aimes de tout le monde ? 22. On ne le 
dit pas, car on ne le croit pas. 23. Les dames que nous avons vues a 
l'eglise hier au soir, sont elles soeurs ? 24. Elles ne le sont pas, on 
dit qu'elles sont cousines. 25. On dit que l'offic'er qui vient d'ar- 
river s'appelle S. 

f/XERCISE 90. 

1. Are you blamed or praised? 2. I am neither blamed nor 
praised. 3. Is not your cousin esteemed by every body ? 4. She is 
esteemed by nobody. 5. What has been said of my brother ? 6. 
Nothing has been said of him. 7. Do you know if your brother's 
house is to be let ? 8. I have been told (on m'a dit) that it is to be 
sold. 9. Is not an idle person to be pitied? 10. The idle man is to 
be pitied. 11. Is your son sometimes punished at school? 12. He 
s always punished when he is idle. 13. Are your scholars praised 
when they are diligent (diligent) ? 14. They are praised when they 
are diligent, and they are blamed when they are idle. 15. Is that 
'ady esteemed and respected? 16. She is loved, esteemed and re- 
spected by every body. 17. What has been told you ? 18. We have 
been told that your brother is respected by every body. 19. Madam, 
are you Mr. S.'s sister? 20. No, Sir, I am not. 21. Madam, are 

* The prepositions de and par are used indifferently after many passive 
verbs. 



LESSON XLVII. 139 

you pleased with your son's conduct ? 22. No, Sir, I am not, for he 
is blamed by every body. 23. How is that large (gros) man called ] 
24. It is said that h e is called H. 25. What is your brother's name ? 
26. He is called James. 27. Have you been told that my brother 
is arrived? 28. We have been told so. 29. Are the goods which 
your brother has brought, for sale? 30. They are not for sale. 31. 
Has the bookbinder had a coat made ? 32. He has had a coat made. 
33. Is his other coat worn out ? 34. The coat which he bought last 
year is worn out. 



LESSON XLVH. LEgON XLVn. 

1. In the compound tenses of the verb s'en aller, to go away 
[L. 40. 1, 2.], the pronoun en will of course keep its general place, 
after the other pronouns and before the auxiliary. It must never 
come between the auxiliary and the participle : — 

Je m'en suis alle, I went away; Nous nous en We went avjay ; 

sommes alles, 
Tu t'en es alle, Thou wenleal Vous vous en etes You went away ; 

away ; alles, 

11 s'en est alle, He went away ; lis s'en sont alles, They went away 

Les dames s'en sont allees. The ladies are gone away. 

Les messieurs s'en sont alles. The gentlemen are gone away. 

2. The verb aller when referring to articles of dress answers to the 

English to Jit, to sit : — 

Mon habit va bion. My coat Jits or sits fell. 

3. Seoir [3.ir. see table § 62. j answers to the Ei\gH4> to suit, to 
become : — 

Ce chapeau ne vous sied point. That hat does not become yc% 

4. Essaye ($49-) corresponds in signification to the Enig'ir 
try on : — 

J'ai essaye mon gilet, il me va bien. J have tried my waistco it, it fits tu 

well. 

5. £tre is often used in French for appartenir, to belong [} 106, 
3.)]:- 

, . 4 To whom does that house belong ? 

A qui est cette maison? J j^ house isthat? 

FUe est a mon coushx It is my cousin's* 



140 



LESSON XLVII. 



Resume of Examples. 



A quelle heure vous en etes vous 

alle? 
Je m'en suis alle a nenf heures. 
Vous en etes vous allees trop tot, 

Mesdames ? 
Nous nous en sommes allees trop 

tard. 
Cette robe vous va-t-elle bien ? 
Elle ne me va pas bien. 
Cet habit vous sied il fort bien 1 
Je l'ai essaye, mais il ne va pas 

bien. 
II lui va bien (regime indirect). 
II me gene, il me serre trop. 
Cette robe ne lui va pas bien. 
Ces livres sont ils a vous ou a moi ? 
lis ne sont ni a moi ni a vous. 
A qui sont ils done ? 
Les livres de qui, avez vous appor- 

tes? 
J'ai apporte ceux de mon frere. 



At what hour did yot go away ? 

I went away at nine f clock. 

Did you go away too soon, ladies 7 

We went away too late. 

Does that dress, fit you well ? 

It. does not fit me well. 

Does that coat become you very well f 

I have tried %i on, but it does not fii 

me. 
It fits him well. 

It hurts me, it presses me too much. 
That dress does not fit her well. 
Are those books yours or mine? 
They belong neitlier to me nor to you. 
Whose are they tlien ? 
WJwse books have you brought ? 

I have brought my brother's. 



Exercise 91. 

BeaM-frere,m. brother-in-Foiice, e, dark ; Neuf, ve, new t 

law; Gen-er, 1. to hurt, to Ou, where ; 



Serr-er, 1. to press* 
Ten-ir, 2. ir. to hold; 
Vers, towards, about. 



Botte, f. boot; press; 

Clair, e, light ; Qilet, m. waistcoat ; 

Court, e, short; Large, wide; 

Etroit, e, narrow, tight; Mieax, better ; 

1. Vos bottes ne vont elles pas bien? 2. Elles ne me vont pas 
bien, elles me serrent trop. 3. Sont elks trop etroites? 4. Elles 
sont trop etroites et trop courtes, elles me genent. 5. Le cordonnier 
s'en est il alle ? 6. II ne s'en est pas encore alle. 7 A quelle heure 
les compagnes de votre soeur s'en sont elles allees ? 8. Elles s'en 
sont allees vers six heures de Fapres-midi. 9. L'habit que vous 
tenez, est il a vous ou a votre frere ? 10. II n'est ni a lui ni a moi, 
il est a mon beau frere. 11. Lui va-t-il bien ? 12. II lui va fort bien, 
et il lui sied bien. 13. Ou l'a-t-il fait faire? 14. II l'a fait faire en 
France ou en Allemagne. 15. A qui sont les livres que lit Made- 
moiselle votre soeurl 16. Ils sont a moi. 17. Votre gilet va-t-i3 
mieux que celui de votre beau-frere? 18. II me va beaucoup mieux. 
19. Votre habit ne vous gene-t-il pas? 20. II ne saurait {cannot) 
me gener, il est de beaucoup trop large. 21. Avez vous essaye votre 
habit neuf? 22. Je l'ai essaye, mais la couleur ne me sied pas, 
23. Est elle trop claire ? 24. Elle est t *op foncee. 25 Les couleurs 
foncees ne me sieent jamais 



LESSON XLVIII. 141 



Exercise 92. 



1 Are your friends gone away ? 2. They are not yet gone away, 
they are still here. 3. At what hour did your mother go away 1 4. 
She went away early this morning. 5. Did your little sister go away 
late ? 6. She went away too soon. 7. Does your sister's new dress 
become her? 8. It does not become her. 9. Why does it not be 
come her? 10. Dark colors never become her. 11. Do light colors 
become your brother's wife ? 12. They become her very well. 13. 
Are your new boots too narrow or too wide ? 14. They are neither 
too narrow nor too wide, they fit very well. 15. Does your brother's 
waistcoat fit him? 16. It fits him, but it does not become him. 17. 
Light colors never become him. 18. Does your coat press you? 
19. It does not press me, it is by far too wide. 20. Whose house is 
that? 21. It is my father's and brother's. 22. Whose books have 
you brought this morning? 23. I have brought my brother's and 
my sister's. 24. Whose dresses are those ? 25. They are my mo- 
ther's, my sister's, and my cousin's. 26. Are not those German 
books yours? 27. They are not mine, they are my friend's. 28. 
Are those pens yours or mine ? 29. They are neither yours nor 
aiine, they are my brother's. 30. Does this hat fit you? 31. Yes, 
Sir, it fits me, but it does not become me. 32. Is your hat too 
small? 33. It is too large {grand). 34. Are your gloves too large ^ 
35. They are too small, I cannot put them on. 



LESSON XLVEI. LEgON XLVHL 

1. The verb falloir [3. ir.], to be necessary \ is always conjugated 
unipersonally. See table, \ 62. 

II faut, il a fallu. It is necessary, it was or has been no- 

t cessary. 

\\ faut etudier tous les jours. It is necessary to study every day. 

2. As falloir has always a unipersonal pronoun for its nominative 

or subject, a pronoun in the indirect regimen (dative— me, te, lui, 

nous, vous, leur), placed before the verb, will be equivalent to the 

pronoun used as nominative to the English verbs must, to be 

olliged) &c. : — 

II me faut ecrire un theme. J must write an exercise. 

Ou nous faut il ailer i Where must wc go ? 



142 



LESSON XLVIII. 



3. Falloir ia used in the signification of to want, to nud y to It undt* 
the necessity of having : — 

II me faut un livre. I need a book. 

II lui faut de Fargent. He is in want of mc/zuy. 

4. When must is used in the last acceptation, and has a noun aa 
its nominative, the noun in the corresponding French sentence should 
be in the indirect regimen preceded by a : — 

II faut un livre a ma soeur. My sister must have a bcok {needs a 

book). 

Resume of Examples. 



Pour apprendre une langue il faut 

etudier. 
II faut aller a l'eglise et a l'ecole. 

II faut rester a la maison. 

II me faut lire un bon livre.* 

II lui faut aller voir sa mere. 

Que nous faut-il faire 1 

Que leur faut>il lire 1 

Que leur faut-il 1 

II leur faut de l'argent ou du credit. 

Vous faut-il cinquante francs ? 

II me faut cinquante-cinq francs 1 
Combien d'argent faut-il a votre 

perel 
II lui en faut beaucoup. 
Nous avons ce qu'il [R. 3.] nous faut. 



To learn a language it is necessary 

to study. 
It is necessary to goto church and to 

school. 
It is necessary to remain at home. 
I must read a good book. 
She must go and see her mother. 
What must we do? 
What must they read ? 
What do they want or need ? 
They need or must have money of 

credit. 
Do you want or must you have fifty 

francs ? 
I must have or I need fifty-five francs 
How much money does your father 

want ? 
He wants much (of it). 
We have what we want. 



Fort, very, very much ; 
Modiste, milliner; 
Ouvrage, m. work; 
Payer, 1. pec. [§49, (2.)], 

to pay ; 
Peine, f. trouble; 
Quand, when. 



Exercise 93. 

Aller trouver, to go to a Davantage, more ; 

person ; Desir-er, 1. to wish, de- 
Chirurgien, m. surgeon ; sire ; 

Centime, m. 100th of a Dette, f. debt ; 

franc; Envoy-er, 1. ir. [§49, 
Combien, how much, (2.)], to send; 

how many ? Fin-ir. 2. to finish ; 

1. Que faut il faire aujourd'hui? 2. Aujourd'hui il faut travailler. 

8. A-t-il fall u travailler fort pour finir l'ouvrage a temps? 4. L 3 
allu travailler toute la journee. 5. Quand faut il ecrire a notr© 
mi ? 6. II faut lui ecrire aujourd'hui. 7. Me faut il aller trouver 

mon pere ? 8. II vous faut aller le trouver, il desire vous parler. 9. 

A-t-il besoin de quelque chose ? 10. II lui faut des livres, des plumes 

et de Pencre. 11. Ne lui faut il pas aussi de l'argent? 12. II lui en 

* Another construction of these sentences will be f oui d Losson 2% 
1, *. 



LESSON XLJI. 143 

faut beaucoup pour payer ses dettes. 13. Vous faut-il encore quelque 
fhose? 14. II ne me faut plus rien, j'ai tout ee qu'il me faut. 15. 
Ne faut il pas du papier a votre soeur ? 16. II ne lui en faut pas da- 
vantage.* 17. Q,ue faut il envoyer au chirurgien? 18. II faut lui 
envoyer de l'argent, il en a grand besoin. 19. La modiste a-t-elle 
toat ce qu'il lui faut? 20. Elle n'a pas tout ce qu'il lui faut. 21. 
Combian vous faut il? 22. II me faut cinq francs. 23. Ne vous 
faut il pas davantage ? 24. H ne me faut pas davantage. 25. Que lui 
• ut il pour sa peine? 26. II demande un franc vingt-cinq centimes. 

Exercise 94. 
1. What must we do ? 2. You must bring your book and learn 
your lesson. 3. Is it necessary to write to your brother to-day ? 4. 
It is not necessary to write to him. 5. Has it been necessary to 
speak to your father? 6. It has been necessary to speak to him. 7. 
Is it necessary to go to D. to-day ? 8. It is necessary to go there 
(y). 9. Must I go to your sister? 10. You must go to her, she 
wishes to speak to you. 11. How much money must your brother 
have? 12. He must have ten francs fifty centimes. 13. How many 
books does your sister want? 14. She must have many books, she 
reads (lit) much. 15. What will you send to the surgeon ? 16. We 
must send him our horse ; his own (le sien) is sick. 17. Must he 
not have paper? 18. He must have some; he has letters to write. 
19. Must he have much? 20. He must have a quire (main, f.). 21. 
Do you want any thing more? (See No. 13, in the French exercise 
above.) 22. I need something more. 23. I need nothing more. 
24. Must you have one hundred francs? 25. I must have ten dol- 
lars. 26. What does the surgeon want ? 27. He must have money 
to (pour) pay his debts. 28. Has the tailor all that he wants? 29. 
He has not aL that he wants. 30. The milliner has received all that 
she wants. 31. What must you have for your trouble ? 32. How 
much do you want? 33. How much do we want? 34. What must 
IA>? 35. You must write a letter. 36. What must she write" 
37. She must write four pages. 38. She must go to church. 



LESSON XLIX. LEgON XLIX. 

1. The verb seoir [3. ir. Lesson 47, R. 3.], is also used uniper* 
•onaiiy : — 
H ne vous sied pas de parler ainsi. It does not become you to speak thus. 

* This adverb can never be placed before a substantive. 



144 



LESSON XLIX. 



2. The verb convenir [2. ir. see $ 62.], to suit, is at times used unt 
personally. It then signifies to be suitable, advisable, &c. : — 

II convient de lui ecrire. It is advisable to write to him. 

3. The irregular verb valoir [see table, § 62.] corresponds in sig- 
nification to the English expression, to be worth : — 

Cette maison vaut cinq mille francs. That house is worth Jive thousand 

francs. 

4. Ne Hen valoir means to be good for nothing ; ne pas valoir 
grand'chose, to be worth little, not to be good for much. 

Ce drap ne vaut rien. That cloth is good for nothing. 

Notre maison ne vaut pas grand 'chose. Our house is not good for much. 

A 

5. Etre riche de . . . means to be worth, to possess; when a person 
is the nominative of the verb, valoir is never used in this sense. 

Cette personne est riche de cinq That person is worth five thousand 
mille piastres. dollars. 

6. Valoir mieux, conjugated unipersonally, means to be better; 
valoir la peine, to be worth the while : — 

II vaut mieux travailler que d'etre It is better to labor than to be idle. 

oisif. 

II ne vaut pas la peine de parler It is not worth the while to speak when 

quand on n'a rien a dire. one has nothing to say. 

Resume of Examples. 



II ne vous sied pas de nous faire des 

reproches. 
II ne vous convient pas de parler de 

la sorte. 
II ne nous convient pas d'y aller. 
Combien votre jardin vaut il 1 
II vaut beaucoup plus que le votre. 
II ne vaut pas autant que le mien. 
Notre maison ne vaut rien. 
Votre habit ne vaut pas grand'chose. 
Cela ne vaut pas la peine. 
Ce chateau peut valoir cent mille 

francs. 
De combien votre oncle est il riche 1 
II est riche de deux cent mille francs. 

Ne vaut il pas mieux lire que jouer 1 



It does not become you to reproach us. 

It is not suitable for you to speak so. 

It does not suit us to go there. 
How much is your garden worth ? 
It is much more valuable than yours 
It is not worth so much as mine. 
Our house is good for nothing. 
Your coat is not good for much. 
That is not worth the while. 
That villa may be worth one hundred 

thousand francs. 
How much is your uncle worth ? 
lie is worth two hundred thousand 

francs. 
Is it not better to read than to play ? 



Exercise 95. 

Assur-er, 1. to assure ; Cass-er, 1. to break; Oouteau, m. knife; 

Au juste, precisely ; Centaine, f. about a hun- Marche, m. market ; 

Autre chose, something dred ; Merit-er, 1 . to deserve, 

else ; Chaine, f. chain ; ment ; 



LESSON XLIX, 145 

Montre. f. watch; Pouvoir, 3. ir. to be able ; Tou. an plus, at most; 

Negligence, f. neglect ; Reproch-er, 1. to re- X&.jrom aller, to go; 
Negotiant, merchant ; proac/i ; Vingtaine,f. about twenty, 

1. Vous sied-il de nous reprocher notre negligence ? 2. II me 
sied de vous faire des reproches quand vous le meritez. 3. Vous 
convient il d'aller trouver mon frere? 4. II ne me convient pas 
d'aller le trouver, j'ai autre chose a faire. 5. Combien ce champ 
peut il valoir? 6. II peut valoir une vingtaine [$ 27, (2.)] de mille 
francs. 7. Valez vous mieux que votre frere. 8. Mon frere vaut 
heaucoup mieux que moi. 9. Ce couteau ne vaut il pas plus que le 
votre? 10. Le mien est meilleur, il vaut davantage. 11. Combien 
votre montre vaut elle? 12. Elle ne vaut pas grand'chose, elle no 
va pas bien. 13. De combien le negociant, est il riche? 14. Je ne 
puis vous le dire au juste, il est riche d'une centaine de mille francs. 
15. Ne vaut il pas mieux rester ici que d'aller au marche? 16. II 
vaut mieux aller au marche. 17. Votre chaine d'or vaut elle plus 
que la mienne ? 18. Elle vaut tout autant. 19. Elle ne vaut pas 
grand'chose, elle est cassee. 20. Cela vaut il cinquante francs ? 
21. Cela vaut tout au plus deux francs. 22. Avez vous demande 
au marchand ce que cela vaut ? 23. Je ne le lui ai pas demande 24. 
II m'assure que cela vaut une centaine de francs. 

Exercise 96. 

1. How much is my house worth? 2. It is worth about twenty 
thousand francs. 3. Is that horse worth as much as this one? 4. 
This horse is worth two hundred dollars, and that one three hundred. 
5. Is it worth the while to write to your brother ? 6. It is not worth 
the while. 7. Is it worth the while to go out when one does- not 
wish to walk ? 8. It is not (n^en) worth the while. 9. Does it suit 
you to write to my brother to-morrow ? 10. It does not suit me to 
write to him. 11. Does it become you to reproach me with my neg- 
lect? 12. It becomes me to blame (blamer) you when you deserve it. 
13. What is that man worth? 14. I cannot tell you exactly, about 
fifty thousand francs. 15. Is that cloth good? 16. No, Sir, it is good 
for nothing. 17. Is your gun worth as much as mine? 18. Yes, Sir, 
it is worth more. 19. Will you go to my father's? 20. No, Sir, I 
have something else to do. 21. Is it better to go to market early 
than late ? 22. It is better to go early. 23. How much may your 
ho**se be worth ? 24. It is not worth much, it is very old. 25. Is 
your watch better than mine ? 26. It is not worth much, it does not 
go. 27. Is that book worth two francs? 28. It is worth one, at 

1 



146 



LESSON L. 



most. 29. Have you asked your sister what that book is worth * 
30. I have not. [L. 24, R. 12. L. 46, R. 4.] 31. What must I do! 
32. You must speak to your father. 33. Must he have money ? 34. 
He must have some. 35. Has he not sold his horse ? 36. He baa 
sold it, but it was not worth much. 



LESSON L. 



LEgON L. 



Avez vous pris le livre ? 
Avez vous paye le libraire 1 
Avez vous demande votre argent 1 
L'avez vous demande 1 



1. When the verbs prendre [4. ir. see § 62.], to take; voler, to rob 
to steal; acheter, to buy ; demander, to ask for ; payer, to pay, are fol- 
lowed by one regimen only, or by several regimens in the same rela- 
tion ; these regimens, if nouns, must not be separated from the verb 
by a preposition ; if pronouns, they take the form of the direct regi- 
men, le, la, les : — 

Have you taken the book ? 
Have you paid tJie bookseller ? 
Have you asked for your money ? 
Have you asked for him ? 

2. When the verbs above mentioned are accompanied by several 
regimens holding different relations, the regimen representing the 
thing or object will be direct, and come under the above rule, and 
that representing the person, will, if a noun, be preceded by the 
preposition a, and, if a pronoun, assume the form of the indirect 
regimen : lui, to him, to her ; leur, to them : — 

J'ai pris le livre a mon frere. J have taken the book from my brother , 

J'ai paye le livre au libraire. / have paid the bookseller fa?' the book. 

Je le lui ai paye, &c. / have paid him for it. 

3. Demander is used alsp in the sense of to inquire for, to ask 
for:— 

J'ai demande ce monsieur. / asked for that gentleman. 

Resume of Examples. 



Vo is a-t-on vole vos livres 1 

On me les a voles [L. 35. 1, 2]. 

A -t-on paye les souliers au cordon- 

nier'? 
On ne les lui a pas encore payes. 
Qu'a-t^on pris a votre pgre % 

On lui a pris son argent. 
Ne vous a-t-on rien pay 6 1 
On m'a paye presque tout. 
J'ai acheie des livres au libraire. 



Has any one stolen your books ffcm 

you? 
They have been stolen from me. 
Has the shoemaker b?tn paid for tM 

shoes ? 
He has not yet been paid for them. 
What has been taken from yow 

father ? 
His money has been taken from kitf 
Has nothing been paid you ? 
I hcce been paid almost all. 
I boug hi books from the booksmler 



LESSON L. 



147 



Qui avez vous demanle % 
J'ai demande mon fr&re aine\ 
Avez vous demande de l'argent a 

votre ami 1 
Je ne lui en ai pas demande. 



Whom have you asked for? 
I inquired for my eldest brothtr. 
Have you asked your friend, far 

money ? 
I have not asked him for any. 



Exercise 97. 



Chapelier, m. hatter; 
Crayon, m. pencil ; 
Demeur-er, 1. to dwell; 
Fenetre, f. window; 
Frapp-er, 1. to knock; 
Legume, m. vegetable; 



Renseignements, m. p, 

information ; 
Revenu, m. income; 
Tout, e, all; 
Voyageur, m. traveller. 



Loyer, m. rent ; 
Pantoufle, f. slipper; 
Paysan, m. peasant; 
Proprietaire, m. land- 
lord ; 
Rend-re, 4. to return; 

1. Que vous a-t-on pris? 2. On m'a pris mes livres, mes crayons et 
raon canif. 3. Savez vous qui vous les a pris? 4. Je ne connais pas 
celui qui me les a pris, mais je sais qu'il demeure ici. 5. Avez vous 
demande vos livres? 6. Je les ai demandes a mon cousin. 7. Vous 
les a-t-il rendus ? 8. II me les a payes. 9. Vous a-t-on vole beaucoup 
de fruit cette annee? 10. On m'a vole des legumes, mais on ne m'a 
point vole de fruit. 11. Avez vous paye votre chapeau au paysan? 
12. Je ne le lui ai pas paye, je l'ai paye au chapelier. 13. A qui avez 
vous demande des renseignements ? 14. J'en ai demande au voyageur. 
15. Savez vous qui vient de frapper a la porte? 16. C'est M. L., qui 
vous demande. 17. Qui avez vous demande? 18. J'ai demande votre 
frere. 19. Votre frere a-t-il paye toutes ses dettes? 20. II ne les a 
pas encore payees, parce qu'il n'a pas recu ses revenus. 21. Lui avez 
vous paye ce que vous lui avez achete ? 22. Je le lui ai paye. 23. 
Ne leur avez vous pas paye votre loyer ? 24. Je le leur ai paye. 25. 
lis nous ont paye notre maison. 

Exercise 98. 
1. Have you paid your landlord? 2. I have paid him my rent. 3. 
Have you paid him for the windows which you have broken ? 4. I 
have paid him for them. 5. Has the hatter paid for all his hats ? 6. 
He has not paid for them, he has bought them on credit (d credit), 
7, Do you pay what you owe, every day? 8. I pay my butcher 
every week. 9. Have you paid him for his meat? 10. I have paid 
him for it. 11. For whom did you inquire this morning? 12. I 
inquired for your brother. 13. Why did you not inquire for my 
father? 14. I know that your father is in England. 15. Has the 
hatter been paid for his hats? 16. He has been paid for them. 17. 
Has your money been taken from you ? 18. My hat has been stolen 
from nil. 19. Have you asked your brother for your money? 20. 
I have asked him for it, but he cannot return it to me. 21. Has he. 
no money ? 22. He has just paid all his debts, and he has no money 



148 



LESSON LI. 



Jeft (de resii), 23. Have you asked your father for money? 24. T 
nave not asked him for any, I know that he has none. 25. From 
what bookseller have you bought your books? 26. I bought them 
from your bookseller. 27. Are you wrong to pay your debts ? 28. 
I am right to pay them. 29. Who is inquiring for me ? 30. The 
physician is inquiring for you 31. Who knocks'? 32. Your shoe- 
maker knocks. 



LESSON LI. 



THE PAST DEFINITE. 



LEgON LI. 
ft 120.) 



1. The past definite may be called the narrative or historical tense 
of the French. It is used to express an action entirely past, definite 
and complete in itself. The time must be specified, and every por- 
tion of it must be elapsed. One night at least should have occurred 
since the action took place. 

Mon frere partit hier pour Paris. My brother left yesterday for Paris. 

2. The student will bear in mind that the past indefinite [L. 41.] 
may be used for the past definite. The past definite, however, may 
never be used for the indefinite. In conversation the indefinite is 
often preferred to the definite, as the latter would at times appear 
too formal [} 121, (3.)] :— 

3. The past definite may generally be rendered in English by the 
simple form of the imperfect, cr by the same tense conjugated with 
did. The past definite can never be rendered in English, by the par- 
ticiple present of the verb preceded by was. 

J'allai a l'eglise hier matin. I went, or did go to church yesterday 

morning. 

4. Terminations of the Past Definite of the Four 
Conjugations. See L. 23, and $ 60. 



Je 


chant -ai 


fin -is 


re9 -us 


rend -is 




sang 


finished 


received 


rendered 


ru 


pari -as 


cher -is 


aper$ -us 


vend -is 




spokest 


cherishedst 


perceivedst 


soldest 


n 


donn -a 


fourn -it 


per$ -ut 


tend -it 




gave 


furnished 


gathered 


tended 


Nous 


cherch -ames 


pun -imes 


con9 -times 


entend -imes 




sought 


punished 


conceived 


heard 


Vous 


port -ates 


sais -ites 


d -utes 


perd -ites 




carried 


seized 


owed 


lost 


lis 


aim -erent 


un -irent 


de$ -urent 


mord -irent 




laved) liked 


united 


deceived 


Ut 


5. 


It will be seen 


that the terminations of the second and fourth 



conjugations are alike. 



LESSON LI. 149 



Resume of Examples. 



On nous parla de vous hier. 

Le banquier nous donna de l'argent 
l'annee derniere. 

Le banquier nous a donne de l'ar- 
gent, 

Le pvofesseur nous parla de vous 
l'annee derniere. 

II nous a parle de ses amis et des 
notres. 

Pendant notre voyage, il nous ra- 
conta ses aventures. 

II nous a raconte 1'h.istoire de sa 
vie. 



They spoke to us of you yeskrday. 
The banker gave us money last year. 

The banker has given us money. 

The professor spoke to us about you 

last year. 
He spoke to us of his friends and of 

ours. 
During our journey he related to as 

his oAventures. 
He related to us the history of his life. 



Exercise 99. 

Aine, e, elder, eldest; Se lev-er, 1. ref. to rise ; Remerci-er, 1. to thank ; 
Avec, with; Lorsque, when; Sejour, m. stay; 

Se couch-er, 1. ref. to o-^Neuf, ve, neiv ; Semaine, f. week; 

to bed; Ordinairement, general- Soldat, m. soldier; 

Dernier, e, last ; ly ; Tard, late ; 

S'echapp-er, 1. ref. to Pendant, during ; Trop tot, too soon. 

escape; Pri-er, 1. to beg ; 

Habillement, m. dress; Proprietes, f. p. property; 

1. Le banquier recut il beaucoup d'argent la semaine derniere ? 
2. II en recut beaucoup. 3. Aussitot que vous apercutes votre frere, 
ne lui parlates vous pas? 4. Des que je Papercus, je lui parlai. 5. 
Avez vous deja porte vos habillements neufs? 6. Je ne les ai pas 
encore portes. 7. Quand il vous donna de l'argent, hier, le remer- 
ciates vous ? 8. Je le remerciai et je le priai de vous remercier. 9. 
Avez vous trouve vos livres? 10. Je ne les ai pas encore trouves. 
11. Lorsque vous vintes nous voir ne finites vous pas vos affaires 
avec mon pere ? 12. Je les finis alors et je le payai. 13. N'avez 
vous pas vu votre soeur ainee pendant votre sejour a Lyon ? 14. Je 
ne 1'ai pas vue. 15. Ne vous couchates vous pas trop tot hier au 
oir? 16. Je me couchai tard. 17. A quelle heure vous etes vous 
eve ce matin? 18. Je me suis leve a cinq heures; je mi leve ordi- 
nairement de bonne heure. 19. Ne cherchates vous pas a. vous 
echapper de votre prison Pannee derniere ? 20; Je n'ai jamais cherche 
a m'echapper. 21. Avez vous vendu vos proprietes? 22. Je ne 
les ai pas vendues. 23. Qu'avez vous donne au soldat. 24. Je ne 
lui ai rien donne. 25. Pendant son sejour a B , nous lui donn&mea 
tout ce qu'il voulut. 



160 LESSON LI I. 

Exercise 100. 

1. What did you receive last week? 2. We received fifty franc* 
from your friend, and twenty-five from your brother. 3. Did you 
take your son to church with you yesterday? 4. I did not take him 
there (y). 5. What did you lose last year ? 6. We lost our money, 
our clothes and our horses. 7. Have you looked (cherches) for4hem? 
8. I looked for them, but did not find them. 9. Did they speak of 
your brother yesterday? 10. They spoke of him and of you. 11 
What did the physician give you? 12. He gave me nothing. 13 
At what hour did your sister rise yesterday? 14. She rose at five 
o'clock. 15. Did you rise early this morning ? 16. We rose a\ 
half-past six. 17. Has your cousin sold all his property? 18. He 
has not sold it, he has given it to his eldest sister. 19. Has the trav- 
eller related his adventures to you? 20. He related them to me. 21. 
Did that man try (cherche) to speak to your father ? 22. He tried to 
speak to him. 23. Did the professor speak of your brother during 
his stay at your house ? 24. He spoke of him. 25., Has your friend 
worn his new coat ? 26. He has not worn it yet. 27. Have you 
thanked your brother? 28. I have thanked him. 29. What have 
you given to your eldest sister ? 30. I have given her nothing, I 
have nothing to give her. 31. When your brother gave you a book 
last year, did you thank him ? 32. I did not thank him. 33. Is it 
late. 34. It is not late, it is only six. 35. Is it fine weather or bad 
weather ? 36. It is very fine weather. 



LESSON LH. LEQON LH. 

1. The terminations of the past definite of irregular verbs, are sel- 
dom arbitrary,* but an irregular verb of one conjugation will some- 
times, in this tense, assume the terminations of another conjugation. 
In a few instances the stem [L. 23.] of the verb is entirely changed. 



Avoir, to have; 


Etre, to be; 


Voir, to see ; 


Lire, to read ; 


J' e -us 




f -us 


v -is 


1 -us 


Tu e -us 




f -us 


v -is 


1 -us 


11 e -ut 




f -ut 


v -it 


1 -ut 


Nous e -umes 




f -umes 


v -imes 


1 -umes 


Vous e -utes 




f -iites 


v -ites 


1 -utes 


lis e -urent 




f -urent 


v -irent 


1 -urent 



* This termination is arbitrary only in verbs ending in enir in which 
an r, comes after the i of the termination : vmmes ) thirties^ &c. 



LESSON LI I. 



151 



2. Avoir and etre, t will be perceived, take in this tense a new stem, 
^ us, /-us; etre and lire, though belonging to the 4th conjugation, take 
the terminations of the 3d, and voir, a verb of the 3d, takes the ter- 
minations of the 4th. 

3. In other instances, the stem of the verb drops some of its letters, 
and sometimes adopts others. This may be seen in the verbs 



Venir, 


Prendre, 


Oraindre, 


CoNNAiTRE, 


Conduire, 


to come ; 


to take ; 


to fear ; 


to know ; 


to conduct. 


Je v -ins 


pr -is 


craign -is 


conn -us 


conduis -is 


Tu v -ins 


pr -is 


craign -is 


conn -us 


conduis -is 


11 v -int 


pr -it 


craign -it 


conn -ut 


conduis -it 


Nous v -inmes 


pr -imes 


craign -imes 


conn -umes 


conduis -imes 


Vous v -intes 


pr -ites 


craign -ites 


conn -utes 


conduis -ites 


Us v -inrent 


pr -irent 


craign -irent 


conn -urent 


conduis -irent 



4. Like venir, are conjugated all verbs ending in enir ; like crain- 
dre, corinaitre, and conduire, those ending in indre, aitre and uire , 
and like prendre, those composed of this verb and a prefix : as, con3» 
prendre, surprendre, &c. 

5. We would at all times refer the student to the table of irregu 
lar verbs, \ 62, for those tenses of the irregular verbs with which h« 
is not familiar. 

Resume of Examples. 



Ne conduisites vous point votre fils, 

en Espagne l'annee derniere 1 
Je l'y conduisis et je l'y laissai. 
Aussitot que vous vites votre frere, 

ne le reconnutes vous pas 1 
Je le reconnus aussitot que je 

l'ape^us. 
Le pharmacien ne vint-il pas vous 

voir 1 
II vint me voir ; il fut bien etonne 

de trouver chez moi, un de ses 

anciens amis. 
Ne prites-vous pas conge de vos 

amis, hier'? 
Je pris conge d'eux, et je les priai 

de m'ecrire. 



Did you not take your son to Spam 

last year ? 
I took him thither and left him. 
As soon as you saw your brother, did 

you not recognize him ? 
I recognized him as soon as I per- 
ceived hint. 
Did not the apothecary come to see 

you ? 
He came to see me ; he was much 

astonished to find one of his old 

friends at my house. 
Did you not take leave of yout 

friends yesterday ? 
I took leave of them, and begged 

them to ivrite to me. 



Accompagn-er, 1. to ac- 
company ; 

A la fin, at last; 

Arnica! ement, kindly ; 

Arrivee, f. arrival; 

Attend-re, 4. to wait for , 

Au secours, to the assis- 
tance ; 

Conge, m. leave; 

T/Our-ir, 2, ir. to run; 



Exercise 101. 

De mon mieux, as weZZIiistoire, f. history; 

as I could; Inform-er. 1. to inform 

Se depech-er, 1. ref. foNotaire, m. notary ; 

make haste ; Lu, from lire, 4. ir. to 

Des que, as soon as; read; 

Ecolier, m. scholar ; Peintre, m. pcinhvr g 
S'ennuy-er, 1. pec to be- Baas, without; 

come weary; Secour-ir, 2. ir. to su*- 

Se hat-er, 1. r«f. to cow. 

Iiasten ; 



152 LESSON LI I. 

1. Nos ecoliers s'ennuyerent-ils hier, d'attendie si longtemps? 
2. lis furent obliges d'attendre si longtemps, qu'a k. fin ils perdireni 
patience. 3. Ne refutes- vous point votre parent amiealement lors- 
qu'il vint vous voir? 4. Je le recus de mon mieux. 5. Ne Idtes-voua 
pas la lettre de votre frere avant hier? 6. Je la lus et je i'envoyai a 
mon oncle. 7. Ne courutes-vous pas au secours de votre frere 
aussitdt que vous le vites en danger? 8. Je me hatai de le secourir. 
9. Ne vous etes-vous pas depeches de venir ? 10. Nous nous sommea 
depeches. 11. Aussitot que vous eutes apercu mon frere ne m'in- 
formates-vous pas de son arrivee? 12. Je vous en informal. 13. A 
quelle heure votre soeur est-elle venue aujourd'hui ? 14. Elle est 
venue a midi. 15. Vos compagnons vinrent-ils hier vous prier de 
les accompagner ? 16. Ils vinrent me voir, mais ils me quitterent 
sans me parier de leur voyage. 17. Ne peignites-vous pas un 
tableau l'annee derniere? 18. Je peignis un tableau d'histoire. 
19. Le peintre italien a-t-il fini son portrait? 20. II le finit hier, 
21. II l'a fini ce matin. 22. Des que j'eus recu cette nouvelle. 
j'envoyai chercher le notaire. 23. Ce jeune homme a-t-il pris conge 
de son pere. 24. II a pris conge de lui. 25. II prit conge de lu! 
hier. 

Exercise 102. 

1. Did the notary accompany you yesterday ? 2. He accompanied 
me as far as (jusque chez) your brother's. 3. Did your companion 
take leave of you yesterday ? 4. He took leave of me this morning. 
5. Did you read yesterday, the book which I have lent you ? 6. I 
read it the day before yesterday (avant hier). 7. At what time did 
the painter come this morning? 8. He came at half-past nine. 
9. Has he finished your father's portrait? 10. He painted all day 
yesterday, but the portrait is not yet finished. 11. Did you not run 
to your father's relief when you saw him in danger ? 12. I hastened 
to succour him. 13. What did you do when you came? 14. As 
soon as I came I sent for my brother. 15. Did you take your sister 
to Germany last year? 16. I took her there this year. 17. Did you 
take your children to school yesterday'* 18. I took Ihem to my 
brother's. 19. Do you paint a historical picture ? 20. I painted last 
year a historical picture. 21. Did your sister beg you to accompany 
her ? 22. She begged me to accompany her, 23. Did you send for 
the notary as soon as you heard from your father ? 24. I sent for 
him. ■ 25. When did the notary take leave of you ? 26. He took 
leave of me this morning at nine. 27. Has :he apothecary finished 
his letter? 28. He has not yet finished it. 29. Weie you not 



LESSON LIII. 153 

astonished yesterday to see that lady ? 30. I was not astonished to 
see her. 31. Did you make haste to read your book last night 
(hier au soir) 1 32. I made haste to read it. 33. Have you finished 
it ? 34. I have not yet finished it 



LESSON" LIH. LEgON LIU. 

THE IMPERFECT. (§ 119.) 

1. The imperfect or simultaneous past tense may be called the 
descriptive tense of the French. The action which it represents, or 
the situation which it describes, is imperfect of itself. This tense 
leaves the beginning, duration, and end of an action undetermined. 
It may often be rendered in English by the auxiliary was, &c. and the 
participle present of the verb [J 119, 120.] : — 

J'ecrivais ce matin quand vous 6tes I was writing this morning when you 

entre. came in. 

Je passais hier quand vous m'ap- / was passing yesterday when you 

pelates. called me. 

2. The imperfect is also used to express an action which is cus- 
tomary or often repeated. It may then be rendered in English by 
the word, used to, placed before the verb : — 

L'annee derniere, j'allais tous les Last year, I went (used to go) every 

jours a l'ecole. day to school. 

Quand nous demeurions a la When we vjere (used to be) in the 

campagne, nous nous couchions country ) we used to go to bed at nine 

ordinairement a neuf heures. o'clock. 

3. The imperfect can seldom be rendered in English by the past 
tense which takes did* as an auxiliary. The past definite never 
corresponds in meaning to the English imperfect composed of the 
auxiliary " was" and the participle present. It cannot be rendered 
by the verb preceded by " used to." 

J'allais a la chasse hier matin I was going hunting yesterday morn- 

quand nous nous rencontrames. ing when we met (did meet). 

J'allai a la chasse hier matin. J went (did go) hunting yesterday 

morning. 

4. The imperfect is formed from the participle present, by changing 
mt into ais, &c. \ 61. It may also be formed by adding ais, etc. to the 

* Except when, in interrogative sentences, did is used as an auxiliary 
to use to expressed or understood. 

7* 



154 



LESSON LIU. 



utem of the verb for the 1st and 4th conjugations, issais, etc. for 
the 2d, and evais, etc. for the 3d. 

5. Terminations of the Imperfect of the four Conjuga- 
tions. 



Je chant -ais 

/ was singing 

Tu pari -ais 

Thou wast speaking 

II donn -ait 

He was giving 

Nous cherch -ions 

We were seeking 

Vous port -iez 

You were carrying 

lis aim -aient 
They were loving 



fin -issais 

was finishing 

zher -issais 

wast cherishing 

fourn -issait 

was furnishing 

pun -issions 

were punishing 

sais -issiez 

were seizing 

un -issaient 
were uniting 



rec -evais 

was receiving 

aperc -evais 

wast perceiving 

perc -evait 

was gathering 

cone -evions 

were conceiving 

d -eviez 

were owing 

dec -evaient 
were deceiving 



rend -ais 

was rendering 

vend -ais 

wast selling 

tend -ait 

was tending 

entend -ions 

were hearing 

perd -iez 

w ere losing 

mord -aient 
were biting. 



Resume of Examples. 



Je chantais quand on m'apporta 

votre lettre. 
J'aimais autrefois a lire les poetes 

anglais. 
J'etais dans votre chambre lorsque 

vous etes entre. 
Comment votre pere se portait-il, 

lorsque vous demeuriez enFrancel 
Avez vous paye a mon pere ce que 

vous lui deviez, et ce que vous lui 

aviez promise 
Je parlai hier toute la matinee. 
Je parlais hier a votre pere, lorsque 

votre ami nous rencontra. 
Je cherchais votre pere. 



J was singing when they brought me 

your letter. 
I used to like formerly to read the 

English poets. 
I was in your room when you came 

in. 
How was your father when you lived. 

in France! 
Have you paid my father what you 

owed him, and what you had p?om~ 

ised him ? 
I spoke yesterday the whole morning. 
I was speaking to your father when 

your friend met us yesterday, 
I was looking for your father. 



Exercise 103. 

Autrefois, formerly; Ecolier, m. scholar; Presque pas, almost 

Brun, e, brown; Noir, e, black; none; 

Chambre, f. room; Merit-er. 1. to deserve; Retrouv-er, 1. to find 

Crayon, m. pencil ; Pantoufle, f. slipper ; again ; 

Demeur-er, to live, dwell; Parchemin, m. parch- Theme, m. exercise; 

De nouveau, again ; ment ; Vert, e, green. 

1. De qui parliez-vous ce matin quand je suis venu vous trouver* 

2. Ma cousine parlait de son frere et je parlais du mien ? 3. N'aimiez- 

vous pas mieux le boeuf que le mouton, autrefois 1 4. J'aimais le 

bceuf, mais je n'ai jamais aime le mouton. 5. Ne vendiez-vous pas 

beaucoup de livres, lorsque vous demeuriez a Paris % 6. J'en vendaia 

beaucoup parceque j'etais libraire. 7. Le libraire a-t-il vendu beau- 

coup de crayons ce matin 1 ? 8. II a vendu beaucoup de crayons air- 

jourd'hui. 9. Vendiez-vous beaucoup de parchemin lorsque vous 

6tiez libraire? 10. Je n'en vendais presque pas. 11. Votre frere 



LESSON LIII. 155 

portait-il un habit vert lorsqu'il demeurait a Londres? 12. II portait 
un habit brun et des pantoufles noires. 13. Que cherchiez-vous ? 
14. Je cherchais mon livre. 15. Depuis quand Paviez-vous perdu? 
16. Je Pavais perdu depuis hier. 17. L'avez-vous retrouve? 18. Je 
Pavais retrouve, mais je Pai perdu de nouveau. 19. Ce boulanger 
vous fournissait-il de bon pain ? 20. II nous en fournissait d'excel- 
lent. 21. Punissiez-vous souvent vos ecoliers? 22. Je les punissais 
quand ils le meritaient. 23. Ou etiez-vous ce matin quand je vous 
cherchais? 24. J'etais dans ma chambre. 25. Je finissais mon 
theme. 

Exercise 104. 

1. Who was at your house this morning? 2. My friend G. was 
there, and was looking for you. 3. Were you looking for me this 
morning? 4. I was not looking for you, I was looking for your 
scholar. 5. Did you speak to my father yesterday ? 6. I was speak- 
ing to him when they brought me your letter. 7. Did you use to 
sell much meat when you lived in B. ? 8. I sold much meat because 
I was a butcher. 9. Did your father use to wear a white hat when 
he lived in London ? 10. He used to wear a black hat, and my brother 
wore a black coat. 11. Were you singing when my father came? 
12. No, Sir, I was finishing my exercise. 13. Had you lost your 
pencil this morning? 14. I had lost it, and was looking for it when 
you spoke to me. 15. Has your brother paid all that he owed? 
16. He has not paid for his coat. 17. How was your mother when 
she lived in Italy? 18. She was very well. 19. You used to like 
reading, (la lecture), did your sister (use to) like it also ? 20. She 
liked it also. 21. Where was your sister this morning when I was 
looking for her ? 22. She was at my mother's. 23. What song were 
you singing this morning ? 24. I was singing an Italian song. 25. 
Have you been afraid to speak to me ? 26. I have never been afraid 
to speak to you. 27. Have you brought my book ? 28. I have not 
brought it. 29. Of what were you speaking ? 30. I was speaking of 
nothing. 31. What were you giving to my brother? 32. I was not 
giving him any thing. 33. What were you carrying? 34. I was 
carrying a tree. 35. Where were you carrying it ) 36. I was carry 
mg it home. 



156 LESSON LIV. 

LESSON LIV. LECON LIV. 

THE IMPERFECT CONTINUED. 

1. The imperfect of the indicative of every French verb, regular as 
irregular, ends in ais, ais, ait, ions, iez, aient. 

2. No verb of the first conjugation er, is irregular in this tense. 

3. The only irregularity found in the irregular verbs of the second 
conjugation ir, is that, to form the imperfect, the stem of these verbs 
takes ais, &c, instead of issais : as, ven-ir,ye xen-ais, cour-ir, je cow- 
rais ; cueill-ir^'e cueill-ais. Exception: Fuir, iofiee— -jefuyais. 

4. The irregular verbs of the third conjugation oir, change thai 
termination (oir) into ais, etc., like the regular verbs of the same : 
as, sav-oir,ye sav-ais ; av-oir, fav-ais. Exceptions: se-oir, to become, 
voir, to see, and their compounds, and dechoir, [see § 62.] 

5. The changes which the stem of the irregular verbs of the fourth 
conjugation undergoes, in this tense, are too various to admit of a 
complete classification. We, however, offer the following: — 

Prendre, to take. Ecrire, to write. Craindre, to fear. 

Je pren -ais, etc. . ecriv -ais, etc. craign -ais, etc. 

CONNAITRE, tO JCTIOW. CoNDUIRE, to Conduct. 

Connaiss -ais, etc. Oonduis -ais, etc. 

6. Like prendre and ecrire are conjugated, in this tense, those verbs 
in which prendre and crire appear in composition: as, coraprendre, 
je comprenais ; souscrire, je souscrivai*. — Like craindre and con- 
naitre, those ending in ind?*e and altre; teindre,ye teignais ; paraitre, 
je paraissais. — Like conduire, those ending in ire : as, lire, je lisais ; 
faire, je faisais ; luire, je luisais ; dire, je disais, etc. — Exceptions : 
rire, traire, ecrire, and their compounds. 

7. Mettre and its compounds, and etre are regular 'in this tens*. 

8. The participle present from which the French grammarians de- 
rive the imperfect, presents of course the same irregularities, as ; ve. 
nant, valant, prenant, ecrivant, craignant, connaissant, ecnduisant, 
Exceptions : avoir, ayant ; savoir, sachant. 

Resume of Examples. 



De quoi notre ami avait-il peur 7 
II n'avait peur de rien. 
N'aviez-vous pas besoin de mon 

frere ? 
Nous avions besoin de lui. 
Le marchand n'avait-il pas besoin 

d'argent 1 
II en avait grand besoh [ He had great rued c" it. 



Of vjhat was our friend afraid ? 
He was afraid of nothing. 
Did you not want my broiJier ? 

We wanted him. 

Did not the merchant want mo^ey 1 



LESSON LIV. 



157 



Quelle voiture conduisiez-vous 1 

Pour qui rae preniez-vous 1 

Je venais vous trouver quand je 

vous rencontrai. 
A. qui ecriviez-vous ce matin 1 

J ecrivais a ma soeur et a mon 
frere. 



What carriage were you driving ? 

For whom were you taking me ? 

I vjas coming to you when I met you. 

To whom were you writing this morn- 
ing ? 

I vjas uniting to my sister and to my 
brother. 



Autrement, otherwise; 
Cass-er, 1. to break; 
Chasse, f. hunting ; 
Dire, 4. ir. to say; 
Montre, f. watch; 
Moms, (au) at least ; 
Mort. e, dead; 
Offens-er 5 to offend; 



Exercise 105. 

Oubli-er, 1. to forget; 
Peche, f. fishing ; 
Peind-re, 4. ir. to paint ; 
Reven-ir, 2. ir. to re- 
turn ; 

Sav-oir, 3. ir. to know ; 
Se tromp-er, 1. to be 
misto.ken; 



Teind-re, 4. ir. to dye 
Teinturier, m. dyer ; 
Toile, f. linen cloth; 
Rencontr-er, l.to meet; 
Val-oir, 3. ir. to be worth , 
Ven-ir, 2. ir. to come, to 

have just ; 
Vite, quickly. 



1. Pourquoi n'ecriviez-vous pas plus vite ce matin'? 2. Parceque 
j'avais peur de me tromper. 3. Ne craigniez-vous pas d'offenser 
cette dame ? 4. Je craignais de l'offenser, mais je ne pouvais faire 
autrement? 5. Que peigniez-vous ce matin? 6. Je peignais un 
tableau d'histoire. 7. Votre teinturier que teignait-il ? 8. II teignait 
du drap, de la soie et de la toile. 9. De quelle couleur les teignait 
il? 10. II teignait le drap en noir, et la soie et la toile en vert. 11. 
Conduisiez-vous le jeune Polonais a Pecole lorsque je vous ai rencon- 
tre? 12. Je conduisais mon fils aine a l'eglise. 13. Que lisiez-vous ? 
14. Je lisais des livres que je venais d'acheter. 15. Ne saviez-vous 
pas que ce monsieur est mort ? 16. Je l'avais oublie. 17. Combien 
la montre que vous avez cassee valait-elle ? 18. Elle valaitau moins 
deux cents francs. 19. Ne valait-il pas mieux rester ici que d'aller a 
ia chasse? 20. II valait beaucoup mieux aller a l'ecole. 21. Votre 
ami que vous disait-il ? 22. II me disait que son frere est revenu 
d'Espagne. 23. N'alliez-vous pas a la chasse tous les jours lorsque 
> r ous demeuriez a la campagne ? 24. J'allais souvent a la peche. 
25 Mon frere allait tous les jours a l'ecole quand il etait ici. 

Exercise 106. 

1. Were you afraid this morning when you came to our house ? 
2, I was afraid. 3. Of what were you afraid? 4. I w T as afraid of 
the horse. 5. Was not your friend afraid of falling? (de tombei, 
See L. 21. R. 2, 4.) 6. Re was not afraid of falling, but he waa 
afraid of making a mistake (de se tromper. See 2. in Exercise above). 
7. Were you not afraid of offending your brother? 8. I was afraid 
of offending him. 9. Were you ^king your son to school? 10. 



158 LESSON L V. 

was condui ting him to school. 11. Was the dyer dyeing your coat 
12. He was not dyeing my coat, he was dyeing silk. 13. What color 
was he dyeing the silk? 14. He was dyeing some red and some 
gre«n. 15. Was he dyeing his linen cloth black or green? 
16. He was neither dyeing it black nor green, he was dyeing it 
pink (rose). 17. Were you aware (suviez vous) that your uncle is 
dead? 18. I did not know it (imperfect). 19. What was the gen- 
tleman reading? 20. He was reading a letter which he had just re- 
ceivea. 21. Were you cold when you came here? 22. I was sold 
hungry and thirsty. 23. Were you not ashamed of your conduc 
(conduite). 24. I was ashamed of it. 25. Were you not in want 
of money ? 26. I was not in want of it. 27. Did you not want 
your father? 28. We did not want him. 29. Whither were you 
going when I met you? 30. I was going to your house. 31. Were 
you driving your brother's carriage ? 32. I was driving my own (la 
mienne). 33. Were you writing to me or to my father ? 34. I was 
writing to your friend's cousin. 35. Your friend was taking me for 
your eldest brother. 



LESSON LV. LEgON LV. 

THE PAST ANTERIOR AND THE PLUPERFECT. (§ 122, 123.) 

1. The past anterior is formed from the past definite of the aux- 
iliary and the past participle of the verb : j'eus parle, / had spoken, Je 
fus venu, J had come. 

2. The past anterior expresses generally a momentary action, 
which took place before another action. The latter immediately 
follows the former, and often depends upon it. The action ex- 
pressed by this tense is not a customary one. The past anterior is 
often preceded by a peine, scarcely ; des que, aussitot que, as soon 
as; quand, lorsque, when; [§ 122. \ 123, (3.)] 

Des que j'eus fini ma tache je m'en As soon as I had finished my task 
allai. went away. 

3. This tense partakes of the nature of the past definite. 

4. The pluperfect is composed of the imperfect of the auxiliary 
and the past participle of the verb ; j'avais parle, / had spoken, j'etais 
venu. I had come. 

5. To this tense might be applied nearly all the rules on the use 
of the imperfect. The action which it expresses, or the situation 
which it depicts, is frequently a customary one, or one often re 
peated:-- 



LESSON LV. 



159 



D&s que j'avais fini ma tache je 
m'en allais. 



As soon as my task was finished I used 
to go away. 



Resume of Examples. 



Aviez- vous eu soin de vos effets 1 
J'en avais eu soin. 
N'aviez-vous pas eu besom de moi % 
J'avais eu besoin de vous et de votre 

frere. 
N'aviez-vous pas eu l'mtention de 

iue parler 1 
Nous avions eu. envie de dorniir. 
Des que vous eutes fini votre lettre, 

ne la portates-vous pas a la poste 1 
Des que vous aviez fini vos lettres. 

ne les portiez-vous pas a la poste 1 

Des que vous futes arrive, ne com- 
men^ates-vous pas a Scrire 7 

Des que vous etiez arrive, ne com- 
men^iez-vous pas a ecrire % 



Had you taken care of your things ? 

I had taken care of them. 

Had you not wanted me ? 

I had wanted you and your brotker. 

Had you not intended to speak to me? 

We had had a wish to sleep. 

As soon as you had finished your letter 

did you not carry it to the post-office? 
As soon as your Letters were finished, 

did you not (commonly) take them 

to the post-office ? 
As soon as you had arrived did you 

not commence writing ? 
As soon as you used to arrive, did you 

not (generally) commence writing ? 



Exercise 107. 

Arret>er, 1. to sto'f ; Egar-er, 1. to mislay ; 

Bal, m. kail ; Invit-er. 1. to invite ; 

Bourse, f. purse ; Se lev-er, ref. to rise; 

Se coucher, 1. ref. to go Malade, sick ; 

to bed ; Musicien, m. musician 

Danger eusement, dan- Oubli-er, 1. to forget ; 

gerously ; Part-ir, 2. to set out; 
Diner, m. dinner ; 



Perd-re, 1. to lose ; 
Remont-er, 1. to wind 

up; 
Retrouv-er, 1. to find 

again ; 
Sort-ir, 2. ir. to go out; 
Spectacle, m. play. 



1. Ne saviez-vous pas oii le musicien etait alle? 2. Je savais 
qu'il etait alle a Paris. 3. Ne vous avait-on pas dit que votre frere 
est mort 1 4. On m'avait dit qu'il etait dangereusement malade. 5. 
Ne vous couchiez-vous pas ordinairement, des que vous aviez fini vos 
lecons ? 6. Des que je les avais finies, j'allais au spectacle. 7. Des 
que vous eutes fini vos lecons, que fites-vous hier au soir ? 8. Aus- 
sitot que je les eus finies, j'allai au bal. 9. Cette petite fille n'avait- 
elle pas envie de dormir? 10. Elle avait plus envie de dormir que 
d'etudier. 11. Qu'aviez-vous faitde (with) votre livre quand je vous 
ledemundai? 12. Je l'avais egare. 13. Ou Taviez-vous egare? 14 
Je l'avais oublie dans le jardin. 15. Pourquoi votre montre etait 
elle arretee ? 16. Parce que j'avais oublie de la remonter. 17. L'hor- 
loger ne l'avait-il pas remontee 2 18. II avait oublie de le faire. 19. 
N'aviez-vous pas perdu votre bourse? 20. Je l'avais perdue, mais je 
l'ai retrouvee. 21. Votre cousin etait-il parti? 22. II n'etait pas 
encore parti. 23. Etait-il sorti ? 24. II etait sorti avec ma mere. 



160 LESSON LVI. 

25. Oti etait-il alle I 26. II etait alle chez mon frere, qui l'&vail 
invite a diner. 

Exercise 108. 

1. Had you not intended to speak to my brother? 2. I had in- 
tended to speak to him, but he was gone. 3. Did your sister go to 
bed last evening as soon as she had read Qu) her book ? 4. She 
went to bed as soon as she had read it. 5. Did she usuallv go to 
l>ed as soon as she had read her book? 6. She generally went to 
bed as soon as she had read six pages. 7. Were you told that your 
sister was sick? 8. I was told that she had been dangerously sick. 
9. Did you know what you had done with your pen? 10. I knew 
that I had mislaid it. 11. Had your sister mislaid hers? 12. She 
had left (laissee) it in my room. 13. How many of your books have 
you mislaid? 14. I had mislaid five, but my brother has found them. 
15. Where had you left them? 16. I had left them in the garden. 
17. Was your brother's watch stopped? 18. It was stopped. 19. 
Why was it stopped? 20. He had forgotten to wind it up. 21. 
Had he not lost his key? (clef, f.) 22. He had not lost it. 23. Had 
you wanted my father or me? 24. I had wanted your little girl. 
25. Was she out? 26. She was out with your brother. 27. Was 
she gone to my sister's ? 28. She was gone thither. 29. Was the 
dyer gone ? 30. He was not yet gone, he intended to leave at five. 
31. Had you spoken to him when I came yesterday? 32. 1 had 
spoken to him. 33. Had you told him that my sister is here ? 34. 
I had told him. 35. Is he still here ? 36. No, Sir, he is gone, he 
went this morning at six. 



LESSON LVI. LEgON LVI. 

1. We have given [L. 6. R. 4, and § 76 (4.)] a rule for the place of 
the noun, subject or nominative of an interrogative sentence. T© 
avoid confusing the student, we have hitherto refrained from intro- 
ducing another construction which is often used by the French, 
instead of that given in the rule. When a sentence commences 
with ou, where; que, what; quel, which; combien, how much, how 
many ; and quand, when; the noun may be placed immediately aftei 
the verb. This construction is similar to that of the English inter* 
rogative sentence when the verb has no auxiliary [§ 76. (5.)] : — 

Ou sont nos amis et nos parents 1 Where are our friend l and relations 1 
Qu'ecrit votre correspondant 1 What writes your cm respondent ? 



LESSON LVI. 



161 



2. When there are in a French sentence two regimens of equal 
,ength, the direct should precede the indirect [} 76, (7.)] : — 

Avez-vous donne les jouets a Ten- Have you given the child the play- 

fant 1 things ? 

Av^a-^v ous donne cette lettre a Have you given the man that Utter? 

1 liomme 7 

3, The regime indirect precedes the direct, when the latter is fol- 
lowed by a relative pronoun, or by other words qualifying it, and 

endering it much longer than the indirect [§ 76, (8.)]. The indirect 

egimen should also precede the direct, when the sentence would 

otherwise be equivocal [§ 76, (9.)] : — 

Avez-vous donne a 1' enfant, les jouets Have you given the child, the play* 
que vous lui aviez promis 7 things which you had promised 

him? 

Resume of Examples. 



Quel age a cette demoiselle 1 
Que veulent dire ces messieurs % 
Ou sont alles messieurs vos freres 1 
Combien d'enfants a ce monsieur 7 

Avez vous paye cet argent au mar- 

chand ? 
J'ai paye mon habit au tailleur. 
Vous avez paye au tailleur, le gilet 

que vous avez achete. 
N'aviez-vous pas demande cela a 

1'enfant ? 



How old is that young lady? 
What do those gentlemen mean ? 
Where o,re your brothers gone ? 
How many children has that gentle 

man ? 
Have you paid the merchant thai 

money ? 
I paid the tailor for my coat. 
You have paid the tailor for the coat 

which you have bought. 
Had you not asked the child for that ? 



Exercise 109. 



Dernier, e, last ; 
bon-V res, near, nearly ; 
Rend-re, 4. to return 
Serrurier, m. locksmith; 
Serviette, f. napkin. 



Accompagn-er, 1. to ac- Chaine, f. chain ; 

company; Chapeau, m. hat, 

Aine, e, eldest; net; 

Associe, m, partner ; Cinquante, f. fifty; 
Aubergiste,m landlord ; Clef ', f. key; 
Bouteille, f. bottle ; Commis, m. clerk ; 

1. Oii etaient vos parents Pannee derniere? 2. lis etaient en An- 
gleterre. 3. Oq sont restes les messieurs qui vous accompagnaient 
ce matin ? 4. lis sont restes chez leurs associes. 5. Que lisaient 
vos amies lorsque vous les avez quittees ? 6. Elles lisaient les nou- 
velles qu'elles venaient de recevoir. 7. Que dit monsieur votre 
pere ? 8. II ne dit rien. 9. Quel age a ce monsieur? 10. I] a pres 
de cinquante ans. 11. Quel age ont vos enfants? 12. L'aine a dix 
ans, et le plus jeune a six ans. 13. Avez-vous demande votre chaine 
d'or a ce monsieur? 14. Je la lui ai demandee. 15. Avez-voua 
rendu au commis, Pargent qu'il vous avait prete? 16. Je le lui ai 
rendu. 17. Aviez-vous envie d'envoyer vos clefs au semrrier? 18, 
J'avais envie de les lui envoyer, car elles sont cassees. 19. Aviez- 



162 LESSON LVII. 

vous oublie de payer votre habit au tailleur? 20. J'avais oublie de 
le lui pay?r, 21. Va k lait-il la peine d'envoyer ces plumes a. Pecolier! 

22. II ne valsn't pas la peine de les lui envoyer, il en avait d'autres. 

23. Valait-il *i peine d'envoyer ces bouteilles a l'aubergiste ? 24. 11 
valait la peii 3 de les lui envoyer, car il n'en avait pas. 25. Avez- 
vous demande des serviettes a votre pere ? 26. Je n'ai pas voulu 
Jui en demander. 

Exercise 110. 
1. What does the tailor mean ? 2. I do not know what he means 
3. Where is your eldest sister ? 4. She is at my brother's, or at 
my sister's. 5. What was the locksmith saying to you ? 6. He was 
saying that he has brought my key. 7. How many letters have you 
carried to the post-office ? 8. I have carried seven, three for you, 
and four for my father. 9. Have you given my sister the letter 
which I have written? 10. I have not given it to her, I left it upon 
my table. 11. Where is the gentleman who has brought that pen- 
knife? 12. He lives at my father's, do you wish to speak to him? 

13. I wished to send him a letter which I brought from England. 

14. Have you returned to that man the money which he had lent 
you ? 15. I have returned it to him. 16. Has your mother paid the 
milliner (modiste) for her bonnet? 17. She has not yet paid her for 
it. 18. How old is the shoemaker's eldest son? 19. He is twenty- 
one. 20. Had you a wish to send your brother the key of your 
room ? 21.1 had a wish to send it to him. 22. Was it worth the 
while to give your brother that book ? 23. It was worth the while 
to give it to him, for (car) he wanted it. 24. Was it worth the while 
to send these bottles to the druggist (apothicaire) ? 25. It was 
worth the while to send them to him. 26. Where is the landlord ? 
27. He is in England. 28. Is your sister at home? 29. No Sir, 
she is gone out. 30. How many children has the locksmith ? 31. 
He has ten. 32. How many books has the physician ? 33. He has 
five hundred volumes. 34. Have you given the gentleman that let- 
ter ? 35. I have forgotten to give it to him. 



LESSON LVII. LEgON LVE. 

1. The French avoid placing the verb at the end of such sentences 
as fiie following, when the nominative is a noun: — - 

Dites-moi ou demeure M. H. Tell me where Mr. H. lives. 

Je ne sais ou est mon pere. / do not know where my father is. 

Savez-veus cu est George 1 Do you know where George is ? 



LESSON LVII. 



163 



2. In speaking ot a state, condition or action, commenced in the 
past, but still continuing, the French use the piesent of the indica- 
tive. The past is commonly used in English in similar cases :— 

Combien de tent ps y-a-t-il qu'il est How long has he been here ? 

ici 7 ? 

II y a deux heures qu'il ecrit. He has been writing these two hours, 

II y a un mois qu'il demeure a Paris. He has lived in Paris one month. 

II y a deux ans qu'il est mort. He has been dead these two years. 

3. When however the state no longer continues, the past may be 
used in French, in the same manner as it is used in English :— 

Combien de temps avez-vous de- How long did you live in L. ? 

meure aL.1 
Combien de mois avez-vous appris How many months did you learn 

l'allemand 1 German ? 

II y a un mois que je ne l'ai vu. I have not seen him this month, 

4. Combien y a-t-il . . . Combien de mi]*es y a-t-il . . . Quelle 
distance y a-t-il 1 answer to the English expressions How far . . . 
How many miles is it . . . What is the distance, &c. 

Combion y a-t-il de Paris a Londres ? How far is it from Paris to London ? 



Eesume of Examples. 



Combien de temps y a-t-il que vous 
avez cette maison ? 

II y a deux ans que nous Tavons. 

Combien de temps avez-vous eu 
cette maison 1 

Nous l'avons eue dix ans. 

Combien de temps y a-t-il que votre 
frere apprend le grec 1 

II y a six ans qu'il 1' apprend. 

Quelle distance y a-t-il de Calais a 
Boulogne 1 

II y a huit lieues de Calais a Bou- 
logne. 



flow long have you had that house ? 

We have had it these two years. 
How long did you have that house ? 

We had it ten years. 

How long has your brother been 
learning Greek T 

He has been learning it six years. 

How far is it from Calais to Bou- 
logne? 

It is eight leagues from Calais to 
Boulogne. 



Exercise 111. 

Affiche, f. bill; Demi, e, half ; Morceau, m. piece; 

An, m. annee f. year ; Fatigue, e, tired; Ne, from naitre, 4. to k 
Attend-re, 4. to expect, to Imprhneur, m. printer ; born; 

wait for; Lieue, f. league ; Verger, m. orchard ; 

Compagnie, f. company ; Maintenant, now ; Vienne, Vienna. 
Copenhague, Copenha- Mois, m. month ; 

gen; 

1. Combien de temps y a-t-il que M. L. demeure a Paris? 2. II y 
& dix ans qu'il y demeure. 3. N'a-t-il pas demeure a Lyon ? 4 II y 
a demeure autrefois. 5. Pouvez-vous me dire ou est le fils du 
eapitaine. 6. II y a un an qu'il est en Angleterre. 7. Save^-vous ou 



164 LESSON LVIIc 

demeure M. B. ? 8. II demeurait autrefois a Rouen ; je ne sais pas oft 
il demeure raaintenant. 9. Y a-t-il longtemps que vous etes ici 1 
10. II y a plus de deux moisque nous sommes ici. 11. Combien de 
temps y a-t-il que vous avez ce verger? 12. II yaunan que nous 
i'avona. 13. Ou cet imprimeur est-il ne? 14. II est ne a Falaise 
15. Savez-vous combien il y a de Paris a Vienne? 16. II y a trois 
cent six lieues de Paris a Vienne et deux cents lieues de Vienne a 
Copenhague. 17. Y a-t-il longtemps que la compagnie est venue ? 
18. II y a plus de deux heures qu'elle est ici. 19. Y a-t-il long- 
temps que vous avez In cette affiche? 20. II y a plus de trois 
heures que je l'ai lue. 21. N'y a-t-il pas plus d'une demi-heure que 
votre sceur lit ? 22. II y a si longtemps qu'elle lit, qu'elle en est 
fatiguee. 23. Y a-t-il longtemps que vous attendez ce morceau de 
musique ? 24. II y a plus d'un an que je l'attends. 

Exercise 112. 

1. How long has the printer been here ? 2. He has been here 
more than a year. 3. Do you not know where my father lives ? 4. 
I know where he lives, but I have no time to go to his house to-day. 
5. How long has the physician lived in Paris ? 6. He has lived there 
ten years. 7. How long did he live in England ? 8. He lived in 
England six years and a half. 9. Can you tell me where the lock- 
smith lives'? 10. He lives at my brother's. 11. Have you been 
waiting long for this book? 12. I have been waiting for it more 
than a year. 13. How long has your son been learning Greek? 14. 
He has been learning it these two years. 15. Was not your sister 
born in Falaise ? 16. No, Sir ; she was born at Paris. 17. How long 
has your brother had this orchard? 18. He has had it more than 
six months. 19. How far is it from Paris to Lyons ? 20. It is one 
hundred and sixteen leagues from Paris to Lyons. 21. Is it farther 
(plus loin) from Lyons to Geneva than from Lyons to Turin ? 22. 11 
is farther from Lyons to Turin than from Lyons to Geneva. 23. 
How long did your father live in Germany ? 24. He lived in Ger- 
many two years, and in England six months. 25. How long have you 
lived in Paris ? 26. We have been here six months. 27. How long 
did you live in Rome ? 28. We lived there more than a year 29. 
How long has your brother been gone? 30. He has been yone 
these two years. 31. Have you been learning German more thaii one 
year? 32. I have been learning it more than four ;-eais. 33, Yo\u 
sister has been learning music one year and a naif. 



LESS ON LVIII. 



165 



LESSON LVIII. 



LEgON LVIII. 



Will you change you?- coat ? 

That gentleman has changed his name. 



1. Changer [1. see \ 49, (l.)],used in the sense of to changt^to leave 

one thing for another, is followed by the preposition de : changer 

d'habit, de chapeau, etc., to put on another coat, hat, <%c. ; changer 

d'avis, to change one's mind; changer de maison, to move, to chang 

houses ; changer de place, changer de pays, changer de climat, to go 

fa another place, country, climate ; changer de nom, to change one's 

name. The student will perceive that the noun following changer, is 

not preceded by a possessive adjective, like the noun of the English 

sentence : — 

Voulez-vous changer d'habit 1 
Ce monsieur a change de nom. 

2. Changer contre, means to exchange for ; changer pour, to change 

f(/r, to get change for : — 

Voulez-vous changer votre chapeau Will you exchange your hat for mine ? 

contre le mien % 
Changez ce billet pour de l'argent. Change that bill for silver. 

3. Tarder means to tarry, to be long in coming. Tarder, used 

unipersonally, and preceded by an indirect object, means to long, to 

wish for : — 

Votre soeur tarde bien a venir. Your sister is very long coming. 

II me tarde de la voir. / long to see her. 

Resume of Examples. 



N'avez-vous pas change d'apparte- 

ment 7 
Nous avons change de maison. 
Votre frere a change de conduite. 

Cette dame a change de religion. 
Contre quoi avez-vous change votre 

cheval 1 
J'ai besoin de monnaie, pouvez-vous 

me changer cette piece de vingt 

francs 1 
Ce gar^on a beaucoup tarde. 
II nous tardait d'arriver. 
II leur tardait de revoir leurs amis. 

U me tarde de revoir la France. 



Have you not taken another apart- 
ment? 

We have changed houses. 

Your brother has changed his con- 
duct. 

That lady has changed her religion. 

For what have you exchanged your 
horse ?- 

I want change, can you change me 
this twenty franc piece ? 

That boy tarried very much. 

We longed to arrive. 

They longed to see their frienih 

again. 
I long to see France again. 



Exercise 113. 

Air, m. air ; Blanc, che, white; Gris, e, gray ; 

Avis m mind, mean- Combat, m. combat ; Guinee, f. ^ uinca ; 

ing ; Conduite, f. conduct ; Jeune, young ; 



166 LESSON LVIII. 

M aitre, m. master ; Passe, e, past, last ; Vie, f. Ufe i conduct ; 

Manteau, m. cloak; Pays, ra. country ; Visage, m. cvwnienanu* 

Monnaie, f. change; Rentr-er, 1. to come in face. 

Mouille, e, wet; again; 
Parceque, because; 

1. Cet homme n'a-t-il pas change de vie? 2. II a chang6 de con- 
duite. 3. Cette grande maison n'a-t-elle pas change de maltre? 4. 
Elle a change de maitre, le capitaine G. vient de l'acheter. 5. Vous 
etes mouille, pourquoi ne changez-vous pas de manteau ? 6. Parce- 
que je n'en ai pas d'autre. 7. Votre cousine ne change-t-elle pas 
souvent d'avis? 8. Elle en change bien souvent. 9. Pendant le 
combat, ce jeune soldat n'a-t-il pas change de visage? 10. II n'a 
point change de visage. 11. Ce malade ne devrait-il pas changer 
d'air? 12. Le medecin lui recommande de changer de pays. 13 
Ou est votre cheval gris? 14. Je ne l'ai plus, je l'ai change contre 
un blanc. 15. Avec qui l'avez-vous change? 16. Je 'ai change 
avec le jeune homme qui demeurait ici le mois passe. 17. Le mar- 
chand peut il me changer cette piece de quarante francs? 18. II ne 
saurait (cannot) vous la changer, il n'a pas de monnaie. 19. Avez- 
vous la monnaie d'une guinee (change for a guinea). 20. Combien 
de schellinga, y a-t-il dans une guinee? 21. II y en a vingt-et-un. 
22. Votre petit gargon ne tarde-t-il pas a rentrer ? 23. II tarde beau- 
coup. 24. Ne vous tarde-t-il pas d'aller en Italie ? 25. II me tarde 
d'y aller. 

Exercise 114. 

1. Why do you not change your coat? 2. For a very good rea- 
son, (raison, f.) because I have no other. 3. Has your father changed 
houses ? 4. No, Sir, but we intend to do so (de le faire) to-morrow. 
5. Has that child changed his conduct ? 6. He has changed his con- 
duct, he is very good now (maintenant). 7. Have you changed your 
religion ? 8. No, Sir, I have not changed my religion. 9. Do you 
not change your place very often? 10. I change my place when I 
am tired. 11. Does not your sister change her mind everyday? 
12. She does not change her mind every day. 13. Was not your 
brother afraid, did not his countenance change? 14. His counte- 
nance changed, but he was not afraid. 15. Have you not changed 
rooms (chambre, f.) ? 16. I have not changed rooms, my room is 
very good. 17. Do you not long to be in France? 18. I long to 
be there. 19. Does not your mother tarry too itng? 20. She is 
very long, in coming. 21. Have you changed the forty franc piece? 
22. I have not changed it yet. 23. Why hav< you not changed it ? 
24. Because your father has no change. 25. Have you the change 



LESSON LIX, 167 

for a guinea? 26, No, Sir, I have only twelve shillings. 27. How 
many cents are there in a dollar ? 28. There are one hundred. 29. 
Has that gentleman exchanged that horse 1 30. Yes, Sir, he has ex- 
changed it for a warehouse. 31. Will you exchange your hat for 
mine 1 32. No, Sir, your hat is too small for me. 33. With whom 
have you exchanged your horse ? 34. I have exchanged it with my 
brtther. 35. I have exchanged it for a white one. 



LESSON LIX. LEgON LIX. 

1. We have given, in Lesson 11, rules for forming the plural of 
nouns, but have in accordance with our plan of not presenting too 
many difficulties at once, deferred until the present Lesson, the rules 
for the formation of the plural of compound nouns. 

2. When a noun is composed of two substantives, or of a substan- 
tive and an adjective, both take the form of the plural : un chef-lieu, 
des chefs-lieux, a chief place, chief places ; un gentilhomme, des gentils- 
hommes, a nobleman, noblemen [§ 9, (1.) (3.)]. 

3. When, however, two nouns are connected by a preposition, the 
first only becomes plural : Un chef-d'oeuvre, des chefs-d'oeuvre, a 
master-piece master-pieces [§ 9, (2.)]. 

4. In words composed of a noun and a verb, preposition or adverb, 
the noun only becomes plural; Passe-port, passe-ports, passport, 
passports [§ 9, (6.)]. 

5. Words composed of two verbs, or of a verb, an adverb, and a 
preposition, are invariable: un passe-partout, des passe-partout, 
master-key, master-keys [§ 9, (8.)]. 

6. We have seen [L. 5. R. 4.] that the name of the material al- 
ways follows the name of the object, and that both are united by the 
preposition de. The name of the profession or occupation also fol- 
lows the noun representing the individual, and the same preposition 
de connects the two : un maitre d'armes, a fencing master ; un maitre 
de dessin, a drawing master ; un marchand de farine, a dealer inflonr 

\ 76, (12.) \ 81, (4.)]. 

7. The name of a vehicle, boat, mill, &c, always precedes the noun 
describing the power by which it is impelled, or the purpose to 
which it is adapted; the name of an apartment, that of the use to 
which it is appropriated. The connecting preposition is a : un moulin- 
a-vapeur, a steam mill ; un bateau-a-vapeur, a steamboat ; un moulin- 
&-eau, a water-mill; la salle-a-manger, the dining-room [{ 76 (13.) 
(14){81,(4.) £./J. 



.68 



LESSON L I X. 



R^sumiS of Examples. 



Lille et Arras sont les chefs-lieiix 

des departments du Nord et du 

Pas-de-Calais. 
Les chemins-de-fer et les bateaux- 

d-vapeur sont tres nombreux en 

Amerique. 
C 3tte maison contient un salon ; une 

salle-a-manger, une cuisine et plu- 

sieurs chambres-a-coucher. 
Les raoulins-a-vent sont plus com- 

muns en France que les inoulins- 

a-eau ou a-vapeur. 



Lisle and Arras are the chief placet 
of the departments of the North ana 
of the Pas-de- Calais. 

Railroads and steamboats are very 
numerous in America. 

That house contains a drawing-room^ 
a dining-room, a kitchen, and seve- 
ral bed-rooms. 

Windmills are more common in 
France than water or steam-mills. 



Armes. f. p. fencing ; 
Bat-ir, 2. to build ; 
Bouteille, f. bottle ; 
Cabriolet, m. gig ; 
Chat-huant, m. owl ; 
Chauve-souris, f. bat; 



Exercise 115. 

Dessin, m. drawing ; Ordinaire, usual ; 

Engag-er, 1. to engage , Roue, f. wheel; 

Faire bat-ir, 2. to have Voyag-er, 1. to travel; 

built; Voile, f. sail, 
Se munir. 1. ref. to pro- 

vide one's self with ; 

1. Faut-il avoir un passe-port pour voyager en France ? 2. II faut 
en avoir un. 3. Les Anglais se munissent-ils de passe-ports pour 
voyager en Angleterre ? 4. On n'a pas besoin de passe-port en An- 
gleterre. 5. Aimez-vous a voyager sur les chemins-de-fer? 6. 
J'aime mieux voyager sur les chemins-de-fer que sur les chemins 
ordinaires. 7. Avez-vous apporte vos passe-partout? 8. Je n'ai 
point de passe-partout, je n'ai que des clefs ordinaires. 9. Votre 
frere est-il venu dans un bateau-a-vapeur ! 10. II est venu dans un 
bateau-a-voiles. 11. Avez-vous une voiture a. quatre chevaux? 12. 
Non, Monsieur, nous n'avons qu'un cabriolet a un cheval. 13. Votre 
frere a-t-il bati un moulin- a-vapeur ? 14. II a fait batir deux moulins, 
Tun a vent et l'autre a eau? 15. Votre compagnon a-t-il engage un 
maitre d'armes ? 16. Non, Monsieur, il a deja un maitre de dessin 
et un maitre de danse. 17. Combien de chambres-a-coucher avez 
vous? 18. Nous en avons deux. 19. Avez-vous une bouteille de 
vin ? 20. Non, Monsieur, mais j'ai une bouteille-a-vin (wine-bottle) 
[^ 81.]. 21. Voyez-vous les chats-huants ? 22. Non, mais je voia 
les chauves-souris. 23. J'ai une voiture a quatre roues . 

Exercise 116. 

1. Is your father in England? 2. No, Sir, he is in France with 
my brother. 3. Have they taken passports ? 4. Yes, Sir, they havo 
taken two. 5. Is it necessary to have a passport to travel in Amer 
ica? 6. No, Sir, but it is necessary to have one to travel in Italy. 
7. Is there a steamboat from Calais to Dover (Douvres) ? 8. There 



LESSON LX. 



169 



tre several. 9. Is there a railroad from Paris 1c Brussels {Bri* 
xelles) ? 10. There is one from Paris to Brussels, and one from Pari* 
*o Tours. 11. Has your brother bought a wind-mill? 12. No, Sir 
but he has built a steam-mill. 13. Are there many w::i<i mills in 
America? 14. No, Sir, but there are many water and steam-mills. 
15. Have your sisters a dancing-master? 16. They have a dancing- 
master and a music-master. 17. Does your cousin learn drawing? 
18 He does not learn it, he cannot find a drawing-master. 19. Is 
the fencing-master in the dining-room? 20. No, Sir, he is in the 
dra tving-room. 21. Is your cousin in his bed-room? 22. No, Sir, 
he is out (sorli). 23. How many rooms are there in your house. 
2 I. Five ; a kitchen, a dining-room, a drawing-room, and two bed- 
rooms. 25. Are there owls here ? 26. Yes, Sir, and bats too. 27. 
Have you seen those master-pieces ? 28. Yes, Sir, I have seen them. 
29. Have you sent them to the chief place of the department ? 30. 
I have sent them there. 31. Have you a two-horse gig? 32. I have 
a four-horse one. 33. Has your brother a two-wheel carriage? 84 
He has a two-seat carriage (d deux sieges). 



LESSON LX. 



LEQON LX. 



THE TWO FUTURES, SIMPLE AND ANTERIOR. (§ 124.) 

1. The future of every verb in the French language ends with rai, 
ras, ra, rons, rez, ront 

2. This tense, in all the regular verbs, as also in the irregular verbs 
not mentioned in the next lesson, may be formed from the present 
of the infinitive by changing the r of the urst and second conjuga- 
tions, and the oir and re of the third and fourth, into the termlj:ati$&s 
already given and here again repeated. 

3. Conjugation of the Future Simple of the Regular 

Verbs. 



Je ehante -rai 


fini -rai 


recev -rai 


rend 


-rai 


will sing 


will finish 


will receive 


will render 


Tu parle -ras 


cheri -ras 


apercev -ras 


vend 


-ras 


wilt speak 


wilt cherish 


wilt perceive 


wilt sell 




11 donne -ra 


fourni -ra 


percev -ra 


tend 


-ra 


s h all give 


will furnish 


will gather 


will tend 




Nous cherche -rons 


puni -rons 


concev -rons 


entend 


-rons 


will seek 


shall punish 


will conceive 


will hear 




Vous porte -rez 


saisi -rez 


dev -rez 


perd 


-rez 


will carry 


will seize 


will owe 


will Ipse 




lis aime -ront 


uni -ront 


decev -ront 


mord 


-ront 


will love 


will unite 

8 


will deceive 


will bite 





1*0 



LESSON L X. 



4. Tb3 future anterior is merely the past participle of the verh, 
conjugated with the future of one of the auxiliaries avoir tire: — 

J'aurai fini; je me serai flatte. I shall have done, I shall have flattered 

myself. 

5. The student, when rendering English into French should be 
careful to distinguish will, taken as an auxiliary, from the same word 
employed as a principal verb. In this latter case, it is always equiva- 
lent to the verb, to wish, or to be willing, and should not be rendered 
by the future of the verb, but by the present of vouloir : — 



N * voules-vous pas lui ecrire 1 



Will you not (are you not willing) to 
write to him ? 



Resume of Examples. 



Quadd parlerez-vous ace monsieur 1 

Vous fournira-t-il des provisions % 
lis ne recevront pas leurs revenus. 
Ne vendrez-vous pas vos proprie- 
ty 1 
Que voulez-vous avoir 1 
Que veut lire votre frere 1 
Apporterez-vous des pommes ! 
Nous amenerons nos enfants 
Vous apporterez des legumes. 



When will you speak to that gcntl> 

man ? 
Will he furnish you provisions ? 
They will not receive their income. 
Will you not sell your property ? 

What do you wish to have ? 
What will your brotlier read ? 
Will you bring apples ? 
We will bring our children. 
You will bring vegetables. 



Exercise 117. 

m. watering Chateau, m. villa / Men-er, 1. [fy 49, (5.)J to 

Colporteur, m. pedlar, take, to lead; 

Se promen-er, 1. ref. 
to [() 49, (6.)] to walk or 
ride for pleasure ,* 
Recolt-er, 1. to harvest; 
Sem-er, 1. [§ 49, (6.)] to 
sow. 



a manger, 



Abreuroir 

place ; 
Appel-er, 1. [§ 49, (4.)] hawker 

to call ; Donner 

Apres-midi, f. afternoon ; ^feed ; 
Avoine, f. oats ; E curie, f. stable; 

Ble, m. wheat ; Foin, m. hay ; 

Cachet-er, 1. [$ 49, (4.)]Geler, 1. [§ 49, (5.)] to 

to seal, freeze; 

1. Menerez-vous vos enfants a 1'eeole? 2. Je les menerai k 
1'ecole et a l'eglise. 3. Le jardinier apportera-t-il des legumes au 
marche? 4. II y en apportera. 5. Ou menerez-vous ce cheval? 
6 Je le menerai a l'ecurie. 7. Lui donnerez-vous a manger! 
S Je lui donnerai du foin et de l'avoine. 9. Lui donnerez-vous d3 
S'eau? 10. Je le menerai a l'abreuvoir. 11. Paierez-[§49, (2.)] vous 
ee que vous devez? 12. Ne voulez-vous pas rou promener? 13. Je 
me promsnerai cette apres-midi. 14. Vous xn'onOnerez-vous a pied 
ou a cheval ? 15. Je me promenerai a chevav et ma soeur se prome- 
nera en voiture. 16. Marcherez-vous beaucou ^ dan* votre voyage 



LESSON LXI. 1Y1 

a Paris? 17. Nous ne marcherons pas dutout. 18. N'appellerez- 
[5 49,(4.V] vous pas le colporteur? 19. Je ne l'appellerai pas. 
20. N'acheterez-[§ 49, (5.)] vous pas ce chateau? 21. Nous l'ache- 
terons si nous pouvons. 22. Ne gelera-t-il pas [H^» (^0] cetttt 
nuit? 23. Je ne le crois pas, il fait trop chaud. 24. Ne semerez- 
[} 49, (6.)] vous pas tout le ble que vous recolterez? 25. Je n'en 
semerai qu'une partie, je vendrai le reste. 26. Je cachetterai mes 
lettres et je les porterai a la poste. 

Exercise 118. 

1 . Will not the gentleman call his children ? 2. He will call his 
children and his sister's. 3. Will you not bring your children? 
4. I cannot bring them. 5. Will you not take a ride this afternoon ? 
6. We will ride in a carriage to-morrow. 7. Will you not buy my 
father's horses ? 8. I shall not buy them ; I have no money. 9. Will 
you not call the pedlar ? 10. I do not wish to call him ; I do not wish 
to buy any thing. 11. Will you pay the tailor? 12. I will pay him 
for my coat. 13. Will it not freeze to-morrow? 14. It will freeze 
to-morrow; it is very cold. 15. Will you not sow oats in this field 
(champ) ? 16. I will not sow oats ; I will sow wheat there. 17. Will 
you take your sister to school? 18. I will take her there this after- 
noon. 19. Will you not take your son to market? 20. I will not 
take him there. 21. Will not the gardener take his horse to the 
watering place ? 22. He will take him there. 23. Will you give 
oats to your horse ? 24. I will give him hay. 25. Will you bring 
your son with you ? 26. I will bring him to-morrow. 27. Will he 
bring his horse ? 28. He will bring his horse and carriage. 29. Why 
do you carry that little child ? 30. He is too sick to (pour) walk. 
31. Will your brother sell his property? 32. He will only sell part 
of it. 33. Will not your servant carry the letter to the post-office ? 
34. I will seal it and give it to him. 35. Will you feed my horse ? 
36. I will feed him and give him some water. 



LESSON LXI. LEQON LXI. 

IRREGULARITIES OF THE FUTURE. 

1. The two irregular verbs of the first conjugation aller, to go, aud 
envoyer, to send, make in the future firai,fenverrai \tee \ 62.] : — 

2. All the verbs of the second conjugation, which end in enir, change 
that termination into iendrai, &c, for the future : as, tenir, to hold, 



172 



LESSON LXI. 



renir, to come;je tiendraije viendrai. Acquerir, to acquire ; conque"rir 
to conquer ; requcrir, to require ; mourir, to die ; and courir, to run, and 
its compounds, double the r in the future:—; -facquerrai,je mourrax, 
je courrai. Cueillir, to gather, and its compounds, change the i pre- 
ceding the r into e:—je cueillerai. 

3. In the third conjugation, s'asseoir, to sit down, and seoir, to sit % 
makc/e rrfassierai and je sierai. Falloir, to be necessary, vouloir, to 
he willing, and valoir, to be worth, make il faudra,je voudrai, and je 
vaudrai. Voir, to see, and revoir, to see again, make je verrai, je 
reverrai. Pouvoir, to be 'able, makes je pourrai, and pourvoir, to pro- 
vide, je pourvoiraL Savoir, to know, and avoir, to have, m&keje saurai, 
vai&faurai. 

4. Etre, to be, faire, to make, and its compounds, are the only verba 
of the fourth conjugation, which are irregular in the future :— je seraiy 
jeferai, &c. 

5. The futures, simple and anterior, are used in French after an 

adverb of time, in cases similar to those in which the English use 

the present and perfect of the indicative, with a future meaning: — 

Quand vous verrez ces messieurs . . When you see those gentlemen ... 
Des que vous aurez re9U cette As soon as you have received this 



lettre 



letter 



Resume of Examples. 



Irez-vous en France cette annee 1 
Nous irons en France et en Italic 
Nous vous enverrons ehercher. 
Ne viendrez-vous pas nous trouver. 
Ne nous assierons-nous pas ? 
Quand ils viendront, j'aurai ma 

lettre. 
Cela vaudra-t-il la peine 1 
Cet habit ira-t-il bien 1 
II faudra leur envoy er de l'argent. 



Shall you go to France this year ? 

We shall go to France and Italy. 

We shall send for you. 

Will yon not comi to us ? 

Shall io e not sit d.<wn ? 

When they come, I shall have my let- 
ter. 

Will that be ivorth the while ? 

Will that coat fit weU ? 

It will be necessary to send them 
money. 



Avec, with; 
Bientot, soon; 
Connait-re, 4. ir. to 

know ; 
Demeure, f. dimlling ; 
F raise, f. straw-berry ; 
Guitare. f. guitar ; 



Exercise 119. 

Lentement, slowly ; 
March-er, to walk, to go 

on foot ; 
Moi-meme, myself; 
Ou, where; 
Part-ir, 2. ir. to set out, 

to leave ; 



Permett-re, 4. ir. to per- 
mit ; 
Plaisir, m. pleasure ; 
Pret-er, 1. to lend; 
Sort-ir, 2. ir. to go out. 



1. Ne viendrez-vous pas nous voir demain? 2. J'irai vous voir, si 
le temps le permet. 3. N'enverrez-vous pas ehercher le medecin, si 
voire fils est malade ? 4. Je Pirai ehercher moi-meme. 5. Quand je 
serai fatigue, je marcherai plus lentement 7. Quand vous connaitrez 



LESSON LXI. 173 

sa demeure irez-vous le voir? 8. J'irai le voir aussitot que je saurai 
ou il demeure. 9. Ne le verrez-vous pas aujourd'hui? 10. Je 1© 
verrai cette apres-midi. 11. Ne pourrez-vous point nous accom 
pagner? 1.2. Je le ferai avec beaucoup de plaisir. 13. Ne leur en- 
verrez-vous point des fraises? 14. Je leur en enverrai quand lea 
miennes seront mures. 15. Ne faudra-t-il pas leur ecrire bientot? 
16. Quand nous aurons recu des nouvelles de. leur parent, il faudra 
leur ecrire. 17. Que ferons-nous demain ? 18. Nous irons a la 
chasse. 19. N'irez vous pas chez votre pere? 20. Nous irons cer- 
tainement. 21. Quand votre guitare sera arrivee, la preterez-vous? 
22. Je ne pourrai la preter. 23. A quelle heure partirez-vous de- 
main ? 24. Je partirai a cinq heures du matin. 25. Ne sortirez-vous 
pas ce soir? 26. Je ne sortirai pas, et je me eoucherai de bonne 
heure. 

Exercise 120. 

1. Will you send for the physician ? 2. I will send for him this 
afternoon. 3. Will not the little girl go and fetch apples? 4. She 
will send for some. 5. Will you not sit down when you are tired? 
6. We will not sit down, we have no time. 7. What will your 
brother do when he is tired ? [R. 5.] 8. He will do what [ce que] 
ne can. [R. 5.J 9. Will it be worth the while to (de) write to him? 
10. It will not be worth the while, for (car) he will not come. 11. 
Will it not be necessary to speak to the merchant? 12. It will not 
be necessary to speak to him. 13. Will it be necessary for us to 
take passports? 14. It will be necessary. (II le faudra.) 15. Will 
not your little boy walk more slowly when he is tired? 16. When 
he is tired, he will sit down. 17. What will your sister do to-mor- 
row? 18. She will go to church and to school. 19. Will she not 
come here? 20. She will not be able to come. 21. Will you walk 
or go on horseback, (Irez vous a pied ou a cheval J) 22. I shall go on 
horseback. 23. Why do you not go in a carriage ? 24. Because my 
carriage is in London. 25. When will you see them ? 26. I shall 
ee them as soon as I can. 27. Will they come to our house to- 
morrow ? 28. They will do so with much pleasure. 29. When you 
see that gentleman, will you speak to him ? 30. I will not speak to 
him. 31. When you have written your letters, what will you do? 
32. 1 shall come to your house. 33. When you have read that book, 
will you send it to me ? 34. I will send it to you. 35. Will ycu send 
it to-day? 36. I will send it to-morrow. 37. They will come to you 
to-morrow. 



Hi 



LESSON LXII. 



IESSON LXII. 



LEgON Lxn. 



THE TWO CONDITIONALS. ($ 125.) 

1. The conditional present may be formed from the future, by 
displacing the terminations ai, as, a, ons, ez, out, and substituting 
those of the imperfect of the indicative, ais, ais, ait, ions, iez, aient, 

2. Every verb in the French language, regular and irregular, ha 
in this tense the above terminations. 



3. 



Je 



Conjugation of the Conditional Present of the Regu- 
lar Verbs. 



chanter -ais 

would sing 

Tu parler -ais 

wouldst speak 

II donner -ait 

should give 

Nous che. cher -ions 

would seek 
Vous porter -iez 

should carry 

lis aimer -aient 

would love 



finir -ais 

would finish 

cherir -ais 

wouldst cherish 

fournir -ait 

should furnish 

punir -ions 

should punish 

saisir -iez 

would seize 

unir -aient 
should unite 



recevr -ais 

would receive 

apercevr -ais 

wouldst perceive 

percevr -ait 

would gather 

concevr -ions 

would conceive 

devr- -iez 
should owe 
decevr -aient 
would deceive 



rendr -ais 

would render 

vendr -ais 

wouldst sell 

tendr -ait 

should tend 

entendr -ions 

should hear 

perdr -iez 
would love 
mordr ■ aient 
should bite 



4. The irregularities of the conditional appear not in the termina- 
tions, but in the stem of the verb. They are precisely the same as 
those of the future. Those irregularities will be found in the last 
lesson, and need not be repeated here. The conditional of any irreg- 
ular verb may be formed by placing after the last r of the future, the 
terminations of the imperfect of the indicative. 

5. The conditional past is formed from the conditional present of 
one of the auxiliaries avoir, etre, and the past participle of the verb 
[j 125, (2.)] :— 

J'aurais ecrit, je me serais flatte. I should have written, I should havt 

flattered myself. 

6. The two futures and the two conditionals should not be usee 
after the conjunction si (if). But in such case, the present and th# 

mperfect of the indicative should be used : — 

S'il pouvait quitter son pere, il vien- If he could leave his father, he wovU 

drait. come. 

Si j'etais a votre place, j'irais. If I were in your place, I ivould go. 

Resume of Examples. 

Nous irions a la chasse, si nous! We would go hunting if we had turn 

avions le temps. J 

Je lirais, si j'avais des livres ici. I / would read if I had books here. 



LESSON LXII. 175 



Jaimerais mieux aller a pied qu'al I would prefer walking to riding. 

cheval. 
Votre mere se porterait mieux a 

Paris. 
Nous nous passerions facilement de 

ce livre. 
Ne vaudrait-il pas mieux fori ecrire 1 
Nc faudrait-il pas lui ecrire % 



Je m'assierais si j'etais fatigue. 
Cet habit m'irait bien, s'il etait assez 
large. 



Your mother would be better in Paris. 
We might easily do without that boot. 



Would it not be better to unite to him I 
Would it not be necessary to write to 

him ? 

I would sit down if I were tired. 
That coat would Jit me well if it vxrrc 

broad enough. 



Exercise 121. 

S'amus-er, 1. ref. to Interromp-re, 4. ir. to Se tromp-er, 1. ref. to be 

amuse one's self; interrupt ; mistaken ; 

S'approch-er, 1. ref. folnvit-er, 1. to invite ; Se por-ter, 1. ref. to be 

come near ; Mett-re, 4. ir. to put on; or do; 

S'eloign-er, 1. ref. to #0 Mouill-er, 1. to wet; Voyage, m. journey. 

from ; Ot-er, 1. to take off; 

S'ennuy-er. 1. ref. [§ 49.] Peut-etre, perhaps; 

to be or become weary ; Sech-er, 1. to dry ; 

1. Quel habit mettriez-vous si vous alliez a la chasse? 2. Je 
mettrais un habit vert. 3. N'oteriez-vous pas vos bottes, si ellea 
etaient mouillees ? 4. Je les oterais, et je les ferais secher. 5. Si 
vous aviez froid, ne vous approcheriez-vous pas du feu 1 6. Je m'en 
approcherais certainement. 7. Votre petit garcon ne s'en eloigne- 
rait-il pas, s'il avait trop chaud? 8. II s'en eloignerait bien vite. 9. 
Vous ennuieriez-vous ici ? 10. Je ne m'ennuierais pas, je m'amuse- 
rais a lire. 11. Ne vous tromperiez-vous pas, si vous faisiez ce cal- 
cul? 12. Je me tromperais peut-etre, si j'etais interrompu. 13 
Viendriez-vous si on vous invitait? 14. Je viendrais avec beaucoup 
de plaisir. 15. Ne vous porteriez-vous pas mieux, si vous lisiez 
moins? 16. Je me porterais beaucoup mieux. 17. Ne faudrait-il 
pas lui parler de votre affaire'? 18. II faudrait lui en parler. 19. 
Combien d'argent vous faudrait-il ? 20. II me faudrait mille francs, 
si je faisais ce voyage. 21. Ne vaudrait-il pas mieux lui parler que 
lui ecrire ? 22. II vaudrait mieux lui ecrire. 23. Si vous etiez a 
ma place, que feriez-vous 1 24. Si j'etais a votre place, je lui paierais 
03 que je lui dois. 25. Si j'avais le temps, je porterais volcntier* 
vos lettres a la poste. 

Exercise 122. 

1. Would you not read if you had time? 2. I would read two 
hours every day if I had time. 3. What coat would your brother 
put on if he wentlo church ? 4. He would put on a black coat. 5. 
Would you put on a black hat ? 6, I would put on a straw hat 



176 LESSON LXII1. 

{chapeau de vaille) if it was warm. 7. Would yon not draw [L, 39, 
6. ] near the fire if you were cold ? 8. We would draw near it 
9. Would you not take off your coat? 10. I would take it off, if it 
were wet. 1 1. Would you go to my father's if he invited you ? 12 
I would go to his house and to your brother's, if they invited me 
13. Would you put on your boots, if they were wet? 14. If they 
were wet, 1 would not put them on. 15. How much money would 
you want, if you went to England? 16. We wou'd want three 
thousand francs. 17. Would you not be better if you lived (efe- 
neurer) in the country? 18. I should not be better. 19. Would 
it not be better tc write to your brother ? 20. It would be better to 
write to him. 21. Would you read the book if I lent it to you ? 22. 
I would certainly read it. 23. If you were in his place, would you 
go to school ? 24. If I were in his place, I would go. 25. If you 
were in my place, would you write to him ? 26. I would write to 
him every day. 27. Would your sister be mistaken? 28. She 
would not be mistaken, she is very attentive. 29. If you rose every 
morning at five, would you be better? 30. I should not be bettei. 
31. Would you prefer going on foot? 32. I would prefer going on 
horseback. 33. Would you not sit down ? 34. I would sit down 
if I were tired. 



LESSON LXIIL LEgOST LXHL 

1. The verb faire (4. ir.) is used in the formation of a number of 

idiomatic sentences. See L. 32. R. 3, 4. Faire faire, to have made i 

to bespeak ; faire raccommoder, to have mended ; faire la cuisine, to 

cook ; faire cuire, to cook, to bake ; faire bouillir, to boil ; faire rotir 

to roast ; faire chauffer, io warm (in speaking of food) ; faire bonne 

eh ere, to live well : — 

Nous avons fait faire des habits. We have had clothes made, 
Vous avez fait raccommoder vos You have had your waistcoats mended. 
gilets. 

2. The past participle of faire never varies, when it precedes aa 
infinitive : — 

Les livres que vous avez fait venir. The books which you have. &nt for. 

3. Faire peur, to frighten; faire attention, to pay attention; faire 

tort, to injure ; faire mal, faire du mal, to hurt, take a before $ 

noun : — * 

Nous avons fait peur a ces enfants. We have frightened thost child'enc 
Vous leur avez fait mal. You have hurt them. 



LESSON LXIII. 



177 



4. The last example will show that, when a noun preceded by a, 
expressed or understood, is replaced by a pronoun, that pronoun will 
take the form of the indirect regimen {dative). By an exception to 
the rules for the place of personal pronouns, when faire attention 
has for its indirect object a pronoun representing a person, that pro- 
noun follows the verb : — 

Nous ferons attention a lui. We will pay attention to him. 

5. In speaking of the parts of the body, the French use the article 
le, la, les, &c, instead of the possessive adjective [§ 77, (9.)] when 
the possession is expressed by a reflective (L. 37. R. 1.) or other per- 
sonal pronoun or by some other word in the sentence : — 

Vous m'avez fait mal a la main. You have hurt my hand. 

Le bras lui fait mal. His arm hurts or pains him. 

Resume of Examples. 



Ferez-vous raccommoder vos sou- 

liers ? 
Je ferais faire un habit si j'avais de 

l'argent 1 
II ne sait pas faire la cuisine. 
Avez-vous fait cuire votre viande 1 
Ferez-vous chauffer votre bouillon 1 
Vous lui avez fait mal au coude. 
Vous m'avez fait mal au pied. 
Vous avez fait peindre votre mai- 

son. 



Will you have your shoes mended ? 

I would bespeak a new coat if I had 

money. 
He does not understand cooking. 
Have you cooked your meat ? 
Will you warm your broth ? 
You have hurt his elbow. 
You have hurt my foot. 
You have had your house painted. 



Exercise 123. 



JBat-ir, 2. to build; 
Bouillon, m. broth; 
Bras. m. ami; 
Cuisinier, m. cook; 
Epaule, f. shoulder ; 



Gravure 

ing ; 
Ma^on, m. mason; 
March-er, to step, tread 
Ou. where; 



Gigot>de-mouton, m. fog- Pied, ra.foot; 
of mutton ; 



engrav- Poignet, m. wrist ; 
Tete, f. head ; 
Tout-a-1'heure, by-an&- 

by; 
Travail, m. work t la- 
bor. 



2. J'en ferai batir une 
:. Avez-vous fait bouil- 



1. Quand ferez-vous batir une maison? 
l'annee prochaine, si je recois mon argent. 
lir ce gigot de mouton? 4. Je Tai fait rotir. 5. Le cuisinier a-t-il 
fait chauffer votre bouillon ? 6. II ne Fa pas encore fait chauffer, mais 
il le fera tout-a-1'heure. 7. N'avez-vous pas fait venir des livresl 
8. Nous n'en avons pas fait venir, mais nous avons fait venir des 
gravures. 9. N'avez-vous pas fait peur a ces petites lilies? 10. 
Nous leur avons fait peur. 11. Ferez-vous attention a votre travail 1 
12. J'y ferai attention. 13. Avez-vous fait mal a cette petite fille ? 
14. Je ne lui ai pas fait mal. 15. N'avez-vous pas fait mal ace 
ehien ? 16. Je lui ai fait mal. 17. Ou avez-vous fait mal a votre fils ? 

8* 



178 LE8S0NLXIV. 

18. Je lui a Bdt mal au bras et -k la main. 19. Ne lui avez-vous pas 
fait mil au pied? 20. Je lui ai fait mal a Pepaule. 21. A qui ce 
macon a-t-il fait mal ? 22. II n'a fait mal a personne. 23. Vous ai-je 
fait mal au pied? 24. Vous m'avez marche sur le pied et vous m'avez 
fait mal. 25. La tete, Fepaule, le bras, le poignet et la main me font 
mal. [R. 5.] 

Exercise 124. 

1. Will you have your coat mended? 2. I will not have it 
inended. 3. Will your brother have his house painted? 4. He will 
have it painted next year. 5. Will you not have a coat made ? 6. I 
would have one made if I had money. 7. Have you hurt your 
brother? 8. I have hurt him, I have stepped upon his foot. 9. 
Does his arm pain him? 10. Yes, Sir, his shoulder, arm and wrist 
pain him. 11. Will not your son pay attention to his work? 12. 
He will pay attention to it, he has nothing else (rien autre chose) to 
do. 13. Have I hurt your hand or your elbow? 14. You have 
hurt my fingers (doigts). 15. Does your cook understand cooking? 
16. He understands cooking. 17. Has the cook roasted that leg of 
mutton? 18. He has boiled, it. 19. Has he not warmed it? 20. 
He has not had time to warm it. 21. Has the physician sent for en- 
gravings ? 22. He has sent for books. 23. Have you hurt his 
elbow ? 24. I have not hurt his elbow, but his hand. 25. Have I 
not hurt your fingers? 26. You have hurt my wrist. 27. Where 
have you hurt your son ? 28. I have not hurt him. 29. Would the 
cook boil that meat if he had time ? 30. He would not boil it, he 
would roast it. 31. When will he warm your broth ? 32. He will 
warm it by-and-by, if he has time. 33. If you had stepped upon 
my foot, would you not have hurt me ? 34. I should certainly have 
hurt you, if I had stepped upon your foot. 



LESSON LXIV. LEgON LXIV. 

1, Faire connaissance, to become or get acquainted, takes the prepo- 
sition avec before its object. Faire un mille, &c, faire un voyage, 
faire un tour de promenade, mean to go, or travel a mile, &c, to g€ 
on a journey, to take a walk : — 

Nous avons fait vingt milles a che- We travelled twenty miles on hor&* 
vai back. 

2. Faire ses adieux, faire des empiettes, faire des progress, faire des 



LESSON L X I V. 



179 



questions, fiire du feu, correspond in signification to the English 
expressions, to bid farewell, to make purchases, to improve or progress^ 
to ask questions, to make a fire : — 

J'ai fait mes adieux a mes parents. Ibid farewell to my relations. 
Avez-vous fait du feu dans ma Have you made a fire in my room? 
chambre 1 

3. Faire sortir means, to send out, or to order out ; faire entrer, to 
let in, to bid come in; faire attendre, to keep waiting ;— * 

Vous les avez fait entrer dans ma You made them come into my room. 

chambre. 
Vous avez fait attendre mon pere. You made my father wait. 

4 Faire son possible, to do one's best, takes the preposition pour. 

Faire semblant, to pretend, faire usage, to make use, are followed by 

de:— 

Nous avons fait notre possible. We have done our best. 

Resume of Examples. 



Nous avons fait connaissance avec 

eux. 
Vous avez fait vingt lieues en dix 

heures. 
Nous ferons un tour de promenade. 
Je lui ai fait plusieurs questions, 
lis nous out fait leurs adieux. 
Vous nous avez fait attendre. 
Cet enfant fait semblant de dormir. 
Vous faites semblant de lne. 

Nous ferons notre possible pour le 
voir. 



We became acquainted vrith them. 

You travelled twenty leagues in ten 

hours. 
We shall take a vsalk. 
I asked him several questions. 
They have bid us farewell. 
You have made us wait. 
That child pretends to be asleep. 
You pretend, to be reading, or do as 

if you were reading. 
We will do our best to see him. 



Exercise 125. 



Se fach-er, 1. ref. to be- 

come angry ; 
Faire l'aumone, to give 

alms ; 
Laiss-er, 1. to leave, let ; 
Mendiant, m. beggar ; 



Negociant, m. merckcutik; 
Quart, m. quarter / 
Rarement, seldom; 
Reuss-ir, 2. to succeed ,* 
Riz, m. rice. 



Aise, glad ; 
Aliment, m.food; 
Credit, m. credit; 
Demand-er, 1. to ask ; 
Dorm-ir, 2. ir. to sleep ; 
Etude, f. study ; 

1. Seriez-vous bien aise de faire connaissance avec ce monsieur 
2. Pen serais bien aise. 3. Ce cheval fait-il une lieue en un quart 
d'heure % 4. II a fait ce matin une lieue en douze minutes. 5. Leur 
avez-vous fait des questions ? 6. Je leur en ai fait.* 7. Quelles 
questions leur avez-vous faites ? 8. Je leur ai demande s'ils avaient 
fait des emplettes 1 9. Vos eleves font-ils des progres dans leurs 
etudes ? 10. lis n'en font pas beaucoup, ils vlennent rarement a Pecole, 



* Bee L. 42. 11, and $ 136, (7.) 



180 LESSON LXIV. 

II. Si vous etiez chez vous, feriez-vous sernblant dc dormir? 12 J« 
ne ferais certainement pas sernblant de dormir. 13. Pourquoi ne 
faites-vous pas entrer ce mendiant ? 14. Ma mere vient de lui faire 
l'aumone. 15. Le n^gociant fait-il usage de son credit? 16. II en fait 
usage. 17. De quels aliments ee malade ftiit-il usage? 13. II fait 
usage de riz et de bouillon. 19. Faites-vous votre pcesible pour 
reussir? 20. Je fais tout mon possible. 21. Avez-vous fait entrer 
ces enfants, ou les avez-vous fait sortir? 22. Je les ai laisses ou ila 
etaient 23. Vous avons-nous fait attendre? 24. Vous nous avez 
fait attendre plnsieurs heures. 25. Si vous faisiez attendre ces 
dames, elles se faeheraient. 

Exercise 126. 

1. Does that child pretend to read? 2. He pretends to read. 3. 
Does not that gentleman pretend to sleep? 4. He does not pretend 
to sleep, he sleeps really (reellement). 5. Will you take a walk this 
morning ? 6. I would do so with pleasure, if I had time. 7. Have 
you become acquainted with the physician ? 8. I have not yet be- 
come acquainted with him. 9. How many questions have you asked 
(a) the child? 10. I asked him many questions. 11. Have you asked 
him if he had studied his lesson? 12. I did not ask him. 13. Will 
not that little girl do her best to learn her lesson? 14. She will do 
her best to learn it. 15. Of what food do you make use when you 
are sick? 16. We make use of bread and rice. 17. Have you for- 
gotten to bid farewell to your mother? 18. I had not forgotten it; 
I intended to go to her house this afternoon. 19. With whom have 
you become acquainted ? 20. With the bookseller. 21. Do you not 
keep those ladies waiting ? 22. I do not keep them waiting, they are 
not ready (pretes). 23. Do I make you wait ? 24. You do not make 
me wait. 25. Have you left your children in your room ? 26. [ have 
not done so (le). 27. Have you sent them out ? 28. I have not sent 
them out, I have let them remain where they were. 29. Have you 
made purchases this morning? 30. I have made none, I have no 
money. 31. Has the servant made a fire in my room ? 32. He has 
made one. 33. Will you do your best to come to-morrow ? 34. I 
m\\ do my best to come early. 35- We travelled yesterday forty 
leagues in sixteen hours. 



LESSON LXV. 



181 



LESSON LXV. 



LEgON LXV. 



1. F aire is also uisd in the sense of playing the part of, or pretend- 
ing U be: — 

II fait le grand seigneur. He plays the great lord, 

2. Faire also means to matter, to concern, to help : — 

Cela ne fait rien. That is no matter. 

Cela ne vous fait rien. That is nothing to you, does not concern 

you. 
Qu ? est-ce-que cela nous fait ? What is that to us ? 
Je ne puis qu'y faire. i" cannot help it. 

3. Se faire mal conjugated reflectively, means to hurt one's self. 
Se faire is used reflectively in the sense of the English verbs, to be- 
come, to turn. It is, also, used with the signification of the words 
cause, have, get, <j-c. Se faire takes etre as its auxiliary. [§ 46. 
L, 45.] :— 

I have become a physician. 

I have had a pair of boots made fat 



Je me suis fait medecin. 

Je me suis fait faire une paire 

de bottes. 
Je me suis fait raser. 
Nous nous sommes fait couper les 

cheveux. 
Je me suis fait mal au doigt. J have hurt my finger. 

4. Besides the instances mentioned, [L. 33. R. 5.], faire is used 
unipersonaily in many idiomatic expressions : — 

II fait jour, il fait nuit. 

II fait de la boue, il fait de la 

poussiere. 

II fait clair de lune, il fait obscur. It is moonlight, it is dark. 
II fait bon ici, il fait eher ici. It is comfortable here, it is dear here, 



I have had my beard shaved. 
We have had our hair cut. 



It is daijlight, it is night. 
It is muddy , it is dusty. 



Resume of Examples. 



Ce jeune homme fait le savant. 

Cela De me fait rien. 
Que pouvons-nous y faire 1 
Mon frere s'est fait orfevre. 
Pourquoi vous faites-vous raser 7 
Je me ferai couper les cheveux. 
Je me suis fait batir une maison. 
Nous nous sommes fait mal a la 

t£te. 
II commence a se Mre tard. 
Fait-il cher vivre a Paris 1 
U fait beaucoup de bone. 



That young man plays the vearnet 

man. 
That is nothing to me. 
What can we do to it ? 
My brother has turned goldsmith, 
Why do you get shaved ? 
I will have my hair cut. 
I have had a house built fm me, 
We have hurt our heads. 

It is beginning to grow late. 
Is it dear living in Paris ? 
It u very muddy. 



182 LE8S0N LXV. 



Exercise 127. 

Absoviiment, absoiuttly ; Etudiant, m. student ; Peintre, m. painter ; 

Artisan, m. mechanic; Fou, folle, fool, simple- Personne, m. nobody; 

Bijoutier, m. jeweller; ton ; Tanneur, m. tanner, 

Bon marche. cheap; Impertinent, e, imper- Vigneron, m. vine-dre* 
Chagrine, e, vexed; tinent; ser. 

Denrees, f. p. provisions ; Ouvrier, m. workman ; Vitrier, m, glazier 

1. Pourquoi cet ouvrier fait-il le malade ? 2. II fait le malade 
|>areequ'il n'a pas envie de travailler. 3. Cet etudiant ne fait-i 
pas le savant ? 4. II ne fait pas le savant, il fait le fou. 5. Sied-L 
a ce jeune homme de faire le maitre ici ? 6. II ne sied a personne 
de faire Fimpertinent. 7. Cela fait-il quelque chose? [R. 2.] 8. 
Cela ne fait absolument rien. 9. Cela peut-il faire quelque chose a 
ces vignerons? 10. Cela ne leur fait rien du tout. 11. N'etes-vous 
pas bien chagrines de cela? 12. Nous en sommes bien faches, mais 
nous ne pouvons qu'y faire. 13. Votre associe ne s'est-il pas fait 
bijoutier? 14. Non, Monsieur, il s'est fait peintre. 15. Cet artisan 
ne s'est-il pas fait vitrier ? 16. II s'est fait tanneur, et son frere s'est 
fait soldat. 17. La modiste ne s'est-elle pas fait couper les cheveux ? 
18. Elle se les est fait couper. 19. Ne vous levez-vous pas aussitot 
qu'ii fait jour? 20. Oui, Monsieur, je me leve de tres bonne heure. . 
21. Ne fait-il pas clair de lune? 22. II fait tres clair, mais il ne 
fait pas clair de lune. 23. Fait-il bon vivre en Amerique ? 24. B 
fait tres bon vivre en Amerique, les denrees y sont a bon marche. 

Exercise 128. 
1. Does not that gentleman play the learned man? 2. He plays 
the lord and fool at the same time (a la fois). 3. Does not that boy 
pretend to be sick ? 4. He pretends to be sick, he does net wish to 
study his lessons. 5. When you have no wish to work do you pre- 
tend to be sick ? 6. I never pretend to be sick. 7. Is it muddy to- 
day? 8. It is not muddy, it is dusty. 9. Will it be moonlight this 
evening? 10. It will not be moonlight, it will be very dark. 11. Is 
it comfortable here ? 12. It is very comfortable. 13. Is »t too warm 
or too cold? 14. It is neither too warm nor too cold here. 15. 
Will you have your hair cut? 16. I had my haircut yesterday morn- 
ing. 17. Will you not go home, it is beginning to grow late? 18. 
Is it not very dark out ? (dehors.) 19. It is not dark, it is moon- 
light. 20. Has not the glazier turned goldsmith? 21. He has not 
turned goldsmith, he has turned soldier. 22. Does that concern 
$our brother? 23. That does not concern him. 24. Are you not 
sorry for that ? 25. I am sorry for it, but I cannot help it. 26. Why 



LESSON LXV I. 183 

do you get shaved ? 27. Because I cannot shave myself. 28. Have 
you not hurt those children ? 29. I have not hurt them. 30. Have 
you hurt your arm? 31. No, Sir, but I have hurt my head. 32. 
Has not your sister hurt her hand ? 33. She has hurt her hand, and 
my mother has hurt her elbow. 34. Have you not hurt your head 1 
85 I have not hurt my head, but I have hurt my hand. 



LESSON LXVI. LEQON LXVI. 

1 Avoir mal, means to have a 'pain or ache, a sore. When used 
in relation to one of the limbs, it means generally, to have a sore, a 
bruise, a cut, &e. The name of the part of the body is preceded by 
the preposition a and the article [See L. 63, R. 5. { 77, (9.)] : — 

N'avez-vous pas mal au doigt 1 Have you not a forefinger? 

Je n'ai pas mal a la tete. My head does not ache. 

2. Avoir une douleur, or des douleurs, corresponds to the English 
to have a fain or pains : — 

J'ai une doubur au bras. / have a pain in my arm. 

3. The construction mentioned in R. 1, is used after avoir, taken in 

the sense of tenir, to hold, and after avoir froid, and avoir chaud [L. 

63, R. 5.] :— 

Vous avez les amies a la main. You have your arms in your hand; , 

J'ai chaud aux mains etaux pieds. My hands and feet are warm. 

4. The article le, &c, is used before words indicating moral and 
physical properties, in cases where the English use a or an, or omit 
the article. When, however, an adjective precedes the noun, un* une^ 
or de, des, are at times used : — 

Cette dame a l'esprit juste. That lady has a correct mind. 

Votre sceur a les yeux noirs. Your sister has black eyes. 

5. A moral or physical property, which, in the individual is single, 

is not put in the plural in French, though the reference be to a num 

ber of individuals : — 

Ces dames ont l'esprit juste. Those ladit >ave correct minds, 

Ces ga^o-ns se sont fait mal a la tete. Those boys it .e hurt theit head*. 

Resume of Examples. 



N'avez-vous pas mal au pied 1 
Cette demoiselle a le mal de tete. 
N'avez-vous pas mal aux dents T 
Mon frere a le mal de dents. 
Mon cousin a mal au cote. 



Have you not a sore fiot? 
That young lady has tie headtuht. 
Do not your teeth ache ? 
My brother has the toothache. 
My cousin has a pain in his side. 



184 



LESSON LXVI. 



II a des douleurs de poitrine. 
Qu'avez-vous a la main 1 

Je n'ai rien a la main. 

J'ai cliaud aux mains et froid aux 

pieds. 
Vos soeurs ont le gout delicat. 
Ces messieurs ont le nez aquilin. 



He has pains in his chest. 

What have you in your hand ? 

What is the matter with yov/i 
hand ? 

I have nothing in my hand. 

Nothing is thz matter with jnf 
hand. 
My hands are warm and my fezi 

cold. 
Your sisters have a delicate taste. 
Those gentlemen have Rodman nose,. 



Bleu, e, blue; 
Bouche, f. mouth; 
Dent, f. tooth ; 
Doigt, m. finger ; 
Gorge, f. throat ; 
Memoire, f. memory ; 



Exercise 129. 
Mai de gorge, m. sore Pied, m.foot; 



throoit ; 
Mai d'oreille, 

ache ; 
Niece, f. niece; 
Noir, e. black; 



Presque, almost; 
m. ear- Teint, m. complexion; 
Visage, m. face; 
Yeux, from ceil, eyes. 



1. Ce jeune homme a-t-il mal a la gorge? 2. Oui, Monsieur, h 
y a deux jours qu'il a le mal de gorge. 3. Avez-vous souvent mal 
a la tete ? 4. J'ai le mal de tete presque tous les jours. 5. N'avez- 
vous pas mal au bras ? 6. J'ai mal au bras et a la main. 7. Votre 
so3ur a-t-elle le mal d'oreille? 8. Oui, Madame, elle a le mal d'oreille 
et le mal de dents. 9. N'avez-vous pas froid a la tete? 10. Non 3 
Morfsieur, mais j'ai froid aux doigts. 11. N'avez-vous point froid 
au visage? 12. Non, Monsieur, je n'y ai point froid. 13. Ce mon- 
sieur a-t-il le nez aquilin? 14. II a le nez aquilin et la bouche 
grande. 15. Cette demoiselle a-t-elle de belles dents? 16. Elle a 
de belles dents et de beaux yeux. 17. Ce petit garcon a-t-il lea 
pieds petits ? 18. II a les pieds petits et les mains grandes. 19. Vo- 
tre niece n'a-t-elle pas les yeux bleus ? 20. Non, Monsieur, elle a 
les yeux noirs. 21. Vos ecoliers se sont-ils fait mal au visage ? 22. 
lis se sont fait mal a la poitrine, 23. Vos filles ont-elles une bonne 
memoire ? 24. Elles ont la memoire excellente. 25. Ces Italiennea 
n'ont pas le teint frais. 

Exercise 130. 

1. What is the matter with your hand? 2. I have had a sore hand 
the^e ten days. 3. Has your brother sore fingers ? 4. He has soro 
fingers and a sore hand. 5. What has your brother in his hand ? 
6. He has a pen in his hand. 7. Has your little boy a sore throat ? 
8. He has a sore throat. 9. Has not your eldest sister the tooth- 
ache? 10. She has not the toothache, but she has a sore fmger. 
11. Why does not the soldier walk ? 12. He cannot walk, he has a 



ESSON LXVII. 186 

sor« /oot. 13. Have you not sore feet? 14. My feet are not sore. 
15. If your fingers were sore would you write? 16. If I had sore 
fingers I should not write. 17. If your brother had the headache 
would he study his lesson? 18. He could not study his lesson if 
he had the headache. 19. Has not that gentleman pains in his chest? 
20. He has pains in his chest and in his side. 21. Has your little 
girl black eyes or blue eyes ? 22. She has black eyes and a fresh 
complexion. 23. Has not your daughter the tooth-ache ? 24. She 
has the tooth-ache and the ear-ache. 25. Are not your hands and 
feet cold? 26. My hands are cold, but my feet are warm. 27. Have 
not those ladies aquiline noses ? 28. They have aquiline noses and 
a fair complexion Qe teintbeau). 29. Has your sister large hands? 
30. No, Sir, my sister has small hands. 31. Have not those little 
girls hurt their heads ? 32. They have not hurt their heads, they 
have hurt their faces. 33. That little boy has black hair (clieveux). 



LESSON LXVH. LEgON LXVII. 

1. Avoir beau — Vous avez beau, corresponds in signification to the 
English expression, it is in vain for you to. It must be followed by 
the infinitive : — 

Vous avez beau dire, il ne viendra It is in vain for you to speak, he will 
pas. not come. 

2. Epouser, marier, to marry, have, in French, a different mean- 
ing. Marier, conjugated actively, can only have as its nominative 
the person performing the ceremony, or giving one or both of the 
parties in marriage ; epouser takes, as its nominative, the contracting 
parties only, and must always be followed by a direct regimen. Se 
marier, to get married, and marier, conjugated passively, take the 
same nominative as epouser. 

M. L. a marie sa fille avec M. G. Mr. L. has married his daughter t* 

Mr. G. 

M. G. a epouse la fille de M. L. Mr. G. has married Mr. L.'s daugh- 

ter. 

M. G. et M lle - L. sont maries. Mr. G. and Miss L. are married. 

Mon frere va se marier. My brother is going to be married. 

3. Un de mes amis, is equivalent to the English, a friend of 
mine ; — 

Votre ami a epouse une de mes Your friend has married 4 friend of 
amies. mine. 



186 LESSON LXVII. 



Resume of Examples. 



Ds out l>cai dire et beau faire, ils 
ne l'empe jheront pas de se ma- 
rier. 

Vous avez beau lui faire des re- 
mont ranees. 

L'eveque de B. a marie ma sceur. 

Le capitaine G. a epouse ma cou- 

sine. 
Quand il se mariera, il nous invitera 

a la noce. 
Votre cousine est mariee avec mon 

cousin. 
Votre cousine a epouse un de mes 

cousins. 
Le colonel a epouse une de mes 

soeurs. 



Whatever they may say or do, thcif 

will not prevent his marrying. 

It is in vain for you to remonstrate 

with him. 
The bishop of B. has married m/§ 

sister. 
Captain G. has married my coutix. 

When he marries, he will invite us 

to the wedding. 
Your cousin is married to my cousin. 

Your cousin has married a cousin of 

mine. 
The colonel has married a sister cf 

mine. 



Exercise 131. 

Aine, e, elder, eldest; Devoir, 3. ir. to owe, fc? Parent, e, relation; 

Archeveque, m. arch- ^ be about ; Princesse, f. princess ; 

bishop; Epoux, pi. couple; man Prochain, e, neoct; 
Cadet, te, younger ; and wife ; Savoir, 3. ir. to know; 

Demoiselle, f. young Infanterie, f. infantry; Regiment, m. regiments; 

lady ; Eveque, m. bishop ; Yieillard, old man. 

1. Votre niece ne va-t-elle pas se marier? 2. Elle se mariera 
Pannee prochaine. 3. Qui epousera-t-elle ? 4. Elle epousera le fils 
aine du general M. 5. Savez-vous qui a marie ces deux epoux ? 
6. L'archeveque de Paris les a maries. 7. NVt-il pas aussi marie 
Mile. L. ? 8. II Pa mariee avec M. G. 9. Qui votre demoiselle a-t- 
elle epouse? 10. Elle a epouse M. L. capitaine au 25^me regiment 
d'infanterie. 11. Ce vieillard n'a-t-il pas tort de se marier ? 12. II 
n'a pas tort de se marier, mais il a tort d'epouser cette demoiselle. 
13. Quand ces princesses vont-elles se marier? 14, Elles se ma- 
rieront le mois prochain. 15. Qui les mariera? 16. L'eveque 
d' Arras les mariera. 17. Qui doivent-elles epouser? 18. L'ainee 
doit epouser M. W. et la cadette M. G. 19. Le capitaine G. n'a-l-il 
pas epouse une de vos parentes? 20. Oui, Monsieur, il a epouse 
une de mes cousines? 21. Qui est cette demoiselle? 22. C'est 
une de mes soeurs. 23. N'avez-vous pas un de mes livres ? 24. J'ai 
un de vos livres et une de vos plumes. 25. Je viens de parler a une 
de vos soeurs. 

Exercise 132. 

1. Is your brother going to marry Miss L.? 2. Yes, Sir, it is in 
vain for us t ) speak to him, he will marry her. 3. Will not your 



LESSON LXVIII. 187 

father man}' your sister to Mr. G. ? 4. No, Sir, he will marry her 
to Mr. L. 5. Is Captain H married ? 6. No, Sir, he is not yet mar- 
ried, but he will be married next year. 7. Whom does he intend to 
marry ? 8. He intends to marry a cousin of mine, who is at my 
brother's. 9 Who will marry them ? 10. My eldest brother intends 
to marry them. 11. Is your youngest sister married? 12. No, Sir, 
she is not married. 13. Is she going to be married? 14. She will 
marry when she is [L. 61. 5.] old enough (assez agee). 15. Whom 
did Colonel I. marry? 16. He married a sister of mine. 17. How 
long have they been married [L. 57. 2.] ? 18. They have been mar- 
ried two years. 19. Is not that young lady wrong to get married? 
20. She is wrong to marry, she is too young. 21. Who married 
General S. and Miss N. ? 22. The bishop of Arras married them. 
23. Did not the archbishop of York marry that couple? 24. The 
archbishop of Paris married them. 25. Will not your aunt marry ? 
26. She will not marry. 27. Is not your sister at home ? 28. No, 
Sir, she is with (chez) an aunt of mine. 29. Is your brother at your 
house? 30. No, Sir, ho is with one of my relations. 31. Is he 
married ? 32. He is not married. 33. Is Captain H. married ? 34 
He was married last week. 35. He married Miss H. 



I «SON LXVIH. LEgON L^VIH. 

DIMENSION, WEIGHT, ETC. 

1. Th. rerb avoir is used in expressing the size of an object. The 
prepositi a de precedes the noun of dimension. When there is no 
verb in 1 e sentence, the preposition must be placed before the num 
ber, and again before the noun of dimension : — 

Cette muraille a dix pieds de That walk is ten feet high. 

hauteur. 
Ce puits a cent pieds de profondeur. That well is one hundred feet deep 
Une table de quatre pieds de Ion- A table four feet long. 

gueur. 

2. In sentences, where sizes are compared, and the verb £tro is 
used, the preposition de is placed before the number expressing the 
excess : — 

Vous etes plus grand que moi de You are taller than I by two inches. 
deux pouces. 

3. When the price of an article is mentioned, the article le Is used 
before the noun expressing the measure, weight, &c. When the 



188 



LK8S0N LXVIII. 



remuneration, or rent, &c. for a definite space of time is mentioned 
the preposition par {per) is used: — 

Le beuiT3 se vend un franc la livre. Butter is sold a franc a pound. 
II gagne six francs par jour. He earns six francs per day. 

4. The same preposition is used, when we speak of the number cf 
times any occurrence takes place in a given space of time : — 

Je vais a la poste deux fois par I go to tlie post-office twice a day. 
jour. 

Resume of Examples. 

La canelle se vend deux francs la 

livre. 
Cette soie vaut six francs le metre. 
Ce clocher a cinq cents pieds de 

hauteur. 
Cet etang a huit pieds de profon- 

deur. 
Une chambre de quinze pieds de 

longueur, sur dix-huit d? largeur, 

et huit de hauteur. 
De quelle taille est votre frere % 
Sa taille est de cinq pieds huit 

pouces. 
Notre ami est-il grand ou petit ? 
II est de taille moyenne. 
Votre maison est plus haute que la 

mienne, de cinq pieds. 
Je vais a l'ecole deux fois par jour. 
II nous paie huit francs par semaine. 



Cinnamon is sold two francs a pound. 

TJiat silk is worth six francs a metre* 
TJiat steeple is five hundred feet high, 

That pond is eight feet deep. 

A room fifteen feet long by eighteen 
feet broad and eight feet high. 

How tall is your brother ? 
• His height is five feet eight inches. 

Is our friend tall or short? 

His height is middling. 

Your house is' higher than mine b§ 

five feet. 
I go to school twice a day. 
He pays us eight francs a week. 



Exercise 133. 



Profondeur, f. depth; 
Pouce, m. inch ; 
Semaine, f. week; 
Taille f. lieight, size; 
Verge, f. perch, yard, rod. 



Bon marche, cheap ; Grandeur, f. size ; 
Cassonade, f. brown su- Hauteur, f. height; 
^ gar ; Largeur. f. breadth ; 

Ecossais, e, Scotch; Longueur, f. length; 

Epaisseur, f. thickness; Loyer, m. rent ; 
Etoffe, f. stuff; 

1. Votre maison est-elle grande? 2. Elle a cinquante pieds de 
long et vingt-cinq de large. 3. Combien de longueur votre jardin 
a-t-il? 4. U a vingt-cinq verges de longueur et douze de largeur. 
6. De quelle grandeur est ce livre ? 6. II a dix-huit pouces de longueur, 
treize de largeur et trois d'epaisseur. 7. Votre maison est-elle plus 
longue que celle-ci? 8. Elle est plus longue de deux pieds. 
9. Quelle profondeur a ce puits? 10. De quelle hauteur est ce 
clocher? 11. II a trois cent cinquante-trois pieds de hauteur. 12. De 
quelle taille est cet officier'? 13. II est de haute taille. 14. De 
combien cet Ecossais est-il plus grand que son frere? 15. II est plus 
grand de toute la tete. 16. N'etes-vous pas de beaucoup plus gran^ 
que moi ? 17. Te suis plus grand que vous de trois pouoea. 



LESSON LXIX. 189 

18. Combien cette etofTe se vend-elle la verge? 19. Elle se vend 
trois francs la metre. 20. La cassonade ne se vend-elle paseher? 
21. Elle se vend a bon marche. 22. Combien de lettres ecrivez-vous 
par semaine ? 23. Je n'en ecris que six par semaine. 24. Ccmbien 
payez-vous par semaine pour votre loyer ? 25. Je ne paie que dix 
francs par semaine. 

Exercise 134. 

1 , How large is your father's garden ? 2. It is twenty -five rods 
hug and ten broad. 3. Is your cousin's house large ? 4. It is fifty- 
eix feet long and forty broad. 5. Is your house larger than mine? 
6. It is larger than yours by ten feet. 7. Do you know how deep 
that well is ? 8. It is twenty-five feet deep and six feet broad. 
9. How is that cloth sold a metre? 10. It is sold forty-five francs a 
metre. 11. How much do you receive a week for your work ? 12. I 
receive fifty francs a week for my work. 13. How much does your 
friend pay a month for his board (pension, f.) ? 14. He pays seventy 
francs a month. 15. Are you taller than your cousin? 16. I am 
taller than he by the whole head. 17. Is not your nephew taller than 
your son ? 18. He is taller than my son, by three inches. 19. How 
large is this room? 20. It is sixty feet long by forty. 21. What 
size is your brother ? 22. He is tall, he is taller than I. 23. How 
many books do you read a week? 24. I read ten volumes a week. 
25. How is butter sold a pound ? 26. Butter is sold two francs a 
pound. 27. Do you know how much your son earns a day ? 
28. He earns as much as yours, he earns ten francs a day. 29. How 
much is that silk worth a metre ? 30. It is worth six francs a metre. 
31. Our friend's stature is middling. 32. Do you go to church twice 
a day ? 33. I go to church once a day. 34. Does your son go to 
the post-office every day ? 35. He goes thither six times a day. 



LESSON LXIX. LEgON LXIX. 

L Mettre (4. ir.) fcrms, in French, many idiomatic expressions. 
Mettre a meme de, to enable ; mettie pied a tene, to alight, to land ; 
mettre le pied, to set one^s foot ; mettre a la porte, to turn out of 
doors ; mettre au fait de, to acquaint with ; mettre a l'abri, to shelter , 
mettre a l'ombie, to put in the shade; mettre un habit a Fendroit, 3 
'envers, to put on a coat right side out, wrong side oui> &c. : — 



190 



LESSON LUX. 



Nous l'avons mis a m6me de con- We enabled him to know the truth, 

naitre la verit6. 
E a mis cet insolent a la porte. He turned that insolent person out 

of doors. 

2. Mettre conjugated reflectively, i. e. se mettre, means to place 
one's self to dress one's self; se mettre a table, to sit down to table , 
se mettre en colere, to become angry, to put one's self into a passion . 

II se met a l'ombre, au soleil. He places himself in the shade, in t)u 

sun. 

3. Se mettre, followed by an infinitive, means to commence, to be- 
gin:— 

lis se mirent a pleurer. They commenced weeping. 

A l'anglaise, a la francaise, are used elliptically for a la mode 
franchise, a la mode anglaise, after the French, after the English 
fashion. 



Resume of Examples, 
Ce cavalier a mis pied a terre. 
Vous n'osez mettre le pied chez lui. 



Mettez ces enfants a l'abri de la 
pluie. 

Vous avez mis votre manteau a 
l'envers. 

Ce monsieur se met toujours a l'an- 
glaise. 

Hier nous nous mimes a table a dix 
heures. 

Pourquoi vous mettez-vous a l'om- 
bre 1 

Ces enfants se mirent a rire. 

Pourquoi ne vous mettez-vous pas 
a l'ouvrage % 

Je vais me mettre en pension. 

Nous allons nous mettre en voyage. 



That horseman is come down fnwi 

his horse. 
You dare not set your foot inside Ais 

house. 
Shelter those children from the rain. 



You have put your cloak inside out. 

That gentleman always dresses after 

the English fashion. 
Yesterday we sat down to table at ten 

o'clock. 
Why do you go into the shade ? 

Those children commenced laughing* 
Why do you not set yourself to work ? 

I will commence boarding. 
We are going to commence our jowr> 
ney. 



Exercise 135. 

A l'italienne, after the Defend-re, 4. to forbid ; Etudi-er, 1. to study ; 

Italian fashion ; Effets, m. p. things; Mise, f. mettre, dresstd% 

A merveille, exceedingly Entr-er, 1. to come in; Pluie, f. rain; 

well; Etourdi, e, giddy per- Rire, 4. ir. to laugh; 

Couvert, See L, 32 ; 1. ; f*m; Tablier, apron. 

1. Avez-vous defendu a cet homme de mettre le pied chez vous I 
2. Je le lui ai defendu. 3. Avez-vous mis ces effets a l'abri de la 
pluie? 4. Je les ai mis a Pabri de la pluie et du vent. 5. Avez-vous 
rais ^otre frere au fait de cette affaire ? 6. Je ne Ten ai pas mi* au 



LESSON LXIX 1*U 

fiiit 7. Ne I'avez-vous pas mis a meme d'etuaier? 8. Je l'ai mia 
a meme de s'instruire, s'il desire le faire. 9. Vuulez-vous mettre 
cela de cote? 10. Je vais le mettre au soleil. 11. Votre ami n'a-t-il 
pas voulu entrer? 12. II n'a point voulu mettre pied a terre. 13. 
Votre teinturier n'a-t-il pas mis son tablier a l'envers? 14. Noi\ 
Monsieur, il l'a mis a 1'endroit. 15. N'avez-vous pas mis cet etourdi 
t la porte? 16. Nous lui avons ferme la porte au nez (in nis face). 
11. A quelle heure vous mettez-vous a table? 18. Aussitot que le 
touvert sera mis [L. 61, (5.)]. 19. Cet homme se met-il bien? 20. 
II se met toujours a l'anglaise ou a l'italienne. 21. Ces enfants ne 
se mirent-ils pas a pleurer ? 22. Au lieu de se mettre a pleurer, ils 
se mirent a rire. 23. Pourquoi ne vous mettez-vous pas a ecrire ? 
24. II est temps de se mettre a table. 25. Ces Siciliennes sont-elles 
bien mises ? 26. Elles sont mises a merveille. 

Exercise 136. 

1. Did the gentleman alight this morning? 2. No, Sir, he would 
not alight, he had no time. 3. Have you put that insolent person 
out of doors? 4. No, Sir, but I forbade him to set his foot in my 
house. 5. Did you shelter those little children from the rain ? 6. I 
sheltered them from the rain and the wind. 7. Have you enabled 
your son to study medicine (la medecine)1 8. I enabled him to 
study medicine, if he wishes to do so. 9. Have you put on your 
coat inside out? 10. I have not put it on inside out, but right side 
out. 11. Did you put yourself in a passion? 12. No, Sir, I did 
not become angry. 13. Did you sit down to table at four o'clock 
yesterday? 14. We sat down to table at six o'clock. 15. Do you 
intend to commence boarding? 16. I intend to board with Mr. L. 
(chez M. L.) 17. When do you commence your journey? 18. We 
commence our journey to-morrow morning. 19. Did your son com- 
mence laughing? 20. No, Sir, he commenced weeping. 21. Why 
do you not commence working? 22. Because I am going to com- 
mence reading. 23. Does that lady dress after the English fashion ? 
24. She dresses after the Italian fashion. 25. Are those ladies weL 
dressed ? 26. They are extremely well dressed. 27. Will you not 
place yourself in the shade ? 28. I will place myself in the sun, I 
am very cold. 29. Is your coat inside out ? 30. No, Sir, it is right 
side on*. 31. Is this the right side of this cloth (Vendroit) ? 32. It 
is the wrong side (Venvers). 33. Are you not dressed after the Eng- 
lish fashion? 34. I am dressed after the Italian fashion. 35. You 
are well dressed. 



192 



LESSON LXX. 



LESSON LXX. 



LEQON LXX. 



THE IMPERATIVE. 



1. Conjugation of the Imperative of the Regular Verbs : — 



Chant -e 

sing 

Qu'il piirl -e 

let him speak 

Donn -oris 

let us give- 

Cherch -ez 

*?ek 

Qu'ils port -ent 

let them carry 



fin -is 

finish 

cher -isse 

let him cherish 

fourn -issons 

let us furnish 

pun -issez 

punish 

sais -issent 

let them seize 



re$ -ois 

receive 

aperf -oive 

let him perceive 

perc -evons 

let us gather 

cone -evez 

conceive 

d -oivent 

let them owe 



rend -3 

render 

vend ~e 

let him sell 
tend -OB5 
let us tend 

entend -ez 

hear 

perd -ent 

let them lose 



2. The second person singular, and the first and second persons 
piural of the imperative, are the same as the first person singular, 
and the first and second persons plural, of the present of the indica- 
tive. The pronouns are dropped. 

Je parle, park; je finis, finis. I speak, speak ; I finish, finish. 

3. Exceptions — Avoir, to have, makes in those persons of the im- 
perative, aie, ayons, ayez ; etre, to be, sois, soyons, soyez ; savoir, to 
know, sache, sachons, sachez ; and aller, va, and vas before y not fol- 
lowed by an infinitive. 

4. Vouloir has only the second person plural, veuillez, have the 
goodness to. . . . 

5. A third person singular and plural is given in the imperative by 
most of the French grammarians. These parts, however, belong 
properly to the subjunctive, as they express rather a strong wish than 
a command. The English expressions, let him speak, that he may 
speak, are rendered in French by qu'il parle. 

6. A droite, a gauche, corrrespond in signification to the English 
tc the right, to the left. 

Allez a droite, a gauche. Go to the right, to the left. 

7. For the place of the pronouns in connection with the impera- 
tive, see L. 27. R. 1, 4 ; L. 28, R. 1, 2, 3, 4. 

Resume of Examples. 

Let us take the first street to the right 

Seek no longer to deceive him. 

Let us know how to content ourselves 



Prenons ia premiere rue a droite. 
Ne cherchez plus a le tromper. 
Sachons nous contenter du neces- 

saire. 
Faites bien attention a ce que voua 

dites. 
Dites toujours la verite. 
Allons! Messieurs, depechez-vous. 
Tenez, Monsieur vuila votre argent. 
Veuillez acceptei ce present. 



with necessaries. 
Pay great attention to what you sa$ 

Always tell the truth. 
Come ! gentlemen, make haste. 
Here, Sir, here is your money. 
Be so kind as to accept this present, 



LESSON LXX, 193 



Exercise 137. 

Clef, f. key ; Promett-re, 4. ir. &? ;k<?- Renvoy- er, 1 to seni 

Crayon, m. pencil; mise; back; 

lnstitutrice, f. teacher; Rapport-er, 1. to bring Sans faute, without fail ; 

Obe-ir 2. to obey ; back ; Se serv-ir, 2. ref. to use ,• 

Partie, f. part; Remett-re ; 4. ir. to de- Tiers, m. third; 

Precepteiii', m. inslruc- liver; Verrez, 3. ir. // om voir, 

tor ; to see. 

1. En^oyez chercher le medecin, votre petit garcon est ma.la.de. 
2, Nous l'avons deja envoye chercher. 3. Vous n'avez pas besom 
de votrr? crayon, pretez-le-moi [L, 27. R. 4 ; L. 28. R. 4]. 4. Je ne 
saurais rous le preter, je m'en sers. 5. Donnez-le-moi ou me le 
pretez |{ 100, (6.)]. 6. Je l'ai promis a votre institutrice. 7. Si 
vous neleluiavez pas dit, dites-le-lui aussitot que possible. 8. Ne le 
lui dites pas encore. 9. Parlez-lui-en [} 39, 17.] la prochaine fois 
que vous le verrez. 10. Ayez patience, mon ami, votre pere ne tar- 
dera pas a. venir. 11. Obeissez a votre precepteur. 12. Je lui 
obeis toujours. 12. Donnez-lui-en une bonne partie. 13. Je lui en ai 
deja donne plus des deux tiers. 14. Avez vous porte cette clef au 
serrurier? 15. J'ai oublie de la lui remettre. 16. Portez-la-lui sans 
faute cette apres-midi. 17. Veuillez me dire ou demeure M. G 
18. Prenez la premiere rue a gauche, il demeure dans la deuxieme 
maison a droite. 19. Allons, Mesdemoiselies, depechons-nous. 20. 
^ienez»les-y leplus tot possible. 21. Ne me les rapportez pas. 22. 
Renvoyez-les-moi demain. 23. Portons-les-y. 24. Ne les y portons 
pas. 25. Pretez-les-lui, mais ne les lui donnez pas. 

Exercise 138. 

1. Give a book to the young man. 2. I have already given him 
one, and he does not read it. 3. Lend it to him, if you will not givu 
it to him. 4. I will not lend it to him. 5. Make haste, young la- 
dies, it is ten o'clock. 6. Have the goodness to give me a pen. 7. 
[ have given one to your brother. 8. Obey your father, and speak 
lo your sister. 9. Will you not send for the letter? 10. I will send 
£a* it. 11. Send for it as soon as you can. 12. Do not do so (le), 
but write to my cousin. 13. Come, children (mes enfants), learn 
your lesson. 14. Give him some [5 39, 17], or lend him some [§ 100, 
(6.)]. 15. Do not make haste, we have (le) time. 16. Have pa- 
tience, my child, the merchant will soon come. 17. Send it to him, 
if you cannot gwe it to him. 18. Write to him this afternoon with- 
out fail. 19. I would write to him if I had time. 20. Let us take 
the first street to the left. 21. Take the second street to the right 

9 



194 LTCSSON LXXI, 

22. Pay attention to what your brother says. 23. Let us tell the 
truth. 24. Let us read that book to-day. 25. Pay your debts as 
soon as possible. 26. Let us obey our instructor. 27. Carry the 
key to him. 28. Bring me back the books which I have lent you. 
29. Do not bring them back to me, read them. 30. Let us have 
patience, we shall soon have money. 31. Let us speak to them, they 
are at my father's. 32. Tell them that I intend to write to them to- 
morrow morning. 33. Go to church this afternoon. 34. Bring me 
back my letters. 35. Do not carry them there, but bring them to 
&fl as soon as possible. 



LESSON LXXI. LEQON LXXI. 

1. A verb following another verb in the imperative, is put in tne 

Infinitive, (according to general Rule L. 21. 2.) The conjunction 

which often comes between the two verbs in English, is not used in 

French : — 

Allez parler au musicien. Go and speak to the musician. 

Allez faire votre ouvrage. Go and do your work. 

Courez voir ces messieurs. Run and see those gentlemen. 

2. Prendre garde, to take care, to take heed ; when followed by aiv» 
other verb in the infinitive, means to take care not to : — 

Prenez garde de tomber. Take care not to fall. 

3. Prendre Je deuil, means to go into mourning ; prendre la peine, to 
take the trouble ; prendre les devants, to go on before ; prendre uii 
parti, to take a determination, prendre du cafe, du the, &c, to take 
coffee, tea, &c. 

Resume of Examples. 



Envoyez chercher le tapissier. 
Allez chercher votre parapluie. 
Courez voir votre pere. 
Prenons garde de nous blesser. 
Prenez garde de declarer vos habits. 
N'avez-vous pas pris le deuil 1 
Prenez la peine de vous asseoir. 
Prenez du the ou du cafe. 
Qia^l parti avez-vous pris 1 



Send for the upholsterer. 

Go and fetch your umbrella. 

Run and see your father. 

Let us take care not to hurt ourselves 

Take care not to tear your clothe:. 

Have you net put on mourning 1 

Take the treadle to sit down. 

Take tea or coffee. 

What resolution have you taken, ? 



Exercise 139. 

Attend-re, 4. to expect, Gat-er, 1. to spoil; Robe, f. dress; 

to wait for ; Gouvemeur, m. govern- Soin, m. care ; 

Ohocolat, 'm. chocolate; or; Tomb-er, 1, to fall; 

Courrier, m. courier ; Lorsque, when ; Tacher, i. to stain, f# 

Croi-re. 4. ir. to believe; Port-er, 1. to wear; spot; 

Dechir-er, 1, to tear ; Quelquefois, sometimes • Se tai-TB 4. ir. U be silent 



LESSON LXXI. 195 

1. Allez voir mon frere, il a quelque chose a vous conimuniquer. 
2. Courez leur dire que je les attends. 3. Mon frere a bien pris 
garde de dechirer ses habits. 4. Votre cousine a-t-elle pris garde 
de tacher sa robe ? 5. Elle a pris garde de tomber, car en tombant 
elle l'aurait gatee. 6. Ces petites filles ont-elles pris le deuil ? 7. 
Elles viennent de le prendre. 8. Pour qui prenez-vous le deuil ? 9. 
Je porte le deuil de ma mere. 10. Prenez-vous du the ou du cafe 
le matin? 11. Nous prenons du the et du cafe. 12. Ne pren#z~ 
*ous pas quelquefois du chocolat? 13. Nous n'en prenons que lore- 
que nous sommes malades. 14. Quel parti le gouverneur a-t-il pris ? 
15. II a pris le parti de se taire. 16. Prendrez-vous mon parti (my 
part) ou celui de votre fils? 17. Je prendrai le votre, si je crois que 
vous avez raison. 18. Pourquoi ne prenez-vous pas la peine de lire 
sa lettre ? 19. Parce qu'elle n'en vautpas la peine. 20. Votre cour- 
rier a-t-il pris les devants? 21. II n'a pu prendre les devants. 22. 
N'avez-vous pas tort de prendre son parti ? 23. Je n'ai pas tort de le 
prendre. 24. Avez-vous pris le the* (your tea) ? 25. Nous n'avons 
pas pris (our) le the, nous avons pris le cafe. 

Exercise 140. 

1. Has your brother taken care not to spoil his hat? 2. He has 
taken care not to spoil it, he has only one. 3. Go and speak to your 
sister, she calls you (appelle). 4. Will you not take a cup (tasse) 
of tea ? 5. I have just taken my tea. 6. What have you said to 
your little girl ? 7. I have told her to take care not to tear her dress. 
8. Let us take care not to tear that book. 9. My son has just brought 
it. 10. Has he taken his tea? 11. He has not yet taken tea, it is 
too early. 12. At what hour do you take tea* at your house ? 13. 
We take tea at six o'clock. 14. Do you take tea* or coffee for break- 
fast (a votre dejeuner)? 15. We take coffee. 16. Is your courier 
gone on before? 17. He has not been able to go on before. 18. 
What resolution have you taken? 19. I have taken the resolution 
x> study my lesson. 20. Have you taken care not to tear your 
books ? 21. I have taken care not to stain them. 22. What has 
your V/other determined ? 23. He has determined to remain silent. 
24 Have you taken my part? 25. I have taken my brother's part. 
26 Are you right to take his part ? 27. I am right to take his part, 
because he is right. 28. Are you not afraid to take his part ? 29. I 
am not afraid to take his part. 30. Will you take your sisters part 

* Le the, the meal called, tea ; du the, the beverage called tea. 



196 



LESSON LXXII. 



or mine? 31. 1 will take my sister's part. 32. Go and read yon? 
book, you do not know your lesson. 33. I know my lesson, and 
J know also that you are my friend. 34. Let us go to our father, he 
wants us. 



LESSON LXXII. 



LEQON LXXIL 



THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 



L All the French verbs, regular and irregular, end in this tense 
with e, es, e, ions, iez, ent : — 

2. Conjugation of the Present of the Subjunctive of thh 
Regular Verbs : — - 



Que je chant -e 

That I may sing 

Que tu pari -es 

That thou mayest speak 

Qu'il donu -e 

That he may give 

Que nous cherch -ions 

That we may seek 

Que vous port -iez 

That you may carry 

Qu'ils aim -ent 

That they may love 



fin -isse 

may finish 

cher -isses 

mayest cherish 

fourn -isse 

may furnish 

pun -issions 

may punish 

sais -issiez 

may seize 

un -issent 

may unite 



re$ -oive 

may receive 

aper9 -oives 

mayest perceive 

per9 -oive 

may perceive 

cone -evions 

may conceive 

d -eviez 

may owe 

de$ -oivent 

may deceive 



-e 



rend 

may render 

vend -es 

mayest sell 



tend 

may tend 

entend 

may hear 
perd 
may lose 

moid 
may bite 



-e 
-ions 
-iez 
-ent 



3. In the first conjugation, the subjunctive is in the singular, simi- 
lar to the present of the indicative. Exception : aller — je vais, que 
faille. 

4. The first and second persons plural of the subjunctive, in the 
four conjugations, are the same as the corresponding persons of the 
imperfect of the indicative. The third person plural is like the cor- 
responding person in the indicative present. Exceptions : avoir ; 
subjunctive, nous ayons, vous ayez, Us aient ; savoir: nous sachions^ 
vous sachiez, Us sachent ; etre, nous soyons, vous soyez, Us soient ; faire, 
icnts fassions, vous fassiez, Us f assent , aller, Us aillent ; vouloir Us 
veuillent ; valoir, Us vaillent. 

5. The subjunctive may also be formed from the participle present, 
by c. .n*xing ant into e, es, e, ions, iez, ent : as, chantant, je chante; 
finissant, je jinisse ; ouvrant, fouvre; sachant, je sache; crai- 
gnant, je craigne. 

6. The verbs presenting exceptions to this last rule are the fol< 
lowing, which the student will find conjugated in the Stcond Part 
of this grammar, \ 62 : — 



LESSON LXXII. 



19V 



Acqu^rir 


C once voir 


Mourir 


Prendre, 


Aller 


Deeevoir 


Mouvoir 


(and 


Apercevoir 


Devoir 


Perce voir 


its com- 


Avoir 


Etre 


Pouvoir 


pounds) 


Boire 


Faire 


Pourvoir 


Recevoir 



Savoir Venir 
Tenir (and (and 
its com- its com- 
pounds) pounds) 
Valoir Vouloir 

7. The past of the subjunctive is formed from the subjunctive 
present of one of the auxiliaries, avoir, etre, and the past participle of 
a verb [§ 45.] : — 

Que j'aie parle, que je sois venu. That I may have spoken, that J may 

have come. 

8. A verb is put in the subjunctive, when it is preceded by the 
conjunction que, and another verb expressing consent, command, 
doubt, desire, surprise, want, duty, necessity, regret, fear, apprehen- 
sion, &c. \\ 127, (2.)] : — 

Je veux que vous lui parliez. I wish you to speak to him. 

Je desire que vous arriviez a temps. / wish you to arrive in time. 

9. When the first verb expresses fear or apprehension, the verb 
preceded by que, must also be preceded by ne, which, however, has 
no negative sense [} 127, (3.) { 138, (4.) (5.) (8.)] :— 

Je crains qu'il ne tombe. J am afraid lest he fall. 

10. After craindre, to fear ; apprehender, to apprehend ; avoir peur, 
to be afraid; trembler, to tremble, pas is used in connection with the 
ne, when we wish for the accomplishment of the action or occur- 
rence expressed by the second verb [{ 138, (7.)] : — 

Je tremble qu'il n'arrive pas a / tremble that he may not arrive m 
temps. time. 



Resume of Examples. 



Le medeoin veut-il que je boive de 

1'eau 1 
Je consens que vous alliez le voir. 
Nous doutons que vous arriviez a 

temps. 
Je crains que votre maitre ne vous 

punisse. 
J 3 crains que votre maitre ne vous 

punisse pas. 
Je nvetonne qu'il ne sache pas cela. 

J'exige que vous lui donniez cela. 
Vouiez-vous qu'il aille a la chasse'? 
Que voulez-vous que je dise ] 



J aime mieux 
payiez. 



que vous me 



Does the physician wish me to drink 

water ? 
I consent that you go to see him. 
We doubt your arriving in time. 

I fear lest your master may punish 

you. 
I fear that your master may not 

punish you. 
I am astonished that he does not 

know that. 
I require you to give him that,. 
Do you wish him to go hunting. 
What do you wish me to (thtrt 1 

should) say ? 
I wmdd rather have you U pay 



198 LESSON LXXII. 



Exercise 141. 

Artisan, m. tiichanic; Empech-er,l. to prevent; Moulin-a-scie, ww-iniU 

Atelier, m. workshop ; Fortement, very much ; Qbe-ir, 2. to obey ; 

Au dessas, above; Force, f. strength; Rempl-ir, 2. to fulfil; 

Bracelet, m. bracelet; Magasin, m. warehouse; Rue, f. street; 

Deja, already ; Malsain, e, unhealthy ; Tomb-er, 1. to fall. 

1. Que voulez-vous que nous fassions? 2. Je desire que vous 
fassiez attention a vos etudes. 3. Ne craignez-vous pas que la pluie 
He vous empeche de sortir ? 4. Nous craignons fortement que la 
pluie ne nous empeche de remplir nos engagements ? 5. Doutez-vous 
qu'il soit chez lui maintenant? 6. Je doute qu'il y soit, il est deja 
dix heures. 7. Exigez-vous qu'il parte de bonne heure? 8. Je 
m'etonne qu'il ne soit pas deja parti. 9. Aimez-vous mieux que 
je vous rende ces bracelets ? 10. J'aime mieux que vous me les payiez. 
11. Votre voisin craint-il qu<e son enfant ne sorte? 12. II craint qu'il 
ne tombr dans la rue. 13. Ne desirez-vous pas que vos eleves vous 
obeissent? 14. Je souhaite qu'ils m'obeissent et qu'ils obeissent a 
leurs professeurs. 15. Ne craignez-vous pas que cet artisan ne 
tombe malade ? 16. Je crams qu'il ne tombe malade, car son atelier 
est tres malsain. 17. Ne regrettez-vous pas qu'il soit oblige de tra- 
vailler? 18. Je regrette qu'il soit oblige de travailler au dessus de ses 
forces. 19. Ne desirez-vous pas qu'on lui apprenne cette nouvelle? 
20. Je desire qu'on la lui apprenne le plus tot possible. 21. Votre 
pere ne veut-il pas que vous achetiez un magasin ? 22. II veut que 
j'achete un moulin-a-scie. 23. Desirez-vous que je vous quitte? 24. 
Je desire que vous restiez avec moi. 25. Je veux que vous partiez 
ce matin. 

Exercise 142. 

1. Do you wish me to speak to the mechanic ? 2. I wish you to 
tell him to (de) come here to-morrow morning. 3. What do you 
wish me to do ? 4. I wish you to bring me a book. 5. Do you nofe 
wish me to read your letter ? 6. I wish you to read it and (que) 
give it to my sisters. 7. Does not your sister fear lest the rain may 
prevent her going out? 8. She fears that the rain may prevent ou 
going out. 9. Do you doubt that your father be at home now? 
10. I doubt his being there. 11. Do you require me to do my work 
now? 12. I wish you to do your work before going out (avant de 
sortir). 13. Do you not regret your being obliged to work? 14. I 
do not regret my being obliged to work. 15. Are you not astonished 
that he knows that? 16. I am astonished that he knows all 



LESSON LXXIII 199 

17. Do you require me to pay him to-day? 18. I wish you to pay 
him to-morrow. 19. What would you have me do (See No. 1, of 
the ab)ve exercise) ? 20. I will have you pay him immediately. 
91. Do you fear lest the master punish your son ? 22. I fear that he 
may not punish him. 23. What would you have me say? 24. I 
would have you say the truth. 25. Does not your father wish you 
to buy a house ? 26. He wishes me to buy a storehouse. 27. Do 
ycu wish us to leave you ? 28. I wish you to go away to-morrow 
29. Do you wish me to stay with you? 30. I wish you to stay 
here. 31. Do you wish me to tell him that news? 32. I wish yoia 
to tell it to him. 33. Do you wish your children to obey their 
teacher ? 34. I wish them to obey him. 



LESSON LXXLTL LEgON LXXHI. 

USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE CONTINUED. 

1. A verb preceded by the conjunction que and one of the um- 

personal verbs, il faut, it is necessary ; il importe, it matters, it is 

important ; il convient, it is proper, becoming ; il vaut mieux, it is 

better ; il plait, it pleases, suits ; il se peut, il peut se faire, it may be, 

il est juste, it is just ; il est bon, it is proper ; il est necessaire, it is 

necessary ; il est important, it is important ; il est temps, it is time ; 

il est indispensable, it is indispensable ; il est a propos, it is proper ; 

il est facheux, it is sad, it is a pity ; il est urgent, it is urgent, or by 

another verb or expression implying necessity, will, or propriety, 

must be put in the subjunctive [§ 127, (4.)] : — - 

II faut que vous restiez ici. You must remain here. 

II est juste que vous soyez recom- It is just you be rewarded. 
pense. 

2. The unipersonal verb, il est, governs the indicative present or the 

future, when it is used affirmatively, and followed by que, coming 

after one of the adjectives, sur, sure; certain, certain; vrai, true; 

demontre, proved ; incontestable, incontestable ; evident, evident, an 

others having a positive and affirmative sense: — 

II est certain qu'il vient ou qu'il It is certain that he comes or will come 
viendra. 

3. When however the verb, il est, used in the above connection ia 

negative or interrogative, it is followed by the subjunctive : — 

II n'est nullement certain qu'il It is by no means lertain that ke vnU 
vienne. cairn, 



200 



LESS ON LXXIII 



4. After certain conjunctions, afin que, in order flat; quoiqua 
although, <%c. [see full list, $ 143, (2.)] the subjunctive is always used 

Quoique vous fassiez, quoique vous Whatever you may do, whatever yo% 
disiez. may say. 

5. Otner important rules on the government of conjunctions will 
be founa in said \ 143. 

Resume of Examples. 



Que faut-il que votre soeur fasse % 

Faut-il que je lui ecrive'? 

II est necessaire que vous lui 

ecriviez. 
II est temps que vous lui donniez 

son argent. 
N'est-il pas facheux qu'il soit arrive 

si tard 1 
II est certain qu'il est arrive. 
II n'est point certain qu'il se soit 

blesse. 
Restez ici jusqu'a-ce-qu'il arrive. 
Pourvu que vous finissiez a temps. 



What must your sister do ? 

Must I write to him ? 

It is necessary for you to write to htm. 

It is time that you should give him his 

money. 
Is it not a pity that he arrived so late * 

It is certain that he is arrived. 
It is not certain that he has hurt him- 
self 
Remain here until he comes. 
Provided that you finish in time. 



Exercise 143. 

Affaire, f. affair ; Se lev-er, 1. ref. to rise; Point, m. point, degree ; 

Ainsi, thus ; Linge, m. linen ; Pourvu que, provided 

Creancier, m. creditor ; Manqu-er, 1. to want ; that; 
Se eouch-er, 1. ref. &? Necessaire, m. necessa- Regl-er, 1. to regulate; 

retire ; ries ; Satisfai-re, 4. ir. to satis- 

Emprunt-er, 1. to bo?'- Ordre, m. order; fy; 

row; Oubli-er, 1. to forget; Tel, le, such. 
Fouru-ir, 2. tofwnish; 

1. Que faut-il que je dise ? 2. II faut que vous disiez ce que vou? 
avez entendu. 3. Ne faut-il pas que je finisse cette histoire ? 4. H 
n'est pas necessaire que vous la finissiez. 5. N'est-il pas a propos 
que je satisfasse mes creanciers ? 6. II est a propos que vous le fassiez, 

7. N'est-il pas juste que je vous paie ce que je vous ai emprunte ? 

8. II est juste que vous me le payiez. 9. Se peut-il que votre frere 
ait oublie sa famille? 10. II ne peut pas se faire qu'il l'ait ouhliee. 

11. Est-il certain que votre frere se soit oublie a un tel point? 

12. II est certain qu'il s'est oublie. 13. II est bien facheux qu'il se 
soit oublie ainsi. 14. Resterez-vous jusqu'a ce que j'aie mis ordre a 
mes affaires. 15. Je resterai jusqu'a ce que vous les ayez reglees 
16. Ne faudra-t-il pas que je fournisse des provisions a cettf 
famille ? 17. II faudra que vous lui en fournissiez pourvu que vous ep 
ayez. 18. Ne vaudra-t-il pas mieux que vous lui pretiez de l'argent, que 
de le laisser manquer du necessaire? 19. II vaudra mieux que nousr 



LESSON LXXIV. 201 

[m en pretions. 20. Que faut-il que nous fassions? 21. II faut qu* 
vous portiez ee linge chez moi. 22. N'est-il pas temps que je me 
couche ? 23. II est temps que vous vous couchiez. 24. Faut-il que 
je me leve ? 25. II faut que vous vous leviez. 

Exercise 144. 

1. What must our friend do? 2. He must remain at our house 
tmU I come. 3. What must our neighbor do ? 4. He must put his 
affairs in order. 5. Is it not right that you should pay your credi- 
tors ? 6. It is right that I should pay them. 7. Is it time for your 
little boy to go to school ? 8. It is tame for him to go to school, it is 
ten o'clock. 9. Must I write to yo«*r correspondent to-day or to- 
morrow? 10. You must write to him to-morrow morning. 11. Is 
it not a pity that your brother has torr- His cap (casquette) ? 12. It is 
a pity that he has torn it. 13. Is it n^essary for your mother to 
finish her letter? 14. It is not necessary *hat she finish it. 15. Is it 
certain that your son has forgotten his mon^y ? 16. It is certain that 
he has forgotten it. 17. It is by no mean? certain that he has for- 
gotten it. 18. Must you furnish money ta v hat mechanic? 19. I 
must furnish him some, he has none. 20. Whatever you may do 
you will not succeed (reussir). 21. Whatever > T our brother may 
say, nobody will believe him (croire, ir.). 22. M*m* I write to you? 
23. You must write to me. 24. Do you wish me t be sick ? 25. I 
do not wish you to be sick. 26. Do you require J**e to tell you 
that ? 27. It is necessary that you tell me all. 28 Do you wish 
me to go to your house ? 29. I wish you to go ther* 30. Must I 
get up? 31. You must rise immediately (a Vinstan**- 32. Must 
your brother retire ? 33. He must go to bed immediateJv. 34. It 
is time for him to go to bed, it is twelve o'clock. 



LESSON LXXIV. LEgON LXXI> 

USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. CONTINUED. 

1. The verbs croire, to believe; dire, to say; esperer, to hope ; gag* 

and parier, to bet; penser, to think ; sentir, to feel; voir, to see; ami 

others expressing affirmation or something certain and positive, are 

(when they are conjugated affirmatively, and have que after them) 

followed by the indicative present or future ["$ 127, (2.) Note] : — 

Je pense. je crois, je dis qu'il J think, I believe, J say that he wiU 
viendra. come. 

9* 



202 



LESSON LXXIV. 



2. The above verbs, when used in the same connection and conja 
gated negatively or interrogatively, are followed by the subjunctive 
[{ 127, (2.)] :- 

Je ne crois pas qu'il vienne. J do not believe he will come. 

3. A verb, preceded by another verb and by a relative pronoun, i§ 
put in the subjunctive, while there is an idea of uncertainty, and in 
the indicative, when the idea is certain [} 127, (2.) Note] : — 

J'ai un homme qui me rendra ser- / have a man who will oblige me. 

vice. 

J'ai besoin d'un homme qui me I want a man who will {may) oblige 

rende service. me. 

4. A verb, preceded by a superlative relative, or by the words, le 

seul, le premier, le dernier, is put in the subjunctive [} 127.] : — 

Voila le seul chapeau que j'aie. 
Voila le meilleur homme que je 
connaisse. 



That is the only hat I have. 
There is the best man I know. 



Resume of Examples. 



Je crois que le concert a eu lieu. 
Je ne pense pas que notre ami 

vienne, 
J'espcre que vous apprendrez cela 

par cceur. 
Je ne pense pas qu'il puisse appren- 

dre tout cela par cceur. 
Je crois que ce marchand s'enrichit 

aux depens d'autrui. 
Je ne crois pas qu'il s'enrichisse a 

vos depens. 
Je ne crois pas que vous reussissiez 

a gagner votre vie. 
J'ai une carafe qui contient un litre. 
Je cherche une carafe qui contienne 

un litre. 
Je vous prete le meilleur chapeau 

que j'aie, a condition que vous me 

le rendiez demain. 



/ believe that the concert took place. 

I do not think that our friend will 
come. 

I hope that you will learn that by 
heart. 

I do not think that he can learn all 
that by heart. 

I believe that thisw,er chant grows rich 
at the expense of others. 

I do not believe that he enriches him- 
self at your expense. 

I do not believe that you will succeed 
in earning your living. 

I have a decanter which holds a litre. 

I seek a decanter which holds a litre. 

1 lend you the best hat I have, on con- 
dition that you will return it to mt 
to-morrow. 



Exercise 145. 

S'asse-oir, 3. ir. ref. to Fort, strong; Rentr-er, 1. to Ltme m 

sit down ; Litre, m. litre, about a again ; 

Compt-er, 1. to depend; quart; Sorte, f. kind; 

Cristal, m. crystal; Negociant, m. merchant ; Sufli-re, 4. ir. to suffice; 

Bebout, standing; Parasol, m. parasol; Tanneur. m. tanner; 

Dur-er, 1. to wear, last; Portier, m. porter ; Tard-er, 1. to tarry. 

1. Pensez-vous que ce drap dure longternps? 2. Je crois. qu'iJ 
durera bien, car il est fort. 3. Croyez-vous que notre portier tarde a 
rentrer 1 ? 4. Je crcis qu'il ne tardera pas. 5. Desirez- vous que nous 



LESS ON LXXIV. 203 

restions debout? 6. Je desire au contraire, que vous vous as« 
seyiez. 7. Croyez-vous que ces etudiants puissent apprendre cinq 
pages par coeur en deux heures ? 8. Je crois que c'est impossible. 
9. Esperez-vous que notre ami arrive de bonne heure? 10. J'espere 
qu'il arnvera bientot. 11. Quelle sorte de carafe vous faut-il ? 12. Il 
m'en faur, une qui contienne un litre. 13. Pen ai une de cristal, qui 
coaitient deux litres. 14. Pensez-vous que ce negociant s'enrichisse 
avosdepens? 15. Je sais qu'il s'enrichit aux depens d'autrui. 16. 
Quel parasol pensez-vous me preter? 17. Je pense vous preter 18 
meilleur que j'aie. 18. Le tanneur reussira-t-il a gagner sa vie ? 19. 
Je ne crois pas qu'il y reussisse. 20. Pensez-vous que cefc argent 
suffise avotrepere? 21. Je crois qu'il lui sufTira. 22. Croyez-vous 
que ces messieurs comptent sur moi ? 23. Je sais qu'ils comptent sur 
vous. 24. Pensez-vous que le concert ait lieu aujourd'hui ? 25. Je 
crois qu'il n'aura pas lieu. 

Exercise 146. 
1. Do you believe that the concert has taken place? 2. I believe 
that it has taken place. 3. Do you believe that your sister's dress 
will wear well ? 4. I think that it will wear well, for the silk is very 
good. 5. Do you believe that our friend will succeed in earning a 
livelihood? 6. I believe he will succeed in it (?/), for he is very dili- 
gent. 7. Do you think that the tanner grows rich at my expense? 
8. I think that he enriches himself at the expense of others. 9. 
Does the merchant grow rich at my father's expense? 10. He 
grows rich at your expense. 11. What kind of a house must you 
have (vous faut-il) ? 12. I must have a house which has ten rooms. 
13. I have a good house which has twelve rooms. 14. What kind 
of a decanter do you seek? 15. I seek one which holds three litres. 
16. I have^ one which holds two litres, I will lend it to you. 17. 
What coat will you send me? 18. I will send you the best I have, 
take care not to stain it. 19. Do you think that the student will 
learn all that by heart? 20. I do not think that he will learn it. 21. 
Do you believe (that) he will come? 22. I believe that he will 
come soon. 23. Do you think that your father depends upon me! 
24. I kno v that he depends upon you. 25. Does not that gentle- 
man depend upon me ? 26. I think that he depends upon your bro 
ther. 27. Will the porter soon come in again? 28. I hope that he 
will not tarry long. 29. Will you rot lend me your umbrella? 30* 
I will lend it to you with pleasure. 31. Does my brother remain 
standing? 32. He does not wish to sit down. 33. Do you wish 
me to sit down ? 34 T wish you to remain standing. 35. I wish 
that he may come. 



204 LESSON LXXV 



LESSON LXXV. LECON LXXV. 

THE IMPERFECT AND PLUPERFECT OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE* 

1. The terminations of the imperfect of the subjunctive are in all 
the verbs, regular and irregular, of the four conjugations, sse, sses, U 
ssions, ssiez, ssent. 

2. The vowel preceding the t of the third person singular alwaya 
takes the circumflex accent. 

3. Conjugation of the Imperfect of the Subjunctive o* 

the Regular Verbs. 
Que je chant -asse fin -isse re9 -usse rend -isse 

That I might sing might finish might receive might render 

Que tu pari -asses cher -isses aper^ -usses vend -isses 

That thou mightest speak mightest cherish mightest perceive mightest sell 

Qu'il donn -at fourn -it pei'9 -ut tend -it 

That he might give might furnish might gather might tend 

Que nous cherch -assions pun -issions C0119 -ussions entend -issions 

That we might seek might punish might conceive might hear 

Que vous port -assiez sais -issiez d t -ussiez perd -issiez 

That you might carry might seize might owe might lose 

Qu'ils aim -assent un -issent de£ -ussent mord -issent 

That they might lave might unite might deceive might bite 

4. This tense may be formed from the past definite [L. 51.] by 
changing, for the first conjugation, the final i of the first person sin- 
gular of the past definite into sse, sses, etc., and by adding se, ses, etc. 
to the same person in the other three conjugations. This rule has 
no exceptions. 

J'allai, fallasse ; je finis, jefinisse. I went, I might go ; I finished, I might 

finish. 

5. All the observations made Lesson 52, on the changes of the 
stem of the irregular verbs, in the past definite, apply equally to the 
imperfect of the subjunctive. 

6. The pluperfect of the subjunctive is formed from the imperfect 

of the same mode of one of the auxiliaries avoir, etre, and the past 

participle of the verb. 

Qua j'eusse fini; que je fusse venu. That I might have finiif^d, that I 

might have come. 

7. All the rules given on the use of the subjurr^e in the three 
preceding lessons, apply, of course, to the imperfect and pluperfect of 
the mode. 

8. In the same manner as the present or future of the indicative 
of the first part of a proposition, governs under the abov< ^-mentioned 
rules, the verb of the second part, in the present or past of the sub- 



LESSON LXXV, 



205 



junctive; so the imperfect and other past tenses of the indicative 
and the two conditionals, govern the verb in the second part of the 
proposition, in the imperfect or pluperfect of the subjunctive. 



Ne fallait-il pas que je lui parlasse 1 

II faudrait que je lui donnasse ce li- 
vre. 



Was it not necessary that I should 

speak to him ? 
It would be necessary for me to give 

him that book. 



Resume of Examples. 



Voudriez-vous que je donnasse un 

coup de baton a cet enfant 1 
Je voudrais que vous tirassiez un 

coup de fusil sur cet oiseau. 
Exigeriez-vous que nous revins- 

sions de bonne heure ? 
Que voudriez-vous que ces hommes 

fissent 1 
Que vouliez-vous que je fisse 7 
II faudrait que j'eusse mon argent. 

Je ne voulais pas que vous mourus- 

siez de froid. 
Elle craignait que vous ne mourns- 

siez de misere et de faim. 
Voudriez-vous que je jetasse un 

coup-d'ceil sur ces papiers 1 



Would you wish me to give that child 

a blow with a stick ? 
I would wish you to fire your gun 

upon that bird. 
Would you require us to return early ? 

What vjould you wish those men to 

do? 
What did you wish me to do? 
It would be necessary for me to have 

my money. 
I did not wish you to die with the cold. 

She feared lest you might die ivitk 

want and hunger. 
Would you wish me to cast a glance 

upon these papers ? 



Exercise 147. 

Ivrogne, m. drunkard; 
Mer, f. sea; 
Lievre, m. hare; 
Perdrix, f. partridge ; 
Poste. m. post ; 



Se rend-re, 4. 
pair ; 



Ressembl-er, 1. 

semble ; 
Retablissement, 

covery ; 
Sante, f. health; 



to re* 



ref. to re- Tir-er, 1. to fire , shoot. 



Becasse, f. woodcock; 
Bord, m. shore; 
Charg-er, 1. to load; 
Coup, m. blow; 
Coup-de-fusil, m. shot; 
Coup-d'oeil, m. glance; 
Demi-use, half-worn ; 
Fouet, m. ichip; 

1. Voudriez-vous que j'achetasse un habit a demi-use? 2. Je vou- 
drais que vous en achetassiez un neuf. 3. Voulait-on que ce soldat 
malade se rendit a son poste ? 4. On voulait qu'il se rendit a son 
regiment. 5. Faudrait-il que je demeurasse aubord de la mer? 6. I] 
faudrait pour le retablissement de votre sante, que vous vous ren- 
di^siez en Suisse'? 7. Ne pensez-vous pas que cet enfant ressemble a 
sa mere ? 8. Je ne pense pas qu'il lui ressemble. 9. A qui ressemble- 
t-il ? 10. II ressemble a sa sceur ainee. 11. Consentiriez-vous que 
votre fille epousat cet ivrogne? 12. Voudriez-vous que nous mou 
russions de misere 1 ? 13. Je craignais que ces dames ne mourussent 
j_} 127, (3.) L. 72. 9.] de froid. 14. Ne voulez voub pas tirer sur ce 
lievre? 15. Je tirerais sur eette becasse si mon fusi] etait charge 



206 LESSON LXXV I. 

16. oombien de coups de fusil voudriez-vous que je tirasse? 1% Si 
vous aviez de la poudre, je voudrais que vous tirassiez sur cette per* 
drix. 18. Voukz-vous que je jette un coup d'oeil sur cette lettre 

19. Je voudrais que vous la lussiez. 20. Que vouiriez-vous que j* 
fisse? 21. Je voudrais que vous fissiez attention a vos etudes. 22. 
Faudrait-il que je sortisse ? 23. II faudrait que vous restassiez a la 
maison. 24. Que voudriez-vous que je fisse a ce chevai ? 25. Je 
voudrais que vous lui donnassiez des coups de fouet. 

Exercise 148. 

1. What would you have me do? 2. I would have you cast a 
glance upon this letter. 3. Would you wish me to give that ctog 
blows with a stick ! 4. I would wish you to give that horse blows 
with a whip. 5. W'ould you require us to return at five o'clock ? 
6. I would require you to return early. 7. Do you think that your 
brother resembles your father ? 8. I do not think he resembles my 
father. 9. Whom do you think that he resembles? 10. I think he 
resembles my mother. 11. How many shots have you fired? 12. I 
have fired five shots at that woodcock. 13. Would you not have me 
fire at that partridge? 14. I would have you fire at that partridge, if 
your gun was loaded. 15. Where would it be necessary for me to 
dwell? 16. It would be necessary for you to dwell on the sea-shore. 

17. Would you have me die with hunger? 18. I would not have you 
die of hunger. 19. Would you have your brother die with cold? 

20. I would not have him die with cold or want. 21. What would 
you have your son do ? 22. I would have him learn his lessons. 23. 
Would you have him learn German? 24. I would have him learn 
German and Spanish. 25. Have you fired at (sur) that hare ? 26. I 
have not fired at that hare. 27. Would it be necessary for me to go 
out? 28. It would be necessary for you to go out. 29. Would it be 
necessary for me to remain here ? 30. It would be necessary for you 
to go to church. 31. What did you wish? 32. I wished you to write 
to me. 33. Did you wish me to buy a coat half worn out? 34. I 
wished, you to buy a good hat. 



LESSON LXXVI. LEgON LXXVI. 

REGIMEN OR GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. (§ 129.) 

1. Many verbs come together in French without prepositions, 
which are in English joined by them. Many others are connected in 
French by prepasitions different from those connecting the corres- 



LESSON LXXVI. 



207 



ponding verbs in English. No satisfactory general rules can bt 
given on this point. We have given in the Second Part of this gram- 
mar [{ 130, 131, 132.] copious lists of the verbs in general use, with the 
prepositions which follow them, when they come before other verbs. 
We have also hitherto noted the prepositions usually placed after the 
verbs introduced in our lessons. 

2, The student will recollect, that a verb following another verb 
(not avoir or tire) or a preposition (not en) must be in the infinitive. 

3. The following verbs, extracted from the list, § 130, although 
they in English, take a preposition before another verb, do not take 
one in French : — 



Aller, 1. ir. to go 
Compter, 1. to intend 
Courir, 2. ir. to run 
Daigner, 1. to deign 
Desirer, 1. to desire 
Devoir, 3. to owe 
Envoyer, l.ir. to send 
Esperer, 1. to hope 



Falloir, 3. ir. to be ne- 
cessary 
Mener, 1. to lead, take 
Penser, 1. to think 
Pouvoir, 3. ir. to be able 
Pretendre, 4. to pretend 
Preferer, 1. to prefer 



Savoir, 3. ir. to know 
Souhaiter, 1. to wish 
Valoir niieux 3. ir. to be 

better 
Venir, 2. ir. to come 
Vouloir, 3, ir. to wish^ 

will. 



Resume of Examples. 



Comptez-vous diaer avec nous 1 

Je vais diner chez mon pere. 

Ne voulez-vous pas donner a man- 
ger a ce chien 1 

Desirez vous monter dans ma cham- 
bre? 

Je pre fere descendre chez votrepere. 

Demeure-t-il en haut on en bas 1 

Preferez-vous demeurer au rez-de- 
chaussee 1 

Je desire demeurer au premier etage. 

Nous preferons louer le second etage. 

Nous esperons louer une chambre 
au second. 



Do you intend to dine with us ? 
I am going to dine at my father's. 
Will you not feed that dog ? 

Do you wish to go up to my room ? 

I prefer to go down to your father s. 

Does he live above or below ? 

Do you prefer to live on the ground 

floor ? 
I wish to live in the first story. 
We prefer to take the second story. 
We hope to rent a room in the second 

story. 



Exercise 149. 

Cabinet, m. closet ; En haut, up stairs, above; Salle, f. parlor ; 

Compt-er, 1. to cip/ier; Faisan, m. pheasant ; Touch-er, 1. to toucfy 

Demain, to-morrow ; Jou-er, 1. to play; play; 

Dejeun-er, 1. to break- Lou-er, 1. to rent, to let ; Troisieme, third story ; 
fast j Pinc-er, 1. to play ; Violon, m. violin. 

En bas, down stairs, fo-Plaisir, m. favor, plea- 
low ; sure ; 

1. Combien de chambres comptez-vous louer? 2. Nous comp- 
tons louer une salle au rez-de-ehaussee et deux cabinets au troisieme. 
3. Ne preferez-vous pas louer une chambre-a-coucher au second? 4. 
Nous preferons demeurer au rez-de-ch-nussee. 5. Ne pouvez-voua 



208 LESSON LXXV I. 

raster & diner avec nous aujourd'hui ? 6. Je vous remercie, je pr6« 
fere venir demain. 7. M. voire pere viendra-t-il domain dejeuner 
avec nous? 8. II compte venir demain, de bonne heure. 9. Que 
voulez-vous leur dire? 10. Je veux les prier de me faire ce plaisir. 
11. Comptez-vous faire ce plaisir a mon frere? 12. J'espere le lui 
faire. 13. Prtferez-vous demeurer en haut ouenbas? 14. Nous 
preferons demeurer en bas. 15. Que pensez-vous faire de ce jeune 
faisan? 16. Nous pensons l'envoyer a M. votre beau-frere. 17. 
Ne savez-vous pas jouer du violon? 18. Je sais en jouer. 19. 
IM lie « votre cousine sait-elle toucher le piano? 20. Elle sait toucher 
le piano et pincer la harpe. 21. Ne savez-vous pas ecrire? 22. Noui 
savons lire, ecrire, et compter. 23. Savez-vous jouer de la guitare ! 
24. Nous ne savons pas en jouer. 25. Nous souhaitons trouver un 
appartement au rez de chaussee. 

Exercise 150. 

1. Does your brother-in-law intend to rent the ground floor? 2 
He intends to rent two rooms in the second story. 3. How many 
rooms does your son intend to take ? 4. He intends to take two 
rooms in the second story. 5. Does he prefer to live on the second 
floor? 6. He prefers to live on the ground floor. 7. Does your 
father wish to come to dinner with us to-morrow ? 8. He intends 
to come to-morrow at two o'clock. 9. Do you prefer to live up 
stairs or down stairs ? 10. I prefer to live above. 11. Does your 
sister know how to play on the piano? 12. She knows how to play 
on the piano. 13. Where do you intend to live (demeurer)' 1 . 14. 
We intend to live at your father's. 15. Will you go up to my 
room? 16. I will go down to your father's. 17. Do you wish to 
live on the ground floor? 18. I wish to live on the second floor 
19. Is it necessary to stay here? 20. It is not necessary to staj 
here. 21. What do you think of doing with (de) your book? 22 
I think of giving it to my son. 23. What do you wish me to say to 
that gentleman ? 24. I wish to beg him to do me a favor. 25. Do 
you wish to send that pheasant to your mother ? 26. I wish to send 
it to her, she is sick. 27. Cannot your sister play on the viclin ? 

28. She cannot play on the violin, but she can play on the guitar. 

29. Does your - ister wish to live up stairs ? 30. She prefers living 
down stairs. 31 Will you not do me that favor? 32. I will do it 
with pleasure. 3c- Cannot your brother stay and dine with us to- 
day? 34. He has , ~omised my father to come and dine willi him 
B5. Our friend knows now to read, write, and cipher. 



LESSON LXXVII. 



209 



LESSON LXXVII. 



LEgON LXXVE. 



GOVERNMENT OF VERBS CONTINUED. 

1. Many verbs, in French, are joined with other verbs following, 
»y means of the preposition de, of where the corresponding verbs 

n English either take no preposition, or one other than of. Besides 
avoir besoin, &c. [L. 21. R. 4.], the following verbs extracted from 

ist, $ 132, belong to this class: — 

believer, to finish Dispenser, to dispense Negliger, to neglect 

Brtiler, to burn, to long Empecher. to prevent Prier. to beg 

Cesser, to cease Eviter, to avoid Promettre, to promise 

Commander, to com- Se flatter, to flatter one's Proposer, to propose 

self Refuser, to refuse 

Jurer, to swear Supplier, to entreat 

Manquer, to foil Trembler, to tremble 
Menacer, to threaten 



mand 
Conseiller, to advise 
Defendre, to forbid 
Dire, to say 



Resume of Examples. 



Pourquoi n'achevez-vous pas d'ap- 

prendre ce metier 1 
Nous brulons de continuer nos etu- 
des. 
II ne cesse de nous tourmenter. 
Me defendez-vous de faire du bien 

a cet homme 1 
Ne negligez pas de lui faire une 

visite. 
Me promettez-vous de faire une 

visite a mon ami 1 
Je vous prie d'aller tout droit chez 

vous. 
Je vous conseille de venir par le 

chemin-de-fer. 
Ne manquez pas de lui faire mes 

compliments. 
L'avez-vous menace de le frapper % 
J'ai refuse de lui faire credit. 
Me prop osez- vous de lui confier cet 

argent 1 
Je vous conseille de le lui confier. 
J'evite de lui reprocher ses fautes. 



Why do you not finish learning thai 

trade ? 
We burn to continue our studies. 

He does not cease tormenting us. 
Do you forbid my doing good to that 

man? 
Do not neglect paying him a visit. 

Do you promise me to pay a visit U 

my friend? 
I beg you will go straight home. 

I advise you to come by the railroad 

Do not fail to present my compli 

ments to him. 
Have you threatened to strike him ? 
I refused to give him credit. 
Do y&u propose to me to trust him 

with this money ? 
I advise you to trust him with it. 
I avoid to reproach him with hi$ 

faults. 



Exercise 151. 

Arros-er, 1. to witer ; Gard-er, 1. to keep ; Tout droit, straight ; 

Arrosoir, m.wateri?ig-pot; Jardinier, m. gardener ; Rend-re, 4. to do, to ren~ 
Au contraire, on the Lendemain, m. next der ; 

contrary ; day ; Veille, f. eve, day before ; 

Corrig-er, 1. to correct / Oubli-er, 1. to forget; Voie, f. conveyance, waif, 
Faire part, to zommuni- Se rend-re, 4. ref. to or mode of traveling. 

cute ; repair ; 



210 LESSON LXXVII. 

1. Pnifqufi ne cessez-vous pas de lire? 2. J'aurais tort de cesser 
de lire avant de savoir ma le9on. 3. Avez-vous defendu a votre 
jaidinier d'arroser ces fleurs? 4. Au contraire, je lui avais com- 
mands de les arroser. 5. Pourquoi a-t-il neglige de te faire ? 6. 
Parcequ'il a oublie d'apporter l'arrosoir. 7. Que desire faire M. F. ? 
8. II brule de continuer l'etude de la medecine. 9. N'avez-vous paa 
tort de faire des visites a ce monsieur? 10. J'aurais tort de 'e ne- 
gliger. 11. N'avez-vous pas refuse de rendre ce service a vot T e en- 
nemi? 12. J'aurais eu tort de refuser de le lui rendre. 13. Quelle 
voie nous avez-vous conseille de prendre? 14. Je vous ai conseille 
de prendre la voie du bateau-a-vapeur. 15. Avez-vous menace de 
frapper cet enfant? 16. Je l'ai menace de le corriger. 17. Avez- 
vous refuse de vendre des marchandises a mon frere ? 18. J'ai re- 
fuse de lui en vendre a. credit. 19. Avez-vous dit a mon fils de se 
rendre a la maison? 20. Je l'ai prie d'y aller tout droit. 21. Vous 
proposez-vous de venir la veille de Noel ? 22. Nous nous proposons 
de venir le lendemain. 23. Votre compagnon se propose-t-il de 
garder le secret ? 24. II se propose de faire part de cela a tout le 
monde. 

Exercise 152. 

1. Have you forbidden my cousin to speak to the gardener ? 2. I 
have not forbidden him to speak to him. 3. Has your mother ordered 
the gardener to water her roses (roses) ? 4. She has ordered him to 
water them. 5. Has he forgotten to do it ? 6. He has neglected to 
do it, he has not forgotten it. 7. What conveyance will you take to 
go to Paris ? 8. I advise you to take the railroad. 9. Have you 
told (a) your son to take the steamboat? 10. No, Sir, I have told 
him to take the stage (diligence, f.). 11. Is not your brother wrong 
to neglect paying a visit to his brother-in-law? 12. He is wrong to 
neglect it. 13. Does not that young German long to read that letter ? 
14. He longs to continue his studies. 15. Do you propose to trust 
him with that money? 16. I propose to trust him with it. 17. Do 
you neglect to reproach him with his faults ? 18. I avoid to reproach 
him with them. 19. Have you threatened to punish your son. 20 
I have threatened to strike him. 21. Do not fail to present my com 
pliments to my sister's friends. 22. I will not fail (je rHij manqiierai 
pas). 23. Have you refused to sell him goods ? 24. I have refused 
to sell him goods on credit. 25. Which mode of travelling do you 
advise me to take ? 26. I advise you to take the railroad. 27. Do 
you forbid him to come? 28. I have forbidden his writing. 29. 
Have you failed to pay your gardener ? 30. I have not failed to pay 



LESSON LXXVIII. 



211 



\iin. 31. I have forgotten to pay you. 32. Do not neglect to write 
to me. 33. Tell him to go to my father. 34. Do not cease to work, 
35. Tell him to come Christmas Eve. 36. I lave told him to come 
4 he dav after. 



LESSON LXXVIII. 



LEgON LXXVHI. 



GOVERNMENT OF VERBS CONTINUED. 

1. Many French verbs reach their object by means of prepositions, 
while the corresponding English verbs govern their object directly, 
that is, without intervening prepositions. Other French verbs reach 
their object through prepositions different from those used in English. 
We give here a few verbs coming under those two classes, commen- 
cing with the first : — 

2. Verbs which have a preposition before a noun, in French, but 
have none in English : — 



Jouir de, to enjoy Plaire a, to please 

Manquer a, to offend, to Se' souvenir de, to re* 

fail member 

Me dire de, to slander Se servir de, to use 
Se metier de, to mistrust Ressembler a, to resem- 
Obeir a, to obey ble 

Pardonner a, to forgive Survivre a, to survive 



Abuser de, to abuse 
S'approcher de, to ap- 
proach 
Convenir a, to suit 
Deplaire a, to displease 
Desobeir a, to disobey 
Douter de, to doubt 
Echapper a, to escape 

3. Verbs reaching their object through different prepositions in the 
two languages. 

S'affligerde, to grieve fo, Louer de, to praise for Remercier de, to thank 

Feliciter de, to congrat- Profiter de, to profit by for 

ulate on or for Peuser a, to think of Hire de, to laugh at 

Gemir de, to grieve for Se passer de, to do with- Rougir de, to blush at 

S'informer de^ to inquire out Songer a, to think of 

about 

Resume of Examples. 



N'avez-vous pas abuse de notre pa- 
tience 1 

Nous en avons abuse. 

Vous avez desobei a vos parents. 

Vous pardonnerez a vos ennemis. 

Vous penserez constamment a vos 
devoirs. 

Vous y penserez constamment. 

Ne riez-vous pas de nos erreurs 1 

Nous n'en rions point. 

Ne ressemble-t-il pas a son pere 1 



Have you not abused our paiience ? 

We have abused it. 
You have disobeyed your p&ttnts. 
You will forgive your enemie*. 
You will think constantly of yow 

duties. 
You will think of them constantly. 
Do not laugh at our mistakes. 
We do not laugh at them. 
Does he not resemble Ms father? 



212 LESSON LXXVII1. 

Exercise 153. 

Arrangement, m. ar- Coeur, m. heart ; He — pins no more 

rangement ; Devoir, m. duty ; Nou\ elle, f. news ; 

Circonstance, f. zircum- Faute, f. fault ; Peintre, m. paints • 

stance ; S'informer, 1. ref. to in- Prochain. m. neighbor j 

Conduite, f. conduct; quire ; Sellier, m. saddler; 

Complaisance, f. kind- Malheur, m. misfor- Succes, m. success, 
ness ; tune ; 

1. Cet arrangement vous convient-il ? 2. II ne me convient p&s, 
mais il convient a notre parent. 3. Cela ne deplait-il pas au peintre 1 
4. Votre conduite lui deplait beaucoup. 5. Ne craignez-vous pas 
d'abuser de la patience de votre ami ? 6. Je crains d'en abuser. 7. 
Ne pensez-vous jamais a vos devoirs'? 8. J'y pense tous ies jours. 
9. Avez-vous pense a votre frere aujourd'hui? 10. J'ai pense a lui, 
e& je me suis souvenu de ses bontes. 11. A-t-il eu soin de son pere, 
et lui a-t-il obei? 12. II lui obeit constamment. 13. Ne lui a-t-il 
jamais desobei? 14. II lui a desobei plusieurs fois, mais il gemit de 
sa faute. 15. Ne les remerciez-vous pas de leur complaisance? 16. 
Je les en remercie de tout mon cceur. 17. Le sellier vous a-t-il 
felicite de votre succes? 18. II m'en a felicite. 19. N'avez-vous 
pas ri de notre malheur ? 20. Nous n'en avons pas ri, nous ne rion3 
jamais des malheurs d'autrui. 21. Ne vous souvenez-vous pas des 
nouvelles que je vous ai apprises ? 22. Je ne m'en souviens plus. 
23. Votre pere ne vous a-t-il pas defendu de medire de votre pro- 
chain ? 24. II me Pa defendu. 25. Nous nous sommes informes de 
toutes les circonstances de cette affaire. 

Exercise 154. 

1. Have you not abused your friend's kindness? 2. I have not 
abused his kindness, I have abused his patience. 3. Does not your 
conduct displease your parents ? 4. My conduct does not please 
them. 5. Why have you not obeyed your father? 6. I have obeyed 
him (lui). 7. Have you not laughed at my mistakes? 8. I have 
not laughed at your mistakes. 9. Has the young man laughed at 
the painter's mistakes? 10. He has not laughed at his mistakes. 
1 1. Has your saddler laughed at your cousin's misfortunes ? 12. Ho 
has not laughed at his misfortunes. 13. Do you ever laugh at the 
misfortunes of others? 14. We never laugh at our neighbor's mis- 
fortunes. 15. Do you remember the lesson which you learnt yes- 
terday? 16. I do not remember it (en). 17. Does that young lady 
reremble her mother? 18. She does not resemble he' mother. 



LESSON LXXIX. 213 

19. Hive you thanked ycur friend for his kindness? 20. I have 
thanked him for it. 21. Has your mother forbidden you to read 
that book? 22. She has forbidden it (me Va). 23. Why do you 
not forgive your enemies ? 24. I forgive them with all my heart, 
25. Do you not think of your duties? 26. I think of them (y) every 
day. 27. Have you congratulated your friend ? 28. I have congratu- 
lated him on his success. 29. Have you not slandered those gen 
tlrmen? 30. I never slander my neighbor. 31. Does that house 
suit you ? 32. It suits me, but it does not suit my father. 33. 
Doe 3 that house suit the painter ? 34. It suits him very well, but it 
is too small for me. 35. My father has forbidden my speaking to 
that gentleman. 



LESSON LXXIX. LEgOlST LXXIX. 

REGIMEN OF ADJECTIVES. ($ 87.) 

1. The regimen or complement of an adjective is generally a 
noun or a verb completing its signification. This regimen is usually 
connected with the adjective, by means of a preposition. 

2. That preposition is often different in French from that connecting 
the corresponding English adjective with its regimen [§ 87, (1.) (3.)]. 

3. When an adjective follows the verb etre, used unipersonally, 
* preposition de connects that adjective with its regimen [j 87, 

U est necessaire de travailler pour It is necessary to labor in order to 
vivre. live. 

4. The following adjectives, extracted from lists, \ 88, 89, 90, reach 
their regimen through prepositions, different in French and Eng 
lish :— 

Amoureux de, in love Mecontent de, displeased Propre a, fit for 

vrith with Rebelle a, rebellious tow* 

Cheri de, beloved by Reconnaissant de, grate- ards 
Content de, pleased with fid for Bon pour, kind towards 

Desole de, grieved for Kempli de, filled with Insolent avec, insolent 
Facile de, sorry for Bon a. good for towards 

Inquietde, uneasy about Cruel a, cruel towari% Poli envers, polite to 
Ivre de, intoxicated with Exact a, exact in 

Resume of Examples. 



N'6tes-vous pas content de vos pr > 

gres 7 ? 
J en suis fort content. 
\ otre domestique est-il exact a 

remplir ses devoirs % 



Are you not pleased with your pro* 

gress ? 
I am very much pleased with it. 
Is your servant exact in fulfilling 

his duties ? 



214 



LESSON LXXIX. 



Avez-vous rempli de vin cette bou- 
teille 1 

Avez-vous rempli d'argent votre 
bourse 1 

Je Ten ai remplie. 

II est tres facile de blamer les ac- 
tions d'autrui. 

II est glorieux de mourir pour sa 
patrie. 

II est plus agreable de voyager en 
ete qu'en hiver. 



Have you filled that bottle wit/i wine 'I 

Have you filled your purse wiiA 

money ? 
I have filled it with it. 
It is very easy to blame the actions 

of others. 
It is glorious to die for oneh country 

It is more agreeable to travel in sum* 

mer than in winter. 



Exercise 155. 

Abatt-re, 4. ir. to cut Bois-a-bruler, m. /re- Nettoy-er, 1. to clean; 

down; wood; Peuple, m< people ; 

Achat, m. purchase ; Chagrine, e, vexed ; Pommier, m. apple-tree ; 

Arrach-er, 1. to pull Encre, f. ink; Prunier, m. plum-Pree ; 

up ; Fendre, 4. to cleave, split; Roi, m. king ; 

Aubergiste, m. innkeep- Gloire, f. glory ; Sci-er 1. to saw ; 

er ; Liberte, f. liberty ; Tonneau. cask. 

1. Ce heros n'etait-il pas amoureux de la liberte et de la gloire ? 
2. II en etait amoureux. 3. Ce roi n'etait-il pas cheri de son 
peuple ? 4. II en etait cheri. 5. Ces negociants ne sont-ils pas 
contents de leur achat ? 6. lis n'en sont pas contents. 7. N'etes- 
vous pas chagrine de ne pouvoir nous accompagner ? 8. J'en suis 
d6sole. 9. Savez-vous de quoi Paubergiste a rempli ce tonneau? 
10. II l'a rempli de vin. 11. De quoi ferez-vous remplir cette 
bouteille, quand vous Faurez fait nettoyer % 12. Elle est deja 
remplie d'encre. 13. N'etes-vous pas bien fache d'avoir fait abattre 
vospommiers? 14. J'en suis bien content, car ils n'etaient bons a 
rien. 15. N'est-il pas necessaire de faire arracher ces pruniers ? 
16. II n'est pas necessaire de les faire arracher. 17. Est-il possible 
de fendre ce morceau de bois? 18. II est possible de le fendre. 
19. Etre-vous exact a nettoyer vos habits ? 20. J'y suis tres exact. 
21. De quoi avez-vous rempli votre bourse? 22. Je l'ai remplie 
d'argent. 23. Est-il necessaire de faire scier votre bois-a-bruler? 
24. II est necessaire de le faire scier. 25. N'etes-vous pas reconnaissant 
des services qu'on vous rend ? 26. J'en suis tres reconnaissant. 

Exercise 156. 

1. Are you not grieved with having lost your money ? 2. I am 
vexed that I have lost my purse. 3. With whai will you fill that 
bottle ? 4 I will have it filled with ink. 5. Is it not necessary to 
have our wood sawed? 6. It is necessary to have our fire-wood 
sawed. 7. Your garden is too small, is it not necessary to have some 



LESSON IXXX. 215 

plum-trees pulled out ? 8. It is necessary to have some plum-trees 
cut down. 9. Have you filled your friend's purse with silver? 10. I 
have filled it with gold. 11. Are all your bottles filled with vine? 
12. Th^y are all filled with ink. 13. Are you sorry to have filled 
your bottles with ink? 14. I am glad to have filled them with ink, 
for I want ink. 15. Are you pleased with this book? 16. I am 
pleased with it. 17. Is that land good for any thing ? 18. It is good 
for nothing. 19. Is that lady beloved by her children? 20. She is 
belaved by her friends and by her children. 21. Are you grateful 
for those services ? 22. I am grateful for them. 23. Is it not possi- 
ble to split that piece of wood? 24. It is not possible to split it. 
25. Is it agreeable to travel in winter ? 26. It is not so agreeable to 
travel in winter as in summer. 27. It is easy to blame others. 
28. Is it not glorious to die for one's country ? 29. It is glorious to 
live and to die for one's country. 30. Have you filled the inkstand 
(encrier) with it? 31. I have filled it with it. 32. Would it not be 
necessary to pull up all those trees ? 33. It would not be necessary 
to pull them all up, for my garden is very large. 34. Henry the 
fourth (guatre) was beloved by his people. 



LESSON LXXX. LEgON LXXX. 

GOVERNMENT OE PREPOSITIONS, ETC. (§ 139.) 

1. Some prepositions govern the nouns which follow them, without 
the aid of other prepositions. Avant, before (at an earlier period), 
[§ 142, (1.)] devant, before (opposite place), [§ 142, (1.)] derriere, 
behind; chez, at the house of; concernant, touching ; excepte, except; 
outre, besides ; selon, according to; voici, here is ; voila, there is, etc 
[} 139, (1.)]- 

2. Others, being rather prepositional phrases, govern their objec 
by means of the preposition de : — hors de, out of; loin de, far from, 
a fleur de, even with ; a force de, by dint of;k l'egard de, with regard 
o ; a Finsu de, without the knowledge of unknown to ; a raison de, at 
tfte rate of; au deca de, this way of; au del a de, that way of [§ 139. 
2.]. 

3. Others take a — quant a, as far ; jusqu'a, as far as, etc. [§ 139, 3.]. 

4. Two or more verbs, adjectives, or prepositions m^y in French 
nave a regimen in common, provided they govern in the same manner 
or case [j 92, (1.) (2.) § 140, and j 133.] :— 



216 



LESSON L X X X. 



Nous aimons et nous louons nos We love and praise our children, 

enfants. 

Ce jardin est utile et agreable a. That garden is useful and agreeabU 

notre pere. to our father. 

Au dedans ou au dehors du roy- Within or without the kingdom. 

aume. 

5. When, however, two or more verbs, adjectives or prepositions 
coming 1 together in the same sentence, do not govern their regimen 
n the same manner, they cannot have a regimen in common. Th 
regimen must be repeated, or replaced by a pronoun, or another tur 
must be given to the sentence. The following sentences could not, 
therefore, be translated literally into French : — 

That man is useful to and loved by his family — I write to and receive 
letters from my brothers — To be exposed to or sheltered from the rain. We 
must say: — 

Cet homme est utile a sa famille, That man is useful to his family, and 

et il en est aime. he is beloved by them. 

J'ecris des lettres a men frere, et / write letters to my brother, and re- 

A j'en re^ois de lui. ceive some from him. 

Etre expose a la pluie, ou en etre To be exposed to the rain, or to be 

a l'abri." skeltered from it. 

Utile and aime, ecrire and recevoir, expose and a l'abri, take dif- 
ferent regimens. 

Resume of Examples. 



Nous sommos arrives avant la ba- 

taille. 
Vous vous asseyez toujours devant 

moi. 
Les avez-vous places sur la table 1 
Je les ai places dessous. 
Je les ai mis sous la chaise ou des- 

sus. 
lis demeurent derriere notre mai- 

son. 
J'ai loue une chambre de derriere. 
Nous occupons le devant de la mai- 

son. 
Je les ai rencontres derriere votre 

jardin. 
Vous aves achete cette terre a. 

l'insu de votre pere. 
J'ai pave ce jardinier a raison de 

d AH * francs par jour. 



We arrived before the battle. 

You always sit before me. 

Have you placed them upon the table f 

I have placed them under. 

I huve put them under the chair or 

upon it. 
They lived behind our house. 

I have rented a bacrt room. 

We occupy the from of the house- 

I met tliem behind your garden. 

You have bought that estate withon 
the knowledge of your father. 

I paid the gardener at the rate of two 
francs per day. 



Exercise 157. 

Assiette, f. plate ; Dehors, outside, without ; Dessous, under, under 

Cout-er, 1. to cost ; Derriere, m. back ; it; 

Dedans, inside, within / Devant, m. front ; Dessus, above, upon U § 



LESSON LXXX 217 

S'enrich-ir 2. to become Hors, out; Pomme-de-fcerre, f. po- 

rich; Plat, m. dish ; tato; 

Hectolitre, m 100 litres ; Sir, upon, about. 

1. N'avez-\ous pas ferine la porte de devant? 2. Nous Pavong 
fermee, mais nous n'avons pas ferme la porte de derriere. 3. Qui 
est arrive avant moi? 4. Le monsieur qui est assis de vant la fenetre. 
5. Qui demeure derriere votre maison ? 6. II n'y a point de maison 
derriere la notre. 7. Ne pensez-vous pas qu'a force de travailler, il 
e'enriehira? 8. Je ne crois pas qu'il s'enrichisse, s'il vend ses mar 
ehandises a si bon marche. 9. Apprend-il la musique a Pinsu de ses 
parents? 10. II Papprend a leur insu. 11. Vous etes vous marie 
a l'insu de votre soeur? 12. Je me suis marie a son insu. 13- 
Notre ami n'est pas dans la maison, il est dehors. 14. II n'est pas 
hors de la ville, il est dedans. 15. Avez-vous de Pargent sur vous/ 
16. Je n'ai pas d'argent sur moi. 17. Demeurez-vous sur le der- 
riere ou sur le devant de la maison? 18. Nous demeurons sur le de- 
vant. 19. La cuisiniere a-t-elle mis les assiettes sur la table ou 
dessous ? 20. Elle a mis les assiettes, les plats, les cuilieres et les 
fourchettes sui la table. 21. Combien ces pommes-de-terre vous 
coutent-elles? 22. Je les ai achetees a raison decinq francs Pheeto- 
litre. 23. Avez vous fait reparer le dedans ou le dehors de la mai- 
son ? 24. J ? ai fait reparer Pinterieur et l'exterieur. 

Exercise 158. 

1. Have you bought that house without your father's knowledge? 
2. I have bought it without his knowledge. 3. Have you forgotten 
to shut the front door? 4. I have shut the front door and the back 
door. 5. I have brought all my books except two or three. 6. Docs 
your brother occupy the front of your house ? 7. He occupes the 
back. 8. Whom have you met behind that house ? 9. I met i obody 
behind the house. 10. Does that gentleman live behind your louse? 
11. Nobody lives behind our house. 12. There is no Jiouse behind 
yours. 13. Have you a knife about you? 14. I have no knife about 
sae. 15. Do you carry a knife about you? 16. I never caifv a 
kivife about me. 17. Has not your brother money about him ? 18. 
He has no money about him. 19. Will you put these pencils upon 
the table, or under it? 20. I will put them in the drawer (tirovr). 
21. How much have you given for that wheat? 22. I bought it at 
the rate of twenty-five francs the hectolitre. 23. Is that lady's house 
>ut of the city ? 24 It is not out of the city ; it is within. 25. Has 
not your sister placed the plates upon the table ? 26. She has put 
the plates upon the table, and the spoons under it. 27. Have you 

10 



218 LESSON LXXXi. 

had your house repaired ? 28. I have had the inside repaired, but 
not the outside. 29. How much does that silk cost you? 30. ] 
have bought it at the rate of five francs the metre. 31. Did you 
marry without your father's knowledge? 32. I married without his 
knowledge. 33. Have you sold my books without my knowledge? 
34. I sold them without your knowledge. 35. I sold them without 
my sister's knowledge. 



LESSON LXXXI. LEQON LXXXI. 

THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN, CE. (§ 108.) 

1. The pronoun ce answers to the English pronoun it, used before 

the verb to be, in such sentences as, it is I, it is thou, &c. The latter 

pronouns (7, thou, &c.) are rendered by moi, toi, lui, elle, nous, vous, 

eux, m., elles, f. The verb remains in the singular, except when the 

pronoun following it is in the third person plural ; in which case it 

may be put in the plural or in the singular [§ 116, (2.)]. If the 

pronoun is followed by qui, the verb is better in the plural, and, if 

followed by que, in the singular : — 

C'est moi, c'est lui, c'est elle. It is I, it is he, it is she. 

Ce sont elles qui parlent. It is they who speak. 

C'est elles qiie nous cherchons. It is they whom we seek. 

2. If the relative pronoun qui and another verb follow etre, this 

second verb must agree in number and person with the pronoun 

preceding the relative : — 

C'est vous qui avez fait cela. It is you who have done that. 

C'est nous qui avons dechire cette It is we who have torn that silk. 
soie. 

3. C s also renders the English pronoun it, used absolutely, but 
not uni personally before the verb to be [§ 108, (5.)] : — 

Ce fut en Allemagne qu'il trouva It was in Germany that he found \u 
son ami. * friend. 

4. Celui qui, celle qui, ceux qui, m., celles qui, f., are equivalent tr 
the English pronouns, he who, she who, they who— *celui que, celle que. 
*ux que, celles que, render he whom, <SfC. 

Celui ou celle qui chante. He or she uho sings. 

Eesume of Examples. 

Est-ce vous qui nous avez averti de | Is it you whc im tmarned usoftkuf 
cela? 



LESSON LXXXI. 



219 



C'est nous qui vous on avons averti. 
Est-ce vous, mesdames, que nous 

avons rencontrees 7 
Ce n'est pas nous, c'est eux que 

vous avez vus. 
Ce n'est pas vous, ce sont eux qui 

ont fait cela. 
C'est en Angle terre que je vous ai 

vu. 
C )iinaissez-vous ces deux Portu- 

gaisl 
Je connais celui qui parle a M. L. 



It is ive who havt warned you of it. 
Is it you, ladies, whom we have met ? 

It is not we; it is they whom you have 

seen. 
It is not you ; it is they who have dont 

that. 
It is in England that I saw you, 

Do you know those two Portuguesi 7 

I know him who speaks to Mr. 2*. 



Exercise 159. 

Connaissance, f. acquain-Be temps en temps,/ro7?i 
tance; time to time; 

Expliqu-er, 1 . to explain ; No. number ; 

Guerre, f. war ; Phrase, f. sentence; 

De-j our en-j our, from day Prelud-er, 1 . to prelude, 
to day ; 



Appei-er, 1. to call; 

A-toute-force, by all 
means ; 

Avert-ir, 1. to warn; 

Blessure, f. wound; 

Combl-er, 1. to over- 
whelm ; 

1. Est-ce vous, Madame, qui avez appele votre domestique? 2. Co 
n'est pas moi qui l'ai appele. 3. Est-ce vous mon ami qui voulez 
a toute force aller en Espagne ? 4. Ce n'est pas moi, c'est mon cousin. 
5. N'est-ce pas lui qui a averti ce matelot de son danger ? 6. Ce n'est 
pas lui, c'est moi qui Ten ai averti. 7. Est-ce nous que vous atten- 
dez de jour en jour? 8. Ce n'est pas vous, c'est eux que j'attends. 
9. Est-ce vous, Madame, qui nous avez comblees de bienfaits? 10. 
Ce n'est pas moi, Madame. 11. N'est-ce pas en Italie que vous avez 
fait connaissance avec lui? 12. Ce n'est pas en Italie; c'est en Russie. 
13. Est-ce vous, Mesdames, ou vos cousines que nous avons vues au 
bal? 14. C'est nous, ce n'est pas nos cousines que vous avez vues. 
15. Ne connaissez-vous pas ces deux messieurs? 16. Je connais celui 
qui parle a Madame L. 17. Est-ce vous qui avez recu une blessure 
a la guerre? 18. Ce n'est pas moi, c'est mon voisin. 19. N'est-ce 
pas vous qui nous avez explique cette phrase ? 20. Est-ce vous, Mon- 
s;3ur, qui demeurez au N°- 18? 21. Ce n'est pas moi qui y demeure. 
22. Entendez-vous ces musiciens ? 23. J'entends celui qui chante. 
24. Je n'entends pas bien celui qui joue. 25. Nous entendons ceux 
(ui preludent. 

Exercise 160. 

1. Is it you, my friend, who have warned me of my danger? 2. It 
is not I who have warned you of it. 3. Is it they whom you expect 
from day to day? 4. It ia not they whom we expect. 5. Is it you 
who haye done this? 6. It is not we ; it is you who have done it 



220 LESSON LXXXII. 

7. Was it in England that you bought this hat? 8. It was not in 
England; it was in Germany. 9. Was it not in Rissia that you be- 
came acquainted vrith him? 10. It was not in Russia; it was in 
Italy. 11. Was it you who were calling us? 12. It was not we; it 
was hi 13. Are you not acquainted with the two Poles who are 
reading ? 14. I know the one who is near you. 15. Is that (est-ce ul) 
the lady whom you expected? 16. It is not (she). 17. fa ifc you, 
gentlemen, who have loaded my brother with kindness? 18. It is not 
(we), Sir; we have not the pleasure of knowing him. 19. Is it you 
who have been wounded in the (au) arm? 20. It is not (1). 21. Do 
you not hear those two ladies? 22. I do not hear the one who sings. 
23. I hear the one who plays. 24. Was it you who came to our 
house this morning? 25. It wasliotl; I was in London then (alors). 
26. Was it you, Sir, who did us that favor ? 27. It was not (I) ; it 
was my sister. 28. Was it your son who wished by all means to go 
to London ? 29. It was not he ; he is now in Germany. 30. Is it you 
who wrote that letter? 31. We have written no letter. 32. Who 
lives at (au) No. 20? 33. I live there (Jest moi). 34. Is it we whom 
you have seen ? 35. It was not you whom I saw. 



LESSON LXXXII. LEgON LXXXIL 

1. The pronoun ce (and not the pronouns U, elle, &c), must be 
used for he, she, they, coming before the verb to be, when that verb is 
followed by a noun, or an adjective used substantively, preceded by 
the, a or an, by some or any understood, or by a posssessive or demon- 
strative adjective. When the word used in apposition with ce is plural, 
and in the third person, the verb is put in the plural, although ce re- 
mains unchanged [§ 108, (2.) (3.)] : — 

C'est un Polonais. He is a Pole. 

Ce sont des Anglais. They are Englishmen. 

C'est cette dame quim'aparle de vous. It is that lady who spoke to me of you. 

2. Ce is used as the nominative of the verb etre, in sentences lUe 
he following, and the conjunction que is used idiomatically after it 

The verb in this case is not put in the plural : — 

Qu'est-ce-que ces enfants 1 What are those children ? 

Qu'est-ce-que l'ltalie 1 What is Italy ? 

Qu'est-ce-que le jardinage 1 What is gardening ? 

3. Que is us ad idiomatically in a number of sentences. In Uxt 
following it gives greater force to the expression : — 

Ce sont de bom livres que les votres. Yours are indeed good books, 
Je dis que oui \ je crois que non. / say yes ; I believe not 



LESSON LXXIII. 



221 



Resume of 
Qui sont ces messieurs qui parlent 
k Iff; L. 1 

Ce sont mes cousins, qui viennent 
d'arriver. 

De quel pays sent ces marchands 1 
Ce sont des Polonais ; ils viennent 

d'ar river. 
Ils ne sont pas polonais; lis sont 

nisses. 
Ce ne sont pas des Polonais ; ce sont 

des Russes. 
Qu'est-ce que la Touraine ] 
C'est le jardin de la France. 
Votre fenetre ne donne-t-elle pas 

sur la rue 1 
Non, e'est sur la cour qu'elle donne. 
Je crois que oui ; je crois que non. 



Examples. 

y Vho are the gentlemen wJu speak to 
Mr. L. ? 

They are my cousins, who are just 
arrived. 

Of what country are those me? chants? 

They are Poles; they are just ar- 
rived. 

They are not Poles ; they are Rus- 
sians. 

They are not Poles ; they are i?u*- 
sians. 

What is Touraine ? 

It is the garden of France. 

Does not your window look on the 
street ? 

No, it looks on the yard. 

I believe w ; I believe not. 



Exercise 161. 

Bris-er, 1. to break ; fttranger, e, foreign ; Soieries, f. p. silk stuffs; 
Charron, m. wheel fright; Fenetre, f. window; Sucre, m. sugar; 
Confitures, f. p pre- Lyon, Lyons; Suisse, Swiss ; 

serves; Mouchoir, m. handker- Surprend-re, 4. ir. to 

Donn-er, 1. to r e, look ; chief; catch, surprise; 

Ecossais, e, t- •ch; Roue. f. wheel ; Vol-er, 1. to steal. 

1. Connaissez-vous ces etrangers? 2. Oui, Monsieur, ce sont les 
freres de notre voisin. 3. Ne sont-ils pas ecossais ? 4. Non, Mon- 
sieur, ils. sont suisses. 5. Ne sont-ce point des Ecossais qui vous 
ont fait present de cette casquette ? 6. Non, Monsieur, ce sont des 
Suisses. 7. N'est-ce pas votre domestique qui vous a vole du vin? 
8. Ce n'est pas lui, e'est son frere. 9. N'est-ce pas lui qui a pris vos 
confitures? 10. Ce n'est pas lui; ce sont ses enfants. 11. Ne 
sont-ce pas la les enfants que vous avez surpris a voler votre sucre ? 
12. Ce sont leurs freres. 13. Ne sont-ils pas cousins ? 14. Ils ne 
sont pas cousins; ils sont freres. 15. Qu'est-ce-que ces soieries? 
16. Ce sont des marchandises qu'on vient de nous envoyer. 17. 
N'est-ce pas une belle ville que Lyon? 18. C'est une grande et 
tile ville. 19. N'est-ce pas la le mouchoir que vous avez perdu? 
20. Je crois que oui. 21. N'est-ce pas sur le jardin que donnent vca 
fenetres ? 22. Oui, Monsieur, c'est sur le jardin qu'elles donnent 
23. N'est-ce pas notre charron qui a fait cette roue ? 24. Ce n'est 
pas lui qui l'a faite. 25. Ce sont nos amis qui l'ont brisee et c'est 
le menuisier qui Fa faite. 

Exercise 162. 
1. Is that lady your friend's sister? 2. No, Sir, she is a stranger 
3. Who are the two gentlemen who are speaking to your sister ] 4. 



ZW LESSON LXXXTII. 

They lire Swiss gentlemen. 5. Are those the gentlemen whom von 
have invited? j. It is they (eux). 7. Do you not know that man* 

8. T know him very well ; he is the man who has stolen my wine. 

9. What is Italy? 10. It is the garden of Europe. 11. Is not that 
the letter which you intended to carry to the post-office? 12. No, 
Sir, it is another. 13. Is the city of Havre fine? 14. Yes, Sir 
Havre is truly a large and beautiful city. 15. Is not that the man 
whoia you have caught stealing your fruit? 16. It is not, it is an 
other. 17. Is not this the cap that you have bought? 18. Yes, Sir, 
believe so. 19. Do not the windows of your room look on the street. 
20. No, Madam, they look on the garden. 21. Do not the windows of 
your dining-room look on the yard (cour) ? 22. No, Sir, they look 
on the lake (lac). 23. Is it that little child who has taken your pre- 
serves ? 24. It is his brother or his sister. 25. What are those en- 
gravings ? 26. They are engravings which I bought in Germany. 
27. Are those gentlemen Scotch ? 28. They are not Scotch ; they 
are Italiun. 29. Are those ladies Scotch ? 30. No ; they are the 
Italian ladies who came yesterday. 31. What is Marseille? 32. It 
is one of the finest cities in (de) France. 33. Is it not your tailor 
who made that coat ? 34. It is not he ; it is an English tailor who 
made it. 35. It is your friend who broke my watch. 



LESSON LXXXHL LEQON LXXXIH. 

1 . In French, as in other languages, when a verb has two subjects 
in the singular, it is generally put in the plural [§ 114, (2.)] : — 

L'oncle et la tante sont arrives. The uncle and aunt are arrived. 

2. When a verb has two or more subjects of different persons, it 
is put in the plural, and assumes # the termination of the first person 
rather than that of the second or third, and the termination of the 
second in preference to that of the third : — 

Vous et moi irons demain a la chasse. You and I will go hunting to-morrow. 
Vous et lui irez demain a l'ecole. You and he will go to school to-morrow 
6a mere et moi nous avons ecrit His mother and I have written tha 
cette lettre. letter. 

3. The above examples will show, that, when a verb has several 
subjects, all of them pronouns, or partly pronouns and partly nouns, 
the words moi, toi, lui, eux, are used instead of je, tu, il, ils. A pro- 
noun recapitulating the others, may, as in the last example, be placed 
immediately before the verb [{ 33, (10.) (II.)]- 



LESSON LXXXIII. 



223 



4 For furthex* rules on this subject, see 5 114 and 115, and also 
thu next lesson. 

5. Gener corresponds in signification to the Englist to .rouble, to 
incommode, to disturb, to be in the way, and to hurt (in speaking of 
shoes and garments). Se gener means to constrain, or trouble cue's 
telf:— 

Est-ce-que je vous gene 1 Am I in your way? 

.Resume of Examples. 
Ou irez-vous, votre frere et vous 7 



Lui et moi irons en Angleterre. 
Vous, elle et lui, vous acheterez du 

ble. 
Eux et moi, nous sommes fait mal 

a la tete. 
Vous et lui. vous devriez vous pre- 

ter aux circonstances (se preter). 
Lui et moi, vous generons sans 

doute. 
Ma cousine et moi, nous craignons 

de vous gener. 
Je ne me gene jamais chez nes 

amis. 
Ne vous genez pas ; mettez-vous a 

votre aise. 
Nous n'aimons pas a gener les au- 

tres. 
Nous n'aimons pas a nous gener. 



Where will you go, your brother and 

you? 
He and I will go to England. 
You, she and he will buy wheat. 

They and I have hurt our heads. 

You and he should adapt yourselvez 
to circumstances. 

He and I will without doubt incom- 
mode you. 

My cousin and I fear to be in yout 
way. 

I am never under constraint with my 
friends. 

Be under no constraint ; place your- 
self comfortably. 

We do not like to incommode others. 

We do not like to incommode our- 
selves. 



Exercise 163. 

A perte, at a loss; Nullement, % no means; Prodigue, prodigal. Urn- 

A profit, with a profit; Pardon, excuse me; ish ; 

Bras, arm; Persist-er, 1. to persist ; Societe, f. company, so* 

Derang-er, 1. to disturb ; Place, f. room ; ciety ; 

Econome, economical; Tous deux, both. 

1. Si nous restions plus longtemps ici, nous craindrions de vous 
gener. 2. Vous ne nous genez nullement ; votre societe nous est 
ires agreable. 3. N'avez-vous pas ete trop prodigues, vous et votre 
frere 1 4 Lui et moi au contraire, nous avons ete tres economes 
5. N'avez-vous pas tort de gener ce monsieur'? 6. Nous n'avon 
nullement envie de le gener. 7. Est-ce-que mon bras vous gene, 
Monsieur? 8. Non, Monsieur ; nous avons assez de place, vous ne 
me genez pas. 9. Ne devriez-vous pas vous preter aux circon- 
stances ? 10. Nous faisons, elle et moi, notre possible pour nous y 
preter. 11. Ce jeune homme persiste-t-il dans sa resolution? 12. 
Nous y persistons, lui et moi. 13. Persistez-vous tous deux a res. 



224 LESSON LXXXIV. 

ter ici? 14. Nous y persistans tous deux. 15. Cet homme est-3 
gene dans ses affaires {uncomfortably situated, badly off) ? 16. II 
etait g£ne dans ses affaires il y a un an. 17. Ne vous genez pas, 
Monsieur. 18. Je ne me gene jamais, Monsieur. 19. Est-ce-que 
mon frere vous derange ? 20. Non, Monsieur, il ne me derange pas. 

21. Je ne voudrais pas vous deranger. 22. Pardon, si je vous de- 
range. 23. Vous et votre associe avez vendu vos marcbandises a 
perte. 24. Yous et moi nous vendons toujours a profit. 25. Yotre 

ere votre frere et moi nous avons achete des marchandises. 

Exercise 164. 
1. Do we incommode you, my brother and I? 2. No, Sir; you 
do not incommode us ; we are very glad to see you. 3. Are you not 
afraid to disturb your friend ? 4. We are afraid to disturb him ; he 
has much to do. 5. Is my foot in your way, Sir ? 6. No, Sir ; your 
foot is not in my way. 7. Will you and your brother go to Ger- 
many this year ? 8. We intend to go there, he and I. 9. He, you 
and I, should write our lessons. 10. Should you not, you and your 
friends, adapt yourselves to circumstances? 11. We should do so, 
if it were possible. 12. Do I not disturb you, Sir? 13. You do 
not disturb me by any means. 14. Does not my little boy disturb 
you? 15. He does not disturb me. 16. He disturbs nobody. 17. 
Does not your partner sell his goods at a loss ? 18. He never sells at 
a loss. 19. He and I always sell at a profit. 20. Do you persist in 
your resolution? 21. Your friend and I persist in our resolution. 

22. I never feel under constraint at your house. 23. Be under no 
constraint (make yourself at home). 24. Are you not wrong to in- 
commode them? 25. I do not intend to incommode them. 26. We 
do not like to incommode ourselves (to put ourselves out of the 
way). 27. My little boy and I will, perhaps, be in your way. 28. 
No, Sir ; we are very glad of your company. 29. Do I disturb you ? 
30. No, Sir; you do not disturb us. 31. Do I disturb your father? 
32. No, Sir; you disturb no one. 33. Excuse me, Sir, if I disturb 
you. 34. Have you not been very lavish ? 35. No, Sir ; I assure 
you, that your son and I have been very economical. 



LESSON LXXXIV. LEgON LXXXIV. 

1. When a verb is preceded by several nouns not connected by it, 
it agrees with the last only, provided the nouns are in some way 
synonymous, or the mind dwells more forcibly upon the last : — 



LESSON L X X X 1 V. 



225 



Bon amour, sa tendresse pour ses His love, his tenderness fsr his uhil- 

enfants est connue de tout le dren, are known to every be dy. 
moode. 

Vos amis, vos parents, Dieu vous Your friends, your relatives God 

recompensera. will reward you. 

2. When two or more nouns are united by the conjunction ou, the 

?erb agrees with the last only : — 

Charles ou George ecrira a votre Charles or George will write to your 
ami . friend. 

3. When a noun and a pronoun, or two or more pronouns (not be- 
ng all in the third person), are joined by ou, the verb is put in the 
plural : — 

Vous ou moi partirons demain. You or I will go to-morrow. 

Votre soeur ou vous irez a l'eglise. Your sister or you will go to churc/i 

Vous ou lui avez pu seuls commettre You or he alone have p-obably com- 
cette action. mitted this act. 

4. When two nouns are joined by ni repeated, or when ni Vun ni 
C autre is used as nominative to a verb, the verb is put in the plural, if 
the two nouns, or the two persons represented by ni Pun ni V autre, 
perform or may perform the action together : — 

Ni l'un ni l'autre ne liront. Neither the one nor the other will read. 

5. When, however, only one at a time can perform the action, the 
verb is put in the singular : — 

Ni l'un ni l'autre ne sera nomme Neither the one nor the other will be ap- 
prefet de ce department. pointed prefect of that department. 

Resume of Examples. 



Ni l'un ni l'autre n'ont trouve le vin 
bon. 

L'un et l'autre ont trouve le diner 
mauvais. 

Comment se trouvent Messieurs vos 
freres 1 

Ni l'un ni l'autre ne se trouvent bien. 

L'un et l'autre se trouverent au ren- 
dezvous. 

Ni l'un ni l'autre ne sera elu presi- 
dent. 

L un ou l'autre y trouvera a redire. 

Lui ou vous avez trouve quelque 
chose a redire a notre conduite. 

Ni lui ni moi n'avons trouve a redire 
a la conduite de vos enfants. 



Neither the one nor the other found the 

wine good. 
Both found the dinner bad. 

How do your brothers find themselves ? 

Neither find themselves well. 

They both found themselves at the ?*6»- 

dez-vous. 
Neither will be elected president. 

One or the other will find fault with it. 
He or you have found something to 

blame in our conduct. 
Neither he nor I have found any fauU 

with your children's conduct. 



Auteur, m. author; 
Devoir, m. duty ; 
Ecriiure, f. writing ; 



Exercise 165. 

Eli-re, 4. ir. to elect; 
Expos-er, 1. to expose; 
Int^retj m. interest; 
10* 



Plutot, rather ; 
Rempl-ir, 2. to fulfil ; 
Rotij m. roast meat ; 



2 l 26 LESSON L XX XIV. 

Secretaire, m secretary; Se trouv-er, l.ref. to find Veiller, 1. to watch i 
Trouv-er, 1. to find, to one's self; to be pres-Yie., f. life, 
like, to fancy; enU 

1. Remplissez-vous bien votre devoir ? 2. Nous ne le remplissons 
ni Tun ni l'autre. 3. Cherchent-ils Pun et l'autre a s'exposer ? 4 Ni 
Tun ir. l'autre ne cherchent a exposer leur vie (La Bruyere). 5. M. 
>/otre pere et M me - votre mere, se trouvent-ils mieux aujourd'hui ? 6. 
Ni Tun ni l'autre ne se trouvent mieux. 7. Avez-vous trouve a re- 
due a mon ecriture ou a celle de mon secretaire? 8. Je n'ai trcure 
& redire ni a l'une ni a l'autre. 9. Cet auteur ne trouve-t-il pas a 
redire a tout? 10. II trouve a redire a tous les livres. 11. Y 
trouvez-vous quelque chose a redire ? 12. Ni lui ni moi n'y trouvons 
rien a redire. 13. Lui ou moi, nous veillerons a vos interets. 14. 
Ni lui ni moi ne cesserons de veiller a la conduite de votre fils. 15. 
Nous y veillerons plutot que d'y trouver a redire. 16. Lui et moi 
nous trouvames ensemble au rendezvous. 17. Vous y trouverez 
vous 1'un ou l'autre? 18. Nous nous y trouverons l'un ou l'autre. 
19. L'un ou l'autre sera-t-il elu president? 20. Ni l'un ni l'autre 
ne sera elu. 21. Comment trouvez-vous ce roti? 22. Je le trouve 
excellent. 23. Je trouve ce livre bon. 24. Je ne le trouve pas bon 
25. Je trouve cela bien fait. 

Exercise 166. 

1. How do you like that book? 2. Neither my sister nor I like 
it. 3. Did your brothers find the dinner good ? 4. Both found it 
very good. 5. Did the professor find fault with your conduct ? 6. 
He did not find fault with it. 7. Neither he nor my father find 
fault with my conduct. 8. Do they both watch over your conduct ? 
9. They both watch over my conduct and over my interests. 10. 
Have you both fulfilled your duty? 11. We have fulfilled it. 12. 
Have you not both criticised my writing? 13. Neither has criticised 
it. 14. Do not your two sisters find themselves better to-day ? 15. 
One finds herself better. 16. The other does not find herself so 
well. 17. Do not those ladies find fault with every thing ? 18. They 
find fault with nothing. 19. Will either be elected prefect of the 
Department? 20. Neither will be elected. 21. How do you like 
this bread? 22. I find it very good. 23. Did your two friends ar- 
rive in time at the appointed place? 24. Neither was there in (d) 
time. 25. Do you find fault with that (cela) ? 26. I do not find 
fault with it (y). 27. Will you both expose yourselves to this dan- 
ger? 28. We will not expose ourselves to it. 29. Do you find fauii 
with my secretary's conduct? 30. I do not find fault with it. 31. 



LESSON LXXXV. 227 

Do yon fini fault with his writing 1 32. I find fault with it ; for it 
is very bad. 33. Will you not watch over my interests? 34. Mv 
brother and I will watch over them. 35. We will not cease to watch 
over vour interests. 



LESSON LXXXV. LEQON LXXXV. 

1. A verb having, as its subject, a general collective noun [§ 3 (6,)| 
p-eceded by the article, agrees with the noun [§ 115, (1.)] : — 

La foule des pauvres est grande. The crowd of the poor is great, 

2. A verb preceded by a partitive collective [§ 3, (6.)] takes the 
number of the noun following the collective, unless attention be par- 
ticularly directed to the collective itself [{ 115, (2.)] : — 

Une foule de pauvres re9oivent A crowd of poor people receive assist- 
des secours. ance. 

3. The words, la plupart, most ; un nombre, a number, &c, and 
the adverbs of quantity, peu, assez, beaucoup, plus, moins, trop, tant, 
combien, belong to this class. 

4. Rester is often used unipersonally in the sense of to have left. 
The adverbial expression de reste is often used in the same manner 
as the English word left : — 

II me reste deux francs. I have two francs left — or literally 

There remains to me two francs. 
Nous avons cinquante ecus de reste. We have fifty crowns left. 

5. Devenir (2. ir.) to become, with etre as an auxiliary, corresponds 

in signification to the English to become, followed by of It is also 

Englished by to become, or simply to turn : — 

Qu'est devenu votre frere 7 What has become of your brother ? 

II est en France, et est devenu He is in France, and has turned law~ 
avocat. yer. 

Resume of Examples. 



La plupart de mes heures sont 

consacrees au travail. 
La foule des humains est vouee au 

malheur. 
La plus grande partie des voyageurs 

le disent. et le repetent. 
Ne vous reste-t-il que cela % 
Voila tout ce qu'il me reste. 
Je ne sais ce qu'ils sont devenus. 

Je ne sais ce que vous deviendrez. 



Most of my hours are devoted to labor. 

The mass of mankind is devoted it 

misfortune. 
The greatest number of travellers 

say it, and repeat it. 
Have you only that left ? 
That is all that I have left. 
I do not know what has become of 

them. 
1 do not know what triU become ofw* 



228 LESSON LXXXV. 



Exercise 167. 

S'appliqu-er, 1. ref. to Chemin, m. way, road ; HaViile, skilfid; 

apply ; Desol-er, 1. to desolate; Maigre, thin, lean; 

Appreiiti, ra. apprentice ; Egar-er, 1. to mislay ; Naissance, f. birth t 
Aveugle, blind ; Emplettes, f. p. purcfui- Rue, f. street ; 

Bagatelle, f. trifle ; ^ ses ; Savant, e, learned. 

Boiteux, se, lame ; Etat, m. trade ; 

1. La plupart de vos parents ne sont-ils pas venus vous voir? 2. 
Beaucoup sont venus. 3. Que sont devenus lesautres? 4. Je n« 
saurais vous dire ce ou'ils sont devenus. 5. Que deviendra ce jeune 
homme s'il ne s'applique pas a l'etude ? 6. Je ne sais pas ce qu'il 
deviendra. 7. Je sais qu'il ne deviendra jamais savant. 8. Combien 
de francs avez-vous de reste? 9. II ne me reste qu'un franc. 10. 
Combien vous restera-t-il quand vous aurez fait vos emplettes? 11. 
II ne me restera qu'une bagatelle. 12. Get apprenti est-il devenu 
habile dans son etat? 13. II y est devenu habile. 14. Ce monsieur 
est-il aveugle de naissance, ou Pest-il devenu? 15. II Test devenu. 
16. Savez-vous ce que sont devenus ces jeunes gens? 17. lis sont 
devenus medecins. 18. Ne savez-vous pas ce que sont devenus mes 
livres? 19. lis sont egares. 20. Ne deviendrez-vous pas boiteux si 
vous marchez tant? 21. Je deviendrai boiteux et maigre. 22. La 
foule ne s'est-elle pas egaree dans ce bois ? 23. La foule s'y est 
egaree, et n'a pu retrouver son chemin. 24. Une nuee de barbares 
desolerent le pays. (Acad.) 25. Une foule de citoyens mines, 
remplissaient les rues de Stockholm. (Voltaire.) 

Exercise 168. 

1. Have not most of your friends become rich ? 2. Most of them 
have become poor. 3. Has not that young lady become learned ? 
4. I think that she will never become learned. 5. Is not the Ameri- 
can army (armee) very small ? 6. The American army is small, but 
most of the American soldiers are very brave (braves). 7. Can you 
tell me what has become of that gentleman ? 8. I cannot tell you 
what has become of him. 9. Is your brother blind by birth (was 
your brother born blind)? 10. No, Sir, he has become so. 11. 
Were you born lame? 12. No, Sir, I became so three years ago («1 
y a). 13. Are not most of your hours devoted to play (jeu, m.) ? 
14. No, Sir, they are devoted to study. 15. How much of your 
money have you left? 16. I have only twenty-five francs left. 17. 
Do you know how much I have left? 18. You have only a trifle 
left. 19. How much shall you have left to-morrow? 20. I shall 
only have six francs left. 21. I shall only have two francs left when 



LESSON LXXXVI. 229 

Ihaie made my purchases. 22. What has become of your gram 
mar ? 23. I have mislaid it. 24. Do you know what has become 
of my hat ? 25. You have left (laisse) it upon the table. 26. Will 
not that gentleman become blind? 27. He will not become blind, 
but lame. 28. Has your son become skilful in his trade ? 29. He 
has not become skilful i*i it. 30. What has become of him ? 31. 
He has lost his way in the wood. 32. Did the crowd lose its way 1 
33. Most of the soldiers lost their way. 34. A cloud of iocusta 
saute? elles) desolated our country. 



LESSON LXXXVI. LECON LXXXVI. 

1. The articie, the demonstrative and the possessive adjectives, 
must be repeated, as before said, before every noun or adjective used 
substantively, which they determine [§ 80, 93, 21]. 

2. The prepositions a, de, and en, are repeated before every word 
which they govern [§ 141]. 

3. The verb quitter, to leave (to quit), is said of persons and 
places, and also of things in the sense of to abandon, to give up : — 

Vons avez quitte vos parents et vos You have left your relations ana 

amis. friends. 

Nous avons quitte nos etudes. We have discontinued our studies. 

4. Laisser, to leave, to let, is generally said of things. It is, how 
ever said of persons in the sense of to suffer to remain : — 

Vous avez laisse votre livre sur la You left your book upon the table. 
table. 

The examples below will illustrate the use of those two verbs. 
Resume of Examples. 

Have you not left your house ? 



N'avez vous pas quitte] votre mai- 
son? 

J'ai quitte mon pays et mes parents. 

J'ai laisse ma biblotheque en Eu- 
rope. 

Ne voulez-vous pas laisser votre fils 
icH 

Je n'aime pas a le quitter. 

J'ai laisse votre lettre a son domes- 
tique. 

Mon pere m'a laisse cinquante mille 
francs. 

Lea avez-vous laisses tranquilles 'l 



I have left my country and t iMtian 
I left my library in Europe. 

Will you not leave your son heie? 

I do not like to quit him. 

I left your letter with his servant. 

My father left me fifty thousait 

francs. 
Have you let them alone ? 



230 LESSON LXXXVI. 



Je eii. a? laisse le champ libre. 

Ce malade a quitfcj le lit. 
Votre frere a quitte lo barreau. 
Je vous laisserai ce chapeau a ce 
prix. 



/ have left them a free choice {fret 

room). 
That sick man has left his bed. 
Your brother has left the bar. 
I will let you hare that hat at thai 

price. 



Exercise 169. 

A bon compte, cheap ; Mauvais, e, bad ; Pension, f. boarding- 

Carte, f. co.rd; Moins, less; school; 

Epee, f. sword, army (fig- Noyau, m. fruit-stone; Portier, m. porter ; 

uratively). Pourquoi, why; - Prix, m. price; 

Habitude, f. habit; Pavie, m. clingstone- Robe, f. gown ; 

Jcge, Wl. judge; peach; Service, m. service, army. 

1. Vos oncles, vos cousins et vos neveux, ont-ils quitte le com- 
merce'? 2. lis ont quitte le commerce, et sont devenus medecins. 
3. Le capitaine G. n'a-t-il pas quitte le service ? 4. II a quitte la France, 
mais il n'a pas quitte le service. 5. Ou avez-vous laisse votre fils ? 
6. Je l'ai laisse dans une pension. 7. Est-il trop jeune pour quitter 
ses etudes ? 8. II est trop jeune ; il n'a que douze ans. 9. A qui avez- 
vous laisse votre carte de visite? 10. Je l'ai laissee chez le portier. 

11. Pourquoi ne le laissez-vous pas parler? 12. Parce qu'il est temps 
que nous vous quittions. 13. Me permettez-vous de lui communiquer 
cela? 14. Je vous laisse le champ libre a cet egard. 15. Ce jeune 
bomme n'a-t-il pas quitte ses mauvaises habitudes? 16. II les a 
quittees. 17. M. L. n'a-t-il pas quitte la robe pour l'epee? 18. Oui 
Monsieur; il n'est plus juge ; il est capitaine. 19. Ces peches quit, 
tent-elles facilement le noyau? 20. Non, Monsieur; cc sont des pa- 
vies. 21. Je vous laisse cet habit pour cinquante francs. 22. A 
quel prix me le laisserez-vous ? 23. Je vous le laisserai pour dix francs. 
24. Je vous le laisse a bon compte; je ne saurais vous le laisser a 
moins. 

Exercise 170. 

1. The son, daughter, and cousin, have left Paris. 2. My father, 
mother, and sister, have left me here. 3. Do you like to leave your 
country ? 4. I do not like to leave my friends and country. 5. My 
parents do not like to leave me here; I am too young. 6. Why 
does not your brother let his son speak [L. 97. 4.] ? 7. Because h 
has nothing to say. 8. Have you let him alone ? 9. I have let him 
alone. 10. Why do you not let me alone? 11. I will let them alcne, 

12. Has your friend left his bed? 13. He has not yet left his b*d 
he is yet very sick. 14. Has Captain G. left the army ? 15. He has noi 
left the army. 16. Has not that gentleman left the army for the bar? 
17. He \as not left the army. 18. My friend has left the bar. 19. At 



LESSON LXXXVII. 231 

Hhat price will you let me have this silk 1 20. I will let you have it at 
two francs a yard. 21. Can you not let me have it for less 1 ? 22. I let 
you have it cheap. 23. Will you let me have that book for twenty 
francs. 24. I will let you have it for twenty-two. 25. I could not let 
you have it for less. 26. With whom (d qui) have you left my hook 1 
27. I left it with your sister. 28. Why did you not leave it w th my 
servant? 29. Because he had left your house. 30. Do you like to 
leave your friends ? 31. I do not like to leave them. 32. Where 
have you left your book ? 33. I left it at my father's. 34. Has that 
merchant given up commerce ? 35. He has not given it up. 36. Those 
peaches do not part easily from the stone ; they are clingstone peaches 



LESSON LXXXVH. LEgON Lxxxvn. 

1. The . nominative pronouns je, tu, il, elle, nous, vous, ils, elles, 

must be repeated, when the first verb of the sentence is negative 

and the second affirmative, when the verbs are in different tenses, 

and when the different propositions are connected by conjunctions 

other than et, ou ni, mais [§ 99. 2.] : — 

II ne lit pas ; il ecrit. He does not read ; he writes. 

Elle ne viendra pas ; elle est par tie. She will not come ; she is gone. 

2. The pvonouns of the third person are often omitted before the 
second verb in cases not coming within the above rule. The other 
nominative pronouns are also, sometimes, omitted. We should, 
however, not advise the student to omit the latter pronouns. It is 
always correct to repeat the nominative pronouns. 

3. The student will bear in mind, that the objective pronouns must 
always be repeated. 

4. Connaitre a answers to the English expression, to know by : — 
Je le connais a sa demarche. I know him by his walk (carriage). 

5. Connaitre de nom, de visage, de vue, mean, to know by name, by 
sigh'., 

6. Se connaitre a. quelque chose, or en quelque chose, corresponds 
in signification to the English expression; to be a judge of something 
Vous vous connaissez en pierreries. You are a judge of pi ecious stones. 

Resume of Examples. 



Je le connais, je Taime, et je lui 
rends justice. Gresset. 

U s'ecoute, il se plait, il s'adonise, 
il s'aime. J. B. Rousseau. 



J know him, love him, and do justice 
to him. 

He listens to himself, is pleased with 
himself, adonis himstlf] loves him- 
self. 



232 



LESSON LXXXVIT. 



A quoi connaissez-vous ce mon- 
sieur 1 
Je le connais a son habit noir. 
Je le connais de vue. 
J'ai reconnu ma mere a la voix. 
A quoi vous connaissez-vous 1 
Je me connais en marchandises. 
Je ne m'y connais paffr 
II ne s'y connait point du tout. 

H s'y connait mieux que moi. 

Je m'y connais aussi bien que lui. 



By what do you know that gent* 

man ? 
I know him by his black coat. 
I know him by sight. 
I recognized my mother by iter voice. 
Of what are you a judge ? 
I am a judge of goods. 
I am not a judge of it {of them). 
He is not the least judge of ii (of 

them). 
He is a better judge of U [of tkeni) t 

than I. 
I am as good a judge of it {of them) 

as he. 



Exercise 171. 

Artisan, m. mechanic ; Etoffes, cloths of all kinds; Grain, m. gram ; 
Blond, e, light ; Fabricant, m. manufac- Orfevre, m. goldsmit/i , 

Boucle, e, curled; ■ turer ; Oeuvre, f. work; 

Chevelure, f. head o/Forgeron, m. blacksmith; Poesie, f. poetry ; 

hair ; Gestes, m. p. gestures ; Tout, quite. 

Cheveux, m. p. hair ; Gracieux, se, graceful ; 

1. Ne reconnaissez-vous point votre amie? 2. Je la reconnais a 
sa chevelure blonde. 3. A quoi reconnaissez-vous cette demoiselle ) 
4. Je la reconnais a sa demarche gracieuse. 5. N'auriez-vous point, 
connu votre ami a la voix ? 6. Je l'y aurais reconnu. 7. A l'ceuvre 
on connait Partisan (La Fontaine). 8. Ne le reeonnaitrez-vous point 
a ces marques? 9. Je l'y reconnaltrai. 10. Cet orfevre ne se con- 
nait-il point a cela? II. II ne s'y connait point du tout. 12. Vous 
y connaissez-vous aussi bien que leforgeron? 13. Je m'y connais 
tout aussi bien que lui. 14. Ne vous connaissez-vous point en 
poesie? 15. Je ne m'y connais guere. 16. Le fabricant se eonnait- 
il aussi bien en etoffes qu'en grain? 17. II se connait beaucoup 
mieux a ceLes-la qu'a celui-ci. 18. Ne connaissez-vous pas ce mon- 
sieur a. ses gestes vehements? 19. Je le connais a ses cheveux 
boucles. 20. Ne vous etes-vous pas fait connaitre (told your name) 1 
21. Je me suis fait connaitre. 22. Ne nous ferons-nous pas con- 
naitre ? 23. Vous vous ferez connaitre. 24. lis se feront connaitre 
par leurs vertus (they will make themselves known). 



Exercise 172. 

1. Do you not know that man? 2. Yes, Sir; I know him bv his 
large (grand) hat. 3. By what do you recognize me ? 4. I recog- 
nize you by your walk. 5. Do you recognize my friend by his ges- 
tures ? 6. No, Sir; I recognize him by his black coat. 7. Do you 
know him well ? 8. I know him by sight, but I have never spoken 



LJSSSON IXXXVIlt. 233 

to hira, 9. Are yoi a jidge of iron ? 10 tfo, Sir; the blacksmith 
is a judge of iron. 11, By what will you ^now your hook ? 12. 1 
shall know it by those marks. 13. Have you not known your friend 
by her voice? 14. No, Madam; I knew her by her light hair. 15. 
Have you told your name'? 16. I have not told my name. 17. Did 
you know your sister's friend by her curled hair? 18. I knew her 
by it. 19. Is the merchant a good judge of cloth ? 20. He is a bet 
ter judge than I. 21. Is he a better judge of it than the manufac 
u er ? 22. He is quite as good a judge as he. 23. Is not the gold- 
smith as good a judge of precious stones as you? 24. He is a better 
judge of them than I. 25. Of what are you a judge ? 26. I am a 
judge of nothing. 27. Are not youi sisters good judges of poetry? 
28. They are not the least judges of it. 29. Do you not know that 
young .ady by her dress (robe) ? 30. I know her by her graceful 
carriage. 31. Have they made themselves known? 32. They have 
made themselves known by their merit (merite). 33. Is not the 
workman known by his work ? 34. The workman is known by his 
work 35. He is a judge of it. 



LESSON LXXXVm. LEQON LXXXVHL 

1. Quelque, whatsoever, however^ some, any, followed by a noun 
taxes the form of the plural. It rs invariable, when it is followed 
by an adjective or an adverb [§ 97, (1.) 2. 3.] : — 

Quelques livres que vous ayez. Whatever books you may have. 
Quelque bons qu'ils soient. However good they may be. 

2. Quel que, followed by a verb, is written as two words, the first 
{quel) agreeing in gender and number with the nominative of that 
verb [{ 97, (1.) 1.] :— 

Quelles que soient vos vertus. Whatever your virtues may be. 

3. The above examples show that quelque — que and quel — qua 
govern the subjunctive. 

4. Tout meaning entirely ', quite, nothing but, though an adverb 
varies through euphony before a feminine word commencing with a 
consonant or an h aspirate : 

Jj'esperance, toute trompeuse qu'elle Hope, deceitful as it is, serves at least 

est, sert au moins a nous mener a to conduct us to the termmalum of 

la fin de la 7ie par un '.hemin life by an agreeable road. 
agreabie. (La Bruyere.) 



234 



1ESS0N LX XX VII I. 



5. The word gre signifying consent, will, meaning, <J*a forms s 
number of idicms : — 



Je lui sais [savoir, 3. fe".] bon gre de 

cette action. 
II nous sait mauvais gr>5 de cela. 



/ am thankful to him (i. e. owe htm 

good-will) for that action. 
He is displeased with us for thai. 



Resume of Examples. 



Ne le ferez-vous pas de bon gre 1 
II s'est marie contre le gre de ses 

parents. 
Sa ch^velure voltige ai gre de vent. 

Je sais mauvais gre a votre frere de 

vouloir se meler de mes affaires. 
Je lui en sais bon gre; 
J'espere que vous ne me saurez pas 

mauvais gre, si je ne vous ecris 

pas. 
C'est a mon gre le meilleur enfant 

du monde. 



Will you not do it wittingly t? 

He married against the will of hts 

parents. 
His hair flutters at the will of the 

•wind. 
I am displeased viith your brother for 

wishing to interfere with my affair? 
I am thankful to him for it. 
I hope that you will not be displeased 

with me, if I do not write to you. 

He is, to my thinking, the best child 
in the world. 



Exercise 173. 

Bon gre, mal gre, willing Men-er, 1. to take, to lead; Secret, m. secret ; 

or not willing; Nou-er, 1. to tie, to fasten; Silence, m. silence ; 

Chambre, f. room; Oblig-er, 1. to oblige ; Suite, f. consequence ; 

Gard-er, 1. to keep; Off re, f. offer ; Voler, 1. to fly. 

Lit, m. bed; Recommand-er, 1. to re- 

Malgre, in spite of; commend ; 

1. Savez-vous mauvais gre a votre oncle de ce qu'il a dit? 2. Je 
ne lui en sais aucun mauvais gre (Voltaire). 3. Ne me sauriez- 
vous pas bon gre si je vous menais avec moi ? 4. Je vous en saurais 
le meilleur gre du monde. 5. Ne leur savez-vous pas bon gre d'avoir 
garde ce secret ? 6. Je leur sais bon gre de Tavoir garde. 7. Ne 
leur avez-vous pas recommande de garder le silence ? 8. Je leur ai 
recommande de le garder. 9. Ce malade garde-t-il encore le lit] 
10. II ne garde plus le lit, mais il est encore oblige de garder la 
chambre. 11. Votre chevelure est-elle bien nouee ? 12. Non, Mon- 
sieur, elle vole au gre du vent. 13. Garderez-vous votre domestique ^ 
14. Je le garderai, il fait tout a mon gre. 15. Quelques offres qu'on 
lui fasse, il ne veut pas me quitter? 16. Quelque bonnes que soien 
ces dames, elles ne sont pas a mon gre. 17. Quelles que soient le 
suites dc cette affaire, je vous sais bon gre de vos intentions . 
18. Toute be/le qu'elle est, elle n'est pas a mon gre. 19. L'avez-vous 
fait malgre /o'us? 20. Non, Monsieur; je l'ai fait de bon gre. 
21. Bon gre mal gre, il partira. 22. Me garderez vous le secret! 
23. Je vous e garderai. 24. II change d'opinion au gre dcs evene- 
ments. 



LESSON LXXXIX, 235 

Exercise 174. 
1. Will he marry against his father's consent? 2. He will not 
marry against his parents' consent. 3. Why are you displeased with 
me ? 4. I am not displeased with you. 5. Is your little girl's hair 
tied ? 6. It is not tied ; it waves (flotte) with the wind. 7. What 
do yon think of my book ? 8. It is, in my opinion, the best book 
that I have read [L. 74. 3, 4]. 9. Will you not be displeased with 
me, if I do not come to-day ? 10. I shall not be displeased with you 
11. Will you not read that letter? 12. However well written it ma ( 
be, I will not read it. 13. Are those ladies handsome ? 14. However 
handsome and good they may be, they do not strike my fancy. 
15. Are you displeased with my brother? 16. No, Sir; I am thank- 
ful to him for his intentions, whatever may be the consequences of 
his conduct. 17. Will you keep this secret (for me)? 18. I will 
keep it willingly. 19. Does your sister keep her bed willingly? 
20. She does not keep her room willingly. 21. Willingly or not, 
she must keep her room, when she is sick. 22. Will you keep silent 
on this point ? 23. I will willingly. 24. I am thankful to you for 
your good intentions. 25. Are you thankful to him for this (de 
cela) ? 26. I am thankful to him for it. 27. Will the judge keep his 
servant? 28. He will keep him. 29. Does he do his work to his 
fancy? 30. He does it to his fancy. 31. Is your brother obliged to 
keep in the house ? 32. He is obliged to keep his bed. 33. Has he 
not left his room ? 34. He has not yet left his room ; he is too sick 
to leave it. 35. I should be under the greatest obligations in the 
world to you, if you would do this. 



LESSON LXXXIX. LEQON LXXXIX. 

1. Servir [2. ir.] is used in French in the sense of the English 
expression to help to : — 

Que vous servirai-je ? To what shall I help you ? 

Yous servirai-je de la soupe ? Shall I help you to some soup? 

Yous n'avez pas servi monsieur. You have not helped that gentleman. 

2. Je vous remercie, / thank you, said in answer to an offer, is it. 
French always a refusal' This phrase is never employed like the 
English expression, I thank you for (this or thaf) 7 to signify a request. 
The French make use of other forms: — Oserai-je vous prier de . . . 
Oserai-je vous demander . . . Je vous prie de . . . Je vous prierai 
de . . .: — 



236 



LESSON LXXXIX. 



Oserai je vous demander une aile 
de cette volaille, un morceau de 
ce roti ? 



/ vritt thank you for a w\ng of t\*& 
jowl, a slice of r.h,at roast meat. 



3. S'il vous plait, corresponds to the English, if you please. The 

verb is used unipersonally in that sentence and in the following :— 

Oomme il vous plaira. As you please. 

II ne me plait pas d'y aller. It does not suit or please me tc g<? !kert. 

Que vous plait-il 1 What would you please to have ? 

4. Au plaisir de vous revoir, au revoir, adieu, jusqu'au revoir, mean 
till I have the pleasure of seeing you again, till I see you again, &c. 

Resume of Examples. 
Qu'aurai-je le plaisir de vous servir 1 



Je vous demander ai un morceau de 

ce jambon. 
Vous offrirai-je un morceau de ce 

roti 1 
Je vous remercie, Monsieur; je 

prendrai de preference une aile 

de cette volaille. 
N'a-t-on pas encore servi 7 
Je vous souhaite le bon soir. 
J'ai souhaite le bonjour a Madame. 

Ayez la complaisance de vous as- 

seoir. 
Messieurs, ayez la complaisance 

d'entrer. 



To what shall I have the pleasure of 

helping you ? 
I ivill thank you or / will trouble you 

for a slice of that ham. 
SJiall I offer you a slice of this roast 

meat ? 
I thank you, Sir ; J would prefer a 

wing of that fowl. 

Is not the dinner yet on the table ? 
I wish you good evening. 
1 have wished the lady a good morn- 
ing. 
Have the goodness to sit down. 

Gentlemen, have the kindness to walk 
in. 



Exercise 175. 

Adieu, m. adieu; Graces, f. p. thanks; Pri-er, to beg, to desire; 

Aile, f. wing ; Jambon, m. ham; Remerciment, m. thanks; 

Attend-re, 4. to wait for ; Legume, m. vegetable ; Roti, m. roast meat ; 

Bouilli, m. boiled meat, Mett-re, (se) ir. ref. 4. to Soupe, f. soup ,- 

beef; sit down ; Suffisamment, adv. suf- 

Conge, m. leave; Ortolan, m. ortolan; ficiently ; 

Cotelette, f. cutlet; Perdrix, f. partridge; Tranche, f. slice. 

1. Monsieur, qu'aurai-je le plaisir de vous servir? 2. Je vous de- 
manderai une tranche de ce jambon. 3. Je vous prie de servir cea 
messieurs. 4. Oserai-je vous demander un morceau de ce bcuilli? 
5. Vous offrirai-je une tranche de ce roti? 6. Je vous rends gr£ ce, 
Monsieur; j'en ai suffisamment. 7. Mademoiselle, aurai-je J ? hon- 
neur de vous servir une aile de cette perdrix ? 8. Je vous rernercie, 
Monsieur ; je prendrai de preference un de ces ortolans. 9. Monsieur, 
vous enperrai-je de la soupe? 10. Madame, je vous prie de servir 
mademoiselle. 11. Je vous en demanderai apres. 12. Jean, pre- 
aentez cette cotelette a Monsieur. 13. Ces legumes sont delicieux. 



LESSON xo. 237 

14. Monsieur, je suis bien aise que vous les trouviez bons. 15. Mon- 
sieur, ne voulez-vous pas vous asseoir? 16. Mille remerciments, 
Monsieur, mon pere m'attend a la inaison. 17. Ne leur avez-vous pas 
souhaite le bonjour? 18. Je leur ai souhaite le bon soir. 19. Leur 
avez-vous dit adieu ? 20. J'aidit adieu a mon frere. 21. J'ai pris 
conge d'eux. 22. Les avez-vous pries d'entrer ? 23. Je les en ai 
pries. 24. Messieurs, on a servi. 25. Ayez la complaisance de 
vous mettre ici. 

Exercise 176. 

1. Madam, to what shall I help you? 2. I will trouble you for a 
slice of that ham. 3. Shall I send you a wing of this fowl ? 4. No, 
Sir, I thank you. 5. I thank you, Sir (sHl vous plait, Monsieur), 

6. Sir, shall I have the pleasure of helping you to a slice of this ham ? 

7. I thank you, Sir, I would prefer a slice of the partridge. 8. Shall 
I offer you a little of this boiled meat? 9. I thank you, Sir; I have 
some. 10. Madam, shall I send you a little of this soup? 11. Much 
obliged to you, Sir [see No. 16, in the above exercise]. 12. Sir, will 
you have the goodness to help this young lady? 13. With much 
pleasure, Sir. 14. John, take this soup to the gentleman. 15. These 
ortolans are delicious. 16. I am very glad that you like them. 17 
Is the dinner on the table? 18. No, Sir; it is not yet on the table. 
19. It is too early. 20. Does it please you to go there ? 21. It does 
not please me to go to his house ; but I will go, if you wish it. 22. 
Shall I go with you ? 23. As you please. 24. Will not your friend 
sit down ? 25. He is much obliged to you ; he has not time to-day. 
26. Have you wished vour friend a good morning ? 27. I wished 
him a good evening. 28. Have you not bid him farewell ? 29. 1 
have bid him farewell. 30. Have the goodness to sit down here. 
31. I have taken leave of them. 32. I have taken leave of all my 
friends. 33. Madam, have the goodness to walk in. 34. We are 
much obliged to you, Sir. 35. Our father is waiting for us at home. 



LESSON XC. LEgON XC. 

1. The verb tenir [2. ir.], to hold, often corresponds in signification 
to the English verb to keep ; tenir un hotel, to keep a hotel ; tenir table 
ouverte, tokeepopct table; tenir sa chanbre propre, &c, to keep oitfs 
room clean ; tenir la porte, les fenetres ouvertes, to keep the door, the 
windows open ; ten'r les yeux ouverts, fermes, to keep one's eyes opened* 



238 



LESSON XC. 



shut ; tenir la t6te droite, &c, to keep one's head upright ; tenir sa 
parole, to keep one's word ; tenir compagnie a quclqu'un, to stay ot 
remain with some or any one, 

2. Tenir un langage singulier, tenir des propcs . . ., des discours . . ., 
would be rendered in English by to make use of singular language- 
to use peculiar expressions, to advance things, &$. 

Ce jeune homme tient des propos That young man says foolish things, 
insenses. 

3. Tenir is also used in the sense of being attached to, to he tena- 
cious of: — 

Je tiens a mon argent, a la vie. lvalue (i. e. hold to) my money , mf 

life, 
Je tiens a mon opinion. / am tenacious of my opinion, 

4. Tenir is also used of a color which is fast or not: — 

Cette couleur tiendra ou ne tiendra This color is fast (i. e. holds) or not, 
pas. 

5. Faire tenir is used in the sense of to forward, to send: — 

Faites-lui tenir cet argent, cette Forward him this money, this letter, 
lettre. 

6. Se tenir, or s'en tenir, conjugated reflectively, may often ho 
rendered by to remain, to abide by, to be satisfied with : — 



II se tient debout, assis. 

Je m'en tiens a votre opinion. 



He remains standing, seated. 
I am satisfied with your opinion. 



Resume of Examples. 



M. L. tient un hotel superbe. 
Votre petite fille ne tient pas sa 

chambre bien propre. 
Pourquoi tenez-vous les portes ou- 

vertes 1 
II fait si chaud que nous tenons 

toutes les fenetres ouvertes. 
Tenez la tete droite et les yeux 

ouverts. 
Pourquoi ne tenez-vous pas votre 

parole 7 
Tenez compagnie a. votre soeur; 

elle est malade. 
Votre ami tient des propos bien 

singuliers. 
Vous tenez des discours bien legers. 
La couleur de votre drap tiendra- 

t-elle ? 
Lui avez-vous fait tenir ce livre 1 
A quoi vous en tiendrez-vous 1 
Je m'en tiendrai a ce que j'ai dit. 
Pourquoi se tient-il toujours de- 

fcouf* 



Mr. L. keeps a superb hotel. 

Your little girl does not keep her room 

very clean. 
Why do you keep the doors open ? 

It is so warm that we keep all the win* 

dows open. 
Keep your head upright and you? 

eyes open. 
Why do you not keep your word ? 

Stay with your sister ; she is sick. 

Your friend makes use of very singy* 

lar expressions. 
You use very light language. 
Is the color of your cloth fast ? 

Have you sent him that book t 
What will be your decirion ? 
I shall abide \y what 1 have said. 
Why iocs h< always remain 
ing? 



LESSON XC. 



230 



I/incredule Ven tiendra-t-il au pre- 
sent, qui doit finir demain 1 

Mas sill on. 



Will the unbeliever be satisfied wiik 
the present, wku-h is to end to-mor- 
row? 



Exercise IV 7. 

Cocher, ru. coachman ; Gens, pi. people ; Recommand-er, 1 £# 

Debout standing; Indispose, e, indisposed; recommend; 

Defend- re, 4. to forbid; Insolent, e, insolent; Regard-er, 1. to look; 
De pres, closely ; Lieu, place; Rue, street ; 

En dehors, out, outside; Malade, sick ; Sav-oir, 3. ir. to know,' 

S'enr burner, 1. ref. to get Parfaiternent, perfectly ; Vie, life. 
a cold; Prefer-er, 1. to prefer; 

1. Quel hotel votre frere tienUl? 2. II tient l'hotel de l'Europe 
rue de . . . 3. Votre petit gar 9 on se tient-il bien propre ? 4. II se tient 
bien propre. 5. A quoi vous en tiendrez-vous ? 6. Je m'en tiendrai 
a ce que je vous ai dit. 7. Ne savez-vous pas a quoi vous en tenir? 
8. Je sais parfaiternent a. quoi m'en tenir. 9. Pourquoi vous tenez- 
vous debout? ~10. Parceque nous n'avons pas le temps de nous 
asseoir. 11. N'avez-vous point defendu a ces jeunes gens de tenir 
de tels propos? 12. Je le leur ai defendu. 13. Votre coeher n'a-t-il 
pas tenu un langage bien insolent? 14. N'avez-vous pas peur de vous 
enrhumer, en tenant les portes ouvertes? 15. Nous prefererions les 
tenir fermees. 16. Votre maitre vous recommande-t-il de tenir la 
tete droite? 17. II me recommande de tenir les pieds en dehors. 18. 
Pourquoi votre ami ne vous tient-il pas compagnie? 19. Sa soeur est 
indisposee; il est oblige de rester avec elle. 20. Votre oncle ne 
vous a-t-il pas tenu lieu de pere? 21. II m'a tenu lieu de pere et de 
mere. 22. Regarderez-vous de plus pres a. cette affaire? 23. Non, 
Monsieur; je m'en tiendrai a ce que j'en sais. 24. Ce medeein ne 
tient-il pas a son opinion? 25. II y tient plus qu'il ne tient a la vie 
de ses malades. 

Exercise 178. 

1. Does that gentleman keep open table? 2. He keeps a hotel in 
Paris. 3. Why do you keep the windows open ? 4. We keep them 
open because we are too warm. 5. Has not your friend kept his 
word. 6. He has kept his word; he always keeps his word. 7. Have 
you iiot told your scholar to keep his head upright? 8. I have toh 
him to keep his head upright and his eyes open. 9. Why do you 
not stay with your sister? 10. Because I have promised to go to my 
cousin's this morning. 11. Have you forbidden your little boy to 
make use of these expressions? 12. I have forbidden him. 13. Does 
he make use of insolent language? 14. He does not. 15 What tvitf 
be your decision? 16. I will abide by what I told your father. 17 



U40 LESSON XCI. 

Have you forwarded that money to your friend? 18. I have not yet 
forwarded it to him. 19. Will you forward it to him to-morrow? 
20. I will forward it to him, if I have an opportunity. 21. Why do 
you not keep standing? 22. Because I am weary. 23. Do you think 
that the color of your coat is fast? 24. I think that it is fast; it (elle) 
appears very good. 25. Will you not look closely into your brother's 
affairs? 26. I shall not look closely into them. 27. I will be satisfied 
with your opinion. 28. Are you not tenacious of your opinion? 
29. I am not too tenacious of it. 30. Does not your physician ad- 
here too tenaciously to his opinion? 31. He adheres to it. 32. Does 
that lady hold your mother's place ? 33. She is a mother to me. 34. 
Our cousin is a father to us. 35. That physician does not value the 
life of his patient. 



LESSON XCI. LEQON XCI. 

1. The verb etre forms a great many idioms besides those which 
we have already mentioned : etre en retard, to be late, to tarry ; etre 
en etat, a meme de, to be able to ; etre en peine de, to be uneasy about; 
etre en vie, to be alive, to live ; etre en chemin pour, to be on the way 
to ; &tre au fait, au courant de, to be familiar with; etre a la veille de, 
to be on the eve of; £tre de trop, to be unnecessary, to be in the way ; 
etre bien avec, to be on good terms with; etre brouille avec, to be on 
bad terms with; etre aux prises avec, to be in open rupture, quarrel or 
battle with ; etre d'avis, to be of opinion, etc. 

2. Etre, as already said [L. 47. 5.], is used in the sense of appar- 
tenir, to belong. It is also employed in the sense of to behoove, to be- 
come. In the latter sense, it takes generally the preposition de before 
another verb : — 

Est-ce a vous de lui faire des re- Does it become you to cast {make) re 

proches % proaches upon him ? 

C'est a vous d parler. It is your turn to speak. 

3. Y etre is often used for to be at home, to be in : — 

Votre pere y est-il 1 Is your father at home? 

Resume of Examples. 



fSe sommes-nous pas de trop ici 1 
Nous ne sommes pas bien avec 

nos parents. 
Ndus sommes au courant de tout 

cela. 



Are we not in the way here ? 

We are not o-7i good terms with our r» 

lotions. 
We are familiar with all thai. 



LESSON XCI. 



241 



Je suis a m&me de satisfaire a, sa 

demande. 
Nous sommes brouilles. 

Ma soeur est a la veille de se 

marier. 
Ndus sommes d'avis que vous 

alliez lui faire des excuses. 
Ce n'est pas a lui de nous re- 

procher notre bonte. 
A qui est-ce a lire 1 
C'est a ma soeur a lire ce matin. 

Cotte maison est a lui et a moi. 
Elle est a moi, elle est a lui. 
Ces souliers ne sont pas a nous, 
lis appartiennent a notre frere. 
lis lui appartiennent. 
Monsieur* n'y est pas. 
Madame y est. 



I am able to satisfy h\i demand. 

We a? e not on good terms ; we are ai 
variance. 

My sister is on t/ue eve of her mar- 
riage. 

It is our opinion that you should go 
and apologize to him. 

It does not become him to reproach us 
with our kindness. 

Wlwse turn is it to read ? 

It is . my sister's turn to read thi 
morning. 

That house is his and mine. 

It is mine, it is his. 

These shoes are not ours. 

They belong to our brother. 

They belong to him. 

The gentleman is not at home 

The lady is in. 



Exercise 179. 

Achet-er, 1. to buy; Gravure, f. engraving ; 
Arriv-er, 1. to arrive ; Hote. m. host; 
Gorrespondant, corres- Libraire, m. bookseller ; 

pondent; Mois, m. month; 

Craind-re, 4. ir. to fear ; Montre, f. watch; 
Dev-oir, 3. to owe, beoblig- Mort. p. p. from mourir, Veille 

ed ; to die; fore 

Embarqu-er, (s') 1. ref. 

to embark ; 



Part-ir, 2. ir. to start, set 
out; 

Proprietaire, m. land- 
lord ; 

Punir, 2. to punish ; 

f. eve, day be- 



1. Y a-t-il longtemps que vous etes brouilles? 2. II y a plus d'un 
mois que je suis brouille avec lui. 3. Votre ami est-ii encore en vie? 
4. Non, Monsieur; il y a dix ans qu'il est mort. 5. Votre corres- 
pondant est-il en chemin pour Paris ? 6. Je crois qu'il doit etre 
arrive. 7. Ce jeune homme n'est-il pas en retard? 8. Oui, Mon- 
sieur ; il ne vient jamais a temps. 9. Ces gravures sont-elles a vous 
ou a votre libraire? 10. Elles sont a moi; je viens de les acheter. 
11. Ne craignez-vous pas d'etre de trop ici ? 12. Nous sommes trop 
bien avec notre h6te pour craindre cela. 13. A qui est-ce a aller 
chercher les livres? 14. C'est a moi a les aller chercher. 15. Est-ce 
a vous de le punir, quand il le merite ? 16. C'est a moi de le punir, 
car je lui tiens lieu de pere. 17. Ces maisons n'appartiennent-elles 
pas a notre proprietaire? 18. Elles ne lui appartiennent pas. 19. 
Elles sont a notre correspondant. 20. A qui sont ces lettres ? 21. 
Elles ne sont point a moi, elles sont a ma cousine. 22. Cette montre 



* Monsieur, Madame, not followed by a name, are generally understood 
to mean the master and mistress of the house, the heads of the family- 

11 



242 LESSON XCII. 

est a iui. 23. N'etes-vous point a la veille de partn pour Lnidres* 
24. Nous sommes a la veille de nous embarquer pour Cadix. 25. 
II y a longtemps, que nous soinnies aux prises. 

Exercise 180. 

1. Are you able to pay him ? 2. I am not able to p^y him : I have 
not received my money. 3. Are you on good terms with your book* 
seller ? 4. I am not on good terms with him. 5. I am on bad terms 
with him. 6. How long have you been on bad terms with him ? 7. 
t is more than a month. 8. Are you not able to satisfy my friend's 
demand? 9. I am able to satisfy it (d?y satisfaire). 10. Are you 
on your way to Naples? 11. No, Sir; I am on my way to Rome. 
12. Is not your physician on the eve of starting for Montpeliier ? 13. 
He is on the eve of starting for Paris. 14. Am I in the way here? 
15. No, Sir; you are not in the way. 16. Whose turn is it to speak i 
17. It is my turn to speak and to read. 18. Is it my place (d moi) 
to make apologies to him? 19. It is your brother's place to apolo- 
gize to him. 20. Does it become you to punish that child? 21. It 
behooves me to punish him. 22. Do you hold the place of a father 
towards him? 23. I hold the place of a father towards him. 24 
Is that coat yours ? 25. No, Sir ; it is not mine ; it is my brother's, 
26. Have you broken openly with him ? 27. We have been quar- 
relling two months. 28. Is not that large house yours ? 29. No, 
Sir; it is not mine; it is my sister's. 30. Does it become your 
brother to reproach him with his kindness ? 31. It does not become 
him to do it. 32. Whose turn is it to go and fetch the books ? 33. 
It is my place to go and fetch them. 34. Is the gentleman in? 
35. No, Sir, the gentleman is not in ; but the lady (of the house) 
is in. 



LESSON XCH. LEQON XCII. 

1. Avancer, retarder, correspond to the English verbs to gain, te 
u>se, to put forward, to put back, in speaking of a watch or clock, &c, 
The preposition de is placed before the word expressing the vari 
ation : — 

M i monti e retarde d'une demi- My watch is half an hour too slow, 

heure. 

La mienne avance d'un quart Mine, is a quarter of an hour too fast. 

d'heure. 

J'ai avance cette horloge d'une I se that clock half *n hour fcrww a 

demi-heure. 



LESSON XCII. 



248 



Retardez votre montre de cinq Put your watch five minutes back 
minutes. 

2. Mettre [4. ir.] a l'lieure, means to set right, to T ut r *ghU to 
set : — 

Mettez cette montre a rhenfe. Set thai watch right. 

3. S'accorder, to agree, is said also of clocks, watches, &c. 

Resume of Examples. 



Votre montre va-t-elle bien 1 

Hlle retarde d'une demi-heure par 

jour. 
Elle avance d'un quart d'heure par 

semaine. 
De combien avance-t-elle 7 
Je viens de mettre ma montre a 

l'heure. 
Si votre montre retarde, pourquoi 

ne l'avancez-vous pas 1 
Ma pendule avance ; je viens de la 

retarder. 
Quelle heure est-il a. votre montre ? 
Mon horloge sonne les heures et les 

demies. 
J'ai oublie de la monter (or remon- 

ter). 
Votre montre est derangee. 
II faudra la faire nettoyer. 
La sonnerie en est derangee. 
Votre pendule et ma montre ne 

s'accordent pas. 
Les pendules a ressort vont mieux 

que les pendules a poids. * 
L'horloge a sonne deux heures. 



Does your watch go well ? 
It loses half an hour a day. 

%■ 

It gains a quarter of an how a week. 

How much has it gained ? 
I have just set my watch rig \t. 

If your watch loses, why do you not 

set it forward ? 
My clock gains ; / have just set it 

back. 
What o'clock is it by your watc/t ? 
My clock strikes the hour and th- half 

hour. 
I have forgotten to wind it up. 

Your watch is out of order. 
It will be necessary to have it cleaned. 
The striking part is out of order. 
Your clock and my watch do not 

agree. 
Spring clocks go better than weight 

clocks. 
The clock has struck two. 



Exercise 181. 

Aiguille, f. hand; Droit, e, straight; Ressort, (grand) m. 

Arret-er, (s') 1. ref. to Fele, e, cracked ; main-spring ; 

stop; Juste, right, correct; Secondes, (montre a) 

Balancier, m. pendu- Matin, m. morning; watch vrith a second 

lum ; Perfection, f. perfection ; hand ; 

Boite, f. watch-case; Plat, e, flat, thin; Timbre, m. bell of a 

Regl-er, 1. to regulate; clock; 
Repetition, (montre a) Vite, quick, quickly. 
i. repeater ; 

1. N'avez-vous pas une montre a repetition? 2. J'ai une montre 
d'or, a double boite. 3. Va-t-elle mieux que la mienne ? 4. Elle ne 
va pas bien, elle retardo d'une heure par jour. 5. Est-ce une montre 
a secondes? 6. C'est une montre a secondes et a cadran d'or. 7. 
Votre horloge ne sonne-t-elle pas ? 8. Elle up. sonne plus, le timbre 
en est casse. 9. Pviurquoi ces pendules ne s'accordent-elles pas * 



Cadran, m.face, dial; 
Cass-er, 1. to break; 
Double, double; 



244 LESSON XCfl. 

10. Parcoque ?une avance etl'autre retarde. 11. N'avez voua point 
casse le grand ressort de votre montre ? 12. Je 1'ai casse en la re- 
montant. 13. Votre pendule est elle juste? 14. Oui, Monsieur 
*lle est juste; je viens de la faire regler. 15. La sonnerie de cette 
pendule est-elle derangee ? 16. La sonnerie en est derangee et le 
timbre en est fele. 17. La petite aiguille de ma montre plate est 
cassee. 18. Le balancier de votre horloge n'est pas droit? 19. De 
combien votre pendule avance-t-elle ? 20. Elle avance de cinq mi- 
nutes par jour. 21. La perfection d'une pendule n'est pas d'aller vite, 
mais d'etre reglee (Delille). 22. Votre montre s'arrete-t-elle 
eouvent? 23. Elle s'arrete tous les matins. 24. Votre pendule 
s'est arretee. 

Exercise 182. 

1. Does your watcll gain or lose? 2. It does not lose; it goes 
very well. 3. It loses twenty-five minutes a day. 4. Does your 
clock gain much ? 5. It gains one hour a week. 6. How much 
does your son's gold watch lose ? 7. It loses much ; it loses one 
hour in (en) twenty-four (heures). 8. I have put it forward one 
hour. 9. I will put it back half an hour. 10. Does not your clock 
strike the half hour? 11. No, Sir; it only strikes the hour. 12. 
Have you forgotten to wind up your repeater? 13. I have forgot- 
ten to wind it up, and it has stopped. 14. Is your silver watch out 
of order? 15. It is out of order, and it will be necessary to have it 
cleaned. 16. What o'clock is it by your watch? 17. It is three 
o'clock by my watch; but it gains. 18. How much does it gain a 
week? 19. It gains more than five minutes a day. 20. Is your 
watch right? 21. No, Sir; it is not right; it is out of ordsr. 22. 
Does your clock strike right? 23. It does not strike right; the 
striking part is out of order. 24. Have you broken the hands of 
your clock ? 25. I have broken the hour hand and the dial. 26. 
Has the clock struck three ? 27. It has struck twelve. 28. It haa 
stopped. 29. Does it stop every morning ? 30. It does not stop 
every morning; it stops every evening. 31. Your watch does not 
agree with mine. 32. Have you not broken the main-spring of your 
or other's watch ? 33. He has broken it in winding it up. 34 Mf 
brother's watch is right ; he has had it cleaned and regulated. 



LESSON XCIII. 245 

LESSON XCHL LEgON XCIII 

1. Se demettre [4. ir.] le bras, le poignet, corresponds to the 
English expression to dislocate one's arm, wrist, to put one's arm, wrist 
out of joint. In this sense se demettre takes no preposition before 
ts object: — 

Je me suis demis l'epaule. I have dislocated my shoulder. 

2. Se demettre, used in the sense of to resign, to give up, takes 
the preposition de before its object : — ■ 

II s'est demis de sa place. He has resigned, his place. 

3. S'emparer, to seize, to lay hold of, takes de before its object :— 
II s'est enipare de ce chapeau. He seized upon this hat. 

4. S'empecher, to prevent one's self, to forbear, to help, takes de be- 
fore another verb : — 

Je ne puis m'empecher de rire. J cannot help laughing. 

Je ne puis m'en empccher. / cannot help doing so. 

5. S'inquieter answers to the English expression, to be or become 
uneasy, to trouble one's self; it takes de before its object, be this ob- 
ject noun, pronoun or verb : — 

Je ne m'inquiete pas de cela. lam not uneasy about that. 

6. Se comporter answers to the expressions to behave, to deport 
one's self 

7. S'attendre means to await, to expect. It takes a before its ob- 
ject — 

Je ne m'attendais pas a cela. / did not expect that. 

Je ne m'y attendais pas. / did not expect it. 

Resume of Examples. 



Vcms etes-vous demis l'epaule % 

Je me la suis demise [L. 45. 2, 
% 135]. 

Cette demoiselle s'est demis le poi- 
gnet. 

Qui le lui a remis 7 

Le Dr. L. a remis l'epaule a. ma 
soeur. 

Vous etes-vous demis de votre 
place ] ' 

Je m'en suis demis [§ 135. 7]. 

Nous ne pouvions nous empeeher 
de sourire pendant ce recit. 

Vous etes-vous empare de ce livre 1 

i% m'en suis empare. 

Be quoi vous inquietez-vous 7 



Have you dislocated your shoulder ? 
I dislocated it. 

That young lady dislocated her wrist 

Who set it for her? 

Dr. L. set my sister's shoulder. 

Have you resigned your situation ? 

I have resigned, it. 

We could not help smiling during 

that narration. 
Have you seized that booh? 
I laid hold of it. 
Why do you trouble youiself? 



246 



LESSON XCIII. 



Je ne ni'fcquiete de rien. 
Comment ce jeune homme se com- 

porte-t-il 1 
II se comporte ccmme il faut. 
Je ne nrattendais pas a une telle 

reponse. 
Je ne m'y attendais nullement. 



/ trouble myself about nothing. 
How does that young man behavt 1 

He behaves properly. 

I did not expect such an answer. 

I did not expect it, by any means. 



A I'avenir, in future; 
Bras, m. arm; 
Cass-er, 1. to break; 
Droit, e, right; 
Durant, during ; 
Ecritoire, f. inkstand; 
Ennemi, m. enemy ; 



Exercise 183. 

Gauche, left ; Paysan, m. peasant ; 

Mieux, better ; Prusse, f. Prussia ; 

Monde (tout le), every Sejour , m. stay ; 

body; Traitement, m. treat- 

Oblige, obliged; ment; 

Pareil, le, similar, such ; Ville, f. city. 
Part, f. part ; 

1. Ne vous etiez-vous pas demis le bras? 2. Je ne me l'etais pai 
demis ; je me l'etais casse. 3. Si vous alliez en Amerique, vous de- 
mettriez-vous de votre place ? 4. Je serais oblige de m'en demettre ? 

5. Y a-t-il longtemps que votre cousin s'est demis de la sienne ? 

6. II y a un mois qu'il s'en est demis. 7. L'ennemi s'est-il empare de 
la ville? 8. II s'en est empare. 9. Votre fils se comportera-t-il 
mieux a I'avenir? 10. II s'est tres bien comporte durant son sejour 
en Prusse. 11. Vous attendiez-vous a. un pareil traitement de sa 
part? 12. Je ne m'y attendais pas. 13. A quoi vous attendiez- 
vous? 14. Je m'attendais aetre traite comme il faut. 15. Pourquoi 
vous etes-vowi moque de lui? 16. Parceque je n'ai pu m'en empe- 
cher. 17. Si vous laissiez votre ecritoire ici, le paysan s'en empare- 
rait-il? 18. II s'en emparerait certain ement. 19. Votre associe se 
comporte-t-il bien envers vous ? 20. II se comporte bien envers tout 
le monde. 21. Qui a remis le poignet a votre soeur? 22. Le Dr. 
G. le lui a remis. 23. M. votre pere ne s'est-il pas demis le bras 
$roit ce matin ? 24. II ne se Test pas demis ; il se Test casse ce 
f/tftin a cinq heures. 

Exercise 184. 

1. Has not Dr. L. resigned his place? 2. He has not resigned it. 
). He would resign it, if he went to Germany. 4. Are you obliged 
to resign your place ? 5. I am not obliged to resign it. 6. Has your 
cousin dislocated his arm ? 7. He has not dislocated his arm, but his 
shoulder. 8. Who set it for him? 9. Doctor F. set it for him. 
10. Has not your mother dislocated her wrist? 11. She has not 
dislocated her wrist; she has broken her arm. 12. Has the enemy 
seized the town? 13. The enemy has seized the town. 14. Wili 
not some one lay hold of your hs»t, if you leave it here ? 15. Some 



LESSON XCIV. 247 

one will lay hold of it. 16. How has your son behaved this morning? 
17. He behaved very well. 18. He always behaves properly. 
19. Do you not trouble yourself uselessly (inutilement) ? 20. I do 
not trouble myself at all (du lout). 21. Did you expect such treat- 
ment from (de la part de) your son ? 22. I did not expect such 
treatment from him (de sa fart). 23. Does that young lady behave 
well towards her mother? 24. She behaves well towards every 
body. 25. Will you behave better in future ? 26. We will behave 
well. 27. Have you broken your finger (doigt) ? 28. I have broken 
my thumb (pouce). 29. Could you help going to sleep (de dormir) ? 
30. We could not help smiling. 31. My sisters could not help 
laughing. 32. Why*are you uneasy? 33. Because (parceque) my 
son does not behave well. 34. Did your father expect to be well 
treated ? 35. He expected to be treated properly. 36. We did not 
expect such an answer. 



LESSON XCIV., LEgON XCIV. 

1. N'importe, an ellipsis of il n'importe, answers to the English 
expression " no matter" it does not matter, never mind : — 

Donnez-moi un livre, n'importe le Give me a book, no matter which. 
quel. 

2. Qu'importe ? answers to the English phrase what matter ? 

What does it matter ? When that expression is followed by a plural 

subject the verb importer is put in the plural : — 

Que nous importent leurs mur- What do we care for their murmurs ? 
mures 1 

. 3. N'est-ce pas ? corresponds to the English expressions, is it not* 

is he not, 6^c. ? do they not ? following an assertion : — 

II fait froid ; n'est-ce pas 1 It is cold ; is it not ? 

4. N'est-ce pas ? frequently precedes the assertion : — 

N'est-ce pas que votre frere est Your brother is come ; is he not ? 
arrive 1 

5. Regarder, to look at, is used in the sense of to concern : — 

Cela regarde votre frere. That concerns your brother. 

6. En voul-oir (3. if.) a quelqu'un, a quelque chose, means to have 
% design, against or upon ; a grudge against any one ; to be angry with 
§>ne on account of something ; — 

II en veut anotre vie. He has a design against o%r kf*< 



?48 



LESSON XCIV. 



Resume of Examples. 



Pourvu que vous veniez, n'importe 

par quel chemin. 
Pourvu qu'il le fasse, n'importe 

comment. 
Apportez-moi quelque chose, n'im- 
porte quoi. 

'en mourrai ; n'importe. 
1 n'est pas satisfait; qu'importe? 

Ti refuse nos presents ; qu'importe 1 

Que nous importe cette affaire ? 
Que vous importe son arriveel 
Yous viendrez ; n'est ce pas 7 > 
N'est-ce pas que vous viendrez 1 \ 
Est-ce que cela me regarde 1 

Cela ne regarde personne. 

II en veut a nos biens. 
II en veut a nos amis. 
Cela vous regarde-t-il 1 



Provided you came, no matter wkick 

way. 
Provided he dxs it, no matter how. 

Bring me something, no matter whut. 

I shall die through it ; no matter. 
He is not satisfied with it; what 

matters it ? 
He refuses our presents ; what does it 

matter ? 
What do we care for that affair ? 
What is his arrival to us? 

You will come ; will you not ? 

Does that concern me? Is that any 

thing to me? 
That concerns nobody. That is no- 

bodi/s business. 
He has a design upon our property. 
He has a grudge against our frien-is. 
Is that your business? 



Exercise 185. 

Accord-er, 1. to grant ; Hasard, m. chance ; Pouv-oir, 3. ir. to be 
Approuv-er, 1. to ap-~Lom,far; able; 

prove; Moqu-er, (se) 1. ref. to Sang, m. blood; 



^ 2b., from aller, tt> go ; 
Velours, m. velvet ; 
Vers-er, 1 to pour, shed; 
Vil, e, vile ; 



Auteur, m. author ; laugh at; 

Bien, very ; Murmure, m. murmur 

Condamn-er, 1. to #ra-Peu, little; 

demn ; Plainte, f. complaint; 

Demande, f. request ; 

1. Que vous apporterai-je de Londres ? 2. Apportez-nous ce que 
vous pourrez, n'importe quoi. 3. Lui avez-vous dit d'apporter du 
velours % 4. Je lui ai dit d'en apporter, n'importe de quelle qualite. 
5. Pourvu~que quelqu'un vienne, n'importe qui. 6. Que m'importe 
qu'Arnaud m'approuve ou me condamne? (Boileau.) 7. Vous 
aeeorde-t-il votre demande? 8. II refuse; qu'importe? 9. Est-il 
aatisfait des efforts que vous avez faits? 10. II n'en est pas satisfait; 
qu'importe? 11. II n'a pas voulu nous recevoir; peu m'importe 
12. Qu'importent les plaintes et les murmures des auteurs, si le public 
s'en moque? (Feraud.) 13. Qu'importe qu'au hasard un sang vil 
soit verse ? (Racine.) 14. Cela vous regarde ; n'est-ce pas? 15. Cela 
lie me regarde pas. 16. Cela ne regarde que moi. 17. Vous leur 
avez dit que ces aifaires ne les regardaient pas; n'est-ce pas? 
18. Vous m'en voulez ; n'est-ce pas? — N'importe. 19. A qui en 
voulez-vous? 20 Nous n'en voulons a personne. 21. Nousnevoirs 



LESSON XCV. 249 

en vroulons pas. 22. Vous ni'en voudrez ; n'est ce pas? 23. Ed 
voalez vous a la vie de votre ami? 24. Je n'en veux pas a sa vie. 
25. II m'en veut; qu'importe? 26. Va, Cesar est bien loin d'en 
vouioir a sa vie ! (Voltaike). 

Exercise 186. 

1. Which way will your brother come? 2. Provided he comes to. 
morrow, it does not mattei which way. 3. Will he write to your 
brother? 4. Pie will not write to him; but it is no matter. 5. 
Will you not lend me a book ? 6. Which book do you wish to 
ha* e ? 7. No matter which. 8. Shall I bring you some silk from 
Paris? 9. Bring me what you can; no matter what. 10. Does 
that concern your brother? llT That does not concern him, but it 
concerns me. 12. Does he refuse to write to us? 13. He refuses 
to (de) write; but what does it matter? 14. Bring me a book, no 
matter which. 15. Your brother will come, will he not? 16. Has 
he been willing to receive your brother? 17. He has refused to re- 
ceive him, but no matter. 18. He is pleased, is he not? 19. He is 
not pleased, but it is no matter. 20. Is that your business? 21. It 
is my business. 22. It is my brother's business. 23. I have told 
you that it is nobody's business. 24. Has that man a design against 
your father's life ? 25. He has no design against his life ; but he 
has a design upon his property. 26. Are you angry with us on that 
account ? 27. I am not angry with you for this. 28. Have you a 
grudge against my friends ? 29. I have no grudge against them. 
30. That concerns you, does it not? 31. That concerns me. 32. 
Is that your business? 33. It is very warm this morning ; is it not ■ 
34. My sister will come this afternoon; will she not? 35. If she 
does not come, it does not matter. 36. What is her coming to us ? 



LESSON XCV. LEgON XCV. 

1. The word monde, world, is often used in French in a restricted 
sense. It has then the meaning of people, company, retinue^ servant^ 

Y avait-il beaucoup de monde a Were there many people at church? 

l'eglise 1 
Be mettant a la tete de son monde, il Placing himself at the head, of his 

ouvrit lui-meme la porte. people, he himself opened the door, 

Voltaire. 

2. The word gens also means people, and is of the masculine gen- 

ii* 



250 



LESSON ICV. 



der ; but, by a singular anomaly, the adjectives whieh precede gens 
are put in the feminine, while those which follow it must be in the 
masculine gender : — 

Ce sont les meilleures gens du monde. They are the best people in the world,, 
Ces gens sont fort dangereux. Those people are very dangerous. 

3. The words tout, tel, quel, certain, not preceding immediately 
the word gens, are put in the masculine, except when the word 
coming between is an adjective having a different termination in the 
two genders : — 

Tous ces gens la etaient-ils chre- Were all those people Christians? 

tiens 1 Pascal. 

Tous ces gens la. sont sottement All those people are foolishly ingeni- 

ingenieux. J. J. Rousseau. oils. 

4. The words tout, tel, quel, certain, are put in the feminine w T hen 
they precede immediately the word gens, or are separated from it 
by an adjective having a different termination in the feminine : — 

Quelles gens etes-vous 1 Quelles sont What people are you ? What is your 

vos affaires 1 (Racine.) business? 

Quelles bonnes et dignes gens ! What good and worthy people I 

Kesume of Examples. 



Apres s'etre fait craindre de tout le 
monde, il craignit tout le monde 
aussi. Fl£chier. 

II dit du mal de tout le monde. 

Tout le monde le dit. 

Avez vous amene beaucoup de 
monde 7 

Le monde n'est pas encore arrive. 

II n'y avait pas grand monde. 

II y a du monde avec lui. 

II a congedie tout son monde. 

Ce capitaine a tout son monde. 

Voila de sottes gens. 

II s'arrete chez les premieres bonnes 

gens qu'il trouve. Boiste. 

II y a a la ville, comme ailleurs. de 

fort sottes gens, des gens fades. 

oisifs, desoccupes. La Rruyere. 
Quels braves gens ! 
Quelles viles et mechantes gens ! 



After having inspired every body with 
fear, he feared every body. 

He slanders every body. 

Every body says so. 

Have you brought many people ? 

The company is not yet come. 

There were not many people there. 

There is some person with him. 

He has discharged all his servants 
{people). 

That captain has all his crew. 

Those are foolish people. 

He stops with the first good people 
that he finds. 

There are in the city, as elsewliers^ 
very silly people, tedious, idle, un- 
employed people. 

What worthy people ! 

What vile anal wicked people 1 



Exercise 187. 

Accommoder(s',) 1. ref. Campagne, f. country; Gens d'epee, military 
to put up with, to agrei Derael-er, 1. to settle, ar- men ; 

with ; range ; Gens de lettres, men of 

Attend-re, 4. to await, to Des que, as soon as; letters; 

expect: Equipage, m. crew; Gens de robe, lawyers; 

Bord (a), on board; Eveill-er. 1. to a uake ; Patron, m. patron saint 



LESSON xcv. 251 

Perd-re, 4. to lose Reven-ir, l.ir. to return; Voyag>er, 1. [§ 49.] to 

Rassembl-er ; 1. to bring Salon, m. drawing-room; travel ; 
together; Serv-ir, 2. ir. to serve; Terre, f. land, shore. 

1. Avez-vous rassemble beaucoup de monde chez vous? 2. II n'est 
venu que peu de monde. 3. A quelle heure servira-t-on le diner au- 
jourd'hui? 4. On le servira des que notre monde sera venu. 5. Le 
capitaine a-t-il tout son equipage a bord ? 6. Non, Monsieur, il a en- 
roye du monde a terre. 7. Vos gens se levent-ils de bonne heure * 
£. II faut que tous les jours j'eveille tout mon monde (Racine). 
9 Les Moscovites perdirent trois fois plus de monde que les 
Suedois (Voltaire). 10. Oii est Madame votre mere? 11. Elle est 
dans le salon, il y a du monde avec elle (company). 12. Tout le 
monde peut voyager com me moi (X. de Maistre). 13. Ainsi va le 
monde. 14. Elle attend pour quitter le monde, que le monde l'ait 
quittee (Flechier). 15. Vos gens sont-ils revenus de la campagne? 
16. Nous attendons nos gens aujourd'hui. 17. Y a-t-il ici une societe 
de gens de lettres? 18. Non, Monsieur; il n'y a qu'une societe de 
gens de robe. 19. Connaissez-vous ces braves gens? 20. Je crois 
que ce sont des gens d'epee. 21. Tels sont les gens aujourd'hui. 
22. Telles gens, tels patrons (La Bruyere). 23. Tous mes gens 
sont malades. 24. II faut savoir s'accommoder de toutes gens 
(L'Academie). 25. Que pouvez-vous avoir a demeler avec de 
telles gens ? 

Exercise 188. 

1. Are there many people at your brother's? 2. There are not 
many people there. 3. Does that young man slander every body ? 
4. He slanders nobody. 5. Have you brought many people with 
you ? 6. We have brought but few people with us. 7. Is there com- 
pany with your mother? 8. There is no company with her. 9. Who 
has told you that ? 10. Every body says so. 11. Is the company come ? 
12. The company is not yet come. 13. Has your mother discharged 
twe servants (domestiques) ? 14. She has discharged all her people. 
15. Do you know those people? 16. I know them very well ; they 
are very worthy people. 17. When he travels, he stops always with 
good people. 18. Are there foolish people here? 19. There are 
foolish people everywhere (partout). 20. Do you awake your people 
every morning? 21. Yes, Sir; I must awake them every day. 22. 
What can your brother have to settle with those people? 23. They 
are the best people in the world. 24. Were there many people at 
church this morning ? 25. There were not many people there. 26. 
Are your people sick? 27. Yes, Sir; all my people are sick. 38. 



252 LESSON XCVI. 

There is here a society of learned men. 29. There are in Pari* 
several societies of lawyers. 30. What worthy people ! 51. What 
good people! 32. Do you expect your people to-day? 33. We ex 
pect them this evening. 34. So goes the world. -» 35. Has your cap. 
tain all his crev ? 36. He has all his crew on board. 



LESSON XCVI. LEgON XCVI. 

1. When property or possession is affirmed of things inanimate, 

the relation of possession is often expressed by the relative pronoun 

en [{ 95, (5.)] :-- 

Voila un bel arbre; le fruit en est That is a fine tree; its fruit is excel- 
excellent. lent. 

2. When, however, the inanimate possessor is the subject of the 
same clause, the possessive adjective is used [} 95, (4.)] : — 

Cet arbre a perdu son fruit. That tree has lost its fruit. 

3. Entendre, to hear, is used in the sense of to understand. It 
is also used reflectively. It means then, to be understood, to under- 
stand one's self, or one another, or to agree with one another. It means 
also, to be expert in any thing. In this latter sense it takes a before 
its regimen. This regimen is at times replaced by the pronoun y : — 

Comment entendez-vous cela 1 How do you understand that ? 

Cela s'entend. That is understood. 

II s'entend aux affaires. He is expert in business. 

4. Se faire entendre corresponds to the English, to make one's self 
understood, to make one's self heard : — 

Nous nous sommes fait entendre. We made ourselves understood. 

5. Taire [4. ir.] means, to conceal, to keep to one's self. Se taire. 

ref., tc be silent. 

Taisez-vous. Taisons-nous. Be silent {hold your tongue). Let us 

be silent. 
Dites-lui de se taire. Tell him to be silent. 

Resume: of Examples. 



L'auteur d'un bienfait est celui qui 
en re^oit les plus doux fruits. 
Duclos. 

Votre jardin est rnagnifique; les 
arbres en sont superbes. 

La vie a ses plaisirs et ses peines. 

L'etude a ses charmes. 



TJie author of a good dted is the one 
who receives its sweetest fruits. 

Your garden is magnificent; its ir eel 

are very beautiful. 
Life has its pleasures and its tr rubles 
Study has Us charm*. 



LESSON XCTI. 



253 



Entendez-vous bien le latin! 

Cet avoue n'entend rien aux affaires. 

II ne s'y entend pas. 

Je lui ai donne a entendre, qu'il 

etait de trop ici. 
Qu'ente.idez-vous par la 1 
II y avait tant de bruit, que nous 

n'avons pu nous faire entendre. 
Taisez le premier, ce que vous vou- 

lez qu'on taise. Latin Maxim. 
Pourquoi ne vous taisez-vous pas 1 
Kmis 1 avons fait taire. 



Do you understand Latin well ? 

That attorney has no knowledge of 
business. 

He is not expert in this. 

I gave hint, to understand thai U 
ivas in the way here. 

What do you mean by that ? 

There was so much noise, that m/e 
could not make ourselves heard. 

Keep to yourself that ivhich ymi would 
wish to have kept secret. 

Why are you not silent ? 

We made him hold his tongue (si- 
lenced him,). 



Exercise 189. 

Agrement, m. pleasure ; Chirurgien, m. surgeon ; Manche, f. sleeve ; 
Avantage, m. advan- Consent-ir, 2. ir. to con- Mel-er, 1. to mix ; 

tage ; sent; Muet, te, dumb, mute ; 

Basque, f. skirt of a Court, e, short; Pays, m. country ; 

coat ; Force, f. force, power ; Raison, f. reason ; 

Brave, worthy ; Fort, very ; Reuss-ir, 2. to succeed. 

1. Est-ce un habit neuf que votre fils porte? 2. C'est un habit 
neuf, le drap en est tres fin. 3. Les manches n'en sont elles pas trop 
courtes ? 4. Je crois que les manehes en sont trop courtes et les 
basques troplongues. 5. La campagne n'a-t-elle pas ses avantages? 
6. J'aime la campagne ; j'en connais les avantages. 7. Paris a ses 
agrements. 8. J'aime Paris ; j'en connais les agrements. 9. Ce chi- 
rurgien s'entend-il a la medecine'? 10. II n'y entend rien du tout. 
11. Entendez-vous la medecine. 12. Je ne m'y entends pas. 13. Je 
ne Pentends pas. 14. Je n'y entends rien. 15. Avez-vous reussi a 
vous faire entendre] 16. Nous n'y avons pas reussi. 17. Mon voi- 
sin est un brave homme et je m'entends fort bien avec lui. 18. Faiie 
taire certaines gens est un plus grand miracle que de faire parler les 
muets (Balzac). 19. Savez-vous de que] pays est cet homme 1 
20. II ta.it son pays et sa naissance. 21. Par la force de la raison, 
elle apprit Fart de parler et de se taire (Flechier). 22. Voulez- 
vous vous taire impertinente, vous venez toujours metier vos imper 
tmerces a toutes choses (Moliere). 23. Qui se tait consen 
(Proverb). % 

Exercise 190. 

1. Have you a very good garden ? 2. We have a very large one, 
but its soil (terre, f.) is not good. 3. Is your brother's coat new 1 ? 
4. He has a new coat, but its sleeves are too short. 5. Are not its 
skirts too long? 6. No, Sir; its skirts are too short. 7. Have you 
not heard that prearher (predicatenr) ? 8. There was so much noise 



254 LESSON XCV1I. 

that I cfluM not hear nim. 9. Does not the country have its plea 
sures? 1*0. The country has its pleasures. 11. Does not your br^. 
ther like the city? 12. He likes the country ; lie knows its pleasures. 
13. What does your brother mean by that? 14. H3 means what he 
says. 15. Is your father expert in business ? 16. My father has no 
knowledge of business. 17. Does that young man understand Eng- 
lish well? 18. He understands French and English very well. 19. 
Do you agree well with your partner? 20. My partner is an honest 
man [§ 86.] ; I agree very well with him. 21. Does that young 
man conceal his age ? 22. He conceals his age and his country. 23. 
Does your father understand medicine? 24. He does not under- 
stand it. 25. He has no knowledge of it. 26. Be silent, my child. 
27. Tell that child to be silent. 28. Silence gives consent. 29. 
Will you not be silent ? 30. What have you given him to under- 
stand? 31. We gave him to understand that study has its charms. 
32. Have you silenced him? 33. Yes, Sir; we silenced him. 34. 
Tell him to be silent. 35. I have already (deja) told him to be si- 
lent. 36. Let us be silent. 



LESSON XCVIL LEgON XCYII. 

THE PRESENT PARTICIPLE THE VERBAL ADJECTIVE. 

1. The present participle is invariable, and ends always in ant. It 
expresses action, not situation. It cannot be rendered into English 
by an adjective, but is rendered by the participle present or by the 
present of the indicative preceded by a relative pronoun. The pres- 
ent participle has often, or may have a regimen. [§ 64.] 

Cos hommes, prevoyant le danger, Those men, foreseeing the danger, 
s'enfuirent. fled. 

2. The part of the verb used after the preposition en, is always tn 
present participle : — 

En eerivant, en lisant. In writing, in reading. 

3. When the word ending in ant, is used to express the qualities 
properties, or moral or physical situation of a noun, it is a verbal 
adjective, and assumes in its termination the gender and number of 
the noun which it qualifies. It must in this case be rendered into 
English by an adjective : — 

Ces hommes font prevoyants Those men are cautious, provident. 

4. The ^erbs entendre, to hear ; faire, to cause, to make ; laisser, to let 



LESSON XCVII. 



265 



&c, followed by another verb completing their meaning, are not in 
Prench separated from that verb. In the corresponding sentences ic 
English, the two verbs are usually separated by other words: — 

J'ai laisse tomber mon cooiteau. I have let my knife fall (dropped). 
J'ai entendu dire cela. * I have heard that said. 



Resume of Examples. 



Je connais des personnes dormant 
d'un sommeil si profond, que le 
bruit de la foudre ne les reveille- 
rait pas. Bescher. 

Les eaux dormantes sont meilleures 
pour les chevaux que les eaux 
vives. Buffon. 

Nous avons trouve cette femme 
mourante. 

Cette femme mourantdans la crainte 
de Dieu, ne craignait point la 
mort. 

On est heureux en se contentant de 
peu. 

A vez-vous laisse passer ce voleur ? 

Je l'ai laisse passer. 

Pourquoi avez-v^^s fait faire un 
habit 1 

Je n'ai pas fait faire d'habit. 

J'ai lasse tomber quelque chose. 

Lui avez-vous entendu dire cela ! 

Je le lui ai entendu dire. 

Je l'ai entendu dire. 

Je l'ai entendu dire a ma scenr. 



I know persons, sleeping (whc sleep 
so profoundly, that the noise cf thun- 
der would not aioake them. 

Sleeping (still) waters are better je* 
horses than living waters. 

We found that woman dying. 

That woman dying in the fear of 
God, did not fear death. 

One is happy in contenting one's u\j 

with little.. 
Have you let that thief pass ? 
I let him pass. 
Why have you had a coat made 1 

I have had no coat made. 

I let something fall. 

Have you heard him say that f 

I heard him say it. 

I heard it said,. 

I heard my sister say it. 



Exercise 191. 
Appliqu-er, (s') 1. ref. Hat-er (se), 1. ref. to 



to apply ; 

Besoin, ra. want ; 

Changement. m. altera- 
tion ; 



hasten ; 
Lecture, f. reading ; 
Obligeant, e. obliging; 
Plai-re, 4. ir. to please ; 



Emouss-er, 1. to blunt ; Pointe, f. point; 
Empecher, 1. to prevent; Pleuv-oir, 3. ir. to rain ; 
Essayer, 1. to try ; 



Prevenant, e. obliging ; 
Preven-ir, 2. ir. to an- 
ticipate ; 
Repet-er, 1. to repeat; 
Suivant, e. following ; 
Suiv-re, 4. ir. U. follow ; 
Voyant, e, bright, skwry, 



I. Ma cousine est-elle aussi obligeante que la votre ? 2. Elle e« 
aussi obligeante, et bien plus charmante que la mienne. 3. Vos en 
fants sont-ils prevenants ? 4. Mes enfants, prevenant tous mes be- 
eoins, ne me laissent rien a d£sirer. 5. Lisez bien attentivement les 
pages suivantes. 6. Ces demoiselles, suivant l'exemple de leur mere, 
s'appliquent a la lecture. 7. Les couleurs voyantes ne me plaisent 
point. 8. Mes soeurs voyant qu'il allait pleuvoir, se haterent de re- 
renir. 9. Qu'avez-vous laisse tomber? 10. J'ai laisse tomber ma 



256 LESSON XCVIII, 

plume; la pointe en est emoussee. 11. Les avez-vous fait rarler 1 

12. Je les ai fait parler, mais avec difficulty 13. Avez-vous fa't faire 
des changements dans votre maison? 14. J'y en ai fait faire. 15. A 
quoi en avez-vous fait faire? 16. J'en ai fait faire a la salle a man- 
ger et au salon. 17. Avez-vous laisse passer cet homme ? 18. Je 
n'ai pas essay e de Fen empecher. 19. A qui (whom) avez-vous en- 
tendu dire cela? 20. Je Fai entendu dire a mon pere. 21. Je le lui 
ai entendu repeter. 22. II vous Pa entendu dire. 23. II vous a vu 
faire cela. 24. II vous Pa vu faire. 25. Je Pai vu passer. 

Exercise 192. 
1. Are still waters good for horses? 2. BufFon says, that they are 
better for horses than living waters. 3. Are your sisters cautious? 
4. They are not very cautious. 5. My sisters, foreseeing that it was 
going to rain, brought their umbrellas. 6. What have you let fall ? 
7. I have let my knife and book fall. 8. Do very bright colors please 
your brother? 9. Very bright colors do not please him. 10. Have 
you read the following pages? 11. Have you seen the dying wo- 
man? 12. Your sister, dying in the fear of God, was very happy. 

13. Your sister, following your example, appli^:, herself to study. 

14. Have you made them read? 15. I made them read and write. 
16. I made my brother write. 17. I have had a book bound (relier). 
18. Has your father had alterations made in his house? 19. He lias 
had some made in it. 20. In which room has he had some made ? 
21. He has had some made in my brother's room. 22. Whom have 
you heard say that ? 23. I heard my sister say it. 24. Have you 
heard him say that ? 25. I have not heard him say it. 26. Have you 
seen my father pass ? 27. I have not seen him pass. 28. I have 
neard him speak. 29. Make him speak. 30. Let it fall. 31. Do not 
let it fall. 32. What has your brother dropped ? 33. He has dropped 
nothing. 34.' Whom have you heard say that ? 35. I heard your 
brother say it. 36. I have heard you repeat it. 37. We have see* 
you do that. 



LESSON XCVIII. LEgON XCVHI. 

PRACTICAL RESUME OF THE RULES ON THE PAST PARTICIPLE.--! 

The participle past is variable under any of the following con# 
ditions: — 

1. When employed as an adjective; in which case it agrees in 
gender and number with the noun which it qualifies : — 



LESSON XCVIII. 257 

Des livres im primes. Printed books. 

Ces femmes paraissent bien abat- Those women appear very dejected, 
tues, 

2. When used in the formation of the tenses of passive verbs ; 
when it always agrees with the subject of the proposition : — 

Elles sont bien re9ues de tout le They are well received by every 
monde. body. 

3. When employed in 'forming the compound tenses of neuter 
verbs- having tire as an auxiliary ; in which place, as in the preced- 
ing case, it agrees with the subject or nominative : — 

Votre sceur est partie ce matin. Your sister went away this morning. 

4. When employed in forming the tenses of active verbs having 
avoir as an auxiliary; in which connection it agrees not with the 
subject, but with the direct object or regimen, provided that object 
precedes it : — 

Les maisons que nous avons ache- The houses which we have bought. 
tees. 

5. When used along with etre in the formation of the compound 
tenses of reflective verbs, wherein the reflective pronoun is the direct 
object; in which position it agrees with that pronoun or direct 
object : — 

Ces dames se sont flattees. Those ladies have flattered themselves. 

6. When used along with etre (as in Rule 5.) in the formation of 
the compound tenses of those reflective r erbs, in which the reflective 
pronoun is not the direct, but the indirect object of the proposition ; 
in which event it agrees with the direct object, provided (as in Rule 
4.) that object precedes it : — 

Les histoires qu'elles se sont racon- The stories which they related to each 
tees. other. 

7. When forming part of a compound tense of a verb governing a 
succeeding infinitive, it is at the same time preceded by a direct ob 
ject which is represented as performing the action denoted by the in 
finitive ; in which condition it agrees with that direct object: — 

Les dames que j'ai entendues chan- The ladies whom I heard sing (sing- 
ter. ing). 

8. When in a sentence containing the pronoun en, the participle is 
preceded by another object or regimen which is direct ; in which case 
it agrees with that direct object: — 

Je les en ai avertis. J have warned them of it. 

Vous les en avez informes. You have informed them af it. 



258 



LESSON XCVIII. 



Resume of Examples. 



Vous avez df s livres bien relies. 
Vos ;illes sont estimees. 
Ces terres sont bien labourees. 
Mes voi sines sont tombees d'ac- 

cord. 
Elles sont venues nous trouver. 
La victoire que nous avons rem- 

portee. 
Les champs que vous avez laboures. 
Vous vous etes repentis de votre 

faute. 
JSlle s'est souvenue de sa promesse. 
Les soldats que j'ai vus passer. 
Les musiciennes que j'ai enten- 

dues jouer. 
L'indiscretion que nous nous som- 

mes reprochee. 
Les evenements qu'elles se sont 

racontes. 
Les fruits que j'en ai re^us. 
Les nouvelles que j'en ai apportees. 



You have well bound books 
Your daughters are esteem* t. 
Those lands are well ploughed. 
My neighbors have come to an un- 

derstanding. 
TJiey came to us. 
The victory which we have gained. 

The fields which you have ploughed. 

You have repented (you) of yow 
fault. 

She remembered her promise. 

The soldiers whom I saw massing. 

The musical ladies whom I heari 
playing. 

The indiscretion with who ..i we re- 
proached one another. 

The events which they relate^ • one 
another. 

The fruits which I received from ••«. 

The news which I brought from u-. 



Exercise 193. 



A l'ordinaire, as usual; Fleur, f. flower; 

Avert-ir, 2. to warn ; 

Boue f. mud; 

Coutume (de), usually, 
usual ; 

Cueill-ir, 2. to gather ; 

Dechiffr-er, 1. to deci- 
pher ; 



Reproch-er (se), 1. ref. 
Malade, sick person ; to reproach one's self; 

Merveille (a), wonder- Ri-re, 4. ir. to laugh ; 

fully, perfectly ; Serieux, se, serious ; 

Parven-ir, 2. ir. to sue- Souri-re, 4. ir. to smile ; 

cee<? ' Suivant, according to ; 

■ Port-cL (se), 1. to be, to Tomb-er, 1. to fall; 
do; Trouv-er, to find; 

Decourag-er, 1. to dis- Plus tot, sooner, earlier ; Vol-er, 1. to steal, 
courage ; 

1. Cette demoiselle ne se trouve-t-elle pas bien fatiguee? 2. Elle 
est fatiguee et decouragee. 3. Votre soeur est-elle allee a l'eglise 
suivant sa coutume? 4. Ma mere et ma soeur y sont allees. 5. 
Votre soeur est-elle revenue plus tot que de coutume. 6. Elle est 
revenue plus tard qu'a l'ordinaire. 7. Cette pauvre malade est-elle 
tonibee 1 8. Elle est tombee dans la boue. 9. Ma mere est-elle 
parvenue a dechiffrer ma lettre? 10. Elle n'y est pas parvenue. 11 
Quelles rleurs avez-vous cueillies? 12. Les fleurs que j'ai trouvees 
sont plus belles que celles que vous m'avez envoyees. 13. Votre 
cousine ne s'est-elle pas bien portee ? 14. Elle s'est portee a mer- 
veille. 15. De quel livre vous etes- vous servie, Mademoiselle ? 16. 
Je me suis servie du votre. 17. Nous nous sommes servies dea 
notres. 18. Quelles fautes votre fils s'est-il reprochees? 19. Les 
fkutes qu'il s'est reprochees ne sont pas serieuses. 20. lies avez- 



LESSON XCIX. 259 

tous vus rire? 21, Je les ai vus sourire. 22. Les avez-vous vus 
voler des fruits ? 23. Je les ai vus voler des pommes. 24. Les avez- 
vous avertis de lturs fautes ? 25. Je les en ai avertis. 26. Je ne les 
en ai pas avertis. 

Exercise 194. 

1. Are your books well bound? 2. They are well bound, and 
well printed. 3. Did not your little girl find herself discouraged 
4. She found herself tired, but not discouraged. 5. Have your sis 
ters come to an understanding % 6. They have not come to an un- 
derstanding. 7. My brothers have come to an understanding. 8. 
Who came to you ? 9. Your friends came to us. 10. Is not your 
sister gone to church? 11. My sister is gone to church as usual. 
12. Did your sister return sooner than usu c *l ? 13. My sister re- 
turned later than usual. 14. Are the fields which you have ploughed 
large? 15. The fields which I have bought are very large. 16. 
Where are the gentlemen whom you saw pass? 17. The ladies 
whom I heard sing are in their room. 18. Did your poor sister fall? 
19. Did that poor sick woman fall in the mud? 20. Did your sister 
succeed in reading that book? 21. She succeeded in reading it. 22. 
Have you warned your sisters of their danger? 23. I have warned 
them of it. 24. I have not warned them of it. 25. What pen has 
your mother used ? 26. She has used mine. 27. Have not those 
young ladies used my book? 28. They have not used it. 29. Has 
your mother been well? 30. She has been perfectly well. 31. 
Has she remembered her promise? 32. She has remembered it. 33. 
Have you seen those boys laugh? 34. I have seen them smile. 35 
Have you seen them play ? 36. I have heard them play. 



LESSON XCIX. LEgON XCIX. 

PRACTICAL RESUME OF THE RULES ON THE PAST PARTICIPLE.— -II. 

The participle past is invariable : — 

1. In active verbs, when the direct regimen follows the participle : — 

Mes nieces ont etudie leurs le^ns. My nieces have studied their I-essons, 
Elles ont neglige leurs etudes. They have negLded their studies. 

2. In neuter verbs conjugated with avoir : — 

Mes cousines ont disparu. My cousins have disappeared. 

Les cinq hemes qu'elles ont dormi. Thefivt hours which they have slept. 



260 



LESSON XCIX. 



In the latter sentence, the word pendant iu understood aftef 
heures : — - 



Les cinq heures pendant les quelles 
elles ont dormi. 



The five hours during which th, 
slept. 

3. In unipersonal verbs, whether conjugated with etre or wi 
avoir : — 



Les chaleurs qu'il a fait cette annee. 
II est arrive bien des malheurs. 



The heat there has been this year 
Many misfortunes have happene 



4. In reflective or pronominal verbs, of which the second prono* 
is an indirect regimen, when no direct regimen precedes : — 

Elle s'est propose de partir. She p-oposed to herself to leave. 

5. When the participle precedes an infinitive, and is preceded by a 
direct regimen, and this direct regimen is not the actor, but the ob- 
ject acted upon. In this case the infinitive is generally rendered in 
English by the passive voice :-p- 

Les chansons que j'ai entendu chan- The song which I heard {being) 
ter. sung. 

6. When the direct regimen preceding a participle is not the object 
of this participle, but of a verb following : — 

La regie que je vous ai conseille The rule which I advised you to 
d'etudier. study. 

7. The participle of faire, fait, followed by an infinitive, is always 
invariable : — 

Je les ai fait raccommoder. I have had them mended. 

8. After the pronoun, en, when no direct regimen precedes :— 
Vous a-t-on donne des fleurs ? Have they given you flowers ? 



On m'en a donne. 



They have given me {some) of then 



Resume of Examples. 



Elles nous ont donne de bons con- 

seils. 
Elles nous en ont donne. 
Les trois l/'eues qu'il a couru. 
Les annees que ces edifices ont 

dure. 
La belle journee qu'il a fait hier ! 

C'est la plus belle fete qu'il y ait 

eu. 
II s'est presente deux de vos amis. 
Ces demoiselles se sont nui. 

Les Asiatiques se sont fait une es- 
peee d'art de l'education de 1 'ele- 
phant. Buffon. 



They have given us good advice. 

They have given us some. 

The three leagiies which he ran. 

The years that those edifices have 

lasted. 
What a beautiful day it was yester* 

day ! 
It is the finest feast that there ha$ 

been. 
Tliere appeared two of your friends. 
Those young ladies have injured one 

another. 
Tlte Asiatics have made the education 

of the elephant a kind of art. 



LESSON XCIX. 



261 



Elle s'est imaginl l'idee de pouvoir f She conceived the idea, that she might 

ronecir em rrcprl 



reussir, 

Les fruits que j'ai vu voler. 

Les soldats blesses que j'ai vu por- 
ter. 

La chanson que j'ai entendu chan- 
ter. 

Les pommes que je vous ai defendu 
de manger. 

Je les ai fait partir. 

Elles m'ont apporte des oranges. 

Elles m'en ont apporte. 



succeed. 

The fruits vjhich I sau being stolen. 
The wounded soldiers whom I saw 

{being) carried. 
The song which I heard sung. 

The apples which I forbade you to 

eat. 
I obliged them to leave. 
They have brought me oranges. 
They have brought me {some) of them. 



Exercise 195. 

Auberge, f. inn; Jou-er, 1. to play ; Piece, f. piece ; 

Bien, m. good; Habill-er, 1. to dress; Racont-er, 1. to relate; 

Dernier, e, last ; Dorm-ir, 2. to sleep ; Reven-ir, 2. ir. to r<>- 

Disparait-re, 4. ir. to dis- Lion d'Or, m. Golden turn ; 

appear ; Lion ; Soieries, silk goods. 

Enterr-er, 1. to bury ; Mort, e, dead; 

1. Quelle auberge vous a-t-on recommandee ? 2. On m'a recom- 
mande l'auberge du Lion-d'Or. 3. Quelles nouvelles avez-vous 
apportees ? 4. J'ai apporte des nouvelles agreables. 5. Vos voisines 
sont-elles habillees ? 6. Elles ne sont pas encore habillees. 7. Ont-* 
elles bien dormi la nuit derniere? 8. Elles n'ont pas bien dormi. 
9. Quand sont-elles arrivees? 10. Elles sont arrivees a quatre 
heures et demie. 11. Ont-elles dormi plus de cinq heures? 12. Les 
six heures qu'elles ont dormi leur ont fait beaucoup de bien. 13. Vos 
soeurs se sont-elles amusees ? 14. En jouant elles se sont fait mal 
au bras. 15. Se sont-elle.-* raconte notre conversation? 16. Elles 
se la sont racontee. 17. Vos amies ont-elles disparu? 18. Elles 
n'ont pas disparu ; elles sont revenues chez elles. 19. Les soldats 
que vous avez vus partir; sont^ils revenus? 20. lis sont morts; 
je les ai vu enterrer. 21. Ne les avez-vous pas fait etudier ? 22. Je 
les ai fait lire. 23. Avez-vous apporte des soieries ? 24. Je n'en ai 
pas apporte. 25. Les soieries que j'en ai apportees sont superbes. 

, Exercise 196. 
1. Have you not recommended my nieces ? 2. I have recommende^ 
them. 3. Have you brought me good oranges ? 4. I have brought 
you some. 5. Have you given any to my two daughters .* 6. I have 
given them some. 7 I would have given them some, if I had had 
many. 8. Have you not neglected your studies'? 9. I have not 
neglected them ; I never neglect them. 10. The years which that 
ehurch has lasted, speak in favor (en faveur) of the architect. 
11. The ten mhes which he has run, have fatigued him. 12. Have 



202 



LESSON C. 



your sisters injured each other ? 13. They have flattered themselves, 
14. Did my friends present themselves? 15. There came three of 
your sisters. 16. What did they imagine ? 17. They conceived the* 
idea of reading Tasso (he Tasse). 18. Have you seen them (m.) 
steal my apples? 19. I saw them steal your peaches. 20. Have 
you heard them (f.) sing? 21. I have heard them sing. 22. The 
songs which I heard sung, are not new. 23. I found in your room 
the books which I had forbidden you to take. 24. The peaches 
which I have forbidden you to eat, are not ripe (mures). 25. Have 
you seen those soldiers ? 26. I saw them pass last week. 27. [ saw 
them carried to the hospital (a ThopitaT) this morning. 28. Have 
you brought oranges from France ? 29. I brought some. 30. The 
oranges which I brought from it (en) are good. 31. Have you 
brought silk goods? 32. I have brought some. 33. I have brought 
none. 34. Are the silk goods which you brought from that place, 
good? 35. I brought but two pieces. 



LESSON C. 



LE£ON c. 



EXAMPLES ILLUSTRATING THE VARIOUS USES OF THE PRINCIPAL 
CONJUNCTIONS. 



A MOINS QUE. 



II n'en fera rien, a moins que 
vous ne lui parliez. 

A moins que vous ne preniez bien 
votre temps, vous n'en viendrez pas 
a bout. 
Quel indigne plaisir peut avoir l'ava- 

rice, 
Et que sert d'amasser, a moins 

qu'on ne jouisse ? Boursault. 



He will do nothing of the kind, 
unless you speak to him. 

Unless you choose your time well % 
you will not accomplish it. 

What unworthy pleasure can ava~ 

rice offer ? 
What is the use of hoarding up un-. 

less we enjoy ? 



Aussi, ils n'ont aucune force pour 
*e posseder surement. Pascal. 

Ma douleur serait trop mediocre, 
i je pouvais la depeindre ; aussi je 
lie l'entreprendrai pas. 

Mme. de Sevigne. 



Therefor, they have no strength 
to possess it safely. 

My grief would he too trifling if 1 
could depict it; so that f uill not 
undertake it. 



(Test ce qu'il y a de plus sage ; au 
reste, e'est aussi ce qu'il y a de plus 
juste. Marmontel. 



This is the wisest way ; bwd*9 t it 
is aho the tnostju&t. 



LESSON C. 



263 



Voila les perils, voici le moyen de 
les e viler ; car enfin, le bras de Dieu 
n'est pas raccourci. Massillon. 

Le peuple se figure une felicite 
imaginaire dans les situations ele- 
vees, ou il ne peut atteindre, et il 
croit (car tel est Thc-mrue) que tout 
ce qu'il ne peut avoir, c'est cela 
Dierae qui est le bonheur qu'il 
eherche. Massillon. 



Those are the dangers, this is the 

way of avoiding them ; for finally, 
the influence of God is not less 
povjerful. 

The people picture to themselves 
an imaginary happiness in elevate 
stations which they car not reach 
and they believe (for such is man 
that all that which they cannot ob 
tain, forms that very happines 
which they seek. 



comme — QUE. 



Comme l'ambition n'a pas de 
frein, et que la soif des richesses 
nous consume tous, il en resulte, que 
le bonheur nous fuit a mesure que 
nous le cherchons. Th. Corneille. 

La reconnaissance est le plus 
doux, comme le plus saint des de- 
voirs. Thomas. 

Comme il sonna la charge, il 
sonne la retraite. La Fontaine. 

DC 

Votre maitre vous aime ; done, 
vous devez l'aimer. 

Je suis, done, un temoin de leur 
peu de puissance. Racine. 

Et dou peut done venir ce 
changement extreme ? Voltaire. 

Si ce n'est toi, c'est done ton 
frere. — Je n'en ai pas. — C'est do'hc, 
quelqu'un des tiens. La Fontaine. 

Allons done ! repondit on, et la 
transaction n'eut pas lieu. 

De Cusst. 



As ambition has no limits, and as 
the thirst of riches devours us all, 
the result is, that happiness avoids 
us, as we proceed in our search after 
it. 

Gratitude is the sweetest as well as 
the holiest of duties. 

As he sounded the charge, so he 
sounds the retreat. I 

re. / 

Your master loves you ; therefor e> 
you shoidd love him. 

I am, therefore, a witness of their 
want of power. 

Wlience, therefore, can this extreme 
change proceed ? 

If it is not you, then it is your 
brother. I have none. Then it must 
be some one of your family. 

" Well doneT replied they, and 
the affair did not take place. 



DE MEME QUE. 

De m^me que le soleil brille sur I As the sun shines upon the earthy 
la terre, de meme le juste brillera so will the just shine in heaven. 
dans les cieux. L'academie. 



C'est Stre faible et timide que 
d'etre inaccessible et fier. < 

Massillon. 

Une famille vertueuse est un vais- 
seau tenu pendant la tempete par 
deux ancres, la religion et les mceurs. 

C hateaubriand. 
Quel carnage de toutes parts ! 
On £gorge a la fois les enfants, les 

vieillards, 



To be inaccessible and proud, is tc 
be weak and timid. 

A viituous family is a vessel 
strengthened dming the tempest by 
two anchors, religion and morals. 

What carnage on all sides ! 
They murder at once the children, 
the old men, the %i.iter and the broth- 



264 



LESSON C. 



Et la soeur et le frere, 
Et la fille et la mere, 
Le fils dans les bras de son pere. 
Racine, Est Iter. 



er, the daughter and the mother, tht 
son in the arms of his father. 



LORSQUE QUAND. 



Lorsque rinnocence habitait la 
Wre. Bossuet. 

Quand vous me hairiez, je ne m'en 
plaindrais pas. Racine. 

Quand nous n'aurions egard qu'au 
repos seul de notre vie, quand nous 
n'aurions point d'autre interet ici- 
bas que de nous preparer des jours 
heureux, quel bonheur de prevenir 
d'avance et d'etouffer dans leur 
naissance tant de passions violentes. 
Massillon. 



When innocence inhabited tfu 
earth. 

If even you hated me, I would ho* 
complain. 

If even we considered merely the 
repose of our lives, if even we had 
no other interest here than to pre- 
pare for ourselves happy days, what 
happiness it would be, to prevent 
beforehand, to stifle in their birth t 
so many violent passions. 



C'6tait deja la puissance impe'- 
riale qu'on lui a vue depuis, mais 
avec l'assentiment universel des 
peuples, avec des formes moins 
royales, mais plus dignes peut-etre. 
Thiers. 

L'harmonie ne frappe pas simple- 
tnent l'oreille, mais l'esprit. 

Boilead". 

C'est un parti sage & la guerre de 
de se tenir sur la defensive, mais ce 
a'est pas le plus brill ant. 

La Rochefoucauld. 

II n'y a point de mais qui tien- 
ne ; je ne donnerai point ma fille a 
un muet. Brueys. 



It was already the imperial power 
of which toe have since seen him 
possessed, but with the consent of the 
people, with forms less regal, but 
perhaps more worthy. 

Harmony does not only strike the 
ear, but the mind. 

To keep on the defensive is a wise 
resolution in war, but it is not the 
most brilliant. 

*There is no ' buf in the matter ; 
I will not give my daughter to a 
mute. 



Heureux celui qui sait se conten- 



ter de 



peu 



! Son sommeil n'est 



trouble ni par les craintes, ni par 
les desirs honteux de l'avarice. 

Trad. d'Horace. 
Vous perdez ainsi la confiance de 
vos amis, sans les avoir rendus ni 
meilleurs ni plus habiles. 

Voltaire. 
On n'est jamais si heureux, ni si 
malheureux qu'on se Pimagine. 

La Rochefoucauld. 
Cette loi sainte ne connait plus, ni 
pauvre, ni riche, ni noble, ni roturier, 
ni maitre ni esclave. Massillon. 



Happy is he who can content him- 
self with little ! His sleep is dis- 
turbed neither by the fear, nor by 
the shameful desires of avarice. 

You lose thus the confidence oj 
your friends without having render- 
ed them either better or more skilful. 

We are never so happy nor so un 
happy as we fancy. 

That holy law knows no longer 
either poor or rich, noble or plebeian, 
master or slave. 



Or sus, mettons nous a Foil* fag* I Now then, let us go to w&rJs. 



LESSON C 



265 



Che c,a, Gil Bias, me dit il un jour, 
[e, temps de ton enfance est passe. 1 
Le Sage. 



" Now, then, Qi. Bias " said he to 
me one day, " the time of your child- 
hood is over." 



La fortune, soit bonne ou mau- 
vaise, soit passagere ou constante, 
iu peut rien sur Tame du sage. 

Marmontel. 
La liberte de publier ses pewsees, 
ou la liberte de la presse, doit etre 
'6glee sur la liberte meme d'agir. 
B. de St. Pierre. 



Fortune, be it good or had, be it 
transient or constant, has no power 
over the soul of the wise. 

Tlie liberty of publishing one's 
thoughts, or the liberty of the press t 
should be regulated upon the liberty 
of action itself. 



parceque. 



Cies grands hommes entreprennent 
«!U> ^randes choses parcequ'elles 
»*mt ^randes, et les fous parcequ'ils 
les croient faciles. Vauvenargues. 

La U/Ut est beau, parceque tout 
est vrai. J. J. Rousseau. 



Great men undertake great things 
because they are great; and fools, 
because they believe them easy. 

Every thing there is beautiful, be- 
cause every thing is true. 

POURTANT. 

Le style le moins noble a pour- I The least elevated style has, never- 
taut sa notu^sse. Boileau. J theless, its elevation. 



PUISQUE. 



, Pourquoi le demander, puisque 
vous le savez i Racine. 

Ne vous lass^z jamais d'examiner 
les causes des giands changements ; 
puisque rien ne aervira jamais tant 
a votre instruction. Bossuet. 

Puisque vous le voulez, je vais 
changer de style. Boileau. 



Why ash about it, since you know it t 

Never be weary of examining into 
the causes of great changes; for 
nothing will ever be of so much ser- 
vice to your instruction. 

Since you will have it so, I will 
change my style. 



QUE. 



Jamais on ne vit tm si grand exem- 
ple, que le courage n'est point in- 
compatible avec la mollesse. 

Voltaire. 

Nous n'avons que peu de temps a 
vivre, et loin d'en profiler, nous ne 
eherehons qu'a le perdre. Laveaux. 

A quoi vous servira d'avoir de 
1'esprit, si vous ne l'employez pas, et 
que vous ne vous appliquiez pas ? 
Bossuet. 

Toutefois que sert-il de me justi- 
fier ? Racine. 

Qu'il fasse ce qu'il lui plaira. 

Que le monde est grand ! Qu'il 
est magnifique ! Massillon. 

Que de beaux jours n'ont pas de 
beaux soirs ! Boiste. 

Sais tu quelque chose de plus ? 

Oh ! que oui. Brueys. 

12 



Never ivas such a striking exam- 
ple seen, that courage is not incom- 
patible with effeminacy. 

We have but little time to live, 
and instead of improving it, we only 
seek to waste it. 

Of what use will be your wit, if 
you do not employ it, and do not ap- 
ply yourselves i 

However, what is ifie use of justi- 
fying myself? 

Let him do what he pleases. 

How great is the world! Hovt 
magnificent ! 

How many fine days have not 
beautiful evenings ! 

Do you know a r ,iy thing more ? 

That Idol 



206 



LESSON C. 



(Test une maladie d'esprit, que de 
Bouhaiter des choses impossibles. 
Fenelon. 

H n'y aura jamais de meilleur di- 
recteur que l'Evangile. 

Ganganelli. 

La veritable conversion du coeur 
fait autant aimer Dieu qu'on a aime 
les creatures. Pascal. 

Crois tu que dans son coeur, il ait 
jure ta mort ? Racine. 

Ce n'est pas que j'eusse mieux fait 
que vous. Mme. de Sevigne. 

II a fallu que mes malheurs m'aient 
instruit, pour m'apprendre ce que je 
be voulais pas croire. Fenelon. 



Wishing for impossible thvigs, is 
a disease of the mind. 

There will never be any better 
guide than the Gospel. 

The true conversion of the heart 
makes us love God as much as we 
have loved the creatures. 

Do you believe that he has sworn 
your death in his heart ? 

It is not that I might have done 
better than you. 

It was necessary that my misfor- 
tunes should instruct me, to teach 
me what I would not believe. 



QUOIQUE QTJOI . . . QUE. 



Quoique Dieu et la nature aient 
fait tous les hommes egaux en les 
formant d'une meme boue, la vanite 
humaine ne peut soufrrir cette ega- 
lite". Bossuet. 

Quoi que vous £criviez, evitez la 
bassesse. Boileau. 

Quoi que ce soit qu'elle dise, elle 
ne me persuadera pas. 

- Glrault-Duvivier. 



Although God and nature have 
made all men equal in forming them 
from the same earth, human vanity 
cannot bear that equality. 

Whatever you may write, avoid 
vulgarity. 

Whatever she may say, she will 
not persuade me. 



8L 



Si vous le vouliez, nous partirions 
ensemble. 

Si vous le prenez sur ce ton, je 
me retire. 

Nul empire n'est sur, s'il n'a 
Tamoui pour base. Racine. 

S'il le faut, nous partirons. 

Votre esprit a toujours en reserve 
quelque si, quelque mais. 

Destouches. 



If you wished it, we would go to- 
gether. 

If you go on in this way, I with- 
draw. 

No empire is safe, unless it has 
affection for its basis. 

If it must be so, we will go. 

Your mind has always in reserve 
some ' if.' some * but/ 



Us repondirent, qu'il fallait re- 
tablir l'6quilibre europeen rompu, 
qu'il fallait le retablir sinon sur le 
continent, ou il etait tout a fait 
detruit, au moms sur l'Ocean. 

Thiers. 



They replied, that it was necessary 
to re-establish the disturbed Euro- 
pean balance ; thc\ it was necessary 
to restore it, if m. on the continent, 
where it was entirely destroyed, at 
least on the Ocean. 



Soit qu'il le fasse, soit qu'il ne le 
fasse pas. 

Soit la hardiesse de I'entreprise, 
soit la seule presence de ce gran.i 



Whether he does it, whether /** 
does it not. 

Be it the boldness of the enter- 
prise, be it the presence alone of thit 



LESSON C. 



267 



honime, soit la protection visible du 
ciel, il etonne par sa resolution. 

Flechier. 

Soit en bien, soit en mal, mon ami, 
la prudence dit, qu'il faut rarement 
juger sur l'apparence. Cheron. 

Vous le voulez ? ainsi soit il ! 

Un mal funeste et contagieux se 
repandit dans les principales villes 
de la Normandie ; soit que l'intem- 
perie des saisons edt laisse dans les 
airs quelque maligne impression, soit 
qu'un commerce fatal eut apporte 
des pays eloignes, avec de fragiles 
richesses, des semences de maladie 
et de mort, soit que l'ange de Dieu 
eut etendu la main pour frapper 
cette malheureuse province. 

Flechier. 



great man, be it the visible protec- 
tion of heaven, he astonishes by his 
resolution. 

Be it for good, be it for evil, my 
friend, prudence says, that we must 
rarely judge from appearances. 

You will have it so ? So be it ! 

A fatal and contagious diseas 
spread in the principal cities of 
Normandy ; be it that the inclemen- 
cy of the season had left in the air 
some malignant impression, be it 
that a fatal commerce had brought 
from distant countries, with perish- 
able riches, the seeds of disease and 
death, be it that the angel of God 
had stretched forth his hand to smite 
that unfortunate province. 



EXERCISES IN COMPOSING. 

The words in the following lists are given, as before intimated 
(page 59), as suggestive of thought. In conducting the exercise, the 
Teacher selects a particular word, as Relieur (Bookbinder), and re- 
quires each pupil to compose a French sentence containing this term. 
The pupil is duly notified, that he is at liberty to take any thought 
suggested by the word, and to produce a sentence of any form found 
in any of the foregoing Lessons : regard being had all along to all 
the Rules, Notes, Exceptions, &c, that may bear upon the case. 
Thus, adopting as a model the sentence, Voire marchand est bien obli- 
geant (Lesson 17, Resume), or, Le Danois a~t-il quelques pommes? 
(Lesson 18, R. 7) &c. &c., let him endeavor to produce others of the 
like kind 

A little practice will render the exercise both easy and interesting. 
It will soon come to be easy to incorporate not only one, but two, 
three, or more of the words taken from the lists. 



I. — Professions et Metiers,, 
Aoteur, m. actor. 
Apothicaire, m. apothecary. 
Artiste, m. artist. 
Aumonier, m. chaplain. 
Auteur, m. author. 
Barbier, m. barber. 
Bijoutier, m. jeweller. 
Blancnib^use, f. washerwoman. 
Boucher, m. w^t^er. 



Professions and Trades. 

Brasseur, m. brewer. 
Brodeuse, f. embroiderer. 
Charbonnier, m. coal-man. 
Charlatan, m. quack. 
Charretier, m. cartman. 
Chaudronnier, m. coppersmith. 
Chirurgien, m. surgeon. 
Cordier, m. ropemaJcer. 
Corroyeur, m. currier. 



268 



LIST OP WORDS. 



Coutelier, m. cutler. 

Couturifcre, f. seamstress. 

Couvreur, m. slater, tiler. 

Cure, m. viaxr. 

Dentiste, m. dentist. 

Drapier, m. draper. 

Ecclesiastique, m. clergyman. 

Epicier, m. grocer. 

Eveque, m. bishop. 

Faucheur, m. mower. 

Fripier, m. fripperer. 

Fruitiere, f. fruit-woman. 

Gantier, m. glover. 

Graveur, m. engraver. 

Horloger, m. clock and watch makes: 

Instituteur, m., Institutrice, f., school' 

master, mistress. 
Imprimeur, m. printer. 
Joaillier, m. jeweller. 
Macon, m. mason, bricklayer. 
Maitre d'ecole, m. schoolmaster. 
Manouvrier, m. day-laborer. 
Marchand-de-chevaux, maquignon, 

m. horse-dealer. 
Marechal ferrant, m. farrier, shoe- 

ing-smith. 
Marechal, m. blacksmith. 

II. L'HOMME. 

Ancetres, m. p. ancestors. 

Arriere-petit-fils, m. great-grandson. 

Beau-fils, m. son-in-law, step-son. 

Beau-frere, m. brother-in-law. 

Beau-pere, m. father-in-law, step-fa- 
ther. 

Belle-fllle, f. daughter-in-law, step- 
daughter. 

Belle-inere, £ mother-in-law ', step- 
mother. 

Belle-soeur, f. sister-in-law. 

Bisaieul, m. great-grandfather. 

Bru, f. daughter-in-law. 

Descendants, pi. descendants. 

Enfance, f. childhood. 

Epoux.m. } . 

^ o \ consort. 

Epouse, f. ) 

Famille, f. family. 

Fernme, f. woman, wife. 

Fiancailles, f. p. betrothing. 

Fiance, m., fiancee, f., betrothed 

Futur, m. bridegroom. 

III. — Le corps humain. 

Artere, f. artery. 
Barbe, f. beard. 



Moissonneur, m. leaper. 

Mu8icien, m. musician. 

Naturaliste, m. naturalist. 

Orateur, m. orator. 

Orfevre, m. gold and silver smith 

Pape, m. pope. 

Patre, m. shephera, herdsman. 

Perruquier, m. hairdresser. 

Philosophe, m. philosopher. 

Poissonnier, m. } Poissonniere, i.,fish 

monger. 
Predicateur, m. preacher. 
Pretre, m. priest. 
Raffineur de sucre, de sel, sugar 

salt refiner. 
Ramoneur de cheminees, m.chimney 

sweeper. 
Relieur, rn. bookbinder. 
Savetier, m. cobbler. 
Sculpteur, m. sculptor. 
Sellier, m. saddler. 
Serrurier, m. locksmith. 
Tapissier, m. upholsterer. 
Teinturier, m. dyer. 
Tisserand, m. weaver. 
Tonnelier, m. cooper. 
Vitrier, m. glazier. 

Man. 

Future, f. bride. 
Gendre, m. son-in-law. 
Grand-pere, m. grandfather. 
Grand'rnere, f. grandmother. 
Jeune homme, m. young man. 
Jeune fille, f. young woman, girl. 
Jeunesse, f. youth. 
Jumeau, m., jumelle, f., twin. 
Marraine, f. godmother. . 
Mari, m. husband. 
Naissance, f. birth. 
J^ourrice, f. nurse. 
ISTouveau marie, bridegroom. 
Nouvelle mariee, bride. 
Orphelin, m., orpheline, f., orphan, 
Parrain, m. godfather. 
Petit-fils, grandson. 
Petite-fille, grand-daughter. 
Veuf, m. widower. 
Veuve, widow. 
Vieillesse, f. old age. 

The hum^n bob% v 

Bouche, f. mouth. 
Bras, m. arm. 



lIST OF WORD! 



269 



Cervelle, f. brain. 
Chair, f. flesh. 
Cils, m. p. eyelash is, 
CoRur, m. heart. 
Corps, m. body. 
Cote, m. side. 
Cdte, f. rib. 
Cou, m. neck. 
Coude, m. elbow. 
Crane, m. skull. 
Cuisse, f. thigh. 
Doigt, m. finger. 
Dos, rn. back. 
Epaule, £ shoulder. 
Epine (du dos), f. spine. 
Favor is, m. p. whiskers. 
Foie, m. liver. 
Front, m fo\ ehead. 
Gencives,/. p. gums. 
Genou, m. knee. 
Gorge, f. throat. 
Hanclie, £ hip. 
Jambe, f. leg. 
Joue, f. cheek. 
Langue, f. tongue. 
Lev re, f. Up. 
Membre, m. limb. 

IV. — Maladies, infirmites, etc 

Attaque, f. attack, jit. 

Baume, m. balsam. 

Begaierneut, m. stammering, 

Blessure, £ wound. 

Cecity, £ blindness. 

Chancre, m. cancer. 

Cicatrice, f. scar. 

Colique, f. colic. 

Contusion, £ bruise. 

Crampe, f. cramp. 

Dislocation, f. dislocation. 

Emetique, m. emeti*. 

Enflure, f. swelling. 

Enroument, m. hoarseness. 

Entorse, f. sprain. 

Epilepsie, f. epilepsie. 

Evanouissement, m. fainting. 

Fievre, f. fever. 

Fievre nerveuse, f. nervous fever. 

V. — Habillements. 
Agrafe, f. clasp. 
Aiguille, f. needle. 
Aiguille de cheveux, f. hair-pin. 
Bague, £ ring. 
J3as, m. stocking. 



Menton, m. chin. 

Moelle, f. marrow. 

Moustache, f. moustache, mow lochia 

Muscle, m. muscle, 

Nerf, m. nerve. 

Nez, m. nose. 

Ongle, m. nail. 

Orteil, m. toe. 

Os, m. bone. 

Palais, m. palate. 

Paupiere, £ eyelid. 

Peau, f. skin. 

Pouce, m. thumb. 

Poumon, m. lungs. 

Prunelle, f. pupil of the eye 

Rate, f. spleen. 

Reins, m. p. loins. 

Sang, m. blood. 

Sein, bosom. 

Sourcils, m. p. eyebrow*. 

Squelette, m. skeleton. 

Talon, m. heel. 

Teint, m. complexion. 

Tempes, f. p. temples. 

Trait, m. feature. 

Yeine, £ vein. 

Yisage, m. face. 

Maladies, Infirmities, eto. 

Fievre scarlatine, £ scarlet fever 
Gue'rison, £ cure. 
Goutte, £ gout. 
Hydropisie, £ dropsy. 
Indisposition, £ indisposition. 
Louche, adj. squinting. 
Malaise, m. indisposition. 
Mutisme, m. dumbness. 
Ordonnance, £ prescription. 
Onguent, m., pommade, £, salvt 
Petit e-verole, £ small-pox. 
Pulmonie, £ consumption. 
Remede, m. remedy. 
Rhurne, m. cold. 
Rougeole, £ measles. 
Surdite, £ deafness. 
Toux, £ cough. 
Ulcere, m. ulcer. 
Vertigo, m. dizziness. 

Articles of Dress* 

Basin, m. dimity. 
Batiste, £ cambric. 
Bijouterie, £ jewelry. 
Bonnet, m. cap. 
Boucle, £ buckle, 



2T0 



LIST OF WORDS. 



Boucle, f. lock of hair curl. 

Boucles d'oreilles, f. p. ear-rings. 

Bourse, f. purse. 

Bracelet, m. bracelet. 

Bretelles, f. p. braces, suspenders. 

Brosse, f. brush. 

Brosse-a-dents, f. tooth-brush. 

Calecon, m. s. drawers. 

Ceinture, f. sash, belt, band. 

Chaussons, m. p. socks. 

Cirage, m. blacking. 

Ciseaux, m. p. scissors. 

Coiffure, f. head-dress 

Collet, m. collar. 

Collier, m. necklace. 

Coton, m. cotton. 

Cravate, f. cravat 

Crepe, m. crape. 

Diamant, m. diamond. 

Dentelle^ f. lace. 

Doublure, f. lining. 

Ecrin, m. casket, jewel-box. 

Epee, f. sword. 

6perou8, m. p. spiers. 

Ippingle, f pin. 

Etui, m. needle-case. 

Eventail, m.fan. 

Flacon, m. smelling-bottle. 

Fourrure, f. fur. 

Frac, m. dress-coat. 

VI. — La ville, la maison, Era 

Antichambre, f. antechamber. 

Ardoise, f. slate. 

Arsenal, m. arsenal. 

Banc, m. bench, seat. 

Barriere, £ gate. 

Bibliotheque, f. library. 

Bourg, m. borough, small town. 

Bourse, f. exchange. 

Brique, f. brick. 

Capitale, f. capital city, metropolis. 

Carillon, m. chime of bells. 

Caserne, f. barrack. 

Cave, £ cellar. 

Chambre, f. chamber, room. 

Chambre a coucher, £ bedroom. 

Chapelle, f. chapel. 

Chateau, m. country -house, villa. 

Chauiniere, £ hut, cottago 

Chaux, £ lime. 

Cheminee, £ chimney. 

Cimetiere, m. burying ground, 

churchyard. 
CI or he, £ bell (large) church bell, <kc. 



Frange, £ fringe. 

Garniture, £ trimming. 

Gilet, m. vest, waistcoat. 

Grenat, m. garnet. 

Guetres, £ p. gaiters. 

Habit, m. coat. 

Ivoire, £ ivory. 

Linge, m. linen. 

Lunettes, £ p. spectacle* 

Manche, £ sleeve. 

Mousseline, £ muslin. 

Pantalon, m. sing, pantaloons. 

Parapluie, m. umbrella. 

Parasol, m. parasol. 

Peigne, m. comb. 

Pendants-d'oreilles, m. p. car-pen 

dants. 
Perle, £ pearl. 
Poche, £ pocket. 
Pommade, £ pomatum. 
Redingote, £ great-coat. 
Robe, £ dress, robe. 
Robe de chambre, £ dressing-gown. 
Satin, m. satin. 
Soie, £ silk. 
Tablier, m. apron. 
Taffetas, m. taffeta. 
Velours, m. velvet. 
Veste, £ vest 
Voile, m. veil. 

Town, House, etc 

Clocher, m. church-steeple. 

Clochette, £ small bell. 

Cloitre, m. cloister. 

Cour, £ yard, court 

Couvent, m. convent. 

Cuisine, £ kitchen. 

Douane, £ custom-house. 

E curie, £ stable. 

Environs, m. p. environs, neighbor' 

hood. 
£tage,n. m. story, floor. 
Escalier, m. stairs. 
Faubourg, m. suburb. 
Ferme, {.farm. 
Fontaine, £ fountain, well. 
Four, m. oven. 
Gouttiere, £ gutter. 
Grand chemin, ) , , , 
Grand'route, ' }*>• % W 
Grange, £ barn. 
Grenier, m. garret 
Haie, £ hedge. 
Hameau, m. hamlet 



LIST OF WORDS. 



2Y1 



Hopital, m. hi spital. 

Hdtel-de -ville, town-house, city-house, 

guild-hall, city-hall, town-hall. 
Meuble, m. 'piece of furniture. 
Meubles, m. p. furniture, 
Monnaie, f. mint. 
Mortier, m. mortar. 
Mur, m. \ 
aille, f. j 



wall. 



Muraille, 

Palais, m. palace. 

Paroisse, f parish. 

Pave, m. pavement. 

Pepiniere, f. nursery of trees. 

Persienne, blind, open shutters. 

Plafond, m. ceiling. 

Planche f. board. 

Plancher, m. floor. 

Poele, m. stove. 

Pompe, f. pump. 

Pont, m. bridge. 

Porte, f, door, gate. 

Poste, f. post, post-office. 

Poiitre, f. beam 

Prairie, f. ) , 

Pre, m. \ meadow ' 

VII. — Meubles. 
Allumette, n. f. match. 
Allumette chimique, f. friction- 
match. 
Amadou, m. tinder. 
Armoire, f. cupboard. 
Baril, m. cask, barrel. 
Bassin, m. bowl, washbowl. 
Bassinoire, f. warming-pan. 
Berceau, m. cradle. 
Boite-a-fusil, f. tinder-box. 
Bougie, f. taper. 
Bouilloire, f. kettle. 
Briquet, m. fire-steel. 
Cadre, m. frame. 
Candelabre, m. chandelier 
Casserole, f. saucepan. 
Cassette, f. box, casket. 
Cbandelle, f. candle. 
Charbon de bois, m. charcoal. 
Charbon de terre, stone coal. 
Chaudiere, f. boiler. 
Coffre, m. chest. 
Commode, f. chest of drawers. 
Corbeille, f. basket 
Crible, m. sieve. 
Cruche, f. pitcher. 
Cuvier, m. tub. 
Drap, m. sheet. 



Prison, f. prison, 

Puits, m. well. 

Quartier, m. quarter 

Bampe (d'escalier) balustrade of a 

staircase. 
Rez-de-chaussee, m. ground-floor, 
Sacristie, f. vestry. 
Salle, f. parlor, sitting-room. 
Salon, m. drawing-room, hall 
Serre, f. conservatory. 
Serre-chaude, f. hot-horns. 
Serrure, f. lock. 
Sonnette, f. bell. 
Theatre, m. theatre 
Tolt, m. roof. 
Tour, f. tower. 
Tuile, f. tile. 
Verger, m. orchard. 
Verrou, m. bolt. 
Vestibule, m. hall, entry. 
Vigne, f., vignoble, m., vineyara. 
Village, m. village. 
Volet, window-shutter. 
Voute, f. vault. 

Furniture. 
Ecumoire, f. skimmer. 
Entonnoir, m. funnel. 
Essuie-main, m. towel. 
Fer a repasser, m. iron, 
Fourgon, m. poker. 
Foyer, m. hearth. 
Lampe, f. lamp. 
Lanterne f. lantern. 
Lit, m. bed. 

Lit de plume, m. feather bed. 
Lumiere, f. light. 
Lustre, m. sconce. 
Marchepied, m. footstool. 
Mouchettes, f. p. snuffers. 
Mortier, m. mortar. 
Moutardier, m. mustard-vot 
Nappe, f. tablecloth. 
Oreilier, m. pillow. 
Panier, m. basket. 
Paravent, m. screen. 
Peinture, f. painting, pictufn* 
Pelle, f. shovel, 
Pierre a fusil, t flint. 
Pincettes, f. p. tongs. 
Poele, m. stove. 
Poele, f. frying-pan. 
Poivriere, f pepper-box. 
Fot, m. kettle. 



272 



LIST OF WORDS. 



Pupitre, in. desk. 
Saliere, f. saltcellar. 
Savon, m. soap. 
Sean, m. pail. 
Serviette, f. napkin. 
Sofa, m. sofa. 
Sorfflet, m. bellows. 
Soi piere, f. soup-tuiten. 
Sucrier, m. sugar-dish. 

VIII. — Plats, etc, 

Bceuf, m. beef. 

Bouilli, m. boiled beef boiled meat. 

Bouillon, m. broth. 

Confitures, f. p. preserves. 

Cotelette, f. cutlet. 

Gigot de mouton, m. leg of mutton. 

Jambon, m. ham. 

Mouton, m. mutton. 

(Euf, m. egg. 

Omelette, f. omelet. 

Pore, m. pork. 

IX. — Legumes, Grain, etc. 

Ail, m., pL anlx or aux, garlic 
Asperge, f. asparagus. 
Avoine, f. oats. 
Betterave, f. beet. 
Ble, m. wheat. 
Carotte, f. carrot. 
Celeri, m. celery. 
Champignon, m. mushroom* 
Chou, m. cabbage. 
Choufleur, m. cauliflower. 
Concombre, m. cucumber. 
Cresson, m. cress. 
Epinards, m, pL spinage. 
Feve, f. bean. 
Grain, m. kernel. 
Herbe, f. herb. 
Lentille, f. lentil. 
Mais, m. maize. 

X. — Arbres fruitters, fruits. 

Abrieot, m. apricot. 
Abricotier, m. apricot-tree 
Amande, m. almond. 
Amandier, m. almond-tree 
Ananas, m. pineapple. 
Aveline, f. filbert. 
Chataigne, f. chesnut. 
Citron, m., citron, lemon. 
Going, m. quince. 
Datte, f. date. 
Figue, {.Jig. 



Tableau, m. picture. 

Tablette, f. shelf. 

Tapis, m. carpet. 

Tire-bouchon, m. corkscrew. 

Tiroir, m. drawer. 

Traversin, m. bolster. 

Ustensiles de cuisine, m p. kiiihen 

utensils. 
Verre, m. glass. 

Dishes, eto. 

Rafraichissements, m. p. reftnh 

ments* 
Rdti, m. roast meat. 
Saucisse, f. sausage. 
Soupe, f. soup. 

Soupe maigre, f. vegetable soup. 
Tarte, f. tart. 
Veau, m. veal. 
Vermicelli, m. vermicelli. 
Volatile, tfowl. 

Vegetables, Grain, «m 

Millet, m. millet. 
Navet, m. turnip. 
Ognon, m. onion. 
Orge, f. barley. 
Oseille, f sorrel. 
Panais, m. parsnip. 
Persil, m. parsley. 
Plante, f. plant. 
Pois, ra. pea. 
Racine, f. root. 
Radis, m. radish (turntp). 
Rave, f. radish (long). 
Riz, m. rice. 
Sauge, f. sage. 
Seigle, m. rye. 
Thym, m. thyme. 
Truffe, f. truffle. 

Fruit Trees, Fruits* 

Fraise, f. strawberry. 

Framboise, f. raspberry. 

Groseille, f. gooseberry, furranL 

Melon, m. melon. 

Mure, f. mulberry. 

Nefle, f. medlar. 

Noisette, f. hazel-nwi, 

Noix, f. nut. 

Orange, f. orange. 

P6che, f. peach. 

Poire, f. pear. 



LIST OF WORDS. 



278 



Poirier, m. pear tree. 
Pomme, f. apple. 
Pommier, m. apple-tree. 
Prune, f. plum. 

XL — Arbres Forestiers. 

Bouleau, m. birch. 
Chene, m. oak. 
Ecorce, f. bark. 
Erable, m. maple. 
Frene, m. ash. 
Hetre, m, beech. 
Melese, m. larch. 
Orme, m. elm. 

XII. — Fleurs, etc. 

Auricule, f. auricula. 
Chardon, m. thistle. 
Chevre-feuille, ra. honeysuckle. 
Giroflee, f. gillyflower. 
Jasmin, m. jessamine. 
Lis, m. lily. 
Marguerite, f. daisy. 
Mauvaise herbe, f. weed. 
Myrte, m. myrtle. 
(Eillet, m. pink. 

XIIL — OlSEAUX. 

Aigle, m. eagle. 
A ile, f. wing. 
Alouette, f. lark. 
Autour, m. hawk. 
Autruche, f. ostrich. 
Bee, m. beak. 
Becasse, f. woodcock. 
Becassine, f. snipe. 
Bergeronnette, f. wagtail. 
CaiHe, f. quail. 
Canard, m. duck. 
Canari, m. canary-bird. 
Chardonneret, m. goldfinch, 
Chauve-souris, f. bat. 
Cigogne, f. stork. 
Colombe, f. dove. 
Corbeau, m. raven. 
Corneille, f. crow. 
Coucou, m. cuckoo. 
Cygne, m. swan. 
Din don, m. turkey. 
Faisan, m. pheasant. 

XIV. — QuADRUPEDES. 

Ague au, m. lamb. 
Blaireau, m, badger 
Castor, m. beaver, 
Cerf, m, stag. 

12* 



Prunier, m. plum-tree. 
Raisin, m. grape. 
Vigne, f. vine. 

Forest Trees. 

Peuplier, m. poplar. 
Rameau, m. bough. 
Sapin, m. pine. 
Saule, m. willow 
Tilleul, m. linden-tree. 
Tremble, m. aspen. 
Tronc, m. trunk. 

Flowers, Era 
Ortie, f. nettle. 
Pavot, m. poppy. 
Pensee, f. forget-me-not 
Pied d'alouette, m. larkspur 
Primevere, f. cowslip. 
Rose, f. rose. 
Tournesol, m. sunflower. 
Tulipe, f. tulip. 
Violette, f. violet. 

Birds. 

Geai, m. jackdaw. 

Grive, f. thrush. 

Heron, m. heron. 

Hirondelle, f. swallow. 

Linotte, f. linnet. 

Merle, m. blackbird. 

Oie, f. goose. 

Oiseau de proie, m. bird of prey.. 

Paon, m. peacock. 

Passereau, m. sparrow. 

Perroquet, m. parrot. 

Perdrix, f. partridge. 

Pie, f. magpie. 

Pigeon, m. pigeon. 

Poule, f. hen. 

Poulet, m. chicken. 

Roitelet, m. wren. 

Rossignol, m. nightingale. 

Rouge-gorge, m. redbreast. 

Serin, m. canary-bi^d. 

Tourterelle, f. turtle-dove, 

Vautour, m. vulture. 

Quadrupeds. 
Chamois, m. chamois. 
Chevre, f. goat. 
Chevreuil, m. roebuck. 
Ecureuil, m. squirrel. 



274 



LIST OF WORDS. 



Furet, m. ferret. 
Herisson, m. hedgihog 
Lapin, rabbit. 
Lievre, m. hare. 
Lion, m. lion. 
Loup, m. wolf. 
Mule, f. mule. 

XV. — Poissons. 

Anguille, f. eel. 
Baleine, f. whale. 
Brochet, m. pike. 
Carpe, f. carp. 
Chevrette, f. shrimp. 
Ecrevisse, £ crawfish. 
Esturgeon, m. sturgeon. 
Hareng, m. herring. 
Hareng saur, red herring. 
Homard, m. lobster. 

XVI. — Insectes, etc 
Abeille, f. bee. 
Araignee, £ spider. 
Chenille, f. caterpillar. 
Cigale, f. grasshopper. 
Couleuvre, f. adder. 
Cousin, m. gnat. 
Crapaud, m. toad. 
Escarbot, m. beetle. 
Fourmi, f. ant. 
Grillon, m. cricket. 
Grenouille, {.frog. 
Guepe, £ wasp. 

XVIL— Outils 

Alene, f. awl. 
Balance, f. scale. 
Beche, f. spade. 
Brosse, f. brush. 
Brouette, f. xoheelbarrow 
Cachet, m. seal. 
Carabine, f. rifle. 
Charrue, f. plough. 
Chevalet, m. easel. 
Cire, f. wax. 
Cognee, f. hatchet. 
Colle, £ glue. 
Compas, m. compasses. 
Echafaudage, m. s€ xffold, 
Echelle, f. ladder. 
Enclume, f. anvil. 
Etau, m. vice. — 

Faucille, f. sickle. 
Faux, f. scythe. 
Fleau, m. flail. 
Fusil, m, gun 



Ours, m. bear. 
Poulain, m. colt. 
Pourceau, m. hog, swin*. 
Renard, m.fox. 
Singe, in. monkey. 
Taupe, f. mole. 
Tigre, m. tiger. 

Fisher, 

Merlan, m, whiting. 
Morue, f. codfish. 
Perche, f. perch. 
Requin, m. shark. 
Saumon, m. salmon. 
Sole, f. sole. 
Tanche, f. tench. 
Tortue, f. turtle. 
Truite, f. trout. 
Turbot, m. turbot. 

Insects, £& 
Lezard, m. lizard. 
Limacon, m. snail. 
Mouche, {.fly. 
Papillon, m. butterfly. 
Puce, f.fiea. 
Punaise, f. bug. 
Sangsue, f. leech. 
Sauterelle, f. locust. 
Serpent, in. serpent. 
Teigne, f. moth. 
Ver, m. worm. 
Vipere, f. viper. 

Tools. 

Hache, f. ax. 
Hamecon, m. fish-hook 
Herse, f. harrow. 
Houe, f. hoe. 
Ligne, f. line. 
Lime, {.file. 
Meule, f. grindstone. 
Pain a cache ter, m, wafet 
Pelle, f. shovel. 
Pince, f. crowbar. 
Pinceau, m. brush, pencxL 
Poulie, £ pulley. 
Rabot, m. plane. 
Rouleau, m. roller. 
Sabliere, f. sand-box. 
Scie, f. saw. 
Serrure, f. lock. 
Tenailles, f. p. pincer*. 
Truelle, £ trowel. 
Vis, f. screw. 



ABRfiVIATIONS. 

A.. P. A protester. 

A. S. P. Accepte sous prot6t. 

A. S. P. C. Accepte sous protdt pour 
a-compte. 

B oc - Baron. 

C er - Chevalier 

C te - Oomte. 

C tes6e - Comtesse. 

D r Docteur. 

pr. %[n. Docteui'-m^decin. 

E. Est. 

J.-C. Jesws- Christ. 

LL. AA. II. Leurs Altesses Impe*- 
riales. 

LL. AA. RR. Leurs Altesses Roy- 
ales. 

LL. AA. SS. Leurs Altesses Sere- 
nissimes. 

LL. Em. Leurs Eminences. 

LL. Ex. Leurs Excellences. 

LL. HH. Leurs Hautesses. 

LL. MM. Leurs Maj esters. 

LL. MM. II. Leurs Majesty's Imp£- 
riales. 

LL. MM. RR. Leur3 Majesty Roy- 
ales. 

M. ou M r - Monsieur. 

M tre - Maitre. 

M. A. Maison assure'e. 

M. A. C. I. Maison assured contre 
l'incendie. 

M d - Marchand. 

M de - Marchande. 

M lle - Mademoiselle. 

M= r - Monseigneur. 

M 1S - Marquis. 

M ise - Marquise. 

MM. Messieurs. 

M rae - Madame. 

Mst. Manuscrit. 

N. B. Nota bene. 

N.-D. Notre-Dame. 

N.-N.-E. ISord-nord-est. 

K-K-O. Nord-nord-ouesi 

1ST 1 ' Negotiant. 

j^te. Negociante. 

N°- Numero. 

jS". S. Notre-Seigneur. 

N< S. J.-O. Notre-Seigneur J6sus- 
Christ. 



ABBREVIATIONS. 

To be protested. 

Accepted under protest 

Accepted under protest on account. 

Baron. 

Chevalier, knight, sir. 

Count. 

Countess. 

Doctor. 

Doctor of medicine. 

Fast. 

Jesus Christ 

Their Imperial Highnesses. 

Their Royal Highnesses. 

Their Most Serene Highness**. 

Their Eminences. 
Their Excellencies. 
Their Highnesses. 
TJieir Majesties. 
Their Imperial Majesties. 

Their Royal Majesties). 

Sir, Mr. 

Master. 

House insured. 

House insured against fire. 

Dealer, shopkeeper, m. 

Dealer, shopkeeper, £ 

Miss. 

My lord. 

Marquis. 

Marchioness. 

Messrs. Gentlemen. 

Madam. Mrs. 

Manvscript. 

Not a Bene. 

Our Lady. 

North-north-east 

North-north-west. 

Merchant, m. 

Merchant, f. 

Number. 

Our Lord. 

Our Lord Jesus Christ. 



276 



ABBREVIATIONS. 



O. Ouest. 
Vo Pour cent 
O.-N. Ouest-nord. 
O.-S. Ouest-sud. 
P. S. Post-scriptum. 
R. P. Reverend pere. 
S. Sud. 

S. A. I. Son Altesse ImpSriale. 
S. A. R. Son Altesse Royale. 
S. A. S. Son Altesse Serenissime. 
S.-E. Sud-est. 
S. Em. Son Eminence. 
S. Ex. Son Excellence. 
S. G-. Sa Grandeur. 
S. H. Sa Hautesse. 

S. M. Sa Majeste. 

S. M. B. Sa Majeste Britannique. 

S. M. C. Sa Majeste Catholique. 

S. M. I. Sa Majeste Imperiale. 

S. M. R. Sa Majeste" Royale. 

S. M. S. Sa Majeste Suedoise. 

S. M. T. 0. Sa Majeste Tres Chre- 

tienne. 
S. M. T. F. Sa Majeste Tres Fidele. 
S.-O. Sud-ouest 
S. P. Saint Pere. 
SS. PP. Les Saints P&res. 
S. S Sa Saintete. 
S.-S.-E. Sud-sud-est. 
S.-S.-0. Sud-sud-ouest 



West. 
Per cent. 

West-north. 

West-south. 
Post scriptum. 
Reverend father. 
South. 

His or Her Imperial Highness. 
His or Her Royal Highness. 
His Most Serene Highness. 
South-east. 
His Eminence. 
His Excellency. 
His Grace (to a Bishop;. 
His Highness (the Turkish Enipcr 

or). 
His or Her Majesty. 
His or Her Britannic Majesty 
His Catholic Majesty. 
His Imperial Majesty. 
His Royal Majesty. 
His Swedish Majesty. 
His Most Christian Majesty. 

His Most Faithful Majesty. 

South-west. 

Holy Father. 

The Holy Fathers. 

His Holiness. 

South-south-east 

South-seutk-isesL 



NEW FRENCH COURSE. 

PART SECOND. 



§ 1. — Parts of Speech. 
(1 ) There are, in French, ten sorts of words or parts of speech. 
Nouns or Substantives, Participles, 

Articles, Adverbs, 

Adjectives, Prepositions, 

Pronouns, Conjunctions, 

Verbs, Interjections. 

(2.) These are divided into variable, and invariable words. 
(3.) The variable words are those the termination of which ad- 
mits of various changes; by these changes various modifications of 
meaning are expressed. The variable words are of six kinds : 
The Noun, The Pronoun, 

The Article, The Verb, 

The Adjective, The Participle. 

(4.) The invariable words are those the termination of which 
never changes : 

The Adverb, The Conjunction, 

The Preposition, The Interjection. 

(5.) AH variable parts of speech have two numbers: the singular, 
which denotes but one, and the plural, which denotes more than one. 
(6.) All variable parts of speech, except the verb, have two gen 
ders: the masculine and the feminine. 

§ 2. — Cases. 

The cases adopted by French grammarians are: 

(1.) The nominatif or sujet: answering to the nominative or sub. 
ject of the English, and to the nominative of the Latin. 

(2 1.) The regime direct, or direct object of the English, accusative 
of the Latin. 

(3.) The regime indirect, indirect object of the English, answers to 
the oblique cases of the Latin, the genitive, dative, and ablative. 



278 GENDER. § 3, 4, 5. 

§ 3. — The Noun or Substantive. 

(1.) TUe noun or substantive is a word which serves to name a 
person or a thing ; as, Jean, John ; maison, house. 

(2.) There are two sorts of nouns : proper and common. 

(3.) A proper noun is applied to a particular person, or thing ; as, 
Napoleon, Napoieon; Paris, Paris. 

(4.) A common noun belongs to a whole class of objects ; as, livre, 
oook , hoinme, man. 

(5.) Some common nouns, although singular in number, presen 
to the mind the idea of several persons or things, forming a collec 
tion : they are for this reason denominated collective nouns ; as, troupe, 
troop ; peuple, people. 

(6.) Collective nouns are general, or partitive : general, when they 
represent an entire collection ; as, l'armee des Francais. the army of 
the French: partitive, when they represent a partial collection; as, 
une troupe de soldats francais, a troop of French soldiers. 

(7.) A common noun composed of several words, as, chef-d'oeuvre, 
masterpiece, avant-coureur, forerunner, is called a compound noun. 

(8.) Of the two properties of nouns, gender and number, we shall 
commence with the first. 

§ 4. — Gender. 

(1.) There are, in the French language, only two genders: the 
masculine and the feminine. 

(2.) The masculine belongs to men, and animals of the male kind 
as, Charles, Charles ; lion, lion. 

(3.) The feminine gender belongs to women, and animals of the 
female kind; as, Sophie, Sophia; lionne, lioness. 

(4,) Through imitation — often on account of derivation, often 
without any real motive — the masculine and feminine genders have 
been given, in French, to tfie names of inanimate objects : thus, pa- 
pier, paper, is masculine, and plume, pen, is feminine. 

8 5. — Rules for determining Gender by the Meaning. 



Masculine. 

(1.) Male beings; as, homme, 
man ; lion, lion. 

(2.) Objects to which male qua- 
lities are attributed : ange, angel ; 
genie, genius (a spirit) ; soleil, 
sun. 

(3.) The names of the seasons : 
le prin temps, the spring, &c. ; and 
of the months, Janvier, January ; 
fevrier, February, &c. 

(4.) The days of the week: 



Feminine. 

(1.) Female beings : as, femme, 
woman; lionne, lioness. 

(2.) Objects to which fema e 
qualities are attributed : fee, fairy; 
lune, moon. 

(3.) Virtues : la charite, charity ; 
except courage, courage ; merite, 
merit, which are masc. 

(4.) Vices : la mechancete, wick- 
edness: except Porgueil, pride, 
masc. 



GENDER. § 5. 



279 



Masculine. 
.undi, Monday; mardi, Tuesday, 
&c. 



(5.) ' The names of the cardinal 
points and the winds : as, Pest, the 
East; Youest,the West, &c. [See 
exceptions opposite.] 

(6.) The names used in the 
French decimal system : as, cen- 
time (hundredth part of a franc) ; 
kilogramme (1000 grammes, about 
two pounds) ; metre, &c. 

(7.) Metals : le fer, iron ; l'acier, 
Heel, &c. 

(8.) Colors : le vert, green ; le 
jaune, yellow. 

(9.) The names of empires and 
kingdoms when ending with a con- 
sonant: le Danemarc, Denmark; 
e Bresil, Brazil. 

(10.) Mountains : le JmsL,Mount 
Jura , le Puy-de-Dome, (*) the 
Puy de Dome ; le Cenis, le St. Ber- 
nard, Mount Cenis, Mount Si. Ber- 
nard. 

(11.) The names of rivers when 
ending with a consonant : le Rhin, 
the Rhine; le Nil, the Nile. 



(12.) Trees, shrubs: le chene, 
the oak ; le frene, the ash ; le rosier, 
the rose-bush. [Exceptions op- 
posite.] 

(13.) The name of a language : 
as, le frangais, French ; Palle- 
mand, German, &c. 

(14.) The letters of the alpha- 
bet : un a, an a ; un z, a z. 

(15.) Compound words formed 
of a verb and of a noun, either 
masculine or feminine, or of a 
pronoun and a verb : porte-feuille, 
focket~book ; rendez-vous, rendez- 
vous. 



Feminine. 

(5.) Festivals : la Saint Jean, i.e 

la fete de St. Jean, St. John's 

day ; la Chandeleur, Candlemas . 

except Noel, Christmas, masc. 

Bise, a poetical term for North 
wind. Tramontane, a term applied 
on the Mediterranean to the North 
wind. Brise, breeze; moussons, 
trade-winds. 



(5.) The names of countries 
when ending in e mute : la France ; 
FEspagne, l'Amerique, &c. 

Exc. Bengale, Hanovre, Me- 
xique, Peloponese. 

(6.) Chains of mountains in the 
plural : les Alpes, the Alps ; lea 
Pyrenees, the Pyrenees; les Vo- 
ges, les Cevennes, &c. 

(7.) The names of rivers when 
ending with e mute : la Seine, the 
Seine; la Loire, the Loire. 

Exc. Le Rhone, the Rhone; le 
Danube, le Tibre, le Cocyte, masc. 

(8.) Aubepine, hawthorn ; bour- 
daine, black alder; epine, thorn; 
hieble, dwarf elder ; ronce, brier , 
yeuse, ilex. 



(9.) Garde-robe, wardrobe , 
perce-neige, spring-crocus; perce- 
feuille, hare's-ear. 



280 



GENDER BY THE TERMINATION. 8 0. 



Feminine 



(10.) Moitie, half; and all num- 
bers ending with aim : douzainoi 
dozen ; centaine, hundred, &c. 



Masculine, 

(16.) Nouns, pronouns, verbs, 
&c., used substantively : le boire 
et le manger, eating and drinking. 

(17.) Numbers — cardinal, ordi- 
nal, and proportional — used sub- 
stantively : le dix, the tenth ; le 
neuvieme, the ninth; le tiers, the 
third. [Exceptions opposite.] 

§ 6. — Gender, by the termination. 

(1.) The exceptions to the masculine will be found opposite the 
termination, in the feminine column ; and the exceptions to the fem- 
inine, in the masculine column, also opposite : 

(2.) Consonants. 

B 

Masculine Terminations. Feminine Terminations. 

Example, English* 



ZT *-**»; 


English. 


Terrain* 
ation. 


eb Horeb, 


Mount Horeb. 




UB radoub, 


refitting a ship. 




mb plomb, 


lead. 






( 


* 


ac sac, 


sack. 




ec bee, 


beak. 




ic mastic, 


putty. 




oc soc, 


ploughshare. 




uc due, 


duke. 




nc tronc, 


trunk. 




rc clerc, 


clerk. 




sc fisc, 


revenue. 

I 


) 


ed pied, 


foot. 




id nid, 


nest. 




od tripod, 


tripod. 




xtd Talmud, 


Talmud. 




nd marchand, 


merchant. 




rd bord, 


border. 

] 


? 


ef chef, 


chief. 




if suif, 


tallow. 




UF 03uf, 


egg- 




rf cerf, 


stag. 





Exc. — clef, key ; nef, shtp^ 
nave ; soif, thirsU 



hq rang rank. 

ck arack, arrack. 



G 

I 
K 



GENDER BY THE TERMINATION. § 6. 



281 



Masculine Terminations. 



Feminine Terminations, 



AL 


bal, 


ball. 


EL 


sel, 


salt 


IL 


soleil, 


sun. 


OL 


sol, 


soil. 


UL 


calcul, 


calculation. 


AM 


Adam, 


Adam. 


EM 


harem, 


harem. 


IM 


daim, 


deer. 


OM 


nom, 


name. 


UM 


parfum, 


perfume. 


A* 


cadran, 


dial. 


EN 


examen, 


examination. 


IN 


r / un, 


grape. 


ON 


not preceded by is or gi y 




ol, t't, XI 






baton, 


stick. 




gazon, 


turf. 




blason, 


blazon. 



M 



N 



bison, bison; horizon, ho- 
rizon; oison, gosling; 
poison, poison ; tison, 
firebrand; 

bastion, bastion; bestion, 
figure-head of a ship. 



ISON 



Exc. — faim, hunger male, 
faim, excessive hunger. 



Exc. — .fin, end ; main, hand. 

Exc— chanson, song; cuis- 
son, baking ; contre- 
facon, counterfeiting ; 
facon. mode ; moisson, 
harvest; moussons, trade- 
winds ; rancon, ransom 

maison, house. 

Exceptions opposite. 



gion region, region. 

sion pension, pension. 

tion question, question. 

xion reflexion, reflection 



AP 


drap, cloth. 






OP 


galop, gallop. 






UP 


coup, blow. 


( 


i 


OQ 


coq-d'Inde, turkey. 


I 


I 

> 


AR 


char, car. 


I 


£R 


fer, iron. 




Exc. — cuiller, spo<r* ci*»t 


IR 


plaisir, pleasure. 




sea. 
chair, flesh. 


OR 


or, gold. 






UR 


not preceded by e, 
azur, azure. 




Exc. — tour, tower. 




bonheur, happiness ; 


eoeur, 


EUR chaleur, heat 




heart; choeur, chorus 


; de- 


hauteur, height, 




nominateur, denominator ; 


Exceptions opposite. 




de shonneur, dishonor; 


equa- 






teur, equator ; exterieur, 





282 



GENDER BT THE TERMINATION.- 



6. 



/Masculine Terminations, 
exterior; honneur, honor; 
interieur, interior; labeur, 
labor ; malheur, misfor- 
tune; multiplicateur, mul- 
tiplier; pleurs, tears re- 
gulateur, regulator ; vsnti- 
lateur, ventilator. 



R — Continued. 

Feminine Terminations. 
eur — Continued. 



Exceptions opposite. 



AS 


bras, 


arm. 


ES 


gres, 


sandstone. 


IS 


souris, 


smile. 


OS 


OS, 


bone. 


US 


blocus, 


blockade. 


PS 


temps, 


weather. 


£S 


vers, 


verse. 


AT 


climat, 


climate. 


ET 


arret, 


arrest. 


IT 


lit, 


bed. 


OT 


cachot, 


dungeon. 


UT 


bout, 


end. 


NT 


pont, 


bridge. 



rt tort, 



wrong. 



T 



amaryllis, amaryllis ; bre 
bis, sheep ; fois, time : sou- 
ris, mouse ; vis., screw ; oa- 
sis, oasis. 



foret, forest. 

nuit, night. 

dot, dower. 

dent, tooth ; gent, people , 

jument, mare. 

part, share ; la plupart, the 

most. 



AX 
EX 


climax, 
silex, 


climax. 

silex. 






IX 


prix, 


price. 






UX 

NX 


courroux, 
lynx, 


anger, 
lynx. 


: 


5 


AZ 

EZ 


gaz, 
nez, 


gas. 
7iose. 






JZ 


riz, 


rice. 












(3.) Vowels. 
A 


JL 


acacia, 


acacia. 







Exc. — croix, cross ; noix, 
nut ; paix, peace ; voix, 
voice ; perdrix, partridge , 
poix, pitch. 

Exc. — chaux, lime ; faux, 
scythe ; toux, cough. 



E 



Exc. — vinula, a sort of cat- 
erpillar ; sepia, sepia. 



A complete classification of nouns ending in e mute (a majority of 
which are feminine) would be, from its length, of little practical use to 
the student, who would find it easier to apply to his dictionary than to 



GENDERS BY THE TERMINATION. 8 6. 



283 



Bucft a list. "We will give here the principal terminations, classing them 
according to their gender, and placing the exceptions under the examples 
given for the terminations, instead of putting them, as hitherto, in the 
opposite column. 



ABE 



4CLE 



ACRE 



AGE 



AP>E 



Masculine Terminations. 

astrolabe, astrolab. 

Exc. — Souabe, Suabia; 
syllabe, syllable. 

miracle, miracle. 

Exc. — debacle, breaking 
up of the ice ; made, a 
mineral. 

sacre, consecration. 

Exc. — nacre, mother of 
pearl. 

courage, courage. 

Exc. — imsige,image ; rage, 
rage ; page, page of a 
book ; cage, cage ; nage, 
swimming; plage, beach. 

salaire, salary. 

Exc— affaire, affair ; aire, 
floor; glaire, white of 
egg ; grammaire, gram- 
mar ; paire, pair ; jugu- 
\airejugular-vein;haire, 
hair-cloth; chaire, pul- 
pit ; serpentaire, snake- 
root; parietaire, pelli- 
tory, and a few other 
names of plants. 

hectare, hectare (a 

measure). 

cadastre, register. 

chaume, thatch. 

Exc. — paume, tennis. 
e not immediately preceded 
by t or ti: abrege, 
abridgment. 
egf college, college. 

Exc. — Norvege, Norway. 
eme eareme, lent. 

Exc. — creme, cream ; 
breme, bream ; bireme, 
trireme, galley with two 
or three rows of oars. 
etre pretre, priest. 

Exc. — fenetre, window ; 
guetre, gaiter. 
EURRE beurre, butter 

idre cidre, cider. 



ARE 



ASTRE 
AUME 



ACE 



ADE 



AIE 
ANCE 
ANSE 
ASSE 



EE 



EINE 
ENCE 

ENNE 

ENSE 

ESSE 

IE 



IERE 
INE 

IQUE 
IVE 

ISSE 
LLE 



Feminine Terminations. 

grace, grace. 

Exc. — espace, space. 

parade, parade. 

Exc. — stade, stadium 
grade, grade. 

haie, hedge. 

importance, importance. 

danse, dance. 

masse, mass. 

Exc— Parnasse, Par- 
nassus. 

nuee, cloud. 

Exc — apogee, apogee ; 
athee, atheist ; camee, 
cameo ; colisee, coli- 
seum ; coryphee, cory- 
pheus; empyree, highest 
heaven ; lycee, lyceum ; 
mausolee, mausoleum ; 
musee, museum ; hy- 
menee, marriage; pe- 
rigee, perigee ; pygmee, 
pygmy; trochee, trochee ; 
trophee, trophy; spon- 
dee, spondee; scarabee, 
scarabee. 

baleine, whale. 

cadence, cadence. 

Exc. — silence, silence. 

antienne, anthem. 

Exc. — renne, reindeer. 

offense, offence. 

tristesse, sadness. 

charpie, lint. 

Exc. — genie, genius; peri- 
helie, perihelion ; incen- 
die, conflagration ; para- 
pluie, umbrella; pavie, 
clingstone peach. 

chaudiere, boiler, 
doctrine, 
practice, 
shore. 

sliding-shutler, 
straw. 



doctrine, 

pratique, 

rive, 

coulisse, 

paille, 



Exc. — interval le, interval ; 



284 



GENDER. § 7. 



Masculine Terminations. 
isme prisme, prism. 

Isque risque, risk. 

Exc. — bisque, soup. 
iste ebeniste, cabinet-maker. 
Exc. — batiste, cambric ; 
liste, list ; piste, track. 
uge refuge, refuge. 

uste arbusto, shrub. 



OSSE 



PPE 
RRE 



TTE 



URE 
USE 
TJVE 



Feminine Terminations. 

libelle, libel; vermlcelle, 
vermicelli ; violoncelle, 
violoncello ; ch e vre- 

feuille, honey-suckle ; 
portefeuille, pocket-book} 
vaudeville, vaudeville. 

bosse, bunch. 

Exc. — colosse, colossus ; 
carrosse, coach. 

nappe, table-cloth. 

not preceded by u. 

terre, land. 

Exa — lierre, hy , parterre, 
flower-garden ; tonnerre, 
thunder ; paratonnerre, 
lightning-rod ; verre, 
glass. 

amitie, friendship. 

patte, paw. 

Exc. — amulette, amulet ; 
squelette, skeleton. 

nature, nature. 

excuse, excuse 

cuve, tub. 



U 



I midi, noon. 

Exc. — foi, faith ; fourmi, 
ant; apres-midi, after- 
noon; loL law; merci, 
mercy. 

u revenu, revenue. 
Exc. — bru, daughter-in- 
law ; vertu, virtue ; glu, 
bird-lime; eau, water; 
peau, skin ; tribu, tribe. 

^ 7. — Nouns Masculine in one acceptation, and Feminist* 
in the other. 





Masculine. 






Feminine. 


Aigle, 




eagle. 


Aigle, 




standard. 


Aune, 




alder. 


Aune, 




ell. 


Barbe, 




Barbary horse. 


Barbe, 




beard. 


Carpe, 




wrist {anatomy). 


Carpe, 




carp 


Cartouche, 




ornaments (sculp- 


Cartouche, 


cartridge. 






ture). 








Couple, 




male and female. 


Couple, 




a pair y a brace, two, 


Crepe, 




crape. 


Crepe, 




pancake. 


Pelice (sing 


■•), 


delight. 


Delices 


(pi-), 


delights. 



PLURAL OF NOUNS.--8 8. 



285 



Masculine. 




Feminine. 


Espace, 


space. 


Espace, 


leading (in % r 
ing). 








Exemple, 


example. 


Exemple, 


writing-copy. 


Faux, 


forgery. 


Faux, 


scythe. 


Foret, 


drill. 


Foret, 


forest. 


Greffe, 


office of clerk of a 
court. 


Greffe, 


graft. 


Heliotrope, 


sunflower. 


Heliotrope, 


a mineral 


Hymne, 


classical chant. 


Hymn, 


Christian hymn. 


Livre, 


book. 


Livre, 


pound. 


Manche 


handle. 


Manche, 


sleeve. 


Me moire, 


memoir, bill. 


Memoire, 


memory. 


Mode, 


mode,(grammar,) 
system. 


Mode, 


fashion. 


Moule, 


mould, model. 


Moule, 


shell-fish. 


(Euvre, (m. d- f.) 


work. 


(Euvres, 


literary works 


Office, 


divine service. 


Office, 


pantry. 


Ombre, 


a game. 


Ombre, 


shadow, spectre 


Orgue (sing.), 


organ. 


Orgues (pi.), 


organ. 


Palme, 


hand, a measure. 


Palme, 


the advantage. 


Panache, 


plume. 


Panache, 


pea-hen. 


Parallele, 


comparison. 


Parallele, 


parallel line. 


Pendule, 


pendulum. 


Pendule, 


clock. 


Periode, 


acme, height. 


Periode, 


period, epoch. 


Pivoine, 


a bird. 


Pivoine, 


a flower. 


Plane, 


plane-tree. 


Plane, 


joiner's tool. 


Platine, 


platina. 


Platines, 


small metallic 

plates. 
frying-pan. 


Poele, 


stove, pall. 


Poele, 


Poste, 


place, office. 


Poste, 


post-office. 


Pretexte, 


pretence. 


Pretexte, 


a Roman robe. 


Regale, 


organ-pipe. 


Regale, right 


of receiving the rev- 






enues of a 


vacant bishopric. 


Remise, 


hackney-coach. 


Remise, 


carriage-house. 


Serpentaire, 
Solde, 


constellation. 


Serpentaire, 


dragon-wort. 


balance of account. 


Solde, 


pay. 


Somme, 


nap, sleep. 


Somme, 


sum. 


Souris, 


smile. 


Souris, 


mouse. 


Tour, 


tour, turn, trick. 


Tour, 


tower. 


Vague, 


space, emptiness. 


Vague, 


wave. 


Vase, 


vase, vessel. 


Vase, 


mire, slime 


Voile, 


veil. 


Voile, 


sail. 



§ 8. — Formation of the Plural Nouns. 

(1.) The plural in French, as in English, is formed by the addition 
of s to the singular : 

Singular. Plural. 

maison, house ; maisons, houses. 

ville, town; villes, towns. 

(2 ) First exception. — Nouns ending in the singular with s, x % or %, 
have the same form in the plural : 



286 PLURAL OF NOUNS. § 8. 



Singular. 


Plural 


fils, son ; 


fils, sons. 


voix, voice ; 


voix, voices. 


nez, nose ; 


nez, noses. 



(3.) Second exception. — Nouns ending in the singular with au and 
eu, take x in the plural : 

Singular. Plural. 

chapeau, hat ; chapeaux, hats. 

feu, fire ; feux, fires. 

(4) Third exception. — The following nouns ending in ou take x 
in the plural : 

Singular. Plural. 

bijou, jewel ; bijoux, jewels. 

caillou, pebble ; cailloux, pebbles. 

chou, cabbage ; choux, cabbages. 

genou, knee ; genoux, knees. 

hibou, owl ; hiboux, owls. 

joujou, plaything ; joujoux, playthings. 

(h.) Fourth exception. — The following nouns ending in ail, change 
that termination into aux in the plural : 

Singular. Plural. 

bail, lease ; baux, leases. 

corail, coral ; coraux, corals. 

email, enamel; emaux, enamels. 

soupirail, air-hole ; soupiraux, air-holes. 

sous bail, under-lease ; sous-baux, under-leases 

travail, labor ; travaux, labors. 

(6.) Fifth exception. — The following nouns form their plural irreg* 
ularly : 

Singular. Plural. 

ail, garlic ; aux. 

betail, cattle. bestiaux. 

Bercail, sheepfold y has no plural. 
(7.) Sixth exception. — Nouns ending in the singular with c/, change 
that termination into aux in the plural :* 

Singular. Plural. 

general, general ; ge'neraux, generals. 

cheyal, horse ; chevaux, horses. 

mal, evil ; maux, evils. 

(8.) Ciel, ceil, a'ieul, travail, have two plurals : 
Singular. Plural. 

ciel, heaven; cieux, heavens. 

• _l j tester of a bed; . , j testers of beds. 

\ sky of a picture; \ skies of pictures. 

* Bal, ball; carnaval, carnival; chacal, jackal ; regal, treat, folkw the 
general rule. 



PLURAL OF COMPOUND NOUNS. § 9. 287 

ceil t\je; yeux, eyes. 

o&il de-bceuf, oval window ; oeils-de-bceuf, oval window*, 

aieul ancestor ; aieux, ancestors. 

aieul, grandfather ; aieuls, grandfathers. 

travail, labor; travaux, labors. 

travail, trave; travails, traves. 

§ 9. — Plural of Compound Nouns. 

(I.) When two nouns form a compound substantive, both take the 
.Jural ending: 

Singular. Plural. 

chef-lieu, chief place ; chefs-lieux, chief places 

lieutenant-colonel, lieutenant- lieutenants -colonels, lieutenant- 
colonel, colonels. 

(2.) When a compound noun is formed of two substantives joined 
by a preposition, the first only takes the plural ending : 
Singular Plural. 

arc-en-ciel, rainbow ; arcs-en-ciel, rainbows. 

chef-d'oeuvre, masterpiece ; chefs-d'oeuvre, masterpieces. 

The words tete-a-tete and coq-a-1'fcne {an incongruous discourse), remain 
unchanged in the plural. 

(3.) When a noun and an adjective form a compound noun, botn 
are varied in the plural : 

Singular. Plural. 

gentilhomme, nobleman ; gentilshommes, noblemen. 

porte-cochere, carriage-door ; portes-cocheres, carriage-doors. 
basse-cour, poultry -yard , basses-cours, poultry-yards. 

(4.) For the sake of euphony, the mark of the -plural* is emitted 
fi. the adjective of the following compound w T ords : 
Singular. Plural. 

grand'mere, grandmother ; grand'meres, grandmothers. 

grand'messe, high-mass ; grand'messes, high-masses. 

(5.) The words, Monsieur, Sir, Mr., gentleman ; Madame, Madam^ 
or Mrs. , Mademoiselle, Miss, form their plural as follows : 
Singular. Plural. 

Monsieur, Sir, etc. ; Messieurs, sirs, gentlemen. 

Madame, Madam, etc. ; Mesdames, ladies, etc. 

Mademoiselle, Miss, etc. ; Mesdemoiselles, young ladies, etc. 

(6.) In words composed of a noun and a verb, a preposition, or an 
adverb, the noun takes the form of the plural ; provided, however 
there is plurality in the idea. 

Singular. Plural. 

passe-port, passport ; passe-ports, passports. 

avant-garde, vanguard; avant-gardes, vanguards. 

* The mark of the feminine also 



288 



PLURAL OF NOUNS.- 



10, 11, 12. 



(7.) Compound nouns of which the second word indicates plu- 
rality, take s in the singular and plural : 

Singular. Plural 

cure-dents, a tooth-pick ; cure-dents, tooth-picks. 

caste-noisettes, nut-crackers ; caste-noisettes, nut-crackers. 

(8.) Words composed of two verbs, or of a verb joined to an acU 
verb, or a preposition, are invariable : 

Singular. Plural. 

passe-partout, master-key ; passe-partout, master-keys. 

pour-boire, coachman' 's fee ; pour-boire, coachman } s fees. 

§ 10. — Nouns which have no Plural. 

(1.) The nouns of metals considered in themselves: as, or, gold , 
argent, silver ; ^lomb, lead; etain, pewter ; fer, iron; cuivre, copper , 
vif argent, quicksilver, &c. 

(2.) Aromas : such as baume, balsam ; encens, incense, &c. 

(3.) The names of virtues and vices, and some names relating to 
physical and moral man: as, la jeunesse, youth; la beaute, beauty ; la 
bonte, goodness ; le courage, courage. 

(4.) Adjectives used substantively : as, le beau, the beautiful ; 1'utile. 
'he useful, &c. 

§ 11. — Nouns which have no Singular in the sense herb 

GIVEN. 

Arrhes, 

Annales, 

Appas, 

Arrerages, 

Arrets (etre a 

Assises, 

Broussailles, 

Catacombes, 

Ciseaux, 

Confins, 

Denrees, 

Vivres, 

Decombres, 

Etrennes, 

Environs, 

Alentours, 

§ 12. — Proper Names. 

(1.) Proper names, when not used figuratively, are invariable, even 
when preceded by the plural article, les.(*) 



earnest money. 


Entraves, 


difficulties. 


annals. 


Fiancailles, 


betrothing. 


charms. 


Fune>ailles, 


funeral. 


arrears. 


Frais, 


expenses, costs. 


, to be under arrest. 


Gages, 


wages. 


assizes. 


Gens, 


people. 


brushwood. 


Lunettes, 


spectacles. 


catacombs. 


Moeurs, 


manners. 


scissors. 


Mouchettes, 


snuffers. 


confines. 


Pierreries, 


jewels, diamonds* 




Pincettes, 


tongs. 


provisions. 


Pleurs, 


tears. 


ruins. 


Semailles, 


seeding time. 


new year's presents. 


Tenebres, 


darkness. 




Tenailles, 


pincers. 


environs. 


Vitraux, 


window-glass. 



L'Espagne s'honore d'avoir pro- 
duit les deux Seneque. 

Raynouaed. 



Spain prides itself on having 
given bitth to the two Senecas. 



* Often used by the French before the names of celebrated individuals 



TBE ARTICLE. § 13. 289 



Locke, Montesquieu, J. J. Rous- 
seau, as they arose in Europe, called 
upon modern nations to claim their 
liberty. 



Les Locke, les Montesquieu, les 
T. J. Rousseau en se levant en 
Europe, appelerent les peuples 
modernes a la liberte. 

Chateaubriand. 

(2.) When proper names are used figuratively, they take the form 
of the plural. 

La France % eu ses Cesar s et ses I France has had its Ccesars and 
Pympees. Noel et Chafsal. | Pompeys. 

That is. generals like Pompey and Csesar. 

Un coup d'oeil de Louis enfan- j A glance from Louis produced 
taits des Corneilles. Delille. | Corneilles. 

That is, poets like Corneille. 

§ 13. — The Article. 

(1.) The article is a word prefixed to a noun, or to a vvord used 
substantively, to determine the extent of its signification. 

(2.) Modern French grammarians recognize only one article, le. 

(3.) This article, contracted with the preposition de, is often used 
before a word in a partitive sense. [§ 78.] 

(4.) The words un, masc, une, fern., answering to the indefinite 
article a or an in English, are now very properly* classed with 
the numeral adjectives. We shall, however, for the sake of conven- 
ience, devote a few lines to them under this head. 

(5.) The article le, the, is la for the feminine, and les for the plural. 

(6.) The article is subject to two kinds of changes: elision [§ 146] 
and contraction. 

(7.) Elision is the suppression of the letters e, a, which are replaced 
by an apostrophe [ ' ] before a vowel, or an h mute [seeL.3 (11)] : thus, 

l'esprit, the mind, instead of le esprit. 

l'amitie, the friendship, " la amitie. 

lhomme, the man, " le homme. 

l'hunianite, humanity, " la huoianite. 

(8.) Contraction is the union of the article le, les, with one of the 
prepositions, a, de. Thus, we say by contraction : 

au livre, to the book, instead of a le livre. 

aux fruits, to the fruits, " a les fruits, 

du livre, of the book, " de le livre. 

des fruits, of the fruits, " de les fruits. 

(9.) The contractions au, du, are not used before masculine words, 
commencing with a vowel, or an h mute, nor before fern nine words: 



* No difference can be made in rendering English into French, between 
a and one, so that in French un hortime means a man, or one than. Tha 
other numeral adjectives might with as much propiiety have been called 
\rticles as this word un. 

13 



£90 



THE ARTIC1E. § 13. 



a Thomme, to the man. 

a l'ami, to the friend, 

de l'homme, of the man. 

de rami, of the friend. 

(10.) The arti< le used before words taken in a partitive sense [\ 78 
(1)], comes in connection or contraction with the preposition de; it is 
rendered in English by some or any, expressed or understood : 

du pain, m. some bread, or of the bread (a part of). 

de r argent, m. money, some money, of the money {a part of) 

de la viande, f. meat, some meat, of the meat (a part of) 

de Pargenterie, f. silver-plate, some silver-plate, of the silver-plate(a/>art o/*). 
des livres, m. books, some books, of the books (a part of). 

(11.) The English indefinite article, a or an, is rendered in French 
by un for the masculine, and une for the feminine ; when those words 
are connected with the preposition de, the e of the preposition ia 
elided . 

Masculine. Feminine. 

un horn me, a man, une femme, a woman 

d'un humme, of or from a man. d'une femme, of or from a woman, 
a un homme, at or to a man. a une femme, at or to a wavaan. 

Resume of the above Observations. 



le, before a masculine word, 
la, before a feminine word, 
T, before a word of either 

gender, 
les, for the plural, in all cases. 
du, before a masculine word, j 
de la, before a feminine word, ( 
de L', before a word of either 

gender, 
des, for the plural, in all cases. 
au, before a masculine word, 
a la, before a feminine word, 
a T, before a word of either 

gender, 
aux, for the plural, in all cases. 
un, before a masculine noun, 
une, before a feminine noun, 
d'un, before a masculine noun, 
d'une, before a feminine noun, 
a un, before a masculine noun, 
a une, before a feminine noun, 

Le pere et la mere sont au de- 
sespoir. B. de St. Pierre. 

jt'amitie dans nos coeurs verse un 
bonheur paisible. Demoustier. 

Z'honneur aux grands coeurs est 
plus cher que la vie. Corneille. 

JLes&lless et les garcons chanterent 
en chceur. B. de St. Pierre. 



commencing with* 

a consonant, 
commencing with 
a vowel or h mute, 



V the. 



commencing with 

a consonant, 
commencing with 
a vowel or h mute, 

commencing with 

a consonant, 
commencing with 
a vowel or h mute, 



of the, 
from the, 
some, 
any. 



at or to the. 



a, an, one. 



Iof or ft o?n a, a*, on 
at or to a, an, one. 

The father and mother are t j 
fair. 

Friendsh ip pours a peaceful A«f • 
piness into our hearts. 

Honor is dearer than life to m V < 
hearts. 

The boys and girls sung in cha v-% 



THE ADJECTIVE. — § 14-1, § 14-2. 



291 



Sur les rives du Gange on voit 
fleurir Z'6bene. Delille. 

La violette se cache timid em ent 
au milieu des nlles de /'ombre. 
Deleuze. 

Le remords se reveille au cri de 
la nature. De Belloy. 

La nioitie des humains vit aux 
depens de /'autre. Destouches. 



On the banks of the Ganges we see 
the ebony in bloom. 

The violet conceals herself timidly 
in the midst of the daughters of the 
shade. 

Remorse is aroused by the cry of 
nature. 

The half of mankind lives at the 
expense of the other. 



§ 14-1. — The Adjective. 

(1.) The adjective serves to denote the quality or manner of being 
of the noun. 

(2.) Adjectives are of two sorts : qualifying adjectives and determin- 
ing adjectives. 

(3.) We call qualifying adjectives those which add to the idea of the 
object, that of a quality proper to it; as bon, good; noble, noble, 
courugeux, courageous. 

(4.) Determining adjectives are those which add to the idea of the 
object, that of a particular limitation or determination; as quelque, 
some ; tout, all ; autre, other ; mon, my ; nul, no ; un, one ; deux, two. 

§ 14-2. — Qualifying Adjectives. 

(1.) These adjectives may express qualities: 1. Simply; 2. With 
comparison ; 3. Carried to a very high degree. Thence the three de- 
grees of qualification : the positive, the comparative, and the superla- 
tive. 

(2.) The positive is nothing but the adjective in its simplest signi- 
fication : 



Moi, je suis a Paris, trisle, pauvre, 
reclus. Boileau. 



At Paris I am sad, poor, and se- 
cluded. » 



(3.) The comparative is the adjective expressing a comparison be- 
tween two or several objects. There is, then, between the objects 
compared, a relation of equality, superiority, or inferiority. 

(4.) The comparison of equality expresses a quality in the same de- 
gree in the objects compared ; it is formed* by placing aussi, as, or 
autant, as much, before the adjective, and the conjunction que, 
after it : 

Germany is as populous as Fran 



L'Allemagne est aussi peuplde 
qsie la France. Voltaire. 

A leur tete est le chien, superbe 
uutant ^w'utile. Delille. 



At their head stands the dog y 
noble as usefi*. 



* In French, adjectives cannot be compared, as in English, by means of 
changes in the termination : with the exception of meilleur, better ; moin- 
dre, less ; md pire, worse, all comparisons must be fcrmed by means of 
adverbs. 



292 QUALIFYING ADJECTIVES. § 14-2. 

(5.) Tha relation or comparison of superiority expresses a quality 
In a higher degree in one object than in another ; this comparison is 
formed by placing p us, more, before the adjective, and que, than x 
after it : 

Les actions sont plus sinceres que Actions are more sincere than 

ies paroles. Mlle. de Scudery. words. 

Le pied du cerf est mieux fait que The foot of the stag is better 

celui du boeuf. Buffon. formed than that of the ox. 

(6.) The comparison of inferiority expresses a quality in a lower ■ 
degree in one object than in another ; it is formed by placing moins, 
less, before the adjective, and que, than, after it: 

Le naufrage et la mort sont moins Shipwreck and death are less fatal 

funestes que les plaisirs qui atta- than those pleasures which attack 
quent la vertu. Fenelon. virtue. 

(7.) We have only three adjectives which are comparatives of them- 
selves : meilleur, better ;* moindre, less ; pire, worse. 

Meilleur, instead of plus bon, which is never used in the senae of 

better : 

II n'est meilleur ami ni parent I We have no better friend, no bet- 
que soi-mdme. La Fontaine. | ter relation than ourselves, 

Pire, instead of plus mauvais, which may however be used: 

Le remede est parfois pire que le I The remedy is at times worse than 
mal. Lenoble. | the evil, 

Moindre, instead of plus petit, an expression also in use : 

Ce n'est pas 6tre petit que d'etre I Being less than great is not being 
moindre qu'un grand. Boiste. j small. 

(8.) The superlative, or third degree of qualification, expresses the 
quality carried to a. very high, or to the highest degree; thence there 
are two sorts of superlatives : the relative and the absolute. 

* Mieux, better ; pis, worse; moins, less. The English words better, 
worse, less, are sometimes adverbs, and when they are so, should be ren- 
dered by the several words placed at the commencement of this note. A 
practical way of determining the nature of those words in English is : 

1. To change the word better into the expression "in a better manner" 
If this change may be made without changing the sense, the word better 
k an adverb, and must be rendered by mieux : 

He reads better (in a better man- I II lit mieux que son frere. 
tier) than his brother. 

2. If you can change worse into " in a worse manner" it should be trans- 
lated pis, or, more elegantly, plus mal : 

He reads worse (in a worse man- I II lit pis (plus mal) que sor> 
ner) than his brother. | frere. 

3. When you may substitute " a smaller amount or quantity" for the 
word less, it should be rendered moins : 

He reads less (a smaPer amount) | II lit moins que son frfcre, 
thxn his brother 



FEMININE OF ADJECTIVES 



is, ie. 



293 



(9.) The superlative relative marks a very high or the highest de- 
gree relatively, or with comparison: it is formed by placing le> la, les, 
the ; mon, my ; ton, thy ; son, his ; notre, our ; votre, your ; leir, leurs, 
their, before the comparative of superiority or inferiority: 

A benefit received is the most %Qr 



Un bienfait recu est la plus sacree 
de toutes les dettes. Mme. JSTecker. 

La probite reconnue est le plus sur 
dc tous les serments. (The same) 



cred of all debts. 

Acknowledged probity is the most 
secure of all oaths. 



moins, must be repeated before every ad- 



(10.) The words le plus, t 
jective : 

Co sont les livres les plus agre- 
ables, les plus uiiiversellement lus, 
et les plus utiles. 

Bernardin de St. Pierre. 

(11.) The superlative absolute expresses also a very high degree, 
but, absolutely, without comparison : it is formed by placing before 
the adjective one of these words, Ires, fort, infiniment, extremement, &c. : 



These books are the most agree' 
able, the most universally read, and 
the most useful. 



II y a a la ville, com me ailleurs, 
de fort soties gens. La Bruyere. 

Je vous prie de croire que je ne 
songe qu'a vous, et que vous m'etes 
entremement chere. 

Mme. de Sevigne. 



There are in cities, as elsewhere, 
very silly people. 

I beg you to believe that you are 
my only thought, and that you are 
extremely dear to me. 



§15.- 



-Gender and number of Adjectives. 

(1.) The adjective has, of itself, neither gender nor number ; it must 
assume the gender and number of the noun to which it belongs. 

(2.) The termination of the adjective varies according to the gender 
and number of the noun which it qualifies or determines : 



Un homme prudent. 

A prudent man. 
Des homines prudents. 

Prudent men. 



Une femme prudente. 

A prudent vwman. 
Des femmes prudtntes. 

Prudent women. 



§ 16. — Formation of the Feminine of Adjectives. 
(1.) All adjectives ending with e mute, remain unchanged in the 
feminine : 



Masculine. 
Un homme agreable. 

An agreeable man. 
Un mur solide. 

A strong wall. 



Feminine. 
Une femme agreable. 

An agreeable woman. 
Une maison solide. 

A strong (well built) house. 



(2.) Adjectives not ending in e mute form, their feminine by the ad- 
dition of e: 

Masculine. 



Un gar^on diligent, 
A diligent boy. 

Un homme poll, 
A polite man. 



Feminine. 

Une fille diligente, 
A diligent girl. 

Une dame polie. 
A polite lady. 



294 



FEMININE OF ADJECTIVES. — 8 lb. 



(3.) Exceptions: 



Adjecth 08 
ending in 



BL 

EIL 

EN 

ET 

ON 

F 

S 

X 



Change those 
terminations . 
for thefemi- . 
nine into 



ELLE, 
EILLE, 
ENNE, 
ETTE, 
ONNE, 
VE, 
SSE, 
SE, 



Mas. 
tel, 
pareil, 
ancien, 
muet, 
bon, 
neuf, 
gras, 



Fern. 
teUe, 
pareille, 
ancienne. 
muette, 
bonne, 
neuve, 
grasse, 



9Uck 

like, 

ancieni 

mute. 

good. 

new. 

fat. 



heureux, heureuse, happy. 
(4.) The following, although ending with these terminations, fori 
their feminine otherwise : 



make in the feminine 



r complete. 

concrete. 

discrete. 

inquiete. 

secrete. 
^ replete. 

) follow the general rule i mauvaise 
f and make in the < niaise. 
feminine ( rase. 

" douce. 



make in the feminine 



complet, complete, 

concret, concrete, 

discret, discreet, 

inquiet, uneasy, 

secret, secret, 

replet, replete, 

mauvais, bad, 

nli'.s, silly, 

ras, close-shorn, ) 

doux, soft, sweety 

faux, false. 

prefix, prefixed, 

roux, reddish, 

tiers, third, 

(5.) Adjectives ending in eur, as also some substantives of the 

same termination, have three several modes of forming the feminine : 

1st. Those which are derived from the participle present of a 

French verb by dropping ant, and substituting eur, change the final 

letter (r) into se, as 

Pres. Part. Masculine. Feminine, 

d&nsant, whence dsmseur ; and thence danseus? 
trompan^, " , trompeur ; " trompeuse. 

Here, however, note that chanteur, when signifying a professional 
singer, takes for the feminine cantatrice. Like anomalies appear in 
the following : 






fausse. 
prefixe. 
rousse. 
tierce. 



ambassadeur, ambassador 
bailie ur, lessor, 
chasseur, hunter, 
demandeur, plaintiff, 
defendeur, defendant, 
devineur, guesser, 
enchanteur, enchanter, 
gouverneur, governor, 
pecheur, sinner, 
serviteur, servant, 



make in the 
feminine 



" ambassadrice. 

bailleresse. 

chasseresse. 

demanderesse. 

defenderesse. 
^devineresse. 

enchanteresse. 

gouvernante. 

pecheresse. 

servante. 



2d. Those ending in teur and derived from the Latin, and, consequent- 



FEMININE OF ADJECTIVES.- 



-§ 16. 



295 



y, not falling under the ruie (1st) just given, form the feminine by 
changing teur into trice; as, 

Masculine. Feminine. 

acteur, actor ; actrice, actress. 

admirateur, ad?nirer f admiratrice, admirer 

Exceptions to this, however, are the following: 



debiteur, debtor, 
executeur, executor, 
inspecteur, inspector, 
inventeur, inventor, 
persecuteur, persecutor, 



make in the 
feminine 



r debitrice. 

executrice. 

in9pectrice. 

inventrice. 
^ persecutcice 



3d. Those ending in erieur., also majeur, mineur, meilleur, folio* 
the general rule, that is, add e to form the feminine ; as, 

i 

f exterieure. 

7 . ,t I superieure 
make in the \ r . 
> j. . . < maieure. 
feminine \ . J 
J I mmeure. 

[meilleure. 



exterieur, exterior, 
superieur, superior, 
majeur, of age, major, 
rnineur, minor, 
meilleur, better, 



(6.) Adjectives, as also nouns, indicating occupation chiefly exe? 
eised by men, are alike in the masculine and the feminine ; as, 
auteur, author ; litterateur, literary person. 

(7.) The following adjectives having two forms for the mascuiint 
form their feminine as follows : 

Masculine before Masculine before 

a consonant. a vowel or h mute. Feminine. 

beau, bel, belle, handsome. 

fou, fol, folle, foolish. 

mou, mol, molle, soft. 

nouveau, nouvel, nouvelle, new. 

vieux, vieil, vieiile, old. 

Irregular Adjectives. 
(8.) The following adiectives form their feminine irregularly 
Masculine. Feminine. 



absous, absolved, 
benin, benign, 
blanc, white, 
caduc, decrepit, infirm, 
coi, quiet, 
dissous, dissolved, 
favori, favorite, 
frais, fresh, 
franc, free, frank, 
gentil, pretty, genteel, 
grec, Grecian, Greek, 
hebrew, Hebrew, 

jouvenceau (obsolete), a stripling, 



absoute. 

benigne. 

blanche. 

caduque 

coite. 

dissoute. 

favorite. 

fraiche. 

tranche. 

gentille. 

grecque. 

hebraique, used only of the 

Hebrew tongue, 
jouvencelie. 



N> IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES. g 17. 


Masculine. 




Feminize, 


jumeau, twhi, 
long, long, slow, 




jumelle. 




longue. 


maitre, master, masterly •, 




maitresse. 


malin, cunning, malignant, 




maligne. 


inula tre, mulatto, 




mulatre or mulfctresie. 


muscat, muscat, 




muscade. 


nul, null, none, 




nulle. 


oblong, oblong, 




oblongue. 


public, public, 




publique 


resous, resolved, changed, 




resolue. 


sec, dry, barren, 




seche. 


sot, silly, 




sotte. 


traitre, traitor, treacherous, 




traitresse. 


turc, Turkish, 




turque. 


Tieillut, oldish, 




vieillotte. 


(9. The following have no feminiiib : 




artisan, mechanic. 


partisan, partisan. 


chatain, chesnut color. 


temoin, witness. 


dispos, active. 


velin, vellum, of vellum* 



§ 17. Formation of the Plural of Adjectives. 
(1.) General Rule. — The plural of adjectives is formed by the ad- 
dition of s to the masculine, or to the feminine termination : 



Masculine. 


Feminine. 


Singular. Plural. 


Singular. Plural 


grand, great, grands ; 


grande, grandes. 


petit, small, petits ; 


petite, petites. 



(2.) This rule has no exceptions with regard to the feminine ter- 
mination. 

(3.) With regard to the masculine termination, it is subject to the 
three following exceptions : 

First Exception. — Adjectives ending in the singular with s or a\ do 
not change their form in the plural : 

Singular. Plural. 

heureux, happy, heureux. 

doux, sweet, soft, doux. 

Second Exception. — Adjectives having in the singular the termina- 
tion eau, form, their plural masculine by the addition of x . 
Singular. Plural. 

beau, handsome, beautiful, beaux, 

jumeau, twin, jumeaux. 

nouveau, new, nouveaux. 

Third Exception. — Adjectives ending in a\ form their plural ma* 
culine by changing al into aux : 

Singular. Plural. 

liberal, liberal, liberaux. 

national, national, nationaux 

rural, rural, ruraua. 



AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 



-§ 18. 



29? 



We quote from Bescherelie's Grammaire nationale, the adjectives 
which form their plural in als : 

Singular. Plural. 

amical, friendly, amicals. 

bancal, bandy-legged, bancals. 

fatal, fatal, fataH 

final, final, finals. 

frugal, frugal, frugals. 

Mai, filial, filiais. 

glacial, frozen, icy, glacials, 

initial, initial, initials, 

labial, labial, labials, 

matinal, early, matinals. 

medial, medial, medials. 

naval, naval, navals. 

pascal, paschal, pascals, 

penal, penal, penals. 

theatral, theatrical, theatrals. 

§ 18. — Agreement of Adjectives with Nouns. 

(1.) The adjective must agree, in gender and number, with the 
aoun or pronoun which it qualifies : 



Masculine. 



Feminine. 



Singular. 
le beau jardin, 
the fine garden, 
ie grand livre, 
the large book, 



Plural. 
les beaux jardins ; 
the fine gardens ; 
les grands livres ; 
the large books ; 



Singular. 
la belle maison, 
the fine house, 
la grande carte, 
the large map, 



Plural. 
les belles maisons. 
the fine houses. 
les grandes cartes. 
the large maps. 



(2.) This agreement must take place, not only when the adjective 
immediately precedes or follows the noun or pronoun, but also when 
it is separated by other words : 



Masculine. 

Singular. — Plaise a Dieu de te 
rendre assez bon pour meriter la vie 
heureuse ! Fenelon. 

May God render thee sufficiently 
good to deserve the blessed life. 

Plural. — Jamais, en quoi que ce 
puisse £tre les mechants ne sont 
bons a rien de bon. 

J. J. Rousseau. 

The wicked are never, in any cir- 
cv/mstances, fitted (good) to perform 



Feminine. 

Singidar. — L'honneur de passer 
pour bonne l'empechait de se mon- 
trer mauvaise. Marivaux. 

The honor of passing for good pre- 
vented her showing herself bad. 

Plural. -—Loin de nous raidir con- 
tre les inclinations qui sont bonnes, 
il faut les suivre pour servir Dieu. 
Mme. de Maintenon. 

Far from resisting our good incli- 
nations, ive should follow them in 
order to serve God. 



any thing good. 

(3.) When an adjective relates to two or more substantives, 
whether in the singular or the plural, and all of the same gender, it 
must agree with the nouns in gender, and be put in the plural ; 

Le riche et Tindigent, l'imprudent et I The rich and the poor, the vn- 
la sage, I prudent and the vAse, being 

13* 



298 



ADJECTIVES. — 8 19, 20. 



Sujeis a m6me loi, eubissent meme I Subject to the same lau experience 
sort. J. B. Rousseau. | the sartie fate. 

(4.) When the words which the adjective qualifies are of different 
genders, the adjective must be put in the masculine plural: 



Je tache de rendre heureux, ma 
femme, mon enfant, et meme mon 
chat et mon chien 

Bernardin de St. Pierre. 
L'ordre et l'utilite publics ne peu- 
vent etre le fruit du crime. 

Massillon. 



/ try to render happy, my wife f 
my child, and even my cat and my 
dog. 

Public order and utility cannot be 
the fruits of crime. 



For special rules on this point, see \ 83. 

§ 19. — Determining or Determinative Adjectives. 

There are four sorts of determining adjectives — the demonstrative, 
the possessive, the numeral, and the indefinite. 

§ 20. — Demonstrative Adjectives. 

(1.) The demonstrative adjectives are used, when an object is to 
be particularly specified or pointed out. They are never, in French, 
used substantively, that is, without the nouns which they determine : 

Singular. 
Masculine. — Ce, this or that, placed before a word commencing with a 

consonant. 
Get, this or that, placed before a word commencing with a 
vowel or an h mute. 
Feminine. — Cette, this or that, placed before all sorts of nouns. 

Plural. 
Ces for both genders. 

Examples. 



Masculine singular. 
ce soldat, this or that soldier. 

cet ami, that or this friend. 

cet homme, this or that man. 



Feminine singular. 
cette femme, this or that woman. 
cette epee, that or this sword. 
cette harpe, this or that harp. 



Plural. 
ces hommes, these or those men ; ces femmes, these or those women. 



Voyez ce papillon echappe du tom- 

oeau ; 
Sa mort fut un sommeil, et sa tombe 

un berceau. Delille. 

. . . . Cet admirable don, 

L'instinct, sans doute est loin de 

l'auguste raison. , (The same.) 

La, cette jeune plante en vase dis- 

posee, 
Dans sa coupe elegante accueille la 

rasee. (The same.) 



See that butterfly escaped from th<9 
tomb ; his death was a slumber, and 
his tomb a cradle. 

Thai admirable gift, instinct, is 
doubtless far beneath majestic rea- 
son. 

There that young plant prepared 
as a vase, receives the dew in its 
elegant cup. 



POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES. §21. 



299 



Ces honneurs que le vulgaire ad- 
mire, 

Re>eilient-ils les morts au sein de 
monuments ? Soulie. 



Do these honors, admired by the 
vulgar, awake the dead from their 
sepulchres $ 



(2.) When it is necessary to make, in French, a difference similar 
to that existing between the English words this and that, the adverbs 
ei and la must be placed after the nouns : 



ce livre-ci, this book (here), 
ces livres-ci, these books, 



ce livre-la, that book (there), 
ces livres-la, those books. 



§ 21. — Possessive Adjectives. 

(1.) The possessive adjectives, which are always joined to a noun« 
relate to possession or property; they are: 

Singular, Plural 

Masculine. Feminine. for both genders. 

mon, ma, 

ton, ta, 

son, sa, 

notre, notre, 

votre, votre, 

leur, leur, 

(2.) In French, these adjectives take the gender and number of 
the object possessed, and not, as in English, those of the possessor ■ 

Masc. sing. Fern. sing. PL both genders. 

mon frere, my brother, ma soeur, my sister, mes cousins, my cousins. 

ton livre, thy book, ta plume, thy pen, tes maisons, thy houses. 

eon papier, his or her sa table, his or her ta- ses habits, his or her 

paper. ble. clothes. 

notre cheval, our horse, notre vache, our cow, nos prairies, our meadows. 

votre lit, your bed, votre chaise, your chair, vos crayons, your pencils. 

leur foin, their hay, leur paille, their straw, leurs fermes, their farms. 



mes, 

tes, 

ses, 


my. 
thy. 
his, her, its. 


nos, 


our. 


vos, 
leurs, 


your, 
their. 



Sobri^te dans toute chose, 
Mon ami, c'est l'art de jouir. 

Du Tremblay. 

Ma main de quelque fleur es- 
quisse la peinture. Castel. 

Mes sens sont glaces d'effroi. 

J. B. Rousseau. 

De son propre artifice on est sou- 
vent victime. 

Colin d'Harleyille. 

A sa vocation chaque £tre doit 
repondre. Fr. de Neufchateau. 

II faut de ses amis endurer quel- 
que chose. Moliere. 

Notre vie est une maison, 
V mettre le feu c'est folie. 

NrVKRNAIS. 



Sobriety in all things, is, 
friend, the true enjoyment. 



my 



My hand sketches the picture oj 
some flower. 

My senses are frozen vdthfear. 

One is often the victim of his own 
artifice. 

Every being should fulfil his vo- 
cation. 

We must bear something from our 
friends. 

Our life is a house ; to set it on 

fire is folly. 



300 



NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. § 22. 



Vos mailles se rompront sous la 
charge pes ante. Castel. 

Leurs fleurs suivront mes pas, en 
recreant ma vue. (The same.) 



Your meshes will break under t)u 
he any burden. 

Their flowers will follcno my steps, 
and please my sight. 



(3.) The adjectives mon, my; ton, thy ; son, his or her, are used in- 
stead of ma, ta, sa, before feminine words commencing with a vowel 
or an h mute, in order to prevent the meeting of two vowels, or of a 
rowel and an h mute; thus we say: 

mon epee, my sword, and never ma epe*e. 
ton epouse, thy wife, instead of ta Spouse, 
son armee, his army, but never sa armee. 

J'en est fait, mon heure est venue. All is over, my hour is come. 

Boileau. I 

(4.) The possessive adjectives must be repeated before every 
noun: 



Mon fre're, ma soeur et mes cou- 
sins sont a Paris. 



My brother, sister, and cousins art 
at Paris. 



§ 22. — Numeral Adjectives. 

(1.) There are two kinds of numeral adjectives: the cardinal and 
the ordinal. 

(2.) The cardinal numbers indicate simply the number or quantity, 
without any reference to order : as, un, one ; deux, two, &c. 

(3.) The ordinal numbers mark the order or rank which persons 
and things occupy : as, premier, first ; second, second, &c. 

We shall, for the purposes of comparison, place the cardinal aid 
ordinal numbers in parallel columns: 



(4.) Cardinal Numbers. 




(5.) Ordinal Numbers 




mi, feminine une, 


one. 


premier, feminine 


premiere 


, first 


deux, 


2 


deuxieme or second,/, seconc 


le, 2d. 


trois, 


3 


troisieme, 




3d 


quatre, 


4 


quatrieme, 




4th. 


cinq, 


5 


cinquieme, 




5th. 


six, 


6 


sixieme, 




6th. 


sept, 


1 


septieme, 




7 th. 


huit, 


8 


huitieme, 




8th. 


neuf, 


9 


neuvieme, 




9th. 


dix, 


10 


dixieme, 




10th. 


onze, 


11 


onzieme, 




11th. 


douze, 


12 


douzieme. 




12th. 


treize, 


13 


treizieme, 




13th. 


quatorze, 


14 


quatorzieme, 




14th. 


quinze, 


15 


quinzieme, 




15 th. 


seize, 


16 


seizieme, 




16th. 


dix-sept, 


17 


dix-sept ieme, 




17th, 


dix-huit, 


18 


dix-huitieme, 




18th. 


dix- neuf, 


19 


dix-neuvieme, 




19th. 


vingt, 


20 


j vingtieme, 




20th. 


vingt-et-un, 


21 


1 vingt-et-uniene, 




21st 



NUMERAL ADJECTIVES.- 



23. 



SOI 



Cardinal Number s. 


Ordinal Nurnl tr$. 


ymgt-deux. <fec, 


22 


vingt-deuxieme, <fcc., 


22d. 


trente, 


30 


trentieme, 


30th. 


trente-et mi, &c, 


31 


trente-et-unieme, 


31st. 


trente-de iix, 


32 


trente-deuxieme, 


32d. 


quarante, 


40 


quarantieme, 


40th. 


quarante-et-un, A 3., 


41 


qu arant e-et-unieme, 


41st. 


quarante- deux, 


42 


quarante-deuxieme, 


42d. 


cinquante, 


50 


cinquantieme, 


50th. 


cin quant e-et-un, 


51 


cinquante-et-unieme, 


51st. 


cinquante-deux, 


52 


cinquante-deuxieme, 


52d. 


soixante, 


60 


soixantieme, 


60th. 


soixante-et-un, 


61 


soixant e-et-unieme. 


61st. 


soixante-deux, &c. f 


62 


soixant e-deuxi erne, 


62d. 


soixante-dix, 


70 


soixante-dixieme, 


70th. 


soixante-onze, 


71 


soixante-onzieme, 


71st. 


soixant e-douze, 


72 


soixante-douzieme, 


72d. 


soixante-treize, 


73 


soixante-treizieme, 


73d. 


soixant e-q uatorze, 


74 


soixante-quatorzieme, 


74th. 


3oixante-quinze, 


75 


soixante-quinzieme, 


75th. 


eoixante-seize, 


76 


soixant e-seizieme, 


76th. 


soixante- dix-sept, 


77 


soixante-dix-septieme, 


77th. 


soixante-dix-huit, 


78 


soixante-dix-huitieme, 


78th. 


soixante-dix-neuf, 


79 


soixante-dix-neuvierne. 


79th, 


quatie-vingts, 


80 


quatre-vingtieme, 


80th. 


quatre-vingt-un, 


81 


quatre-vingt-unieme, 


81st. 


quatre-vingt-deux. 


82 


quatre-vingt-deuxieme, 


82d. 


quatre-vingt-dix, 


90 


quatre-vingt-dixieme, 


90th, 


quatre-vingt-onze 


91 


quatre-vingt-onzieme, 


91st. 


quatre-vingt-douze, 


&C, 92 


quatre-vingt-douzieme. 


92d. 


cent, 


100 


centieme, 


100th. 


cent-un, 


101 


cent-unieme, 


101st. 


deux-cents, 


200 


deux-centieme, 


200th. 


deux-cent-un, 


201 


deux-cent-unieme, 


201st. 


trois-cents, 


300 


trois-centieme, 


300th. 


trois-cent-un, 


301 


trois-cent-unieme, 


301st. 


mille, 


1000 


millieme, 


1000th. 


deux-mille, 


2000 


deux-millieme, 


2000th. 


deux-mille-cinquanl 


e, 2050 


deux-mille-cinquantieme, 


2050th. 


un million, 


1,000000 


millionieme, 1,000000th. 


§ 23. — Variations of 


the Cardinal Numbers. 


(1.) The following cardinal nun 


ibers vary : 




(2.) Un, one, a or 


an, takes the 


gender of t le noun to which it l 


prefixed : 








tm 


Livre, a book ; 


une feuille, a leaf. 




When used substantively, un 


takes, at times, the form of tht 


plural. 








Masc. Les uns et les autres, 


These and those, 




Fern. Les unes et 


les autres, 


{The ones and the others). 


(3.) Vingt and cent, when multi 


plied by one number, and not fol* 


lowed by another, take the form oi 


the plural : 




qm&re-vingts, 


eighty ; 


six cents, six h widrea. 



W2 NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. § 24. 



L'homme vit qua\ re-vingts ans, 
le chien n'en vit que lix. Buffon. 

On m'apjj >rta cliez moi, douze 
ocjUs francs. J. J. Rousseau. 



Man lives eighty years, the dog 
only ten. 

They brought me, at my house, 
twelve hundred francs. 



(4.) Vingt and i enL however, when multiplied by one number, and 
followed by another, or, if not followed by a number, used to indi- 
cate a particular epoch, do not take the form of the plural. 

quatre-vm^-cinq hommes, eighty-five men. 

cinq-cent-deux hommes, five hundred and two men. 



Charlemagne fut proclame em- 
pereur d' Occident,, le jour de Noel, 
en huit cent. Voltaire. 



Charlemagne was proclaimed em- 
peror of the West, Christinas-day, 
in the year eight hundred. 



(5.) Mille — (thousand.) For the date of the year, reckoned from 
the commencement of the Christian era to the year two thousand 
of the same, we use the abbreviated form, mil. 

L'an mil huit cent cinquante, The year one thousand eight hun- 

I dred and fifty. 

(6.) With regard to the years which have preceded our era, and 
those which will follow our present thousand, we write the full form, 

mille. 

La premiere irruption des Gaulois, 
eut lieu sous le regne de Tarquin, 
environ l'an du monde trois mille 
quatre cent seize. Vertot. 

(7.) Million, billion take the plural form. 



The first irruption of the Gauls 
took place under the reign of Tar- 
quiii, about the year of the world 
3416. 



§ 24. — Miscellaneous Observations on the Cardinal 
Numbers. 

(1.) In French, in computing from twenty to thirty, thirty to forty 
&c, the larger number must always precede the smaller. We ma} 
not say, as often in English, one and twenty, but always vingt-et-un, 
vingt-deux, &c. 

(2.) The conjunction et, after vingt, trente, &c, is only used before 
un: thus, we say vingt-et-un, twenty (and) one, and simply vingt-deux, 
twenty-two, &c. 

(3.) The word one frequently precedes in English the words hun- 
dred and thousand ; it must not be rendered in Frencn. We say : 

mille hommes, one thousand men. 

cent francs, one hundred francs, 

(4.) When the words cent and mille are used substantively before 
the name of cbjects generally reckoned or sold by the hundred or 
thousand, in number or in weight, the word un may be placed before 
them ; the name of the object being preceded by the preposi- 
tion de 



NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. § 25. 303 

Un cent, un mille (millier) de briques, 
One hundred, one thousand {of) bricks. 
Un cent (un quintal) de sucre, 
One hundred {weight) of sugar. 

(5.) The words septante, seventy; octante, eighty ,' and nonante, 
r-tnety, are now nearly obsolete, being used only in a few provinces 
of France. They are, as may be seen in the preceding table, replaced 
by awkward expressions soixante-dix, sixty-ten ; quaire-vingts, four- 
iwenties (four score) ; quatre-vingt-dix, four-score-ten, &c. 

(6.) Before the words onze, eleven, and onzieme, eleventh, the arti- 
cle is not elided. We say le onze, le onzieme, la onzieme. In pro- 
nunciation, the s of the plural article les is silent when this artie7e pre- 
cedes onze or onzieme. 

§ 25. — Observations on the Ordinal Numbers. 

(1.) It will be seen that the ordinal numbers, with the exception of 
premier and second, are formed from the cardinal— 

1. By the change off into vieme in neuf ; 

2. By the change. of e into vieme in those ending with that vowel; 

3. By the addition of vieme in those ending with a consonant : 

4. Cinq requires uieme to make cinquieme, fifth. 

(2.) All ordinal adjectives may take the form of the plural. 

(3.) Premier and second alone vary for the feminine, and make 
premiere, seconde, &c. 

(4.) Unieme (first) is only used in composition with vingt, irente, &c. 

(5.) Second, deuxieme, (second) — Deuxieme supposes a series, a con- 
tinuation; second merely indicates the order: 

1st. We may say of a work which has four or more volumes : 
J'ai le deuxieme (or le secorid) vo- I / have the second volume of that 
lume de cet ouvrage. | work. 

2d. In speaking of a work which has only two volumes, we should say ■ 



I have the second volume of Bes- 
cher die's dictionary. 



J'ai le second (not le deuxieme) 
volume du dictionnaire de Bescher- 
elle. 

3d. Under the ordinal numbers may be placed the following worr's, 
which are often used substantively : 

Trentenaire, thirty, of thirty y< ars' luration; 

Quarantenaire, forty, °ff or ty " " 

Cinquantenaire, fifty years old, of fifty " " 

Sexagenaire, sexagenarian, of sixty " " • 

Septuagenaire, septuagenarian, of seventy " " 

Octogenaire, octogenarian, of eighty " u 

Nonagenaire, nonogenarian, of ninety " u 

Oentenaire, centenarian, of one hundred u 

4th. Trentenaire and quarantenaire are law terms : 
Possession trentenaire, quarante- ] Thirty, forty years' possession. 
naire 



304 



NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. § 26, x7. 



5th. Of the others, sexagenaire, septuagSnaire, and octogenaire only art 
h frequent use : 

Un octogenaire plantait, <fec. A man eighty years old was plant 

La Fontaine. | ing trees. 

§ 26. — Rules. 
(1.) In speaking of the days of the month, the French use the car- 
dinal, not the ordinal number ; 

le deux mars, the second of March. 

le dix-sept avril, the seventeenth of April. 

L'ouverture des Etats-generaux I The opening of the States-general 

eut lieu le cinq mai, 1789. — Thiers. | took place on the fifth of May, 1789 

(2.) We must, however, say : 

le premier (not Vun) juin, the first of June. 

(3.) The cardinal numbers are also employed in speaking of sove- 
reigns and princes : 



Charles dix, 
Louis dix-huit, 
Louis onze avait trente-huit ans, 
quand il monta sur le tr6ne. 

Anquetil. 
La mort de Gregoire sept n'etei- 
gnit pas le feu qu'il avait allume. 
Voltaire. 



Charles the Tenth. 
Leiois the Eighteenth. 
Lewis tlie Eleventh was thirty-eight 
years old when he ascended tit* 
throne. 

The death of Gregory the Seventh 
did not extinguish the fire which he 
had kindlSd. 



(4.) We must say, however : 

Henri premier ; Henry the First. 

(5.) Deux and second are, in this case, used indifferently : 

Charles deux, Charles second, Charles the Second. 

(6.) In speaking of Charles the Fifth, of Germany, and of the Pope 
Sixtus the Fifth, the obsolete word quint (fifth) is used : 

Charles-quint, Charles the Fifth. 

Sixte-quinty Sixtus the Fifth. 

We shall, in order to render reference easier, place here some ob- 
servations on nouns and adverbs of number. 

8 27. — Numeral Nouns. 



(I.) The nui 


neral nouns in use 


with the French are 


: 


umt6, 


unit ; 


trentaine, 


thirty ; 


couple, paire, 


couple, pair ; 


quarantaine, 


two score; 


trio, 


trio, three ; 


cinquantaine, 


fifty; 


demi-douzaine, 


half dozen ; 


soixantaine, 


sixty ; 


huitaine, 


eight days ; 


quatre-vingtaine, 


eighty ; 


neuvain ? 


nine {nine days of 


1 centaine, 


huudrea ; 




prayer) ; 


deux centaines, & \ 


two hundred; 


dizaine, 


ten, half a score ; 


1 millier, 


one thousand; 


douzaine, 


dozen ; 


deux rnilliers, 


two thousand; 


quinzaine, 


fifteen, fortnight ; 


1 inyriade, 


a myriad; 


vingtaine, 


score, twenty ; 


1 million, 


a million 



INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES. § 28, 29, 30. 



305 



(2 V The termination aine signifies nearly ', and when added to worda 
of number is equivalent to the English some, in cases like the follow- 
ing : I have some twenty books, i. e. about twenty books. J'ai une 
vingtaine de livres. 



§ 28. — Fractional Numerals. 



un quart, 
deux quarts, 
trois quarts, 
le tiers, 
deux tiers, 
la moitie, 



un cinquieme, 
deux cinquiemes, 
un sixieme, etc., 
un dixieme, etc., 
un centieme, 
un millieme, 



one fifth; 
two fifth*; 
one sixth, etc. ; 
one tenth, etc. ; 
one hundredth ; 
one thousandth. 



one quarter ; 
two quarters; 
three quarters; 
the third; 
two thirds; 
the half; 

(1.) It will be seen that, with the exception of tiers, quart and moi- 
tie, these numbers take the form of the ordinal numerals. They may, 
therefore, take the form of the plural when necessary. 

(2.) The word demi, when used adjectively and preceding the noun, 
is invariable : 

une demi-hewe f., half an hour ; 

une demi-SLvme f., half an ell. 

(3.) When coming after the noun to denote an additional half, it 
agrees in gender with the noun : 

une heure et demie, one hour and a half; 

une aune et demie, one ell and a half 

(4.) When used substantively, demi may take the form of the plural : 

Cette horloge sonne les heures et I This clock strikes the hours and 
les demies. | the half hours. 



§ 29. — Ordinal Adverfb. 



J first; 
(1.) Premierement, V in the first 

) place ; 
Deuxiemement, ( t, 

Secondement, j se<!on <^ ' 
Troisiemement, thirdly ; 



Quatriemement, 

Cinquiemement, 

Sixiemement, 

Septiemement, 

Dixiemement, 



fourthly ; 
fifthly; 
sixthly ; 
seventhly; 
tenthly. 



(2.) These, like adverbs of manner, are formed by the addition ol 
merit to the feminine form of the adjective. 

§ 30. — Indefinite Adjectives. 

(1.) The indefinite adjectives are used when any thing is to be 
represented or referred to in a general or indefinite manner. They 
are, — 



aucun, 


not any, no' one; 


quel, 


what ; 


chaque, 


every, each 


quelconque, 


whatever ; 


meme, 


same ;• 


quelque, 


some; 


nul, 


no; 


tel, 


such; 


plusieurs, 


several ; 


tout, 


all ' 



306 



INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES. § 30. 



(2 ) Auc UN is generally followed by a noun, with which it must 
agree. It is followed by ne when it comes before a verb : 



aucun homnae, no man ; 

Aucun chernin. de fleurs ne conduit 
u la gloire. La Fontaine. 

On meprise tous ceux qui n'ont 
aucune vertu. La Rochefoucauld. 



aucune femme, no woman, 
No flowery path leads to glory 

All those who have no virtue art 
despised. 



(3.) Aucun is by the French authors sometimes used in the plural , 



They can bear no legitimate do- 
minion, set no bounds to their crir/ut. 



lis ne peuvent soufrVir aucun em- 

Eire legitime, ne mettent aucunes 
ornes a leurs attentats. 

Montesquieu. 

Aucun and mil should be put in the plural only before such words 
as are not used ip the singular, or have in the singular a different 
acceptation. 

(4.) Chaque ib of both genders, and is used only in the singular. 
[t always precedes the noun, and cannot be separated from it by an 
adjective or by a preposition. It should never be used without a 
noun: 

Chaque age a ses plaisirs, chaque I Every age has its pleasures, every 
£tat a ses charmes. Delille. j situation its charms. 

(5.) Meme, placed before the noun, has the sense of same, in 
.English. Placed after the noun, it means, generally, himself, herself, 
itself, or themselves. It may often be rendered by the word even. 
When meme is an adjective it may take the form of the plural, but 
does not vary on a,cc ;>unt of gender : 



c'est la meme vertu ; 
it is the same virtue. 
Le peuple et les grands n'ont ni 
les mimes vertus, ni les mimes vices. 
Vauvenargues. 
Les e*corces mimes des vegetaux 
sont en harmonie avec les tempera- 
tures de Fatmosphere. 

Bernardin de St. Pierre. 



c'est la vertu mime; 
it is virtue itself. 

The people and the great have 
neither the same virtues nor the same 
vices. 

The bark even of vegetables is in 
harmony with the temperature of the 
atmosphere. 



(6.) It is at times difficult to distinguish meme an adjective from 
meme an adverb, which is invariable. [See § 97 (2,) (3.)] 

(7.) Nxjl is a stronger negative than aucun. It agrees in gender 
and number with the noun which it qualifies. Like aucun, when re 
latin g to the subject of the sentence, it requires ne before the verb 



Nul homme n'est heureux ; nulle 
chose ne peut le rendre tel. Boiste. 

Nulle paix pour l'impie ; il la 
cherche, elle le fuit. Racine. 



No man is happy; nothing can 
render him so. 

No peace for the impious ; he seek* 
it. it avoids him. 



INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES. 8 30. 



307 



(8.) Nul is sometimes used alo;ie, in the sense of no one: 



Nul n'est content de sa fortune, 
ni mecontent de son esprit. 

Mme. Deshoulieres. 

(9.) Plusieurs is, of course, always in the plural, 
vary its form : 

There must necessarily be several 
reasons for ennui, when all agree in 



No one is pleased with his fortune, 
nor displeased with his own wit 



It does not 



"H. faut bien qu'il y ait plusieurs 
*aisons d'ennui, quand tout le monde 
<*st d ? accord pour bailler. Florian. yawning. 

(10.) Quel takes the gender and number of the noun to which i 
relates. It is sometimes immediately followed by its noun, from 
which it may be separated by one or several words : 

Quel tableau ravissant presentent 
les campagnes ! Delille. 

Quelle invisible force a soumis 
l'univers ? L. Racine. 

Quels sons harmonieux, quels efforts 

ravissants, 
De la reconnaissance egalent les 

accents ? 



What a delightful picture the 
country offer* I 

What invisible hand has con- 
quered the universe? 

What harmonious sounds, what 
ravishing strains, equal the voice of 
gratitude ? 



(11.) Quelconque is always placed after the noun, and varies only 
for the plural : 



Toutes les jouissances sont pre- 
cedees d'un travail quelconque. 

Mme. Camp an. 

Deux points quelconques etant 
donnes The Academy, 



All enjoyments are preceded by 
some sort of exertion. 



Two points of some hind being 
given 

(12.) Quelque in the sense of some (a certain number), or whatever, 
agrees in number with the noun : 



II y a du merite sans elevation, 
mais il n'y a point d' elevation sans 
quelque merite. La Rochefoucauld. 
Quelques vains lauriers que pro- 

mette la guerre, 
On peut etre heros sans ravager la 

terre. Boileau. 



There is merit without elevation, 
but there is no elevation without some 
merit. 

Whatever vain laurels war may 
promise, one may be a hero without 
ravaging the earth. 



(13.) Quelque having the sense of about or some or however, is in- 
variable : 



Quel age avez-vous ? Vous avez 
bon visage ! Eh ! quelque soixante 
an3. Racine, les Plaideurs. 

Alexandre perdit quelque trois 
cents hommes, quand il vainquit 
Torus. D'Ablancourt. 

Quelque mediants que soient les 
hommes, ils n'oseraient paraitre 
ennemis de la vertu. 

La Rochefoucauld. 



How old are you ? You look well. 
Oh ! some sixty years. 

Alexander lost some three hundred 
men when he vanquished Torus. 

However wicked men may be, they 
do not dire to appear enemies of 

virtue. 



308 



THE TRONOUN. § 31, 32. 



(14.) Tel makes in the feminine telle; in the plural masculire^ 

tels ; in the plural feminine, telles. It agrees with the noun whieh it 
qualifies : 

tel livre, such book ; telle lettre, such letter ; 

tels livres, such books ; telles lettres, such letters. 

(15.) Tout meaning every, is of course always in the singular, 
but varies for the feminine: 



Tout citoyen doit servir son pays ; 
le soldat de son sang, le pretre de 
son zele. La Motte. 

En toute chose, il faut considerer 
la fin. La Fontaine. 



Every citizen should sen* his 
country ; the soldier with his blood, 
the priest with his zeal. 

In every thing we must consider 
the end. 



(16.) Tout, in the sense of ail, agrees in gender and number with 
the noun to which it relates : 



tout l'argent, all the money ; 

II etait au-dessus de tous ces 
vains objets qui fornient tous les 
desirs et toutes les esperances des 
hommes. Massillon. 

See J 97 (5). 



toute la toile, all the cloth. 
He was above all those vain objects 
which form all the desires and all the 
hopes of men. 



§ 31. — The Pronoun. 

(1.) The pronoun, in French, as in other languages, is a word 
used to represent the noun, in order to prevent its too frequent 
repetition. 

(2.) The pronoun serves also to designate the parts which each 
person or thing takes in speech. This part is called 'person, 

(3.) There are three persons: the first, or that which speaks; the 
second, or that spoken to ; the third or that spoken of. 

f 3.) There are five sorts of pronouns : 

The personal ; The demonstrative ; 

The possessive ; The relative ; 

The indefinite. 



§ 32. — The Personal Pronouns. 

(1.) The personal pronouns are so called because they seem to 
designate the three persons more especially than the other pronoun*. 
These pronouns are: 





Nominative Form. 


Relative Form, 


2. 

8 


Singular. Plural. 
je, /; nous, we ; 
tu, thou ; vous, you, ye ; 
C il, he, it, m. ; ils, m. they ; 

I elle, she, it, f. ; elles, f. they. 


Singular. 
me, myself; 
te, thyself ; 
C himself ; 
' «< herself ; 
**?• I itself; 


Plural, 
nous, ourselves; 
vous, yourselves ; 

so, themselves 



m PERSONAL PRONOUNS— § 33 809 

(2.) Direct regimen, or Accusative. 
When pi iced before the verb. When placed after a verlx 

Singular. Plural. Singular. Plural. 

me, me , nous, us; moi, me; nous, us; 

2. te thee ; vous, you ; toi, thee ; vous, you ; 

c ( le him, it, m.; , ,-, (both le, him,it,m.\ , ■ ., . ( both 

S - | la, ^r,ia; leS, ^" l, igend. la, far.V* ; leS> ***"•» | genders. 

(3.) Indirect regimen, or Dative. 

When placed before the verb. 

Singular. Plural. 

1. me, tome; nous, tons; 

2. te, to thee ; vous, to you; 

( to him; j fo*7*ew; 

lH ltS: ; (both genders). 

When placed after the verb. 
Singular. Plural. 

moi, a moi, to me ; nous, a nous, to us , 

toi, a toi, to thee ; vous, a vous, to you ; 

, . (a lui, ) to him ; , { a eux, m. ) . ,, 

lm > | a elle, | to her \ leur > { k elles, f. ( to tkem 

(4.) Indirect regimen ; Genitive and Ahlalive. 

Always placed after the verb 

Singular. Plural. 

de moi, of or from me ; de nous, of or from us ; 

de toi, " thee ; de vous, " you ; 

de lui, " him ; d'eux, " them, m. , 

d'elle, " her; d' elles, " them, i. 

§ 33. — Remarks on the Personal Pronouns. 

(L) The French, as well as the English, use the second person 
plural for the second person singular, in addressing one person. 

(2.) The second person, however, is used, as in English, in address- 
ing the Supreme Being : 

Grand Dieu ! tes jugements sont I Great God! thy judgments are 
remplis d'equite. Des Barreaux. | full of equity. 

(3.) It is also used in poetry, or to give more energy to the diction. 

O mon souverain roi ! my sovereign king I 

Me voici done tremblante et seule Mere I am, trembling and atom. 
devant toi. Racine, Esther. before thee. 

(4.) It is used by parents to children, and also 'imong intimate 
friends. 

(5.) The pronoun il is used unipersonally, m the same manner as 
the English pre noun it. 

il pleut, it rains ; il gele, it freezes. 

(6.) Observe that the personal pronouns of the third person are 
not used for the indirect regimen to represent inanimate objects 



310 PERSONAL PRONOUNS. § 33. 

The relative pronouns en, of or from it [\ 39 (17)], y, to it [) 39 (18)] 
are used instead of the personal pronouns. Thus, in speaking of u 
house, we do not say, Je lui ajouterai une aile, J will add a wing to 
U. We must say : 

J'y ajouterai une aile ; I will add a wing to it {thereto). 

In speaking of an author, we may say : 

Que pensez-vous de lui $ What do you think of him ? 

But in speaking of his book, we should say : 

QuW*, pensez-vous ? What do you think of it {thereof) f 

(6.) The word meme, plural memes, may be used after the pronoun 
in the sense of self, selves : 

le roi lui-meme, the king himself. 

la reine elle-meme, the queen herself. 

les princes eux-memes, the princes themselves 

les princesses elles-memes, the princesses themselves. 

(7.) The pronouns moi, toi, lui, eux, are often used after the verb, 
to give greater force to a nominative pronoun of the same person, 
in those cases where the emphasis is placed on the nominative in 
English, or where the auxiliary do is used. 

je le dis, moi, I say so, or / do say so. t 

il le dit, lui, he says so, or he does say so. 

(8.) The same pronouns, moi, toi, lui, eux, are used instead of the 
nominative pronouns, je, tu, il, Us, for the English pronouns,-/, thou, 
he, they, when those pronouns are employed without a verb in an 
answer, when they are used by themselves, or have a verb under- 
stood after them : 

Qui est arrive ce matin ? Moi. Who arrived this morning P L 

Lui et moi. Vous et eux. He and I. You and they. 

Vous ecrivez mieux que lui. You write better than he. 

Vous lisez aussi bien que moi. You read as well as L 

(9.) The same pronouns are used in exclamations, and in those 
cases where the English pronouns, I, thou, &c, are followed by the 
relative pronoun who ; also after c'est, c'etait, &c. 

Moi lui ce*der ! I yield to him ! 

Eux aller a Londres ! They go to London ! 

Moi qui suis malade . . / who am sick . . . 

Lui qui est officier. He who is an officer. 

Eux qui sont savants. They who are learned* 

C'est moi ; c'est lui. It is I; it is he. 

Ce sont eux. It is they. 

Penelope, sa femme, et moi qui Penelope his wife, and I who &m 
«Riis son fils, nous avons perdu l'es- his son, have lost the hope oj seeing 
p^rance de le revoir. Fenelon. him again. 

(10.) These same pronouns are also used inp^ead of the nomi* 
natives,^, tu, &c, when the verb has severa 7 subjects which are all 



Tour father &nd I were a long 
time enemies. 

Rica and I are, perhaps, the first. 



POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. § 34. 311 

pronouns, or partly nouns and partly pronouns. The verb may then 
be immediately preceded by a pronoun in the plural, representing in 
one word all the preceding subjects. 

Votre pere et moi, nous avons 
6te* lorgtemps ennemis l'un de 
l'autre. Fenelon. 

Rica et moi somrnes peut-etre les 
fremiera. Montesquieu. 

(11.) The recapitulating pronoun and the verb sometimes come 
first in the sentence. 

Nous avons, vous et moi, besoin I You and I have need of toleraivce, 
de tolerance. Voltaire. | 

(12.) The reflective pronoun se, himself &c, is used for both 
genders, and for both numbers ; for persons and for tilings ; and 
always accompanies a verb. 

Les yeux de l'amitie se trompent i The eyes of friendship are seldom 
rarement. Voltaire. | deceived (deceive themselves). 

(13.) The same pronoun has sometimes a reciprocal and sometimes 
a reflective meaning, according to the context : 

ils se flattent, they flatter themselves. 

lis se flattent, they flatter one another, each other. 

(14.) Soi, himself itself &c, is of both genders and numbers, 
and is applied to persons and things. It is used in general and inde- 
terminate sentences ; having commonly an indefinite pronoun for the 
nominative : 

On a souvent besoin d'un plus We have often need of one more 
petit que soi. La Fontaine. humble than ourselves. 

II depend toujours de soi d'agir It is always in our power to act 
honorablement. Girault-Duvivier. honorably. 

Etre trop mecontent de soi est To be too much displeased with 
une faiblesse. Mme. de Sable. one's self is a weakness. 

For additional rules on the personal pronouns, see Syntax, § 98, 
and following. 

§ 34. — Possessive Pronouns. 

(1.) The possessive pronouns, which are formed from the personal 
pronoun*, represent, in the radical part, the possessor, while m termina- 
tion they always agree with the thing possessed* Some relate to one 
person some to several. 

(2.) POSSESSIVES RELATING TO ONE PERSON I 

The object possessed being in the — 
Singular. Plural. 

Masculine. Feminine. Masculine. Feminine. 

1. le mien, la mienne, les miens, les miennes, mine; 

2. le tien, la tienne, les tiens, les tiennes, thine; 

8. le sien, la sienne, les siens, les siennes, Ms i hers, iU 



312 



POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. § 85. 



(3.) Two or more Persons: 

Tlie object possessed being in the — 

Singular. Plural. 

Masculine. Feminine. Mas. and Fern 

le n6tre, la notre, les n6tres, ours ; 
le votre, la votre, les v6tres, yours; 

le leur, la leur, les leurs, theirs. 

§ 35. — Remarks on the Possessive Pronouns. 

(1.) It may be seen from the above table that, as before said, th 
termination of the possessive pronoun agrees in gender and nuinbt y 
with the object possessed. 



Votre plume et et la mienne. 
Your pen and mine. 

Vos sceurs et les miennes. 
Your sisters and mine. 

We see the misfortunes of others 
differently from our own. 

The ministers of the king feel thai 
their glory, like his own, is in na- 
tional happiness. 



Votre canif et le mien. 
Your penknife and mine. 

Vos freres et les miens. 
Your brothers and mine. 

On voit les maux d'autrui, d'un 
autre ceil que les siens. Corneille. 

Les ministres du roi sentent que 
leur gloire, comme la sienne, est 
dans le bonheur national. 

Bernardin de St. Pierre. 

(2.) These pronouns should relate to a noun previously expressed 
This rule is often violated in mercantile correspondence : 

J'ai regu la votre en date du, etc., I received yours dated the f &c. t 

is incorrect. It should read thus : 

J'ai recu votre lettre en date du, etc., I received your letter dated, &e 

(3.) These, pronouns may, however, be used absolutely when we 
mean thereby our family, near relatives, or intimate friends : 



Moi, j'ai les miens, la cour, le peu- 
ple a cont enter. La Fontaine. 

Malheureux qui porte chez les 

siens le glaive et les flambeaux. 
Colardeau. 

C'est a nous a payer pour les 
crimes das notres. Racine. 



/ have my family or friends i tht 
court, the people to please. 

Wretched is he who carries among 
his fellow-citizens the sivord and the 
torch. 

We must bear the penalty of th 
crimes of our family or people. 



(4.) Le mien and le tien are also used absolutely as the words mm 
and thine in English, in the sense of possession, property : 



Et le mien et le tien, deux freres 
pointilleux. Boileau. 

Le tien et le mien, sont les sources 
de toutes les divisions et de toutes 
les querelles. Girault-Duvivjer. 



And mine and thine, two punctili- 
ous brothers. 

Mine and thine (meum and tuum) 
are the sources of all divisions and 
quarrels, 



DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. § 36, 37. 313 



36. — Demonstrative Pronouns. 



Singular. 
Masculine. Feminine, 

celui, celle, 


( this, 
\ ihat, 


Plural. 

Masculine. Feminine. 

ceux, celles, 


j these ; 
J those, 


celui-ci, celle-ci, 
celui la, celle-la. 


this, 
that, 


ceux-ci, celles-ci, 
ceux-la, celles-la, 


tittse i 
thcte. 




ce. 


it, they. 




Absolute Demonstrative Pronouns. 


» 


ceci, 
cela, 


this, ) 
that, J 


not used in the 
plural. 





§ 37. — Remarks on the Demonstrative Pronouns. 
(1.) The demonstrative pronouns celui, celle, &c, assume the gen- 
der and number of the nouns which they represent : 



Je ne connais d'avarice permise 
que celle du temps. 

Stanislas Leczinsky. 

Les seules louanges que le coeur 
donne, sont celles que la bonte s'at- 
tire. Massillon. 



Methinks no avarice is allowable 
unless it be that of time. 



The only praises which the heart 
gives are those which goodness de- 
serves. 

(2.) These pronouns are sometimes used absolutely before qui, que 
dont, etc., in the same manner as the English personal pronouns he, 
they, &c, before who, whom, &c. : 



Celui qui rend un service doit 
Poublier, celui qui le recoit, s'en sou- 
venir. Barthelemy. 

Aimer ceux qui vous haissent ceux 
qui vous persecutent, c'est la charite 
du chretien, c'est l'esprit de la reli- 
gion. BOURDALOUE. 



He who renders a service should 
forget it ; he who receives it should 
remember it. 

To love those who hate you, those 
who persecute you, is the charity of 
the Christian ; it is the spirit of re- 
ligion. 



(3.) Celui-ci, celle-ci, etc. ; celui-la, celle-ld, are used when it is de- 
sirable to denote the comparative proximity or remoteness expressed 
in English by the words this and that : 

celui-ci, i^is one. celui-la, that one, 

(4.) Celui-ci, celui-la, etc., are often used to express contrast or 
comparison, They are then equivalent to the English expressions 
the former, the latter ; this one, tlxat one: 



Un magistrat integre et un brave 
ofncier, sont egalement estimables : 
telui-ld fait la guerre aux ennemis 
domestiques, celui-ci nous protege 
contre les ennemis exte>ieurs. 

GlRAULT-DuvrVIER. 

Tel est l'avantage ordinaire 
Qu'ont sur la beaute les talents : 
Ceux-ci plaisent dans tous les temps ; 
Ctlle-ld n'a qu'un temps pour plaire. 
Voltaire. 
14 



An upright magistrate and a brave 
officer are equally estimable : the 
former makes war against domestic 
enemies, the latter protects us against 
foreign enemies. 

Such is the ordinary advantage 
which talents possess over beauty ? 
the former please at all limes ; the 
latter has but one time to 'please. 



314 RELATIVE PRONOUNS. § 38, 39. 

(5 ) Ceci, cda> have no plural, and are used only of things. They 
do not refer to a word expressed before, but serve to point out objects: 
prenez cen, take this. donnez-moi cela, give me that 

JPai deja dit ce qu'il faut faire, / have already said what should be 
quand un enfant veut avoir ceci et done when a child will have this and 
eela. J. J. Rousseau. that. 

(6.) Ce, a pronoun, must not be confounded with the demonstra- 
tive adjective ce. The pronoun ce is often used without an antece- 
dent, as the nominative of the verb etre in the same manner as the 
English pronoun it • 

c'est moi, it is I c'est vous, it is you. 

It is no longer the sport of an 
unworthy flame. 

It is Pyrrhus ; it is the son and 
the rival of Achilles. 



Ce n'est plus le jouet d'une flamme 

servile. 
C'est Pyrrhus, c'est le fils et le 

rival d'Achille. Racine. 

For particular rules on this prqnoun, see } 108. 

§ 38. — Relative Pronouns. 

(1.) The relative pronouns are so named on account of the inti- 
mate relation which they have to a noun or pronoun which precedes, 
and of which they recall the idea. The noun or prone un so preced- 
ing the relative pronoun is called the antecedent. 

(2.) Table of the Relative Pronouns . 
qui, uho, which ; (sujet, nominal) de qui, of from whom, ) Regime thrift 
que, whom, which ; (reg. direct, ace.) dont, of from whom; \ ^d'aMative 

which ; ) 

a qui, to whom ; (regime indirect, dative.) 

lequel, who, which ; composed of the article and quel. 

Singular Plural. 

Masculine. Feminine, Masculine. Feminine. 

lequel, laquelle, lesquels, lesquelles, who, which ; 

duquel, de laquelle, desquels, desquelles, offromwhUA; 
auquel, a laquelle, auxquels, auxquelles, to which. 

y, to it, of it, etc. en, of it, of them, etc. 

quoi, what, which, why, etc. 

§ 39. — Remarks on the Relative Pronouns. 

(1 ) Qui, who, which, is generally the subject or nominative. It is 
used for both genders and numbers, for persons and for things. (See 
No. 6 of this §.) 

(2.) When used for things, qui cam* >t be preceded by a preposi- 
tion. It? use, in this respect, is^ restricted to the nominative. 

(3.) It is used relatively and abso^ely. 

(4.) It is used relatively when it has an antecedent expressed : 



RELATIVE PRONOUNS. §39. 



315 



Le pi airier qui fut roi, fut un 
pere adore. Aubert. 

L'amour avidement croit tout ce 
qui le flatte. Racine. 



The fir sf who became king was an 
adored father. 

Love believes eagerly all that flat- 
ters it 



(5.) It is used absolutely when it has no antecedent expressed. 
It then offers to the mind a vague and indeterminate idea. It is ren- 
dered in English by he who, she who, they who. 



Qui veut parler sur tout, souvent 
parle au hasard. Andrieux. 

Lache, qui veut mourir, courageux 
qui peut vivre. Racine, Jun. 

Qui ne fait des heureux, n'est 
pas digne de Tetre. 

(6.) Qui is also used absolutely when it is interrogative, 
then be nominatif or regime : 

qui parle ? who speaks $ qui voyez-vous ? whom do you see t 

(7.) Que, whom, what, which, stands generally for the regime direct. 
This pronoun is used for persons and things. It is of both genders 
and numbers : 



Who (he who) wishes to speak on 
every subject, speaks often at random. 

He who wishes to die is a coward ; 
he who can support life has courage. 

He who does not render others 
happy is not worthy to be so. 

It may 



les lettres que j'ai, 

les hommes que j'ai vus, 



the letters which I have, 
the men whom I have seen. 



(8.) It is relative when it has an antecedent : 



La gloire prete un charme aux 
horreurs quon. affronte. 

Delavigne. 

Des lois que nous suivons, la pre- 
miere est Thonneur. Voltaire. 



Glory lends a charm to the horrors 
which we face. 

Of the laws which we follow, the 
first is honor. 

(9.) It is absolute when it has no antecedent, and signifies quelle 
chose ? what thing ? quoi ? what 7 

que voulez-vous ? what will you (have) ? 

que dit-on ? what do people say f 

(10.) Quoi, what, is invariable, and said only of things. It may 
be used absolutely and relatively : 

j'ignore ce a quoi il pense, / am ignorant of what he thinks. 

In the above sentence it is relative, being preceded by its ante- 
cedent ce. 

(11.) Quoi, when absolute, means quelle chose ? what thing? and ia 
used mostly in interrogative and doubtful sentences : 



II j a dans cette affaire je ne sals 
quoi, que je n'entends pas. 

L'academte. 
II y avait je ne sais quoi dans ses 
yeux pedants, qui me faisait peur. 
.' Fenelon. 



There is in that affair I know not 
what, which I do not understand. 

There was I know not what in his 
piercing eyes, which inspired me with 
fear. 



816 



RELATIVE PRONOUNS. § 39. 



(12.) Dont, of whom, of which, whose, is used for both genders and 
numbers; fo; persons and for things. It is always employed rela- 
tively, and is, therefore, always preceded by an antecedent: 



Un plaisir dot,t on est assure de 
ee repentir ne peut jamais etre tran- 
quille. Mme. de La Valliere. 

II faut plaindre le sort du prince 
infortune, dont le cceur endurci n'a 
jamais pardonne. Chenier. 



A pleasure of which we are tur6 
to repent, can never be a peaceful 
one. 

We must pity the fate of that un- 
fortunate prince, whose hardened 
heart has never forgiven. 



(13.) Dont is preferable to de qui, of whom, and duquel, of which. 
When, however, the pronoun has the sense of from whom, i. e., when 
used to denote a transfer, de qui is better : 



Le libraire de qui j'ai recu ces 
livres. 



The bookseller from whom I have 
received these books. 



(14.) Lequel, laquelle, lesquelles, who, which, should only be used 
in the nominative, and in the direct regimen, in order to avoid am- 
biguity. They may relate to persons or things : 



C'est un effet de la divine Provi- 
dence, lequel attire 1'admiration de 
tout le monde. Bussi-Rabutin. 



It is an act of divine Providence, 
which (act) attracts the admiration 
of every one. 



(15.) Lequel, preceded by a preposition — that is, duquel, auquel, dans 
lequel, &c, must always be used for things in the indirect regimen. 
The word qui, as has been mentioned above, cannot relate to things 
in the oblique cases : 



That would be a curious book in 
which not a falsehood were found. 

The Seine, in the bed of which the 
Yonne, the Mamie, and the Oise 
empty themselves. 



Un livre curieux serait celui dans 
lequel on ne trouverait pas un men- 
songe. Napoleon. 

La Seine, dans le lit de laqueUe, 
viennent se jeter l'Yonne, la Marne, 
et l'Oise. 

(16.) Lequel, in all its modifications, may be used absolutely or 
interrogatively : 

lequel? which one? duquel? of which one? 

lequel voyez-vous ? which one do you see ? 

(17.) En, of it, of them. This pronoun is of both genders and 
numbers, and relates almost always to animals and things. It is often 
used for the English words, some, avy, when employed absolutely, 
or even when understood, It is als > used as an indirect regimen 
in relation to things, and sometimes, but not often, in relation to 
persons \) 92 (2)], instead of the personal pronouns lui, elks, eux t 
dies. [\ 103, Rule 1.] 

Vous en parlez, you speak of it J' en ai, 1 have some of \U 



INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. § 40, 41. 



317 



La fortune a son prix : l'imprudent 

en abuse, 
L'hypocrite en medit, et Thonn^te 

hoinme en use. Delille. 

Les limites des seances sont com- 
me l'horizon ;. plus on ?n approche, 

plus elles reculent. Mme. Necker. j (them), the more they recede. 
La vie est un dep6t confie par le 

ciel ; 
")ser en disposer, c'est etre crimineL 
Gresset. 



Fortune has its worth: the im- 
prudent abuses it ; the hypocrite 
speaks evil of it, and the worthy 
man uses it. 

The limits of science are like the 
horizon, the more we approach 



Life is a trust confided by heaven : 
to dare to dispose of it, is a crime. 



(18.) Y, to it, to them, thereto, of it, &c. This relative pronoun, of 
both genders and numbers, is used instead of a lui, a elle, en lui, &c. 
It is used of things, and also adverbially in the sense of there. 

J'y pense, / think of it. J'?/ donne mes soins, / devote my 

care to it. 

I have known misfortune, and 1 
can sympq^lliize with it. 

Let its think no more of this, dear 
Paulin ; the longer I think of it, the 
more 1 feel my cruel constancy waver. 



J'ai oonnu le malheur, et j y y sais 
compatir. Guicuard. 

K'y songeons plus, cher Paulin ; plus 

ftf Pt"^e, 
Pius je sens chanceler ma cruelle 

Constance. Racinc 

Vous avez peu de bien; joignez 
y ma fortune. Dorat. 

En quelque pays que j'aie 6te, j'y 
ai vecu comme si j'eusse du y passer 
ma vie. Montesquieu. 



You have but little property ; join 
my fortune to it. 

In whatever country I have been, 
I lived {there) as if I wat to spend 
my life in it. 

(19.) Although numerous instances may be found in which French 
authors have used y with regard to persons, these are licenses wh^b 
i/, is not desirable to imitate. 

§ 40. — Indefinite Pronouns. 

(1.) The indefinite pronouns indicate persons and things witl *ut 
particularizing them : they are — 



autrui, 
chacun, 
on, 


others. 

every one. 

one, people, they. 


quiconque, 
Tun l'autre, 
run et l'autre, 


whoever, 
one another, 
loth. 


personne, 
quelqu'un, 


no one, nobody, 
some one, somebody. 


tel, 
tout, 


such. 

every thing, \*\oh 



§ 41. — Remarks on the Indefinite Pronouns. 

(1.) Autrui, others. This pronoun is applied only to persons. It 
has no change of form for gender or number, and is used only as an 
indirect regimen. 



L'honnete homme est discret ; il 
remarque les defauts & autrui, mais 
il n'en parle jamais. 'St. Evremond. 

ISTe fais point a autrui ce que tu ne 
voudrais pas qu'on te fit. 



The gentleman is discreet ; he ob- 
serves the defects tf others, hut never 
alludes to them. 

Do not unto others that which thou 
wovldst not like to be done unto thee. 



818 



INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. § 41. 



(2.) Cilacun, every erne, each one. When this pronoun is absolute, 
and means every one, everybody, it is invariable : 



Le sens cemmun n'est pas chose 

commune, 
Chacun pourtant, croit en avoir 

assez. Valaincourt. 

Chacun est prosterne devant les 
gens heureux. Destouches. 



Common sense is no common 
thing, though every one believes he 
has enough of it. 

Every one bows before the for 
tunate. 



(3.) When chacun is used relatively it may take the form of th 
feminine : 



Chacune de nous (des femmes) se 

Eretendait superieure aux autres en 
eaute. Montesquieu. 



Every one of its (women) thought 
herself superior in beauty to L«e 
others. 



(4.) On (one, people, they) is always in the nominative ; and although 
always construed with a verb in the third person singular, it conveys 
most generally the idea of plurality. It is commonly used in indefinite 
sentences : 



On dit, people say, they say, it is said. 

On garde sans remords ce qu'on 
acquiert sans crime. Corneille. 

On relit tout Racine : on choisit 
dans Voltaire. Delille. 

On ne surmonte le vice qu'en le 
fuyant. Fenelon. 



On parle, somebody speaks, &c. 

We (one, people) keep without re- 
morse that which we (one, people) 
acquire without crime. 

We (people, they) read again and 
again all Racine : we (dtc.) select in 
Voltaire. 

We conquer vice only by avoid- 
ing it. 



(5.) On, coming immediately after the words et, si, on, que, and qui, 
is generally preceded by the article V, used for euphony : 

That which one understands well, 
he clearly expresses. 



Ce que Von congoit bien, s'ex- 
prime clairement. Boileau. 

G'est d'un roi que Von tient cette 

maxime auguste, 
Que jamais on n'est grand, qu'autant 

que Von est juste. Boileau. 



It is from a king that we derive 
this august maxim, that one is only 
great in proportion as he is just 



(6.) Personne, no one, nobody, used as an indefinite pronoun, is 
always masculine and singular. When used as nominative to a verb 
expressed, it is followed by ne : 



H n'est personne qui ne cherche a 
se rendre heureux. — Chinese thought. 

Personne ne veut etre plaint de 
ses erreurs. Vauvenargues. 



There is no one who does not seek 
to render himself happy. 

No one wishes to be pitied on 
account of his mistakes. 



Kote. — The word personne, used as a noun, and meaning a particular 
person, is of the feminine gender. 

(7.) QuELQu'ira, somebody, some one, any one, anybody, used abso- 
lute! y, is invariable : 



INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. S 41. 



819 



Envier qielqiCun c'est s'avouer 
§on inferieui . Mlle. de L'Espinasse. 

Quelqu'un a-t-il jamais doute 
s^rieusement de ''existence de Dieu? 

GlRAULT-DuVIVIER. 



To envy any cue is c<nfessing one's 

self his inferior. 

Has any one ever had serioiu 
doubts on the existence of God? 



(8.) Quelqifun, used relatively, changes for gender and number. 
is then the sense of some of some one of: 



Tt 



Connaissez-vous quelqu'une de ces 
dames quelques-uns de ces mes- 
sieurs ? Girault-Duvivier. 



Do you know any one of thos 
ladies, any of those gentlemen f 



(9.) Quiconque, whoever, whosoever, is generally masculine, and has 
no plural. It is only said of persons : 

Wlwever flatters his masters be- 
trays them. 



Quiconque flatte ses maitres, les 
trahit. Massillon. 

Quiconque est capable de mentir, 
est indigne d'etre compte au nombre 
des hommes. Fenelon. 

Quiconque est soupconneux, invite 
la trahison. Voltaire. 



Whoever is capable of falsehood is 
unworthy to be counted among the 
number of men. 

Wlwever is suspicious, invites 
treachery. 



(10.) L'un l'autre, one another, each other, the one and the other. 
This pronoun makes in the feminine Vune V autre, and in the plural 

les uns les autres, les unes les autres : 



Everybody confided one to another 
this communication. 

All the people followed Virginia, 
some through curiosity, some through 
respect for Icilius. 

There are two sorts of ruins ; one 
the work of time, the other the work 
of men. 

(11.) L'un et l'autre, les uns les autres (both). This expression 
may be used of persons and things : 

La Condamine travelled over both 
hemispheres. 



Tout le monde se confiait Vun a 
V autre cette confidence. Rulhieres. 

Tout le peuple suivit Virginie, les 
uns par curiosite, les autres par con- 
sideration pour Icilius. Vertot. 

II y a deux sortes de ruines ; rune 
I'ouvrage du temps, I' autre l'ouvrage 
des hommes. Chateaubriand. 



La Condamine a parcouru Vun et 
V autre hemisphere.* Buffon. 

Hun et Vautre consul suivaient 
ses etendarts. Corneille. 

Sous rune et Vautre epoque, il 
perit un tres grand nombre de ci- 
toyens. Barthelemy. 

lis se reunissaient les uns et les 
autres contre Tennemi commun. 

GlRAULT-DuvrVIER. 



Both consuls followed his stand 
ards. 

At both epochs a large number of 
citizens perished. 

They united with one another 
against the common enemy. 



(12.) Tel, telle, feminine, such, many a person, many, is an indefinite 
pronoun in the following and in similar sentences: 



* The noun is in the singular, because the word hemisphere is under- 
etood aft3r the word Vun. This rule is observed by the best French 
authors. 



820 



VERBS. 8 42. 



Tel donne, a pleines mains, qui 
n'oblige personne. Corneille. 

Tel brille au second rang, qui 
e'eclipse au premier. Voltaire. 

Tel est pris qui croyait prendre. 
La Fontaine. 

Telle, sans aucun at trait pour la 
retraite, se consaere au Seigneur par 
pure fierte. Massillon. 

Teh que Ton croit d'inutiles amis, 
Dans le besoin rendent de bons 
services. Boursault. 



Many a one may give boiniifull$ 
wit /tout obliging any one. 

Many a person may shine in the. 
second rank, who is eclipsed in th* 
first. 

Many are caught while attempting 
to catch others. 

Many [a nun] for whom, retreat 
has no attractions, consecrates her- 
self to the Lord through mere pride 

Many friends whom we think use- 
less render us, in our need, valuable 
services. 



(13.) Tel, in connection with Monsieur, Madame, &c, as Monsieur 
un tel, Madame une telle, Mr., Mrs. such-a-one, is used substantively, 

(14.) Tout, every one, every thing. This word, employed absolutely, 
is invariable. 



A la seule vertu, sois sur que 
tout prospere. F. de ISTeufchateau. 

Tout n'est pas Caumartin, Bignon, 
ni d'Aguesseau. Boileau. 

Son grand genie embrassait tout 
Bossuet. 



Be assured that it is with virtue 
alone that every thing prospers. 

Every one is not Caumartin, 
Bignon, nor d'Aguesseau. 

His great genius embraced every 
thing. 



§ 42. — Verbs. 

(1.) The verb is that part of speech which expresses an action 
done or suffered by the subject; or simply indicates the condition oi 
the subject. 

(2.) The subject or nominative of a verb is the person or thing 
doing the action, or being in the condition expressed by the verb. It 
replies to the question qui est-ce-qui ? who ? for persons ; and qu'est- 
ce qui ? which ? what ? for things. 

(3.) Verbs admit two kinds of regimen : the direct regimen and the 
indirect regimen. 

(4.) The direct regimen, or immediate object, is that which com- 
pletes in a direct manner the signification of a verb; that is to say, 
without the aid of any other intermediate word. It answers to the 
question qui ? whom ? for persons, and quoi ? what ? for things. 

(5.) The indirect regimen, or remote object, is that which completes 
the signification of the verb by means of an intermediate word, such 
as the prepositions a, de, pour, avec, dans, &c. — a qui ? to whom ? de qui? 
vf or from whom? pour qui? for whom J avec dm! &c, for persons, 
and a quoi? to what? de quoi? of or from what? &c, for thugs. 

(6.) Verbs are regular, irregular, or defective. § 44 (2). 



VERBS. 8 43. 



321 



§ 43. — Different Sorts of Verbs. 

(1.) There are five sorts of verbs: active, passive, neuter, reflective 
or pronominal, and unipersonal. 

(2.) The active verb is that which expresses an action performed by 
the subject, and having some person or thing for its object. This ob~ 
jeet is the direct regimen of the verb. 

(3.) Every French verb after which quelqiCun* some one, quelque- 
chose, something, may be placed, is an active verb. Thus, in the fol- 
lowing sentences, proteger, changer, chanter, &c, are active verbs, be- 
cause we may say proteger quelqu'un, to protect some one ; changer 
cuelquechose, to change something: 



— 2 — -_ -, __ _ _ ___ 

Dieu protege l'innocence. — Racine. 
L'habit change les moeurs. 

Voltaire. 
Les cygnes ne chanteni pas leur 
mort. Buffon. 



God protects innocence. 
Dress changes the manners. 

Swans do not sing their death. 



(4.) The passive verb is the contrary of the active verb. The active 
verb presents the subject as performing an action immediately directed 
tow T ards an object; whereas the passive verb presents the subject as 
suffering or receiving an action. The passive verb i3 composed of 
the past participle of an active verb and the auxiliary etre, to be. 
(See 5 54.) 



Nos campagnes sont fertilisees par 
la pluie. L'academie. 

II etait guide par la force de son 
genie. Masslllon. 

Les petits esprits sont trop blesses 
des petite s choses. 

La Rochefoucauld. 



Our fields are fertilized by the 
rain. 

He was guided by the force of his 
genius. 

Little minds are too much vexed 
with trifles. 



(5.) The neuter verb marks, like the active verb, an action per 
formed by the subject ; but this action can only reach the object in- 
directly ; that is, by means of a preposition. Hence it is that the neu- 
ter verb never has a direct regimen, and that the words quelqu'un and 
quelquechose cannot be placed after it. A neuter verb can never 
be used in the passive voice. 



Socrate passa le dernier jour de 
ea vie a discourir de l'immortalite 
de Tame. L'Academie. 

Le feu qui semble eteint, dort 
gouvent sous sa cendre. — Corneille. 

Les Plat Sens citerent les Lacede- 
moniens a comparaitre devant les 
Amphyctions. Le Gexdre. 



Socrates spent the last day of his 
life in discoursing upon the immor- 
tality of the soul. 

The fire which seems extinct sleeps 
often under its ashes. 

The Plateaus cited the Lacedemo- 
nians to appear before the Ampkyo- 
tions. 



(6.) The reflective or pronominal verb k co ijugated witn two pro* 
14* 



322 CONJUGATIONS OP VERBS. § 44, 45. 

nouns of the same person ; je me, tu te, il se, nous nous, vous vous, ill 
se. (See $ 56.) 

Je me fiVte, I flatter myself. Vous vous felicitez, you congratu 

late yourselves. 



II ne faut pas se flatter, les plus 
experimentes ont fait des fautes ca- 
pitales. Bossuet. 

Les peuples se feliciteront d'avoir 
nn roi qui lui ressemble. 

Massillon. 
11 ne faut pas permettre a l'homme 
de se mepriser entierement. 

Bossuet. 



We should not flatter ourselves : the 
most experienced have committed cap- 
ital errors. 

The nations will congratulate th em- 
selves upon having a king who re- 
sembles Mm. 

We should not allow a man to ds 
spise himself entirely. 



(7.) The unipersonal verb can only be used in the third person sin- 
gular: II pleut, it rains; il gele, it freezes; il tonne, it thunders. 



Pour bien juger les grands, il faut 
les approcher. Aubert. 

II faut rendre meilleur le pauvre 
quon soulage. Saint-Lambert. 



To judge properly of the great, it 
is necessary to approach them. 

We should {it is necessary to) im- 
prove the poor whom we relieve. 



(8.) There are two verbs called auxiliary, because they serve to 
conjugate all others. They are — avoir, to have ; and etre, to be. 

§ 44. — Conjugations. 

(1.) The French verbs are divided into four large classes or conju- 
gations : 

1st. The first conjugation comprises all verbs of which the present of the 
infinitive ends in er ; as parler, to speak ; aimer, to love, <fcc. 

2d. The second conjugation embraces all those of which the infinitive 
ends in ir ; as cherir, to cherish ; punir, to punish, &c. 

3d. The third conjugation contains all the verbs which, in the infinitive, 
end in oir ; such as recevoir, to receive ; pouvoir, to be able, &c. 

4th. The fourth conjugation comprises all the verbs terminating with 
be in the infinitive ; as rendre, to render ; prendre, to take, &c. 

(2.) The verbs are again divided into regular, irregular, and defec- 
tive : 

1st. The regular verbs are those which, in all their tenses, are conjugated 
like the model verb of the conjugation to which they belong. 

2d. The irregular verbs are those which are not conjugated like the 
model verb. 

3d. The defective verbs are those which want certain tenses or persons 

§ 45. — Modes and Tenses. 

(1.) There are six modes : the indicative, the conditional, the ink 
perative, the subjunctive, the infinitive, and the participle : 

1st. The indicative, whatever may be the tense, indicates or declares 
in a positive, absolute manner: j'abandonne, I abandon ; j'ai abandonne, 
I have nhn^ rlnned ; j'abandonnerai, I will abandon. 



MODES AND TENSES. § 45. 323 

2d. The conditional indicates a condition or a supposition : j'abandon- 
Iierais si .... / would <x bandon if ... . 

3d. The imperative is used to express a command, prayer, or exhorta- 
tion : abandonnez cet enfant, abandon that child. 

4th. The subjunctive is used after propositions expressing doubt, con- 
tingency, or necessity : il est douteux que je l'abandonne : it is not certain 
that I may abandon him. 

5th. The infinitive presents the signification of the verb in an unlimited 
manner : abandonner ses enfants, to abandon one's children. 

6th. The participle, while retaining the power of the verb, at the same 
time partakes of the nature of an adjective : abandonnant ses parents, 
abandoning his relatives; abandonne de ses enfants, abandoned by his 
children. 

(2.) The indicative has eight tenses : 

1st. The presen : : je parle, / speak ; je donne, I give. 
2d. The simultaneous past, or imperfect : je parlais, / was speaking. 
3d. The past definite : je parlai, I spoke, I did speak. 
4th. The past indefinite : j'ai parle, I have spoken ; j'ai donne, I have given, 
5th. The past anterior, j' eus parle, I had spoken. 

6th. The pluperfect, j'avais parle", I had been speaking. 

*7th. The future absolute, je parlerai, I shall, will speak. 

8th. The future anterior, ) ., • w ri.ni. i 

or future perfect, \ J aurai parl^, I shall have spoken. 

(3.) The conditional has two tenses : 

1st. The present or future, je parlerais, / should, would speak. 

2d. The past, j'aurais parle, / should have spoken. 

(4.) The imperative has one tense : 

parle, speak. 

(5.) The subjunctive has four tenses : 

1st. The present or future, que je parle, that I may speak. 

2d. The imperfect, que je parlasse, that I might speak. 

3d. The past indefinite, que j'aie parle, that I may have spoken. 

4th. The pluperfect, que j'eusse parle, that Imighl have sp iken, 

(6.) The infinitive has two tenses : 

1st. The present relative, parler, to speak. 

2d. The past, avoir parte, to have spoken. 

(7.) The participle has three tenses : 

1st. The present relative, parlant, speaking. 

2d. The past active, ayant parte, having spoken. 

8d. The past or passive, parle, spoken. 

(8.) Tenses are simple or compound. 

1. Simple, w len they are expressed in a single word : je parle, 1 
speak. 

2. Compound, when they require the assistance of the verb avoir or 
hire: j'ai parle, I have spoken; je suis arrive, lam arriieU. 



324 



USE OF THE AUXILIARY VERBS. 8 46. 



§ 46. — Use of the Auxiliary Verbs avoir and etre. 
(1.) The auxiliary avoir is used: 

1. In the conjugation of its own compound tenses: j'ai eu, I liave 
had. 

2. In the conjugation of the compound tenses of the verb etre: 
j'ai ete, J have been. 

3. In the compound tenses of the active verbs : j'ai aime, I have 
loved. 

4. In the compound tenses of most neuter verbs expressing an 
ction : j'ai marche, J have walked. [See exceptions to this rule (3) 

below.] 

5. It is also used in the conjugation of verbs which are always 
unipersonal : il a plu, it has rained ; il a grele, it has hailed, &c. 

(2.) The verb etre is used in the conjugation of: 

1. All the tenses of passive verbs: je suis aime, I am loved. 

2. The compound tenses of all reflective or pronominal verbs : je me 
suis flatte, / have flattered myself; je me suis promene, J have walked, 

3. The compound tenses of the following neuter verbs, though the 
same, express action : 

aller, 

arriver, 

choir, 

deceder, 

mourir, 

4. A few unipersonal verbs, which are not always but occasionally 
mich : il lui est arrive un malheur, a misfortune has happened to him. 

(3.) A certain number of neuter verbs : as — 



to go ; 


naltre, 


to he born; 


to arrive ; 


tomber, 


to fall ; 


to fall ; 


venir, 


to come ; 


to decease ; 


parvenir, 


to succeed; 


to die ; 


devenir, 


to become ; 


revenir, 


to return. 





accourir, 


to run towards ; 


entrer, 


to enter ; 


di?paraitre. 


, to disappear ; 


sortir, 


to go out ; 


croitre, 


to grow ; 


passer, 


to pass ; 


cesser, 


to cease ; 


partir, 


to depart ; 


p*rir, 


to perish ; 


vieillir, 


to grow old; 


monter, 


to mount to ascend; 


grandir, 


to grow ; 


descendre, 


to go down ; 


rester, 


to remain, to dwell. 



take sometimes avoir, and sometimes etre. 

1. They take avoir when we have in view the action expressed by 
the verb ; 

2. And etre when situation or condition is the principal idea which 
we wish to express : 

Examples. 

With avoir. With ETRE. 

EUe a disparu subitement. :Elle est disparuo depuis quinz* 

jours. 
She disappeared suddenly. /She has been qone a fortnight 



USE OF THE AUXILIARY VERBS. § 46 

La fievre a cesse hier. 
The fever ceased yesterday. 



325 



Le barometre a descendu de 
^lusieurs degres en peu d'heures. 

The barometer went down several 
degrees in a few hours. 

II a passe en Amerique en tel 
temps. 

He went to America at such a time. 

Le trait a parti avec impetuosite. 
L'academie. 

77ie dart went with impetuosity. 

Le sang avait cesse de couler. 
Boiste. 
The blood had ceased to flow. 



La fievre est cesse'e depuis quel- 
que temps. 

It is same time since ike fever 
ceased. 

II est descendu depuis une heure. 



He has been down one hour. 
Les chaleurs sont passees. 

The heat is past. 

Les troupes sont parties depuis 
six mois. L'academie. 

The troops have been gone six 
months. 

Ce grand bruit est cesse. 

Mme. de Sevigne. 

That great noise is over (has 
ceased). 



(4.) Rester arid demeurer, meaning to dwell, to reside, take the 
auxiliary avoir; when they mean to remain, to be left, they take etre: 



AVOIR. 

J'ai rests plus d'un an en Italie. 
. . . Montesquieu. 

I resided more than a year in 
Italy. 

II a demeure' deux ans a la cam- 
pagne. L'academie. 

He lived (dwelt) two years in the 
country. 



etre. 
Elle donnerait pour vous sa vie, 
le seul bien qui lui soit reste. 

Marmontel. 
She would give, for you, her life, 
the only possession which remains to 
her. 

Deux cents hommes sont de- 
meures sur le champ de bataille. 
L'academie. 
Two hundred men remained on 
the field of battle. 

(5.) Echapper, to escape, to pass unnoticed, to be forgotten, takes the 
auxiliary avoir. In the sense of, to say inadvertently, it takes etre. 



AVOIR. 

Cette difference ne m'a pas echap- 
pe. Rousseau. 

That difference has not escaped 
me. 

J'ai retenu le chant, les vers 
m'onr echappe. Toltairk. 

/ retained the tune, but the verses 
have escaped my memory. 



ETRE. 

Ce mot iriest echappe ; pardunnez 
ma franchise. Voltaire. 

That word escaped my lips ; excuse 
my frankness. 

Excusez les fautes qui pourront 
?n , etre echappees. Boileau. 

Excuse the faults which I may 
have committed inadvertently. 



(6.) Convenir, to become, to suit, takes avoir. When it is used in 
the sense of agreeing, or settling upon a price for an article it takes 
itre. 

Nous som vies convenus du prix. 
L'acadrmie. 
We agreed upon the price. 



Cette maison m y a convenu. 
That house suited me. 



126 



AUXILIARY VERBS. 



§ 47. 



§ 47. — Paradigms of the Auxiliary Verbs. 

To familiarize the student with the frequent use made by the 
Frenc l, of the indefinite pronoun on [§ 41, (4.)], we have introduced 
It in our conjugation of the verbs. 

(1.) AVOIR, TO HAVE,— AFFIRMATIVELY. 

Indicative Mode. 



simple tenses. 



compound tenses. 



PAST INDEFINITE. 



J'a; 


J have 


J'ai eu, 


Itoi as, 


thou hast 


Tu as eu, 


11 a, 


he has 


11 a eu, 


On a, 


one has, people have 


On a eu, 


Nous avons, 


we have 


Nous avons eu 


Vous avez, 


you have 


Vous avez eu, 


lis ont, 


they have 


lis ont eu, 



/ have had 

thou hast had 

he lias had 

one has had 

we have had 

you have had 

they have had 



IMPERFECT. 

J'avais, I had, was having, or J used 

to have 
Tu avais. thou hadst 

11 avait, he had 

On avait, one had, people had 

Nous avions, we had 

Vous aviez, you had 

lis avaient, they had 



PLUPERFECT. 



J'avais eu, 



Tu avais eu, 
II avait eu, 
On avait eu, 
Nous avions eu, 
Vous aviez eu, 
lis avaient eu, 



/ had had 



thou hadst had 

he had had 

one had had 

we had had 

you had had 

they had had 



past definite. 



PAST ANTERIOR. 



J'eus, 
Tu eus, 
11 eut, 
On eut, 
Nous eumes 
Vous eutes, 
Us eurent, 



I had, or did have 

thou hadst, etc. 

he had 

one had, etc. 

we had 

you had 

they had 



J'eus eu, 
Tu eus eu, 
II eut eu, 
On eut eu, 
Nous eumes eu, 
Vous eutes eu, 
lis eurent eu, 



I had had 

thou hadst had 

he had had 

one had had 

we had iad 

you \ad had 

they had had 



future. 



FUTURE ANTERIOR. 



J'aurai, 
Tu auras, 
11 aura, 
On aura, 
Nous aurons, 
Vous aurcz, 
lis anront, 



/ shall or will have 
thou wilt have 
lie will have 
one will have 
we shall have 
you will have 
they will have 



J'aurai eu, 
Tu auras ea 
II aura eu, 
On aura eu, 
Nous aurons eu, 
Vous aurez eu, 
lis auront eu, 



J shall, will have had 

thou shalt have had 

he will hojve had, 

one will have had 

we will have had 

you will hai had 

they will have had 



AUXILIARY VERBS. $ 47. 

Conditional Mode. 



327 



SIMPLE TENSES. 


COMPOUND TENSES. 


PRESENT. PAST. 


T'amais, 


I should have 


J'aurais eu, J should ham had 


Tu aurais, 


thou couldst have 


Tu aurais eu, thou wouldst have haa 


11 aurait, 


he would have 


11 aurait eu, he should have had 


On aurait, 


one would have 


On aurait eu, one should have had 


Nous aurions / 


we would have 


Nous aurions eu, we should have hud 


Vous auriez, 


you would have 


Vous auriez eu, you slwuld have had 


lis auraient, 


they would have 


lis auraient eu, they should have had 




Imperative Mode. 


Aie, 


have thou 


Qu'il ait, let him have 


Qu'on 


ait, let one, people, them, have 


Ayons, let us have 


Ayez, 


have ye or you 


Qu'ils aient, let them have 



Subjunctive Mode. 



Que j 'aie, 
Que tu aies. 
Qu'il ait, 
Qu'on ait, 
Que nous ayons 
Que vous ayez, 
Qu'ils aient, 



that I may' 

that thou mo.yest 

that he may 

that one may 

that we may 

that you may 

that they may 



Que j'aie eu, that I may 

Que tu aies eu, that thou mayest 
Qu'il ait eu, that he may 

Qu'on ait eu, that one mo.y 

Que nous ayons eu, that we may 
Que vous ayez eu, that you may 
Qu'ils aient eu, that they may 



IMPERFECT. 

Que j'eusse, that I mighP 

Que tu eusses, that thou mightest 

Qu'il eut, that he might 

Qu'on eut, that one might 

Que nous eussions, that we might 

Que vous eussiez, that you might 

Qu'ils esissent, that they mighty 



PLUPERFECT 



r « 



Que j'eusse eu, 
Que tu eusses 

Qu'il eut eu, 
Qu'on eut eu, 



that I might 

eu, that thou 

mightest 

that lie might 

that one might 



Que nous eussions eu. that v-e 
might 

Que vous eussiez eu, that you 
might 

Qu'ils eussent eu, that they might 



PRESENT. 



Avoir, 



Ayant, 



Eu, 



Infinitive Mode. 

to have | Avoir eu, 
Participle. 

having j Ayant eu, 
PAST or passive. 



PAST. 



tv have ,wa 



COMPOUND. 



having k*a 



had 



328 



AUXILIARY VERB 8. $ 47. 



(2.) AVOIR, TO HAVE: CONJUGATED NEGATIVELY 
Indicative Mode. 



SIMPLE TENSES. 



COMPOUND TENSED 



PRESENT, 



Je n'ai pas, 
Tu n'as pas, 
II n'a pas, 
Oh n'a pas, 
Nous n'avons pas, 
Vous n'avez pas, 
lis n'ont pas, 



/ have not 

thou hast not 

he has not 

one has not 

we have not 

you have not 

they have not 



IMPERFECT. 



Je n'avais pas, 
Tu n'avais pas, 
II n'avait pas, 
On n'avait pas, 
Nous n'avions pas, 
Vous n'aviez pas, 
Us n'avaient pas, 



I had not 

thou hadst not 

he had not 

one had not 

we had not 

you had not 

they had not 



PAST INDEFINITE. 

Je n'ai pas eu, / haw 

Tu n'as pas eu, thou hasi 

II n'a pas eu, he has 

On n'a pas eu, one has 

Nous n'avons pas eu, we have 

Vous n'avez pas eu, you have 

lis n'ont pas eu, they have j 



PLUPERFECT. 



Je n'avais pas eu, 
Tu n'avais pas eu, 
II n'avait pas eu, 
On n'avait pas eu, 
Nous n'avions pas eu, 
Vous n'aviez pas eu, 
lis n'avaient pas eu, 



/ had*\ 
thou hadst 
he had | 
one had, ^ * 
we had 
you had j 
they had J 



PAST DEFINITE. 



Je n'eus pas, 
Tu n'eus pas, 
II n'eut pas, 
On n'eut pas, 
Nous n'eumes pas, 
Vous n'eiites pas, 
lis n'eurent pas, 



/ had not 

thou hadst not 

he had not 

one had not 

we had not 

you had not 

they had not 



PAST ANTERIOR. 

Je n'eus pas eu, I had 
Tu n'eus pas eu, thou hadst 

II n'eut pas eu, he had 

On n'eut pas eu, one had 

Nous n'eumes pas eu, we had 

Vous n'eutes pas eu, you had 

lis n'euient pas eu, i/vey had 



^ 



FUTURE. 

Je n'aurai pas, J shall not~\ 

Tu n'auras pas, thou wilt not 

II n'aura pas, he will not 

On n'aura pas, one will not 
Nous n'auronspas, we shull not 

Vous n'aurez pas., you shall not 

Us n'auront pas, they will not^ 



FUTURE ANTERIOR. 



Je n'aurai pas eu, 
Tu n'auras pas eu, 
II n'aura pas eu, 
On n'aura pas eu, 
Nous n'aurons pas eu, 
Vous n'aurez pas eu, 
lis n'auront pas eu, 



I shair 
thou shalt 

hi will 
one will \ 

we will 
you will 
iheywiU 



Conditional Mode. 



past. 



Je n'aurais pas, 
Tu n'aurais pas, 
II n'aurait pas, 
On n'aurait pas, 
Nous n'aurions pas, 
Vous n'auriez pas, 
lis n'auraient pas, 



I should' 

thou wouldst 

he would 

one would )>!$. 

we would 

you would 

they would 



Je n'aurais pas eu, / should 
Tu n'aurais pas eu, thmshouldst 
II n'aurait pas eu, he would 
On n'n srait pas eu, one would 
Nous aurions pas eu , we would 
Von. vauriez pas eu, you would 
lis auraient pas eu. they would 



AUXILIARY VERBS. 



§ 47. 



329 



Imperative Mode. 



N'aie pas 
Qu'il n'ait pas, 
Qu'on n'ait pas, 
N'ayons pas 
N'ayez pas 
Qu'ils n'aient pas, 



have not 
let him not have 
let one noi have 
let us not have 
have not ye or you 
let them not have 



Subjunctive Mode. 

SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 



Que je n'aie pas, that I may ^ 
Que tn n'aies pas, that thou 

mayest 
Qu'il n'ait pas, that he may 

Qu'on n'ait pas, that one may 
Que nous n'ayons pas, that we y- 

may 
Que vous n'ayez pas, that you 

may 
Qu'ils n'aient pas, that they may 



IMPERFECT. 

Que je n'eusse pas, that I mighF 

Que tu n'eusses pas, that thou 

mightest 
Qu'il n'eut pas, that he might 
Qu'on n'eut pas, that one might 

Que nous n'eussions pas, that 

we might 
Que vous n'eussiez pas, that you 

might 
Qu'ils n'eussent pas, that they 

might 



Que je n'aie pas eu, that I may' 
Que tu n'aies pas eu, that thou 

mayest 
Qu'il n'ait pas eu, that he may 
Qu'on n'ait pas eu. that one may 
Que nous n'ayons pas eu, that 

we may 
Que vous n'ayez pas eu, that 

you may 
Qu'ils n'aient pas eu, that they 
may 

PLUPERFECT 

Que je n'eusse pas eu. that P 

might 
Que tu n'eusses pas eu, that 

thou mightest 
Qu'il n'eut pas eu, that he might 
Qu'on n'eut pas eu, that one 

might 
Que nous n'eussions pas eu, that 

.we might 
Que vous n'eussiez pas eu, tliat 

you might 
Qu'ils n'eussent pas eu, that they 
might 



n 

-^ 






Infinitive Mode. 



PRESENT. 



PAST. 



Na pas avoir, not to have | N'avoir pas eu, not to have had 

Participle. . 

PRESENT. COMPOUND. 

N'ayant pas, not having | N'ayant pas eu, not having had 

Past or Passive. 
Pas eu, Not had 



330 



AUXILIARY VERB8. § 47. 



(.3.) AVOIR —INTERROGATIVELY. 
Indicative Mode, 
simple tenses. compound tenses. 



PAST INDEFINITE. 



Ai-je? 
As-tnl 
A-t-il <(*) 
A-t-on ?(*) 
Avons-nous 3 
Avez-vous % 
Ont-ils 'J 



Avais-je '? 
Avais-tu 1 
Avait-il 1 
Avait-on 1 
Avions-nous 1 
Aviez-vous 1 
Avaient-ils 1 



have I? 

hast thou ? 

has he ? 

has one ? 

have we ? 

have you ? 

have they ? 



IMPERFECT. 



had I? 

hadst tJwu ? 

had he ? 

had one ? 

had we ? 

had you ? 

had they ? 



PAST DEFINITE. 



Eus-je ? 
Eus-tu 1 
Eut-il 1 
Eut-on % 
Eumes-nous 1 
Eutes-vous % 
Eurent-ils 1 



had I? 

hadst thou ? 

had he ? 

had one ? 

had we ? 

had you ? 

had they ? 



Ai-je eu 1 
As-tu eu 1 
A-t-il eu 1 
A-t-on eu 1 
Avons-nous eu 1 
Avez-vous eu ^ 
Ont-ils eu 7 



have r 

hast thou 

has fve 

has one 

have we 

have you 

have they 



PLUPERFECT. 



Avais-je eu, 
Avais-tu eu, 
Avait-il eu, 
Avait-on eu, 
Avions nous eu, 
Aviez-vous eu, 
Avaient-ils eu, 



had 1^ 

hadst thou 

had he 

had one 

had we 

had you 

had they ^ 



PAST ANTERIOR. 



Eus-je eu 1 
Eus-tu eu % 
Eut-il eu 1 
Eut-on eu 1 
Eumes-nous eul 
Eutes-vous eul 
Eurent-ils eu 1 



had 1^ 

hadst thou 

had he 

had one 

had we 

had you 

had they 



>3 



FUTURE. 



FUTURE ANTERIOR. 



Aurai-je 1 
Auras- tu 1 
Aura-t-ill 
Aura-t-on 1 
Aurons-nous 1 
Aurez-vousl 
Auront-ils 1 



shall I have ? 
shalt thou have ? 

will he have ? 
shall one have ? 
shall we have ? 
will one have? 
shall they have 



Aurai-je eu 1 
Auras-tu eu 1 
Aura-t-il eu 1 
Aura-t-on eu 1 
Aurons-nous eu 1 
Aurez-vous eu ? 
Auront-ils eu 1 



shall I 

shalt thou 

shall he 

shall one 

shall we 

shall you 

shall they ^ 



Conditional Mode. 



Aurais-je? 
A arais-tu % 
Aurait-il 1 
Aurait-on % 
Aurions-nous 1 
/Hriez-vousl 
/ qraient-ils ? 



should I have? 

shouldst thou have ? 

should he have ? 

would they have ? 

would we have ? 

should you have ? 

sliould they Kave ? 



Aurais-je eu 1 
Aurais-tu eu ? 
Aurait-il eu % 
Aurait-on eu ? 
Aurions-nous eu 1 
Auriez-vous eu 1 
Auraient-ils eu 1 



should 1 

woiildst thou 

would Jve 

shoull one 

slwuld we 

should you 

would they 



% 



(*) See Lesson 4, Rule 6. 



AUXILIARY VERBS. § 47. 



331 



(4.) AVOIR,— NEGATIVELY AND INTERROGATIVELY. 

Indicative Mode. 

simple tenses. compound tenses. 



PAST INDEFINITE. 



N'ai-je pas ? 


have I not ? 


N'ai-je pas eu ? have P 




N'as-tu pas ? 


hast thou not ? 


N'as-tu pas eu ? hast thou 


cs 


Na-t-il pas ? 


has he not ? 


N'a-t-il pas eu ? has he 


"« 

•^ 


N'a-t-on pas ? 


has one not ? 


N'a-t-on pas eu ? has one 


r --s 


N'avons-nous pas ? 


have we not ? 


N'avons-nous pas eu ? have we 


-** 

§ 


N'avez-vous pas ? 


have you not ? 


N'avez-vous pas eu ? have you 


N'ont-ils pas ? 


have they not ? 


N'ont-ils pas eu ? have they j 




IMPERFECT. 


PLUPERFECT. 




N'avais-je pas! 


had I not ? 


N'avais-je pas eu ? had r 


1 


N'avais-tu pas ? 


hadst tlwu not ? 


N'avais-tu pas eu ? hadst thou 


"*. 


N'avait-il pas ? 


had he not ? 


N'avait-il pas eu ? had he 


5 


N'avait-on pas ? 


had one not ? 


N'avait-on pas eu ? had one 


^ 


N'avions-nous pas ? 


had we not ? 


N'avions-nous pas eu ? had we 




N'aviez-vous pas ? 


had you not ? 


N'aviez-vous pas eu ? had you 


1"' 


N'avaient-ils pas ? 


had tliey not ? 


N'avaient-il pas eu 1 had they ^ 


1 


PAST DEFINITE. 


PAST ANTERIOR. 





N'eus-je pas ? 
N'eus-tu pas ? 
N'eut-il pas ? 
N'eut-on pas ? 
N'eumes-nous pas ? 
N'eutes-vous pas? 
N'eurent-ils pas ? 

FUTURE. 

N'aurai-je pas ? 
N' auras- tu pas ? 
N'aura-t-il pas % 
N'aura-t-on pas ? 
N'aurons-nous pas ? 
N'aurez-vous pas ? 
N'auront-ils pas ? 



had I not ? 

hadst thou not ? 

had he not ? 

had one not ? 

had we not ? 

had you not ? 

had they not ? 



shall r 

shall thou 

shall he 

shall one }> 

shall we I 

shall you \ 

shall they J 



N'eus-je pas eu ? had I 

N'eus-tu pas eu ? hadst thou 
N'eut-il pas eu ? had he 

N'eut-on pas eu ? had one 

N'eumes-nous pas eu ? had we 
N'eutes-vous pas eu ? had you 
N'eurent-ils pas eu ? had they 

FUTURE ANTERIOR. 



N'aurai-je pas eu ? shall r 

N'auras-tu pas eu ? shall thou 
N'aura-t-il pas eu? shall he 

N'aura-t-on pas eu ? shall one y § 
N'aurons-nous pas eu ? shall we 
N'aurez-vous pas eu ? shall you 
N'auront-ils pas eu ? shall they 



Conditional Mode. 



past. 



N'aurais-je pas ? should JT 

N'aurais-tu pas? shouldst thou 
N'aurait-il pas ? should he 

N'aurait-on pas ? should one 
N'aurions-nous pas ? should we \ J 
N'auriez-vous pas ? should you 
N'<mraient-ils pas ? sJwuld they 



N'aurais-je pas eu ? should V 
N'aurais-tu pas eu ? shouldst thou 
N'aurait-il pas eu 1 should he 
N'aurait-on pas eu ? should one 
N'aurions-nous pas eu? should we 
N'auriez-vous pas eu? should you 
N'auraient-ils pas eu? should 
they 



4 



332 



AUXILIARY VERBS. 



§ 47 



(6.) £tre, to ^—affirmatively, 

Indicative Mode. 

SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 



PRESENT 



PAST INDEFINITE. 



Je suis, 


I am 


J'ai ete, 


Have 


been 


Tu es, 


thou art 


Tu as ete, 


thou hast been 


11 est, 


he is 


11 a ete, 


he has been 


On est, 


one is 


On a ete, 


one has been 


Nous sommes, we are 


Nous avons ete. 


we have been 


Vous etes, 


ye or you are 


Vous avez ete, 


you have been 


lis sont, 


they are 


lis ont ete, 


they have been 




IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. 


J'etais, 


/ was or I used to be 


J'avais et£, 


I had been 


Tu etais, 


thou wast 


Tu avais efte, 


thou hodst been 


11 etait, 


he was 


11 avait ete, 


ke had been 


On etait, 


one was 


On avait ete, 


one had been 


Nous etions, 


we were 


Nous avions ete, 


we had been 


Vous etiez, 


you were 


Vous aviez ete, 


you had been 


lis etaient, 


they were 


lis avaient ete, 


they had been 


PAST DEFINITE. PAST ANTERIOR. 


Je fus, 


I was 


J'eus ete, 


I had been 


Tu fus, 


IfbiVlt, lV'ISt 


Tu eus ete, 


thou hadst been 


11 fut, 


he was 


li eut ete, 


he had been 


On fut, 


one v as 


On eut ete, 


one had been 


Nous fumes, 


we were 


Nous eiimes ete, 


we had been 


Vous futes, 


you were 


Vous eutes ete, 


you had been 


lis furent, 


they were 


lis eurent ete, 


they had beei 




FUTURE. FUTURE 


ANTERIOR. 


Je serai, 


J shall be, will be 


J'aurai ete, 


IshaW\ 


Tu seras, 


thou wilt be 


Tu auras ete, 


thou shalt 


§ 


11 sera, 


he shall be 


11 aura ete, 


he shall 


On sera, 


one shall be 


On aura 6t6, 


one shall 


Nous serons, 


we shall be 


Nous aurons ete, 


we shall 


1 


Vous serez, 


you shall be 


Vous aurez ete, 


you will 


lis seront, 


they shall be 


lis auront ete, 


they will^ 






Conditional Mode. 






PRESENT. PAST. 


Je serais, 


/ should be 


J'aurais ete, 


I shotdd 1 


Tu serais, 


thou shouldst be 


Tu aurais ete, 


thou shouldst 


i 


11 serait, 


he would be 


11 aurait ete, 


he would 


On serait, 


one should be 


On aurait ete, 


one would ^ tt 


Nous serions, 


we would be 


Nous aurions ete, 


we should 


i 


Vous seriez, 


you should be 


Vous auriez ete, 


you should 


^ 


Us seraient, 


they would be 


lis auraient ete, 


ihry should^ 





AUXILIARY VERBS. — § 47. 



333 



Imperative Mode. 



Sois, 

Qu'il soit, 
Qu'on soit, 
Soyons, 
Soyez, 
Qu'ils soient, 



be thou 
let him be 
let one be 
let us be 
be ye or you 
let them be 



Subjunctive Mode, 
simple tenses. compounit tenses. 



PRESENT. 



Jue je sois, 
Jue tu sois, 
Qu ? il soit, 
Qu'on soit, 
Que nous soyons. 
Que vous soyez, 
Qu'ils soient, 



that I may be 

that thou mayest be 

that he may be 

that one may be 

that we may be 

that you may be 

that they may be 



IMPERFECT. 

Que je fusse, that I might be 

Que tu fusses, that thou mightest be 

Qu'il rut, that lie might be 

Qu'on rut, that one might be 

Que nous fussions, that we might be 

Que vous fussiez, that you i^ight be 

Qu'ils fussent, that they might be 



PAST. 

Que j'aie ete, that I may 

Que tu aies ete, that thou mayest 
Qu'il ait ete, that he may 

Qu'on ait, ete, that one may 
Que nous ayons ete, thai we may 
Que vous ayez ete, that you may 
Qu'ils aient ete, that they may 

PLUPERFECT 

Que j'eusse etc, that I might' 
Que tu eusses ete, that thou 

mightest 
Qu'il eut ete, that he might 

Qu'on eut ete, that one might 
Que nous eussions ete, that we 

might 
Que vous eussiez ete, that you 

might 
Qu'ils eussent ete, that they 

might 



6tr9, 



giant, 



PRESENT. 



PRESENT. 



Infinitive Mode. 

to be | Avoir ete, 
Participle. 

being | Ayant ete, 
Past or Passive. 



PAST. 



to have been 



compound. 



having been 



&tt 



been 



334 



REGULAR VERBS. — §48. 



§ 48. — Regular Verbs. 
FIRST CONJUGATION,— ENDING IN ER. 

MODEL VERB. 

CHANTER, TO SING. 

Indicative Mode, 
simple tenses. compound tenses. 



PRESENT. 



PAST INDEFINITE. 



Je chante, 
Tu ehantes, 
11 chante, 
On chante, 
Nous chantons 
Vous chantez, 
lis chantent, 



I sing 

thou singest 

he sings 

one sings 

we sing 

you sing 

they sing 



J'ai chante, 
Tu as chante, 
II a chante, 
On a chant6, 
Nous avons chante, 
Vous avez chante, 
lis ont chante, 



J have sung 

them hast sung 

he has cung 

one has sung 

we have sung 

you have sung 

they have sung 



IMPERFECT. 

Je chantais J was singing, or / 

used to sing 
Tu chantais, thou wast singing 

II chantait, he was singing 

On chantait, one was singing 

Nous chantions, we were singing 
Vous chantiez, you were singing 
lis chantaient, they were singing 

PAST DEFINITE. 



PLUPERFECT, 



J'avais chante, 

Tu avais chante, 
II avait chante, 
On avait chante, 
Nous avions chante, 
Vous aviez chante, 
lis avaient chante, 



I had 



thou hadst 

he had 

one had 

we had 

you had 

they had^ 



I 

■8 



PAST ANTERIOR. 



Je chantai, 
Tu chantas, 
II chanta, 
On chanta, 
Nous chantames, 
Vous chantates, 
lis chanterent, 



J sang or did sing 

thou sangest 

he sang 

one sang 

we sang 

you sang 

they sang 



J'eus chante, 
Tu eus chante, 
II eut chante, 
On eut chante, 
Nous eumes chante, 
Vous etites chante, 
lis eurent chante, 



I had sung 

thou hadst sung 

he had sung 

one had sung 

we had sung 

you had sung 

they had sung 



FUTURE ANTERIOR. 



Je chanterai, / shall or will sing J'aurai chante, 



Tu chanteras; 
11 chantera, 
On chantera, 
Nous chanter ons, 
Vous chanterez, 
Ik chanteront, 



thou unit sin^ 
he will sing 
one will sing 
we shall sing 
you will sing 
they will sing 



Tu auras chante, 
II aura chante, 
On aura chant6, 
Nous aurons chante, 
Vous aurez chante, 
lis auront chante, 



I will 

thou shalt 

he will 

one vMl 

we shall 

you will 

they shall 



l 



Conditional Mode. 



PRESENT 



Je chanterais, 
Tu chanterais, 
II chanterait, 
On chanterait, 
Nous chanterions, 
Vous chanteriez, 
lis chanteraient, 



J shouttt, would sing 

thou shouldest sing 

he should sing 

one should sing 

we would sing 

you would sing 

they vjould sing 



J'aurais chante, I should 

Tu aurais chante, thou woul^-si 
II aurait chante, h* ujould 

On aurait chante\ one would V * 
Nous aurions chante, we wouM 
Vous auriez cnante, you would 
lis auraient chante, they would t 



REGULAR VERBS. — §48. 



335 



Imperative Mode. 



Chante,, 
Qu'il cliante, 
Qu'on chante, 
Chantons, 
Chantez, 
Qu'ils chantent, 



sing ttwu 
let him sing 
let one sing 
let us sing 
sing ye or you 
let them sing 



Subjunctive Mode, 
simple tenses. compound tenses. 



PRESENT. 

Que je chante, that I may sing 

Que tu chantes, that tlwu may est sing 

Qu'il cliante, that he may sing 

Qu'on chante, that one may sing 

Que nous ehantions, that we may sing 

Que vous chantiez, that you may sing 

Qu'ils chantent, that they may sing 

IMPERFECT. 

Que je chantasse, that I might sing 
Que tu chantasses, that thou migktest 

sing 
Qu'il chantat, that he might sing 

Qu'on chantat, that one might sing 
Que nous chantassions, that we might 

sing 
Que vous chantassiez, that you might 

sing 
,Qu'ils chantassent, that they might 

sing 



PAST. 

Que j'aie chante, that I may \ 
Que tu aies chante, that thou 

mayest 
Qu'il ait chante, thai he may 
Qu'on ait chante, that one may 
Que nous ayons chante, that we 

may 
Que vous ayez chante, that you 

may 
Qu'ils aient chante, that they may 

PLUPERFECT. 

Que j'eusse chante, that I might' 
Que tu eusses chante, that thou 

mightest 
Qu'il eut chante, that he might 
Qu'on eut chante, that one might 
Que nous eussions chante, that 

we might 
Que vous eussiez chante, that 

you might 
Qu'ils eussent chante, that they 
might 



r 



r 



Chanter, 



Chantant, 



PRESENT. 



P1ESENT. 



Infinitive Mode. 

past. 

to sing | Avoir chante, to have sung 

Participle. 

compound. 

singing | Ayant chante. having sung 

PAST or passtve. 
Chante, sung 



o36 PECULIAR VERBS. 8 49 



§ 49. — Remarks on the Peculiarities of some Verbs 
of the First Conjugation. 

( I.) In verbs ending in ger, in order to retain thr soft pronuncia* 
tion of the g 9 * the e of the infinitive is preserved, whenever the g 
would come before a, or o : 

Nous mangeons, we eat ; instead of nous mangons ; 
Je mangeai, I did eat ; " jemangai; 

Jugeant, judging; " jugant. 

(2.) In verbs ending in yer, the y is changed into i, before e, es, en/, 

and c (not accented), followed by r, and one or more vowels: 

Je paie, / pay ; instead of je paye ; • 

lis essaient, they try ; i: Us essay ent ; 

Jt> paierai, I wilt pay; " je payer ai. 

(3.) In verbs terminating in cer,f to preserve to the c its soft pro- 
nunciation, a cedilla (g) is put under it, when it comes before a or o : 

Oomine^ant, commencing ; instead of commencant ; 
Nous pla^ons, we place; " nous placons. 

(4.) In verbs ending in eter and eler, the t or I of the infinitive is 
doubled, when it comes before e, es, ent and e (not accented) , followed 
by r, and one or more vowels : 



J'appelle, / call ; instead of j't 

Jejetterai, I will throw; " jejeterai; 

J'appelleraiu, Iwouidcall; u j'appelerais. 

(5.) The following verbs form exceptions to the last rule : 

Decolleter, to uncover the thro J; ; ' 



Acheter, to buy ; 

Bourreler, to torment ; 

Congeler, to' congeal; 

Colleter, to collar ; 

Coqueter, to coquet; 

Deceler, to detect ; 

Degeler, to thaw. 



Etiqueter, to ticket ; 

Geler, to freeze ; 

Harceler, to teaze ; 

Peler, to peel ; 

Suracheter, to over buy. 



In the above verbs, when the t or I comes before e, es> ent, or e {not 
accented) followed by r and one or more vowels, a grave accent Q) 
is put over the e, which precedes the t or I : 

Je pele, I peel; Je pelerai, I will peel; 

J'achete, 1 buy ; J'acheterai,. IwtiXbuy. 

(6.) A grave accent is also used in verbs ending in 

ecer, emer, ener, ever: 



* See L. 3, 9. 



t This rule applies also to o and u in verbs of the third conjugation, 
©Biding in evoir, Je re^ois, I receive; J'aper$ois, I perceive. 



REGULAR VERBS. 



§ 50. 



337 



and the acute accent of the infinitive of those ending in 
egler, eler, 



eeer, 
ebrer, 
echer, 
6der, 



egner, 
egrer, 
eguer, 



erner, 
ener, 
equer, 



erer, 
eter, 
etrer, 



; s changed into a grave one, when the consonant following the first 

e of these terminations, comes before e, es, ent, and e (not accented * 

followed by r and one or more vowels : 

Je serae, I sow ; Je mene, I lead; 

Je celebrerai, 7" will celebrate ; II regnera, he will reign. 

(7.) In the tables of peculiar, irregular, defective, and unipersona; 
yerbs, we will place a model verb of each class embraced in the pre- 
ceding remarks, and also include in the same table the names of the 
principal verbs coming under these remarks, with references to the 
models. 

§ 50.- "Regular Verbs. — Continued. 
SECOND CONJUGATION,— ENDING IN IR. 

MODEL VERB. 

FINIR, TO FINISH. 

Indicative Mode, 
simple tenses. compound tenses. 



PB 


ESENT. 


PAST INDEFINITE. 


Je finis, 


I finish 


J'ai fini, 


I have finished 


Tu finis, 


thoufinishest 


Tu as fini, 


thou hast finished 


11 finit, 


he finishes 


11 a fini, 


he has finished 


On finit, 


one finishes 


On a fini, 


one has fine Tied 


Nous finissons, 


we finish 


Nous avons fini, 


we have finished 


Vous finissez, 


yon finish 


Vous avez fini, 


you have finished 


lis finissent, 


they finish 


lis ont fini, 


they have finished 


IMPERFECT. 


PLUPERFECT. 


Je finissais, I was finishing, or used 


J'avais fini, 


I had finished 


Tu finissais, 


VU JVIVLZIV 

thou wast finishing 


Tu avais fini, 


thou hadst finished 


11 finissait, 


he was finishing 


11 avait fini, 


he had finished 


On finissait, 


one was finishing 


On avait fini, 


one had finished 


Nous finissions, 


we were finishing 


Nous avions fini, 


we had finished 


Vous finissiez, 


you were finishing 


Vous aviez fini, 


you had finished 


lis finissaient, 


they were finishing 


lis avaient fini, 


they had finished 


PAST 


DEFINITE. 


PAST ANTERIOR. 


Je finis, 


I finished, did finish 


J'eus fini, 


I had finished 


Tu finis, 


thou didst finish 


Tu eus fini, 


thou hadst finished 


11 finit, 


he finished 


11 eut fini, 


he had finished 


On finit, 


one did finish 


On eut fini, 


one had finished 


Nous finimes, 


we finished 


Nous eumes fini 


we had finished 


Vous finites, 


you finished 


Vous eutes fini, 


you had finished 


Us finirent, 


they finished 


lis eurent fini, 


they had finished 



15 



888 



REGULAR VERBS . 8 50. 



SIMPLE TENSES. 



COMPOUND TENSES. 



rUTURE. 



FUTURE ANTERIOR. 



Je finirai, 
Tu finiras, 
Jtt finira, 
(jq finira, 
Nous finirons, 
Yous finirez, 
lis finiront, 



Je finirais, 
Tu finirais, 
II finirait, 
On finirait, 
Nous finirions, 
Vous finiriez, 
lis fiuiraient, 



I shall finish \ J'aurai fini, 
thou wilt finish j Tu auras fini, 

he will finish \ II aura fini, 
one will finish On aura fini, 



we shall finish 
you will finish 
they will finish 



Nous aurons fini, 
Vous aurez fini, 
lis auront fini, 



/ shall haze ~\ 
thou wilt have I 
he shall have \ ]| 
one will have J- 3 
we shall have j ^ 
you will have 
they shall have) 



Conditional Mode. 



I would finish 

thou shouldst finish 

he would finish 

one might finish 

we would finish 

you might finish 

they should finish 



J'aurais fini, 
Tu aurais fini, 
II aurait fini, 
On aurait fini, 
Nous aurions fini, 
Vous auriez fini, 
lis aur'iient fini, 



/ should^ 

thou wouldst 

he might 

one should 

we would 

you might 

they should 



Imperative Mode. 



Finis, 

Qu'il finisse, 
Qu'on finisse, 
Finissons, 
Finissez, 
Qu'ils finissent, 



finish thou 
let him finish 
let one finish 
let us finish 
finish ye or yo% 
let them finish 



Subjunctive Mode. 



Que je finisse, that I may^ 

Que tu finisses, that thou mayest 
Qu'il finisse, that he may 

Qu'on finisse, that one may 

Que nous finissions, that we may 
Que vous finissiez, fruit you may 
Qu'Js finissent, that they may u 



^ 



Que j'aie fini, that I ma?A 

Que tu aies fini, that thou mayest ^ 
Qu'il ait fini, that he may .3 

Qu'on ait fini, that one may }><|» 

Que nous ayons fini, that we may ^ 
Que vous ayez fini, that you may § 
Qu'ils aient fini, that they may) 



IMPERFECT. 



PLUPERFECT. 



Que je finisse, that I mighC 

Quetu finisses, that thou mightest 

Qif il finit, that he might 

Qu'on fini t, that one might 

Que nous finissions, that we might 

Que vous finissiez, that you might 

Qu'ils finissent, that they wight 



Que j'eusse fini, that I mighr 
Que tu eusses fini, that thou 

mightest 
Qu'il eut fini, that he might 

Qu'on eut fini that one might 
Que nous eussions firi, that we 

might 
Que vous eussiez fini, that you 



Qu'ils eiissent fmijhat they might. 



REGULAR VERBS. §51. 



339 



Infinitive Mode." 

SIMILE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 



PRESENT. 



PAST. 



Finir 



Finissant, 



to finish | Avoir fini, 
Participle. 



to have finished 



COMPOUND. 

having finished 



finishing | Ayant fini, 
Past or Passive. 
Fini, finished 

§ 51. — Regular Verbs. — Continued. 
THIRD CONJUGATION,— ENDING IN OIR. 

MODEL VERB. 

RECEVOIR, TO RECEIVE. 

Indicative Mode, 
present. past indefinite. 



Je re^is * 
Tu repois, 
11 re9oit, 
On re9oit, 
Nous recevons, 
Vous recevez, 
Us refoivent, 



/ receive 

thou receivest 

he receives 

one receives 

we receive 

you receive 

they receive 



J'ai re^u, 
Tu as re9U, 
II a re9U, 
On a re9U, 
Nous avons re9U, 
Vous avez re^u, 
lis ont re9U, 



/ have received 
thou hast received 

he has received 

one has received 

we have received 

you have received 

they have received 



imperfect. 

Je recevais, J was receiving, or J 

used to receive 
Tu recevais, thou wast receiving 
II recevait, he was receiving 

On recevait, one was receiving 

Nous recevions, we were receiving 
Vous receviez, you were receiving 
Is recevaient, they were receiving 

past definite. 



pluperfect. 

J'avais re9U, I had received' 

Tu avais re9U, thou hadst received 
II avait re9U, he had received 
On avait re9U, one had received 
Nous avions re$u } we hadreceived 
Vous aviez re9U, you had received 
lis avaient re9U, they had received 

past anterior. 



.* 



}\i re9US, I received or did receive | J'eus re9U, I had received 

Tu re9US, thou receivedst Tu eus re9U, thou hadst received 

11 re9ut, he received II eut re9u, he had received 

On re9ut, one received On eut re9U, one had received 

Nous re9umes, we received Nous eumes re9U, we hadreceived 

Vous recutes. you received Vous eutes re9U, you had received 

lis re9urent, they received lis eurent re9U, they had received 



* See note f § 49, (3.) Also, $ 62, 



340 



REGULAR VERBS.- 



"§ 51. 



SIMPLE TENSES. 
FGTURE 



oe recevrai, 
Tu recevras, 
II recevra, 
On recevra, 
Nous recevrons, 
Vous recevrez, 
lis recevront, 



/ sh ill 
thou wdt 

he shall 
one will 

we shall 
you will 
they will 



receive 
receive 
receive 
receive 
receive 
receive 
receive 



COMPOUND 1EN8E8. 

FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

J'aurai re 911, / shall have 

Tu auras re^u, thou will have 
II aura re9U, le will have 

On aura re$u, one will have 
Nous aurons re9U, we shall have I 
Vous aurez re9U, you will have \ 
lis auront re9U, they shall have) 



Conditional Mode. 



PRESENT. 



PAST. 



Je recevrais, 
Tu recevrais, 
II recevrait, 
On recevrait, 
Nous recevrions. 
Vous recevriez, 
iis recevraient, 



I should receive 

th/m wouldst receive 

he should receive 

one might recei-ve 

you should receive 

you might receive 

they should receive 



J'aurais re^u, 
Tu aurais re9U, 
II aurait re9U, 
On aurait re9U, 
Nous aurions re9U, 
Vous auriez re9U, 
lis auraient re9U, 



/ should 

thou wouldst 

he might 

one would 

we should 

you might 

they should 



4 



Imperative Mode. 



Re9ois, 
Qu'il re9oive, 
Qu'on re9oive, 
Kecevons, 
Recevez, 
Qu'ils re9oivent, 



receive thou 
let him receive 
let one receive 
let us receive 
receive ye or you 
let them receive 



Subjunctive Mode. 



past. 



Que je re9oive, thatlmay^ 

Que tu re9oives, that thou mayest 
Qu'il re9oive, that he may 

Qu'on re9oive, that one may 
Que nous recevions, that we may 

Que vous receviez. that you may 
Qu'ils re9oivent, that they may 

imperfect. 

Que je re9usse, that I might" 
Que tu re9usses, that thou 

mightest 
Qu'il re9ut, that he might 

Qu'on re9ut, that one might 
Que nous ^ussions, that we 

might 
Que vous re9ussiez, that you 

might 
Qu'ils rec assent, that they might 



Que j'aie re9U, that 1 may 

Que tu aies re9U, that thou mayest 
Qu'il ait re9U, that he may 

Qu'on ait re9U, that one may 
Que nous ayons re9U, that we 

may 
Que vous ayez re9U, that you may 
Qu'ils aient re9U, that iiey may 

PLUPERFECT. 

Que j'eusse re9U. that J might" 
Que tu eusses re9U, that thou 

mightest 
Qu'il eut re9U, that he might 
Qu'on eut re9U, that one might 
Que nous eussions re9U, that we 

might 
Que vous eussiez re9U, that you 

might 
Qu'ils eussent reyU, that they 

might 



J 



> 



REGULAR VERBS. § 52,53. 



341 



Infinitive Mode. 

SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TEN3ES. 

PRESENT. PAST. 

Recevmr, to receive | Avoir re^u, to have receiitd 

Participle, 
present. compound. 



Rocevant, 



receiving 



having received 



Ayant re9U, 

PAST OR PASSIVE. 

Re$u, received 

§ 52. — Remarks. 
(1.) In the verbs of this conjugation, ending v jth cevoir, in order to 
preserve to the c its soft pronunciation, a cedilla (g) is put under it, 
when it comes before a, o, u : — 

Je recois, / receive ; J'aper^ois, I perceive, 

(2.) There are only seven regular verbs in this conjugation. They 
are : — 

Percevoir, to collect duties, taxes ; 
Recevoir, to receive ; 



Apercevoir, 
C once voir, 
Decevoir, 
Devoir, 



to perceive ; 
to conceive ; 
to deceive; 
to mm ; 



Rede voir, to owe agiin. 



§ 53. — Regular Verbs. — Continued. 
FOURTH CONJUGATION,— ENDING IN RE. 

MODEL VERB. 

VENDRE, TO SELL. 

Indicative Mode. 



PRESENT. 


PAST INDEFINITE. 


Je vends, / sell 


J'ai vendu, 


/ have sold 


Tu vends, thou sellest 


Tu as vendu, 


thou hast sold 


11 vend, he sells 


11 a vendu, 


he has sold 


On vend, one sells 


On a vendu, 


one has sold 


Nous vendons, we sell 


Nous avons vendu, 


we have sold 


Vous vendez, you sell 


Vous avez vendu, 


you have sold 


Us vendent, they sell 


Us ont vendu, 


they have sold 


IMPERFECT. 


PLUPERFECT. 


Je vendais, / was selling, or used to 


J'avais vendu, / had sold or been seU* 


sell 




ing 


Tu vendais, thou wast selling 


Tu avais vendu, 


thou hadst sold 


11 vendait, he was selling 


11 avait vendu, 


he hod sold 


On vendait, one was selling 


On avait vendu, 


one had sold 


Nous vendions, we were selling 


Nous avions vend a, 


we had sold 


Vous vendiez, you were selling 


Vous aviez vendu, 


you had sold 


Us vendaient, they were selling 


lis avaient vendu, 


they had sold 



342 



REGULAR VERBS . — 8 54. 



SIMPLE 7ENSES. 



COMPOUND TENSES, 



PAST DEFINITE. 



PAST ANTERIOR. 



Je vendis, 
Tu vendis, 
II vendit, 
On vendit, 
Nous vendimes, 
Vous voTidites, 
lis vendu ent, 



/ sold or d d sell 

thou soldest 

he sold 

one sold 

we sold 

you sold 

they sold 



J'eus vendu, 
Tu eus vendu, 
II eut vendu, 
On eut vendu, 
Nous eumes vendu, 
Vous eutes vendu, 
lis eurent vendu, 



/ had sold 

thou hadst sold 

he had sold 

one had sold 

we had sol 

you had sold 

they had sold 



FUTURE. 



Je vendrai, 
Tu vendras, 
II vendra, 
On vendra, 
Nous vendrons, 
Vous vendrez, 
lis vendront, 



J shall sell 
thou wilt sell 
he will sell 
one will sell 
we sliall sell 
you will sell 
they will sell 



FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

J'aurai vendu, J shall have sold 

Tu auras vendu, thou will have sold 
II aura vendu, lie shall have sold 

On aura vendu, one will have sold 
Nous aurons vendu, we shall have sold 
Vous aurez vendu, you will have sold 
lis auront vendu, they shall have sold 



Conditional Mode. 



PRESENT. 



Je vendrais, 
Tu ^endrais. 
II vena~ait, 
On vendrait, 
Nous vendrions, 
Vous vendriez, 
Us vendraient, 



J should sell 

thou wouldest sell 

he might sell 

one would sell 

we should sell 

you might sell 

they would sell 



J'aurais vendu, I should 

Tu aurais vendu, thou woiddest 
II aurait vendu, he might 

On aurait vendu, one should 
Nous aurions vendu, we should 
Vous auriez vendu, you should 
lis auraient vendu, they should 



Imperative Mode. 



Vends, 
Qu'il vende, 
Qu'on vende, 
Vendons, 
Vendez, 
Qu'ils vendent, 



sell thou 
let him sell 
let one sell 
let us sell 
sell ye or you 
let them sell 



Subjunctive Mode. 



PRESENT. 



PART. 



Que je vende, that I may sell 

Que tu vendes, that thou may est sell 

Qu'il vende, that he may sell 

Qu'on vende," that one may sell 

Que nous vendions, that we may sell 

Que vous vendiez, that you may sell 

Qu'ils vendent, that they may sell 



Que j'aie vendu, that I may 
Que tu aies vendu, that thou 

mayest 
Qu'il ait vendu, that he may 
Qu'on ait vendu, that one may 
Que nous ayons vendu, that we 

may 
Que vous ayez vendu, that you 



Qu'ilsaient vendu, that they may 



PASSIVE VERBS . § 54. 



343 



SIMPLE TENSES. 



COMPOUND TENSES. 



IMPERFECT. 

Que je vewlisse, that X might sell 
Que tu vendisses, that thou mightest 

sell 
Qu'il vendit, that he might sell 

Qu'on vendit, that you might sell 
Que nous vendissions, that we might 

sell 
Que vous vendissiez, that you might 

sell 
Qu'ils vendissent, that they might sell 



PLUPERFECT. 

Que j'eusse vendu, that 1-tiv.gkT 
Que tu eusses vendu, that thou 

mightest 
Qu'il eut vendu, that lie might 
Qu'on eut v*wlu, that one might 
Que nous eussions vendu, thai 

we might 
Que vous eussiez vendu, that 

you might 
Qu'ils eussent vendu, that Viey 



r a 



Vendre, 



Vendant, 



PRESENT. 



PRESENT. 



Infinitive Mode. 

past. 

to sell | Avoir vendu, 
Participle. 

compound. 



selling [ Ayant vendu, 

PAST OR PASSIVE. 

Vendu, sold 

§ 54. — Conjugation of a Passive Verb. 

£tre aime, to be loved. 

Indicative Mode. 



to have sold 



having sold 



PRESENT. 

Je suis aim6, m. aimee,/. 

Tu es aime or aimee, 

II est aime, 

Elle est aimee, 

On est aime, 

Nous sommes aim6s or aimees, 

Vous etes aimes or aimees, 

lis sont aimes, m. 

Elles sont aimees, /. 



/ am loved 
thou art loved 
he is loved 
she is loved 
one is loved 
we are loved 
you are loved 
they are loved 
they are loved 



IMFERFECT. 



J'etais aime, m. aimee, /. 
Tu etais aime or aimee, 
II etait aime, 
Elle etait aimee, 
On etait aime, 

Nous etions aimes or aimees, 
Vous etiez aimes or aimees, 
lis etaient aimes, m. 
Elles etaient aimees, /. 



I vms loved, was being loved 
thou wast loved, wast being loved 
he was loved, was being loved 
she was loved, was bemg loved 
one was loved, was being loved 
we were loved, were being loved 
yon were loved, were being loved 
tfmj were loved, were being loved 
they were loved t were being loved 



S44 



PASSIVE VERB S. § 54. 



PAST DEFINITE. 



Je fus aime, m. aimee,/. 

Tu fus aime or aimee, 

II fut aime, 

Elle fut aimee, 

On fut aime, 

Nous fumes aimes or aimees, 

Vous futes aimes or aimees, 

lis furent aimes, m. 

Elles furent aimees, /. 



7 was loved 
tlwu wast loved 
he was loved 
slie was loved 
one was loved 
we were loved, 
you were loved 
they were loved 
they were loved 



PAST INDEFINITE. 



JPai ete aime or aimee, 

Tu as ete aime or aimee, 

II a ete aime, 

Elle a ete aimee. 

On a ete aime, 

Nous avons ete aimes or aimees, 

Vous avez ete aimes or aimees, 

lis ont ete aimes, m. 

Elles ont ete aimees, /. 



I have been loved 
thou hast been loved 
he has been loved 
she has been loved 
one has been loved 
we have been loved 
you have been loved 
they have been loved 
they have been loved 



PAST ANTERIOR DEFINITE. 



J'eus ete aime, m. aimee, /. 

Tu eus ete aime or aimee, 

11 eut ete aime, 

Elle eut ete aimee, 

On eut ete aime, 

Nous eumes ete aimes or aimees, 

Vous eutes ete aimes or aimees, 

lis eurent ete aimes, m. 

Elles eurent ete aimees, /. 



I had been loved 
thou hadst been loved 
he had been loved 
she had been loved 
one had been loved 
we had been loved 
you had been loved 
they had been loved 
they had been loved 



PLUPERFECT. 



J'avais ete aime or aimee, 

Tu avais ete aime or aimee, 

II avait ete aime, 

Elle avait ete aimee, 

On avait ete aime, 

Nous avions ete aimes or aimees, 

Vous aviez ete aimes or aimees, 

lis avaient ete aimes, m. 

Elles avaient ete aimees, /. 



I had been loved 
thou hadst been loved 
he had been loved 
she had been loved 
one had been loved 
we had been loved 
you had been loved 
they had been loved 
they had been loved 



Je serai aime, m. aimee, /. 

Tu seras aime or aimee, 

II sera aime, 

Elle sera aimee, 

On sera aime, 

Nous serons aimes or aimees, 

Vous serez aimes or aimees, 

lis seront aimes, m. 

EHes seront aiweeSj f, 



FUTURE. 

I shall or will be loved 
thou shalt or wilt be laved 
he shall or will be loved 
she shall or will be loved 
one shall or will be loved 
we shall or will be loved, 
you shall or ivill be loved 
they shall or will be loved 
they shall or will be lovtd 



PASSIVE VERBS. § 54. 



345 



FUTURE 

J'aurai ete aim6, m. aimee,/. 

Tu auras ete aims or aimee, 

II aura ete aime, 

Elle aura ete aimee, 

On aura ete aime, 

Nous aurons ete aimes or aimees, 

Vous aurez ete aimes or aimees, 

lis auront ete aimes, m. 

ELes auront ete aimees, /. 



ANTERIOR. 

I shall, will have been loved 
thou shalt, wilt have been loved 
he shall, will have been loved 
she shall, will have bee-n loved 
one shall, will have been loved 
we shall, will have been loved 
you shall, will have been loved 
iilcy shall, will have been loved 
they shall, loill have been loved 



Conditional Mode. 



Je serais aime, m. aimee,/. 
Tu serais aime or aimee, 
II serait aime, 
Elle serait aimee, 
On serait aime, 
Nous serions aimes or aimees, 
Vous seriez aimes or aimees, 
lis seraient aimes, m. 
Elles seraient aimees,/. 

J'aurais ete aime, m. aimee, /. 
Tu aurais ete aime or aimee, 
II aurait ete aime, 
Elle aurait ete aimee, 
On aurait ete aime, 
Nous aurions ete aimes or aimees. 
Vous auriez ete aimes or aimees, 
lis auraient ete aimes, m. 
Elles auraient ete aimees, /. 



PRESENT. 

/ should, would, could, might be loved 

thou shouldst, couldst, mig/Uest be loved 

he would or might be loved 

she might be loved 

one could be loved 

we should or would be loved 

you would or might be loved 

they might or should be loved 

they might, could, should be loved 

PAST. 

/ should, would have been loved 

thou wouldst ha.ve been loved 

he would have been loved 

she would have been loved, 

one would have been loved 

we might have been loved 

you would have been loved 

they might have been loved 

they should or might have been Uved 



Imperative Mode. 



Sois aime, m. aim6e, /. 
Qu'il soit aime, 
Qu'elle soit aim "e, 
Qu'on soit aime 
Soyons aimes 01 aimees, 
Soyez aimes or aimees, 
Qu'ils soient aimes, m. 
Qu'elles soient aimees, /. 



be thou loved 
let him be loved 
let her be loved 
let one beloved 
let us be loved 
be ye or you loved 
let them be loved 
let them be loved 



Subjunctive Mode. 



PRESENT. 



Que je sois aime, m. aimee,/. 

Que tu sois aime or aimee, 

Qu'il soit aime, 

Qu'elle soit aimee, 

Qu'on soit aime, 

Que nous soyons aimes or aimees, 

Que v?us soyez aimes or aimees, 

Qu'ils soient aimes, 

Qu'elles soient aimees, 



that I may be loved 
that thou mayest be loved 
that he may be loved 
that she may be loved 
that orve may be loved 
that we may be loved 
that you m-jy be loved 
that they may be loved 
that they may be loved 



15* 



346 passive verbs. — §54,55. 

IMPERFECT. 

Que je fusse aiaie, m. aimee, / that I might be loved 

Que tu fusses aime or aimee, that thou mightest be loved 

Qu'il fut aime, thai he might be loved 

Qu'elle fut aimee, that she might be loved 

Qu'on fut aime, that one might be loved 

Que nous fussions aimes or aimees, that we might be loved 

Que vous fussiez aimes or aimees, that you might be loved 

Qu'ils fussent aimes, m. that they might be loved 

Qu'elles fussent aimees,/. that they might be loved 

PAST. 

Que j'aie ete aime, m. aimee, /. that I may have been loved 

Qub tu aies ete aime or aimee, that thou mayest have been loved 

Qu'il ait ete aime, that he may have been loved 

Qu'elle ait ete aimee, that she may have been loved 

Qu'on ait ete aime, that one may have been loved 

Que nous ayons ete aimes or aimees, that we may have been loved 

Que vous ayez ete aimes or aimees, that you may have been loved 

Qu'ils aient ete aimes, m. that they may have been loved 

Qu'elles aient ete aimees, /. that they may have been loved 

PLUPERFECT. 

Que j'eusse ete aime, m. aimee,/. that I might have been loved 

Que tu eusses ete aime or aimee, that thou mightest have been loved 

Qu'il eut ete aime, that he might have been loved 

Qu'elle eut ete aimee, that she might have been loved 

Qu'on eut ete aime, that one might have been loved 

Que nous eussions ete aimes or that we might have been loved 

aimees, 

Que vous eussiez ete aimes or that you might have been loved 

aimees, 

Qu'ils eussent ete aimes, that they might have been loved 

Qu'elles eussent ete aimees, that they might have been loved 

Infinitive Mode, 
present. 
Etre aime, m. aimee, /. to be loved 

Participle. 

PRESENT. 

fltant aime, m. aimee, /. being loved 

COMPOUND. 

i Ayant ete aime, m. aimee,/ having been loved 

PAST. 

Avoir ete aime, m. aimee,/. to have been loved 

§ 55. — Rule. 

There is only one conjugation for passive verbs. It is formed ox 
th8 auxiliary etre in all its tenses, simple and compound, and the par- 
ticiple past of the active verb which we wish to conjugate in the pa*. 
give voice. See § 43, (4) 



reflective verb s. § 56. 347 

§ 56. — Conjugation of Reflective Verbs [§ 43, (6.)}. 

model verb. 

SE FLATTER, TO FLATTER ONE'S SELF. 

Indicative Mode 



Je me flatte, I flatter myself 

Tu te flattes, thou flatter est thyself 

II se flatte, he flatters himself 

On se flatte, one flatters himself or one's self 

Nous nous flattons, we flatter ourselves 

Vous vous flattez, you flatter yourselves 

lis se flattent, they flatter themselves 

IMPERFECT. 

Je me flattais, / was flattering or used to flatter my 

self 

Tu te flattais, thou wast flattering thyself 

II se flattait, he was flattering himself 

On se flattait, one was flattering one's self himself 

Nous nous flattions, we were flattering ourselves 

Vous vous flattiez, you were flattering yourselves 

lis se flattaient, they were flattering tlwmselves 

PAST DEFINITE. 

Je me flattai, I flattered or did flatter myself 

Tu te flattas, thou didst flatter thyself 

II se flatta, he flattered himself 

On se flatta, one flattered one's self himself 

Nous nous flattames, we flattered ourselves 

Vous vous flattates, you flattered yourselves 

lis se flatterent, they flattered themselves 

PAST INDEFINITE. 

Je me suis flatte, m. flattee,/. I have flattered myself 

Tu t'es flatte or flattee, thou hast flattered thyself 

II s'est flatte, he has flattered himself 

Elle s'est flattee, she has flattered herself 

On s'est flatte, one has flattered himself ox one's self 

Nous nous sommes flattes or flattees, we have flattered ourselves 

Vous vous etes flattes or flattees, you have flattered yourselves 

lis se sont flattes, m. they have flattered themselves 

Elles se sont flattees,/. they have flattered themselves 

PAST ANTERIOR. 

Je me fus flatt6, m. flattee,/. I had flattered myself 

Tu te fus flatte or flattee, " thou hadst flattered thyself 

II se fut flatte, he had flattered himself 

Elle se fut flattee, she had flattered herself 

On se fut flatte, one had flattered himself, one's stlf 

Nous nous fumes flatted or flattees, we had flattered ourselves 

Vous vous futes flattes or flattees, you had flattered yourselves 

lis se furent flattes, m. they had flattered themselves 

Elles se furent flatties,/. they had flattered themselves 



348 



REFLECTIVE VERB 8. — 8 56. 



PLUPERFECT. 



Je m'etais flatte, m. flattee, /. 

Tu t'etais flatte or flattee, 

II s'etait flatte, 

Elle s'etait flattee, 

On s'etait flatte, 

Nous Rous etions flattes or flattees, 

Vous vous etiez flattes or flattees, 

Us s'etaient flattes, m. 

Elles s'etaient flattees, /. 



/ had flattered myself 

thou hadst flatlet ed thyself 

he had flattered himself 

sJie had flattered herself 

'one had flattered himself ] one's self 

we had flattered, ourselves 

you had flattered yourselves 

they had flattered themselves 

they had flattered themselves 



FUTURE. 



Je me flatterai, 
Tu te flatteras, 
II se flattera, 
On se flattera, 
Nous nous flatterons, 
Vous vous flatterez, 
lis se flatteront, 



/ shall or will flatter myself 
thou shall or wilt flatter thyself 
he shall or will flatter himself 
one will flatter himself, one's self 
we will flatter ourselves 
you will flatter yourselves 
they will flatter themselves 



FUTURE ANTERIOR. 



Je me serai flatte, m. flattee, /. 

Tu te seras flatte or flattee, 

II se sera flatte, 

Elle se sera flattee, 

On se sera flatte, 

Nous nous serons flattes or flattees, 

Vous vous serez flattes or flattees, 

lis se seront flattes, m. 

Elles se seront flattees, /. 



/ shall have flattered myself 
Thou wilt have flattered thyself 
He will have flattered himself 
She will have flattered herself 
One -will have flattered himself 
We will have flattered ourselves 
You will have flattered, yourselves 
They will have flattered themselves 
They will have flattered themselves 



Conditional Mode. 



PRESENT. 



Je me flatterais, 

Tu te flatterais, 
II se flatterait, 
On se flatterait, 
Nous nous flatterions, 
Vous vous flatteriez., 
Us se flatteraient, 



/ should, would, could, might flattei 

myself 
thou wmddst flatter thyself 
he would flatter himself 
one would flatter himself one's self 
we would flatter ourselves 
you would flatter yourselves 
tliey would flatter themselves 



Je me serais flatte, m. flattee, /. 

Tu te serais flatte or flattee, 

H se serait flatte, 

Elle se serait flattee, 

On se serait flatte, 

Nous nous serions flattes or flattees, 

Vous vous seriez flattes or flattees, 

Us se seraient flattes, m. 

Elles se seraient flattees, /. 



/ should, would, could, might <tum 

flattered myself 
thou wouldst have flattered thyself 
he would have flattered himself 
she would have flattered herself 
(rue would have flattered one's self 
we might have flattered ourselves 
you would kave flattered yourselves 
they would have flattered themselves 
they would have flattered themselves 



REFLECTIVE VERBS. § 56. 



349 



Platte-toi, 
Qu'il se flatte, 
Qu'on se flatte, 
Flattons-nous, 
Flatte*-vous, 
Qi'ils se flattent, 



Imperative Mode. 



flatter thyself 

let him flatter himself 

let one flatter one's self, himself 

let us flatter ourselves 

flatter yourselves 

let them flatter tlvemselves 



Subjunctive Mode. 



Que je me flatte, 

Que tu te flattes, 

Qu'il se flatte, 

Qu'on se flatte, 

Que nous nous flattions, 

Que vous vous flattiez, 

Qu'ils se flattent, 

Que je me flattasse, 

Que tu te flattasses, 

Qu'il se flattat, 

Qu'on se flattat, 

Que nous nous flattassions, 

Que vous vous flattassiez, 

Qu'ils se flattassent, 



that I may flatter myself 
that thou may est flatter thyself 
that he may flatter himself 
thai one may flatter himself 
that we may flatter ourselves 
that you may flatter yourselves 
that they may flatter themselves 



IMPERFECT. 



that I might flatter myself 
thai thou mightest flatter thyself 
that he might flatter himself 
that one might flatter himself 
that we might flatter ourselves 
that you might flatter yourselves 
that they might flatter themselves 



Que je me sois flatte, m. flattee, /. 

Que tu te sois flatte or flattee, 

Qu'il se soit flatte, 

Qu'elle se soit flattee, 

Qu'on se soit flatte, 

Que nous nous soyons flattes 01 

flattees, 
Que vous vous soyez flattes or 

flattees, 
Qu'ils se soient flattes, m. 
Qu'elles se soient flattees, /. 



that I may have flattered myself 
that thou mayest have flattered thyself 
that he may have flattered himself 
that she may have flattered herself 
that one may have flattered himself 
that we may have flattered ourselves 

that you may have flattered yourselves 

that they may have flattered themselves 
that they may have flattered themselves 



pluperfect. 



Que je me fusse flatte, m. flattee,/. 
Que tu te fusses flatte or flattee, 

Qu'il se fut flatte, 

Qu'elle se fut flattee, 

Qu'on se fut flatte, 

Que nous nous fussions flattes or 

flattees, 
Que vous vous fussiez flattes or 

flattees, 
Qu'ils se fussent flattes, m. 

Qu'elles se fussent flattees, /. 



that I might have flattered myself 
that thou mightest have flattered thy 

self 
that he might have flattered himself 
that she might have flattered herself 
that one might have flattered himself 
that we might have flattered ourselves 

that you might have flattered your- 
selves 

that they might have Hatter ed them- 
selves 

that they might have flattered them- 
selves 



350 



REFLECTIVE VERBS. §57. 



Infinitive Mode. 

'RESENT. PAST. 

Se flatter, to flatter one's self | S'etre flatte, to have flatterU one's selj 

Participle. 

present. compound. 

Be flattant, flattering one's self | S'etant flatte, having flattered one's sel) 

past. 
Flatte, m. flattee, /. flattes, m. p. flattees, /. p. flattered 

§ 57. — Negative Form of the Reflective Verb. 
NE PAS SE FLATTER, NOT TO FLATTER ONE'S SELF, 

Indicative Mode. 



PRESENT. 



.Te ne me flatte pas, 
Tu ne te flattes pas, 
II ne se flatte pas, 
On ne se flatte pas, 
Nous ne nous flattons pas, 
Vous ne vous flattez pas, 
lis ne se flattent pas, 
&c. &c. 



i" do not flatter myself 
thou dost not flatter thyself 
he does not flatter himself 
one does not flatter himself 
we do not flatter ourselves 
you do not flatter yourselves 
they do not flatter themselves 
tyc. fyc. 



We will add a compound tense and the imperative conjugated ta 
this form. 



PAST INDEFINITE. 



Je ne me suis pas flatte, m. flattee,/. 

Tu ne t'es pas flatte or flattee, 

II ne s'est pas flatte, 

Elle ne s'est pas flattee, 

On ne s'est pas flatte, 

Nous ne nous sommes pas flattes 

or flattees, 
Vous ne vous etes pas flattes or 

flattees, 
[Is ne se sont pas flattes, m. 
Biles ne se sont pas flattees, /. 
&c. &c 



/ have not flattered myself 
thou hast not flattered thyself 
he has not flattered- himself 
she has not flattered herself 
one has not flattered himself 
we have 7tot flattered ourselves 

you have not flattered yourselves 

they have not flattered themselves 

they have not flattered themselvt 

&c. df*c. 



Imperative Mode. 



He te flatte pas, 
Qu'il ne se flatte pas, 
Qu'on ne se flatte pas, 
Ne nous flattons pas, 
Ne vous flattez pas, 
Qu'ils ne se flattent pas, 

&C. &CL 



do not flatter thyself 

let him not flatter himself 

Let one not flatter himself 

let us not flatter ourselves 

do not flatter yourselves 

let them not flatter themselves 



reflective verbs. §58,59. 351 

§ 58. — Interrogative Form of the Reflective Ve^b 
Indicative Mode. 



Me flatte-je % jt* est^ce-que je me do I flatter myself? 

flatte 1 

Te flattes-tu 1 dost thou flatter thyself 1 

Se flatte-t-il If does he flatter himself? 

Se flatte-t-on % does one flatter himself? 

Nous flattons-nous *? do we flatter ourselves"? 

Vous flattez-vous 1 do you flatter yourselves? 

Se flattent-ils % do they flatter themselves ? 
&c. &c. <$*c. <fv 

PAST INDEFINITE. 

Me suis-je flatte. m. flattee If. have I flattered myself? 

T'es-tu flatte or flattee 1 hast thou flattered thyself? 

S'est-il flatte ^ has he flattered himself? 

S'est-elle flattee 1 has she flattered herself? 

S'est-on flatte % has one floMered himself? 

Nous somrues-nous flattes or flat- have we floMered ourselves ? 

tees'? 

Vous etes-vous flattes or flattees 1 have you flattered yourselves? 

Se sont-ils flattes 1 m. ha,ve they flattered themselves ? 

Se sont-elles flattees If, have they flattered themselves ? 

&C. &C. <$*C. <$•€. 

$ 59. — The Reflective' Verb Conjugated Negativeli 

and Interrogatively. 

Indicative Mode. 

present. 

NelRie flatte-je pas % Est-ce que je do I not flatter myself? 

ne me flatte pas 1 

Ne te flattes-tu pas 1 dost thou not flatter thyself ? 

Ne se flatte-t-il pas 1 does he not flatter himself? 

Ne se flatte-t-on pas 1 does one not flatter himself? 

Ne nous flattons-nous pas 7 do we not flatter ourselves ? 

Ne vous flattez-vous pas 1 do you not flatter yourselves ? 

Ne se flattent-ils pas 1 do they not flatter themselves ? 

&C. &C. <$*C ($*C. 

PAST INDEFINITE. 

Ne me suis-je pas flatte, w. flat- have I not flattered myself ? 

tee "If 

Ne t'es-tu pas flatte or flattee 7 hast thou not flattered thyself? 

Ne s'est-il pas flatte 1 has he not flattered himself? 

Ne s'est-elle pas flattee ? has she not flattered herself? 

Ne s'est-on pas flatte % has one not flattered himselj ? 

N© nous sommes-nous pas flattes have we not flattered ourselves ? 

or flattees 1 

Ne vous etes-vous pas flattes or have yon not flattered yourselves? 

flattees ? 

Ne se sont-ils pas flattes 1 m. have they not flattered themselves ? 

Ne se sont-elles pas flattees?/. have they not flattered themselves? 



* See § 98, and L. 26. f See L. 4. R. *. 



§ 60. TABLE 
REGULAR TERMINATIONS 



Cow- 

IUOA- 

tioh. 


IN? INI TITS. 


Present 

participle. 


Past 

Participle. 


© 

00 

£ 

H 


Indicative. 


Imperfect. 




er. 


aut. 


Sing. 


1 


e, 


ais, 








6, ?/£&S. 


1? 2 


es, 


ais, 


1st 

ER. 


a 

o 


a 


g ee,fem. 

K PZw. 
o 


50 3 
1 


as ons, 


gait, 
gions, 








es, ra#s. 


1 2 

^3 


ez, 


lez, 








ees, /em. 


ent. 


aient. 




ir. 


issant. 


Sing. 
i, w«5. 


1 

1 2 


is, 

is, 


issais, 
issais, 


2d 
IB. 


5 




» ie, fern. 

S PZw. 


* 3 
. 1 


£ issons, 


. issait, 
S issions, 








is, ra#s. 


<: 


issez, 


issiez, 
issaient. 








ies, fern. 


issent. 


3d 
OIB. 


evoir. 
6 


evant. 

6 

w 
as 


Sing. 
u, ra#s. 
^ \ie. fern. 


. i 

f 2 
% 

1 


ois, 

ois, 

5> ° it; 
S evons, 


evais, 
evais, 
£ evait, 
5 evions, 








ns. ra#s. 


^ 2 
°<3 


evez, 


eviez, 








ues,/em. 


oivent. 


evaient 




re. 


ant. 


Sing. 

U, W«5. 


. 1 

f 2 
% 

1 

v* 


8, 


ais, 
ais, 


4th 
RE. 


1 




q ue, few. 
g PZttr. 


1 

p 

g ons, 


pait, 

KS 

£ ions, 






us, m#s. 


.3 2 

°<3 


ez, 


ies, 


1 






ues,/m. 


ent. 


aient 



OF THE 

OF THE FOUR CONJUGATIONS. 



Fast 

Definite. 


Future. 


Conditional. 


Imperative. 


Sub- 
junctive. 


Imperfect, 


ai, 


erai, 


erais, 








e, 




asse, 


as, 


eras, 


erais, 




e, 




es, 




asses, 


5 a ' 

a ames, 


g era, 
a erons, 


g erait, 

•< 

a erions, 


< 

a 


ons, 


< 

5 
O 


e, 
ions, 


I 

< 
a 
u 


at, 

assions, 


ates, 


erez, 


eriez, 




ez, 




iez, 




assiez, 


erent. 


eront. 


eraient. 




ent, 




ent. 




assent. 


is, 


irai, 


irais, 








isse, 




isse, 


is, 


iras, 


irais, 




is, 




isses, 




isses, 


E imes, 


2 ira ' 

fc irons, 


i irait, 
S irions, 


I 


isse, 
issons, 


i 

g 


isse, 
issions. 


1 


it, 

issions, 


ites, 


irez, 


iriez, 




issez, 




issiez. 




issiez, 


irent. 


iront. 


iraient. 




issent, 




issent. 




issent. 


IIS, 


evrai, 


evrais, 








oive, 




usse, 


us, 


evras, 


evrais, 




ois, 




oives, 




usses, 


* umes, 


£ evra, 

os evrons, 


£ evrait, 

« evrions, 


as 


oive, 

evons, 


i 

m 

as 


oive, 
evions. 


as 


fit, 

ussions. 


utes, 


evrez, 


evriez, 




evez, 




eviez, 




ussiez, 


urent. 


evront. 


evraient. 




oivent. 




oivent 




ussent. 


is, 


rai, 


rais, 








e, 




isse, 


IS; 


ras, 


rais, 




s, 




es, 




isses, 


I it, 

£ imes, 


a ra, 
£ rons, 


p rait, 
£ rions, 


Q 


e, 
ons, 


i 



ions. 


f5 


it, 
issions, 


ites, 


rez, 


riez, 




ei, 




iez, 




issiez, 


irent 


ront. 


raient 




ent. 




ent 




issent, 



354 robmaticn of the tenses. $ 61. 

§ 61 Formation of the Tenses. 

(1 ) The ten* es are simple or compound. 

1. We call those simple tenses, which do not borrow one of th« 
teases of the auxiliaries avoir and tire. 

2. We call those compound tenses, which are composed of the 
tenses of avoir and ttre, and the participle past of a verb. 

(2.) Among the simple tenses, five are called primitive, because 
Ihey serve to form the other tenses. They are 

1. The present of the indicative ; 

2. The past definite ; 

3. The present of the infinitive ; 

4. The participle present ; 

5. The participle past. 

(3.) The other simple tenses, called derived tenses, are formed 
from the primitive. 

(4.) 1. The present of the indicative forms the imperative by sup- 
pressing the pronouns : as, je chante, chante ; nous chantons, vous 
chantez, chantons, chantez. It will be seen that the third person of 
the singular and plural of the imperative, is properly the third per- 
son of the singular and plural of the subjunctive, used imperatively. 

(5.) The past definite forms the imperfect of the subjunctive, by 
changing i into sse for the first conjugation : as, je chantai, que je 
chantasse, and by adding se for the other conjugations : as, je finis, 
que je finisse ; je recus, queje regusse ; je vendis, queje vendisse. 

(6.) The present of the infinitive forms : — 

1. The future absolute, by adding ai for the first and second con- 
jugations: as, chanter, ^'e chanterai; finir,ye jinirai; and by chang- 
ing oir and re into rai for the other two conjugations : as, recevoir, 
je recevrai ; rendre,ye rendrai. 

2. The conditional present is by French grammarians formed from 
the future by the addition of s : as, je chanterai, je chanterais ; je 
finirai, je jinirais ; je recevrai, je recevrais ; je vendrai,^ vendrais. 

(7.) The participle present forms : — 

1. The imperfect of the indicative by changing ant into ais : as, 
chantant, je chantais ; finissant, je jlnissais ; recevant, je recevais ; 
vendant^'e vendais. 

2. The present of the subjunctive by changing ant into e : as, 
chantant, queje chante ; finissant, que je jlnisse ; vendant, queje vende, 

Exception: In verbs of the third conjugation the termination 
evrnt is changed into oive : as, recevant, queje recoive 



y avoir. — § 61-2. 855 

(8.) Tliis formation m ist not prevent the change of y into i, ac- 
w-rding to Rule (2.) \ 49. 

(9.) The participle past forms all the compound tenses of verbs 
with the aid of the auxiliaries avoir and etre : a^fai chante,je suis 
time* f ) avals chantt,fetais aimL 

%, 

§ 61-2. Paradigm of the Unipersonal Verb Y Avoir, 

To BE THERE. 

Indicative Mode. 

PRESENT. PAST INDEFINITE. 

H y a, there is; there are | II y a eu, there has been; there have 



IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. 

II y avait, there was ; there were | II y avait eu, there had been 

PAST DEFINITE. PAST ANTERIOR. 

II y eut, there was ; there were | II y eut eu, there had been 

FUTURE. FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

D y aura, there will be \ II y aura eu, there will have been 

Conditional Mode. 

PRESENT. PAST 

II y aurait, there would be | II y aurait eu, there would have been 

Imperative Mode. 

Qu'il y ait, Let there be. 

Subjunctive Mode. 

PRESENT. PAST. 

Qu'il v ait, that there may be | Qu'il y ait eu, that there may have 

been 

IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. 

Qu'il y eut, that there might be | Qu'il y eut eu, that there might have 

been 

Infinitive Mode. 

present. past. 

Y avoir, to be there | Y avoir eu, to ha,ve been ther 

Participle. 

present. compound, 

T ayant, there being | Y ayant eu, theie having been 

PAST OR PASSIVE. 

Eu. 



§ 62 ALPHABET 

OF THE IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, 

SEE § 44, RULE (2.; 

The figures placed after the infinitive of the verbi 
The tenses not given !n 



Infinitive. 


Participles. 


Indicative. 


Imperfect. 


Past Definite 


Abatyre, 4. to 


abattant 


j'abats 


j'abattais 


j'abattis 


pull down 


abattu, /. e. 


see BATTRE 






Absoudre, 4. 


absolvant 


j 'absous 


j'absolvais 




to absolve 


absous 


tu absous 


tu absolvais 




aux. avoir 


absout 


il absout 


il absolvait 




defective. 




n. absolvons 
v. absolvez 
ils absolvent 


n. absolvions 
v. absolviez 
i. absolvaient 




Abstenir (s') 


s'abstenant 


je m'abstiens 


je m'abstenais 


je m'abstins 


2. to abstain 


abstenu, /. e. 


ref. see tenir 






Abstraire, 4. 


abstrayant 


j'abstrais 


j'abstrayais 




to abstract 


abstrait, /. e. 


see TRAIRE 






Accourir, 2. 


accourant 


j'accours 


j'accourais 


j'accourus 


to run to 


accouru, /. e. 


see courir 






Accroitre, 4. 


accroissant 


j'accrois 


j'accroissais 


j'accrtis 


to increase 


accru, /. e. 
accueillant 


see croItre 


also reflec. 




ACCUEILLIR, 2. 


j'accueille 


j'accueillais 


j'accueillis 


to welcome 


accueilli, /. e. 


see cueillir 






ACHETER, 1. 


achetant 


j 'achete 


j'achetais 


j'achetai 


to buy 


achete, /. e. 


tu achetes 


like CHANTER 




aux. avoir 




il achete 






$ 49, (5) 




n. achetons 






peculiar. 




v. achete z 
i. ache tent 






Achever, 1. 


achevant 


j 'acheve 


j'achevais 


j'achevai 


to complete 


acheve, e. 


tu acheves 


like CHANTER 




aux. avoir 




il acheve 






<) 49, (6) 




n. achevons 






peculiar. 




v. achevez 
i. achevent 






Acquerir, 2. 


acquerant 


j'acquiers 


j'acquerais 


j'acquis 


to acquire 


acquis,/, e. 


tu acquiers 


tu acquerais 


tu acquis 


aux. avoir 




il acquiert 


il acquerait 


il acquit 


irregular 




n. acquerons 


n. acquerions 


n. acquimes 






v. acquerez 


v. acqueriez 


v. acquites 






i. acquierent 


ils acqueraient 


ils acquirent 


Adtoindre, 4. 


adjoignant 


j'adjoins 


j'adjoignais 


j'adjoignw 


to associate, tyc. 


adjoint,/, e. 


see JOINDRE. 






Admettre, 4. 


admettant 


j'admets 


j'admettais 


j 'admis 


to admit 


admis/. e. 


see METTRE 







ICAL TABLE 

PECULIAR AJSD TOIPERSONAL VERBS. 

§ 43, rule (7) and § 49, 

indicate the conjugations ta which they belong 

this Table are not used. 



Future. 


Conditional. 


Imperative. 


Subjunctive. 


Imperfbct 


j'abattrai 


j'abattrais 


abats 


j'abatte 


j'abatti^se 


j'absoudrai 


j'absoudrais 




j'absolve 




tu absoudras 


tu absoudrais 


absous 


tu absolves 




il absoudra 


il absoudrait 


q. absolve 


il absolve 




n. absoudrons 


n. absoudrions 


absolvons 


n. absolvions 




v. absoudrez 


v. absoudriez 


absolvez 


v. absolviez 




i. absoudront 


i. absoudraient 


q. absolvent 


i. absolvent 




je m'abstien- 


je m'abstien- 




je m'abstienne 


je m^bstinsse 


[drai 


[drais 
j'abstrairais 


abstiens-toi 






j'abstrairai 




j'abstraie 








abstrais 






j'accourrai 


j'accourrais 


accours 


j'accoure 


j'accourusse 


j'accroitrai 


j'accroitrais 


accrois 


j'accroisse 


j'accrusse 


j'accueillerai 


j'accueillerais 


accueille 


j 'accueille 


j'accueillisse 


j'acheterai 


j'acheterais 




j'achete 


j'achetasse 


tu acheteras 


tu acheterais 


achete 


tu achetes 


like 


il achetera 


il acheterait 


q. achete 


il achete 


CHANTER 


n. acheterons 


n. acheterions 


achetons 


n. achetions 




v. acheterez 


v. acheteriez 


achetez 


v. achetiez 




ils acheteront 


i. acheteraient 


q. achetent 


ils achetent 




j'acheverai 


j'acheverais 




j' acheve 


j'achevasse 


tu acheveras 


tu acheverais 


acheve 


tu acheves 


like 


il ache vera 


il acheverait 


q. acheve 


il acheve 


CHANTER 


n, acheverons 


n. acheverions 


achevons 


n. achevions 




v. acheverez 


v. acheveriez 


achevez 


v. acheviez 




ils acheveront 


i. acheveraient 


q. achevent 


i. achevent 




j'acquerrai 


j'acquerrais 




j 'acquiere 


j'acquisse 


tu acquerras 


tu acquerrais 


acquiers 


tu acquieres 


tu acquisses 


il acquerra 


il acquerrait 


q. acquiere 


il acquiere 


il acquit 


n. acquerrons 


n. acquerrions 


acquerons 


n. acquerions 


n. acquissions 


n. acquerrez 


v. acquierriez 


acquerez 


v. acqueriez 


v. acquissiez 


ils acquerront 


i. acquerraient 


q. acquierent 


i. acquierent 


i. acquissent 


j'adjoindrai 


j'adjoindrais 


adjoins 


j'adjoigne 


j'adjoignisse 


j'admettrai 


j'admettrais 


admets 


j'admette 


j'admisse 



358 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PfcCbJLlAR, 



Infinitive. 


Participles. 


Indicative. 


Imperfect. 


Past. Definite, 


Aller, 1. to 


allant 


je vais 


j'allais 


j'allai 


g° 


alle/. e. 


tu vas 


tu allais 


tu alias 


aux. etre 




il va 


il allait 


il alia 


irregular. 




n. allons 


n. allions 


n. allaraes 






r. allez 


v. alliez 


v. allates 






ils vont 


ils allaient 


i. allerent 


Amener, 1. to 


amenant 


j 'amene 


j'amenais 


j'amenai 


bring 


amene /. e. 


% 49, (6) 
j'amoncelle 


see ACHEVER 




AMONCELERj 1 


amoncelant 


j'amoncelais 


j'amoncelai 


to heap 


amoncele /: e. 


% 49, (4) 


see APPELER 




APPARAiTRE,4. 


apparaissant 


j'apparais 


j'apparaissais 


j'apparus 


to appear 


apparu f. e. 


see paraItre 






Appartenir,2 


appartenant 


j'appartiens 


j'appartenais 


j'appartins 


to belong 


appartenu /. e. 


see tenir. 






Appeler, 1. to 


appelant 


j'appelle 


j'appelais 


j'appelai 


call 


appele, /. e. 


tu appelles 


like 


like 


aux. avoir 




il appelle 


CHANTER 


CHANTER 


% 49, (4) 




n. appelons 






peculiar 




v. appelez 
ils appellent 
j'apprends 






Apprendre, 4. 


apprenant 


j'apprenais 


j'appris 


to learn 


appris /. e. 


see prendre 






Appuyer, 1. to 


appuyant 


j'appuie 


j'appuyais 


j'appuyai 
lilce 


support 


appuye /. e. 


tu appuies 


t. appuyais 


aux. avoir 




il appuie 


il appuyait 


CHANTER 


§ 49, (2) 




n. appuyons 


n. appuyions 




peculiar. 




v. appuyez 
ils appuient 


v. appuyiez 
i. appuyaient 




Assaillir, 2. 


assaillant 


j'assaille 


j'assaillais 


j'assaillis 


to assault 


assailli /. e. 


tu assailles 


t. assaillais 


t. assaillis 




il assaille 


i. assaillait 


i. assaillit 






n. assaillons 


n. assaillions 


n. assaillimei 






v. assaillez 


v. assailliez 


v. assailites 






ils assaillent 


i. assaillaient 


i. assaillirent 


Asseoir, 3. to 


asseyant 


j'assieds 


j'asseyais 


j 'assis 


set something 


assis /. e. 


see s'asseoir 






down; to seat. 










Asseoir,(s') 3. 


s'asseyant 


j. m'assieds 


je m'asseyais 


j. m'assis 


to sit down 


assis, /. e. 


t. t'assieds 


t. t'asseyais 


t. t'assis 


aux. etre 




i. s'assied 


i. s'asseyait 


t. s'assit 


irregular. 




n. n. asseyons 


n. n. asseyions 


n. n. assimet 






v. v. asseyez 


v. v. asseyiez 


v. v. assites 






i. s'asseient 


i. s'asseyaient 


i. s'assirent 


ASTREINDRE,4. 


astreignant 


j'astreins 


j'astreignais 


j'astreignis 


to compel 


astreint,/. e. 


see ceindre 






Atteindre, 4. 


atteignant 


j'atteins 


j'atteignais 


j'atteignk 


to attain 


atteint, /. e. 


see ceindre 






Atteler, 1. to 


attelant 


j'attelle 


j'attelais 


j'atUlai 


put to, harness 


attele,/. e. 


§ 49, (4) 
j'attrais 


see APPELER 




Attraire, 4. to 


attrayant 


j'attrayais 




attract 


attrait f. e. 


see TRAIRE 






Avenir, 2. to 


avenant 


il avient 


il avenait 


il avint 


happen 


avenu 


it happens 


it was happen- 


it happened 


Ayoir, to have 


see model § 47 




ing 





AirD UNIPERSONAL VERBS. § 62 



359 



TUTZAK. 



j'irai 
tu iras 
il ira 
n, iroDS 
v. irez 
ils iront 
j araenerai 

j'amoncellerai 

j'apparaitrai 

j'appartien- 

[drai 
j'appellerai 
tu appelleras 
il appellera 
n. appellerons 
v. appellerez 
i. appeileront 
j'apprendrai 

j'appuierai 
t. appuieras 
i. appuiera 
n. appuierons 
v. appuierez 
i. appuieront 
j'assaillirai 
t. assailliras 
i. assaillira 
n. assaillirons 
v. assaillirez 
i. assailliront 
j'assierai 



Conditional. 



j irais 
tu irais 
il irait 
n. irions 
v. iriez 
i. iraient 
j'amenerais 

j 'amoncelle - 
[rai& 
j'apparaitrais 

j'appartien- 
[drais 
j'appellerais 
t. appellerais 
i. appellerait 
n. appellerions 
v. appelleriez 
i.appelleraient 
j'apprendrais 

j'appuierais 
t. appuierais 
i. appuierait 
n. appuierions 
v. appuieriez 
1. appuieraient 
j'assaillirais 
t. assaillirais 
i. assaillirait 
n. assaillirions 
v. assailliriez 
i. assailliraient 
j'assierais 



Imperative. Subjunctive 



va 

q. aille 
allous 
allez 
q aillent 

amene 

amoncelle 

apparais 

appartiens 

appelle 
q. appelle 
appelons 
appelez 
q. appellent 

apprends 

appuie 
q. appuie 
appuyons 
appuyez 
q. appuient 

assaille 
q. assaille 
assaillons 
assaillez 
q. assaillent 



je m'assierai 
t. t'assieras 
L s'assiera 
d. n. assierons 
v. v. assierez 
i. s'assieront 
j'astreindrai 

j'atteindrai 

j'attellerai 

j'attrairai 

il aviendra 
it will happen 



j. m assierais 
t. t'assiorais 
i. s'assierait 
n. n. assierions 
v. v. assieriez 
i. s'assiera ient 
j'astreindrais 

j'atteindrais 

j'attellerais 

j'attrairais 

il aviendrait 
it told, haypen 



assieds 

assieds toi 
q. s'asseie 
asseyons n. 
asseyez v. 
q. s'asseient 

astreins 

atteins 

attelle 

attra's 



j 'aille 
tu ailles 
il aille 
n. allions 
v. alliez 
i. aillent 
j 'amene 

j' amoncelle 

j'apparaisse 

j'appartienne 

j 'appelle 
tu appelles 
i. appelle 
n. appelions 
v. appeliez 
i. appellent 
j'apprenne 

j 'appuie 
tu appuies 
il appuie 
n. appuyions 
v. appuyiez 
ils appuient 
j 'assaille 
t. assailles 



n. assaillions 
v. assailliez 
i. assaillent 
j'asseie 



j'allasse 
tu all asses 
il allat 
n. allassions 
v. allassiez 
allassent 
j'amenasse 

j'amoncelasse 

j'apparusse 

j'appartinsse 



iMPERfECT. 



like 

CHANTER 



j appnsse 

j'appuyasse 

like 



j'assaillisse 
t. assaillisses 
i. assailit 
n.assaillissiona 
v. assaillissiez 
i. assaillissent 
j'assisse 



je m asseie 
t t'asseies 
i. s'asseie 
n. n. asseyions 
v. v. asseyiez 
i. s'asseient 
j'astreigne 

j'atteigne 

j'attelle 

j'attraie 

il avienne 

it wgb. happen 



je m'assisse 
t. t'assisses 
i. s'assit 
n. n. assission* 
v. v. assissiez 
i. s'assissent 
j'astreignisse 

j'atteignisse 

j'attelasse 



il avint 

it mgt. happen 



360 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR 



Infinitive. 


1 PARTICIPLES. 


Indicative. 


Imperfect. 


Past Definite, 


Avoir (y)tobe 


y ayant 


il y a 


il y avait 


il y eut 


there 


eu (unip.) 


there is, are 


t/tere was, were 


there was, wert 


Battre, 4. to 


battant 


je bats 


je battais 


je battis 


beat 


battu, /. e. 


tu bats 


tu battais 


tu battis 


aux. avoir 




il bat 


il battait 


il battit 


irregular. 




n. battons 


n. battions 


n. battimes 






v. battez 


v. battiez 


v. battites 






ils battent 


i. battaient 


ils battirent 


Boire, 4. to 


buvant 


je bois 


je buvais 


je bus 


drink 


bu,/. e. 


tu bois 


tu buvais 


tu bus 


aux. avoir 




il boit 


il buvait 


il but 


irregular. 




n. buvons 


n. buvions 


n. bumes 






v. buvez 


v. buviez 


v. butes 






ils boivent 


i. buvaient 


ils burent 


Bouillir, 2. to 


bouillant. 


je bous 


je bouillais 


je bouillis 


boil 


bouilli, /. e. 


tu bous 


tu bouillais 


tu bouillis 






il bout 


il bouillait J 


il bouillit 






n. bouillons 


n. bouillions 


n. bouillimes 






v. bouillez 


v. bouilliez 


v. bouillites 






i. bouillent 


ils bouillaient 


ils bouillirent 


BOURRELER, 1. 


bourrelant 


je bourrele 


je bourrelais 


je bourrelai 


to torment 


bourrele,/. e. 


§ 49, (5) 






Braire, 4. to 




il brait 






bray 




ils braient 






defective. 










Bruiner, 1. to 


bruinant 


il bruine 


il bruinait 


il bruina 


drizzle 


bruine 


it dHzzles 


it was driz- 


it drizzled 


unipersonal. 






[zling 




Bruire, 4. to 


bruissant 


il bruit 


il bruyait, or 




roar, rustle 






il bruissait 




defective. 






ils bruyaient 
ils bruissaien* 




Cacheter, 1. 


cachetant 


je cachette 


je cache tais 


je cachetai 


to seal 


cachete,/. e. 


<> 49, (4) 






Ceindre, 4, to 


ceignant 


je ceins 


je ceignais 


je ceignis 


gird 


ceint, /. e. 


tu ceins 


tu ceignais 


tu ceignis 


aux. avoir 




il ceint 


il ceignait 


il ceignit 


irregular. 




n. ceignons 


n. ceignions 


n. ceignimes 






v. ceignez 


v. ceigniez 


v. ceignites 






ils ceignent 


ils ceignaient 


ils ceignirent 


Chanceler, 1. 


chancelant 


je chancelle 


je chancelais 


je chancelai 


to stagger 


chancele, f t e. 


% 49, (4) 


see APPELER 




Chancer, 1. to 


changeant 


je change 


je changeais 


je changeai 


change 


change,/, e. 


tu changes 


tu changeais 


tu changeas 


aux. avoir 




il change 


il changeait 


il changea 


% 49, (1) 




n. changeons 


n. changions 


n. changeamaw 


peculiar. 




v. changez 


v. changiez 


v, changeates 






ils changent 


ils changeaient 


ils changerent 


ClRCONSCRIREj 


circonscrivant 


je circonscris 


je circonscri- 


j. circonscrivia 


4. to circum- 


circonscrit, . 


see ECRIRE 


[vais 




scribe 


[f.e. 








ClRCONVENIR, 


circonvenant 


j. circonviens 


je circonve- 


je circonvina 


2. to circum- 


circonvenu, 


see V£nir 


[nais 




[veiU 


[/.e. 









AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS. § 62 



361 



Future. 


Conditional. 


Imperative. 


Subjunctive. 


hlPKRFEGT. 


il y aura 


il y aurait 




il y ait 


il y t ut 


there will he 


there would be 




there may be 


there vii&ht ht, 


je battrai 


je battrais 




je batte 


je battisse 


ia battras 


tu battrais 


bats 


tu battes 


tu battisses 


il battra 


il battrait 


q. batte 


il batte 


il battit 


ri battrons 


n. battrions 


battons 


n. battions 


n. battissions 


v. battrez 


v. battriez 


battez 


v. battiez 


v. battissiez 


5. battront 


i. battraient 


q. battent 


i. battent 


i. battissent 


je boirai 


j. boirais 




je boive 


je busse 


tu boiras 


tu boirais 


bois 


tu boives 


tu busses 


il boira 


il boirait 


q. boive 


il boive 


ilbut 


n. boirons 


n. boirions 


buvons 


n. buvions 


n. bussions 


v. boirez 


v. boiriez 


buvez 


v. buviez 


v. bussiez 


i. boiront 


i. boiraient 


q. boivent 


i. boivent 


ils busse nt 


je bouillirai 


je bouillirais 




je bouille 


je bouillisse 


tu bouilliras 


tu bouillirais 


bous 


tu bouilles 


tu bouillisses 


il bouillira 


il bouillirait 


q. bouille 


il bouille 


il bouillit 


n. bo uill irons 


n. bouillirions 


bouillons 


n. bouillions 


n. bouillissions 


v. bouillirez 


v. bouilliriez 


bouillez 


v. bouilliez 


v. bouillissiez 


; bouilliront 


i. bouilliraient 


q. bouillent 


il bouillent 


i. bouillissent 


je bourrelerai 


je bourrelerais 


bourrele 


je bourrele 


je bourrelasse 


il braira 


il brairait 








ils brairont 


ils brairaient 








il bruinera 


il bruinerait 


q. bruine 


q. bruine 


q. bruinat 


it will drizzle 


it wld drizzle 


let it drizzle 


it may dnzzle 


it mgt. drizzle 


je cachetterai 


je cachette- 
[rais 


cachette 


je cachette 


je cachetasse 


je ceindrai 


je ceindrais 




je ceigne 


je ceignisse 


tu ceindras 


tu ceindrais 


eeins 


tu ceignes 


tu ceignisses 


il ceindra 


il ceindrait 


q. ceigne 


il ceigne 


il ceignit 


n. ceindrons 


n. ceindrions 


ceignons 


n. ceignions 


n. ceignissiona 


v. ceindrez 


v. ceindriez 


ceignez 


v. ceigniez 


v. ceignissiez 


ils ceindront 


ils ceindraient 


q. ceignent 


ils ceignent 


i. ceignissent 


je ehancellerai 


je chancelle- 
[rais 


chancelle 


je chancelle 


je chancelasss 


je changerai 


je cbangerais 




je change 


je changeasse 


like 




change 


tu changes 


tu changeasses 


CHANTER 




q. change 


like 


il changeat 






change ons 


CHANTER 


changeassions 






changez 




v changeassiez 






q. changent 




i.changeassenfc 


je cirsconcri- 


je circonscri- 




je circonscrive 


je circonscri- 


[rai 


[rais 


circonscris 




[yisse 


)« circonvien- 


je circonvien- 




je circonyi- 


je circanvinAgo 


fdrai 


[drais 


circonviens 


[enne 


* 



16 



362 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR 



infit zt; 2. 



Clore. 4. to 
close 
defective 

COLLETER, 1. 

to collar 
Cdmbattre, 4. 

to combat 
Gommettre,4. 

to commit 
CdmparaItre, 

4. to appear 
Com pl a i re, 4. 

to humor 

COMPRENDRE, 

4. to under- 
stand 

COMPROMET- 

TaE, 4. tocom- 
fromit 

Cjnclure, 4. 
to conclude 
aux. avoir 
irregular. 



Concourir, 2. 
to concur 

CONDUIRE, 4 

to conduct 
aux. avoir 
irregular. 



CONFIRE, 4. to 

preserve 
aux. avoir 
irregular 

CONGFXER, 1. 

to congeal 

CONJOINDRE, 4 

to conjoin 
C^nnaItrE; 4. 
to know 
aux. avoir 
irregular. 



CONQCERIR, 2. 

to conquer 

CoNSENTlxl, 2. 

w consent 



PARTICirLES. 



clos 

colletant 
collete,/. e, 
combattant 
combattu, f. e 
commettant 
commis. /. e. 
comparaissant 
comparu 
complaisant 
complu 
comprenant 
compris,/ e. 

compromet- 

[tant 
compromis,/.e 
concluant 
conchi, /. e, 



concourant 
concouru,/. e. 
conduisant 
conduit, f. e. 



conusant 
confit, /. e. 



congelant 
congele,/. e. 
conjoignant 
conjoint, /. e. 
connaissant 
connu, f. e. 



conquerant 
conquis, /. e. 
consentant 
consenti, f. e 



Indicative. 



je clos 
tu clos 
il clot 
je collete 
§ 49. (5) 
je combats 

see BATTRE 

je commets 

see METTRE 

je comparais 

See PARAiTRE 

je complais 
see plaire 
je comprends 

see PRENDRE 

je compromets 

see METTRE 

je conclus 
tu conclus 
il conclut 
n. concluons 
v. concluez 
i. concluent 
je concours 
see courir 
je conduis 
tu conduis 
il conduit 
n. conduisons 
v. conduisez 
ils conduisent 
je confis 
tu confis 
il confit 
n. confisons 
v. confisez 
i. confisent 
je congele 
§ 49, (5) 
je conjoins 
see ceindre 
je connais 
tu connais 
il commit 
n. connaissons 
v. connaissez 
i. connaissent 
je conquiers 
see acqurrir 
je consens 

see SENTIR. 



IMPERFECT. ^AtT. DEFINITE, 



je colletais 

see ACHETER 

je combattais 

je commettais 

je comparais- 
[sais 
je complaisais 

je comprenais 



je compromet- 
[tais 

je concluais 
tu concluais 
il concluait 
n. concluions 
v. concluiez 
i. concluaient 
je concourais 

je conduisais 
tu conduisais 
il conduisait 
n. conduisions 
v. conduisiez 
.. conduisaient 
je confisais 
tu confisais 
il confisait 
n. confisions 
v. confisiez 
i. confisaient 
je cougelais 

je conjoignais 

je connaissais 
tu connaissais 
il connaissait 
n. connaissions 
v. connaissiez 
connaissaient 
je oonquerais 

je consentais 



je colletai 
je combattis 
jo commis 
je comparaa 
je complus 
je compris 

je compronfiil 

je conclus 
tu conclus 
il conclut 
n. conclumes 
v. concludes 
ils conclurent 
je concourus 

je conduisis 
tu conduisis 
il conduisit 
n. conduisimei 
v. conduisit "^s 
i. conduisirc^ 
je confis 
tu confis 
il confit 
n. confimes 
v. coDfites 
ils confirent 
je congelais 

je conjoignis 

je connus 
tu connus 
il connut 
n. connumes 
v. connu Ue 
i. connurent 
je conquis 

je consents 



AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS. § 62 



363 



Futurk. I Conditional. 



je clorai 
tn cloras 
il clora, &c. 
je colleterai 

je combattrai 

je commettrai 

je comparai- 

[trai 

je complairai 

je compren- 
[drai 

je compromet- 
[trai 

je conclnrai 
tu concluras 
11 conclura 
n. conclurons 
v. conclurez 
lis concluront 
je concourrai 

je conduirai 
tu conduiras 
il conduira 
n. conduirons 
v. conduirez 
lis conduiront 
je confirai 
tu confiras 
il confira 
n. confirons 
v. confirez 
i. confront 
je congelerai 

je conjoindrai 

je connaitrai 
tu connaitras 
il connaitra 
n. connaitrons 
v. connaitrez 
lis connaitront 
je couquerrai 

je consentirai 



je clorais 
tu clorais 
il clorait. etc. 
je colleterais 

je combattrais 

je commet- 
[trais 

je comparai- 
[trais 

je complairais 

je compren- 
[drais 

je compromet- 
[trais 

je eonclurais 
tu eonclurais 
il conclurait 
n. conclurions 
y. concluriez 
concluraient 
je concourrais 

je conduirais 
tu conduirais 
il conduirait 
n. conduirions 
v. conduiriez 
conduiraient 
je confirais 
tu confirais 
il confirait 
n. confirions 
v. confiriez 
ils confiraient 
je congelerais 

je conjoin- 

[drais 
je connaitrais 
tu connaitrais 
il connaitrait 
n. connaitrions 
v. connaitriez 
i.o >nnaitraient 
'je conquerrais 

je consenti- 
[rais 



Imperative. 



collete 

combats 

commets 

comparais 

complais 

comprends 

compromets 

conclus 
q. conclue 
concluons 
concluez 
q. concluent 



conduis 
q. conduise 
conduisons 
conduisez 
q. conduisent 

confis 
q. confise 
confisons 
conflsez 
q. confisent 

congele 

conjoins 

connais 

q. connaisse 

connaissons 

connaissez 

q. connaissent 

conquiers 

consens 



Subjunctive. 



je collete 

je combatte 

je commette 

je compa- 

[raisse 
je complaise 

je comprenne 



je compro- 
[mette 

je conclue 
tu conclues 
il conclue 
n. concluions 
v. concluiez 
ils concluent 
je concoure 

je conduise 
tu conduises 
il conduise 
n. conduisions 
conduisiez 
ils conduisent 
je confise 
tu confises 
il confise 
n. confisions 
v. confisiez 
i. confisent 
je congele 

je conjoigne 

je connaisse 
tu connaisses 
il connaisse 
n. connaissions 
v. connaissiez 
ils connaissent 
je conquiere 

je consente 



je colletasse 
je combattisse 
je commisse 
je comparusse 
je complusse 
je comprisse 



je compro- 
[misse 

je conclusse 
tu conclusses 
il conclut 
n. conclussions 
conclussiez 
ils conclussent 
je concourusse 

je conduisisse 
tu conduisisses 
il conduisit 
conduisissions 
v.conduisissiez 
i.eonduisissent 
je confisse 
tu confisses 
il conf it 
n. confissions 
v. confissiez 
ils confissent 
je congelasse 

je conjoignissa 

je connusse 
tu connusses 
il connut 
n. connussiona 
v. connussiez 
ils connussent 
je cc^nquisse 

jo jxiujeDtiMe 



364 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR 



Infinitive. 


PARTICIPLES. 


Indicative. 


Imperfect. 


Past Definite, 


CoNSTRUIRE,4. 


construisant 


je construis 


je construisais 


je construisis 


to construct 


const ruit, /. e. 


see CONDUIRE 






CONTENIR, 2. 


contenant 


je contiens 


je contenais 


je contins 


to contain 


contenu,/. e. 


see tenir 






CONTRAINDRE, 


contraignant 


je contrains 


je contraignais 


je contraignis 


4 to constrain 


con train t, fie. 


see ceindre 






CONTREDIRE, 4 


contredisant 


je contredis 


je contredisais 


je contredis 


to contradict 


contredit, /. e. 


tu contredis 


like dire 


like dire 


aux. avoir 




il contredit 
n.contredisons 
v. contredisez 
i. contredisent 






CONTREFAIRE, 


contrefaisant 


je contrefais 


je contrefai- 


je contrefis 


4. to counter- 


con tre fait,/, e. 


see faire 


[sais 




feit 










CONTREVENIR, 


contrevenant 


je contreviens 


je contreve- 


je contrevins 


2. to contra- 
vene 

CoNVAINCRE, 4 


contrevenu./.e 


see tenir 


jnais 




convainquant 


je convaincs 


je convain- 


je convainquif 


to convince 


convaincu./.e. 




[quais 




CONVENIR, 2. 


convenant 


je conviens 


je convenais 


je convins 


to suit, fit. d^c. 


convenu,/. e. 


see tenir 






COQUETER, I. 


coquetant 


je coquete 


je coquetais 


je coquetai 


to coquet 


coquete 


see acheter 


peculiar. 




CORROMPRE, 4 


corrompant 


je corromps 


je corrompais 


je corrompis 


to corrupt 


corrompu,/. e. 


see ROMPRE 






COUDRE, 4. to 


cousant 


je couds 


je cousais 


je cousis 


sew 


cousu, /. e. 


tu couds 


tu cousais 


tu cousis 


aux. avoir 




il coud 


il cousait 


il cousit 


irregular. 




n. cousons 


n. cousions 


n. cousimes 






v. cousez 


v. cousiez 


v. cousites 






ils cousent 


ils cousaient 


ils cousirent 


Uourir, 2. to 


courant 


je cours 


je courais 


je courus 


run 


couru 


tu cours 


tu courais 


tu courus 


aux. avoir 




il court 


il courait 


ilcourut 


irregular. 




n. courons 


n. courions 


n. courumes 






v. courez 


v. couriez 


v. courutes 






ils courent 


ils couraient 


ils courureni 


Couvrir, 2. to 


couvrant 


je couvre 


je couvrais 


je couvris 


cover 


couvert,/. e. 


see ouvrir 






Craindre, 4. 


craignant 


je crains 


je craignais 


je craignis 


to fear 


craint, /*. e. 


see ceindre 






CftOIRE, 4. to 


croyant 


je crois 


je croyais 


je cms 


believe 


cru,/. e. 


tu crois 


tu croyais 


tu crus 


aux. avoir 




il croit 


il croyait 


il crut 


irregular. 




n. cro3 T ons 


n. croyions 


n. crumes 






v. croyez 


v. croyiez 


v. crutes 






ils croient 


ils croyaient 


ils crurent 


CroItre, 4. to 


croissant 


je crois 


je croissais 


je crus 


grow 


cru ; f e 


tu crois 


tu croissais 


tu crus 


aux. avoir & 




il croit 


il croissait 


il crut 


&tre 




n. croissons 


n. croissions 


n. crumes 


irregular. 




v. croissez 


v. croissiez 


v. crutes 






ils croissent 


ils croissaient | 


ils crurent 



AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 



§ 62 



365 



Future. 


Conditional. 


Imperative. 


SUB.'UNCTIVE. 


Imperfect. 


je construirai 


je eor.struirais 


construis 


je construis e 


je construisis- 
[se 


je contiendrai 


je contien- 

[drais 


contiens 


je contienne 


je continsse 


je contrain- 


je contrain- 




je contraigne 


je contraignis- 


[drai 


[drais 


contrains 




[se 


je contredirai 


jecontredirais 




je contredise 


je contredisse 


iifce dire 


like djre 


contredis 
q. contredise 
contredisons 
contredisez 
q. contredisent 






je contreferai 


je contreferais 


contrefais 


je contrefasse 


je contreflsse 


je contrevien- 


je contrevien- 




je contrevien- 


je contrevinssa 


[drai 


[drais 


contreviens 


[ne 




je convaincrai 


je convaincrais 


convaincs 


je convainque 


je convain- 
[quisse 


je conviendrai 


je convien- 
[drais 


conviens 


je convienne 


je convinsse 


je coqueterai 


je coqueterais 


coquete 


je coquete 


je coquetasso 


je corromprai 


je corromprais 


corromps 


je corrompe 


je corrompiss* 


je coudrai 


je coudrais 




je couse 


je cousisse 


tu coudras 


tu coudrais 


couds 


tu couses 


tu coussisses 


il coudra 


il coudrait 


q. couse 


il couse 


il cousit 


n. coudrons 


n. coudrions 


cousons 


n. cousions 


n. cousissions 


v. coudrez 


v. coudriez 


cousez 


v. cousiez 


v. cousissiez 


ils coudront 


i. coudraient 


q. cousent 


i. cousent 


ils cousissent 


je courrai 


je courrais 




je coure 


je courusse 


tu courras 


tu courrais 


cours 


tu coures 


tu courusses 


il courra 


il courrait 


q. coure 


il coure 


il courut 


n. courrons 


n. courrions 


courons 


n. courions 


n. courussions 


v. courrez 


v. courriez 


courez 


v. couriez 


v. courussiez 


ils courront 


ils courraient 


q. courent 


ils courent 


ils courussent 


je couvrirai 


je couvrirais 


couvre 


je couvre 


je couvrisse 


je craindrai 


je craindrais 


crains 


je craigne 


je craignisse 


je croirai 


ie croirais 




je croie 


je crusse 


tu croiras 


<i croirais 


crois 


tu croies 


tu crusses 


il croira 


il croirait 


q. croie 


il croie 


il crut 


n. croirons 


n. croirions 


croyons 


n. croyions 


n. cruseiona 


v. croirez 


v. croiriez 


croyez 


v. croyiez 


v. crussiez 


ils croiront 


iU croiraient 


q. croient 


ils croient 


ils crussent 


je eroitrai 


je croitrais 




je croisse 


je crusse 


tu croitras 


tu croitrais 


crois 


tu croisses 


tu crussec 


il croitra 


il croi trait 


q. croisse 


il croisse 


il crut 


n. croitrcns 


n. croitrions 


croissons 


n. croissions 


n. crussions 


v. croitrez 


v. croitriez 


croissez 


v. croissiez 


v. crussiez 


Us croitront 


ils croitraient 


q. croissent 


ils croissent 


ils crussent 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR 



Ikfinitive. 



CUEILLIR, 2. tO 

gather 



Cuire, 4. to 
bake, cook, fyc. 

D^BATTRE, 4. 

to debate 

De'cACHETER, 

1. to unseal 
Dechoir, 3. to 

decay 
aux. avoir & 

etre 

defective 

D£coudre, 4. 

to rip 
D£couvrir, 2. 

to discover 
D£ CRIRE, 4, to 

describe 

De'diRE, 4. tO 

unsay 

De'dUIRE, 4. to 

deduct 

De>AILLIR, 2. 

to fail, faint 
defective. 

De"faire, 4. to 
undo 

1>£geler. 1. to 
thaw 

Dejoindre, 4. 
disjoin 

D^mentir, 2. 
to belie 

D^mettre, 4. 
to disjoint 

Pepeindre, 4 
to depict 

D£ pl aire, 4. 
to displease 

De*safpren- 
dre, 4, to un- 
learn 

Pesservir, 2. 
to clear the ta- 
ble 

Wteindre, 4. 
to discolor 



Parti cij\es. 



cueillant; 
cueilli,/. e. 



cuisant 
cuit./. e. 
debattant 
debattu,/. e. 
decachetant 
decachete, /.e. 

dechu, /. e. 



(Bescherelle) 

decousant 

decousu, /. e. 

decouvrant 

decouvert,/.e. 

decrivant 

decrit, /. e. 

dedisant 

dedit,/. e. 

deduisant 

deduit, /. e. 

defaillant 

defailli 

(Bescherelle) 

defa ; sant 
defait, /. e. 
degelant 
degele, /. e. 
dejoignant 
dbjoint,/. e. 
dementant 
dementi,/, e. 
demettant 
demis,/. e. 
depeignant 
depeint, f. e. 
deplaisant 
deplu, /. e. 
desapprenant 
desappris,/e 

des3ervant 
desservi, /. e. 

deteignant 
deteint,/. o. 



Indicative. 



je cueille 
tu cueilles 
i] cueille 
n. cueillons 
v. cueillez 
ils cueillent 
je cuis 

see CONDUIRE 

je debats 

see BATTRE 

je decachette 
<> 49, (4) 
je dechois 
tu dechois 
il dechoit 
n. dechoyons 
v. dcchoyez 
ils dechoient 
je decouds 
see coudre 
je decouvre 
see ouvrir 
je decris 
see £ crire 
je dedis 

SeeCONTREDIRE 

je deduis 
see conduIre 
il defaille 
n. defaillons 
v. defaillez 
ils dcfaillent 
je defais 
see fa ire 
il degele 

je dejoins 
see ceindre 
je demens 
see sentir 
je demets 

see METTRE 

je depeins 

see CEINDRE 

je deplais 
see plaire 
je desap- 

[prends 
see prendre 
je dessers 
see servir 

je deteins 
see TEINDRE 



Imperfect. Pabt. Definite 



> ;aeillais 
tu cueillais 
il cueillait 
n. cueillions 
v. cueilliez 
ils cueillaient 
je cuisais 

je debattais 

je decachetais 

je dechoyais 
tu dechoyais 
il dechoyait 
n. dechoyions 
v. dechoyiez 
ilsdechoj^aient 
je decousais 

je decouvrais 

je decrivais 

je dedisais 

je deduisais 

je defaillais 
etc. 



je defaisais 

il degelait 

je dejoignais 

je deinentais 

je demettais 

je depeignais 

je deplaisais 

je desappre- 
[nais 

je desservais 
je deteignais 



je cueillift 
tu cueillis 
il cueillit 
n. cueillimes 
v. cueillites 
ils cueillireat 
je cuisis 

je debattis 

je decachetai 

je dechus 
tu dechus 
il dechut 
n. dechumes 
v. dechutes 
ils dechurent 
je decousis 

je decouvris 

je decrivis 

je dedis 

je deduisis 

je defaillis, 
etc. 



je defls 
il degela 
je dejoignis 
je dementis 
je demis 
je depeignis 
je deplus 
je desappris 

je desservis 

je deteignii 



^m> UNIPERSONAL VERBS. §62 



367 



Future 


OONT-TIONAL. 


Imperative* 


SUBJUNCTIVK 


Imperfect. 


je cueillerai 


je cueiilerais 




je cueille 


je cueillisse 


tu cueille ras 


tu cueiilerais 


cueille 


tu cueilles 


tu cue i hisses 


il cueillera 


il cueillerait 


q. cueille 


il cueille 


il cueillit 


n cueillerons 


n. cueillerions 


cueillons 


n. cueillious 


n. cueillis340D8 


v. cueillerez 


v. cueilleriez 


cueillez 


v. cueilliez 


v. cueillissiez 


ils cueilleront 


i. cueilleraient 


q. cueillent 


i. cueillent 


ils cueillissent 


je cuirai 


je cuirais 


cuis 


je cuise 


je cuisisse 


je debattrai 


je debattrais 


debats 


je debatte 


je debattisse 


je decachet- 


je decachet- 




je decachette 


je decache- 


[terai 


[terais 


decachette 




[tasse 


je decherrai 


je decherrais 




je dechoie 


je dechusse 


tu decherras 


tu decherrais 


dechois 


tu dechoies 


tu dechusses 


il decherra 


il decherrait 


q. dechoie 


il dechoie 


il dechut 


n. decherrons 


n. decherrions 


dechoyons 


n. dechoyions 


n. dechussiors 


v. decherrez 


v. decherriez 


dechoyez 


v. dechoyiez 


v. dechussiez 


ils decherront 


i. decherraient 


q. dechoient 


ils dechoient 


ils dechussent 


je decoudrai 


je decoudrais 


decouds 


je decouse 


je decousisse 


je decouvrirai 


je decouvrirais 


decouvre 


je decouvre 


je decouvrissa 


je decrirai 


je decrirais 


decris 


je decrive 


je decrivisse 


je dedirai 


je dedirais 


dedis 


je dedise 


je dedisse 


je deduirai 


je deduirais 


deduis 


je deduise 


je deduisisse 


see Bescherelle , 










Dictionnaire 










National. 










je deferai 


je deferai 


defais 


je defasse 


je defisse 


!1 degelera 


il degelerait 


q. degele 


il degele 


il degelat 


je dejoindrai 


je dejoindrais 


dejoins 


je dejoigne 


je dejoignisba 


je dementirai 


je dementirais 


demens 


je demente 


je dementisse 


je demettrai 


je demettrais 


demets 


je demette 


je demisse 


je depeindrai 


je dependrais 


depeins 


je depeigne 


je depeignisse 


je deplairai 


je deplairais 


deplais 


je deplaise 


je deplusse 


je desappren- 


je desappren- 




je desappren- 


je desapprisse 


[drai 


[drais 


desapprends 


[ne 




h desservira: 


jedesssrvirais 


dessers 


je desseive 


je desservisse 


Jed^teimlrai 


Je deteindrais 


deteins 


je detaigne 


jo deteigniss© 



368 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR 



Infintivk. 


PARTICIPLES. 


Indicati/e. 


Impeef ect. 


Past Definite 


D£tenir, 2 to 


detenant 


je detiens 


je detenais 


je detins 


detain 


detenu,/, e. 


see tenir 






DtfmuiRE, 4 


detruisant 


je detruis 


je detruisais 


je detruisi* 


to destroy 


detruit,/. e. 


see conduire 






Devenir, 2. to 


devenant 


je deviens 


je devenais 


je devins 


become 


devenu,/. e. 


see tenir 






DSVETIR, 2. to 


devetant 


je devets 


je devetais 


je devdtis 


direst 


devetu,/ e. 


see vetir 






Pire ; 4, to 


disant 


je dis 


je disais 


je dis 


say 


dit,/. e. 


tu dis 


tu disais 


tu dis 


aux. aroir 




il dit 


il disait 


il dit 


irregular. 




n. disons 


n, disions 


n. dimes 






v. dites 


v. disiez 


v. dites 






ils disent 


ils disaient 


ils dirent 


Dkscourir, 2. 


discourant 


je discours 


je discourais 


je discounts 


to discourse 


discouru 


see courir 






DisparaItre,* 


disparaissant 


je disparais 


je disparais- 


je disparus 


4. to disappear 


disparu, / e. 


see connaItre 


[sais 




Dissoudre, 4. 


dissolvant 


je dissous 


je dissolvais 




to dissolve 


dissous, /. te. 


see absoudre 






Distraire, 4. 


distrayant 


je distrais 


je distrayais 




to divert 


distrait, /. e. 


see TRAIRE 






Bormir, 2. to 


dormant 


je dors 


je dormais 


je dormis 


sleep 


dormi 


tu dors 


tu dormais 


tu dormis 


aiix. avoir 




il dort 


il dormait 


il dormit 


irregular. 




n. dormons 


n. dormions 


n. dor mimes 






v. dormez 


v. dormiez 


v. dormi tes 






ils dorment 


ils dormaient 


ils dormirent 


filCHOIR, 3. to 


echeant 


il echoit 




il echut 


fall due 


echu, / e. 


or il echet 






JEclore, 4. to 




il eclot 






^ hatch 


eclos 








ficONDUIRE, 4. 


econduisant 


j'econduis 


j'econduisais 


j'econduisis 


^ to refuse 


econduit, /. e. 


see CONDUIRE 






ficRIRE, 4. to 


ecrivant 


j'ecris 


j'ecrivais 


j'ecrivis 


w^ite 


ecrit, /. e. 


tu eeris 


tu ccrivais 


tu ecrivis 


aux. avoir 




il ecrit 


il ecrivait 


il ecrivit 


irregular. 




n. ecrivons 


n, ecrivions 


n. ecrivimes 






v. ecrivez 


v. ecriviez 


v. eerintes 






ils eerivent 


ils ecrivaient 


ils ecrrvirent 


Klire, 4. to 


elisant 


j'elis 


j'elisais 


j'elus 


elect 


elu,/ e. 


see lire 






I^METTRE, 4. fo 


emettant 


j'emets 


j'emettais 


j'emis 


emit 


emis, / e. 


see METTRE 






Emmener, l.to 


emmenant 


j'emmene 


j'emmenais 


j'emmenai 


^ take away 


emmene,/ e. 


§ 49, (6) 
j'emouds 


see MENER 




Emoudre, 4. 


emoulant 


j'emoulais 


j'emoulus 


^ to sharpen 


emoulu, / e. 


see MOUDRE 






Emouvoir, 3. 


emouvant 


j'emeus 


j'emouvais 


j'emus 


to excite, tf*c. 


emu, / e. 


see mouvoir 






Employer, 1. 


employ ant 


j'emploie 


j'employais 


j'employai 


to employ 


employe, / e. 


% 49, (2) 


see APPUYER 




Empreindre, 


empreignant 


j'empreins 


j'eEnpieignaft 


j'empreignis 


4. to imprint 


enipreint, / e. 


see CEINDRE 







AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 



62 



360 



FUTURE. 


Conditional. 


Imperative. 


Subjunctive. ' 


IMPERFECT. 


je detiendrai 


je detiendrais 


detiens 


je detienne 


je detinsse 


je detruirai 


je detruirais 


detruis 


je detruise 


je detruisisse 


je deviendrai 


je deviendrais 


deviens 


je devienne 


je devinsse 


je devetirai 


je devetirais 


devets 


je devete 


je devetisse 


je dirai 


je dirais 




je dise 


je disse 


tu diras 


tu dirais 


dis 


tu dises 


tu disses 


il dira 


il dirait 


q. dise 


il dise 


il dit 


n. dirons 


n. dirions 


disons 


n. disions 


n. dissions 


v. direz 


v. diriez 


dites 


v. disiez 


v. dissiez 


ils diront 


ils diraient 


q. disent 


ils disent 


ils dissent 


je discourrai 


je discourrais 


discours 


je discoure 


je discourussa 


je disparaitrai 


je disparai- 
[trais 


disparais 


je disparaisse 


je disparusse 


je dissoudrai 


je dissoudrais 


dissous 


je dissolve 




je distrairai 


je distrairais 


distrais 


je distraie 




je dormirai 


je dormirais 




je dorme 


je dormisse 


tu dormiras 


tu dormirais 


dors 


tu dormes 


tu dormisses 


il dormira 


11 dormirait 


qu'il dorme 


il dorme 


il dormit 


n. dormirons 


n. dormirions 


dormons 


n. dormions 


n. dormissions 


v. dormirez 


y. dormiriez 


dormez 


v. dormiez 


v. dormissiez 


ils dormiront 


ils dorruiraient 


q. dorment 


ils dorment 


ils donnissent 


il echerra 


il echerrait 






qu'il echut 


il eclora 


il eclorait 




q. eclose 




j'econduirai 


j'econduirais 


econduis 


j'econduise 


j'econduisisse 


j'ecrirai 


j'ecrirais 




j 'ecrive 


j'ecrivisse 


tu ecriras 


tu ecrirais 


ecris 


tu ecrives 


tu ecrivisses 


il ecrira 


il ecrirait 


q. ecrive 


il ecrive 


il ecrivit 


n. ecrirons 


n. ecririons 


ecrivons 


n. ecriviong 


n. ecrivissions 


v. ecrirez 


v. ecririez 


ecrivez 


v. ecriviez 


v. ecrivissiez 


ils ecriront 


ils ecriraient 


q. ecrivent 


ils ecr^Fent 


ils ecrivissent 


j'elirai 


j'elirais 


elis 


j'elise 


j'elusse 


j'emettrai 


j'emettrais 


cmets 


j'emette 


j'emisse 


j'einmenerai 


j'emmenerais 


emmene 


j 'emmene 


j'emmenasse 


j'emoudrai 


j'emoudrais 


emouds 


j'emoule 


j'emoulusse 


j'emouvrai 


j'emouvrais 


emeus 


j'emeuve 


j'emusse 


j'emploierai 


j'empioierais 


emploie 


j' emploie 


j'employasse 


j'enipreindVai 


j'empreindrais 


empreins 
16* 


j'empreigne - 


j'empreigniaBt 



$10 



ISREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR 



Infinitive. 


Participles. 


Indicative. 


Imperfect. 


Past. Definite 


Enci.ore, 4. to 




j 'enclos 






enclose 


enclos. /. e. 








Encourir, 2. 


encourant 


j'encours 


j'encourais 


j'encourus 


to incur 


encouru,/. e. 


see courir 






Endormir, 2. 


endormant 


j'endors 


j'endormais 


j'endormia 


to lull asleep 


endormi./. e. 


see dormir 






EnduirEj 4. to 


enduisant 


j'enduis 


j'enduisais 


j'enduisis 


plaster 


enduit,/. e. 


see conduire 






Enfreindre, 


enfreignant 


j'enfreins 


j'enfreignais 


j'enfreignis 


4. to infringe 


enfreint. /. e. 


see ceindre 






Enfuir, (s') 2. 


s'enfuyant 


je m'enfuis 


j. m'enfuyais 


je m'enfuis 


to run away 


enfui, /. e. 


see futr 






Enjoindre, 4. 


enjoignant 


j 'enjoins 


j'enjoignais 


j'enjoignis 


to enjoin 


enjoint,/. e. 


see ceindre 






Ennl*ter, (s') 


s'ennuyant 


je m'ennuie 


je m'ennuyais 


je m'ennuyai 


1. to be weary 


ennuye,/. e. 


see APPUYER 


<) 49, (2) 




Enciuerir, (s') 


s'enquerant 


j. m'enquiers 


j. m'enquerais 


je m'enquis 


2. to inquire 


enquis, /. e. 


see acqu^rir 






Entremettre 


s'entremettant 


j. m'entremets 


je m'entre- 


j. m'entremia 


(s') 4. to in- 


entremis,/. e. 


see METTRE 


[mettais 




terpose 










Entrepren- 


entreprenant 


j'entreprends 


j'entreprenais 


j'entrepris 


dre, 4. to un- 
dertake 
Entretenir, 


entrepris, /. e. 


see PRENDRE 






entretenant 


j'entretiens 


j'entretenais 


j'entretins 


2. to entertain 


entretenu, /. e. 


see tenir. 






Entrevoir, 3. 


entrevoyant 


j'entrevois 


j'entrevoyais 


j'entrevis 


to slimpse at 


entrevu, /. e. 


see voir 






Envoyer, 1. to 


envoyant 


j'envoie 


j 'envoy ais 


j'envoyai 


send 


envoye./. e. 


tu envoies 


tu envoyais 


tu envoyas 


aux. avoir 




il envoie 


il envoyait 


il envoya 


irregular. 




n. envoyons 


n. envoyions 


n. envoyames 






v. envoye z 


v. envoyiez 


v. envoyates 






ils envoient 


ils envoyaient 


ils envoyerent 


Eprendre,(s') 


s'eprenant 


je m'eprends 


je nreprenais 


je m'epris 


4. to be smit- 
ten 
Essayer, 1. to 


epris, /. e. 


see PRENDRE 






essayant 


j'essaie 


j'essayais 


j'essayai 


try 


essaye, /. e. 


see APPUYER 


§ 49,* (2) 




Steindre, 4. 


eteignant 


j 'eteins 


j'eteignais 


j'eteigms 


- to extinguish 


eteint, /. e. 


see CEINDRE 






Etinceler, 1. 


etincelant 


j'etincelle 


j'etincelle 


j'etincelai 


to sparkle 


etincele,/. e. 


see APPELER 


() 49 (4) 




firiGtUETER, 1. 


etiquetant 


j'etiquete 


j'etiquetais 


j'etiquetai 


A to label 


etiquete, /. e. 


see ACHETER 


5 ^ ( 5 ) 




Etre, 4. to be 


see model 


§ 47, (5) 
j'etreins 






Ktreindre, 4. 


etreignant 


j'etreignais 


j'etreignis 


to press 


etreint, /. e. 


see CEINDRE 






Exclure, 4. b' 


excluant 


j 'exclus 


j'excluais 


j'exelna 


exclude 


exclu, exclus 


see CONCLURE 






Extraire, 4. 


extrayant 


j'extrais 


j'extrayais 




to extract 


extrait, /. e. 


see TRAIRE 







AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 



62 



371 



Future 


Conditional. 


Imperative* 


Subjunctive. 


Imperfect. 


j'enclorai 


j'enclorais 








j'encourrai 


j'encourrais 




j'encoure j'encourusse 






encours 






j'endormirai 


j'endormirais 


endors 


j'endorme 


j'endormisse 


j'enduirai 


j'enduirais 


enduis 


j'enduise 


j'enduisisse 


j'enfreindrai 


j'enfreindrais 


enfreins 


j'enfr eigne 


j'enfreignisse 


je m'enfuirai 


je m'enfuirais 


enfuis-toi 


je m'enfuie 


je m'enfuisse 


j'enjoindrai 


j'enjoindrais 


enjoins 


j'enjoigne 


j'enjoignisse 


jem'ennuierai 


je m'ennuie- 




je m'ennuie 


je m'ennuyas- 




[rais 


ennuie-toi 




. , t se 


jem'enquerrai 


je m'enquer- 
[rais 


enquiers-toi 


je m'enquiere 


je m'enquisse 


je m'entre- 


je m'entre- 




je m'entre- 


je m'entre- 


[mettrai 


[mettrais 


entremets-toi 


[mette 


[misse 


j'entrepren- 


j'entrepren- 




j'entreprenne 


j'entreprisse 


[drai 


[drais 


entreprends 






j'entretiendrai 


j'entretien- 

[drais 


entretiens 


j'entretienne 


j'entretinsse 


j'entreverrai 


j'entreverrais 


entrevois 


j'entrevoie 


j'entrevisse 


j'enverrai 


j'enverrais 




j 'envoie 


j'envoyasse 


tu enverras 


tu enverrais 


envoie 


tu envoies 


tu envoyasses 


il enverra 


il enverrait 


q. envoie 


il envoie 


il envoyat 


n. enverrons 


n. enverrions 


envoyons 


n. envoyions 


n envo/assions 


v. enverrez 


v. enverriez 


envoyez 


v. envoyiez 


v. envoy asMez 


lis enverront 


ils enverraient 


q. envoient 


ils envoient 


ilsenvoyasstnt 


je m'epren- 


je m'epren- 




je m'eprenne 


je m'eprisse 


[drai 


[drais 


eprends-toi 






fessaierai 


j'essaierais 


essaie 


j'essaie 


j' essay asse 


j'eteindrai 


j'eteindrais 


eteins 


j'eteigne 


j'eteignisse 


j'etincellerai 


j'etincellerais 


etincelle 


j 'etincelle 


j'etincelasse 


j'etiqueterai 


j'etiqueterais 


etiquete 


j' etiquete 


j'etiquetasse 


j'6treindrai 


j'etreindrais 


etreins 


j'etr eigne 


j'etreignisse 


j'exclurai 


j'exclurais 


exclus 


j'exclue 


j'exclussa 


j'extrairai 


j'extrairais 


extrais 


j'extraio 





372 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR 











jft . 


Infinitive. 


Participles. 


Indicative. 


Imperfect. 


Past Definite 


Faillir, 2. to 


faillissant 


je faillis 


je faillissais 


je faillia 


fail 


failli 


now regular 


see finir, § 5( 




(New form) 


( BeschereUe) 








(Old forra ; 


fa ill ant 


je faux 


je faillais 


je faillis 


still used\ 


failli 


TO faux 


tu faillais 


tu faillis 


irregular. 


( Academie) 


il faut 


il faillait 


il faillit 






n. faillons 


n. faillions 


n. faillimes 






v. faillez 


v. failliez 


v. faillites 






il fail lent 


ils faillaient 


ils faillirent 


aire, 4. to do, 


faisant 


je fais 


je faisais 


je fis 


" to make 


fait, /. e. 


tu fais 


tu faisais 


tu fis 


aux. avoir 




il fait 


il faisait 


nm 


irregular. 




n. faisons 


n. faisions 


n. f imes 






v. faites 


v. faisiez 


v. fites 






ils font 


ils faisaient 


ils firent 


Falloir, 3, to 


fallant 


il faut 


il fallait 


il fallut 


be 'necessary 


fallu 


unipersonal 






Feindre, 4. to 


feignant 


je feins 


je feignais 


je feignis 


feign 


feint, /. e. 


see CEINDRE 






FlCELER, 1. to 


ficelant 


je ficelle 


je ficelais 


je ficelais 


cord 


flcele. /. e. 


see appeler 


% 49, (4) 




Frire, 4. to 




je Ms 






fry 


frit,/, e. 


tu fris 






defective 




il frit 






Fuir, 2. to 


fuyant 


je fuis 


je fuyais 


je fuis 


flee 


fui 


tu fuis 


tu fuyais 


tu fuis 






il fuit 


il fuyait 


il fuit 






n. fuyons 


n. fuyions 


n. fuimea 






v. fuyez 


v. fuyiez 


v. fuites 






ils fuient 


ils fuyaient 


ils fuirent 


Geler, 1. to 


gelant 


il gele 


il gelait 


il gela 


fretze. unip. 
Gtf sir, 2. to lie 


gele,/. e. 








gisant 




je gisais 




defective 




ilgit 
n. gisons, 
v. gisez 
ils gisent 


tu gisais 
il gisait 
n. gisions 
v. gisiez 
ils gisaient 




Grasseyer, 1. 


grasseyant 


je grasseie 


je grasseyais 


je grasseyai 


to lisp 


grasseye 


see APPUYEB 


§ 49, (2) 




Gr£ler, 1. to 


grelant 


il grele 


il grelait 


il grela 


hail. unip. 


grele 








Gr^siller. 1. 


gresillant 


il gresille 


il gresillait 


il gresilla 


to sleet, unip. 


gresille 








Hair, 2. to 


Eiaissant 


je hais 


je haissais 


je hais 


hate 


hai, /. e. 


tu hais 


tu haissais 


tu hais 


aux. avoir 




il hait 


il haissait 


il hait 


irregular 




n. haissons 


n. haissions 


n. haimes 






v. haissez 


v. haissiez 


v. haites 






i. haissent 


ils haissaient 


ils hairent 


Harceler, 1. 


harcelant 


je harcele 


je harcelais 


je harcelais 


10 torment 


harcele,/. e. 


§ 49, (5) 







AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 



62 



sis 



Future. 


CONDITIONAL. 


Imperative. 


Subjunctive. 


Imperfect. 


je faillirai 


je faillirais 


faillis 


je faillisse 


je faillisse 


je faudrai 


je faudrais 




je faille 


je faillisse 


tu faudras 


tu faudrais 




etc. 


etc. 


il faudra 


il faudrait 








n faudrons 


n. faudrions 








v. faudrez 


v. faudriez 








ils faudront 


ils faudraient 








je ferai 


je ferais 




je fasse 


je fisse 


til feras 


tu ferais 


fais 


tu fasses 


tu fisses 


il fera 


il ferait 


q. fasse 


il fasse 


ilfit 


n. ferons 


n. ferions 


faisons 


n. fassions 


n. fissions 


v. ferez 


v. feriez 


faites 


v. fassiez 


v. flssiez 


ils feront 


ils ferai ent 


q. fassent 


ils fassent 


ils fissent 


il faudra 


il faudrait 


q. faille 


q. faille 


q. fallut 


je feindrai 


je feindrai 


feins 


je feigne 


je feignisse 


je ficellerai 


je ficellerais 


ficelle 


je ficelle 


je ficelasse 


je frirai 


je frirais 








tu friras 


tu frirais 


fris 






il irira. &c. 


il frirait, &c. 








je fuirai 


je fuirais 




je fUie 


je fuisse 


tu fuiras 


tu fuirais 


fuis 


tu fuies 


tu fuisses 


il fuira 


il fuirait 


q. fuie 


il fuie 


il fuit 


n. fuirons 


n. fuirions 


fuyons 


n. fujions 


n. fuissions 


v. f uirez 


v. fuiriez 


fuyez 


v. fuyiez 


v. fuissiez 


ils fuiront 


ils fuiraient 


q. fuient 


ils fuient 


ils fuissent 


il gelera 


il gelerait 


qu'il gele 


qu'il gele 


q. gelat 


Je grasseierai 


je grasseierais 


grasseie 


je grasseie 


je grasseyasst 


il grelera 


il grelerait 


q. grele 


qu'il grele 


qu'il grelat 


!1 gresillera 


il gresillerait 


q. gresille 


q. gresille 


q. gresillat 


je hairai 


je hairais 




je haisse 


je haisse 


tu hairas 


tu hairais 


hais 


tu haisses 


tu haisses 


il haira 


il hairait 


q. haisse 


il haisse 


il hait 


n. hairons 


n. hairions 


haissons 


h. haissions 


n. haissions 


y. hairez 


v. hairiez 


haissez 


v. haissiez 


v. haissiez 


ils hairont 


ils hairaient 


q. haissent 


ils haissent 


ils haissent. 


je harcelerai 


je harcelerais 


harcele 


je harcele 


je harcolasse 



374 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR 



iNPINlll K. 


Participles. 


Indicative. 


Imperfect. 


Past. DsriNm 


Importer, 1. 


important 


il importe 


il importait 


il importa 


to matter. 


importe 


it matters 






unipersonal. 










Induire, 4. to 


induisant 


j'induis 


j'induisais 


jlnduisig 


induce 


induit. /. e. 


see CONDUIRE 






Inscrire, 4. to 


inscrivant 


j'inscris 


j'inscrivais 


j'inscrivis 


inscribe 


inscrit. /. e. 


see £crire 






Instruire, 4. 


instruisant 


j'instruis 


j'instruisais 


j'instruisis 


to instruct 


instruit./. e. 


see CONDUIRE 






Interdire. 4. 


interdisant 


j'interdis 


j'interdisais 


j'interdis 


to interdict 


interdit./. e. 


S^CONTREDIRE 






Interrompre, 


interrompant 


j' inter romps 


j'interrompais 


j'interrompis 


4. to interrupt 


interrompu/.e 


see ROMPRE 






Intervenir. 2. 


intervenant 


j'interviens 


j'intervenais 


j'intervins 


to intervene 


intervenu,/. e. 


see tenir 






Introduire, 4. 


introduisant 


j'introduis 


j'introduisais 


j'introduisia 


to introduce 


introduit, f. e. 


see CONDUIRE 






Jeter. 1. to 


jetant 


je jette 


je jetais 


je jetai 


throiv 


jete,/. e. 


tu jettes 


tu jetais 


tu jetas 


aux. avoir 




il jette 


iljetait 


il j eta 


peculiar. 




n. jetons 


n. jetions 


n. jetames 


$ 49, (4.) 




v. jetez 


v. jetiez 


v. jetates 






ils jettent 


ils jetaient 


ils jeterent 


JOINDRE, 4. to 


joignant 


je joins 


jejoignais 


je joignis 


join 


joint, /. e. 


see CEINDRE 






Lire, 4. to 


lisant 


je lis 


je lisais 


je lus 


read 


lu, /. e. 


tu lis 


tu lisais 


tu lus 


aux. avoir 




il lit 


il lisait 


il lut 


irregular. 




nous lisons 


n. lisions 


n. lumes 






vous lisez 


v. lisiez 


v. lutes 






ils lisent 


ils lisaient 


ils lurent 


Luire, 4. to 


luisant 


je luis 


je luisais 




shine 


lui 


see CONDUIRE 






Maintenir, 2. 


maintenant 


je maintiens 


je maintenais 


je maintins 


to maintain 


maintenu,/, e. 


see tenir 






Malfaire, 4, 


malfaisant 


seldom 


used except 


in the 


to do wrong 


malfait./. e. 








Maudire, 4. to 


maudissant 


je maudis 


je maudissais 


je maudis 


curse 


maudit,/. e. 


tu maudis 


tu maudissais 


like dire 


aux. avoir 


il maudit 


il maudissait 




irregular. 




n. maudissons 


n. maudissions 








v. maudissez 
ils maudissent 


v. maudissiez 
i.maudissaient 




M^connaitre, 


meconnaissant 


je meconnais 


je meconnais- 


je meconnci 


4. to disown 


meconnu, /. e. 


see connaItre 


[sais 




M^dire, 4. to 


medisant 


je medis 


je medisais 


je medis 


slander 


medit 


SeeCONTREDIRE 






M^FAIRE, 4. to 


mefaisant 


je mefais 


je mefaisais 


je mefis 


do torong 


me fait 


see fa ire 






Mener, 1. to 


menant 


je mene 


je menais 


je menai 


lead, take 


mene,/. e. 








Mentir, 1, to 


mentaht 


je mens 


je mentais 


je mentis 


lie 


menti 


see SENT1R 







AND LNIPERSONAL VERBS. § 62 



S75 



Future 


CONDITIOr ».L. 


Imperative. 


Subjunctive, i 

i 


Imperfect. 


11 importera 


il importer ait 


q. importe 


q. importe 


q. importat 


j'induirai 


j'induirais 


induis 


j'induise 


j'induisisse 


j'inscripa: 


j'inscrirais 


inscris 


j'inscrive 


j'inscrivisse 


j'instrairai 


j'instniirais 


instruis 


j'instruise 


j 'instruis isse 


j'interdirai 


j'interdirais 


interdis 


j'interdise 


j'interdisse 


j'interromprai 


j'interrom- 




j'interrompe 


j'interromp- 




[prais 


interromps 




[isse 


j'interviendrai 


j'intervien- 
[drais 


interviens 


j'intervienne 


j'intervinsse 


j'introduirai 


j'introduirais 


introduis 


j'introduise 


j'introduisisse 


je jeiterai 


je jetterais 




je jette 


je jetasse 


tu jetteras 


tu jetterais 


jette 


tu jettes 


tu jetasses 


il jettera 


il jetterait 


q. jette 


il jette 


il jetat 


n. jetterons 


n. jetterions 


jetons * 


n. jetions 


n. jetassions 


v. jetterez 


v. jetteriez 


jetez 


v. jetiez 


v. jetassiez 


ils jetteront 


ils jetteraient 


q. jettent 


ils jettent 


ils jetassent 


je joindrai 


j^ joindrais 


joins 


je joigne 


je joignisse 


je lirai 


je lirais 




je lise 


je lusse 


tu liras 


tu lirais 


lis 


tu lises 


tu lusses 


il lira 


il lirait 


q. lise 


il lise 


il lut 


n. lirons 


n. lirions 


lisons 


n. lisions 


n. lussions 


v. lirez 


v. liriez 


lisez 


v. lisiez 


v. lussiez 


ils liront 


ils liraient 


q. lisent 


ils lisent 


ils lussent 


je luirai 


je luirais 




je luise 




je maintien- 


je maintien- 




je maintieime 


je maintinsse 


[drai 


[drais 


maintiens 






ienses 


given 


here 






je maudirai 


je maudirais 




je maudisse 


je maudisse 


like dire 


like dire 


maudis 

q. maudisse 

maudissons 

maudissez 

q. maudissent 


tu maudisses 
il maudisse 
n. maudissions 
v. maudissiez 
ils maudissent 


like dire 


je meconnai- 


je meconnai- 




jemeconnaisse 


je meconnus3« 


[trai 


[trais 


meconnais 






je mediiai 


je medirais 


medis 


je medise 


je medisses 


je meferai 


je msferais 


mefais 


je mefasse 


je mefisse 


je menerai 


je menerais 


mene 


je mene 


je menasse 


je mentirai 


J 3 mentirais 


mens 


je mentc 


je mentisa© 



376 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR 



Infinitive. 


Participles. 


Indicative. 


Imperfect. 


Past Dkfimth 


M£pRENDRE,4. 


se meprenant 


j.m. meprends 


j. me mepre- 


je me mepris 


(se) to mis- 


mepris, j. e. 


see PRENDRE 


[nais 




take, ref. 










Mettre, 4. to 


mettant 


je mets 


je mettais 


je mis 


put 


mis,/ e. 


tu mets 


tu mettais 


tu mis 


aux. avoir 




il met 


il mettait 


il mit 


irregular. 




n. mettons 


n. mettions 


n. mimes 






v. mettez 


v. mettiez 


v. mites 






ils mettent 


ils mettaient 


ils mirent 


Moudre, 4. to 


moulant 


je mouds 


je moulais 


je moulus 


grind 


moulu,/. e. 


tu mouds 


til moulais 


tu moulus 


aux. avoir 




il moud 


il moulait 


il moulut 


irregular. 




n. moulons 


n. mouiions 


n. moulumes 






v. moulez 


v. mouliez 


v. moulutes 






ils moulent 


ils moulaient 


ils moulurent 


Mourir, 2. to 


mouraut 


je meurs 


je mourais 


je mourus 


die 


mort,/ e. 


tu meurs 


tu mourais 


tu mourus 


aux. etre 




il meurt 


il mourait 


il mourut 


irregular. 




n. mourons 


n. mourions 


n. mourumes 






v. mourez 


v. mouriez 


v. mourtites 






ils meurent 


ils mouraient 


ils mourureni 


Mouvoir, 3. to 


mouvant 


je meus 


je mouvais 


je mus 


move 


mu./. e. 


tu meus 


tu mouvais 


tu mus 


aux. avoir 




il meut 


il mouvait 


il mut 


irregular. 




n. mouvons 


n. mouvions 


n. mumes 






v. mouvez 


v. mouviez 


v. mutes 






ils meuvent 


ils mouvaient 


ils murent 


Mouvoir, (se) 


se mouvant 


je me meus 


j. me mouvais 


je me mus 


3. to move. 


mu,/. e. 


see mouvoir 






reflective. 










NaItre, 4. to 


naissant 


je nais 


je naissais 


je naquis 


be bom 


ne, / e. 


tu nais 


tu naissais 


tu naquis 


aux. etre 




il nait 


il naissait 


il naquit 


irregular. 




n. naissons 


n. naissions 


n. naquimes 






v. naissez 


v. naissiez 


v. naquites 






ils naissent 


ils naissaient 


ils naquirent 


N^gliger, 1. 


neglige ant 


je neglige 


je negligeais 


je negligeai 


to neglect 


neglige,/ e. 


% 49, (1.) 






Neiger. 1. to 


neigeant 


il neige 


il neigeait 


il neigea 


snow. unip. 


neige 








NlVELER, 1. to 


nivelant 


je nivelle 


je nivelais 


je nivelai 


level 


nivele,/ e. 


see APPELER 


% 49, (4) 




Nuire, 4. to 


nuisant 


je nuis 


je nuisais 


je nuisis 


injure 


nui 


see CONDUIRE 






Obtenir, 2. to 


obtenant 


j'obtiens 


j'obtenais 


j'obtins 


obtain 


obtenu,/. e. 


see tenir 






Offrir, 2. to 


offrant 


j'offre 


j'oflfrais 


j'offris 


offer 


offert,/ e. 


see ouvrir 






OlNDRE, 4. to 


oignant 


j'oins 


j'oignais 


j'oignis 


anoint 


oint 


see CEINDRE 






Omettre, 4. 


omettant 


j'omets 


j'omettais 


j ? onvii 


to omit 


omis,/ e. 


see METTRE 






Ouir, 4. to 




j'ouis 


! 




hear. def. 


oui,/. e. 


il ouit 





AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 



62 



377 



FUTVRE. 


Conditional. 


Imperative. 


Subjunctive. 


IMPER7ECT. 


je me mepren- 


je me mepren- 




j.memepren- 


je me niepris- 


[drai 


[drais 


meprends-toi 


[ne 


[se 


je mettrai 


je mettrais 




je mette 


je misse 


tu mettras 


tu mettrais 


mets 


tu mettes 


tu misses 


il mettra 


il mettrait 


q. mette 


il mette 


il mit 


. mettrons 


n. mettrions 


mettons 


n. mettions 


n. missions 


. mettrez 


v. mettriez 


mettez 


v. mettiez 


v. missiez 


Is raettront 


ils mettraient 


q. mettent 


ils mettent 


ils missent 


je moudrai 


je moudrais 




je moule 


je moulusse 


tu moudras 


tu moudrais 


mouds 


tu moules 


tu moulusses 


il moudra 


il moudrait 


qu'il moule 


il moule 


il moulut 


n. moudrons 


n. moudrions 


moulons 


n. moulions 


n. moulussions 


v. moudrez 


v. moudriez 


moulez 


v. mouliez 


v. moulussiez 


ils moudront 


ils moudraient 


q. moulent 


ils moulent 


ils moulussent 


je mourrai 


je mourrais 




je meure 


je mourusse 


tu mourras 


tu mourrais 


meurs 


tu meures 


tu mourusses 


il mourra 


il mourrait 


q. meure 


il meure 


il mourut 


n. mourrons 


n. mourrions 


mourons 


n. mourions 


n. mourussions 


v. mourrez 


v. mourriez 


mourez 


v. mouriez 


v. mourussiez 


ils mourront 


ils mourraient 


q. meurent 


ils meurent 


ils mourussent 


je mouvrai 


je mouvrais 




je meuve 


je musse 


tu mouvras 


tu mouvrais 


meus 


tu meuves 


tu musses 


il mouvra 


il mouvrait 


q. meuve 


il meuve 


il mut 


n. mouvrons 


n. mouvrions 


mouvons 


n. mouvions 


n. mussions 


v. mouvrez 


v. mouvriez 


mouvez 


v. mouviez 


v. mussiez 


ils mouvront 


ils mouvraient 


q. meuvent 


ils meuvent 


ils mussent 


je me mouvrai 


je me mouv- 
[rais 


meus-toi 


je me meuve 


je me musse 


je naitrai 


je naitrais 




je naisse 


je naquisse 


tu naitras 


tu naitrais 


nais 


tu naisses 


tu naquisses 


il naitra 


il naitrait 


q. naisse 


il naisse 


il naquit 


n. naitrons 


n. naitrions 


naissons 


n. naissions 


n. naquissions- 


v. naitrez 


v. naitriez 


naissez 


v. naissiez 


v. naquissiez 


ils naitront 


ils naitraient 


q. naissent 


ils naissent 


ils naquissent 


je negligerai 


je negligerais 


neglige 


je neglige 


je negligeasse 


il neigera 


il neigerait 


q. neige 


qu'il neige 


q. neigeat 


je nivellerai 


je nivellerais 


nivelle 


je nivelle 


je nivelasse 


je nuirai 


je nuirais 


nuis 


je nuise 


je naisisse 


j'obtiendrai 


j'obtiendrais 


obtiens 


j'obtienne 


j'obtinsse 


j'offrirai 


j'offrirais 


oflfre 


j'offre 


j'offrisse 


j'oindrai 


j'oindrais 


oins 


j'oigne 


j'oignisse 


j'omettrai 


j'omettrais 


omets 


j'omette 


j'omiBse 

j'ouisso 

il ouit 



378 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR 



Infinitive. 


PA ITICIPLEd. 


Indicative. 


Imperfect. 


Past. DErufrrit 


Ouvrir, 2. to 


ouvrant 


j'ouvre 


j'ouvrais 


j'ouvris 


open 


ouvert,/. e. 


tu ouvres 


tu ouvrais 


tu ouvris 


aux. avoir 




il ouvre 


il ouvrait 


il ouvrit 


irregular 




n. ouvrons 


n. ouvrions 


n. ouvrimea 


; 


v. ouvre z 


v. ouvriez 


v. ouvrites 




ils ouvrent 


ils ouvraient 


ils ouvrirent 


PaItre, 4, w 


paissant 


je pais 


je paissais 




graze 


pu 


tu pais 


tu paissais 




aux. avoir 




il pait 


il paissait 




defective 




n. paissons 
v. paissez 
ils paissent 


n. paissions 
v. paissiez 
ils paissaient 




pARFAIRE, 4i.tO 


parfaismt 


je parfais 


je parfaisais 


je partis 


complete 


parfait. / e. 


see faire 


seldom used 




ParaItre, 4. jparaissant 


je parais 


je paraissais 


je parus 


-vo appear |paru 


see connaItre 






Parcourir, 2. 


parcourant 


je par cou rs 


je parcourais 


je parcourus 


to go through 


parcouru, /. e. 


see courir 






Partir, 2. to 


partant 


je pars 


je partais 


je partis 


depart 


parti, f. e. 


see SENTIR 






Parvenir, 2. 


parvenant 


je parviens 


je parvenais 


je parvins 


to succeed, <f*c- 


parvenu, /. e. 


see tenir 






Payer, 1. to 


payant 


je paie 


je payais 


je payai 


pay 


paye,/. e. 


see APPUYER 


§ 49, (2.) 




Peindre, 4. to 


peignant 


je peins 


je peignais 


je peignis 


paint 


peint, /*. e. 


see CEINDRE 






Peler, 1. to 


pelant 


je pele 


je pelais 


je pelai 


peel 


pele,/. e. 


§ 49, (5.) 






Permettre, 4. 


permettant 


je permets 


je permettais 


je permis 


to permit 


per mis, /. e. 


see METTRE 






Plaindre, 4. 


plaignant 


je plains 


je plaignais 


je plaignis 


to pity 


plaint,/, e. 


see CEINDRE 






Plaindre, (se) 


se plaignant 


je me plains 


je me plai- 


je me plaignia 


4. to complain 


plaint, /. e. 




[gnais 




reflective. 










Plaire, 4. to 


plaisant 


je plais 


je plaisais 


je plus 


please 


piu 


tu plais 


tu plaisais 


tu plus 


aux. avoir 




il plait 


il plaisait 


il plut 


irregular. 


. 


n. plaisons 


n. plaisions 


n. plumes 






v. plaisez 


v. plaisiez 


v. plutes 






ils plaisent 


ils plaisaient 


ils plurent 


Pleuvoir, 3. 


pleuvant 


il pleut 


il pleuvait 


il plut 


to rain. unip. 


plu 








Poindre, 4. to 




il point 






dawn, def. 










p0URSUIVRE,4. 


poursuivant 


je poursuis 


je poursuivais 


je pours uivk 


to pursue 


poursuivi, /. e. 


see suivre 






PoURVOIR, 3. 


pourvoyant 


je pourvois 


je pourvoyais 


je pourvus 


to provide 


pourvu,/ e. 


tu pourvois 


tu pourvoyais 


tu pourvus 


aux. avoir 




il pourvoit 


il pourvoyait 


il pourvut 


irregular. 




n. pourvoyons 


n. pourvoyions 


n. pourvumea 






v. pourvoyez 


v. pourvoyiez 


v. pourvutes 






ils pourvoient 


i.pourvoyaient 


ils pourvureni 



AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS. § 02 



379 



Future. 

j'ouvrirai 
tu ouvriras 
; 1 ouvrira 
n. ouvrirons 
V. ouvrirez 
ils ouvriront 
je paitrai 
tu paitras 
il paitra 
n. paitrons 
v. paitrez 
ils paitront 
je parferai 

je paraitrai 

je parcourrai 

je partirai 

je parviendrai 

je paierai 

je peindrai 

je pelerai 

je permettrai 

je plaindrai 

je me plain- 
[drai 

je plairai 
tu plairas 
ii plaira 
n. plairons 
v. plairez 
ils plairont 
il pleuvra 

il poindra 

je poursuivrai 

je pourvoirai 
tu pourvoiras 
il pourvoira 
n. pourvoirons 
v. pourvoirez ! 
ils pourvoiroutj 



Conditional. 



Imperative. 



j'ouvrirais 
tu ouvrirais 
il ouvrirait 
n. ouvririons 
v ouvririez 
ils ouvriraient 
je paitrais 
tu paitrais 
il pai trait 
n. paitrions 
v. paitriez 
ils paitraient 
je parferais 

je paraitrais 

je parcourrais 

je partirais 

je parviendrais 

je paierais 

je peindrai 

je pelerai 

je permettrais 

je plaindrais 

je me plain- 
[drais 

je ? plairais 
tu plairais 
il plairait 
n. plairions 
v. plairiez 
ils plairaient 
il pleuvrait 

il poindrait 

jepoursuivrais 



ouvre 
q. ouvre 
ouvrous 
ouvrez 
q. ouvrent 

pais 

q. paisse 



paissez 
q. paissent 

parfais 

parais 

parcours 

pars 

parviens 

paie 

peins 

pele 

permets 

plains 

plains-toi 



plais 
q. plaise 
plaisons 
plaisez 
q. plaisent 
q. pleuve 



poursuis 



Subjunctive. 



j ouvre 
tu ouvres 
il ouvre 
n. ouvrions 
v. ouvriez 
ils ouvrent 
je paisse 
tu paisses 
il paisse 
n. paissions 
v. paissiez 
ils paissent 
je parfasse 
obsolete 
je paraisse 

je parcoure 

je parte 

je parvienne 

je paie 

je peigne 

je pele 

je permette 

je plaigne 

je me plaigne 

je plaise 
tu plaises 
41 plaise 
n. plaisions 
v. plaisiez 
ils plaisent 
q. pleuve 



Imperfect. 



yov rrisse 
tu ouvrisses 
il ouvrit 
n. ouvrissions 
v. ouvrissiez 
ils ouvrissent 



je parusse 

je parcouruNse 

je partisse 

je parvinsse 

je payasse 

je peignisse 

je pelasse 

je permisse 

je plaignissft 

je me plai- 
[gnisse 

je plusse 
tu plusses 
il plut 
n. plussions 
v, plussiez 
ils plussent 
q. plut 



je pourvoirais 
tu pourvoirais pourvois 
il pourvoirait q. pourvoie 
n.pourvoirions | pourvoyons 
v. pourvoiriez ipourvoyez 
i.pourvoiraient| q. pourvoient 



je poursuive 

je pourvoie 
tu pourvoio 
il pourvoie 
n. pourvoyions 
v. pourvoyiez 
ils pourvoient 



je poursuivis 
[se 
je pourvusse 
tu pourvussea 
il pourvut 
n.pourvussion{< 
v. pourvussiez 
ils pourvussent 



380 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAB 



Jj»nNITIVK. 


Participles. 


Indicative. 


Imperfect. 


Past Defihub. 


PouRVOiR,(se) 


se pourvoyant 


je me pour- 


je me pour- 


je n e pourvui 


3. to provide. 


pourvu, /. e. 


[vois 


[voyais 




PoUVOIR. 3. to 


pouvantf 


je puis 


je pouvais 


jepus 


be able 


pu 


tu peux 


tu pouvais 


tu pus 


aux. avoir 




il peut 


il pouvait 


il put 


irregular. 




n. pouvons 


n. pouvions 


n. pumes 






v. pouvez 


v. pouviez 


v. putes 






ils peuvent 


ils pouvaient 


ils purent 


Pr*dire, 4. to 


predisant 


je predis 


je predisais 


je predis 


predict 


predit, /. e. 


SeeCONTREDIRE 






Prendre, 4. to 


prenant 


je prends 


je prenais 


je pris 


take 


pris, /. e. 


tu prends 


tu prenais 


tu pris 


aux. avoir 




il prend 


il prenait 


il prit 


irregular. 




n. prenons 


n. prenions 


n. primes 






v. prenez 


v. preniez 


v. prites 






ils prennent 


ils prenaient 


ils prirent 


Prescrire, 4. 


prescrivant 


je prescris 


je prescrivais 


je presenvis 


to prescribe 


present,/, e. 


see 6c R i re 






Pressentir,2. 


^ressentant 


je pressens 


je pressentais 


je pressentis 


to foresee 
Pr^valoir, 3. 


pr^ssenti, /. e. 


see SENT1R 






prevalant 


je prevaux 


je prevalais 


je prevalus 


to prevail 


prevalu 


see valoir 






Pr^venir, 2. 


prevenant 


je previens 


je prevenais 


je previns 


to prevent 


prevenu, /. e. 


see tenir 






Pr^voir, 3. to 


prevoyant 


je prevois 


je prevoyais 


je previs 


foresee 


prevu, /. e. 


like voir 


like voir 


like voir 


Produire, 4. 


produisant 


je produis 


je produisais 


je produisis 


to produce 


produit./. e. 


see conduire 






Projeter, 1. 


projetant 


je projette 


je projetais 


je projetai 


to project 


projete,/. e. 


see jeter 


^ 49, (4.) 




Promettre, 4. 


promettant 


je promets 


je promettais 


je prom is 


to promise 


promis,/. e. 


see METTRE 






PrOMOUVOIR, 


promouvant 


je promeus 


je promouvais 


je promus 


3. to promote 


promu./. e. 


see mouvoir 






PROSCRIRE, 4. 


proscrivant 


je proscris 


je proscrivais 


je proscrivis 


to proscribe 


proscrit,/. e. 


see ^crire 






Provenir,,2. 


provenant 


je proviens 


je provenais 


je provins 


to proceed 


provenu, /. e. 








Qu^rir. to fetch 


only used 


in the infinitive 


except in the 


composition of 


Rabattre, 4. 


rabattant 


je rabats 


je rabattais 


je rabattis 


to abate 


rabattu,/. e. 


see battre 






Racheter, 1. 


rachetant 


je rachete 


je rachetais 


je rachetai 


to buy again 


rachete,/. e. 


see ACHETER 


% 49, (5.) 




Rappeler, 1. 


rappelant 


je rappelle 


je rappelais 


je rappelai 


to recall 


rappele, /. e. 


see APPELER 


<> 49, (4.) 




Rapprendre,4 


rapprenant 


je rapprends 


je rapprenais 


je rappris 


to learn again 


rappris, /. e. 








Rvtteindre,4. 


ratteignant 


je ratteins 


je ratteignais 


je ratteignis 


to reach again 


ratteint,/. e. 








Rebattre, 4. 


rebattant 


je rebats 


je rebattais , 


je rebattis 


to beat again 


rebattu, /. e. 
reconduisant 


see BATTRE 






Reconduire, 


je reconduis 


je recondui- 


je t econdnisli 


4. to conduct 


recon(?uit,/. e. 


See C( iNDUIRE 


[sais 




again 











AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS. §62 



381 



Future. 


G)NDITIONA.L. 


Imperative. 


Subjunctive. 


Imperfect. 


je me pour- 


js me pour- 




je me pour- 


je me pour- 


[voirai 


[voirais 


pourrois-toi 


[voie 


[vusse 


je pourrai 


je pourrais 




je puisse 


je pusse 


tu pourras 


tu pourrais 




tu puisses 


tu pusses 


il pourra 


il p\ urrait 




il puisse 


ilput 


n. pourrons 


n. pourrions 




n. puissions 


n. pussions 


v. pourrez 


v. pourriez 




v. puissiez 


v. pussiez 


ils pourront 


ils pourraieut 




ils puissent 


ils pussent 


je predirai 


je predirais 


predis 


je predise 


je predis«$e 


je pi-endrai 


je prendrais 




je prenne 


je prisses 


tu prendras 


tu prendrais 


prends 


tu prennes 


tu prisses 


il prendra 


il prendrait 


q. premie 


il prenne 


il prit * 


n. prendrons 


n. prendrions 


prenons 


n. prenions 


n. prissions 


v. prendrez 


v. prendriez 


prenez 


v. preniez 


v. prissiez 


ils prendront 


ils prendraient 


q. prennent 


ils prennent 


ils prissent 


je prescrirai 


je prescrirais 


prescris 


je prescrive 


je prescrivisso 


je pressentirai 


je pressenti- 
[rais 
je prevaudrais 




je pressente 


je pressentisse 


je prevaudrai 




je prevale 


je prevalusse 






prevaux 






je previendrai 


je previen- 

[drais 


previens 


je previenne 


je previnsse 


je prevoirai 


je prevoirais 




je prevoie 


je previsse 


like pour voir 


like pourvoir 


prevois 


like voir 


like voir 


je produirai 


je produirais 


produis 


je produise 


je produisisse 


je projetterai 


je projetterai 


projette 


je projette 


je projetasse 


je promettrai 


je promettrais 


promets 


je promette 


je promisse 


je promouvrai 


je promou- 
[vrais 


promeus 


je promeuve 


je promusse 


je proscrirai 


je proscrirais 


proscris 


je proscrive 


je proscrivisse 


je proviendrai 


je provien- 
[drais 


proviens 


je provienne 


je provinsse 


other verbs 










je rabattrai 


je rabattrais 


rabats 


je rabatte 


je rabattisse 


je rach&terai 


je racbeterais 


racbete 


je racbete 


je rachetasse 


je rappellerai 


je rappellerais 


rappelle 


je rappelle 


je rappelasse 


je rapprendrai 


je rappren- 
[drais 


rapprends 


je rapprenno 


je rapprisse 


je ratteindrai 


je ratteindrais 
I 


ratteins 


je ratteigne 


je ratteignisse 


je rebattrai 


I je rebattrais 


rebats 


je rebatte 


je rebattiss^e ; 


Je reconduira! 


je recondui- 




je reconduise 


je recondui- 




: [rais 


reconduis 




jsisse 



382 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR 



Infinitive. 



ReconnaItre, 
4. to recognizz 

RECONdU^RIR, 

2. to conquer 

again 
Reconstruire 

4. to recon- 
struct 
Recoudre, 4. 

to sew again 
Recourir. 2. 

to have re- 
course 
Recouvrir, 2. 

to cover again 
Recueillir, 2. 

to reap 
Redire, 4. to 

say again 
R^duire, 4. to 

reduce 
Refaire, 4. to 

make again 
Rejoindre, 4. 

to rejoin 
Relire, 4. to 

read again 
Reluire, 4. to 

shine 
Remettre, 4. 

to remit 
Remoudre. 4. 
to grind again 
RenaItre, 4. 

to revive 
Rendormtr, 2. 

to lull to sleep 
Rentraire, 4. 

to darn 
Renvoyer, 1. 

to send back 

REPAiTRE, 4. 

to feed 
Repartjr, 2. 
to set off again 

EPEINDRE, 4. 

to paint again 
Repentir, (se) 
2. to repent, ref. 
Reprendre, 4. 

to take again 
Reproduire,4. 

U reproduce 



Participles. 



reconnaissant 
reconnu. /. e. 
reconquerant 
reconquis/. e. 



Indicative. 



je reconnais 
see connaItre 
je reconquiers 
see acqu^rir 



Imperfect. 



Past. DsriNiTm 



reconstruisant je reconstruis 
reconstruit,/.e see conduire 



recousant 
recousu, /. e. 
recourant 
recouru 

recouvrant 
recouvert,/. e. 
recueillant 
recueilli, /. e. 
redisant 
redit f. e. 
reduisant 
reduit, f. e. 
refaisant 
refait, /. e. 
rejoignant 
rejoint, /. e. 
relisant 
relu, /. e. 
reluisant 
relui 

remettant 
remis, /. e. 
remoulant 
remoulu,/. e. 
renaissant 
rene./. e. 
rendormant 
rendormi,/. e. 
rentrayant 
rentrait, /. e. 
renvoyant 
renvoye, /. e. 
repaissant 
repu 

repartant 
reparti, /. e. 
repeignant 
repeint,/. e. 
se repentant 
repenti, /. e. 
reprenant 
repris,/. e. 
reproduisant 
reproduit, /. e. 



je recouds 

je recours 
see courir 

je recouvre 
see ouvrir 
je recueille 
see cueillir 
je redis 
see dire 
je reduis 

see CONDUIRE 

je refais 
see faire 
je rejoins 
see ceindre 
je relis 
see lire 
je reluis 
see luire 
je remets 
see mettre 
je remouds 

see MOUDRE 

je renais 
see naItre 
je rendors 

see DORMIR 

je rentrais 

see TRAIRE 

je renvoie 

see ENVOYER 

je repais 
see paItre 
je repars 

see SENTIR 

je repeins 

see CEINDRE 

je me repens 

see SENTIR 

je repr ends' 
see prendre 
je reproduis 
see CONDUIRE 



je reconnais- 
[sais 

je reconque- 
[rais 

je reconstrui- 
[sais 

je recousais 

je recourais 

je recouvrais 

je recueiilais 

je redisais 

je reduisais 

je refaisais 

je rejoignais 

je relisais 

je reluisais 

je remettais 

je remoulais 

je renaissais 

je rendormais 

je rentrayais 

je renvoyais 

§ 49, (2.) 

je repaissais 

je repartais 

je repeignais 

je me repen- 
[tais 
je reprenais 

je reprodui- 
[sah 



je reconnus 
je reconquis 

je leconstrai* 

je recousis 
je recourus 

je recouvrifl 
je recueillis 
je redis 
je reduisis 
je refis 
je rejoignis 
je relus 
je reluisis 
je remis 
je remoulus 
je renaquis 
je rendormis 

je renvoyais 

je repns 

&c. 
je repartis 

je repeignis 

je me repentii 

je repris 

jenprodiisis 



A$ D CTNIPERSONAL VERES. §62 



383 



FUTURIC. I 


Conditional. 


Imperative. | 


Slujunctivk 


Imperfect. 


je reconuai- 


je reconnai- 




je reconnaisse 


je reconnussa 


[trai 


[trais 


reconnais 






je reconquer- 


je reconquer- 




je reconquiere 


je reconquisse 


[rai 


[rais 


reconquiers 






je reeonstrui- 


je reconstrui- 




je reconstru- 


je reconstrui- 


[rai 


[rais 


reconstruis 


[ise 


[sisse 


je recoudrai 


je recoudrais 


recouds 


je recouse 


je recousisse 


je reeourrai 


je recourrais 


recours 


je recoure 


je recourusse 


je recouvrirai 


je recouvrirais 


recouvre 


je recouvre 


je recouvrisse 


je recueillerai 


je recueille- 
[rais 
je redirais 


recueille 


je recueille 


je recueillisse 


je redirai 




je redise 


je redisse 






redis 






je reduirai 


je reduirais 


reduis 


je reduise 


je reduisisse 


je referai 


je referais 


refais 


je refasse 


je refisse 


je rejoindrai 


je rejoindrais 


rejoins 


je rejoigne 


je rejoignisse 


je relirai 


je relirais 


je relise 


je relusse 






relis 






je reluirai 


je reluirais 


reluis 


je reluise 


je reluisisse 


je remettrai 


je remettrais 


remets 


je remette 


je remisse 


je remoudrai 


. je remoudrais 


remouds 


je remoule 


je remoulusse 


je renaitrai 


je renaitrais 


renais 


je renaisse 


je renaquisse 


jerendormirai 


je rendormi- 
[rais 


rendors 


je rendorme 


je rendormisse 


je rentrairai 


je reiitrairais 


rentrais 


je rentraie 




je renverrai 


je renverrais 


renvoie 


je renvoie 


je r envoy ass 


je repaitrai 


je repaitrais 


repais 


je repaisse 


je repusse 
&c. 


je repartirai 


je repartirais 


repars 


je reparte 


je repartisse 


je repeindrai 


je repeindrais 


repeins 


je repeigne 


je lepeignisse 


je me repenti 


je me repenti- 




je me repente 


je me repen- 


[rai 


[rais 


repens-toi 




[ tisse 


je reprendrai 


je reprendrais 


reprends 


je reprenne 


je reprisse 


je reproduirai 


je reprodui- 




j* reprof u^se 


jf reproduia- 




jais 


reproduia 




[isse 



384 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR 



Infinitivk. 


PARTICIPLES. 


Indicative. 


Imperfect. 


Past Dbfinitk 


Requ^rir ; 2. 


requerant 


je requiers 


je requerais 


je requis 


to require 


requis./ e. 


see ACQU^RIR 






R^SOUDRE, 4. 


resolvant 


je resous 


je resolvais 


je resolus 


to resolve 


resolu ; resous 


see ABSOUDRE 






Ressentir, 2. 


ressentant 


je ressens 


je ressentais 


je ressentis 


to resent 


ressenti, /. e. 


see SENT1R 






Ressortir, 2. 


ressortant 


je ressors 


je ressortais 


je ressortis 


o go oat again 


ressorti, /. e. 


see sortir 






Ressouvenir, 


se ressouve- 


je me ressou- 


je me ressou- 


je me ressou- 


(se) to remem- 


[nant 


[viens 


fvenais 


[vins 


ber, ref. 


souvenu, /. e. 


see tenir 






Restreindre, 


restreignant 


je restreins 


je restrei- 


je restreigrk 


4. to restrain 


restraint,/, e. 


see CEINDRE 


fgnais 




Retenir, 2. to 


retenaut 


je retiens 


je retenais 


je retins 


retain 


retenu. /. e. 


see tenir 






Retraire, 4. 


retrayant 


je retrais 


je retrayais 




to redeem 


re trait./, e. 


see TRAIRE 






Revenir, 2. to 


revenant 


je reviens 


je revenais 


je revins 


return 


revenu,/. e. 


see YENiR 






Rev£tir, 2. to 


revetant 


je revets 


je revetais 


je rev6tis 


clothe 


revetu,/. e. 


see v£tir 






Reviyre, 4. to 


revivant 


je revis 


je revivals 


je revecus 


live again 


revecu 








Revoir, 3. to 


revoyaut 


je revois 


je revoyais 


je revis 


see again 


revu, /. e. 


see voir 






Rire, 4. to 


riant 


je ris 


je riais 


je ris 


tough 


ri 


tu ris 


tu riais 


tu ris 


aux. avoir 




ilrit 


il riait 


ilrit 


irregular. 




n. rions 


n. riions 


n. rimes 






v. riez 


v. riiez 


n. rites 






ils rient 


ils riaient 


ils rirent 


Rompre, 4. to 


rompant 


je romps 


je rompais 


je rompis 


break 


rompu,/. e. 


tu romps 


tu rompais 


tu rompis 


aux. avoir 




il rompt 


il rompait 


il rompit 


irregular. 




n. rompons 


n. rompions 


n. rompimei 






v. rompez 


v. rompiez 


v. rompites 






ils rompent 


ils rom parent 


ils rompirent 


Rouvrir, 2. to 


rouvrant 


je rouvre 


je rouvrais 


je rouvris 


re- open 


rouvert,/ e. 


see ouvrir 






Saillir, 2, to 


saillant 


il saille 


il saillait 




project 


sailli 








Satisfaire, 4. 


satisfaisant 


je satisfais 


je satisfaisais 


je satisfis 


to satisfy 


satisfait f. e. 


see fa ire 






Savoijv. 3. to 


sachant 


je sais 


je savais 


je sus 


know 


su,/. e. 


tu sais 


tu savais 


tu sus 


aux. avoir 




il sait 


il savait 


il sut 


irregular. 




n. savons 


n. savions 


n. sumes 






v. savez 


v. saviez 


v. sutes 






ils savent 


ils savaient 


ils surent 


Secourir, 2. to 


secourant 


je seeours 


je secourais 


je secourus 


succor 


secouru, /. e. 


see courir 






ftlDUIRE, 4. to 


seduisant 


je seduis 


je seduisais 


je seduiais 


seduce 


seduit, /. e. 









AISTD UNIPERSONAL VERB! 



§ 62 



385 



FUTURK. 


Conditional. 


Imperative. 


Subjunctive. 


Imperfect. 


je requerrai 


je requerrais 


requiers 


je requiere 


je requisse 


je resoudrai 


je resoudrais 


resous 


je resolve 


je resolusse 

&c. 


je ressentirai 


je ressentirais 


ressens 


je ressente 


je ressentisse 


je ressortirai 


je ressortirais 


ressors 


je ressorte 


je ressortisse 


je me ressou- 


je me ressou- 




je me ressou- 


je me ressou- 


[viendrai 


[viendrais 


ressouviens-toi 


[vienne 


[vinsse 


je restreindrai 


je restrein- 




je restreigne 


je restrei- 




[drais 


restreins 




[gnisse 


je retiendrai 


je retiendrais 


retiens 


je retienne 


je retinsse 


je retrairai 


je retrairais 


retrais 


je retraie 




je reviendrai 


je reviendrais 


reviens 


je revienne 


je revinsse 


je revetirai 


je revetirais 


revets 


je revete 


je revetisse 


je revivrai 


je revivrais 


re vis 


je revive 


je revecusse 


je reverrai 


je reverrais 


revois 


je revoie 


je revisse 


je rirai 


je rirais 




je rie 


je risse 


tu riras 


tu rirais 


ris 


tu ries 


tu risses 


il rira 


il rirait 


q. rie 


il rie 


iirit 


n. rirons 


n. ririons 


rions 


n. riions 


n. rissions 


v. rirez 


y ririez 


riez 


v. riiez 


v. rissiez 


lis riroht 


ils riraient 


q. rient 


ils rient 


ils rissent 


je romprai 


je romprais 




je rompe 


je rompisse 


tu rompras 


tu romprais 


romps 


tu rompes 


tu rompisses 


il rompra 


il romprait 


q. rompe 


il rompe 


ilrompit 


n. romprons 


n. romprions 


rompons 


n. rompions 


n. rompissions 


v. roinprez 


v. rompriez 


rompez 


v. rompiez 


v. romp^'ssiez 


lis rompront 


ils rompraient 


q. rompent 


ils rompent 


ils rompissent 


je rouvrirai 


je rouvrirais 


rouvre 


je rouvre 


je rouvrisse 


il saillera 


il saillerait 




q. saille 


q. saillit 


je satisferai 


je satisferais 


satisfais 


je satisfasse 


je satisfisse 


je saurai 


je saurais 




. je sache 


je susse 


tu sauras 


tu saurais 


sache 


tu saches 


tu susses 


il saura 


il saurait 


q. sache 


11 sache 


il sut 


n, sar.rons 


n. saurions 


sachons 


n. sachions 


n. sussions 


v. saurez 


v. sauriez 


sachez 


v. sachiez 


v. sussiez 


Us sauront 


ils sauraient 


q. sachent 


ils saehent 


ils sussent 


je secourrai 


je secourrais 


secours 


je secoure 


je secourusae 


je seduirai 


je seduirais 


s^duis 


je seduise 


je s^duifiiss© 



n 



886 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR 



Infinitive. 


Participles. 


Indicative. 


Imperfect. 


Past. DErmm 


&EMER, 1. to 


semant 


je seme 


je semais 


je semai 


a *w. pec. 


seme,/, e. 








Sentir, 2. to 


sentant 


je sens 


je sentais 


je sentis 


f?d 


senti ; f. e. 


tu sens 


tu sentais 


tu sentis 


aux. avoir 




il sent 


il sentait 


il sentit 


irregular. 




n. sentons 


n. sentions 


n. sentimes 






v. sentez 


v. sentiez 


v. sentites 






ils sentent 


ils sentaient 


ils sentirent 


Seoir, 3. to Jit, 


seyant 


il sied 


il seyait 




become 


sis 








Servir, 2. to 


servant 


je sers 


je servais 


je servis 


serve 


servi, f. e. 


tu sers 


tu servais 


tu servis 


irregular. 




il sert 


il servait 


il servit 






n. servons 


n. servions 


n. servimes 






v. servez 


v. serviez 


v. servi tes 






ils servent 


ils servaient 


ils servirent 


Sortir, 2. to 


sortant 


je sors 


je sortais 


je sortis 


fro OUt 


sort!./ e. 


see sentir 






SoUFFRIR,2. to 


s ou ff rant 


je souiTre 


je souffrais 


je souffris 


suffer 


souffert. f. e. 


see ouvrir 






Soumettre, 4. 


soumettant 


je soumets 


je soumettais 


je soumis 


to submit 


soumis. /. e. 


see METTRE 






Sourire, 4. to 


souriant 


je souris 


je souriais 


je souris 


smile 


souri 


see rire 






Souscrire, 4. 


soascrivant 


je souscris 


je souscrivais 


je souscri* 


to subscribe 


souscrit 


see £crire 






SOUSTRAIRE, 4. 


soustrayant 


je soustrai3 


je soustrayais 




to subtract 


soustrait, /. e. 


see TRAIRE 






SOUTENIR, 2. 


soutenant 


je soutiens 


je soutenais 


je soutins 


to sustain 


soutenu, /. e. 


see tenir 






Souvenir, (se) 


se souvenant 


je me souviens 


je me souve- 


je me sonrVsj 


2 to remember 


souvenu, /. e. 


see tenir 


[nais 




Subvenir, 2. 


subvenant 


je subviens 


je subvenais 


je subvins 


to relieve 


subvenu ; /. e. 


see tenir 






SuFFIRE, 4. to 


suffisant 


je suffis 


je suffisais 


je suffis 


suffice 


suffi 


tu suffis 


tu suffisais 


tu suffis 


aux avoir 




il stifiit 


il suffi sait 


il suffit 


irregular. 




n. suffisons 


n. suffisions 


n. suff ime& 






v. suffisez 


v. suffisiez 


v. sulfites 






ils suffi sent 


ils suffisaient 


ils suffi rent 


Ecjivre, 4. to 


suivant 


je suis 


je suivais 


je suivis 


follow 


suivi.y. e. 


tu suis 


tu suivais 


tu suivis 


aux. avoir 




il suit 


il suivait 


il suivit 


irregular. 




n. suivons 


n. suivions 


n. suivimes 






v. suivez 


v. suiviez 


v. suivites 






ils sui vent 


ils suivaient 


ils suivireni 


St'RFAfRE, 4. tO 


surfaisant 


je surfais 


je surfaisais 


je surtis 


exosi, 


surfait. f. e. 


see faire 






Slrfrendre, 


surprenant 


je surprends 


je surprenaif 


jo surpris 


4. bo surprise 


surpris, / e. 


see PRENDRF I 







A N U UNIPERSONAL VERBS. §62 



387 



FUTURE. 


C-ONDITIONAL. IMPERATIVE. 


Subjunctive. 


Imperfect. 


je semerai 


je semerais 


seme 


je seme 


je semass© 


je sentirai 


je sentirais 




je sente 


je sentisse 


tu sentiras 


tu sentirais 


sens 


tu sentes 


tu sentisses 


11 sentira 


il sentirait 


q. sente 


il sente 


il sentit 


n. sentirons 


n. sentirions 


sentons 


n. sentions 


n. sentissions 


v. sentirez 


v. sentiriez 


sentez 


v. sentiez 


v. sentissiez 


ils sentiront 


ils sentiraient 


q. sentent 


ils sentent 


ils sentissent 


il siera 


il sierait 




q. siee 




je servirai 


je servirais 




je serve 


je servisse 


tu serviras 


tu servirais 


sers 


tu serves 


tu servisses 


il servira 


il servirait 


q. serve 


il serve 


il servit 


n. servirons 


n. servirions 


servons 


n. servions 


n. servissions 


v. servirez 


v. serviriez 


servez 


v. serviez 


v. servissiez 


ils serviront 


ils serviraient 


q. servent 


ils servent 


ils servissent 


je sortirai 


je sortirais 


sors 
souffre 


je sorte 


je sortisse 


je souffrirai 


je souffrirais 


je souffre 


je souffrisse 


je soumettrai 


je soumettrais 


je soumette 


je soumisse 






soumets 






je sourirai 


je sourirai s 


souris 


je sourie 


je sourisse 


je souscrirai 


je souscrirais 


souscris 


je souscrive 


je souscrivisse 


je soustrairai 


je soustrairais 


soustrais 


je soustraie 




je> soutiendrai 


je soutiendrais 


soutiens 


je soutienne 


je soutinsse 


Je me souvien- 


je me souvien- 




je me souvien- 


je me sou- 


[drai 


[drais 


souviens-toi 


[ne 
je subvienne 


[vinsse 
je subvinsse 


je subviendrai 


je subvien- 






[drais 


subviens 






je suffirai 


je suffirais 




je suffise 


je suffisse 
tu suffisses 


tu suffiras 


tu suffirais 


sum's 


tu suffises 


il suffira 


il suffirait 


q. suffise 


il suffise 


il suffit 


n. suffirons 


n. suffirions 


suffisons 


n. suffisions 


n. suffissions 


v. suffirez 


v. suffiriez 


suffisez 


v. suffisiez 


v. suffissiez 


ils suffiront 


ils suffiraient 


q. suffisent 


ils suffisent 


ils suffissent 


je suivrai 


je suivTais 




je suive 


je suivisse 


tu suivras 


tu suivrais 


suis 


tu suives 


tu suivisses 


il suivra 


il suivrait 


q. suive 


il suive 


il suivit 


n. suivrons 


n. suivrions 


suivons 


n. suivions 


n. suivissions 


v. suivrez 


v. suivriez 


suivez 


v. suiviez 


v. suivissiez 


lis suivront 


ils suivraient 


q. suivent 


ils suivent 


ils suivissent 


j« surferai 


je surferais 


surfais 


je surfasse 


je surfisse 


je surprendrai 


je surpren- 
[drais 


surprends 


je surprenne 


je surprisse 



888 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE. PECULIAR 



Infinith k. 


Participles. 


Indicative. 


Imperfect. 


Past Definitk 


SuasEOiR, 3. 


s ursoyant 


je sursois 


je sursoyais 


je sursis 


to supersede 


sursis,/. e. 


tu sursois 


tu sursoyais 


tu sursis 


aux. avoir 




if sursoit 


il sursoyait 


il sursit 


irregular. 




n. sursoyons 


n. sursoyions 


n. sursimes 






v. sursoyez 


v. sursoyiez 


v. sursites 






ils sursoient 


ils sursoyaient 


ils sursirent 


SlJRVENIR, 2. 


survenant 


je surviens 


je survenais 


je survins 


to tiappen, etc. 


survenu,/. e. 


see tenir 






SURVIVRE, 4. 


survivant 


je survis 


je survivals 


je survecus 


to survive 


survecu 


see vivre 






Taire, (se) 4. 


se taisant 


je me tais 


je me taisais 


je me tus 


to be silent 


tu, /. e. 


see pl aire 






Teindre, 4. to 


teignant 


je teins 


je teignais 


je teignis 


dye 


teint, /. e. 


see ceindre 






{Tenir, 2. to 


tenant 


je tiens 


je tenais 


je tins 


hold 


tenu, /. e. 


tu tiens 


tu tenais 


tu tins 


aux. avoir 




il tient 


il tenait 


il tint 


irregular. 




n. tenons 


n. tenions 


n. tinmea 






v. tenez 


v. teniez 


v. tintes 






ils tiennent 


ils tenaient 


ils tinrent 


Tonner. 1. to 


tonnant 


il tonne 


il tonnait 


il tonna 


thunder, unip. 


tonne 








Traduire, 4. 


traduisant 4 


je traduis 


je traduisais 


je traduisis 


to translate 


traduit,/. e. 


see conduire 






Traire, 4. to 


trayant 


je trais 


je trayais 




milk 


trait 


tu trais 


tu trayais 




aux. avoir 




il trait 


il trayait 




defective 




n. trayons 
v. trayez 
ils traient 


n. trayions 
v. trayiez 
ils trayaient 




Transcrire,4. 


transcrivant 


je transcris 


je transcrivais 


je transcrivis 


to transcribe 


transcrit 


see £crire 






Transmettre 


transmettant 


je transmets 


je transmettais 


je transmis 


4. to transmit 


transmis, /. e. 


see METTRE 






Tressaillir, 


tressaillant 


je tressaille 


je tressnillais 


je tressaillis 


2. to start 


tressailli 


see ASSAILLIR 






Vaincre, 4. to 


vainquant 


je vaincs 


je vainquais 


je vainquis 


vanquish 


vaincu,/. e. 


tu vaincs 


tu vainquais 


tu vainquis 


aux. avoir 




il vainc 


il vainquait 


il vainquit 


irregular. 




n. vainquons 


n. vainquions 


n. vainquimes 






v. vainquez 


v. vainquiez 


v. vainquites 






ils vainquent 


ils vainquaient 


ils vainquiren 


Valoir, 3. to 


valant 


je vaux 


je valais 


je valus 


be worth 


valu 


tu vaux 


tu valais 


tu valus 


aux. avoir 




il vaut 


il valait 


il valut 


irregular. 




n. valons 


n. valions 


n. valumes 






v. valez 


v. valiez 


v. valutes • 






ils valent 


ils valaien* 


ils valurent 


Venie, 2. h 


venant 


je viens 


je venais 


je vins 


came 


ven-i,/. e. 


see tenir 







AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 



62 



38 



Future. 



Conditional. 



je surseoirai 
tu surseoiras 
il surseoira 
n. surseoirons 
v. surseoirez 
ils surseoiront 
je surviendrai 

je survmai 

je me tairai 

je teindrai 

je tiendrai 
tu tiendras 
il tiendra 
n. tiendrons 
v, tiendrez 
ils tiendront 
il tonncra 

je traduirai 

je trairai 
tu trairas 
il traira 
n. trairons 
v. trairez 
ils trairont 
je transcrirai 

je transmet- 
[trai 
je tressaillirai 

je vaincrai 
tu vamcras 
il vaincra 
n. vainer ons 
v. vaincrez 
ils vaincront 
je vaudrai 
tu vaudras 
il vaudra 
n. vaudrons 
v. vaudrez 
lis vaudront 
je viendrai 



Imperative. 



je surseoirais 
tu surseoirais 
il surseoirait 
n. surseoirions 
v. surseoiriez 
i.surseoiraient 
je surviendrais 

je survivrais 

je me tairais 

je teindrais 

je tiendrais 
tu tiendra is 
il tiendrait 
n. tiendrions 

tiendriez 
ils tiendraient 
il tonnerait 

je traduirais 

je trairais 
tu trairais 
il trairai t 
n. trairions 
v. trairiez 
ils trairaient 
je transcrirais 

je transmet- 
ftrais 
je tressaillirais 

je vaincrais 
tu vaincrais 
il vain era it 
n. vaincrions 
v. vaincriez 
ils vaincraient 
je vaudrais 
tu vaudrais 
il vaudrait 
n. vaudrions 
v. vaudriez 
ils vaudraient 
je viendrais 



sursois 
q. sursoie 
sursoyons 
sursoyez 
q. sursoient 

surviens 

survis 

tais-toi 

teins 

tiens 

q. tienne 

tenons 

tenez 

q. tiennent 

q. tonne 



traduis 

trais 
q. traie 
trayons 
trayez 
q. traient 

transcris 

transmets 

tressaille 

vaincs 

q. vainque 

vainquons 

vainquez 

q. vainquent 

vaux 

q. vaille 

valons 

valez 

q. vaillent 

viens 



Subjunctive. 



je sursoie 
tu sursoies 
il sursoie 
n. sursoyions 
v. sursoyiez 
ils sursoient 
je survienne 

je survive 

je me taise 

je teigne 

je tienne 
tu tiennes 
il tienne 
n. tenions 
v. teniez 
ils tiennent 
q. tonne 

je traduise 

je traie 
tu traies 
il traie 
n. trayions 
v. trayiez 
ils traient 
je transcrive 

je transmette 

je tressaille 

je vainque 
tu vainques 
il vainque 
n. vainquions 
v. vainquiez 
ils vainquent 
je vaille 
tu vailles 
il vaille 
n. valions 
v. valiez 
ils vaillent 
je vienne 



Imperfect. 



je sursisse 
tu sursisses 
il sursit 
n. sursissions 
v. sursissiez 
ils sursissent 
je survinsse 

je survecusse 

je me tusse 

je teignisse 

je tinsse 
tu tinsses 
il tint 
n. i; ^«sions 
v. tinssiez 
ils tinssent 
q. tonnat 

je tradtrisiss* 



je transcri- 
[visse 

je transmisse 

je tressaillisso 

je vainquisse 
tu vainqnisses 
il vainquit 
vainquissions 
v. vainquissiez 
i. vainquissent 
je valusse 
tu valusses 
il valut 
n. valussions 
v. valussiez 
ils valussent 
je vinsse 



390 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR 



iNFiitm ve. 


Participles. 


Indicative. 


Imperfect. 


Past. Definite 


VfrriR, 2. to 


vetant 


je vets 


je vetais 


je vetis 


clothe 


vetu,/. e. 


tu vets 


tu vetais 


tu vetis 


aux. avoir 




il vet 


il vetait 


il vetit 


irregular. 




n. vetons 


n. vetions 


n. ve times 






v. vetez 


v. vetiez 


v. vetites 






ils vetent 


ils vetaient 


ils vetirent 


VfiTiR, (se) 2. 


se vetant 


je me vets 


je me vetais 


je me vetis 


to clothe one's 


vetu,/. e. 


&c. 


&c. 


&c. 


self. ref. 










Vivre, 4. to 


vivant 


je vis 


je vivais 


je vecus 


live 


vecu 


tu vis 


tu vivais 


tu vecus 


aux. avoir 




il vit 


il vivait 


il vecut 


irregular. 




n. vivons 


n. vivious 


n. vecumes 






v. vivez 


v. viviez 


v. vecutes 






ils vivent 


ils vivaient 


ils vecurent 


Voir, 3. to 


voyant 


je vois 


je voyais 


je vis 


see 


vu, /. e. 


tu vois 


tu voyais 


tu vis 


aux. avoir 




il voit 


il voyait 


il vit 


irregu ar. 




n. voyons 


n. voyions 


n. vimes 






v. voyez 


v. voyiez 


v. vites 






ils voient 


ils voyaient 


ils virent 


Vouloir, 3. to 


voulant 


je veux 


je voulais 


je voulus 


be willing 
aux. avoir 


voulu 


tuveux 


tu voulais 


tu voulus 




il veut 


il voulait 


il voulut 


irregular. 




n. voulons 


n. voulions 


n. voulumes 






v. voulez 


v. vouliez 


v. voulutes 


1 




lis veulent 


ils voulaient 


ils voulurent 



1KD tJNIPERSONAL VERBS. §62 



39) 



Future. 


Conditional. 


Imperative. 


Subjunc nvE. 


Imperfect. 


je vetirai 


je vetirais 




je vete 


je vetisse 


tu vetiras 


tu vetirais 


vets 


tu vetes 


tu vetisseg 


il vetira 


il vetirait 


q. vete 


il vete 


il vetit 


n. vetirons 


n. vetirions 


vetons 


n. vetions 


n. vetissioiW 


v. vetirez 


v. vetiriez 


vetez 


v. vetiez 


v. vetissiez 


ils vetiront 


ils vetiraient 


q. vetent 


ils vetent 


ils vetissent 


je me vetirai 


je me vetirais 




je me vSte 


je me vetisse 


&c. 


&c. 


vets-toi 


&c. 


&c. 


je vivrai 


je vivrais 




je vive 


je vecusse 


tu vivras 


tu vivrais 


vis 


tu vives 


tu vecusses 
il vecut 


il vivra 


il vivrait 


q. vive 


il vive 


n. vivrons 


n. vivrions 


vivons 


n. vivions 


n. vecussionf 


v. vivrez 


v. vivriez 


vive? 


v. viviez 


v. vecussiez 


ils vivront 


ils vivraient 


q. vivent 


ils vivent 


ils vecussent 


je verrai 


je verrais 




je voie 


je visse 


tu verras 


tu verrais 


vois 


tu voie* 


tu visses 


il verra 


il verrait 


q. voie 


il voie 


il vit 


n. verrons 


n. verrions 


voyons 


n. voyions 


n. vissions 


v. verrez 


v. verriez 


voyez 


v. voyiez 


v. vissiez 


ils verront 


ils verraient 


q. voient 


ils voient 


ils vissen* 


je voudrai* 


je voudrais 




je veuille 


je voulusse 


tu vondras 


tu voudrais 




tu veuilles 


tu voulusses 


ii voudra 


il voudrait 




il veuille 


il vouliit 


o. voudrons 


n. voudrions 




n. voulions 


n. voulussionk 


v. voudrez 


v. voudriez 


veuillez 


v. voultez 


v. voulussiez 


fc roudront 


ils voudraient 




ils feuiZlent 


ils voulussent 



392 



THE PARTI CIPL E. — § 63, 64, G5, 66. 



§ 63. — The Participle. 

(1.) The participle is so called, because it participates of the na« 
ture both of the verb and of the adjective. It partakes of the nature 
of the verb, in having its signification and regimen, and of the na- 
ture of the adjective in relating, like the latter, to nouns and pro - 
nouns. 

(2.) There are two sorts of participles ; the present and the past. 

§ 64. — The Participle Present. 

(1.) The participle present, which denotes continuance of action 
answers to the English participle in ing. 

(2.) This participle is invariable ; always terminating in ant; &a, 

chantant, singing ; fmisssLiit, finishing ; recevant, receiving ; vendant 

selling. 

une dame marchant, a lady walking ; 

des homines marchant, men walking. 

J'ai vu les vents grondant sur ces 
moissons superbes, 



Deraciner les bles, se disputer les 
gerbes. Belille. 



/ have seen the winds roaring over 
those superb harvests, root up the 
grain, and contend for the sheaves. 



§ 65. — Verbal Adjectives ending in ant. 

(1.) The verbal adjective in ant expresses merely the condition, 
the manner of being, the quality of the noun. It never denotes ac- 
tion, 

(2.) This adjective varies in gender and number. We give below 
examples of the same words, used as participles and as adjectives :•— 



Adjectives. 

Une femme obligeante est aimee 
de tout le monde. 

An obliging woman is loved by 
tvery person. 

Les tribus err antes de l'Afrique. 

The wandering tribes of Africa. 

II n'y a que les natures almantes 
qui soient propres a l'etude de la 
nature. Bernardin de St. Pierre. 

Affectionate natures {dispositions) 
only, are fit for the study of nature. 



Participles. 

Une femme obligeant tout le 
monde est generalement aimee. 

A woman obliging every body u 
generally loved. 

Les tribus errant dans l'Afrique. 

The tribes wandering in Africa. 

Les natures aimant la solitude ; 
aiment generalement l'etude. 

Natures (dispositions) loving soli- 
tude, are in general fond of study. 



§ 66. — The Participle Past. 

(1.) The participle past denotes the completion of the action. 
(2.) It is susceptible of variations for gendei and number. 
(3.) The participle past, used without an auxiliary, agrees in gen- 
der and number with the noun which it qualifies, whether the noun 



Like a golden lamp suspended in 
the azure vault, the moon balances 
herself in the confines of the horizon ; 
her weakened rays sleep on the turf 



THE ADVERB. § 67, 68. 393 

precedes or follows. In short, all that we have said of the agree- 
ment of the adjective with the noun, may be applied to this par- 
ticiple. 

des enfants cheris, beloved children ; 

des femmes estimees, esteemed women ; 

Comme une lampe d'or dans l'azur 

suspend 'ue. 
La lune se balance aux bords de 

l'horizon ; 
Ses rayons affaiblis dorment sur le 

gazon. Lamartine. 

(4.) For further rules on the participle past, see Syntax, j 134, and 
following. 

§ 67. — The Adverb. 

(1.) The adverb is an invariable word joined to verbs, adjectives, 
or to other adverbs, to modify their signification. 
(2.) Adverbs are divided into seven classes : — 

L Of manner ; doucement, softly ; sagement, wisely ; &c. 

2. Of order; premierement, first ; d'abord, at first; ensuite, af- 

terwards; &c. 

3. Of place ; ici, here ; ou, where ; la, there ; ailleurs, else- 

where ; &C. 

4. Of time; hier, yesterday; aujourd'hui, to-day; demain, to- 

morrow; &c. 

5. Of quantity ; peu, little ; trop. too much ; tant, so much ; &c. 

6. Of comparison ; plus, more ; moins, less ; tres, very. 

7. Of affirmation, ne- oui, yes ; certes, certainly ; non, no ; nullement, 
gation and doubt ; by no means ; peut-etre, perhaps ; ne, pas, pointy 

not ; &c. 

(3.) A few adjectives are sometimes used adverbially. They are 
then invariable : — 

chanter juste, to sing in tune ; 

couter cher, to cost dear ; 

parler haut, to speak loud. 

(4.) Several words united together, and having the force of an ad 
verb, are called an adverbial phrase : — 

tout-a-coup, suddenly ; 

peu-a-peu, by degrees ; 

tout-a-l'heure, immediately ; 

de-temps en-temps, now and then, &c. 

§ 68. — Formation of Adverbs from Adjectives. 

(1.) Adverbo ending in merit, may be formed from adjectives in th© 
following manner : — 

(2.) When the adjective ends in the masculine with a vowel, merit 
in add 3d to form the adverb : — 

17* 



394 THE ADVERB. — 8 69, 70. 



Adjective. Adverb. 

utile, useful; utilement, usefully; 

polij polite; poliment, politely; 

aise^ easy ; aiscment; 



(3.) Exceptions. 

bean, beautiful; bellement, beautifully; 

fou, foolisfi; follement, foolishly; 

mou, soft; mollement, softly; 

noirveau, new ; nouvellemcnt, newly ; 

traitre, treacherous; traitreusement, treacherously. 

4.) When the adjective ends in the masculine with a consonant, 
tne syllable merit is added to its feminine termination : as, 
masc. fern. 

bon, bonne, good ; bonnement, in a good ma/tner ; 

doux, douce, soft; doucement, softly; 

heureux, heureuse, happy; heureusement, happily. 

(5.) Adjectives ending in nt, change that termination into mment ;— - 
prudent, prudent; prudemment, prudently; 

elegant, elegant; elegamment, elegantly. 

Exceptions. 
lent, slow; lentement, slowly; 

present, present; presentement, presently. 

(6.) The following adverbs require an acute accent over the e pre- 
ceding ment, which e is mute in the adjective :— 



aveuglement, blindly ; 

commodement, commodiously ; 

communement, commonly ; 

conformement, conformably ; 

confinement, confusedly ; 

diffusement, diffusely ; 

enormement, enormously ; 



expressement, expressly; 

importune ment, importunately ; 
incommodement, incommodiously ; 

obscure ment, obscurely ; 

opiniatrement, obstinately ; 

precisement, precisely ; 

profondement, profoundly. 



§ 69. — Degrees of Signification in Adverbs ending in 

ment. 

(1.) Adverbs ending in ment, are, like all the adjectives from which 
they are formed, susceptible of three degrees of signification ; the 
positive, the comparative, and the superlative. 

(2.) The first expresses the manner simply. 

(3.) The second expresses it in a degree of equality, superiority, 
or inferiority, by adding to the adverb the words, si, so ; aussi, as 
plus, more ; moins, less. 

(4.) The third, by the addition of the words bien, tres,.fort, very y 
carries that signification to the highest degree. 

§ 70.— Adverbs making of themselves a Comparison, 

S!^!L \ ™ the same man- 

ae meme, 



pareillement, 






ainsi, thus; 

davantage, j*""*' 



PREPOSITION S. § 72. 



895 



De plus, 


besides ; 


A-peu-pres, 


Mo ins, 


less ; 


Pour le plus, 


Mieux, 


better ; 


Tout au plus, 


Pis, 


worse ; -^ 


A qui inieux 


Tres, 


very; 


mieux, 


Ni plus ni moins, 


neither more %/>r 


A l'envi, 




less; 


De mieux en 


Presque, 
Quasi, 


> almost ; 


mieux, 



nearly ; 
for the nust ; 
at most; 

f vying with one 
I another ; 

better and better. 



§ 71. — The Preposition. 

(1.) The preposition is an invariable word used to express the re- 
lations of things. 

(2.) The preposition conveys by itself no distinct meaning. The 
preposition and the word which it governs, form what is called an 
indirect regimen. 

§ 72. — Table of the Principal Prepositions. 

f 

A cause de, 
Apres, 
Attendu, vu 
Aupres de, 



Autour de, 

Avant, 

Avec, 

Chez, 

Contre, 

Dans, 

D'apres, 

D'avec, 

Be, 



to, at, in; 

on account of; 

after ; 

on account of; 

near ; 

about, around; 

before {earlier) ; 

with ; 

at the house of; 

against ; 

in, within ; 

from, after ; 

from ; 

°f from, with ; 

that 



Dela.au dela. de, ) beyond, on 
De dela.par dela J side of; 



Depuis, 

Derriere, 

Des, 

Devant, 

Durant, 

En, 

En de9a de, 

De de9a, par 

de9a, 
Entre, 
Envers, 
A l'egard de, 
Environ, 



since, for ; 
behind ; 
from ; 

before, opposite; 
during ; 
in, at, to; 
} this side; 

t on this side ; 

between ; 
> towards ; 

about; 



Excepte, 

Hormis, 

Hors, 

Jusqu'a, 

Jusques a, 

Loin de, 

Le long de, 

Malgre, 

Moyennant, 

Nonobstant 

Outre, 

Par, 

Pardevant, 

Parmi, 

Pendant, 

Pour, 

Pres de, 



Proche, proche &e,near by 



[except, but; 

save ; 

> until, as far as; 

far from; 

along ; 

in spite of; 

by means of; 

notvrithstanding ; 

besides ; 

by, through; 

before, (lawterm)i 

among, amongst; 

during ; 

for ; 

near, close by; 



Quant a, 

Sans, 

Sauf, * 

Selon, 

Sous, 

Suivant, 

Sur, 

Touchant, 

Concernant, 

Vers, 

Vis-a-vis de, 



as for, with respect / 
without ; 
saving, except ; 
according to; 
under; 
according tog 
upon, on; 
touching ; 
concerning ; 
towards, to; 
opposite. 



(2.) The prepositions are divided into several classes. 
(3.) Among those denoting place are — 

TCe n'est qu'autour de lui quo vole la victoire. 
< Racinm. 

( Around him alone hovers xnaoi y. 



A-Utour, around; 



396 PREPOSITIONS. — § 72. 

^, ..7 i v7 < Enfin, chez les Chretiens les moeurs sont innwcftTV 

Unez, wilfi; at t/ie { . ' ^ 

, ' f> I *- e s. Corneillb. 

/ fti r r ( l Anions Christians, finally .thje manners are innocenU 
(apudoflteLatm.) j c/ ^* 10 „ pfere ^father's house. 

j. { Rome n est plus rfavw Rome. Corneille. 

ans ? m » ^ ift?me is ?£0 longer in Rome. 

( Parmi les rochers, vers le milieu de ces montagnea 
Parmi, among ; escarpees. F£n£lon. 

Vers, towards; j Among the - recks, towards the middle of those steep 

^ mountains. 

f L'antel couvert de feux, tombe et fait, sons la 

U] l r ' ] T%<? aZtar covered with fire, falls and disappears un- 

l der £Ae earth. 

f Les riches ne sont sw la terre que pour faire du 
Sur, upon; «J bien. F£n£lon. 

(^ The rich are placed on the earth merely to do good. 

(4.) Some, denoting time, are — 

Durant, ) , ' . ( Durant la nuit, elle n'a point dormi. Corneille. 

Pendant? \ r & ' \ During the night she has had no sleep. 

(5.) Some mark place and time, as : — 

Des, from ; i Des Orleans ; Des sa source. L' Acad^mie. 

" (place;) (from Orleans ; from its source. 

f L'honime, des sa naissance, a le sentiment du plaisir 
" (time •} J et ^ e * a ^ouleur. Massillon. 

^ '• ** j Man from his birth has the sensation of pleasure and 

^ of pain. 

•Dpnnis fmm . vmre . f La Fmi[1GG s'etend depuis le Rhin jusqu'a l'Ocean. 
l/epms, from , since , ^ L' Ac ad£mie. 

^P c ') [^France extends from the Rhine to the Ocean. 

f En Orient, en Occident, depuis deux mille ans on 
" (time •". J ne P ar * e ^ ue ^'Alexandre. Massillon. 

^ ' * | In the East, in the West, since two thousand years t 

[^ they speak continually of Alexander. 

Dans, en, sous, vers, &c, may also be placed under this head. 
(6.) Some prepositions mark order; as: — • 

Avant, before ; f La conscience nous avertit, en ami, avant de noua 

(at a?i earlier time;) *{ punir. Stanislas. 

I Conscience warns us, o,s a friend, before punishing us. 

f Je crains Dieu, et apres Dieu. je crains principale- 
A , f f J ment celui qui ne le craint pas. Sadi. 

Ap e , of r; -% I fear God, and, after God, I fear principally the man 

\^ who does not fear him. 

f L'homme est place libre entre le vice etla vertu. 
Entre, between; ■{ Marmontel. 

\^Man is placed free befaveen vice and virtue. 

f II se met tonjours derriere celui qui parle. 
Derriere, behind; <{ La. BruyEre. 

\^He places himself always behind the speaker. 
n , , r { Fais marcher devant toi l'ange exterminateur. 

Levant ,^/f"*; ^ Voltage. 

[in jron oj ;) \^Send before thee the exterminating angel, 



PREPOSITION s.— § 72. 397 

;7) The f repositions marking union, are, 

f Je veuxvivre avec elle, avec elle expirer. 
Avec, with; , <[ Corneille. 

[_Iwill live with her, die with her. 

{ Outre l'estime de soi-meme, l'honnete homme 

j possede encore l'estime et la conriance univei- 
Outre, besides; <j selles. , Marmontel. 

| Besides self-esteem, the honest man possesses universal 

^ esteem and confidence. 

(8.) Those of separation, exception, are : — 

f II travaille toute la semaine. excepte le dimanche. 

Excepte, except; <^ L'Acad^mie. 

{He works the whole week, except Sunday. 

rr • . J Hormis toi, tout le monde est content, 

normis, except; j M arg plmsed ^ except you ^ 

f Nul n'aura de l'esprit, hors nous et nos amis. 
HorS; except; -i Moliere. 

(^ No one shall have wit but ourselves and our friends. 

( Point de vertu sans religion, point de bonheur 
« .,7 . m \ sans vertu. Diderot. 

s, wi ou ; < jy o v i riue without religion, no happiness without 

^ virtue. 

f On peut tout sacrifier a l'amitie, sauf l'honnetete 
Sauf save • extent ■ i et la justice. Martmontel. 

5 ' * F ' J We may sacrifice all to friendship, except honesty and 

^ justice. 

(9.) The prepositions of opposition are : — 

f Le travail est une meilleure ressource contre l'ennui 
p , . . m J que le plaisir. Trublet. 

uon re, agams ; ^ Labor is a better resource against ennui than 

^ pleasure. 

f Nous suivrons malgre nousle vainqueur de Lesbos. 

jy a gre, m spi e oj ; -\ ^ ^^ foU^ against our will the conqueror of 

\_ Lesbos. 

fLa verite nonobstant . le prejuge, l'erreur et le 
Nonobstant, notwith- \ mensonge, se fait jour a la fin. Marmontel. 
standing ; 1 Truth, prejudice, error and falsehood notwithstand* 

[ ing, comes at last to light. 

(10.) The prepositions of conformity are : — 

fLa terre, cette bonne mere, multiplie ses dons 
selon le nombre de ses enfants. F£n£lon. 

« , | , ,. | The earth, that good mother, multiplies her gifts ac 

o . ' , > . ° <{ cording to the number of her children. 
fcmvan , > o ; j ^ eg ta j ents p ro duisent suivant la culture. 

Marmontel. 
^ Talents produce according to their cultivation. 

(11.) Several words placed together and performing the part of a 
prep<? r.tion, are called a prepositional phrase : — 

A l'egard de, vrith regard to ; 

En faveur de, in favor of ; 

A la reserve de, reserving; tyc. 



398 



CONJUNCTIONS. § 73. 



§ 73. — The Conjunction. 

(1) Jcnjunctims are invariable words which serve to connect 
Hords anl sentences. 

(2.) French grammarians divide the conjunctions into nine 
classes : — 

1 Copulative : C et, and ; ni, nor ; que, that ; de sorte que, so 

that ; &c. 

2 Adversative, mais, but; quoique, though; cependant 

yet ; &c. 

ou, or ; ou bien, else ; ni, neither ; &c. 
savoir, namely ; comme, as ; c'est-a-dire, 

that is to say ; &c. 
< quand, lorsque, when ; pendant que, while , 
si, if; sans quoi, without which ; suppose que, 

supposing that ; &c. 
car, for; puisque, since; pourquoi, why, 

wherefore; &c. 
or, done, therefore ; ainsi, thus ; d'ailleurs, 

besides ; &c. 
que, that. 

(3.) We here present a list of the conjunctions and conjunctive 
phrases most commonly used in French. We will divide them into 
two classes. 

1. Conjunctions and conjunctive phrases which may be placed in 
the first or in the second part of a period : — 



3 Disjunctive, 

4 Explanatory, 

5 Circumstantial, 

6 Conditional, 

*7 Causal, 

8 Transitive, 

9 Determinative, 



A cause que, 
A moins que, 
Aussitot que, 
Au cas que, 
Apres que, 
Ainsi que, 
Attendu que, 
Afin que, 
Au reste, 
Avant que, 

Cependant que, 
De crainte que, 
De meme que, 
De peur que, 
Depuis que, 
Desorte que, 
Durant que, 
En cas que, 
Encore que, 



because ; 

unless; ■ 

as soon as ; 

in case that, if; 

after that; 

as, as well as ; 

whereas ; 

in order that ; 

besides ; 

before that, sooner 

than ; 
although ; 
for fear that, lest ; 
in the same way as ; 
for fear that, lest; 
since that; 
so that ; 
while ; 

in case that ; 
although ; 



Jusqu'a ce que, 

Lorsque, 

Ou bien, 

Outre que, 

Pendant que, 

Parce que, 

Pourvu que : 

Puisque, 

Quand, 

Quoique, 

Si, 

Sans que, 

Sitot que, 

Soit que, 

Si ce n'est que, 

Suppose que, 

Tant que, 

Tandis que, 

Vu que, 



until that; 
if, wlven; 
or, else; 
besides that ; 
while that ; 
because ; 
provided ; 
since ; 
if, when; 
although, though:, 

if; 

unless ; 

provided that; 
be it that ; 
unless ; 

supposing that 
provided ihat>\ 
while thai ; 
provided that. 



INTERJECTIONS.- 



-§ 74. 



399 



2. The conjunctions and conjunctive phrases which usually come 
between two parts of a sentence, or at the commencement of a dis- 
course momentarily interrupted, are : — 



Aussi bien que, as well as ; 

Apres tout, nevertheless ; 

A condition que, on condition that; 



Au surplus, besides; 
C 'est pourquoi , therefore ; 

Cependant, however ; 

C'est>a-dire, that is to say ; 

C'est-a-savoir, tliatis; 

Car, for, because; 

Done, therefore ; 

See Lesson 100 — Examples on the different uses of conjunctions. 



En effet, 

Et puis, 

Mais. 

Partant, 

Par consequent, 

Pourtant. 

Sans quoi, 

Savoir, 

Sinon, 

Toutefois. 



in fact; 
and then ; 
but; 

therefore ; 
consequently ; 
however ; 
unless that; 
to wit ; 
unless ; 
nevertheless. 



74. — Interjections. 



(1.) The interjections indicate some sudden affection or emotion 
of the mind. They are exclamations which seem to take the place 
of entire propositions, 

(2.) Some imply astonishment : — 

S Beaux arts, eh ! dans quels lieux n'avez-vous droit 
de plaire. Delille. 

SFine arts, ah ! in what place have you not a right to 
please. 

(3.) Some express derision, irony, distrust, &c. : — 

Ouais ! ce maitre d'armes vous tient bien au cceur. 

Moliere. 
Ah ! indeed ! this fencing master displeases you much. 

(4.) Others express contempt, aversion and disapprobation : — 

Foin ' awav with &c \ ^ om ^ u * 0U P et ^ e sa race ' ^ A Fontaine. 

J ' ' \ Awav with the wolf and his race ! 

Tout beau ! softly ! \ **f, beau ' ^nsleur ; tout beau ! Moliere. 

-' y \ Softly, sir ; softly I 

(5.) We shall carry no further this classification, but content our- 
selves with giving a list of the most usual interjections : — 



Ouais, ah I indeed! 
Oui da, truly, &c. 



Ah! 

Ahi! 

Bah! 

Chut! 

Eh! 

Fi! 

Gare! 

Ha! 

Helas 

Heu! 

Hola! 

Ho! 

Hem! 

Hem! 

Hum! 



&c. 



ah! 




Oh! 


eisrh ! 




Ouais ! 


bah! 




Ouf! 


silence ! 


hist! 


Paf! 


eh! 




St! 


fy! 




Sus! 


take care ! 


Zest! 


ha! 




Fi done ! 


alas ! 




Ho 9a! 


alas! 




He bien ! 


holla ! 




Eh bien ! 


ho! 




.Oui da ! 


hem! 




Or 9a ! 


eh! 




Tout beau ! 


hum! 




Silence! Paix! 



oh! 

ah, indeed ! so, 

eigh ! 

crack ! 

hist! 

quickly ! 

quickly ! 

fy then i 

holla! 

now then! 

well then i 

truly! 

quickly ! 

softly ! 

sdenocl 



rot 



400 syntax.— § 75, § 76, 

§ 75 —SYNTAX. 

(1.) Syntax treats of the agreement, government, and arrangement 
of words in sentences. 

(2.) One word is said to agree with another, when it takes the 
same modification of gender, number, and person. 

(3.) One word governs another, when by the influence of the 
former the latter is made to assume a particular form or place. 

(4.) The proper arrangement of words consists in placing them m 
the order sanctioned by grammatical rules, deduced from the best 
reputable custom. 

(5.) For the cases adopted by the modern French grammarian^ 
the student is referred to $ 2, and { 42, (2.) (3.) (4.) (5.) 

§ 76. — The Noun. — Place of Nouns. 

(1.) In French, as well as in English, a noun used as the subject 
or nominative of an affirmative or negative sentence, generally pre- 
cedes the verb : — 



Vhomme le plus obscur aime la 
liberte. Chateaubriand. 

Vesperance tient lieu des biens 
qu'elle promet. La Chaussee. 



The most humble man loves liberty. 

Hope takes the place of the benefits 
which it promises. 



(2.) In poetry and in elevated prose, the subject is sometimes 
placed after the verb : — 

II n'est point de noblesse, ou I Nothing noble can exist, where vir- 
manque la vertu. Cr^billon. | tne is wanting. 

La fortune est a craindre ou I Where wisdom is wanting, for- 
manque la sagesse. Boursault. | tune is to be feared. 

(3.) In interjected sentences, that is, in sentences which we, 
while repeating the words of a person, throw among other sentences, 
to indicate that person as the speaker; the subject, in French, must 
always follow the verb : — 



Heureux, disait Mentor, le peuple 
qui est conduit par un sage roi ! 

^ENELON. 



Happy, said Mentor, the peopU 
who are governed by a wist king. 



(4.) In interrogative sentences, the noun generally precedes the 

verb which must be immediately followed by a pronoun correspond* 

ing in gender, number and person with the noun : — 

La mort est-clle un mal ? La vie 
eut-clle un bien 7 Crebillon. 



Is death an evil ? Is life a bene- 
fit ? Literally, Death, is it an evil 7 
&c. 



(5.) When the sentence commences with one of the following 
words, oii, where ; que, what ; combien, how much ; quard, when , 



SYNTAX OF NOUNS.- 



-$ 76. 



401 



the noun may be placed immediately after the verb, or in ac- 
cordance A^ith the last rule: — 

Ou est v( tre pere ? or ) Tir , . r ., 

Ou votre pere est-il 1 J **»» » V mr f atlwr ? 

Mais que sert un long regne, a I Of what use is a long reign y %n- 
jaoins qu'il ne soit beau % less it be glorious ? 

Boursault. I 

(6.) The n jun, used as a direct regimen, has the same place in the 

sentenc i in French as in English : — 

La force fonde, etend et main- I Power founds, extends and main- 
tient un empire. Sai/rin. | tains an empire. 

(7.) When there are, in the same sentence, two nouns, one used 
as direct, the other as indirect regimen, and those nouns with the 
words qualifying or modifying them, are of equal length, the direct 
regimen should precede the indirect : — * 

Le malheur ajoute un nouveau 
lustre a la gloire des grands hom- 
ines. F£n£lon. 

Avez-vous donne les livres a mon 
frere 1 Girault Duvivier. 



Misfortunes add a new lustre to the 
glory of great men. 

Have you given the books to my 
brother ? 



(8.) When, however, the qualifying or explanatory words render 
the direct regimen longer than the indirect, the regime indirect is 
placed first : — 

Avez-vous donne a mon frere les 
livres que vous lui aviez promis ? 

Les hypocrites parent des dehors 
de la vertu les vices les plus honleux. 
Noel. 

(9.) The indirect regimen precedes the direct regimen, when the 
meaning would otherwise be doubtful : — 



Have you given my brother the 
books, which you had pi'omised him ? 

Hypocrites adoi'n with the appear- 
ance of virtue, the most shameful 
vices. 



Tachez de ramener par la dou- 
ceur ces esprits egares. 

Bescherelle. 



Try to bring back, by mildness^ 
these erring spirits. 



Any other construction would render the sentence equivocal. 

(10.) In English, the name of the possessor frequently precedes 

the name of the object possessed; and the two are connected by 

means cf 's (the old Saxon genitive termination). In French the 

order is always different. The name of the object precedes that of 

the possessor, and the connecting link is a prepo ntion : — 

Les livres de mon ami. My friend' 's books. 

Vous avez vu la montre de ma You have seen my sister's watch. 



* This must also be the case when the regime direct is shorter than 
the regime indirect. 



402 



SYNTAX OP THE ARTICLE. § 77. 



(11.) The name of an object always precedes the name of thi 
a abstain 2e of which it is formed, or which it contains. The preposi- 
t. on de comes between them : — 



Une table de marbre. 
La France a beaucoup de car 
rieres de marbre. 
Un bouteille de vin. 



A marble table. 

France has many marble quarries. 



A bottle of wine. 

(12.) The word representing an individual always precedes that 
describing his particular occupation, or the merchandise of which he 
disposes : — 

Un maitre de danse. 
Un maitre de langues. 
Un marchand de drap. 



A dancing master. 

A teacher of languages. 

A draper ■, or dealer in cloth. 



(13.) The name of a vehicle, boat, mill, etc., always precedes the 
noun representing the power by which it is impelled, or the purpose 
to which it is adapted. The connecting preposition is generally d :— - 



Un moulin-a-vent. 

Un moulin-a-farine, 

Des moulins-a-eau. 

Une voiture-a-vapeur. 

Un bateau-a-vapeur. 

Une voiture a deux chevaux. 



A wind-mill. 
A grist-mill. 
Water-mills. 
A steam carriage. 
A steamboat. 
A two horse carriage. 

(14.) The name of an object precedes the noun representing its 
particular produce, use, or appendages, &e. A generally connects 
these nouns : — 



Le gout du fruit de Varbre a pain 
ressemble celui de l'artichaut. 
Bernardin de St. Pierre. 

Le nom de vertu, dans la bouche 
de certaines personnes, fait tressail- 
lir comme le grelot du serpent a 
sonnettes. Mme. Necker. 

Les bites a comes ne sont pas si 
nombreuses que les betes a laine. 

La salle-a-manger. 
Du bois-a-bruler. 
Un verre-a-eau. 

See § 81, (2.) 



The taste of the fruit of the bread- 
tree resembles that of the artichoke. 

The name of virtue in the mouth 
of certain persons makes one shud- 
der, like the noise of tJve rattle-snake. 

Horned animals {neat cattle) aft 
not so numerous as sheep {wool ani- 
mals). 

The dining room. 

Fire wood. 

A water glass, i. e. glass for water. 



§ 77. — The Article. — Use of the Article. 

(1.) The article* must be used in French before every noun em- 
ployed in a general sense, or denoting a whole species of objects ; 
although in similar cases, the article is not used in English. Ex. :-— 

* The student will recollect that the French have only one article, le. 
The word un being by modern French grammarians, very properly class- 
ed with tho numeral adjectives. 



SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. § 77. 



403 



Les bieiifaits peuvent tout sur 
line aine bien nee. Voltaire. 

L'honneur, aux grands coeurs, est 
plus cher que la vie. Corneil^e. 

La honte suit toujours un lache 
desespoir. Cr£billon. 



Benefits are all powerful with a 
well disposed mind. 

Honor is with magnanimous hearii 
more precious than life. 

Shame always follows a cowardly 
despair. 



(2.) The article is used in French, as in English, before a noun 
denoting a particular object, or taken in a particular sense : — 

The happiness of the wicked run 
away like a torrent. 

The healthiest shrub needs cuUiva 
tion. 



Le bonheur des mechants comme 
nn torrent s'ecoule. Racine. 

.L'arbrisseau le plus sain a be- 
soin de culture. 

Fabre d'Eglantine. 

Le moment du peril est celui du 
courage. La Harpe. 



The time of peril is the time for 
courage. 



(3.) The article is used before the names of countries, provinces, 
rivers, winds and mountains : — 



La France est bornee au midi 
par les Pyrenees et la Mediterranee ; 
a Z'est par la Suisse et la Savoie ; 
au nord par la Belgique et a Z'ouest 
par Z'Ocean. Ses principales rivieres 
sont la Meuse, le Rhin, la Seine, la 
Loire, la Garonne et le Rhone. 



France is bounded on the south by 
the Pyrenees and the Mediterra- • 
nean ; on the east by Switzerland 
and Savoy ; on the north by Bel- 
gium, and on the west by the Ocean. 
Its principal rivers are the Meuse, 
the Rhine, tlie Seine, the Loire, the 
Garonne and the Rhone. 



(4.) Those countries which take their name from their capital, or 
some other city within their boundaries, take no article : — 



Naples est un pays delicieux. 
Venise etait un etat puissant. 
New York est un etat sain. 



Naples is a delightful country 
Venice was a powerful state. 
New York is a healthy state. 



(5.) The French use the article before titles prefixed to names : — 



Le general Cavaignac. 
Le president Bonaparte. 



General Cavaignac ; 
President Bonaparte. 



(6.) The article is also used before the names of dignities, of cer- 
tain bodies, systems of doctrine, and with other words mentioned 
below : — ■ 

La monarchic, monarchy ; 
Le parlement, parliament; 
Le gouvernement, government ; 
Le christianisme, Christianity ; 
L'episcopat, episcopacy ; 

A l'eglise, at church ; 

(7.) Bafore the names of the seasons, and the following exprea- 
nions : — 



A l'ecole, 


at schools 


Au college, 


at college ; 


Au marche, 


at, to market i 


Au lit, 


in bed. 


&c. 


&c. 



L'annee prochaine, next year ; 
L'annee demiere, last spring ; 

Le printemps prochain, next spring ; 



L'automne dernier, 
La semaine demiere, 
&c. 



last fall; 
last week; 



404 SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. § 78. 

^8.) The names of several cities take the article. Those nouni 
have generally a meaning, and indicate often natural objects: — 

Le Havre, Havre; La Rochelle, Rochelle ; 

La Haie, The Hague ; | Le Detroit, Detroit ; 

(9.) In speaking of the parts of the body or of the qualities of the 
mind, the French use the article in cases where the English use a 
possessive adjective, or the indefinite article : — 

Votre frere a les cheveux noirs. Your brother has black hair. 

II s'est blesse a la main. He has hurt his hand. 

Charles a la memoire excellente. Charles has an excellent memory. 

§ 78. — Use of the Article before Words taken in a Par- 
titive Sense. 

(1.) A word, when used to denote an entire object or class of ob- 
jects, is said to have a general sense ; when, however, it is employed 
to indicate a part of any thing or class of things, considered in refer- 
ence to the whole, it is said to have a partitive sense. Before a word 
taken partitively, the word some or any, is, or may, in English, often 
be employed. If, for example, I use the words courage and wood, 
abstractedly, I take them in the general sense : but if I say, give me 
wood, your brother has courage, I use them in the partitive sense, that 
is, I ask for a part of that substance called wood, and attribute to your 
brother something of that quality called courage. 

(2.) The article accompanied by, or in combination with the prep- 
osition de, called by some grammarians the partitive article [§ 13, 
(10.)] is used before nouns taken in a partitive sense .— 

Du pain et de l'eau lui suffisent. 



Bread and water are sufficient for 
him ; that is, some bread. 

Bring us salt and vinegar; that 
is, some salt. 

My native land has always {some) 
charms for me. 

(3 ) The preposition de only is used, when the noun taken in a 
partitive sense, is preceded by an adjective :-— 



Apportez-nous du sel et au vi- 
naigre. 

Toujours la patrie a des charmes 
pcnr moi. La Harpe. 



II possede de belles maisons. 

Proposons-nous a nous-memes de 
grands exemples a imiter, plu- 
tot que de vains systemes a suivre. 
J. J. Rousseau. 



He possesses fine houses. 

Let us propose to ourselves rather te 

imitate great examples, than to foU 

low vain systems. 



(4.) When, however, the noun preceded by the adjective, is con. 
nected with it, and the two form a compound noun that noun takes 
the article according to rule (2.), as, 

Des jeunes gens j des grands horn- | Young people; g~eat men {some), 
raes. 



SYKTil OF THE ARTICLE. §79,80. 



405 



Heureux si de son temps, pour de 

bonnes raisons, 
La Macedome eut en des petites 

niaisons ! Boileau. 



Fortunate would it have been, if in 
his time (Alexander's) Macedon had 
had lunatic asylums. 



(5.) The pieposition alone is used before a noun, when it is pre- 

teded by a collective word or by an adverb of quantity : — 

A multitude of nations. 

Many "persons. 

Of what use are so many friends 



Une multitude de peuples. 
Beaucoup de personnes. 
A quoi bon tant d'arnis % 
Unseul nous suffit s'il nous aime. 
Florian. 



A single one suffices if he loves us. 



(6.) The article, however, is used, when the noun preceded by a 
collective word, is limited by what follows. The words la plupart, 
the most ; bien, many ; and infiniment, infinitely, form also exceptions 
to the preceding rule : — 

Un grand nombre des personnes Many of the persons whom I have 

que j'ai vues. Noel. seen. 

II me reste peu des livres qui / have few left, of the books which 

m'ont ete donnes. Noel. have been given me. 

Les mechants ont bien de la peine The wicked have much trouble to 

a demeurer unis. F^nelon. remain united. 

(7.) The preposition is used alone before a noun placed after a 
verb conjugated negatively, but not interrogatively at the same 
time : — 



Je ne vous ferai pas de reproches. 

L'on ne dit jamais que Ton n'a 
point d'esprit. Boursault. 

On ne fait jamais de bien a Dieu 
en faisant du mal aux hommes. 

Voltaire. . 

(8.) The commencement of rule (6.) will also apply to this sen- 
tence : — 



/ shall cast upon you no reproaches. 
We never say, that we have no wit. 

We never can do good in respect to 
God, by doing evil to men. 



Ne donnez jamais des conseils qu'il 
eoit dangereux de suivre. 

GlRAULT DUVIVIER. 



Never give advice which it is dan~ 
gerous to follow. 



§ 79. — English Indefinite Article A or An. 
The French numeral adjective un, masc. une, fern, answers to th 
English article a or an [\ 13, (4.) (11.)]. 

The restrictions to its use are specified in the remarks on the ar 
tide. 

§ 80.— Repetition of the Article. 
(1.) General rule. The article* is repeated before every noun 
and every word used as a noun, having a separate meaning : — 

* This rule applies to the determinative adjectives, mon, ton, son, ce, 
cet, &c. 



406 



SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. §81. 



Le coear, Z'esprit, les mceurs, tout 
gagne a la culture. 

Le pere et la mere semblaient ex- 
citer leur petite coinpagne a s'en 
repaitre la premiere. Buffon. 



The heart, the mind, the manner I 
every thing improves by cultivation. 

T/ie fatfier and mother seemed ti 
excite their little companion to feed 
upon it first. 



(2.) The article will, therefore, be repeated, when one of two ad- 
jectives united by the conjunction et> qualifies a noun expressed, and 
the other a noun understood : — 

L'histoire ancienne et lamoderne. | Ancient and modern history. 
hat is, l'histoire ancienne et Phistoire moderne. 

Les philosophes anciens et les mo- Ancient and modern philosophers. 

dernes. 
Le premier et le second etage. The first and second stories. 

(3.) Should, however, the two adjectives qualify the same ex- 
pressed word, the article must not be repeated. 

Le sage et pieux Fenelon a des The wise and pious Fcnelon has well 

droits bien acquis a l'estime gene- established rights to general e&» 

rale. Girault Duvivier. teem. 

A ces mots il lui tend le doux et At these words he presents to him the 

tendre ouvrage. Boileau. sweet and tender book. 

(4.) When two nouns are joined by the conjunction ou, and th< 
second is merely a repetition or explanation of the first, the articl 
should not be repeated. 



Les joues ou cotes de la tete du 
condor, sont couvertes d'un duvet 
noir. Buffon. 

On distinguait parmi les nobles les 
palatins ou gouverneurs des pro- 
vinces. J. J. Rousseau. 



The cheeks or sides of the head of tkt 
condor, are covered with black down. 

They distinguished among the nobles 
the palatines or governor's of prov- 
inces. 



§ 81. — Miscellaneous Eemarks on the Use of the Article. 

(1.) The article is not used before numbers placed after the namea 
of sovereigns, to designate their order of succession [$ 26, (3.)]. 
Louie dix-huit, Charles dix. | Louis the eighteenth, Charles the tenth, 

(2.) The French put no article before nouns placed in apposition 
with, or explanatory of, other preceding nouns : — 



Louis treize fits de Henri quatre, fut 
bien different de son pere. 

je Tartufe, comedie de Moliere. 
Lamartine, celebre poete et prosa- 

teur fran9ais. 
Je suis franfais, vous etes americain. 



Louis the thirteenth, the son of Henrf 

the fourth, was very different frw 

his father. 
The Tartufe, a comedy of Moliere. 
Lamartine, a celebrated French poet 

and prose writer. 
I am a Frenchman, you are an 

American. 

(3.) If the explanatory word be itself qualific 1 or n str cted by 
other words, the un is then placed before it : — 



srwrAx OFTHE ARTICLE. — §31. 407 



That man is a Frenchman, of av 
illustrious, but unfortunate family. 

Those gentlemen are merchants 

from Lyons. 



Cet liomme est un Fra^ais 
d'une famille illustre, mais nialheu- 
reuse. 

Cos messieurs sc-iit dts marchands 
de Lyon. 

(4.) Under the second rule of this Section may also be placed th* 
words mentioned in \ 76, Rules (11.) (12.) (13.) and (14.) :— 

une montre d'or, a gold watch ; 

un maitre de dessin, a drawing-master ; 

un moulin-a-vapeur, a steam mill; 

une charnbre-a-coucher, a bed-room. 

(5.) Some exceptions to rule (2.) will be better explained by ex 

amples than by precepts : — , 

un magasin a foin, a hay-loft ; 

une bouteille a vin, a wine-bottle, 

are a loft intended for hay, a bottle intended for wine, but not actu- 
ally containing hay or wine. 

un magasin au foin. a hay-loft ; 

la bouteille au vin, the wine-bottle. 

That is, the loft actually used for hay, the bottle now used for 

wine. 

un magasin de foin, a loft > r -,-, r < hay ; 

une bouteille de vin, a bottle \J U °J \ wine. 

(6.) Proper names of persons do not receive the article, unless it 
forms a part of the name ; as, Lebrun, Lamartine, La Harpe, La 
Fontaine ; as also in some gallicised Italian names ; as, Le Tasse, 
Tasso, Le Dante, Dante, &c. An adjective, however, coming before 
proper names, is generally preceded by the article. 

Le bon et naif La Fontaine. I The good and candid La Fontaine. 

Le pieux Fenelon. | The pious Fenelon. 

(7.) It has been seen [} 12, (1.) Examples] that the plural article is 
often placed in elevated style before the names of renowned indi- 
viduals : — 



We have seen at mice at the head 
of the imperial squadrons, Murat t 
Kellerman, Lassalle, Montorun. 



Nous avons vu a la fois a la tete 
des escadrons imperiaux, les Murat, 
les Ke!lermann, les Lassalle, les Mon- 
tontD- Le G£n£ral Foy. 

(8.) Names of kingdoms and provinces, when preceded by tht 
preposition en, take no article : — 

En France, en Amerique. In France, in America. 

(9.) No article is placed after en preceding a noun used indeter- 
minately ; or after the word ni standing before a noun, which is th© 
direct regimen of a verb, preceding the negative *«— 



408 



SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. § 82. 



We shall go in a carriage. 

You arc in trouble. 

We have neitlier gold nor silver. 



Nous irons en voiture. 

Vous etes en peine. 

Nous n'avony ni or ni argent. 

(10.) The article is omitted before plus and moins in comparative 
sentences, where, in English, it would, in the corresponding place, bo 
mserted: — 

Plus une action est utile, plus | The more useful an action is, the 
lie est loua^le. | more praiseworthy it is. 

(11.) The article precedes plus and moins to express comparison 
IE the highest degree, and agrees in gender with the noun : — 



Votre soeur ne pleurait pas, quoi- 
qu'elle fut la plus affligee de toutes 
ces dames. 



Your sister did not weep, although 
she was the mozt grieved of all those 
ladies. 



(12.) The article remains invariable when it stands before a su- 
perlative, in which, however, no direct comparison is intended : — 

Your sister does not weep, even 
when she is most grieved. 



Votre soeur ne pleure pas lors 
meme qu'elle est le plus affligee. 
Noel. 

(13.) To give more force to the diction, the article is often omitted 
in a rapid enumeration of individuals : — 



Citoyens, etrangers, amis, enne- 
mis, tous le reverent. 

§ 82. — Idioms in which 

Aj outer foi, 
Avoir besoin, 
Avoir chaud, 



Avoir coutume, 
Avoir dessein, 
Avoir dispute, 
Avoir envie, 
Avoir appetit, 
Avoir faim, 
Avoir froid, 
Avoir honte, 
Avoir mal, 
Avoir patierce, 
Avoir p €ur, 
Avoir pitie, 
Avoir raison, 
Avoir sommeil, 
Avoir soif, 
Avoir soin, 
Avoir sujet, 
Avoir tort, 



to give faith ; 
to have need ; 
to be warm; 
to be accustomed ; 
to intend; 
to have difficulties ; 
to wish, to desire ; 
to have an appetite; 
to be hungry ; 
to be cold; 
to be ashamed; 
to have a pain ; 
to have patience ; 
to be afraid; 
to take pity ; 
to be right ; 
to be sleepy ; 
to be thirsty ; 
to take care ; 
to have reason ; 
to be wrong; 



I- Citizens, strangers, friends, ene- 
I mies } all reverence him. 

the Article is omitted. 

Demander pardon,^ beg pardon ; 
Donner avis, ) . . r 
Faire part, \ to inform; 
Entendre raillerie,* to bear jokes, 
Faire attention, to pay oMention ; 
Faire bonne chere.fo live well; 



Chercher fortune, to seek one's for- 
tune ; 
Courir risque, to run the risk ; 
Demander justice, to demand justice ; 



Faire credit, 
Faire envie, 
Faire honneur, 
Faire horreur, 
Faire peur, 
Faire mention, 
Faire naufrage, 
Faire place, 
Faire plaisir, 
Faire present, 
Faire reflexion, 
Faire tort, 
Mettre fin, 
Mettre ordre, 
Perdre courage, 
Porter envie. 
Porter malheur, 

Prendre conge, 



to give credit ; 

to excite envy. 

to honor ; 

to inspire horror \ 

to frighten ; 

to mention ; 

to suffer shipwreck i 

to make room ; 

to oblige ; 

to present ; 

to reflect ; 

to injure ; 

to put an end , 

to arrange ; 

to lose courtage ; 

to envy ; 

to cause misfm - 

tune ; 
to take leave ; 



* Entendre la raillerie is also said, but it means to understand joking- 



SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. §83,84, 40 r * 



Prendre feu, to cqa,Ji fire ; 

Prendre garde, to take care; 
Prendre haleine, to take breath ; 
Prendre medecine to take medicine ; 
Prendre racine / to take root ; . 
Rendre compte, to account ; 
Kendre justice, to render justice ; 
Rendre service, to oblige / 
Rendre visite. to visit ; 
Tenir compagnie, to accompany ; 



Tenir lieu, 
Tenir parole, 
Trouver moyen, 
Avec ardeur. &e , 
Par depit, &c, 
Pour recompense. 

&c., 
Sans peine, 
Sans souci, 



to take t/ie place ; 
to keep one's word; 
to find means; 
with ardor ; 
through spite t 
as a reward ; 

without difficulty f 
without sorrow t™ 



§ 83. — The Adjective. 

(1 ) We have seen [} 18, Rule (3.)] that an adjective relating* to 
two substantives of the same gender must agree with them in gender, 
and be put in the plural : 

(2.) And Rule (4.) that an adjective, relating to two or more nouns 
of different genders, must be put in the masculine plural. 

'3.) When, however, nouns, united or not by the conjunctioi et, 
are somewhat synonymous; when the writer wishes actually to 
qualify only the last ; or when the mind, more particularly occupied 
with the last noun, seems to forget the others; the adjective wil? 
assume the gender and number of the last noun only. 

Toute sa vie n'a ete qu'un travail, 
qu'une occupation continuelle. 

Massillon. 

Je ne connais point de roman, 
point de comedie espagnole sans 
combats. Florian. 



His whole life has been nothing but 
continual labor and occupation. 

I know no romance, no Spanish 
comedy, without combats. 



Le fer, le bandeau, la flamme est The siuord s the band, the Hame is all 
toute prete. Racine. 

(4.) Sometimes the adjective preceded by two or more substan- 
tives joined by the conjunction et, qualifies the last only. It must 
then, of course, agree with that noun only. 

Le bon gout des Egyptiens leur 
fit aimer la solidite et la regularite 
toute nue. Bossuet. 

Le sourire est une marque de 
bienveillance, d'applaudissement, 
et de satisfaction int&Heure. 

BUFFON. 



The g&od taste of the Egyptians 
made tJiem like solidity and un- 
adorned regularity. ' 

The smile is a mark of good-will^ 
of applause, and of inward satisfac- 
tion. 



§ 84>— Remarks on the Peculiarities of several Adjectives 
(1.) The adjective feu (late, deceased), is invariable, when placed 
before the article or adjective determining a noun, but varies when 
placed, after the determining word : — 

J'ai oui dire a feu ma sceur. que / have heard my latf. sister say, 

sa fiile et moi naquimes la meme that her daughter and I were born 

annee. Montesquieu. the same year* 

18 



410 



SYNTAX OF THB ADJECTIV B. § 84. 



Le due de. . . doit a la bienveil- 
iance dent l'honorait la feue reine, 
les bonnes graces de l'empereur. 
De Salvandy. 

(2.) The adjectives nu, bare 
placed before the noun : — 

II etait nM&te ; les pieds chausses 
de petites sandales. Voltaire. 

Une demi-henre apres avoir quitte 
ie vaisseau, je foulai le sol ameri- 
cain. Chateaubriand. 



The duke of . . . owes to the good* 
will of the late queen towards him x 
the good, graces of the emperor. 



and demi, half ; are invariable when 



He was bare-headed ; rie wore on ka 
feet small sandals. 

Half an hoar after having left iAi 
ship, I trod the American soil 



(3.) The adjectives nu and demi, when coming after the noun 
agree with it : — 



Accoutumez vos enfantsa demeu- 
rer ete et hiver, jour et nuit toujours 
tete nue. J. J. Rousseau. 

Opimius paya la tete de Caius 
Gracchus, dix-sept livres et demie 
d'or. Vertot. 



Accustom your children to remai'% 
summer and winter, day and nighty 
always bo-re-headed. 

Opimius paid for the head of Cains 
Gracchus, seventeen pounds and a 
half of gold. 



(4.) The adjectives excepte, except ; passe, past ; y-compris, includ- 
ing; ci-joint, ci-inclus, annexed, inclosed; franc-de-port, postage free; 
come under the two last rules : — 



Vous trouverez ci-joint la copie 
de la lettre que M. . . m'a ecrite. 
J. J. Rousseau. 

Le dessin de cet oiseau m'a etS 
envoye d'Angleterre, avec la des- 
cription ci-jointe. Buffon. 

Vous trouverez ci-inclus, copie de 
ma lettre. Domergues. 

Je vous recommande les cinq 
lettre s ci-incluses. 

Beknardin de St. Pierre. 

J'ai reyii, franc-de-port, une lettre 
anonyme. J. J. Rousseau. 

Le Contrat social est imprime, 
et vous en recevrez douze exem- 
pkires, francs de port. 

The same. 



You will find annexed the copy of 
the letter which M. . . has written 
to me. 

The drawing of that bird came to 
me from England, with the descrip- 
tion here annexed. 

You will find inclosed, a copy of 
my letter. 

1 recommend to you the five letters 
inclosed 

I received , postage free, an anony- 
mous letter. 

The Social Contract is printed, 
and you will receive twelve copies free 
of postage. 



(5.) An adjective used adverbially, that is, modifying a verb, is of 
course invariable [§ 67, (3.)] : — 



En Laponie. une peau d'h ermine 
coute quatre ou cinq sous ; la 
chair de cet animal sent tres mau- 
vais. Regnard. 

De ma vie je n'ai entendu des voix 
da femme monter si haut. 

M«i«. de S£viG*rtS 



In Lapland the skin of tlie hermin 
costs four or five sous ; the flesh of 
this animal smells bad. 

Never in my life have I hmri 
women's voices sound so Itud. 



SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. § 85. 411 

§ 85. — Place of the Qualifying Adjective. 

(1.) No invariable rule can be given for the place of the adjective 
in French, although it follows the noun much more frequently than 
it precedes it : — 

(2.) The adjectives which are generally placed after the noun are :— 

1, All participles present and past used adjectively ; 

une personne reconnaissante, a grateful person ; 

une histoire amusante, an amusing history ; 

un enfant cheri, a beloved child ; 

de la viande rotie, roast meat ; 

2. All adjectives expressing the form, the shape ; 

une table ronde, a round table ; 

une chambre ; carree, a square room ; 

(3.) Adjectives explaining the matter of which an object is com- 
posed ; — 

acide sulfurique, sulphuric acid , 

corps aerien, aerial body ; 

(4.) Those expressing color, taste, or relating to hearing and touch 

un habit noir, a black coat ; 

du fruit amer, bitter fruit ; 

des sons harmonieux, . harmonious sounds ; 

de la cire molle, soft wax; 

(5.) Adjectives which may be used substantively; 

un homme riche, a rich man ; 

une femme aveugle, a blind woman ; 

(6.) Adjectives representing nation ;* 

une graramaire fra^aise, a French grammar; 

une dictionnaire allemand, a German dictionary; 

(7.) Adjectives expressing the defects of the body and mind; 

un homme boiteux, a lame man ; 

un esprit alien6, an unsound mind ; 

(8.) Almost all adjectives ending in al, able, ible, ique and if, 

un homme liberal, a liberal man ; 

une nation paisible, a peaceful nation ; 

un esprit fanatique, a fanatical spirit; 

un soldat fugitif, a fugitive soldier. 

* The French often use the name of the country instead of the ad- 
jective of nation ; particularly when speaking of the produce of the 
country :— 

De la laine d'Espagne, Spanish wool. 

Du fromage d' Angleterre l English cheese. 



412 SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE.- -§ 86. 



(9.) It must not be inferred from the rules above that the adjective 
always comes after the noun. The deviations are quite frequent; and 
no other reason than taste can be assigned for them. We give a 
few examples, in which the same adjective is, by different authors, 
placed before and after the noun :— 



Before the Noun, 
Jamais nous ne goutons de par- 
taite allegresse. Coiineille. 

We never enjoy perfect {unalloyed) 
pleasure. 

II fallut reveiller d'un profond 
sommeil cet autre Alexandre. 

BOSSUET. 

It was necessary to rouse from a 
profound sleep that second Alexan- 
der. 

Craignez, d'un vain plaisir les 
trompeuses amorces. Boileau. 

Fear the deceitful allurements of a 
vain pleasure. 



After the Noun. 
Qu'a-t-il dit, qu'a-t-il fait, 
Qui ne promette a Rome un em- 

pereur parfait? Racine. 

What has he said, what has he done 
which does not promise to Rome a 
perfect emperor ? 

Dans un sommeil p-ofond ils ont 
passe leur vie. Boileau. 

They spent their life in a profound 
sleep. 



Le monde est une figure trompevM 
qui passe. Buffon. 

The world is a deceitful picture^ 
which passes before us. 

(10.) We find, however, in our best writers, few examples of a lonr 
adjective placed before a short noun ; although they often place the 
adjective before the noun to give variety or force to the diction, they 
never, for instance, would say (in prose) dHmaginaires lois, for des 
lois imaginaires, imaginary laws. 

(11.) The following adjectives when used in a literal sense, gene- 
rally precede the noun : See § 144, Note : — 



Beau. 


fL?ie, handsome ; 


Mauvais, 


bad; 


*Bon, 


good; 


Mechant, 


wicked ; 


*Brave, 


brave ; 


Meilleur, 


better ; 


Cher, 


deo.r {loved) ; 


Moindre, 


less ; 


Chetif, 


mean; 


Petit, 


small; 


Grand, 


tall ; 


Saint, 


holy ; 


Gros, 


large ; 


Vieux, 


old; 


Jeune, 


young; 


Vrai, 


true. 


Joli, 


pretty ; 







Those marked with an asterisk are included in the following table, 

| 86. — List of Adjectives having a Different Meaning, 
according as they precede or follow the noun. 



tin bon homme, a simple^ artless 

man ; 
Un brave homme, a worthy man ; 
Une certaine histoire, a certain 

story ; 
Un cher enfant, a dear child ; 
Une commune voix, a unanimous 

voice; 



Un homme bon, a good, benevolent 
man (un homme de bien) ; 

Un homme brave, a brave man ; 

Une histoire certaine, a reliable 
story; 

Une robe chere, an expensive dress; 

Une voix commune, an ordinary 
voice ; 



8IKTAX OF THE ADJECTIV E. § 87. 



413 



Un cruel homnie. a tiresome man ; 

La deniii/e annee, the last year (of 
a series) ; 

Une fausse clef, a false key ; an imi- 
tation key ; 

Un furieux menteur, an excessive 
liar ; 

Un galant homme, a gentleman; 

Un grand homme. a great man ; 

Le grand air ; the air of good society ; 

Le haut ton, a haughty tone ; 

Un honnete homme, an honest man; 

Le jeune Pline, young Pliny; 

Un malhonnete homme, a dishonest 

man ; 
Manvais air, OAckward appearance ; 

Un me chant livre, a poor book ; 

Morte eau. lowest tides ; 

Un nouveau livre, a new book, (ano- 
tlier book) ; 

Un pauvVe historien, a wretched his- 
torian ; 

Un plaisant homme, a ridiculous 
man ; 

Un petit homme, a ma?i of small 
size ; 

Mes propres mains, my own hands ; 

Un seui enfant, a single child ; 

Un simple soldat. a private soldier; 

Un triste homme. a pitiful man; 

Un unique tableau, a single pic- 
ture ; 

Un vilain homme, an ugly, unplea- 
sant man ; 

Une vraie histoire, a mere story ; 



Un homme cruel, a cruel man; 
L 'annee derniere, last year ; 

Une clef fausse, a key belonging to 

another lock, (the wrong key) ; 
Un lion furieux, a furious lion; 

Un homme galant. a man attentive 

to the ladies ; 
Un homme grand, a tall man; 
Lair grand, a noble appear a?ice ; 
Le ton haut, a loud tone ; 
Un homme honnete, a polite man 9 
Pline le jeune, Pliny the younger ; 
Un homme malhonnete, an unpolvte 

man ; 
L'air mauvais, malicious appear 

ance; 
Un livre mechant, a biting, caustic 

bo ik ; 
Eau morte, stagnant water ; 
Un livre nouveau, a book rect Uly 

published ; 
Un historien pauvre, a histo van 

without pecuniary means ; 
Un homme plaisant, an agreeable 

man ; 
Un homme petit, a mean man ; 

Mes mains propres, my clean hands % 
Un enfant seul, a child alone ; 
Un soldat simple, a foolish soldier ; 
Un homme triste, a sorrowful wan; 
Un tableau unique, a matchless pic* 

ture ; 
Un homme vilain, a sordid, miserly 

mom ; 
Une histoire vraie, a true history. 



§ 87. — Regimen of Adjectives. 

(1.) The regimen or complement of adjectives is a noun or a verb 

completing or denning their sense. Between the noun and the ad- 

^ctive comes one of the prepositions, a, de, dans, en, sur, &c. : — 

Cet homme est digne de louange. I Tfiis man is worthy of praise. 

Ce general est digne de commander. \ That general is loorthy to command. 

In the first phrase, louange, in the second, commander, is the regi- 
men of the adjective digne. 

(2.) The regimen is not always necessary to the adjective. It is 
added to it only to give it a particular limitation : — 



Without a regimen. 
Cet homme n'est pas content. 

That man is not please <* 



With a regimen. 
Cet homme n'est pas content de 
son fils. 

That man is not pleased with his sons 



4H 



SfNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. § 88. 



(3.) As may be seen in the last sentence, an adjective is not al- 
ways, in French, followed by the same preposition as the correspond- 
ing adjective in English. Thus, after the adjective content, the 
French use the preposition de (of), while after its English represen- 
tative (pleased), the preposition with must be employed. M. Bes* 
cherelle and several other French grammarians, while acknowledging 
the difficulty, give us the consoling assurance, that " L' usage et lea 
dictionnaires les feront connaitre" (use and dictionaries will make us 
acquainted with them) ; that is, with the prepositions required after 
the adjectives. As the student will scarcely be satisfait de cela, we 
give a rule or two on this difficult subject, and add lists of adjectives 
with their proper accompanying prepositions. 

(4.) When an adjective follows the verb etre, used unipersonally, 
the preposition de is placed after that adjective, and before the verb 
following: — 



It is sweet to die for one's country. 
It is easier to be wise for another than 
for one's self. 

It is more glorious to conquer one's 
self than to conquer others. 



] » est doux de mourir pour son pays. 
J [ est plus aise d'etre sage pour les 
an res que pour soi-meme. 

La Rochefoucauld. 
II est plus glorieux de se vaincre 
soi-meme, que de vaincre les 
autres. Scud^ry. 

(5.) It should be recollected, that it is only when the verb etre is 
unipersonal, that it thus seems to influence the choice of the prepo- 
sition. In other cases, the adjective must be followed by the prepo- 
sition proper to it. See § 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, below. 



Cela est doux au toucher. 
Cela n'est pas aise a faire. 



That is soft to the touch. 
That is not easy to be done (easily 
done.) 

88. — List of Adjectives requiring the Preposition De. 



Absent de, 
Ambitieux de, 
Amoureux de, 
Avide de, 
Approchant de, 
Capable de, 
Cheri de, 
Complice de, 
Content de, 
Curieux de, 
Desireux de, 
Dedaigneux de, 
Desole de, 
Different de, 
Digne de, 
Envieux de, 
fHoignc de, 
^'*clave de, 



absent (from) 
ambitious of 
in love with 
eager for 

approaching, near 
capable of. to 
beloved by 
accomplice in 
pleased with 
curious to 
desirous to, of 
disdaining to 
grieved with 
different from 
worthy of to 
envious of 
remote, far from ~ 
a slave to 



Exempt de, 
Faehe de, 
Fatigue de, 
Fier de, 
Fort de, 
Fou de, 
Glorieux de, 
Honteux de, 
Impatient de, 
Incapable de, 
Inconsolable de, 
Indigiie de, 
Indigne de, 
Inquiet de, 
Ivre de, 
Las de, 
Mecontent de, 
Parent de, 



exempt from 
sorry for 
tired with, of 
proud of 
confident in 
excessively fond of 
proud of 
ashamed of 
impatient of 
incapable of 
inconsolable for 
unworthy of 
indignant with 
uneasy about 
intoxicated with 
weary of 
displeased ivith 
related to 



SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. §89,90* 416 



Plein de , 
Ravi de, 
Rassasie de, 



full of 
glad to, of 
satiated vrith 



Rempli de, filled with 

Redevable de, indebted for 

Qui vit content de rien, possede 
toute chose. Boileau. 

II n'est pas de Romain, 
Qui ne soit desircux de vous donner 

la main. Corneille. 



Soigneux de, careful of to 
Siir de, sure of 

Surpris de, surprised of 

Tributaire de, tributary to 
Victime de, victim to i of 

Vide de, void of 

He ivho lives content will a httie x 
possesses all. 

There is no Roman thai is not desir- 
ous to reach you his hand. 



§ 89. — List of Adjectives Requiring the Preposition A. 



Accessible a, accessible to 

Accouturne a, accustomed to 

Adherent a, adhering to 

Agreable a, agreeoMe to 

Ajuste a, fitted for 

Anterieur a, prior to 

Aise a, easy to 

Ardent a, zealous for 

Assidu a, assiduous to 

Attentif a, attentive to 

Bon a, good for 

Cher a, dear to 

Conforme a, similar to 

Contraire a, contrary to 

Cruel a, cruel towards 

Difficile a, difficult to 

Enclin a, prone to 

Ktr anger a, a stranger to 

Exact a, exact in 

Facile a, easy to 

Favorable a, favorable to 

L'ignorance toujours, est prete a 
s'admirer. Boileau. 

Insensible a la vie, insensible a, la 

mort, 
II ne sait quand il veille. il ne sait 

quand il dort. Racine. 



Formidable a, 
Fatal a, 
Importun a, 
Impenetrable a, 
Indispensable a, 
Interesse a. 
Invisible a, 
-Insensible a, 
Naturel a, 
Necessaire a, 
Nuisible a, 
Odieux a, 
Posterieur a, 
Preferable a, 
Propice a, 
Propre a, 
Rebelle a, 
Redoutable a, 
Semblable a, 
Sujet a, 



formidable to 
fatal to 
importunate to 
impenetrable to 
indispensable to 
interested in 
invisible to 
insensible to 
natural to 
necessary to 
hurtful to 
odious to 
posterior to 
preferable to 
propitious U 
fit for 

rebellious toward* 
formidable to 
similar to 
subject to 



Ignorance is always ready to ad' 
mire itself. 

Insensible to life, insensible to deatA, 
lie does not know vjhen he is a,wake t 
or when he sleeps. 



90. — Adjectives requiring a Different Preposition in 
French and in English, not included in the above List, 
with the following Signification. 



Bon pour, 



de- 



kind towards, 
voted to 

Cel sbre pour, par, celebrated for 
Civil envers, polite to 

Quand on est bon pour tout le 
monde, on ne rest^wwrpersonne. 
C. Belavigne. 
II fut celebre par sa doctrine, au- 
l&nt que par sa naissance. 

Bossuet. 



Ignorant en, not versed in 

Indulgent pour, indulgent towar.l 

Insolent avec, insolent to 

Poli envers, polite to 

. When one is devoted to every body 
one is so towards nobody. 

He vms cehlrated for his doctrm^^ sd 
todl as f( r h is birth. 



416 



SYNTAX OF THE A D J E C T I V E.— - § 91, 92, 93. 



§ 91. — Remark. 

It must not be forgotten, that when the verb the is used ui jpei 
sonally before the adjectives contained in the two preceding sections 
these adjectives become subject to rule (4.) \ 87. 



II est indispensable d'etudier 
feeaucoup pour devenir savant. 



It is indispensable to study much, U 

become learned. 



§ 92. — Important Rules. 

(L) A noun may be followed by two or more adjectives, having 
one and the same regimen, provided those adjectives require the 
same prepositions after them ; thus we may say : — 



Ce pere est utile et cher a sa fa- 
mille. Girault Duvivier. 

La religion est necessaire et na- 
turelle a 1'homme. Anonymous. 



That father is useful and dear to 
his family. 

Religion is necessary and natural 
to man. 



These two sentences are correct, because the adjectives, utile, and 
cher, in the first, and necessaire and naturel, in the second, require the 
same preposition, a. 

(2.) We could not in the first of these two sentences, substitute 
the adjective cheri (beloved) for the word cher, and say as in English, 
That father is useful to, and beloved by his family. Such a construc- 
tion in French, is never admissible. We must say, That father is use- 
ful to his family, and is beloved by them; because the adjective cheri, 
requires the preposition de, or its substitute, the relative pronoun en 
[§ 39, (17.)].* Ce pere est utile a. sa famille et en est cheri, i. e. est 
c.ieri d'elle. 

§ 93. — Determining Adjectives. — Demonstrative Adjec- 
tives. 

The demonstrative adjective, which must not be confounded with 
the demonstrative pronoun [$ 36.], always precedes the noun, and 
must be repeated before every substantive. It assumes the gender 
nd number of the word which it determines [} 20, (1.)] : — 

That pure air, that turf that chang- 
ing vault ; here every thing pleases 
the heart and charms the eyes. 



Cet 



air pur, ces gazons, 
mobile : 



cette voiite 



Ici tout plait au coeur, tout ench ante 
les yeux. Castel. 



* The rule with regard to the regimen of verbs is equally imperative, 
We could not say in French, as in English, Eve?y week I write letters TO i 
and receive letters from my brother. We must say; Eveiy week I write let- 
ters to my brother, and receive some from him. Toutes les seoaines j'ecria 
des lettres a mon frere, et j'en re9ois de lui. 



SYNTAX OF THE ADJEC T I V E. § 94, 95 417 

§ 94.— Agreement, Repetition, and Place of the Posses- 
sive Adjective. 

We have said [§ 21, (2.)] that the possessive adjective assumes the 

gender and number of the object possessed, and (4.) that it must be 

repeated before every noun. The place of the possessive adjective 

is the same in French, as in English, that is, before the noun. These 

adjectives must not be confounded with the possessive pronouns 

[} 34, (2.)] :- 

Mon -peve.ma mere et mes soeurs I My father, mother, and sisters are 
sont arrives. | arrived. 

§ 95. — Remarks. 

(1.) It has been said [§ 77, (9.)] that the French use the article in- 
stead of the possessive adjective, when alluding to the parts of the 
body. This, however, must only take place where the possession is 
otherwise sufficiently explained. We must say, for instance : — 

J'ai mal a la tete. 

Charles s'est casse le bras, 
because the possession is sufficiently explained by the pronouns je 
in the first sentence, and se in the second. But, we must say, 

Je vois que mon bras s'enfle, I see that my arm swells. 

because without the mon, the possession of the arm would not be 
indicated. 

(2.) The English expressions, a book of mine, a cousin of his, can- 
not be translated literally into French. We must say un de mes 
amis, one of my friends; un de ses cousins, one of Ms cousins. 

Cinna and Carbo, a lieutenant Oj 



My head aches {I have a pain %n 
the head). 

Charles has broken his arm. 



Cinna et Carbon, un de ses lieuten- 
ants, se camperent sur les bords du 
Tibre. Vertot. 



his, encamped on the banks of L 
Tiber. 



(3.) In familiar or jocose style, we sometimes use the possessive 
pronoun, mien, tien, sien, without the article, to expiess the same 
relation : — 



A travers d'un mien pre, certain 
anon passa. Racine. 

Un mian, cousin est juge-maire. 
La Fontaine. 



Through a meadow of mine a 
young ass passed. 

A cousin of- mine is judge and 
mayor. 



(4.) When the possessor is an inanimate object, the adjectives sony 
ta, ses, leurs, can be placed before the object possessed only when 
the possessor is the subject of the same proposition : — 



La campagne a ses agrements. 
Ces langues out leurs beautes. 



The country has its pleasures. 
Those languages have their bemtr 
ties. 



18* 



418 



SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. — § 96, 97. 



(5.) When the (inanimate) possessor is not the subject of th« 
proposition, in which the possession is expressed, but of a preceding 
one, the article and the relative pronoun en are used [} 39, (17.) 
{HO.]:- 



Ce livre est bien imprim6, le pa- 
pier en est excellent. 

J'habite la campagne ; les agre- 
ments en sont sans nombre. 



That book is well-priv.ted, its paper 
{the paper of it) is excellent. 

I inhabit the country ; its pleasure* 
(the pleasures of it) are without num- 
ber. 

Those languages are rich, I admire 
their beauties (the beauties of them). 

(6.) Exception. The possession may be expressed by son, sa, les, 
leurs, although the possessor be not the nominative of the same 
proposition, when the object possessed is the regimen of a prepo- 
sition : — 



Ces langues sont riches, yen ad- 
mire les beautes. Noel. 



Paris est une ville remarquable ; 
les etrangers admirent la beaute de 
ses edifices. Noel. 



Paris is a remarkable city, foreign* 
ers admire the beauty of its edifices. 



§ 96. — Numeral Adjectives. 

(1.) The cardinal number used simply to indicate number, not 
order, precedes the noun. 

(2.) When used to indicate order [} 26, (3.)], the cardinal number 
generally follows the noun (except when indicating the day of the 
month) [} 26, (1.)] :— - 

Leon dix. — Chapitre dix. Leo the tenth. — Chapter ten. 

(3.) The ordinal number is placed before the noun : — 
La dixieme annee. The tenth year. 

(4.) It follows the words chapitre, livre, article, page, &c. in the 
division of a book. 

Livre sixieme, chapitre dixieme. Sixth book, tenth chapter. 

§ 97. — Indefinite Adjectives. 

(1.) Quelque is written in three ways : — 

1. Followed by a verb, it is written in two words, quel que ; the 
first, quel, which is an adjective, agrees in gender and number with 
the subject of the verb, and the second, que, which is a conjunction, 
is invariable. 



Mais quels que soient ton culte et 

ta patrie. 
Dors sous ma tente avec securite. 
Campenon. 
Cet homme quelle que fut sa for- 
tune ou son merite, ne put reussir 
dans ses entreprises. Boniface. 



But, whatever may be thy religion 
or thy country, sleep in security under 
my tent. 

That man, whatever his fortune & 
his merit might be, could net succeed 
in his undertakings. 



SYNTAX O* fllE ADJECTIVE. § 97, 



419 



2. Followed by a noun, it is then an adjective [$ 30, (12.)], and 

itgrees m number with that noun : — 

Princes, quelques raisons que vous I Princes, whatever reasons you may 
puissiez me dire. Racine. | give me. 

3. Quelque followed by an adjective, or an adverb, is invariable. 



Games of chance, however trifling 
they may seem,, are always expensive 
and dangerous. 



Les jeux de hasard. quelque me- 
diocres qu'ils paraissent. sont tou- 
iours chers et dangereux. 

M>e. de Genlis. 

(2.) Meme is an adjective or an adverb : 

It is an adjective [§ 30, (5.)] : 

1. When it precedes the noun, and means same : — 

Vous retombez toujours dans les I You always fall into the same &jh- 
mimes alarmes. Racine. j prehensions. 

2. When it follows a noun or pronoun, and has the sense of Mm* 
self herself themselves, even, very, and cannot be turned into de la 
meme maniere, in the same manner : — 

Les dieux eux-memes devinrent, I The gods themselves became jealous 
jaioux des bergers. Fene*lon. of the shepherds. 

Ces murs rnemes, seigneur, peu- These very walls, my lord, may have 
rent avoir des yeux. Racine, j eyes. 

(3.) It is an adverb and is invariable, when it modifies a verb, an ad- 
jective, or a participle. It has then the sense of aussi, also ; quoique, 
although, or de la meme maniere, in the same manner : — 

Frappez, Tyriens et meme Israel- 
ites. Racine. 

Leurs vertus et meme leurs noms 
fctaient ignores. 

Bernardin de St. Pierre. 

Exempts de maux reels les hom- 



mes s'en forment meme de chimeri- 
ques. 



Strike, Tyrians and Israelites also. 

Their virtues, as well as their 
names, were unknown. 



When exempt from real mufor- 
tunes, men create to themselves imagU . 
nary ones. 



(4.) We have seen that tout, when an adjective, that is, when sig- 
nifying every, all, is variable [§ 30, (15,) (16.)]. 

(5.) Tout, when it means entirely, quite, nothing but, is an adverb, 
nd, as such, invariable : — ■ 



Le lion est tout nerfs et muscles. 
Buffon. 

H montra pour rimer des chemins 
teut nouveaux. Boileau. 

Le chieu est tout zele, tout ardeur, 
tout obeissance, Buffon. 

(6.) But, here, is the same invariable word, variable by euphony 
before a feminine word, commencing with a consonant or an h as- 
pirate : — 



T7ie lion is nothing but nerves and 
muscles. 

He showed us, in poetry, paths en- 
tirely new. 

The dog is nothing but zeal, ardm 
and obedience. 



Les plaisanteries ne sont bonnes 
que quand elles sont servies toutes 
chaudes. Voltaire. 



Jokes are only good, wke® tih&% cm 
served up quite warm 



420 



SYNTAX OF TBE PRONOUN. £ 98. 



The following 1 extract (for the historical accuracy of which Wi 
eannot vouch) offers an example on the last rule, and on tl e excep- 
tion : — 



La vanite est sortie toutc paree de 
la tete des femmes comme Minerve 
est sortie tout armee de la tete de 
Jupiter. Saint Lambert. 



Vanity issued quite cxLnned from 
woman's head, as Mimrva issued 
quite armed from the head of Ju- 
piter. 



§ 98. — The Pronoun. — Place of the Personal Pronotun 
Subject of the Verb. 

(1.) Personal pronouns, used as subjects of verbs, are in French 
as well as in English, placed before them in affirmative and negative 
sentences : — 

la 



/ invented colors, 
umny, I touched his [ 
bled for his life. 



I armed cal- 
lory ; he trem- 



J'inventai des couleurs, j'armai 

calomnie, 
J'interessai sa gloire ; il trembla 

pour sa vie. Racine. 

(2.) In affirmative or negative sentences commencing with au 
moins, a peine, encore, peut-etre, en vain, du moins, combien, &c, the 
pronoun may elegantly be placed after the verb, although this con- 
struction is not imperative : — 

Perhaps, you are right. 

Perhaps, I will converse with you 



Peut-etre ayez-vous raison. Noel. 
Peut-etre vous entretiendrai-Je 
aussi de l'astronomie. 

Aim£-Martin. 
Combien (1'homme) perd-iZ de 
voeux, combien f&it-il de pas ! 

La Fontaine. 



on astronomy. 

How many wishes 
many steps he takes ! 



he loses, how 



(3.) In exclamations, the nominative pronoun is often placed aftei 
the verb in French, as well as in' English : — 

Puisse-je de mes yeux y voir torn- I May I with my own eyes see th 
ber la foudre ! Corneille. | thunder crush it! 

(4.) In interrogative sentences the nominative pronoun is places 
immediately after the verb in the simple tenses, and between the 
auxiliary and the participle, in the compound: — 

Ou suis-je ? qu'ai-je fait 1 que dois- | Where am I ? what have I done ? 
ye faire encore ! | what have I yet to do ? 

(5.) In interrogative sentences with verbs having only one* sylla 
ble, in the first person singular of the indicative present, and with 
some verbs having more than one syllable, but in which that person 
ends with an s preceded by a consonant, the pronoun/e is not placed 

* We may say, however, suis-je 1 am I? ai-je 9 have I? fais-je 1 do 1 
make? dois-je ? should I? ought I? vois-je'? do 1 see? vals-je? dr I go? 
entends-je 1 do I hear ? 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. § 99. 421 

after the verb. In *iuch case another construction must be given 
to the sentence , — 



Est-ce-que je cours 7 

Est-ce-que je dors ? 
Est-ce-que je comprends 7 



Do 1 run? literally, It if. that 1 
run? 

Do I sleep ? 

Do I understand ? 

(6.) The same construction is admissible, though not desirable 
nith all the persons and tenses which may be used interrogatively 

§ 99. — Repetition and Omission of the Nominative 
Pronoun. 

(1.) It is proper to repeat the personal pronouns je, -?, il, nous 
Us, before every verb : — 

Je lis, /ecris, je me promene. | J read, write, and walk. 

(2.) The omission of the pronouns je, tu, il, nous, vous, Us, before 
the second or third verb of a sentence, is a matter of choice and 
subject to the following restrictions : — - 

Those pronouns must be repeated : 

1. When the verbs are not in the same tense : — 

Je pretends et je prStendrai tou- I i" maintain and will always main- 
jours. I tain. 

2. When the first verb is in the negative and the second in the 
affirmative : — 

Je ne plie pas et je romps. I do not bend and I break. 

3. When the propositions are connected by conjunctions other 
than et, and ; ou, or ; ni, nor ; mais, hut : — 

Nous detestons les me chants, par- I We detest the wicked because we 
ceque nous les craignons. J fear them. 

(3.) Although we would advise the student to follow the 1st rule 
of this \, particularly with regard to the pronouns je, tu, nous, vous t 
and thereby avoid all uncertainty, we give a few examples, where 
the pronouns after the first are — 



Repeated : 
Je veux qu'on dise un jour aux 

peuples effrayes, 
T i fut des Juifs, il fut une insolente 

race. Racine. 

f wish that they may one day say to the 

frighttned nations, there were Jews, 

there was an insolent race. 



Omitted : 
11 s'arrache les cheveux, se roule 
sur le sable, reproche aux Dieux 
leur rigueur, appelle en vain a son 
secours la cruelle mort. 

F^N^LON. 

He (Telemachus) tears his hair, 
rolls on the sand, reproaches the Gods 
with their rigor, and calls in xain^ 
cruel Death to his aid. 



422 



SFNl'AX OF THE PRONOUN. 8 100. 



II s'ecoute, I se plait, il s'adonise. 
U s'aime. J. B. Rousseau. 

He listen s to himself * he adorns him- 
self, he loves himself. 

Nous avons dit, et nous allons 
prouver, qu'il ny a pas de bonheur 
saus vertu. Beauz^e. 

We have said, and we are going to 
prove, that there is no happiness 
without virtue. 



L'Eternel est son nom, le mjnd« 

est son ouvrage, 
II entend les soupirs de l'humble 

qu'on outrage, 
Juge tons les mortels avec d'egales 

lois, 
Et du haut de son trone interroge 

les rois. Racine. 

The Eternal is his name, the world 
is his work; he listens to the sighs 
of the humble oppressed, judges all 
mankind with equal laws, and in 
terrogates the mighty from his lofty 
throne. 

§ 100. — Place of Personal Pronouns used as Regimens of 

Verbs. 
(1.) The personal pronoun used as regime direct, (direct object or 
accusative) [§ 42, (4.)], and the pronoun used as regime indirect (indi- 
rect object) with the preposition to, expressed or understood, in Eng- 
lish, (dative of the Latins), [} 42, (3.)] are in French placed before 
the verb : — 



Direct Regimen. 
Je vous vois, i" see you ; 
Vous les voyez, you see them. 

Madame, enfin le ciel pres de 
vous me rappelle. Racine. 

Madam, at last heaven recalls me 
near you. 

Pauvre science humaine ! 
Un fil ^'arrete helas, comme le 

moucheron 
Du bon Jean La Fontaine. 

Aime Martin. 

Poor human science ! a web stops 
thee, like the gnat of the good Jean La 
Fontaine. 

(2.) 1st Exception: When the verb is in the second person singu- 
lar, or in the first or second person plural of the imperative used af- 
firmatively, these pronouns must be placed after it : — 



Indirect Regimen. 
Je vous parle, / speak to you ; 
Vous leur parlez, you speak to them. 

A ce prix je leur permets de 
vivre. Racine. 

On that condition I allow them to 
live. 

II faut compter sur l'ingratitude 
des honimes, et ne laisser pas de 
leur faire du bien. F£n£lon 

We should*expect ingratitude from 
men, but not cease, on that account, ic 
do them good. 



Parlez-Ze^r, speak to them. 

Make me a, Christian and free, I 
submit to every thing. 

Let us divest ourselves from a vain 
pride. 

Go, conduct her into the next room* 



Voyez -fes, see them. 

Rends-moi chretienne et libre, a 
tout je me soumets. Voltaire. 

Depouillons-nous aussi d'une vaine 
fierte. Boileau. 

Allez, coniuisez-Zi> dans la cham- 
bre prochaine. Racine. 

(3. ) Remark : But if the verb in those persons of the imperative 
be used negatively, the pronouns will be placed according to 
Rule fl.):— 
Ne les voyez pas. do not see them. | Helenr parlez -pa,s,do not speak to them 



SYN-TAX OF THE PRONOU N. § 1 00. 



423 



8i Ion vous propose de faire une ! If they propose to you to commit a 
. Jiiauvaise action, ne la faites pas. bad action, do it not. 
Dissipe tus douleurs, Dissipate thy grief, end, trouble me- 

Et ne rue trouble pas par ces in- not by these unworthy tears. 

dignes pleurs. Boileau. 

(4.) 2d Exception : With reflective verbs, when the regime indi 
direct* is a person, the pronoun representing it must follow the ve;b 
This must also be the case with the following verbs : — 



• to run to. toicards. 



Aller a. to go to, towards. 
Accourir a, ) 
Co air a, $ 

Je m'adresse a lid, a eux. 
Je vais a vous ou a eux. 
Vous courez a lid ou a elle. 
Elle vient a moi ou a vous. 
Vous pensez a nous ou a lid. 
lis songent a eux et a vous. 



Venir a, to come to. 

Boire a, to air ink to. 

Penser a, songer a, to think oj. 

I apply to him, to them. 
I go to you or to them. 
You run to him or to her . 
She comes to me or to you. 
You think of us or of him. 
They think of them and of you. 



(5.) The pronoun used as the indirect regimen of the French, 
which answers to the indirect object of the English preceded by a 
preposition other than to, and to the genitive and ablative cases of 
the Latin, is always, in French, placed after the verb, and preceded 
by one of the prepositions de, of; pour, for; avec, with, &c. 



Je parle de lui et de vous. 

J'ecris pour lid et pour elle. 
Qui rit d'autrui. 
Doit craindre qu'en revanche on 

rie aussi de lui. Moliere. 



I speak of him and of you. 

I write for him and for her. 

He who laughs at others, must fear 
that in their turn, they may also laugh 
at him. 



(6.) When two imperatives, used affirmatively, are joined together 
by the conjunction et, the pronoun regimen of the second mav be 
placed before it, or after it, as in English : — 



After the Verb. 

Sortez et'laissez-moi dormir. 

Go out, and let me sleep. 

Marche, et suis-nous du moins ou 
Thonneurnous appelle. Boileau. 

March and follow us, at least, where 
honor calls us. 

Cessez, vous dis-je et laissez-moi, 
Madame, executer les volontes du 

roi. Racine. 

Cease, I tell you, and suffer me, 
Mojiam, to execute the commands of 
ike King. 



Before the Verb. 

Sortez et me laissez dormir. 

Go out, and let me sleep. 

Laissez-ratfi cette chaine, ou w'ar- 
rachez le jour. La Harfe. 

Leave me- this chain, or depHve me 
of life. 
Vous attendez le roi; parlez et lui 

montrez, 
Contre le fi'ls d'Hector tous les Grecs 

conjures. Racine. 

You expect the king ; speak and, de- 
pict to him all the Gi eeks conspiring 
against tlw son of Hector. 



* Object of the verb preceded in English by to, expressed or under- 
itood, dative of the Latins. 



424 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOU N. § 101 



§ 101. —Respective Place of the Pronouns when two oocu* 

with one Verb. 

[1.) When two pronouns occur, one regime direct (accusative) and 

the other regime indirect (dative), the pronoun regime indirect, if not 

in the third person singular or plural, most precede the pronoun re- 

ime direct : — 



II me le donnera. 

II te le pretera. 

lis nous les montreront. 

Vous nous le direz. 
Quandje puis obliger. ma joie est 

assez grande ; 
Pour n'attendre jamais que Ton, 

me le commande. Boursault. 

Je vous le dis encore, vous n'aurez 
l'estime des hommes que par une 
solide vertu. Mme. De Maintenon. 



He will give it to me. 

He will lend it to thee. 

They will shoiv them to us. 

You will say it to us. 

When I can oblige, my joy is great 
enough, without my wishing to wait 
until they command me (i. e., they 
command it to me.) 

I repeat it to you : you can obtain 
the esteem of men only by real virtue. 



(2.) When the pronoun regime indirect is in the third person singu- 
lar or plural, it must then be placed after the regime direct: — 



On le lui donnera. 
Vous le lui preterez. 
Nous ne le leur preterons pas. 
Vous le leur ecrirez. 
Le plus sur appui de l'homme est 
Dieu. et vous voulez le lui ravir. 
Boiste. 



They will give it to him, 
You will lend it to him. 
We will not lend it to them. 
You will write it to them. 
The surest support of man is Goa 
and you wish to deprive him of it. 



(3.) Remark : The reflective pronoun se, used as an indirect regi- 
men, makes an exception to the above rule, as it takes precedence of 
the direct regimen : — 



If men think ill of each other, at 
least they do not say it to each other. 



Si les hommes pensent mal les 
uns des autres, du moins ils ne se le 
disent pas. Anonymous. 

(4.) The Rules (1.) and (2.), also the Exception (3.), apply to tne 
imperative used negatively; but Rule (1.) cannot apply to the impera- 
tive used affirmatively. 

Examples of the Imperative used Negatively. 



Do not give it to tis. 

Do not lend it to tlvem. 

Let them say it to their Aves. 



Ne nous U donnez pas [Rule (1.)]. 
Ne le leur pretez pas [Rule (2.)]. 
Qu'ils ne se le disent pas [Remark 

Du sang de tant de rois c'est lu- 

nique heritage ; 
Ne me l'enviez pas ; laissez-moi mon 

partage. Voltaire. 

(6.) When the imperative used affirmatively has two regimen^ 



Of the blood of so many kings, zl u 
my only inheritance ; do not envy it 
(to me), leave me my portion. 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. § 102, 103. 



42c 



the pronoun regime direct precedes the regime indirect in all the 
persons : — 



Envoyez-Ze-m^. 

Dounei.-le-nous. 

Qu'ils le lui donnent. 

Montrez-Ze-wtfi, ce mortel privi- 
.egie. Ballanche. 

Mets-le-toi dans l'esprit ; qui fait 
mal, trouve mal. Anonymous. 



Send it to me. 

Give it to us. 

Let them give it to him. 

Show him to me, that privileged 
mortal. 

Put this into thy mind; he who 
does evil, finds evil. 



§ 102. — Rule. 
When two pronouns in different cases, representing rational be- 
ings, occur, and the pronoun in the regime direct is in the first, or in 
the second person, this pronoun must be placed according to the 
general rules ; and the pronoun in the regime indirect must follow 
the verb, and be preceded by the proper preposition :— 



II nous a recommandes a eux. 

II vous a presente a elle. 

Nul ne peut se comparer a lui, pour 
faire en peu de temps, un travail 
fort inutile. La Bruyere. 



He has recommended us to them. 

He has presented you to her. 

No one can compa, <? himself to him, 
for doing in a short time, a vera 
useless piece of work. 



§ 103. — Rule. 

(1.) The personal pronouns lui, elle, eux, elles, used as indirect re- 
gimens of verbs and preceded by a preposition, can only relate 
to persons, and not to things. The expressions of or from it ; of o? 
from them, when relating to things, should be rendered by en [{ 39, 
(17.)]:- 

J speak of it, of them; I give of it 
{some). 

I prize valor too highly to be jealous 
of it. 

He who is in prosperity should feai 
to abuse it. 



Ten parle ; j'en donne. 

J'aime trop la valeur. pour en etre 
jaloux. La Harpe. 

Celui qui est dans la prosperite, 
doit craindre d'en abuser. 

Fen£lon. 



(2.) The relative pronoun y [J 39, (18.) 5 HI]? is used in French 
in relation to things, for the indirect regimen, expressed in English by 
at or to (dative). It means at or to it; or to them ; thereto, &c: — 
J'y songerai, / will think of it. | Faites-?/ attention, Pay attention to it. 



C'estlorsque nous sommes eloignes 
de notre pays, que nous sentons 
surtout 1' instinct qui nous y at- 
tache. Chateaubriand. 

Tous nos jours vont a la mort, le 
dernier y arrive. Montaigne. 

Les choses de la terre ne valent 
pas qu'on h'y attache. Nicole. 



It is when we are far from our coun- 
try that we feel, above all, the irir 
stinct which attaches us to it. 

All our days travel towards death, 
the last one amvts at it {reaches 
it). 

The things of the earth ai e n >t uwrth 
our attachment to them. 



426 SSTNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. §104,105,106. 



§ lOt. — Place of En and Y. 

\1.) Th) place of en and y is the same as that prescribed by Ruls 
(1.) 5 100, for the personal pronouns. They are also subject to Ex- 
ception (2.) and Remark (3.) of the same §. See examples above. 

(2.) En and y are always placed after the other pronouns re- 
gimes : — 



II nous en a parle. 

II lui en a dit quelque chose. 

'Psulez-lui-eii. 

Ne nous en parle z pas. 

Je Vy ai renvoye. 

Renvoyez-nous-y. 

Ne nous y renvoyez pas. 



He has spoken to us of it. 

He has told him something ofU. 

Speak to him of it. 

Do not speak to us of it. 

I have ref erica him to it. 

Refer, or send us back w U. 

Do not refer us to it. 



§ 105. — Repetition of the Pronouns, Regimes. 
These pronouns must, in French, be repeated before every verb :■ 

Ah ! mon enfant, que je voudrais 
bien vous voir un peu, vous enten- 
dre, vous embrasser, vous voir pas- 
ser. Mme. DeS£vign£. 

Je veux le voir, le prier, le presser, 
Timportuner, le flechir. 

Bescherelle. 



Ah! my child, how I would like to 
see you for a short time, to hear you, 
embrace you, see you pass. 

I will see him, entreat him, press 
him, importune him, bend him. 



§ 106. — The Possessive Pronoun. 

(1.) The possessive pronoun, in French, is always preceded by 
the article [$ 34, (2.) (3.)] which, as well as the pronoun itself, agrees 
in gender and number with the noun represented [$ 35, (1.)] : — 



L'ambition ni la fumee ne tou- 
chent point un cceur comme le mien. 
J. J. Rousseau. 

Au lieu de deplorer la mort des 
autres, je veux apprendre de vous 
a rendre la mienne sainte. 

BOSSUET. 



Neither ambition nor smoke have 
power on such a heart as mine. 

Instead of beioailing the death of 
others, I wish to learn from you how 
to render my own holy. 



(2.) The pronouns le notre, le voire [§ 34, (3.)], &c., unlike the 
adjectives notre, votre, &c, always take the circumflex accent : — 

The music of the ancient Greeks 
was very different from ours. 



La musique des anciens Grecs 
§tait tres differente de la notre. 
Voltaire. 



(3.) When the English possessive pronouns, mine, thine, &c, 

come after the verb to be, they are often rendered into French by the 

Indirect pronouns a moi, a toi : — 

Ce livre est a w.oi. That book is mine, 

Ces plumes sont elles a vous ? Are these pens yours? 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. § 107. 



427 



§ 107. — The Demonstrative Pronoun. 

(1.) Tk3 demonstrative pronouns [§ 36] can never be placed be- 
fore nouns. They merely represent them : — 

La meilleure le^n est celle des 
exempies. La Harpe. 

N ; oublie jamais les bienfaits que 
tu as rectus; oublie promptement 
ceux que tu as accordes. 

Boiste. 



The best lesson is that of examples. 

Never forget the benefits which thou 
hast received; forget quickly those 
which thou hast conferred. 



(2.) The pronouns celui, celle, ceux, celles, as has been said [§ 37, 
(2.)] ? are often used absolutely, not only in the nominative, but also 
in the regimes, direct and indirect. They have then the sense of he 
who, him whom, of whom ; that which, of which. They apply, in this 
sense, as well to things as to persons : — 



Celui qui compte dix amis, n'en 
a pas un. Malesherbes. 

On ne saurait forcer celui qui ne 
veut pas. 

L'harmonie la plus douce est la 
voix de celle qu'on aime. 

La Bruyere. 



He who reckons ten friends ,has not 
one. 

We cannot compel him who will not. 

The sioeetest harmony is the voice 
of her whom we love. 



{3.) The French use celui, celle, ceux, celles, indifferently for this, 
that. When they institute a contrast or a comparison, they suffix the 
adverbs* ci (ici) and Id to the pronouns [§ 37, (3.)] : — 



Corneille nous assujettit a ses 
caracteres et a ses idees ; Racine 
se conforme aux notres. Celui-ld 
peint les hommes, comme ils dev- 
raient etre, celui-ci les peint tels 
qu'ils sont. La Bruyere. 



Corneille subjects us to his charac- 
ters and to 'his ideas ; Racine con- 
forms himself to ours. That one {the 
former) paints men as they should be, 
this one {the latter) paints them as 
they are. 



(4.) Celui-ci, celle-ci, ceux-ci,*celles-ci, may be used absolutely in 
French in the sense of this one, that one, &c. : — 



On la vit, toutes les semaines, es- 
suyer les larmes de celui-ci, pour- 
voir aux besoins de celui-ld. 

Fl^chier. 



Every week, she was seen wiping 
the tears of this one , providing for the. 
wants of that one. 



(5.) Ceci and cela are always used absolutely. They serve to 
point out things only. They can, of course, never be prefixed to 
noun [§ 37, (5.)] : — 

* The same adverbs produce the same difference in meaning with the 
demonstrative adjectives ce, cet, "&c. They are not placed immediately 
after those adjectives, but after the nouns which they determine : cet 
homme-ci. this man, cet homme-la, that . man. The commencement of 
Remark (3.) applies also to the adjectives ce, cet, cette, ces, &c. 



428 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN,- 



108. 



Tant que le jour est long, il gronde 

entre ses dents, 
Fais ceci, fais cela, va, viens, monte, 
descends , Rkgnard. 

Je suis un peu surpris de tout ceci. 

Massillon. 

Vous n'avez pu desavouer cela. 

Pascal. 



The livelong day he mutters between 
his teeth, do this, do that, go, contc, 
go up, come aUrivn. 

I am a little surprised at all this. 

You have not been able to disavtw 
that. 



§ 108. — Remarks on the Demonstrative Pronoijjs Ce. 
(1.) Ce, when used as a demonstrative pronoun, is almost always 
construed with the verb tire, or followed by a relative pronoun : — 



C'est un poids bien pesant qu'un 
grand nom a soutenir. 

Montesquieu. 
Ce qui me plait c'est sa modestie. 

• L^VIZAC. 



A great name is a very heavy weighi 
to sustain. 

That which phases me is her mod- 
esty. 

(2.) Ce is used for he, she, they, preceding any part of the verb to 
be, when that verb is followed by a noun, or an adjective used sub- 
stantively and preceded by the, a or an, or a possessive or demonstra- 
tive adjective. 

(3.) Observe, that the verb etre following the pronoun ce, is put in 
the plural, when the noun following that verb is plural. The pro- 
noun ce, however, remains unchanged. 



C'est un trompeur. 

C'est la femme que je cherche. 

C'etaient mes amis. 

Ce seraient paroles exquises. 

Si c'etait un grand qui parlat. 

Moliere. 
N'etaienWe pas les memes hom- 
ines 1 Chateaubriand. 

All those sentences are elliptical 
the ce : — 

Cet homme est un trompeur. 

Cette femme est la femme que je 
cherche. 

(4.) This is, that is, these are, those are, may also be rendered by 

£est ici, ce sont ici : — 

*This is the place, 
I Those are my children. 

Void, voild, are, however, to be preferred to c'est ici, &c : — 

I This is the place. 

Those are my children, 

(5.) Ce answers to the English pronoun it, when this *atter wurcl 
stands as the nominative of the verb to fo, without defjiite reference 
to an antecedent * — 



He is a deceitful man. 

She is the vsoman whom I seek. 

They were my friends. 

They would be exquisite tvords. 

If a great man were to speak then. 

Were they not the same men ? 

a noun being understood after 

That man is a deceitful one 
That woman is the woman whom 1 

seek. 



Oest ici la place. 

Ce sont la mes enfants. 



Void la place. 
Voild mes enfants. 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. §109. 



429 



Ce n'est que par les sens que Fame 
|>eut s'instruiie. Fontanes. 

Ce fut (Tune retraite de patres et 
d'aventuriers, que sortirent les con- 
querants de l'univers. Rollin. 

C'est un default capital qu'il faut 
eviter dans quelque sujet que ce soit. 
Voltaire. 



It is only through the senses that the 
mind can receive instruction. 

It was from a refuge for shepherds 
and adventurers, that emerged the 
conquerors of the world. 

This is a capital defect which should 
be avoided in whatever subject it may 



(6.) When the verb etre, however, is used unipersonally, and fol 
lowed by an adjective [§ 87, (3.)], the pronoun it is not rendered by 
ce, but by the pronoun used with all unipersonal verbs (il) : — 

II est necessaire d'etudier. It is necessary to study. 



II est plus difficile pour les na- 
tions que pour les individus, de re- 
couvrer l'estime de leurs voisins 
quand elles Font perdue. Boiste. 



It is more difficult for nations than 
for individuals to recover the esteem 
of their neighbors, when they have 
lost it. 



§ 109. — The Relative Pronoun. 

(1.) 1 ne relative pronoun que, whom, which, can in French never 

be suppressed like the corresponding English pronouns :* — 

Les l^anges que nous donnons, i The praises (which) ive give, hart 
se rap portent toujours par quelque I always in some way a relation to our- 
chose * nous-memes. selves. 

Massillon. I 

(2 ) The pronouns quel, que, quoi, lequel, represent the English 

pronouns which or what used interrogatively. 

i. Quel is used before a noun in a determinative sense : — 

Quel livre lirons-nous 1 What or which book shall we read * 

Quel est done votre mal ? What then is your ailment ? 

Moliere. 

2. Que is used before a verb :— 

Que dites-vous 1 What do you say ? 

3. Quoi is used as an exclamation : — 

Quoi ! est-ce vous % What I is it you ? 

4. Lequel, used interrogatively, means which one : — 
laquelle vou 



Voici deux plumes 
Vez-vous 1 



Here are two pens; which (whic/i 
one) will you have ? 



(3.) Qui is also used interrogatively for the regime direct, an 
preceded by a preposition, for the regime indirect. It then means 
whom, of whom, to whom, whose, &c. : — 



Qui avez-vous vu 1 

De qui tenez-vous cette nouvelle 7 

A qui est ce livre 1 



Whom have you seen ? 

From whom have you this news ? 

Wlwse book is this ? 



* The conjunction, that, is often omitted in English ; its equivalent qu^ 
must always be expressed in French. 

Je crois qu' il est ici. I believe (that) he is here. 



430 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN.— § 110-113. 

§ 110. — The Pronoun En. 

(1.) We have already [} 39, (17.) 5 95, (5.) $ 103, Rule (1.;] madt 
several remarks on this pronoun 

(2.) En signifies of it, from it, tenth it, about it, of them, from them 
&c., expressed or understood. Though en is by some French writers 
often used in relation to persons, their example should be imitated 
n such cases only as that presented by the example [§ 92, (2.)]. 

(3.) En, used as an equivalent for the English some or any, ex- 

ressed or understood, preserves its nature of an indirect regimen, 

and has, in the same manner as the French article placed before a 

noun used partitively, the sense of of it, of them; the word partie 

being understood : — 

Avez vous des pommes 1 \ Have you apples ? 

That is, some, or rather, ofihe, a part of the apples. 

J'en ai. I have, I have some ; I have oj 

I them or I have {apart) of them. 

(4.) En sometimes recalls the whole or part of a proposition: — 



L'on ne saurait voir, sans en etre 

pique, 
Posseder par un autre un bien qu'on 

a manque. Moliere. 

Wen disputons plus ; chacun a sa 
pensee. Moliere. 



We cannot see, without being 
piqued, another person in possession 
of goods which we have failed in ob- 
taining. 

Let us no longer argue about thisi 
every one has his own opinion. 



§ 111. — The Pronoun Y. 
Some remarks have already been made on this pronoun [§ 39, 
(18.) 5 103, (2.)]. Y means to it, at it, to them, at them. It is seldom 
used in relation to persons or animals, but frequently in relation to 
things : — 



Je re9ois votre lettre, ma chere 
enfant, et j'?/ fais reponse avec 
precipitation. Mme. de SevignS. 

Tirer vanite de quelque chose, 
c'est prouver, qu'on v?y est pas 
iccoutume. Boiste. 

Chargez-vous de cette affaire ; 
donnez-y tous vos soins. 

Boniface. 



I receive your letter, my dear chila t 
and answer it {make answer thereto) 
in haste. 

To feel vanity on account of any 
thing, is proving, that we are noi 
accustomed to it. 

Take this affair upon yowseif; 
give all your care to it. 



g 112. — Place of the Pronouns En and Y. 
See J 104, (1.) (2.) 

§ 113. — The Indefinite Pronoun On [§ 41, (4.)]. 
(1.) On, which is very extensively used in the French language, is 
said only of persons. The verb, of which it is always tVe nomioa. 



8 FN TAX OF THE PRONOUN. § 113. 



431 



live, must be in the singular. This pronoun is of the masculine 
gender. [See (2.)] On is used in French for people, one, some one, 
we, (hey, whenever these words have a general and indefinite meaning, 
mid do not refer to any particular word : — 

On pardonne aisement le mal I We, (people, they, fyc.) eadly for- 
involontaire. De la Boutraye. | give 'involuntary injuries. 

O.i cherche les rieurs, et moi je People (they, we) seek laughing or 
es evite. La "Fontaine. | merry people, and I avoid them. 

Another translation of the above sentences, will show us that tha 
pronoun on often enables the French to make use of the active voice, 
which they always prefer to the passive.* Thus the two examples 
last given, may be rendered as follows : — 



Active Voice in French. 

On pardonne aisement le mal 
mvolontaire. 

On cherche les rieurs, mais moi 
je les evite. 



Passive Voice in English. 

Involuntary injuries are easily for- 
given. 

Merry or joyful people are generally 
sought ; for my part, I avoid them. 



A few more examples, from some of the best French authors, 
elucidating the use of this pronoun, will be useful to the student :-— 



Quand on est chretien de quelque 
sexe que Von soit, il n'est pas permis 
d'etre lache. Fen^lon. 

On peut etre honnete nomine, et 
faire mal des vers. Moliere. 

On airne peu celui qui n'ose 
aimer personne. Delille. 

A.-t-on jamais pleure d'avoir fait 
son devoir 1 Chamfort. 

Quand on a meme but, rarement 
on s'accorde. Lebrun. 

Artistes, ecrivains, poetes, si vous 
vous copiez toujours, on ne vous 
copiera jamais. 

Bernardin de St. Pierre. 



A Christian of lohichever sex he may 
be, is not allowed to be cowardly. 

One may be a worthy man, and 
make bad verses. 

We feel but little love for him who 
dares love nobody. 

Have we ever grieved on accowrvt 
of having done our duty? 

Those who have the same aim, 
rarely agree. 

Artists, writers, poets! if you al- 
ways copy each other, no person will 
copy you. 



(2.) If the word, on, denotes definitely a female, the adjective re- 
lating to it, takes the feminine termination : — 



Quand on est belle, on ne l'ignore 
pas. L'Academie. 



When one (a lady) is handsome, 
she is not ignorant of it. 



(3.) The pronoun, on, must be repeated before every verb : — 



On leve rancre, on part, on fuit loin 

de la terre, 
On decouvrait deja les bords de 

lAngleterre. Voltaire. 



They raise the anchor, they depa-t I, 
they flee far from the land, already 
they discovered the shores of England. 



* On dit, it is said ; on rapporte, it is related ; on craint. it is feared, 
&c. Cela se fait ainsi, literally, that makes itself thus, that is madi in ihu 
manner , &c. 



432 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB,- 



114. 



§ 114.— The Verb.- 



-Agreement of the Verb with its 
Subject. 



(1.) The verb agrees with its nominative or subject, whether thai 
nominative precedes or follows : — 

L'homme est ne pour regner sur 
tous les animaux. Voltaire. 

Les hommes sont encore enfants a 
soixante ans. Aubert. 

Par ces portes sortaient les fieres 
legions. Saint Victor. 



Man is born to reign over all tM 
animals. 

Men are still children (even) td 
sixty. 

Through those gates issued the 
proud legions. 



(2.) When a verb has two or more singular nominatives connected 
by the conjunction et, the verb is put in the plural : — 

La colere et la precipitation sont 
deux choses fort opposees a la pru- 
dence. Fenblon. 

La violence et la vertu ne peuvent 
rien Tune sur l'autre. Pascal. 



Anger and precipitation are two 
things very much opposed to pno- 
dence. 

Violence and virtue have no power 
over each other. 



(3.) When a verb has several singular nominatives not connected 
by et, it is put in the singular or in the plural according to circum- 
stances : — 

1. It is put in the singular, if the nominatives are in some way 
synonymous : — 



La douceur, la bonte du grand 
Henri, a ete celebree de mille 
louanges. Pelisson. 

D'ou peut venir cet ennui, ce 
degout % 

Colin d'Harleville. 



The mildness, the goodness of the 
great Henry, has been celeh-ated by a 
thousand praises. 

Whence can proceed that ennui % 
that disgust ? 



2, When, in a series of nominatives, the last has more force 
or mterest attached to it, and therefore, makes us, as it were, overlook 
thfe others : — 

f e sacrifice — votre interet, votre I This sacrifice — -your interest, your 
bonneur, Dieu vous le commande! \ honor, God commands it ! 

3. The verb is put in the plural, when the affirmation is intended 
to be made of all the nominatives taken collectively, and not of each 
In particular ; — 



La douceur, les soupirs de cette 
femme infortunee ne purent le 
fleehir. Wailly. 

Savez vous, si demain, 
Sa liberie, ses jours, seront en votre 

main 1 Racine. 



The sweetness, the sighs of that un- 
fortunate woman could not move 
him. 

Do you know, if to-morrow* 

his liberty, his life, will be in your 
power ? 



^4.) On the forms of the verbs when connected by ou, See L. 84, 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. § 115, 116. 



433 



§ 115 - -Number of the Verb after a Collective Noun. 

(1.) Every verb having, as its subject, a general collective noun 
l\ 3, (6.)], preceded by the article, such as la totality V infinite, &e, s 
takes the number of that noun : — 



XJarviec des mndeles/«£ entiere- 
inent detruite. L'Acad^mie. 

La multitude des bonnes choses 
que Von trouve dans un ouvrage, 
Jail perdre de vue la tnultiplicite 
ies mauvaises. Caminade. 



The army of the infidels, was en- 
tirely destroyed. 

Tlie multitude of the good things 
which we find in a work, makes us 
lose sight of the multiplicity of t/ie bad 
ones. 



(2.) When a partitive collective noun [§ 3, (6.)] occurs as the sub- 
ject of a proposition, the verb agrees with that noun, if it occupies 
the first rank in the thought of the speaker or writer. 

The verb agrees, on the contrary, with the plural noun following 
the collective word, if the collective acts only a secondary part, or 
if it is employed only to add an accessory idea of number : — 

Agreement with the folloiving Noun, 



Agreement with the Collective. 

Une troupe d'assassins entra dans 
la chambre de Coligny. 

Voltaire. 

A gang of assassins entered Co- 
hgny's chamber . 

Une nuee de traits obscurcit Fair. 

A cloud of arrows darkened the air. 

Cette espece de paons par ait avoir 
epiouve les memes effets par la 
m-Sme cause. Buffon. 

Tliat species of peacocks seems to 
have experienced the same effects 
through the same cause. 



Une troupe de nymphes couron- 
nees de fleurs, nageaient autour de 
son char. Fene'lon. 

A troop of young nymphs, crowned 
with flowers, ivere swimming around 
her chariot. 

Une nuee de barbares desolerent la 
pays. L'Academie. 

A cloud of barbarians desolated the 
country. 

Cette espece de chiens qu'on ap- 
pelle chiens de Laconie, ne vivent 
que dix ans. Boileau. 

That species of dogs which they call 
haconian dogs, live only ten yea?'S. 



§ 116. — Number of the Verb Etre after the Pronoun Ce. 

(L) The verb etre preceded or followed by ce, as the grammatical 
subject, takes the number of the noun placed in apposition with tbai 
pronoun [j 108, (3.)] :— 



Ce sont les m<Burs qui font la 
bonne compagnie. La Chaussee. 

Sont-ce des religieux et des pre- 
tres qui parlent ajnf \ 1 sont-ce des 
Chretiens 1 Pascal. 



It is morals which form good com- 
pany. 

Are they monks and priests who 
speak so ? are they Christians ? 



(2.) The verb eire may also be put in the plural, whet' the pro- 
nouns eux and elles are put in apposition with the pronoun ce. This 
rule, however, is optional, as the examples will show. Before ncus 

19 



434 



SYNTAX OF THE V E R B. § 117, 118. 



and vous similarly 'placed, the verb is always in the singular : cesi 
nous; c'est vous : — 



Singular. 

G'est eux qui out bati ce superbe 
labyrinthe. Bossuet. 

It is they ivho have built that sio- 
perb labyrinth. 



Plural. 
Ce sont eux qui viennent. 

Bescherellf., 

It is they who come. 



§ 117. — The Verb relating to several Nouns in Differfni 

Persons. 
A verb having several subjects in different persons, is put in the 
piural, and assumes the termination of the first person in preference 
to that of the second, and that of the second in preference to that 
of the third. It may then be preceded by the plural pronoun of the 
person preferred, recapitulating, as it were, all the other subjects : — 

Votre pere et moi, nous avons ete 
long temps ennemis l'uu de 1 'autre. 
F£nelon. 

Allez ; vous et vos semblables 
n'etes point faits pour etre trans- 
plants, Montesquieu. 

§ 118. — Use of the Tenses. — The Present of the Indica- 
tive. 
(1.) This tense denotes what exists, or is taking place at the time 
we speak : — 

Je lis ; vous parlez. | / read ; you speak. 

(2.) The French have only one form of the indicative present :— 
Je lis means, therefore, I read, do read, or am reading. 
(3.) The indicative present is 'used in French, as well as in Eng. 
Ksh, for expressing things which are and will always be true : — 



Your father and I have long been 
enemies to each other. 

Go ; you and such as you are not 
fit to be transplanted. 



God is eternal, his power is bound- 
less, and his clemency is great. 



Pieu est eternel, sa puissance est 
sans bornes, et sa clemence est 
grande. GiraultDuvivier. 

(4.) It is often used to express a proximate future:— 



Je suis de retour dans un mo- 
ment. MoliSre. 

Si Titus a parle, s'il Yepouse, je 
nars. Racine, 



I shall be back in a moment. 

If Titus has rpoken, if he marrisi 

her, I go (will go). 



(5.) The p -esent is frequently used for the past, to awaken atten- 
tion, and plac the event, as it were, before the reader : — 

I'ai vu. Seii_T * nr, j'ai vu votre 
malheureux u'lfe, 



Iiaiii6 par les caevaux que samain 

a nourris: 
II veut les rappeler, mais sa voix 

U&ejfraie. Racinb. 



/ saw, my lord, I saw your un- 
fortunate son dragged by '-he horses 
which his own iand has fed; ht 
wishes t> recall ihem, but hi: void 
frightens them 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. — §119,120. 435 

§ 119. — The Imperfect. 
(1.) The mperfeet, or simultaneous past, is used to express some- 
thing which was in progress, while another thing was taking place. 
It leaves the beginning, duration, and end of an action undeter- 
mined :— 

J'ecrivais, quand je re9US votre I J was writing, when I received 
Jettre. | your letter. 

(2.) The French imperfect, as may be seen in the above example, 
represents the English past tense formed of the auxiliary to be> and 
the participle present of a principal verb. 

(3.) The imperfect is also used to express repeated or customary 
action. It may then often be rendered in English by the infinitive 
of the verb preceded by " used to" : — 



Lorsque petals a Londres, ^allais 
me promener le matin, ensuite je 
dxnais, et je passais le reste de la 
journee a lire et a ecrire. 



WJien I was in London, I walked 
(used to walk) in the morning, after- 
wards dined (usually dined), and 
spent (usually) the remainder of the 
day in reading and writing. 

(4.) The use of this tense will be further explained in the next 
Section. 

§ 120. — The Past Definite. 

(1.) The past definite indicates an action performed at a time en- 
tirely past : — 



I went to London, where I saw 
your father ; I finished my business 
in that city, and returned hither 
immediately. 

Mr. such-a-one wrote last evening 
six verses to Miss such-a-one. 



J'al^ii a Londres, ou je vis votre 
pere ; je finis mes affaires dans 
cette ville, et revins aussitot ici. 

M. un tel ecrivit hier au soir un 
alxain a Mademoiselle une telle. 

MOLIERE. 

(2.) The past definite can only be used, as we have seen above, 
when the time at which an action took place is entirely elapsed. 
We cannot, therefore, use it in connection with the words to-day, this 
morning, this week, this month, this year, &e. [See J 121, Past Indefi- 
nite.] We may use it in speaking of yesterday, last week, last year, 
&c. : — 



Je vous envoie, mon cher frere, 
line lettre que ^ecrivis hier pour 
Madame de Laval. F^n^lon. 



/ send you, my dear brother, a let- 
ter which I wrote ijesterday for Ma- 
dame de Laval. 



(3.) The imperfect may almost always be rendered in English by 
the participle present of the verb and the auxiliary to le; or -by pre- 
fixing " used to" to the infinitive mood. The preterite definite can 
aevei be so rendered. 



436 



syntax or the; verb. — 8 120. 



(4.) The imperfect might be called the descriptive tense of the 
French. 

(5.) The past definite might be called the narrative tense. It ex- 
presses that which took place at some time fully past. We will 
endeavor to illustrate this difference between these two tenses. — A 
traveller has entered a wood and discovered a retired cottage ; he 
wishes to describe what he saw there, and makes use of the imper- 
fect or descriptive tense ; he says : — 



Un vieillard se promenait sous les 
arbres ; il tenait un livre a la main ; 
de temps en temps, il elevait les 
yeux vers le ciel, ou les couvrait de 
la main, et semblait s'abimer dans 
une profonde reverie. Devant la 
porte de la cabane etait assise une 
femme qui bergait un enfant sur ses 
genoux ; elle etait pale ; ses cheveux 
llottaient au gre du vent ; des larmes 
coulaient Je long de ses joues, &c. 



An old man w^s walking under the 
trees ; he held {was holding) a book in 
his hand ; from time to time he raised 
his eyes towards heaven, or concealed 
them with his hand, and seemed to 
sink into a profound revery. Before 
the door of the hut, sat {was sitting) 
a female rocking (ivhowas rocking) a 
child on her knees ; she was pale ; her 
hair waved (was waving) at the 
mercy of the wind; tears flowed {were 
flowing) down her cheeks. 

The traveller has here drawn a picture of what presented itself to 
his eyes, as he approached the cottage. Not content with represent- 
ing merely the then present situation of things, he wishes also to 
narrate what took place. He has described the theatre on which 
the occurrence took place, which he is going to relate ; he now pro- 
ceeds to the narrative, and uses the past definite or narrative tense : — . 



Je m'approchai du vieillard ; lors- 
qu'il m'apergut, il s'avanga vers moi, 
me salua, et me pria de ne pas trem- 
bler cette paisible retraite du mal- 
heur. II retourna a la cabane, prit 
l'enfant des bras de la femme, et 
rentra ; elle le suivil, &c. 



J approached the old man ; when he 
perceived me he came towards me y 
greeted me, and besought me not to 
disturb this peaceful retreat of the 
unfortunate. He returned to the cot~ 
tage, took the child from the woman's 
arms, and went in ; she followed him. 



Another example might be taken from La Fontaine's well-known 
fable :-- 



LE CORBEAU ET LE RENARD. 

Maitre corbeau sur un arbre per- 

che, 
Tenait en son bee un fromage ; 
Maitre renard, par l'odeur alleche, 
Lui tint a peu pres ce langage. 



THE RAVEN AND THE FOX. 

Master raven perched vpon a tree, 
Jield (ivas holding) in his beak a 
cheese; master fox, attracted by the 
smell, addressed him nearly in the fol- 
lowing words. 



Here the poet uses the imperfect of tenir in describing the situa- 
tion in which t.ie f>x found the raven, but in relating the action of 
the fox, La Fontaina uses the narrative tense of the same verb. 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. § 121. 



437 



The commencement of the first book of Telemaque, offers an ex- 
cellent illustration of what we have here advanced on the use of the 
.mperftct and the past def nite. 

§ 121. — The Past Indefinite. 

(1.) The past indefinite expresses an action entirely completed, 
but performed at a time of which some part is not yet elapsed, as to- 
day, this month, this year, &c. 



Le roi m'# nomme aujourd'hui 
archeveque de Cambray. F£ n£lon. 

Ce matin j'&i trouve le pave si glis- 
sant, que '^aipense que si je venais 
a tomber sur le bras droit, je serais 
tout a fait desempare. 

Bkrnardin de St. Pierre. 

Je Vat defeudu {see (2.) below) 
cent fois de racier ton mediant 
violon; cependant, je't'ai entendu ce 
matin — Ce matin ] Ne vous souvient- 
il pas que vous vie le mites [§ 120 
(2.)] hier en pieces 7 Palaprat. 



The king appointed me to-day 
archbishop of Cambray. 

This morning I found the street so 
slippery, that I thought in case 1 
happened to fall on my right arm, 1 
shtncld then be completely helpleis. 

" / have forbidden thee a hundred 
times to scrape thy wretched violin ; ne- 
vertheless, I heard thee this morning" 
" This morning! Do you not re- 
collect that you broke it to pieces yes- 
terday ?" 



(2.) The past indefinite is, also, used with regard to a time en 
tirely past, but not specified : — 
Les fruits de la terre ont ete la 



The fruits of the earth were the 
first aliments of mankind. 

The French gained the battle of 
Marengo. 



premiere nourriture des hommes. 

GlRAULT DUVIVIER. 

Les Francais ont gagne la bataille 
de Marengo. 

(3.) When the time is specified and entirely elapsed, the past in- 
definite is by many of the best French writers, used indifferently 
with the past definite : — 

Past Indefinite. 
Je vous ai ecrit, il y a quinze 
jours. The Same. 



Past Definite: 

Huit jours apres son depart, il 
m'ecrivit une lettre. 

Bernardin de St. Pierre. 

A week after his departure, he wrote 
me a Utter. 

Je fus bien fache hier, ma chere 
cousine, de vous avoir quittee avec 
tant de precipitation. F£n£lon. 

J was very sorry yesterday, my dear 
cousin, for having left you in so much 
haste. 



I wrote to you a fortnight ago. 

Hier en travaillant a. mon qua- 
trieme dialogue, j'«z eprouve un 
vrai plaisir. Mirabeau. 

Yesterday, while working at my 
fourth dialogue, I experienced real 
pleasure. 

(4.) When the first verb of a sentence is put in the past indefinite, 
every other verb of that sentence, and of the sentences referring to 
it, should be in the same tense : — 

On avez-vans ete ? Where lave you been? 

J'ai d'abord ete a l'eglise, ensuite / first went to church; and then 



le suis venu diner 



came home U dinner. 



438 SYNTAX OF 1 HE VERB. — § 122, 123, 124. 

§ 122. — The Past Anterior. 

The past anterior expresses what took place immediately before 
another event which is also past : the latter event being usually the 
result of, or dependent upon the former : — 



When I had perceived my error, 1 
was ashamed of my bad conduct ts 
wards aim. 



Quand feus reconnu inon erreur, 
*e fus honteux de mauvais procedes 
que j'avais eus pour lui. 

GlRAULT DUVIVIER. 

See (3.) of the § below. 

§ 123. — The Pluperfect. 

(1.) The pluperfect marks an event not only past in itself, but as 
past with regard to another past event : — 

J had breakfasted, when you came 



Vavais dejeune, quand vous 
vintes me demander. 

GlRAULT DUVIVIER. 



to inquire for me. 



(2.) The pluperfect having as its auxiliary the imperfect of the 

verbs avoir, or tire, partakes of the signification of that tense. It 

may, therefore, often be used to denote customary action : — 

Des que yavais lu quelques pages, I As soon as I had read a few pages, 
je me promenais. | / used to take a walk. 

In such cases, it generally precedes or follows another verb in the 
imperfect. 

(3.) When the action is not a customary one, and the sentence 
commences w T ith one of the adverbs quand, lorsque, aussitot que, des 
que, &c, the past anterior is generally used : — 

Des que $eus lu quelques pages je I As soon as I had read a few pages, 
sortis. I J went out. 

§ 124. — The Two Futures. 

(1.) The future simple is used to signify what will be, or will take 
place, at a time not yet come : — 

Votre frere partira demain. | Your brother will go to-morrow. 

(2.) The future is used, ih French, after an adverb of time, in cases 

where the English use the present of the indicative : — 

Quand vous viendrez, vous appor- I When you come, you will bring my 
terez mon livre. | book. 

(3.) It has sometimes the sense of the imperative in sentences like 
the following: — 



Croira qui voudrz l'historien Ca- 
l>itolin et quelques autres ecrivains 
\ui font danser les elephants sur la 
eorde. Feraud. 



Believe who ivill the historian C&- 
pitolinus and several other wiiters, 
who mal e elephants dance on a rope. 



SYNTAX OF THE VE R B. § 125, 12$, 127. 409 

(4.) Tie future anterior is used to signify what will have been at 
% future period ; it is also used after an adverb of time in cases where 
the past indefinite is used in E aglish : — 

Q.uaud fauraifird mes affaires, je I When I have finished my affairs, 1 
Tous irai voir. Girajlt Duvivier. j will go and see you. 

§ 125. — The Two Conditionals. 

(1.) The conditional present denotes what would take place unde 
a certain condition : — 



Nous goiiterwns bien des jouis- 
sances. si nous savions faire un bon 
usage du temps. 

Girault Duvivier. 



We should have many enjoyments, 
if we knew how to make a good, use 

of time. 



(2.) The conditional past denotes what would have taken place, 
at a time past, if the condition on which it depended, had been ful- 
filled:— 

II serait alle a la campagne, si le I He would have gone into the coun~ 
temps le lui avait permis. | try, if the weather had allowed him. 

(3.) The two futures, and the two conditionals, cannot, in French, 
follow the conjunction si, meaning in case that. The indicative pres- 
ent is then used instead of the future, and the imperfect instead of 
the conditional. This rule is often violated by the French, but sel- 
dom by the Americans or English who have acquired a good knowl 
edge of the French language. 

§ 126. — The Imperative. 

(1.) The imperative is used to express a command, exhortation, 
permission, or ent* °aty : — 

Co?inais-moi tout entiere. Know me entirely, 

Corneille. 
Ah ! demeurez, seigneur, etdaignez 
m'ecouter. Racine. 

Ne tar dons plus, marchons et s'il 

faut que je meure, 
Mourons. Racine. 



Ah! remain, my lord, and deign 
to listen to me. 

Let us tarry no longer ; let us fit- 
ceed ; and,, if J must die, let us die, 



§ 127. — The Subjunctive. 
(1.) Tbe subjunctive is the mode of doubt or indecision : — 

Obeis si tu veux qu'on fobeisse I Obey, if tliou vnshest that one day 
111 jour. Voltaire. [ others may obey thee. 

(2.) A verb, which is governed by the conjunction que, must be 



440 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. §127. 



put in the subjunctive mode in French, though it nay be lr the m 
dicative or conditional in English :* — 

1. When the part of the sentence, which precedes qie, hang inter- 
rogative or negative, expresses a doubt : — 



Pensez-vous que vous reussissiez 
dans cette affaire 1 

Je ne voudrais pas assurer, qu'on 
*e doive ecrire. Boileau. 

Croyez-vous qu'il vienne ? 



Do you think that you wiXL succeed 
in this affair? 

I would not affirm, that it should 
be written. 

Do yon believe he will come ? 



2. When the verb preceding que expresses consent, command, dovbi 
desire, surprise, want, duty, necessity, fear, apprehension: — 

I permit, I wish, I doubt, I desire, 
I order, I am surprised, that you may 
or should come. 

Order, that I may depart this very 
moment. 

Thou wished that for thy sake we 
may believe in impossibilities. 

I am delighted that we happen to 
live together. 



Je permcts, je souhaite, je doute, je 
veuz, fordonne, je suis surpris que 
vous veniez. 

Des ce raeme moment, ordonnez 
que je parte. K-acine. 

Tu veux, qu'en ta faveur nous 
croyions l'impossible; Corneille. 

je suis ram, que nous logions en- 
semble. Destouches. 



3. When the first verb expresses fear or apprehension, the verb 
preceded by que, must also be preceded by ne : — - 



Je crains, je tremble, j'appre- 
hende, j'ai peur, qu'il ne vienne. 

GlRAULT DUVIVIER. 



I fear, I tremble, I a 
am afraid he may come, 



(3.) The pronouns qui, que, lequel, dont, and the word ou, meaning 
in which, should be followed by the subjunctive, when that part of 
the sentence which precedes them, expresses an interrogation, or im- 
plies a wish, a doubt, or a condition. They must also be followed 
hj the verb in the subjunctive, when they are preceded by a super- 
lative relative [§ 14, (9.)] : — 



Y a-t-il quelqu'un qui ne respecte 
le malheur 1 

La meilleure chose que vous puis- 
siez faire. 

Choisissez une retraite ou vous 
oyez tranquille. 



Is there any one who does not re- 
spect misfortune. 

The best thing that you can do. 

Choose a retreat in which you may 
enjoy repose. 



(4.) A verb preceded by que, and one of the unipersonal verbi 
falloir, importer, convenir, suffire, valoir mieux, or by the verb etre % 
used unipersonally in connection with the adjectives facheux,juUe % 



* When two verbs are united by the conjunction que, the second is pul 
in the indicative, if the first expresses something certain, positive: — 

On m'assure que vous avez refu I They assure me that you have re* 
une lettre de votre pere | ceived a letter frimi your fat/ter. 



J Y N T A X OF THE VERB.- 



128. 



44, 



'ty'uste, suprenant, possible, or with d propos, temps, d desirer, d 
touhaiter, &c, must be put in the subjunctive [see L. 73, R. 1.] : — 



Jlfaut que vous veniez. 



You must come, or # w necessary 
that you should come. 

It is time that you should go to 
Rome. 

It does not please me that you should 
go there. 

It is not certain, that you are right. 



II est temps que vous partiez pour 
Rome. 

II ns me plait pas, que vous alltez 
ia. L Acad£mie. 

II n'rst p&3 certain, que vous ayez 
f&ison. 

(5.) After the expressions quelque . . . que, quel que, si . . . 

fue, quoique, the verb is always put in the subjunctive : — 

Quelqu' effort que f assent les horn- Whatever effort men . may make, 

jies, lear noanfc parait partout. their nothingness appears everywhere. 
Bossuet. 

Qui que ce toit, parlez et ue le Whoever he may be, speak, and do 

eraignez pas. Racine. not fear him. 

Si mince qu'il puisse etre, un che- However thin it may be, a hair has 

vea fait de Tombro. Villefr^. a shadow. 

(6.) For the other conjunctions which must be followed by the 

subjunctive, see \ 143. 

§ 128. — The Infinitive. 
^1.) The infinitive lepresents the being, action or passion in an 
indefinite manner and without number or person : — 

To wish to deceive Heaven, is folly 



in men. 

The ardor of conquest {to conquer) 
yields to the fear of death {to die). 

To hate is a torment. 



Vouloir tromper le ciel. c'est folie 
a la terre. La Fontaine. 

L'ardeur de vainer -e, c&de a la 
peur de mourir. Corneille. 

Hair est un tourment. 

S^GUR. 

(2.) The infinitive is often used substantively : — 

Ou plutot, que ne puis-je au doux I Or rather, why can I not at the 
tomber du jour 7 Lamartine. | sweet close of the day ? 

(3.) The infinitive present is used in French after certain verbs, 
which are, in English, joined to other verbs by the conjunction 

and :— 

Allez thercher mon pere. Go and fetch my father. 

(4.) We might give as a general rule, that a verb immediately pre- 
ceded and governed by another verb {avoir and etre excepted) or by 
a preposition {en excepted) is put in the present of the infinitive :— 

All that the fancied that she held y 



Tout ce qu'elle s'imaginait tenir, 
I.ui echappait tout-a-coup. 

F£n£lon. 
Vos raisons sent trop bonnes 
d'elles-memes ; sans etre appuyees de 
ces secours etrangers. 

Racine. 



escaped her suddenly. 

Your reckons are too good in t?ur&* 
selves to need that foreign ass-stance. 



19* 



442 



8TNTAX OF THE VERB.- 



129, 130. 



Vous pensez tout savoir. 

PlEYRE. 

Oroit-il le pouvoir rompre? 

Th. Corneille. 



You think that you know every 
thing. 

Does he telieve he can break it ? 



(5.) The French language preferring the active to the passh* 
voice, requires the use of the active verb in the following and simila 
cases wherein the English use the passive voice : — 

Cette dame est bien a plaindre. That lady is much to be pitied. 

Cette maison est a vendre. This house is to be sold. 

La chose est de trop peu de con- The matter is of too little ^ 

sequence pour la traiter serieuse- sequence to be treated seriously. 
ment. 

Voitaire. 

§ 129. — Government of Verbs. 

Some verbs are in English governed by prepositions different from 
those which connect or govern the same verbs in French. Some, 
again, which are in English, joined by prepositions, require none 
between them in French. We give below, lists of verbs with the 
appropriate prepositions, according to the best French authorities. 

§ 130. — Verbs requiring no Preposition before another 
Verb in the Infinitive. 



Accourir, 


to run 


Observer, 


to notice, to observe 


Aimer mieux, 


to prefer 


Oser, 


to dare 


Alter, 


to go 


Paraitre, 


to seem 


Apercevoir, 


to perceive 


Penser, 


to think, to fancy 


Assurer, 


to assure 


Pouvoir, 


to be able 


Avouer, 


to confess 


Pretendre, 


to pretend 


Compter, 


' to intend 


Preferer, 


to prefer 


Confesser, 


to confess 


Protester, 


to protect 


Courir, 


to run 


Rappeler (se), 


to remember 


Croire, 


to believe 


Rapporter, 


to report 


Daigner, 


to deign 


Reconnaitre, 


to acknowledge 


Declarer, 


to declare 


Regarder, 


to look at 


Desirer, 


to desire 


Retourner, 


to return 


Devoir, 


ti he obliged 


Revenir, 


to come back 


Eeouter, 


io hear, to listen 


Savoir. 


to know 


Entendre, 


to hear 


Sembler, 


to seem 


Envoy or, 


to send 


Sentir, 


to feel 


Esperer, 


to hope 


Souhaiter, 


to wish 


Faire, 


to make 


Soutenir, 


to maintain 


Falloir, 


to be necessary 


Temoigner, 


to testify 


Imaginer (s), 


to imagine 


Valoir mieux, 


to be better 


Laisser, 


to let, to suffer 


Venir, 


to come 


Mener, 


to take, to lead 


Voir, 


to see 


Nier, 


to deny 


Vouloir, 


to be willing 



Jo pretends vou3 traiter comme 
mon nropre fils. Racine. 



J intend to treat you as my §vm 

son. 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. § 131 



443 



Et le Rhin de ses fiots ira grossir 

la Loire, 
Avant que tes faveurs sortent de 

ma memoire. Boileau. 



And the Rhine will go and swell 
the Loire with its waits, before the 
remembrance of thy goodness leave* 
my memory. 



§ 131. — Verbs requiring the Preposition A before an 
Infinitive. 

The (s') placed after the verb shows it to be reflective. 

Etre. etre a lire, ) to be 



Abaisser (s'), 
Aboutir, 
Accorder (s'), 
A ccouturner, 
Acharner (s'), 
Adm^ttre, 
Aguerrir (s'), 
Aider, 
Aimer, 

Appliquer (s'), 
Apprendre, 
Appreter (s'), 
Aspirer, 
Assigner, 
Assujettir (s'), 
Attach er (s'), 
Attendre (s*), 
Attendre, 
Augmenter (s') 5 
Autoriser, 
Avilir (s'), 
Avoir, 
Avoir peine, 
Balancer, 
Borner (se), 
Chercher, 
Complaire, 
Concourir, 
Condamner (se). 

Condescendre, 

Consentir, 

Consister, 

Conspirer, 

Consumer, 

Contribuer, 

Convier, 

Co liter 

Determiner, 

Determiner (se), 

Disposer (se), 

Divertir (se), 

Employer, 

Encourager, 

Engager, 

Enhardir, 

Erisei^ner, 



to stoop 

to end in 

to agree 

to accustom 

to strive 

to admit, to permit 

to become inured 

to help in 

to like 

to endeavor ,to apply 

to learn 

to prepare 

to aspire 

to summon 

to subject one's self 

to apply 

to expect 

to put off 

to increase 

to authorize 

to deba.se one's self 

to have 

to have difficulty in 

to hesitate 

to confine one's self 

to endeavor 

to delight in 

to co-operate 

to condemn 

self 
to condescend 
to consent 
to consist 
to conspire 
to destroy 
to contribute 
to invite 
to cost 
to induce 
to resolve 

to prepare one's self 
to amuse one's self 
to employ, to devote 
to encourage 
to induce 
to encourage 
Ut»*tk 



a ecrire, &c. 
Entendre (s'), 
Evertuer (s'), 
Exceller, 
Exciter, 
Exhorter, 
Exposer (s') 5 
Fatiguer (se), 
Habituer (s') 5 
Hasarder (se), 
Hesiter. 
Instruire, 
Interesser, 
Inviter, 
Mettre, 
Mettre (se), 
Montrer, 
Obstiner (s)', 
Offrir (s'), 
Pencher, 
Penser, 
Perseverer, 
Persister, 
Plaire (se), 
Prendre plaisir, 
Preparer (se) 
Porter, 
Provoquer, 
Pousser, 
Reduire, 
Reduire (se), 
Renoncer, 
Repugner, 
Resigner (se). 
Rester, 
Reussir, 
Risquer, 
Servir, 
Songer, 

Suffire (not unip. \fo suffice 
Tarder, to tarry 

Tdftre, to tend 

Tenir, to intend^ to aim 

Travaillsr, to labor 

Viser, to aim 

Vouer, * dwste 



reading, 
writing, <$*c. 

to be expert in 

to strive 

to excel 

to excite 

to exhort 

to expose one's self 

to weary one's self 

to become used to 

to venture 

to hesitate 

to instruct 

to interest 

to invite 

to set, to put 

to commence 

to show, to teach 

to persist in 

to offer 

to incline 

to think, to intend 

to persevere 

to persist 

to delight in 

to take pleasure 

to prepare 

induce, to excite ^ 
to urge 

to urge 

to constrain 

to tend, to end 

to renounce 

to be repugnant 

to be reconciled 

to tarry too long 
to succeed 

to risk 
to serve 
to think, to intend 



)to 



444 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB.- 



132. 



L'homme n'aime point a s'occu- 
per de son neant, et de sa bassesse. 
Massillon. 
Avez-vous jamais pense a offrir a 
Dieu toutes ces souffrances ^ 

The same. 



Man does not like to contemplaU 
his nothingness and his vilencss. 

Have yon ever tUmght of offering 
all these sufferings to God? 



§ 132* — Verbs requiring the Preposition De before an 
Infinitive. 



Abstenir (s'), 
Accuser (s'), 
Achever, 
Affecter, 
Affliger (s'), 
Agir (s'), unip., 
Applaudir (s'), 
Apprehender, 
Avertir, 
Aviser (s'), 
Avoir besoin, 
Avoir coutume. 
Avoir dessein, 
Avoir envie, 
Avoir garde, 
Avoir honte, 
Avoir intention, 
Avoir le temps, 
Avoir le courage, 
Avoir peur, 
Avoir raison, 
Avoir regret, 
Avoir tort, 
Avoir sujet, 
Avoir soin, 
Blamer, 
Bruler, 
Censurer, 
Cesser, 

Chagriner (se), 
Charger, 
Charger (se); 
Choisir, 
Commander, 
Conjurer, 
Conseiller, 
Contenter (se), 
Convaincre, 
Convenir, 
Corriger, 
Craindre, 
Decourager, 
Dedaigner, 
Defend re, 
Defendre (se) 
Defier, 
Depecber (se), 



to abstain 

to accuse one's self 

to finish 

to affect 

to grieve 

to be the question 

to rejoice 

to apprehend 

to warn 

to bethink one's self 

to want 

to be accustomed 

to intend 

to ivish 

to take care 

to be ashamed 

to intend, 

to have time 

to have courage 

to be afraid 

to be right 

to regret 

to be wrong 

to have reason 

to take care 

to blame 

to wish ardently 

to censure 

to cease 

to grieve one's self 

to desire, to intrust 

to take on one's self 

to choose 

to command 

to beseech 

to advise 

to be satisfied 

to convince 

to become, suit 

to correct 

to fear 

to discourage 

to disdain 

to forbid 

to decline 

to challeni 

to hasten 



Desaccoutumer > 

(se), 
Deshabituer 

(se), ■ 
Desesperer, 
Desoler (se), 
Detourner, 
Differer, 
Dire, 

Dis convenir, 
Discontinuer, 
Dispenser, 
Dispenser (se), 
Disculper (se), 
Dissuader, 
Douter, 
Efforcer (s') 5 
Effrayer (s'), 
Empecher, 
Empresser (s'), 
Epouvanter (s'), 
Entre prendre, 
Enrager, 
Etonner (s'), 
Eviter, 
Excuser (s'), 
^eliciter, 
Feindre, 
Flatter (se), 
Fremir, 
Garder (se), 
Gemir, 

Glorifier (se), 
Hasarder (se), 
Hater (se), 
Imputer, 
Indigner (s'), 
Ingerer (s'), 

Inspirer, 
Jurer, 
Manquer, 
Mediter, 
Meier (se), 
Menacer, 
Meriter, 
Moquer (se), 



■to leave off 

to despair 

to grieve 

to dissuade 

to put off 

to say, tell 

to deny 

to discontinue 

to dispense 

to forbear 

to apologize 

to dissuade 

to doubt 

to endeavor 

to be frightened 

to prevent 

to hasten 

to be frightened 

to undertake 

to be vexed 

to wonder 

to avoid 

to excuse one's+sdj 

to congratulate 

to feign 

to flatter one's self 

to shudder 

to take care 

to lament 

to pride one's self 

to venture 

to hasten 

to impute 

to be indignant 

to ta.ke into omr 

head 
to inspire 
to swear 
to fail 

to think, to intend 
to meddle 
to threaten 
to deserve 
to laugh at 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. S 133. 



445 



Mburi: (figu), 

NegJger, 

Nier, 

Pardonner, 

Parler, 

Passer (se), 

Permettre, 

Persuader, 

Piquer (se), 

Plaindre, 

Plaindre (se), 

Prendre garde, 

Prendre soiu 

Prescrire, 

Presser, 

Presser (se), 

Presumer, 

Prier, 

Promettre, 

Proposer, 

Proposer (se), 

Protester, 

Punir, 

Rebuter (se), 

Recommander, 



to long 
to neglect 
to deny 
to excuse 
to speak 
to do vrithout 
to peri nit 
to persuade 
to take pride in 
to pity 
to uomplain 
to take care. Jieed 
to take care 
to prescribe 
to urge 
to hasten 
to presume 
to desire 
to promise 
to propose 
to intend 
to protest 
to punish- 
to be weary 
to recommend 



Refuser, 
Regretter, 
Rejouir (se), 
Remereier, 
Repentir (se), 
Reprendre, 
Reprimander, 
Reprocher (se), 

Resoudre, 

Ressouvenir (se) 

Rire, 

Rougir, 

Scandaliser (se), 

Seoir (unip.), 

Sommer, 

Soup9ormer, 

Souvenir (se), 

Suffire (unip.), 

Suggerer, 

Supplier, 

Tenter ; 

Trembler, 

Vanter (se), 



to refuse 

to regret 

to rejoice 

tr thank 

to repent 

to censure 

to reprimand 

to reproach one* 

self 
to resolve 
lo remember 
to laugh 
to blush 
to take offence 
to become, suit 
to summon 
to suspect 
to remember 
to suffice 
to suggest 
to beseech 
to attempt 
to trembU 
to boast 



II vaut mieux hasarder de sauver 
un coupable que de condamner un 
innocent. Voltaire. 

Le monde se vante de faire des 
heureux. Massillon. 



It is better to run the risk of sparing 
a guilty person, than to condemn an 
innocent one. 

Tlie world boasts that it can rendei 
men happy. 



§ 133.— Eule. 

(1.) Two or more verbs may govern the same object, provided 

they require the same regimen : — 

Nous aimons, nous instruisons, et I We love, we instruct, and we praise 
nous louons nos enfants. \ our children. 

This sentence is correct, because aimer, instruire, and louer, being 
active verbs, govern one and the same case, the direct regimen. 

(2.) But when the verbs require different regimens, they cannot 
govern one and the same noun ; and therefore another form must be 
giren to the sentence. We could not say in French, — Jn gran 
n ombre de vaisseaux entrent et sortent de ce port tous les mois,— A 
p real number of vessels enter and go out of this port every month, be- 
cause the verb entrer reaches its regimen by means of the preposition 
dans, and sortir by means of the preposition de. We should say : — 

Un grand nombre de vaisseaux en- 
trent dans ee port et en sortent tous 
les mois. 



A large number of vessels enter ikii 
port and lee ve it every month. 



See J 92. (1.) (2.), also note, and $ 140. 



446 



SYNTAX OF THE PARTICIPLE. § 134. 



§ 134. — The Participle Past. 

(1.) Wa have seen [} 66, (3.)] that the participle past, not accom 
panied by an auxiliary, assumes the gender and number of the noun 
Which it qualifies : — 

Quiet and concealed enmity is 
more to be feared than open and de- 
clared hatred. 



Les inimities sourdes et cachies 
eont plus a craindre que les haines 
tmverles et dietaries. Noel. 



(2.) The participle past accompanied by the auxiliary etre, agree* 
in gender and number with the subject of the verb, whether the sub- 
ject be placed before or after it. [See § 135, (1.)] 

The sword is blunted ; the piles are 
extinguished. 

Humble virtue is often despised. 



Le fer est emoussi ; les buchers 
sont iteints. Voltaire. 

La vertu obscure est souvent 
meprisee. Massillon. 

Les Grecs etaient persuadis, que 
J a me est immortelle. 

Barth£lemy. 

Quand il vit l'urne ou etaient 
renfermees les cendres d'Hippias, il 
versa un torrent de larmes. 

Fenelon. 



The Greeks were persuaded, that 
the soul is immortal. 

When he perceived the urn in 
which were enclosed the ashes of Hip- 
pias, he shed a torrent of tears. 



(3.) The participle past, having avoir as its auxiliary, never agrees 
with the nominative : — 



Vous riez 1 Ecrivez qu'elle a ri. 

Racine. 
Mes amis ont parte ; leurs coeurs 
gant attendris. Voltaire. 

Mes cousines ont lu. 

Bescherelle. 



You laugh? Put down that she 
laughed. 

My friends have spoken; their 
hearts are moved. 

My cousins have read. 



(4.) The participle past, having avoir for an auxiliary, agrees with 
its direct regimen, when that regimen precedes the participle:— 

The letter which you have written. 
Pedro, what hast thou done with 



La lettre que vous avez ecrite. 

Pedro, qu'as tu fait de nos mon- 
tures ? — Seigneur, je les ai attachies 
a la grille. Le Sage. 

Les meilleures harangues sont 
celles que le cceur a dicties. 

Marmontel. 

Je les ai chercMs dans tous les 
coins, et je ne les ai pas trouvis. 
Mme. De GenliS. 



our horses ? My lord, I have fast- 
ened them to the grate. 

The best addresses are those which 
the heart ha,s dictated. 

I have sought them in every cr^ner 
but have not found them. 



(5.) But, if the direct regimen is placed after the participle, thia 

participle remains invariable : — 

/ have received your Utter. 

It is truth itself which has dictated 



J'ai re$u votre lettre. 
C'est U verite elle-meme qui lui 
a dicti ces belles pxr les. 

Bossuet. 



to him those fine words. 



SYNTAX OF THE PARTICIPLE- 



135. 



447 



Les dieux ont attache presque 
auta.nl de malkeurs a la liberie, qu'a 
la servitude. Montesquieu. 



The gods have attached, almost c& 
many misfortunes to liberty r , as to ser- 
vitude. 



§ 135. — Remarks on the Foregoing Rules, 

(1.) Although the compound tenses of the reflective or pronominal 
verbs [§ 43, (6 ), \ 46, (2.), § 56] take tire as an auxiliary, the past 
participle of those verbs does not follow the rule (2.) of the preceding 
section; but comes under the same rules with those conjugated with 
avoir. It agrees with the direct regimen, when that regimen comes 
before it, and is invariable when that regimen succeeds : — 

Votre soeur s'est achete de belles Your sister has bought (herself*: 

robes. handsome dresses, i. e.,for herself 

Cette femme s'est rendue mal- That woman has rendei ed hersel t 

heureuse . unhappy. 

Achete in the first example does not vary, because se, placed before 
it, is an indirect regimen or dative, while the direct regimen or accu- 
sative, robes, is placed after the participle. Rendue in the second ex- 
ample varies, because the word se, representing femme, is a direct 
regimen, and precedes the participle. 

We will add a few extracts as examples :— 

REFLECTIVE. PRONOUNS 



Used as indirect Objects. 
lis ne se sont propose, pour exem- 
ple, que la constitution la plus sim- 
ple des anciens. Voltaire. 

They have proposed, to themselves, 
as an example, only the most simple 
constitution of the ancients. 

II est vrai, qu'elle et moi nous 
nous sommes parte des yeux. 

Moliere. 
It is true, thai she and I have spo- 
ken to each other with our eyes. 

Neanmoins, il s'etait conserve 
l'autorite principals Bossuet. 

Nevertheless, he hcd preserved to 
himself the principal authority. 



Used as direct Objects. 
Elles se sont proposees comme dea 
modeles de douceur. 

Quoted by Bescher. 
Tliey have proposed themselves as 
patterns of gentleness. 

La langue latine et la langue 
grecque se sont longtemps parlies. 
Lemare. 

The Latin and Greek languages 
were long spoken. 

La vie pastorale qui s'est conser- 
vee dans l'Asie, n'est pas sans opu- 
lence. Voltaire. 

The pastoral life which ho.s been 
preserved in Asia, is not without opu- 
lence. 



(2.) When pronominal or reflective verbs, of which the second 
pronoun is an indirect regimen, are accompanied by another pronoun, 
or by a noun, used as a direct regimen, the participle agrees with this 
tatter pronoun or noun when it is preceded by it, and remains inva- 
riable, when the regime direct follows See Rules (4.) (5.) of the 
preceding section •— 



448 SYNTAX OF THE PARTICIPLE. — § 135, 

| 



Variable. i Invariable. 

L'indiscretion que nous nous | Nous nous sommes reproch& fto 

discretion. 

We have ?eproac J ied ourselves with 
the indiscretion. 



floinmes reprochee. 

The indiscretion with which we 
have reproaclied ourselves. 

Or to render in English the relations the same as in French : — 

The indiscretion which we have I We have reproached to ourselves 
reproached to ourselves. | the indiscretion. 

(3.) The participle past conjugated with avoir, and preceded "by a 
direct regimen, is sometimes followed by an infinitive. In such 
cases, when the direct regimen is under the government of the intui- 
tive rather than of the participle, the latter of course remains un- 
changed : — 

La regie que j'ai commence a ex- I The rule which I commenced to 
pliquer. | explain. 

(4.) The verb in the infinitive is sometimes understood ; yet the 
participle must follow the same rule, as if it were expressed. The 
participle fait, followed by an infinitive, and laisse, followed by the 
infinitive of an active verb, are always invariable : — 

Elle a obtenu toutes les faveurs i She obtained, all the favors which 



gw'elle a voulu (obtenir). 
La maison que j'ai fait batir. 
Ces hommes se sont laisse battre. 



she wished (to obtain). 

The house which I have had built. 

These men have suffered themselves 
to be beaten. 

(5.) In some cases, it may be difficult to ascertain whether the 
regime direct is under the government of the participle or of the 
infinitive. 

If the regime direct is to be represented as performing the action 
expressed by the infinitive, the participle is made to agree with that 
regime in gender and number : — 

Je les ai vus secourir leurs enne- I / saw them relieving their enemies. 
mis. 

In this example it will be seen that les (the regime direct) is repre- 
sented as actually doing what is expressed by the infinitive, and that 
the infinitive itself is translated by the present participle. 

If, however, the regime direct is to be represented as suffering the 
action expressed by the infinitive, then the participle will remain un- 
changed, and the infinitive will be translated as a passive. Thus :— 

Je les ai vu secourir par leurs I I law them relieved by their $na~ 
ennemis. | rnies. 

Further examples : — 

Variable. Invariable. 

Je les ai vus repousser les enne- Je les ai vu repousser par lei 

mis. ennemis. 

/ saw them repel (repelling) the I saw them repelled by the etw 

enemies. rnies. 



STNTAX OF THE PARTICIPLE. § 135. 



449 



Je lei ui ms prendre la fuite. 

/ saw them taking flight, 

Je Us ai vus frapper. 

/ ; aw them striking. 

Les personnes que j'ai entendues 
chanter. 

The persons whom I heard sing- 
ing 

(6.) The participles past of neuter verbs, conjugated with avoir 
and those of unipersonal verbs, are always invariable : — 



Je les ai vu prendre sur le fait. 
/ saw them taken in the deed. 
Je les ai vu frapper. 
/ saw them struck. 
Les chansons que j'ai entendu 
chanter. 

The songs which I heard sung. 



How much good, has she not done, 
during the few days that she reigned 1 

The excessive heat which we have 
had. has caused much sickness. 



Que de bien n'a-t-elle pas fait, 
pendant le peu de jours qu'elle a 
regne! Fl^chier. 

Les chaleurs excessives qu'il a 
fait, ont cause beaucoup de mala- 
dies. Condillac. 

(7.) The past participle never agrees with en, because en can have 
no other relation to the participle than that of an indirect regimen.* 
The presence of en does not of course prevent the agreement of the 
participle with a direct regimen preceding the verb : — 

Have you eaten of the fruits ? I 
have eaten of them. 

Every body tendered me services^ 
and no person rendered me any. 



Avez-vous mange des fruits 1 
J 1 en ai mange. 

Tout le monde m'a offert des 
services, et personne ne m'en a 

rendu. M^e. de Maintenon. 



En, preceded by the direct Regimen of the Participle. 



Cassius naturellement tier et im- 
perieux, ne cherchait dans la perte 
de Cesar que la vengeance de quel- 
ques injures quHl en avait regues. 
Vertot. 

Rendez graces au ciel qui nous en 
a venges. Corneille. 



Cassius naturally proud and im- 
perious, sought in the death of Cesar 
only revenge for some injuries which 
he had received from him. 



Render thanks to Heaven which has 
revenged us for it. 

(8.) Le peu has in French two meanings : it signifies a small 
quantity, or the want of. 

When it signifies a small quantity, the participle agrees with the 
noun which follows le peu : — 

Le peu d'affection que vous lui 
avez ternoignee, lui a rendu le cou- 
rage. 



The little affection vjhich you lav 
shown him, has restored his courage. 



* Noel and Chapsal, page 165. Several grammarians caller at times a 
regime direct. We think with Bescherelle (Dictionnaire national, page 
1114), that en does not represent the entire direct regimen, but only a 
part of it, or rather merely refers to it; the direct regimen being itself 
understood. Ex. Avez-vous des livres? J'en ai. Have you books ? I 
have some. In the latter sentence, the word quelques-uns. the direct object 
is understood after the verb. J'en ai quelques uns, and en is *ather a re- 
ference to it, than a substitute for it. The literal translation of the sen- 
tence will show this : / have of them a few. 



450 SYNTAX OF THE ADVERB. § 136, 137. 

When le peu is used in the sense of the want of, the participle re. 
mains unaltered. 

Le pnu d'affection que vous lui I The want of affection which yon 
ftvez temoigne, Fa deco irage. | have shown him, has discouraged him. 

§ 136. — The Adverb. — Rules. — Place of the Adverb. 

(1.) In French the adverb used to modify a verb in a simple tens* 
fs generally placed after the verb : — ■ 



Que de gens prennent hardiment 
le masque de la vertu ! 

ScUD^RI. 



How many people assume boldly 
the mask of virtue ! 



(2.) Adverbs of place, and those used in interrogations, have the 
same place in French as in English : — 

Ou est votre frere 1 II est ici. \ Where is your brother ? He is here 

(3.) In compound tenses the adverb is placed between the auxi- 
liary and the participle : — 

Vous avez mal fait. You have done wrong. 

II nous a bien re£us. He received us well. 

(4.) Adverbs of manner ending in ment, may, in compound tenses, 
be placed ^before the participle or after it, when they are not very 
long, or followed by other modifying words. When, however, they 
are followed by such words they must be placed after the par- 
ticiple : — 

Cela est heureusement exprime. } rrn. '■■* • i -i j 

Cela est exprime Wei^. \ That is happily expressed. 

II est venu heureusement a temps. | He came fortunately in time. 

(5.) The adverbs aujourd'hui, to-day; demain, to-morrow; hier, 
yesterday, may be placed before or after the verb, but never between 
the auxiliary and the participle. The adverb davantage, more, must 
always follow the participle : — 

Nous sommes arrives aujourd'hui. 
Votre frere s'est blesse hier. 
Aujourd'hui il fait beau- temps ; 
demain il pleuvra. 

• GlRAULT DUVIVIER. 



We came to-day. 

Your brother hurt himself yesterday. 
To-day, it is fine iveather ; to- 
morrow it will rain. 



§ 137. — Observations. 

(1.) Tl e adverbs of comparison, plus, moins, must be repeated ba« 

fore every adjective which they modify : — 

II est moins paresso-ux 3t moins I He is less idle and obstinate t&am 
cystine que son frere. | his brother. 



SFNTAX OF THE ADVERB. § 138 



451 



(2.) These adveibs and the adverbs of quantity, need not be re- 
peated before every noun ; but the preposition de, which must always 
rome between peu, trop, beaucoup, tant, plus, mains, and a noun or an 
adjective, used substantively, must be repeated in every case :■— 



peine et 



There would not be so much trou- 
ble and misery in ike world. . . . 

This bookseller has many good and 
bad works in his establishment. 



II n ? y aurait pas tant d 
de misere dans ce monde. 

Ce libraire a beaucoup de bons 
et de mauvais ouvrages dans son 
magasin. 

(3.) The adverbs mieux, better ; pis, worse, must not be confounde 
with the adjectives meilleur and pire. See note § 14, (7). 

§ 138. — Adverbs of Negation. 

(1.) The negation is composed of ne placed before the verb, and 
pas or point, after it in the simple tenses. The second negative comes 
between the auxiliary and the verb, in the compound tenses : — 



Heaven does not regulate things 
according to our wishes. 

Rome does not by any means con- 
fine offices to the nobility. 

Esteem is the true principle of con- 
sideration, which is not always at- 
tached to offices. 

Kings are by no means protected by 
laws. 



Le ciel sur nos souhaits ne regie 
pas les ehoses. Corneille. 

Rome ^'attache point le grade a 
la noblesse. Corneille. 

L'estime est le vrai principe de 
la consideration, qui w'est pas tou- 
jours attache aux dignites. 

FONTENELLE. 

Les rois ne sont point proteges 
par les lois. Chenier. 

It will be seen in the above examples, that the negative, point, is 
stronger than pas. The meaning of these two words, which are in fact 
substantives used adverbially to strengthen the negative ne, wih 
sufficiently explain this : 

N'allez pas means n'allez un pas, do not go or move one pace or 
step. N'allez point means rtallez un point, do not go, or move a 
point or dot 

(2.) The second negative may be suppressed after the verbs pou- 
voir, oser, savoir and cesser : — 



Non, deesse ; je ne puis souffrir, 
qu un de leurs vaisseaux fasse nau- 
frage Fenelon. 

Dans son appartement. elle %'osait 
rentrer. Voltaire. 

Qui vit hai de tous, ne saurait 
longt(3mps vivre. Corneille. 

La liberte ne cesse d'etre amia- 
ble. Corneille. 



No, goddess; I cannot suffer that 
single one of their vessels perish. 



She dared not re-enter her apart 
ment. 

He who lives hated by all, cannei 
exist long. 

Liberty cannot cease to b c . worthy 
of love. 

(3.) Pas or point is suppressed, when the \erb is modified by an* 
other negative word, such as jamais, guere, nvl, nullement, aucun, 



452 



SYNTAX OF THE ADVERB. § 138. 



per sonne, ni, ne, or followed by que, meaning only, and p.us used 
negatively: — 



L'ambiticn, seigneur, w'a guere 
de liraites. Boursault. 

Nut w'est heureux, s'il ne jouit 
de sa propre estime. 

J. J. Rousseau. 

Personne w'aime a recevoir de 
conseils. De S£gur. 

Un mechant ne sait jamais par- 
donner. Noel. 



Ambition, my lord, has scarcely 
any limits. 

No one is happy, unless he can 
esteem himself. 

No one likes to receive advice. 

A wicked man never knows how is 
forgive. 

(4.) Ne used Idiomatically. 

The negative ne is used without any negative sense after the 

conjunctions a moins que, unless ; de peur que, de crainte que ; for 

fear that : — 

A moins que vous ne lui parliez. 
De peur qu'on ne vous trompe. 

L'ACADEMIE. 



Unless you speak to him. 
For fear, or lest you might be de- 
ceived. 



(5.) Ne is used in the same manner after autre, different ; autre- 
ment, otherwise ; plus, moins, mieux, forming a comparison, and after 
the verbs craindre, avoir peur, trembler, apprehender, empecher : — 



II est tout autre qu'il w'etait. 

II parle autrement qu'il n'agit. 

II est plus modeste qu'il ne le 
parait. 

Je crams presque, je crains,qu'un 
songe ne m'abuse. Racine. 

Vous avez bien peur que je ne 
change d'avis. Marivaux. 

La pluie empecha qu'on ne se 
promenat dans les jardins. 

Racine. 



He is very different from what he 
was. 

He speaks and acts very differently. 
He is more modest than he appears. 

I am almost afraid that {lest) a 
dream is deceiving me. 

You fear much, lest I may change 
my mind. 

The rain prevented their taking a 
walk in tlie gardens. 



(6.) Remark. — Ne is not used when the verb of the preceding pre- 
position is accompanied by a negative : — 



II ne parle pas autrement qu'il 
agit. 

II n'est pas plus modeste qu'il 
le parait. 



He does not speak otherwise thaw 
he acts. 

He is not more modest than he ap- 
pears. 



(7.) After craindre, apprehender, avoir peur, trembler, we put pas 
after the ne when we wish for the accomplishment of the action ex- 
pressed by the second verb : — 



Je crains, qu'il ne vienne pas. 
J'ai pear, que mon frere ^'arrive 
pas. 



I fear, that he may not come. 
I am afraii, tJuxt my brother nvv§ 
not come. 



SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITION. — §139. 453 



§ 139. — The Preposition. — Regimen of Prepositions 4lNB 

Prepositional Phrases. 



(1.) Prepositions may be divided according to 
three classes : — 

1st, Prepositions governing nouns without 
preposition. They are :* — 

A, 
De 

Pes, 

Apres, 

Attendu, 

Avant, 

Avec, 

Chez, 

Concernant, 

Contre, 

Dans, 

Depuis, 

Derriere, 

Dessus, 

Dessous, 

Devers, 

Devant, 

Durant, 

En, 

Entre, 

Envers, 

Excepte, 



Aupres, 
Autour, 
Ensuite, 
Faute, 
Hors, 
Loin, 
Pres, 
Proche. 
A cause, 
A cote, 
A couvert, 
A fleur, 
A force, 
A la favetir, 
A l'abri, 
A la mod 3. 



their regimen, into 
the aid of anothef 



at or to 


Hors, 


{ except, (see hors be* 
\ low) 


of, from 


Hormis, 


from, as soon as 


Malgre, 


in spite of 


after 


Moyennant, 


by means of 


on account of 


Joignant, 


joining 


before 


Nonobstant, 


no twithstanding 


with 


Outre, 


besides 


with, at the house 


Par, 


by 


of 


Pour, 


for 


touching 


Parmi, 


among, amongst 


against 


Pendant, 


during 


in • 


Sans, 


without 


since 


Sauf, 


safe, save 


behind 


Selon, 


according to 


above 


Sous, 


under 


lender 


Suivant, 


according to 


towards 


Sur, 


upon 


before 


Tou chant, 


touching 


during 


A travers, 


through 


in 


Vers, 


towards 


between 


Voici, 


here is 


towards 


Voila, 


there is 


except 


Vu, 


considering 


sitions requiring the p 


reposition de after them :f — 


near 


A la reserve, 


reserving 


around 


A Texcept'on, 


excepting 


after 
for want 


A l'exclusi^n, 


excluding 


A 1'egard. 


V'ith regard 


out of 


A l'insu, 


unknown 


far 


A l'opposite 


contrary 


near 


A moins, 


unless, for less 


near 


A raison, 


by reason, at Ik 


on account 




rate 


by the side 


Au rez, 


on a level 


under cover 


Au deca, 


this way 


even with 


Au dela, 


that way, beyend 


by dint 


An dessous, 


under 


by means 


Au dessus, 


above 


under ihsMer 


Au dedans, 


within 


oxcordin.% to the 


Au dehors, 


without 


fasham 


Au devant, 


befcre, U meet 



* Governing the accusative. 

t Governing the genitive or ablative. 



454 SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITION. § 140, 141. 



through 

at tlte expense 

in the neighborhood 

in spite of 

along 

opposite 



with regard 
as to 



Au milieu, in the middle \ Au travers. 

Au lieu, instead Aux depens, 

Au moyen, by means Aux environs, 

Au niveau, on a level En depit, 

Au peril, at the peril Le long", 

Au prix, at the price Vis-a-vis, 

Au risque, at the risk 

3d, The prepositions followed by d are : — 

Attenant, joining I Par rapport, 

Jusque, as far as | Quant, 

(2.) Many of the prepositions which govern the regime direct, are 
formed from active verbs. Almost all the prepositions requiring de 
before the regimen, are formed of a preposition and a noun. Those 
requiring the preposition d, have a relation of tendency, of aim, &c 

§ 140. — Remark. 

The rules which we have given, [§ 92, (1.) (2.) note, and 
§ 133], with regard to the regimen or government of verbs and adjec- 
tives, apply also to prepositions. When two prepositions require 
the same regimen, it is useless to repeat this regimen after each one, 
but, if they require a different regimen, it is necessary to give to 
each its proper object. It would, therefore, be incorrect to say, — Un 
magistrat doit touj ours juger suivant et conformement aux lois : — A 
magistrate should always judge in accordance with, and conformably to y 
the laws; because the preposition suivant governs the noun in the 
regime direct, that is without the aid of another preposition, and 
conformement governs the noun in the regime indirect by means of d. 
We should- say: — 



Un magistrat doit toujours juger 
suivant les lois, et conformement a 
ce ^u'elles prescrivent. 

Marmontel. 



A magistrate should always judge 
in accordance with the laws and con- 
formably to what they prescribe. 



§ 141. — Repetition of Prepositions. 

1. The prepositions d, de, en and sans, must be repeated before 
livery regimen, be it a noun, a pronoun or a verb: — 



Ce monde ci n'est qu'une loterie 
e biens, de rangs. de dignites, de 
droits. Voltaire. 

L 'eloquence est un art tres 
serieux, destine a instruire, a re- 
primer les passions, a corriger les 
tnoeurs, a soutenir les lois, &c. 

F^N^LON. 

Telle est la multitude, et sans 
frein et sans lois. La Harpe. 



This world is but a lottery oj 
goods, of ranks, of dignities, of 
rights. 

Eloquence is a very impoHant an, 
destined to znst met, to repress pas- 
sions, to correct manivers, to support 
the laws, fyc. 

Such is tt e multitude, without re* 
sfr aint and without laws. 



BtNlir OF THE PREPOSITIO N. — § 142, 143. 455 



2. The other prepositions must also be repeated before avery 
noun, pronoun, or verb, unless the words used as regimens, have 
a similarity of meaning ; in which case the prepositions may be 
placed before the first regimen only, or before all, at the option of the 
speaker : — 



Je vous donne ceci pour vous et 
wour votre frere. 

II perd sa jeunesse dans la mol- 
es* e et (dans) la volupte. 



/ give you this for you and for 
your brother. 

He wastes his youth iri effeminacy 

and voluptuousness. 



§ 142. — Observations on several Prepositions. 

(1.) Avant marks a priority of time and place; — Devant meant 
simply opposite, in front of: — 

C I walk before you, i. e. J walk 
Je marche avant vous. < earlier than you, or / have the prece- 

r dence of you in walking. 
Je marche devant vous. j / walk in front of you. 

(2.) En, a, dans. — The sense of en is more indefinite, more exten- 
sive tnan that of dans. En is generally used before the name of a 
division of the earth, a kingdom, &c. ; a before the name of a town, 
and dans before a word restricted by an article or a determine ive 
adjective : — 



En Europe, en France, a Paris, 
dans ma chambre. 

En Amerique, ce sont les bisons 
qui ont une bosse sur le dos, 

BUFFON. 

Dans 1' Amerique meridionale le 
bceuf etait absolument inconnu. 
Buffon. 

(3.) Chez might be rendered 
among, &c. : — 

Chez votre pere ; chez vous. 

La condition des comediens etait 
infame chez les Romains, et hono- 
rable chez les Grecs. 

La Bruyere. 



In Europe, in France, in Paris, 
in my room. 

In America the bisons have a 
bunch on their back. 

In South America the ox was en- 
tirely unknown. 

in English by at the house of, with, 



At your father's ; at your house. 

The condition of comedians WtA 
infamous among the Romans, and 
honorable with the Greeks. 



§ 143. — The Conjunction. — Government of Conjunctions. 
[See § 127.] 

(1 ) Conjunctions govern the verbs following them, in the infinitive, 
the indicative, and the subjunctive modes. 

1. The infinitive must be put after every conjunction wli «ch is 
foPowed by the preposition de, and after all those which diifer from 



456 SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTION. §143. 

prepositions, only because they are followed by a verb instead of a 



Study diligently that you may (in 
order to) surpass your companions. 



Etudiez diligemment afin de sur- 
passer vos compagnons. 

We think with M. Bescherelle that the words described in the pre- 
ceding rule, belong more properly to the ^prepositions than to the 
onj unctions. 
(2.) The following conjunctions always require the subjunctive 
after them in French, whatever mode they may take in English. 
Those marked with an asterisk require ne before the verb [{ 138, 
(4.)] :- 



Afin que, 
*A moins que, 
Au cas que, 
Avant que, 
Bien que, 
*Be crainte que, 
*De peur que, 
En cas que, 
Encore que, 
Jusqu'a ce que, 
Lo 7 'n que, 



in order that 
unless 



efore that 
although 
for fear 
lest 

in case 
although 
till, until that 
far from, not that 



Malgre que, 
Nonobstant que, 
Non que, 
Non pas que, 
Pose que, 
Pour que, 
Pourvu que, 
Quoique, 
Sans que, 
Soit que, 
Suppose que, 



although 
notwithstan ding 
not that 
not that 
supposing tliat 
that, in order that 
provided that 
although, though 
without that 
whether 
suppose that 



Although I can scarcely bear my 
misfortunes, I would rather suffer 
under them, than deserve them. 

In case you persist, I must men- 
tion your bad health to tJie prince 
and even to the king. 



Qu Iqu'd peine a mes maux je 

pi 'sse re sister. 
J'ain e mieux les souffrir, que de 

les meriter. Racine. 

En cas que vous persistiez, il fau- 
dra que j'allegue au prince et au 
roi me me votre mauvaise sante. 
F£n£lon. 

(3.) The following conjunctions :— De maniere que, de sorte que, 
en sorte que, so that ; tellement que, in such a manner that ; si ce n'est 
que, sinon que, unless that, but that; govern the following verb in 
the . indicative or conditional modes, when the preceding verb ex- 
presses a positive assertion; but they govern the subjunctive, when 
the preceding verb expresses a desire or a command : — 

II se conduisit tres mal, de sorte He behaved very ill, so that he was 

qu'ilfut contraint de se retirer. obliged to withdraw. 

Faites en sorte qu'on soit content Behave in such a manner thai 

&e vous. people may be pleased with you. 

(4.) When there are in a sentence two or more verbs governed by 
a conjunction, que must be placed before the second and the follow- 
ing verbs, or the conjunction itself may be repeated : — 

Puisqu'on plaide, f&'on meurt, et I Since we plead, we die and we be- 
qu'on devient malade, } come sick, we must have physician* 

V. faut des medecins, il faut des we must have lawyers. 
avocats. La Fontaine. I 



COLLOCATION OF WORD S. § 144. 4oV 



If you go and wish to taL me with 
you. 



Si vous partez et que vous vou- 
liez ine prendre avec vous. 

Bescherelle. 

(5.) The other conjunctions generally govern the same terse in 
French as in English : — 



Fais du bien aujourd'hui puisque 
tu vis encore. Villefr^. 

Rien n'eblouit les grandes ames, 
p&rceque rien n'est plus haut qu'el- 
les. Massillon. 



Do good to-day, since thou yet 
livest. 

Nothing dazzUs great minds, 6c 
cause nothing is higher than tliey. 



(6.) With regard to the conjunction, si, see § 125, (3.) 

§ 144. — Collocation of Words. 

(1.) The place of the different parts of speech has been mentioned 
in the Syntax, under their several heads, and in various other parts 
of the work. A resume of the principal rules of construction may, 
however, not be unacceptable here. 

(2.) The collocation of words is the order according to which the 
several words which form a sentence should follow one another. 
This order is fixed for the several forms of sentences, affirmative, 
negative, and interrogative, by the genius of the language, and the 
practice of the best writers. 

(3.) The construction of the affirmative sentence is as simple in 
French as it is in English. The following is the arrangement of the 
words : — 

1. The Subject 2. The Verb. 3. The Adverb. 

Le marchand est ici. 

The merchant is here. 

(4.) When the subject is accompanied by an adjective, or another 
attribute, the order is as follows : — 



1. The Subject. 


2. Its Attribute* 


3. The Verb. 


4. The Adverb. 


Le marchand 
The merchant 


anglais 

English 


est 

is 


ici. 

here. 


Le fils 

The son 


de votre ami 
of your friend 


est 
is 


la. 

there. 


Le marteau 

The hammer 


de fer 

of iron 


est 
is 


ici. 
here. 


Le bateau 

The boat 


a vapeur 
steam 


est 
is 


la. 

there. 



* Some adjectives [§ 85, (11.)] are generally placed before the noun, 
when used alone with a noun ; but when another adjective comes with 
them, they follow the noun : — un petit homme, a little man ; un homme 
petit et gros, a short, stout man ; others have a different meaning before 
the noun or after it [§86.] 

20 



458 COLLOCATION OF WOltDS, § 144. 

(5.) When the attribute is placed in apposition with the subject, tne 
construction is the same in the two languages : — 

1. The Subject 2. The Verb. 3. The Attribute. 

Le marchand est anglais. 

The merchant is English. 

(6,) When the verb is in a compound tense, many adverbs are 
placed between the auxiliary and the participle : — 

J, The Subject. 2. The Auxiliary. 3. The Adverb. 4. The Participle, 
Nous avons souvent lu. 

We have often read. 

(7.) Long adverbs of manner, ending in merit, other long adverbs, 
and the adverbs of time and place, aujourd'hui, demain, hier, id, Id, 
are not placed between the auxiliary and the participle [§ 136, 
L.41, 5.]:— 

Nous avons ecrit aujourd'hui, We have written to-day. 

(8.) When there is a direct regimen in the sentence, it is placed 
after the verb : — 

1. Subject. 2. Attribute. 3. Verb. A. Adverb. 6. Regime Direct. 
L'ecolier attentif apprend toujours sa le^on. 

The scholar attentive learns always his lesson. 

(9.) When there are two regimens of equal length, or nearly so, 
the direc t precedes the indirect : — 

1. Subject 2. Verb. 3. Direct Regimen. 4. Indirect Regimen* 
Jean a donne le livre a mon pere. 

John has given the book to my father. 

(10.) Should the direct regimen be followed by a relative pronoun, 
or by attributes rendering it longer than the indirect regimen, the 
latter is placed first : — ■ 
1. Subj. 2. Verb. 3. Ind. Regimen. 4. Direct Regimen. 

Jean a donne a mon pere le livre qu'il lui avait promis. 

John lias given to my father the book which he had promised him. 

(11.) The pronouns representing the direct regimen, and those 

representing the indirect regimen, preceded by to, expressed or un« 

derstood in English, are placed before the verb in French: — 

J Subject. 2. Direct Reg. 3. Verb. I. Subject. 2. Ind. Reg. 3. Verb 

Nous les voyons. Nous leur parlons 

We them see. We to them sppak. 

(12.) In the imperative used affirmatively, those pronouns folio? 
the verb : — 

1. Verb. 2. Direct Reg. 1 Verb. 2, Ind. Reg. 

Yojez- les, Parlez- leur. 

&><? them. Speak totkem 



COLLOCATION OP WORD S. — § 144. 459 

(13.) When two personal pronouns are used as regimens in a sen- 
tence, the indirect, if in the first or second person, precedes the 
direct : — 

1. Subject. 2. Ind. Reg. 3. Direct Reg. 4. Verb. 
Paul nous le donne. 

Paul to us it gives. 

Paul vous le donne. 

Paul to you it gives. 

(14.) Should, however, the indirect regimen be in the third person, 
it is placed after the direct : — 

1. Subject. 2. Direct Reg. 3. Ind. Reg. 4. Verb. 
Paul le lui donne. 

Paul it to him gives. 

(15.) In the imperative used amrmatively, the direct regimen pre- 
cedes always the indirect :— 



1 . Verb. 2. Dir. Reg. 3. Ind. Reg. 
Donnez- les nous. 

Give them to us. 



1. Verb. 2. Dir. Reg. 3. Ind. Reg, 
Donnez- les- lui. 

Give them to him. 



(16.) The pronoun representing a noun in the oblique cases, gen- 
erally preceded in English by a preposition other than to, is, in French, 
placed after the verb : — 
1. 



Subj. 


2. Verb. 


3. Ind. Reg. 


1. Subj. 


2. Verb. 


3. Ind. Reg. 


Je 


parle 


de lui. 


Je 


parle 


avec lui. 


I 


speak 


of him. 


/ 


speak 


ivith him. 



(17.) To render a sentence negative, ne is placed immediately be- 
fore the verb, and pas, jamais, rien, &c. after it: — 

1. Subj. 2. NegaU 3. Verb. 4. NegaL 

Je ne vois pas. 

/ not see not. 

Je ne lis jamais. 

/ not read never. 

(18.) When the verb is in a compound tense, the first negative is 
placed before the auxiliary, and the second between *i*at auxiliary 
and the participle : — 



. Subject 


% Negat. 


Z.Reg. 4. 


Aux. 


5. Negat. 6. 


Participle. 


Je 


ne 
not 


r 

him 


ai 

have 


pas 

not 


vu. 

seen. 


Je 
/ 


ne 

not 


leur 
to them 


ai 

have 


jamais 
never 


parle. 

spoken. 


Je 
/ 


ne 

not 


leur 
to them 


ai 

have 


rien 
nothing 


donn6. 
given. 



(19.) The pronouns used as direct regimens, and as indirect regi- 



460 COLLOCATION OF WORDS. §144. 

mens, are placed before the imperative, used negathely. They art 
subject to the rules of precedence, (13.) and (14.) 

1. Negal. 2. Reg. 3. Reg. 4. Verb. 5. Negat. 
[Rule (13.)] Ne nous le donnez pas. 

Not to us it give not. 

(Rule (14.)] Ne le lui donnez pas. 

Not it to him give not. 

(20.) The construction of an interrogative sentence, which has g 
noun for its subject, differs in the two languages. The following 
examples will show the order of the words in French : — 

1. The Subj. 2. Verb. 3. Duplicate Sub;'. 4. Regimen. 

Le marchand resoit- il son argent ? 

The merchant revives he his money ? 

Mon frere ecrit- il des lettres 1 

My brother writes he letters? 

(21.) When the sentence commences with ou, where; que, what; 
quel, what, which ; combien, how much, how many ; the noun may be 
placed after the verb : — 

Ou est votre amil Where is your friend? 

Que dit votre pere 1 What says your father ? 

(22.) The construction of interrogative sentences, in which ihe 
subject of the verb is a pronoun, is very simple. The pronoun is 
placed after the verb in simple tenses, and after the auxiliary in 
compound tenses : — 

1 Regimen Ind. 2. Verb. 3. Subject. 4. Direct Reg. 

Nous envoyez- vous notre argent ^ 

To us send you our money? 

1. Reg. Ind. 2. Aux. 3. Subj. 4. Part 5. Direct Reg. 
Leur avez- vous donne cet argent 1 

To them have you given that money ? 

(23.) The order of the words in a sentence, at once negative ac4 

nterrogative, is as follows : — 

1. Is* Neg. 2. Reg. Prn. 3. Verb. 4. Subj. 5. 2d Neg. 6. Direct Reg* 
Ne nous envoyez- vous pas de l'argent 1 

Not to us send you not money? 

(24.) In a compound tense : — 
1, 1st Neg. 2. Reg. Prn. 3. Verb. 4. Subj. 5. 2d Neg. 6. Part. 7. Dir. Reg 
Ne nous avez- vous pas envoye de l'argent? 

Not to us have you not sent money ? 

(25.) The first person singular of the present ot the maicatrve ot 
most verba, which have in that person only one syllable, and of a few 



USE OF CAPITAL LETTERS. § 145. 



461 



ethers having more than one syllahle, but ending in s, car not admit 
of the construction mentioned in the 22d rule of this Section. To 
render the sentence interrogative, est-ce-que is prefixed to the affir- 
mative form of the verb : — 

Est-ce-que vous parlez? 
Is it that you speak? 
Do you speak? 

Est-ce-que je pretends lui parler 1 

Is it that I pretend to speak to Mm ? 

Do I pretend to speak to him ? 

(26.) Every person of a tense susceptible of being conjugated in- 
terrogatively, may be rendered so by prefixing est-ce-que to the 
affirmative form : — 

Est-ce-que vous lisez ? Do you read? 

Est-ce-que votre frere est arrive ? | Is your brother arrived ? 

(27.) In poetry and in elevated prose, the subject of an affirmative 
sentence is sometimes placed after the verb : — 



Tout-a-coup au jour vif et bril- 
lant de la zone torride, succede 
une null universelle et profonde ; a 
la parure d'un printemps cternel. 
la nudite des plus tristes hivers. 
Raynal. 



Suddenly to the vivid and brilliant 
day of the torrid, zone, succeeds a 
universal and profound night ; to the 
attire of an eternal spring , the naked' 
ness of the saddest ic inters. 



(28.) The article, the demonstrative, and the possessive adjective 
are repeated before every word which they determine [L. 86], 

(29.) Pronouns, used as subjects of verbs, may be repeated before 
every verb [$ 99, L. 87]. 

(30.) Pronouns, used as regimens of verbs, must be repeated be- 
fore every verb [§ 105, L. 87]. 

(31.) Prepositions are generally repeated before every word which 
they govern [§ 141]. 

§ 145. — Use of Capital Letters. 

The only important difference existing in the two languages, in the 
use of capital letters, is that the French do not use a capital for an 
adjective, unless it be used substantively, and applied to a person 01 
persons, or unless it form an integral part of a name : — 



Ce monsieur est-ilfranc-ais? 

C'est un Frangais. 

Est-il frangais 1 

Cette dame est-elle anglaise 7 

C'est une Anglaise. 

Elle est anglaise. 

Appi enez-vous le frangais 1 

Je n'apprends pas l'anglais. 



Is that gentleman French ? 

He is a Frenchman. 

Is he French? 

Is that lady Ertglish ? 

S7ie is an English lady. 

She is English. 

Do you learn French ? 

I do not learn English* 



462 ANALOGY OF ENGLISH AND FRENCH. § 147. 



J'attends le Frai^ais qui demeure 
lei'? 
Le departement des Basses- Alpes. 
Le royaume des Pays-Bas. 



/ am waiting for the Frenchman 
wlw lives here. 

Tke department of the Lower Alps. 
The kingdom of the Netlierlands. 



§ 146.— Elision 
(1.) Elision is the suppression of the final vowel of a word, and 
the substitution of an apostrophe (') before words commencing with 
a vowel or an h mute : — 

A is enly elided in la, article or pronoun — L'ame, the soul, instead 
of la time ; l'humilit£, humility, instead of la humilite , je 
l'admire, je l'honore, J admire her, I honor her, instead of je 
la admire, je la honore. 
E is elided in le, article or pronoun, in je, te, me, se, ce (meaning 
it, dem. prn.), de, ne, que, parceque, quoique, puisque,jusque, 
quelque, — Fami, the friend; l'homme, the man. 
I is only elided in si coming before il, he ; ils, they. 
u is never elided. 

(2.) Although the words onze and onzieme commence with a 
vowel, the article is not elided before them, le onze, le onzieme. 

§ 147. — Analogy between many English and French 

Words. 

(1.) Most words ending in al, ce, de, ge, le, me, ant, ent, ion, are the 
same in both languages : — 
al Mineral, general, animal, principal, fatal. 
ce Race, prudence, notice, sacrifice, edifice. 
de Parade, grade, ambuscade, parricide, prelude. 
ge Courage, page, vestige, orange, deluge. 
le Docile, capable, table, possible, fertile, ridicule. 
ne Doctrine, mine, scene, famine, machine, heroine. 
ant Dormant, vigilant, constant, instant, arrogant 
ent Present, content, accident, president, resident. 
ion Question, fraction, legion, pension, religion. 

(2.) Most words ending in ary, ory, gy, ncy, ty, ous 9 or, ine, ive 
become French by changing : — 
ary into aire Necessaire, militaire. 

Memoire, gloire, victoire. 
Energie, geologie, effigie. 
Clemence, decence, excellence 
Charite, alacrite, divinite. 
Industrieux, curieux, fameux. 



ORY 


u 


OIRE 


gy 


a 


GIE 


NCY 


u 


NCE 


TY 


«< 


t£ 


ous 


U 


EUX 



IDIOMATIC PHRASES. 8 148. 



463 



ox into eur Candeur, ardeur, acteur. 
jne u in Masculin, feminin, clandestin. 
ive " if Ac til, passif, massif. 

§ 148. — Gallicisms or Idiomatic Phrases. 
Gallicisms, or idioms peculiar to the language, are very numerous 
In French. We have already in the first part of this work, presented 
a considerable number of such expressions, and will here give a 
somewhat extended list of those not placed in the examples and ex- 
ercises. In proverbial sayings, we have endeavored to give the equi- 
valent English phrase. We would advise the student to analyze 
carefully the following idiomatic sentences, and particularly those 
which do not admit of a literal or near translation. Idioms and pro- 
verbial phrases give a great insight into the character and customs 
of a nation, and their analysis is often of great assistance in the ac- 
quisition of a language : — 



€e piano n'est pas d'accord. 
Arrangez cette affaire a l'amiable. 
Nous sommes d'accord surce point. 
Quel age donneriez-vous a cet 

homme 1 
Cela fera bien mon affaire. 
Allocs au fait. 

Vous mettez ma patience a bout. 
Ce sont deux tetes dans un bonnet. 
Vous avez toujours ces propos a la 

bouche. 
Entre nous soit dit, ce n'est pas la 

mer a boire. 
Vous ne savez plus de quel bois 

faire fleehe. 
J'avais ce mot sur le bout des 

levres. 
C'est son bras droit. 
II nous a ferme la porte au nez. 
Vous allez toujours droit au but. 
En tout cas. je leur remettrai votre 

lettre. 
Ne voyez-vous pas qu'il rit sous 

capel 
Nous avons pique des deux. 
Nous en sommes sur ce chapitre. 
Oh ! pour le coup, vous avez raison. 
Cet orateur bat la campagne. 

Parlez-moi a cceur ouvert. 
Nous avons couche a la belle etoile. 
J 3 n'ai que faire de son argent. 
J'ai fait si bien mon compte, que 

j'ai obtenu cet argent. 
Cela ne me fait rien du tout. 



This piano is out of tune. 

Settle that business amicably. 

We agree upon that point. 

Ho 10 old would you take that man to 

be? 
That will suit me exactly. 
Let us come to the point. 
You exhaust my patience. 
They are both of the same mind. 
You always use those expressions. 

Between ourselves, the thing is not so 

very difficult. 
You are put to your last shift. You 

are at your wiVs end. 
I had that word at my tongue's end. 

He is his right hand,. 

He shut the door in our face. 

You come always to the main point. 

At all events, I will give them your 
letter. 

Do you not see that he laughs in his 
sleeve ? 

We put spurs to our horses. 

We are speaking about this matter. 

Oh! for this time, you are light. 

That speaker wanders from his sub- 
ject. 

Speak to me without reserve, openly 

We slept in the open air. 

I do not leant his money. 

I managed matte r s so well, that 1 ob- 
tained that money. 

That is nothing fU all to me. 



464 



IDIOMATIC PHRASES.- 



-§ U8. 



Faites-nioi grace detous ces details. 

C'en est fait. 

Comme vous voila fait ! 

11 m'a prie de vous faire ses amities. 

En attendant, faites-lui mes com- 
pliments. 

Chemin faisant, * nous le rencon- 
trarnes. 

Le plus fort est fait. 

je soldat *'a jamais vu le feu. 

II s'est bien tire d'affaire. 

Nous sommes au fort de l'hiver. 

Qu'allait-il faire dans cette galere 1 

C ; est un homme comme il faut. 

Ce drap est hors de prix. 

II se fit jour a travers les ennemis. 

Je vois cela dans un autre jour. 

Dites-moi au juste ce qu'il en est. 

II ne laisse pas de depenser beau- 
coup. 

C'est une autre paire de manches. 

C'estun tour de son metier. 

Vous ravez mis au pied du mur. 

Voila qui va le mieux du monde. 

Revenons a nos moutons. 

Cela est d'un bon naturel. 

Ces arbustes grandissent a vue d'oeil. 

Je regarde cela d'un autre ceil. 

II a vendu sa montre pour un mor- 
ceau de pain. 

Vous lui avez donne la monnaie de 
sa piece. 

II a trouve a qui parler. 

Vous etes un homme de parole. 

Je lui ai coupe la parole. 

Vous avez cela sur le coeur. 

II se creuse la cervelle. 

Le jeu n'en vaut pas la chandelle. 

Vous avez pris le change. 

Chansons que tout cela. 

Les bons comptes font les bonsamis. 

II met la charrue devant les boeufs. 

Vous bat issez des chateaux en Es- 
pagne. 

Je suis au comble de la joie. 

Ce n'est pas a vous de lui reprocher 
sa faute. 

II est tombe de Scylla en Charybde. 

Cet homme cherche a vous enconter. 
Nous sommes en pays de connais- 

sance. 
La sentinelle nous concha en joue. 
Ce maiade n'en reviendra pas. 
Nous sommes au courant de tout 

cela. 



Spare me all those particulars. 
It is all over. All is gone. 
What a condition you are in I 
He wished me to give his love to yi%. 
In the mean while, present my com- 
pliments to him. 
Going along, we met him. 

The most difficult part is dow*. 
That soldier has never smelt gun- 
powder. 
He came off very well. 
We a?~e in the depth of winter. 
What business had he there ? 
He is a gentleman. 
That cloth is extravagantly dear, 
He forced his way through the enemy. 
I see that in a different light. 
Tell me exoxtly how the matter stands. 
He spends a great deal, nevert/ieless 

That is quite another thing. 

That is one of his tricks. 

You left him no excuse. 

That is going on finely. 

Let us resume our subject. 

That bespeaks a good disposition. 

Those shrubs grow perceptibly. 

I look upon that in a different light. 

He sold his watch for a mere song. 

You paid him in his own coin. 

He met with his match. 

You are a man of your word. 

I cut him short. 

You cannot digest that. 

He racks his brain. 

The toll is more than the grist. 

You started upon the wrong scent 

That is all nonsense. 

Short reckonings make long friends. 

He puts the cart before the horse. 

You build castles in the air. 

I am overjoyed. 

It does not become you to reproach 

him with his fault. 
He fell from the frying pan into the 

fire. 
That man is trying to deceive you. 
We are here among acquaintances. 

The sentinel levelled his gun at us. 
That sick man will not recover. 
We are perfi ,dy acquainted with a& 
that. 



IDIOMATIC PHRASES. 8 148. 



46b 



Cela fait dresser les cheveux. 

lis chantent sur une autre note. 

Ce vers est frappe au bon coin. 

Je lui ai donne ie clef les champs. 

II ne sait ou donner de la tete. 

Vous vous donnez toujours raison. 

II a donne dans le piege. 

Cela lui donne de 1'huraeur. 

Je n'entre point la dedans. 

I] entre dans vos interets. 

Je ni'embarrasse fort peu de cela. 

Son amitie est a toute epreuve. 

Vos propos m'echauffent les oreilles. 

Finissez ce badinage. 

Reposez-vous-en sur moi. 

Cette marehandise n'a point de de- 
bit. 

II est toujours sur le qui-vive. 

Cette maison est a vendre au plus 
offrant et dernier encherisseur. 

De quelle part ce domestique vient- 
iH 

Doublons le pas ; il se fait tard. 

J'y vais de ce pas. 

Passe pour ceci. 

II faut en passer par la. 

Vous m'avez peint avec de beaux 

traits. 
Pour moi, je m'y perds. 
Peu s'en fallut qu ; il ne me frappat. 
Dites-moi un peu ce que vous en 

pensez. 
II nous jette de la poudre aux yeux. 
Vous seriez bien embarrasse, si on 

vous prenait au mot. 
Ne vous en prenez pas a moi. 
Le malade n'en pouvait plus. 
Je l'ai envoye promener. 
Le bon homme que c'est ! 
Brisons la de^sus. 
II en fut quitte pour la peur. 
Vous en etes quitte a bon marcbe. 
Cela n'est pas de refus. 
Je Tai entrevu ce matin. 
Je ne m'en soucie guere. 
II a des affaires par dessus la tete. 
Qu'a cela ne tienne. 
A. la bonne heure. 
Tout fin qu'il est, il s'est trompe. 
Ce n'est pas la un trait d'ami. 
Treve de compliments. 
Je vous vois venir, monsieur. 
Voila comme vous etes. 
Tout cela va le mieux du monde. 
Vous ny etes pas. 
Vous voila bien avanc6. 

2C 



That makes one's hair stand on end. 
They have changed their tone. 
That verse bears the right stamp. 
I sent him about his business. 
He does not know which ivay to turn. 
You pretend to be always in the right 
He fell into the snare. 
That puts him out of temper. 
That is no business of mine. 
He interests himself for you. 
I care very little about that. 
His friendship will stand any test. 
Your expressions provoke my ange 
Put an end to this trifling. 
Trust to me about this matter. 
This article has no sale. 

He is always on the vjatch. 

That house is to be sold to the hi.^kask 

bidder. 
Who sent that servant ? 

Let us mend our pace ; it is g: owing 

late. 
I am going thither this mom nt. 
Let this pass. 

We must submit to those te? ,ns. 
You have given a fine account of me. 

As for me, I cannot see into it. 
He came very neo,r striking mc. 
Just tell me what you think of it. 

He casts a mist before our eyes. 

You would be at a great loss, if you 

were taken at your word. 
Do not blame me about this. 
The patient was quite exhausted. 
I told him to mind his buzxness. 
What a simple man he is I 
No more of this. 
He escaped, though frightened. 
You came off cheaply. 
That is not to be refused. 
I had a glimpse of him this morning, 
I care but little about it. 
He is over head and eo/rs in Imsine^s, 
That shall not make us disagree. 
Well and good. 

Cunning as he is, he made a mistake x 
That is not acting like a friend. 
No more compliments. 
I see what you are about, sir. 
That is the way with you. 
All goes on as well as possible. 
That is not it. 
You are much the better for it. 



READING LESSONS. 



I.— FABLES. 

1. LE CHENE ET LE SYCOMORE. 

Un ch£ne etait plante pres d'un sycomore. Le dernier poussa dea 
[578, L. 12. 3.] feuilles des le commencement du printemps, et me» 
prisa Pinsensibilite du [L. 5. 1.] premier. Voisin, dit (dire, ir.) le 
chene, ne compte pas trop sur les caresses de chaque zephyr incons- 
tant. Le froid peut (pouvoir, 3. ir.) revenir. Pour moi, je ne suis 
(etre, 4. ir.) pas presse de pousser des feuilles ; j'attends que la cha- 
leur soit (etre) constante. II avait raison : [L. 8. 1.] une gelee de- 
truisit (detruire, 4. ir.) les beautes naissantes [L. 13.] du sycomore. 
Eh bien ! dit 1'autre, n'avais-je pas raison de ne me pas presser ? 

Ne comptez ni sur [§ 77, (1.) (2.)] les caresses ni sur les protes- 
tations exeessives; [L. 13.5.] elles sont ordinairement de courts 
duree. Perrin. 

2. LE LOUP DEGUISE. 

Un loup, la terreur d'un troupeau, ne savait (savoir, 3. ir.) com- 
ment faire pour attraper des [L. 12. 3.] moutons ; le berger etait con- 
tinuellement sur ses gardes. L'animal vorace s'avisa de se deguiser 
[} 43, (6.)] de la peau d'une brebis qu'il avait enlevee [{ 134, (4.)] 
quelques jours auparavant. Le stratageme lui [L. 27.], reussit pen- 
dant quelque temps ; mais enfin, le berger decouvrit Tartince, agaca 
les chiens centre lui ; ils lui [L. 27.] arracherent la toison de lessua 
les epaules, et le mirent (metire, 4. ir.) en pieces. 

Ne vous fiez pas toujours a. 1'exterieur. Un homme de jugement 
et de penetration ne juge pas selon les apparences. Perrin, 

3. L'ANE ET SON maItre. 

Un &ne trouva par hasard une peau de lion, [L. 5. 3.] et s'en [§ 39^ 
(17.)] revetit, (revetir, 2. ir.) Ainsi deguise il alia dans les forSts* 



READING LESSONS. 467 

et repandit pirtout la [L. 8. 2.] terreur et la consternation. Tous 
les animaux fuyaient (fuir, 2. ir.) devant lui. Enfin il rencon- 
tra son maitre qu'il voulut epouvanter aussi ; mais le bon Lorn me 
apeivQvant quelque chose de [L. 18. 3.] long, aux deux cotes de la 
tete de Panimal, lui .dit : maitre baudet, quoique vous soyez [L. 73. 
4.] vetu comme un lion, vos oreilles vous trahissent et montrent que 
vous n'etes reellement qu'un ane. 

Un sot a toujours un endroit qui le decouvre et le rend ridicule. 
L'affectation est un juste sujet de mepris. Perrin. 

4. L'AIGLE ET LE HIBOU. 

Laigle et le hibou, apres avoir [L. 21. 2.] fait longtemps la guerre, 
convinrent d'une paix ; les articles prelimin aires avaient ete prealable- 
ment signes par des [L. 12. 3.] ambassadeurs : Particle le plus essen- 
tiei etait que le premier ne mangerait pas les petits de l'autre. — Les 
connaissez (connaitre, 4. ir.) vous, demanda le hibou ? — Non, repon- 
dit Paigle. — Tant pis. — Peignez, (peindre, 4. ir.) les moi [L. 28. 4.] ou 
me les montrez ; [} 100, (6.)] foi d'honnete aigle je n'y [$ 39, (18.)] 
toucherai jamais. — Mes petits, repondit 1'oiseau nocturne, sont mi- 
gnons, beaux, bien faits ; ils ont la voix douce et melodieuse [L. 13. 
5.] ; vous les reconnaitrez aisement a ces marques. — Tres bien, je ne 
l'oublierai pas. II arriva un jour que l'aigle apercut dans le coin 
d'un rocher de [L. 8. 4.] petits monstres tres laids, rechignes, avec un 
air triste et lugubre. Ces enfants, dit-il, n'appartiennent (appartenir 
2. ir.) pas a notre ami ; mangeons les : aussitot il se mit a en [L. 15, 
7.] faire un bon repas. L'aigle n'avait pas tort [L. 8. 1.] Le hibou 
lui avait fait une fausse peinture de ses petits ; ils n'en avaient pas le 
moindre trait. 

Les parents devraient (devoir, 3. reg"), eviter avec soin ce faible en- 
ters leurs enfants, il les rend souvent aveugles sur leurs defauts. 

Perrin, 

5. LE PAYSAN ET LA COULEUVRE. 

Un paysan, allant au bois avec un sac pour y [5 39, (18.)] mettre 
des noisettes, (c'etait [L. 82. 1.] la saison,) trouva une couleuvre 
Ah ! ah ! dit le manant, je te tiens (tenir, 2. ir.) a present ; tu ne 
m'echapperas pas : tu viendras (venir, 2. ir.) dans oe sac et tu mourras 
(mourir,2. ir.) L'animal pervers, (je veux dire [L. 32. 5.] la cou- 
Ieuvr% et non pas l'homme,) lui dit : qu'ai-je fait pour meriter un 
pareil traitement ? — Ce que tu as fait 1 Tu es le symbole de Tingra- 
titud3, le plus odieux de tous les vices. — fe'il faut (falloir, 3. tr.)'que 



468 READING LESSONS. 

les ingrats meurent, repliqua hardiment le reptile, vous vous conaam- 
nez vous meme : de tous les animaux l'homme est le plus ingrat.— 
L'homme ! dit le paysan, surpris de la hardiesse de la eouleuvre ; je 
pourrais (pouvoir, 3. ir.) t'eeraser dans l'instant, mais je veux (vou* 
loir, 3. ir.) m'en rapporter a quelque juge. — J'y consens [_} 39, (18.)] 
Une vache etait a quelque distance : on [§ 41, (4.) (5.)] 1'appelle, elle 
vient (venir, 2. ir.) ; on lui propose le cas. — C'etait bien la peine de 
nr appeler, dit-elle ; la chose est claire ; la eouleuvre a raison. Je 
uourris l'homme de mon lait ; il en fait du beurre et du fromage ; et 
pour ce bienfait, il mange mes enfants. A peine sont-ils nes (naitre^ 
4. ir.) qu'ils sont egorges [$ 134, (2.)] et coupes en mille morceaux. 
Ce n'est pas tout : quand je suis vieille, et que je ne lui donne plus 
de lait, l'mgrat m'assomme sans pitie ; ma peau meme n'est pas a 
1'abri de son ingratitude ; il la tanne et en fait des bottes et des sou- 
liers. De la, je conclus que l'homme est le vrai symbole de l'ingra- 
titude. Adieu ; j'ai dit ce que je pense. 

L'homme, tout etonne, dit au reptile : je ne crois pas ce que cette 
radoteuse a dit ; elle a perdu Pesprit : rapportons-nous en a la deci- 
sion de cet arbre. — De tout mon coeur. — L'arbre etant pris pour juge, 
ce fut bien pis encore. — Je mets l'homme a l'abri [L. 69. 1.] des 
orages, de la chaleur, et de la pluie. En ete, il trouve sous mes 
branches une ombre agreable; je produis des fleurs et du fruit; ce- 
pendant, apres mille services, un manant me fait tomber a coups de 
hache : il coupe toutes mes branches, en fait du feu, et reserve mon 
corps, pour etre scie en planches. L'homme se voyant ainsi con- 
vaincu : je suis bien sot, dit-il, d'ecouter [L. 21. 2.] une radoteuse efc 
un jaseur. Aussitoi k lou.i* *& eouleuvre aux pieds et 1'ecrasa. 

Le plus fort a ^ujoms ramtii, n opprime le plus faible. La force 
et la passion sont sourdes a la voix ae la justice et de .a verite. 

Perrin. 

6. LE SINGE. 

Un vieux singe malin etant mort, son ombre descendit dans la scm 
ore demeure de Pluton, oil elle demanda a retourner parmi les vivants. 
Pluton voulait [j 119.] la renvoyer dans le corps d'un ane pesant et 
stupide, pour lui 6ter sa [j 21, (2.)] souplesse, sa vivacite, et sa ma- 
lice. Mais elle fit tant de tours plaisants et badins, que l'inflexibie 
roi des enfers ne put [5 138, (2.)] s'empecher de rire, et jui laissa le 
choix d'une condition. Elle demanda a entrer dans le corps d'un 
perroquet. — Au moins, disait-elle, je conserverai par la quelque res- 
eemblance avec les hommes que j'ai longtemps imites. Etant singe 



READING LESSONS. 469 

je faisais des gestes tomme eux ; et, etant perroq let, je parlerai aveo 
eux dans les pins agreables conversations. 

A peine 1'ombre du' singe fut introduite dans ce nouveau metier, 
}u'une vieille femme causeuse 1'acheta. II fit (faire, 4. ir.) ses de- 
uses; elle le mit dans une belle [L. 13. 6.] cage. II faisait bonne 
chere, et diseourait toute la journee avec la vieille radoteuse, qui ne 
pari ait pas plus sensement que lui. II joignit (joindre, 4. ir.) a son 
nouveau talent d'etourdir tout le monde je ne sais (savoir, 3. ir.) quoi 
de son ancienne profession. II remuait sa tete ridiculement, il fai- 
sait eraquer son bee, il agitait ses ailea de cent facons, et faisait de 
ses pattes plusieurs tours qui sentaient encore les grimaces de Fago- 
tin. La vieille prenait a toute heure ses lunettes pour l'aclmirer ; elle 
etait bien fachee d'etre un peu sourde, et de perdre quelquefois des 
paroles de son perroquet, auquel elle trouvait plus d'esprit qu'a per- 
sonne. Ce perroquet gate, devint bavard, importun, et fou. II se 
tourmenta si fort dans sa cage, et but (boire, 4. ir.) tant de vin avec 
la vieille, qu'il en mourut. 

Le voila revenu devant Pluton, qui voulut (vouloir, 3. ir.) cette 
fois le faire passer dans le corps d'un poisson. Mais il fit (faire, 4. 
ir.) encore une farce devant le roi des ombres; et les princes ne 
resistent guere [L. 17. 5.] aux demandes des mauvais plaisants qui les 
flattent. Pluton accorda done a celui-ci, qu'il irait (alter, 1. ir.) dans 
le corps d'un homme; mais comme le dieu eut honte [L. 21, (4.)] de 
Tenvoyer dans le corps d'un homme sage et vertueux, il le destina 
au corps d'un harangueur ennuyeux et importun, qui mentait, qui se 
vantait sans cesse, qui faisait des gestes ridicules, qui se moquait de 
tout le monde, qui interrompait toutes les conversations les plus 
polies et les plus solides, pour dire rien, ou les sottises les plus gros- 
sieres. Mercure qui le reconnut [L. 51.] dans ce nouvel etat, lui dit 
en riant. — Ho ! ho ! je te reconnais ; tu n'es qu'un compose du singe 
et du perroquet que j'ai vus [L. 42. 7.] autrefois. Qui [\ 39, (5.)] 
1 6terait tes gestes et tes paroles apprises par coeur sans jugement, 
ne laisserait rien de toi. D'un joli singe et d'un bon perroquet c 
nVu fait qu'un sot homme Fenelon. 



4-/0 READING LESSONS. 

II.—APOLOGUES ET ALLEGORIES. 
G. LE BERGER ET LE TROUPEAU. 

Quand ^oui yoyez quelquefois un nombreux troupeau qui, repandu 
sur une eolline vers le declin d'un beau jour, pait (paitre* 4. ir.) 
tranquillement le thym et le serpolet, ou qui broute dans une prairie 
une herbe menue et tendre qui a echappe a la faux du moissonneur 
le berger, soigneux et attentif, est debout aupres de ses brebis ; il n 
les perd pas de vue, il lcs suit (suivre, 4. ir.) il les conduit, il lea 
[L. 27. 7.] change de paturage ; si elles se dispersent, il les rassemble ; 
si un loup avide parait, ii lache son chien qui le met en fuite ; il le3 
nourrit [L. 87.] il les defend; l'aurore le trouve deja en pleine cam- 
pagne, d'oa il ne se retire qu'avec le soleil. Quels [§ 30, (10.)] soins ! 
quelle vigilance ! quelle servitude ! Quelle condition vous parait la 
plus delicieuse et la plus libre, ou du berger, ou des brebis? Le 
troupeau est-il fait puur le berger, ou le berger pour le troupeau ? 
Image naive [L. 13. 5,] des peuples, et du prince qui les gouv, ne, 
s'il est bon prince. La Bruyere* 

2. LES PARVENUS. . 

Ni les troubles, Zenobie, qui agitent votre empire, ni la guerre que 
\ous soutenez virilement contre une nation puissante, depuis la mort 
du roi votre epoux, ne diminuent rien de votre magnificence : vous 
avez prefere [§ 134, (5.)] a toute autre contree les rives de l'Euphrate 
pour y elever un superbe edifice ; Fair y est sain et tempore, la situ- 
ation en [§ 39, (17.)] est riante, un bois sacre l'ombrage du cote du 
couchant ; les dieux de Syrie qui habitent quelquefois la terre, n'y 
auraient pu choisir une plus belle demeure : la campagne autour, est 
couyerte [§ 134, (2.)] d'hommes qui taillent et qui coupent, qui vont 
(aller, 1. ir.) et qui viennent {venir, 2. ir.) qui roulent ou qui charrient 
!e bois du Liban, l'airain et le porphyre ; les grues et les machines ge* 
missent dans l'air, et font esperer a ceux qui voyagent vers TArabie, 
de revoir a leur retour en ieurs foyers ce palais acheve, et dans cett 
splendeur ou vous desirez le porter, avant de Fhabiter, vous et le 
princes vos enfants. N'y [§ 39, (18.)] epargnez rien, grande reine 
employez y Tor et tout Part des plus excellents ouvriers ■ que les 
Phidias et les Zeuxis de votre siecle deploient [^ 49, (2.)] toute leur 
science sur vos plafonds et sur vos lambris : tracez y de vastes et 
delicieux jardins, dont 1'enchantement soit tel, qu'ils ne paraissent pas 
faits de la main des hommes. Ej uisez vos tresors et votre industrie 



READING LESSONS. 473 

sur cot ouvrage incomparable ; et, apres que vous y aurez [L. 61. 5.] 
mis, Zenobie, la derniere main, quelqu'un de ces patres qui habitent 
ies sables voisins de Palmyre, devenu riche par les peages de vos ri- 
vieres, achetera [} 49, (5.)] un jour a deniers comptants cette royale 
maison, pour Fembellir et la rendre plus digne de lui et de sa for- 
tune La Bhi'vere. 



3. LE PALAIS DE LA KENOMMEE. 

Aux extremites du monde, sous le pole, dont [L. 31, 8.] Pintrepide 
Oook mesura la circonference a travers les vents et les teinpetes ; au 
milieu desterres australes qu'une barriere de glace derobe a la curio- 
site des hommes, s'eleve [§ 49, (6.)] une montagne qui surpasse en 
hauteur les sommets les plus eleves des Andes dans le Nouveau- 
Monde, ou du Thibet dans Fantique Asie. 

Sur cette montagne est bati un palais, ouvrage des puissances in- 
fernal es. Ce palais a mille portiques d'airain ; les moindres bruits 
viennent (veni?\ 2. ir.) frapper les domes de cet edifice, dont le silence 
n'a jamais franchi le seuil. 

Au centre du monument est une voute tournee en spirale comme 
une conque, et faite de sorte que tous les sons qui penetrant dans 
le palais, y aboutissent ; mais, par un effet du genie de Parch itecte 
des mensonges, la plupart de ces sons se trouvent [L. 36. 2.] fausse- 
ment reproduits; souvent une legere rumeur s'enfle et gronde en 
entrant par la voie preparee aux eclats du tonnerre, tandis que les 
roulements de la foudre expirent en passant par les routes sinueuses 
[L. 13. 5.] destiuees aux faibles bruits. 

C'est la que, Foreille placee a. l'ouverture de cet immense echo, 
est assis sur un trone retentissant, un demon, la renommee. Cette 
puissante fille de Satan et de Porgueil, naquit (naiire, 4. ir.) autrefois 
pour annoncer le mal. Avant le jour ou Lucifer leva I'etendard 
contre le Tout-Puissant, la renommee etait inconnue. Si un mondo 
venait a s'animer ou a s'eteindre ; si l'fiternel avait tire un univera 
du neant, ou replonge un de ses ouvrages dans le chaos ; s'il avait 
jete un soleil dans l'espace, cree un nouvel ordre de seraphins, essaye 
[} 49, 2.] la bonte d'une lumiere, toutes ces choses etaient aussitct 
connues [L. 42. 6.] dans le ciel par un sentiment in time d'admiration 
et d'amour, par le chant mysterieux de la celeste Jerusalem. Mais, 
apres la rebellion des mauvais anges, la renommee usurpa la place 
de cette intention divine. Bientot, precipitee [§ 66, (3.)] aux enfers, 
ce[L.81. 1.] fut elle qui publia dans l'abyme la naissance de notre 
globe, et qui porta Pennomi de Dieu a tenter la chute de Phomme 



472 READING LESSONS. 

Elle vint sur la terre avec la mort, et des ce moment elle etablit aw 
demoure sur la montagne, on elle entend et repete confusement ce 
qui se passe sur la terre, aux enfers, et dans les cieux. 

GWATEAUBRIANU 

4.— L'ACADEMIE SILENCIEUSE OU LES EMBLEMES. 

Jl y avait [{ 61, 2. ] a Amadan une celebre academie, dont le premiei 
statut etait eoncu (concevoir, 3.) en ces termes : Les academicieris 
penseront beaucoup, ecriront peu, et ne [L. 19. 2.] parleront que le moins 
possible. On [§ 41, (4.)] l'appelait V Academie silencieuse, et il n'etait 
point en Perse de vrai savant qui n'eut l'ambition d'y etre admis. 
Le docteur Zeb, auteur d'un petit livre excellent, intitule le Bdillon, 
apprit (apprendre, 4. ir.), au fond de sa province, qu'il (unip.) vaquait 
une place dans l'Academie silencieuse. II part aussitot; il arrive a 
Amadan, et, se presentant a la porte de la salle ou les academiciena 
sont assembles, il prie l'huissier de remettre au president ce billet . 
Le docteur Zeb demande humblement la place vacante. L'huissiei 
s'acquitta sur-le-champ de la commission ; mais le docteur et son bil- 
let arrivaient [§ 119.] trop tard, la place etait deja remplie. 

L'academie fut desolee de ce contre-temps ; elle avait recu un peu 
malgre elle un bel [L. 13. 6.] esprit, dont [L. 31. 8.] Peloquence vive 
et legere faisait l'admiration de la cour, et elle se voyait (voir, 3. ir.) 
reduite a refuser le docteur Zeb, le fleau des bavards, une tete si 
bien faite, si bien meublee ! Le president charge d'annoncer au doc- 
teur cette nouvelle desagreable [J 85.] ne pouvait presque s'y re- 
soudre, et ne savait comment s'y prendre. Apres avoir un peu reve, 
il fit [L. 32. 3, 4.) remplir d'eau une grande coupe, mais si bien rem- 
plir, qu'une goutte de plus eut fait deborder la liqueur ; puis il fit 
signe qu'on introduisit le candidat. II parut (paraitre, 4. ir.) avec 
cet air simple et modeste qui annonce presque toujours le vrai me- 
rite. Le president se leva, et, sans proferer une seule parole, il lui 
montra d'un air afflige la coupe emblematique, cette coupe si exaete- 
ment pleine. Le docteur comprit (comprendre, 4. ir.) de reste, qu'iJ 
n'y avait [§ 61, 2. ] plus de place a l'academie ; mais, sans perdre cou- 
rage, il songeait a fixire comprendre qu'un academicien surnumeraire 
n*y derangerait rien. II voit a ses pieds une feuille de rose [J 76, (11.)] 
il la ramasse, il la pose delicatement sur la surface de I'eau, et fait si 
bien, qu'il n'en echappe pas une seule goutte. 

A cette reponse ingenieuse, tout le monde battit des mains, on 
iaissa dormir les regies pour ce jour-la, et le docteur Zeb fut recu 
par acclamation. On lui presenta sur-le-champ, le registre ou lea 
recipiendaires devaient (devoir, 3.) s'inscrire e^ix-memes. II s'y ins- 



READING LESSONS. 473 

erfvil done, et il (unip.) ne lui restait plus qu'a prononcer aelon 
i'usage une phrase de remerciment. Mais, en aeademicien vraiment 
siiencieux, le docteur Zeb remercia sans dire mot. II ecrivit. (ecrire, 
4. ir.) en marge le nombre cent, e'etait [$ 108, (1.)] celui de ses nou- 
veaux confreres ; puis, en mettant un zero devant le chiffre, il ecrivit 
au dessous : llsrCen vaudront (valoir, 3. ir.) ni moins ni plus (0100). 
Le president repondit au modeste docteur avec autant de politesse 
que de presence d'esprit. . E mit le chiffre un devant le nombre cent 
t il ecrivit : lis en vaudront dix fois davantage (1100). 

L'abbe Blanchet. 



in.— ANECDOTES. 
1. LE BON MINISTER 



Le puissant Aaron-Rashid commencait a soupconner que son vi- 
sir Giafar, ne meritait pas la confiance qu'il lui avait donnee [} 134, 
(4.) J les femmes d Aaron, les habitants de Bagdad, les courtisans, les 
derviches, censuraient le visir avec amertume. Le calife aimait Gia- 
far; il ne voulut point le condamner sur les clameurs de la ville et 
de la cour [§ 141]. II visita son empire; il vit partout la terre bien 
eultivee, la campagne riante, les hameaux opulents, les arts utiles en 
honneur, et la jeunesse dans la joie. II visita ses places de guerre et 
ses ports de mer ; il vit de nombreux vaisseaux qui menacaient [} 119.] 
les cotes de TAfrique et de lAsie ; il vit (voir, 3. ir.) des guerriers 
disciplines et contents. Ces guerriers, les matelots, et les peuples 
des campagnes s'ecriaient : O Dieu ! benissez les fideles en prolon- 
geant les jours d Aaron-Rashid et de son visir Giafar ; ils maintien- 
nent dans l'empire la paix, la justice, et l'abondance ; tu manifestes, 
grand Dieu, ton amour pour les fideles, en leur donnant un calife 
comme Aaron et un visir comme Giafar ! Le calife, touche de ces 
acclamations, entre dans une mosquee, s'y precipite a. genoux, et 
s'ecrie : Grand Dieu ! je te rends graces : tu m'as donne un ministre 
dont mes courtisans me disent du mal, et dont mes peuples me disent 
du Men. Saint-Lambert. 

2. BONAPARTE ET LA SENTINELLE * 

Apres avoir gagne la bataille dArcole, qui avait dure [J 135, (6.)] 

troi3 jours, Bonaparte, toujours infatigaUe, parcourait son camp, sous 

»— ■ — ■ ; — — — — — — — 

* The word sentinelk is always feminine. 



474 READING LESSONS. 

nn v6temf mt fort simple, qui ne decelait point en lui le genera, en chef, 
a 1'effet d' examiner par lui-meme si les fatigues de trois journees aus«u 
penibles que ;ette bataille, n'avaient rien fait perdre a ses soldats de 
leur discipline et de leur surveillance habituelles [} 18, (3.)]. Le ge- 
neral trouve [} 118, (5.)] une sentinelle endormie, lui enleve douce- 
ment son fusil sans l'eveiller, et fait faction a sa place. Quelques 
[L. 88.] moments apres, le soldat se reveille ; se voyant ainsi de- 
sarme et reconnaissant son general, il s'ecrie : Je suis perdu ! — Ras- 
sure toi, lui dit Bonaparte avec douceur, apres tant de fatigues, ii 
peut etre permis a un brave tel que toi de succomber au sommeil 
mais une autre fois choisis mieux ton temps. 

3. BIENFAISANCE. 

Le due de Montmorenci, qui fut decapite a Toulouse, aimait a r6- 
pandre des bienfaits. Ce seigneur, voyageant [§ 49, (1.)] en Lan- 
guedoc, apercut dans un champ, quatre laboureurs qui dinaient a 
l'ombre d'un buisson. Approchons nous de ces bonnes gens, dit-il 
a ceux qui le suivaient, et demandons leur s'ils se croient heureux. 
Trois repondirent, que bornant leur felieite a certaines commodites 
de leur condition, que Dieu leur avait donnees, [L. 42. 7.] ils ne sou- 
haitaient rien dans le monde. Le quatrieme avoua franchement 
qu'une chose manquait a son bonheur : e'etait de pouvoir acquerir 
cerlain heritage que ses peres possedaient. — Et si tu l'avais, [L. 62. 
6.] cet heritage, dit M. de Montmorenci, serais-tu content? — Autant 
que je le [L. 46. 4, 5.] puis etre, rcpondit le paysan. — Combien vaut- 
(valoir, 3. ir.) il ? demanda le due. — Deux mille francs, repondit le 
paysan. — Qu'on [L. 28.] les lui donne, reprit le due, et qu'il soit 
dit que j'ai rendu un homme heureux en ma vie. 

Le Vassor. 



IV.— MAXIMES ET REFLEXIONS. 

l.f La religion donne a la vertu les plus douces esperances, au vice 
impenitent de [§ 78, (3.)] justes alarmes, et au vrai repentir les plus 
puissantes consolations: mais elle tache surtout d'inspirer aux 
hommes de Famour (j 78, (2).], de la douceur, et de la pitie pour les 
iiommes. Montesquieu. 



f This extract and several of the following, furnish excellent illustra- 
tiois of 1he Rules on the use of the article. 



READING LESSOES. 475 

2. Aimez et observez la religion, le reste tceurt, elle ne meurt ja- 
mais. Fenelon. 

3. Les vertus nees de la religion, se cachent dans la religion meme 

Lacretellk. 

4. La religion est encore plus necessaire a ceux qui commandent, 
qu'a ceux qui obeiesent. Bossuet. 

5. Prier ensemble, dans quel que langue, dans quelque rite que co 
soit, c'est la plus touchante fraternite d'esperance et de sympathie 
que les hommes puissent contracter sur cette terre. 

Mme. de Stael. 

6. La conscience est un juge place dans l'interieur de notre etre. 

Segur. 

7. La conscience est la voix de Tame, les passions sont la voix du 
corps. J. J. Rousseau. 

8. La vertu obscure est souvent meprisee, parceque rien ne la re- 
leve a nos yeux. Massillon. 

9. La vertu est un effort fait sur nous-memes, pour le bien d'au- 
trui, dans Pintention de plaire a Dieu seul. 

Bernardin de St. Pierre. 

10. H y a une amitie chretienne que la philosophic humaine ne 
comprend guere; c'est l'association de deux ames qui mettent en 
commun leur foi et leurs prieres, et s'elevent ensemble vers Dieu. 

Laurentie. 

11. La modestie est au merite, ce que les ombres sont dans un 
tableau ; elle lui donna de la force et du relief. La Bruyere. 

12. La verite n'a jamais besoin de Terreur, et les ombres n'ajoutent 
rien a la lumiere. • Lamartine. 

13. On n'est pas digne d'aimer la verite, quand on peut aimer 
quelque chose plus qu'elle. Massillon. 

14. La flatterie est une fausse monnaie qui n'a de cours que par 
notre vanite. La Rochefoucauld. 

15. On ne triomphe de la calomnie qu'en la dedaignant. 

Mme. de Maintenon. 

16. Ce n'est que pour 1'innocence, que la solitude peut avoir d^s 
charmes. Leczinska. 

17. Les conseils agreables sont rarement des conseils utiles 

Massillon. 
18 Ceux qui donnent des conseils sans les accompagner d'exem- 
pies, ressemblent a ces ooteaux de la campagne, qui indiquent lea 
themins sans les parcourir. Rivahol. 



476 READING LESSONS. 

V.— POESEE. 

HYMNE DE L'ENFANT A SON R 6 VEIL 

O Pere qu'adore mon pere ! 
Toi qu'on ne nomme qu'a genoux, 
Toi dont le nom terrible et doux 
Fait courber le front de ma mere ; 

On dit que ce brill ant soleil 
N'est qu'un jouet de ta puissance, 
Que sous tes pieds il se balance 
Comme une lampe de vermeil. 

On dit que c'est toi qui fais naitre 
Les petits oiseaux dans les champs, 
Et qui donnes aux petits enfants 
Une ame aussi pour te connaitre. 

On dit que c'est toi qui produis 
Les fleurs dont le jardin se pare ; 
Et que sans toi, toujours avare, 
Le verger n'aurait point de fruits. 

Aux dons que ta bonte mesure, 
Tout l'univers est convie ; 
Nul insecte n'est oublie 
A ce festin de la nature. 

L'agneau broute le serpolet ; 
La chevre s'attache au cytise ; 
La tnouche, au bord du vase, puis® 
Les blanches gouttes de mon lait 

L'alouette a la graine amere 
Que laisse envoler le glaneur, 
Le passereau suit le vanneur, 
Et l'enfant s'attache a sa meie. 

Et, pour obtenir chaque don 
Que chaque jour tu fais ^c.oro, 
A midi, le soir, a l'aurore, 
Que faut-il ? — prononcer ton nom. 



READING LESBOJSS. 

Dieu, ma bouche balbutie, 
Ce nom, des anges redoute, 
Un enfant meme est ecoute 
Dans ie choeur qui te glorifie ! 

Ah ! puisqu'il entend de si loin 
Les voeux que notre bouche adresse , 
Je veux lui demander sans cesse 
Ce dont les autres ont besoin. 

Mon Dieu ! donne Ponde aux fontamea 
Donne la plume aux passereaux, 
fit ia laine aux petits agneaux, 
Gt l'ombre et la rosee aux piaines. 

Donne aux malades la sante 
Au mendiant le pain qu'il pleuie, 
A l'orphelin une demeure, 
Au prisonnier la liberte. 

Donne une famille nombreuse 
Au pere qui craint le Seigneur, 
Donne a* moi sagesse et bonheur 
Pour que ma mere soit heureuse. 



477 



lAMARTDfK. 



2. LA FEUILLE. 

De ta tige detaehee 
Pauvre fruille dessechee, 
Oii vas til ? — Je n'en sais rien. 
L'orage a brise le chene 
Qui seul etait mon soutien* 
De son inconstante haleine 
Le zephyr ou l'aquilon, 
Depuis ce jour me promene 
De la foret a la plaine, 
De la montagne au vallon 
Je vais oii le vent me mene, 
Sans me plaindre ou m'effrayer f 
Je vais ou va toute chose, 
Ou va la feuille de rose 
Et la feuille de laurier. 

* The d in this line is a poetical license. 



Arnault 



478 READING LESSONS. 

3. LE MONTAGNARD EMIGRE. 

Combienj'ai douce souvenance 

Du joli lieu de ma naissance! 

Ma sceur, qu'ils etaient beaux ces jouf* 

De France ! 
O mon pays, sois mes amours ! 

Toujours. 

Te souvient-il que notre mere 
Am foyer de notre chaumiere 
Nous pressait sur son sein joyeux, 

Ma chere ! 
Et nous baisions ses blonds cheveus 

Tous deux. 

Ma soeur, te souvient-il encore 
Du chateau que baignait la Dore 
Et de cette tant vieille tour 

Du More, 
Oft 1'airain sonnait le retour 

Du jour ? 

Te souvient-il du lac tranquille 
Qu'effleurait Fhirondelle agile, 
Du vent qui courbait le roseau 

Mobile, 
Et du soleil couchant, sur l'eau, 

Si beau ? 

Te souvient-il de cette amie, 
Douce compagne de ma vie ? 
Dans les bois en cueillant la fleur 

Jolie, 
Helene appuyait sur mon coeur 

Son coeur. 

Oh ! qui me rendra mon Helene, 
Et la montagne et le grand chene ! 
Leur souvenir fait tous les jours 

Ma peine : 
Mon pays sera mes amours 

Toujours. Chateaub&iaub 



READING LESSONS. 471 

4. STANCES. 

Et j'ai dit dans raon coeur ; que faire de ]& vie ? 
Irai-je encor, suivant ceux qui m'ont devance, 
Comme Pagneau qui passe ou sa mere a passe, 
tmiter des mortels, l'immortelle folie 1 

L un cherche sur les mers les tresors de Memnon 
Et la vague engloutit ses voeux et son navire ; 
Dans le sein de la gloire ou son genie aspire, 
L'autre meurt, enivre par l'echo d'un vain nom. 

Av°c nos passions, formant sa vaste trame, 
Celui-la fonde un trone, et monte pour tomber ; 
Dans des pieges plus doux aimant a succomber, 
Celui-ci lit son sort dans les yeux d'une femme 

Le paresseux s'endort dans les bras de la faim , 
Le laboureur conduit sa fertile charrue ; 
Le savant pense et lit ; le guerrier frappe et tue ; 
Le mendiant s'assied sur le bord du chemin. 

Oa vont-ils cependant? — lis vont ou va la feuille 
Que chasse devant lui le souffle des hivers. 
Ainsi vont se fletrir dans leurs travaux divers 
Ces generations que le temps seme et cueille. 

lis luttaient contre lui, mais le temps a vaincu; 
Comme un fleuve engloutit le sable de ses rives, 
Je l'ai vu devorer leurs ombres fugitives, 
lis sont nes, ils sont morts : Seigneur, ont-ils vecu f 

Pour moi, je chanterai le maitre que j'adore, 
Dans le bruit des cites, dans la paix des deserts, 
Couche sur le rivage, ou rlottant sur les mers, 
Au declin du soleil, au lever de l'aurore. 

La terre m'a crie : Qui done est le Seigneur ? 
— Celui dont Tame immense est partout repandae 
Celui dont un seul pas me *ure Tetendue, 
Celui dont le soleil emprunte sa splendeur ; 

Celui qui du neant a tire la matiere, 
Celui qui sur le vide a fonde l'univers. 



480 READING LESSONS. 

Celui qui sans rivage a renferme les iners, 
Celui qui d'un regard a lance la lumiere ; 

Celui qui ne connait ni jour, ni lendemain, 
Celui qui de tout temps de soi-meme s'enfante, 
Qui vit dans Favenir comme a Pheure present©, 
Et rappelle les temps echappes de sa main. 

C'est lui, c'est le Seigneur ! Que ma langue redwe 
Les cent noms de sa gloire aux enfants des mortals ! 
Comme la harpe d'or pendue a ses autels, 
Je chanterai pour lui, jusqu'a ce qu'il me brise ! . . 

L *A>RTIHX. 



5. LAFAYETTE EN AMERIQUE 

Republicans, quel cortege s'avance ? 

— Un vieux guerrier debarque parmi nous. 

— Vient-il d'un roi vous jurer l'alliance? 

— II a des rois allume le courroux. 

— Est-il puissant ? — Seul il franchit les ondes. 

— Qu'a-t-il done fait ? — II a brise des fers. 

Gloire immortelle a Thomme des deux mondea ! 

Jours de triomplie, eclairez Tunivers ! 

Europeen, partout sur ce rivage 

Qui retentit de joyeuses clameurs, 

Tu vois regner, sans trouble et sans servage, 

La paix, les lois, le travail, et les moeurs. 

Des opprimes ces bords sont le refuge ; 

La tyrannie a peuple nos deserts, 

L'homme et ses droits ont ici Dieu pour juge. 

Jours de triomphe, eclairez Tunivers ! 

Mais que de sang nous couta ce bien-6tre ! 
Nous succombions ; Lafayette accourut, 
Montra la France, eut Washington pour maltr©. 
Lutta, vainquit, et l'Anglais disparut. 
Pour son pays, pour la liberte sainte, 
11 a depuis grandi dans les revers. 
Des fers d'Olmutz, nous effacons Fempreinte, 
Tours de triomphe, eclairez Funivers ! 



RBADINO LESSONS. 481 

Ce vieil am' que tant d'ivresse accueille 
Par un heros, ce heros adopte, 
Benit jadis, a sa premiere feuille, 
L'arbre naissant de nctre liberte. 
Mais aujourd'hui, que l'arbre et son feuillage 
Bravent en paix la foudre et les hiveis, 
II vient s'asseoir sous son fertile ombrage. 
Jours de triomphe, eclairez l'univers ! 

Autour de lui, vois nos chefs, vois nos sages, 
Nos vieux soldats se rappelant ses traits ; 
Vois tout un peuple, et ces tribus sauvages 
A son seul nom sortant de leurs forets. 
L'arbre sacre, sur ce concours immense 
Forme un abri de rameaux toujours verta 
Les vents au loin porteront sa semence, 
Jours de triomphe, eclairez l'univers ! 

L'Europeen que frappent ces paroles, 

Servit des rois, suivit des conquerants ; 

Un peuple esclave encensait ces idoles ; 

Un peuple libre a des honneurs plus grands. 

Helas, dit-il, et son oeil sur les ondes 

Semble chercher des bords lointains et cher* . 

Que la vertu rapproche les deux mondes ! 

Jours de triomphe, eclairez l'univers! B£fiAircn*« 

6. LA MARSEILLAISE. 

Allons, enfants de la patrie : 

Le jour de gloire est arrive : 

Contre nous de la tyrannie 

L'etendard sanglant est leve. 

Entendez-vous dans les campagnes 

Mugir ces feroces soldats 1 

lis viennent jusque dans vos bras 

Egorger vos fils, vos compagnes. 
Aux armes ! citoyens ; formez vos bataillone ; 
Marchez, — qu'un sang impur abreuve vos sillous ! 

Chceur. 
Aux armes ! citoyens ; formons nos bataillons ; 
Marchons ; — qu'un sang impii? abreuve nos sillons ! 

21 



482 READING LESSON 8. 

Que veut cette horde d'esciaves, 
De traitres, de rois conjures ? 
Pour qui ces ignobles entraves, 
Ces fers des longtemps prepares ? 
— Fran^ais, pour nous, ah ! quel outrage 
Quels transports il doit exciter ! 
C'est nous qu on ose menacer 
De rendre a 1 antique esclavage ! 
Aux armes, etc. 

Quoi ! des cohortes etrangeres 
Feraient la loi dans nos foyers ! 
Quoi ! 'ces phalanges mercenaires 
Terrasseraient nos fiers guerriers ! 
Grand Dieu ! par des mains enchalneea 
Nos fronts sous le joug se plieraient I 
De vils despotes deviendraient 
Les maitres de nos destinees ! 
Aux armes, etc. 

Tremblez, tyrans ! et vous, perfidea 
L'opprobre de tous les partis ; 
Tremblez . . . vos projets parricides 
Vont enfin recevoir leur prix. 
Tout est soldat pour vous combattie 
S'ils tombent, nos jeunes heros, 
La France en produit de nouveaux, 
Contre vous tout prets a se battre. 
Aux armes, etc. 

Francais ; en guerriers magnanimsa 
Portez ou retenez vos coups : 
Epargnez les tristes victimes, 
A regret s'armant contre vous ; — 
Mais ces despotes sanguinaires, 
Mais les complices de Bouille . . . 
Tous ces tigres qui, sans pitie, 
Dechirent le sein de leur mere . . 
Aux armes, etc. 

Amour sacre de la patrie, 

CJonduis, soutiens nos bras vengeun 



READING LESSON B. 483 

Liberte, liberte cherie 
Combats avec tes defenseurs. 
Sous nos drapeaux, que la victoire 
Accoure a tes males accents ; 
Que nos ennemis expirants 
Voient ton triomphe et notre gloire ! 

Aux armes, etc. Rouget de l'isle 



7. LE KETOUR DANS Li *ATRIE. 

Qn'ii va lentement le navire 
A qui* j'ai confie mon sort ! 
Au rivage ou mon coeur aspire, 
Qu'il est lent a trouver un port ! 

France adoree ! 

Douce eontree ! 
Mes yeux cent fois ont cru te 4ecoBTO?, 

Qu'un vent rapide 

Soudain nous guide 
Aux bords sacres oft je revkns mooftf, 
Mais enfin le matelot crie : 
Terre, terre, la-bas, voyea ! 
Ah ! tous mes maux sont oubiies, 

Salut a ma patrie I 

Oui, voila les rives de France ; 
Oui, voila le port vaste et stir, 
Yoisin des champs ou mon enfanoe 
S'ecoula sous un chaume obscur I 

France adoree! 

Douce eontree ! 
/pres vingt ans, enfin je te revois; 
De mon village 
Je vois la plage, 
Je vois fumer la cime de mes toits. 
Combien mon ame est attendrie ! 
La furent mes premieres amours ; 
La ma mere m'attend toujours, 

Salut a ma patne ! I 



* A poetical license ; this should be auqael. § 39 (2). 



484 KB AD t KG LESS OF*, 

Au bruit des transports d'allejgreM#> 
Enfin le navire entre au port. 
Dans cette barque oil l'on se presse 
Hatons-nous d'atteindre le bor<L 

France adoree ! 

Douce contree ! 
Puissent tes fils te revoir ainsi tons ! 

Enfin j'arrive 

Et sur la rive, 
Je rends au ciel, je rends grace a genonx. 
Je t'embrasse, 6 terre cherie I 
Dieu ! qu'un exile doit soufirir I 
Moi, desormais, je puis mourir. 

Salu t a ma patrie ! BifiAweu 



VOCABULARY FOR THE READING LESSONS. 



ABBREVIATIONS. 



adj. adjective. 

adj. v. verbal adjective. 

adv. adverb. 

art. article. 

conj. conjunction. 

f. feminine gender. 

ind. p present of indicative, 

int. interjection. 

m. masculine gender. 

n. noun. 

p. d. past definite. 



n 

pre. 
prn. 
v. a. 



participle, 
plural, 
preposition, 
pronoun, 
active verb. 



v. a. & n. active and neuter verb, 

v. aux. auxiliary verb, 

v. unip. unipersonal verb. 

v. ir. or ir. irregular verb. 

v. n. neuter verb. 

v. r. reflective verb. 



The numbers after the verbs indicate the conjugation. 



A-AD. 



AB—AM. 



A, a (with a grave accent), pre. at or 
to. 

Abondance, n. ft abundance, plenty. 

Aboutir, v. n. 2. to end in, to come 
to. 

Abreuver, v. a. 1. to water, to fill. 

Abyme, n. m. abyss, depth. 

Abri, n. m. shelter. 

Academicien, n. m. Academician. 

Academie, n. f. academy. 

Accent, n. m. accent, pi. voice. 

Acclamation, n. f. acclamation. 

Accompagner, v. a. 1. w accompany. 

Accorder, v. a. 1. to grant, (a') v. r. 
to agree. 

Accourir, v. n. ir. 2. to run, to has- 
ten to. 

Accueillir, v. a. ir. 2. to welcome. 

Acheter, v. a. 1. to buy. 

Achever, v. a. 1. to achieve, com- 
plete. 

Acquerir, v. a. ir. 2. to acquire. 

Acquitter (s'), v. r. to acquit one's 
self of, to discharge. 

Adieu, int. & n. m. adieu, farewell, 
leave. . 

Admettre, v. a. ir. 4. to admit. 

Admiration, n. f. admiration. 

Admirer, v. a. 1. to admire. 

Adopter, v. a. 1. to adopt. 

Adorer, v. a. 1. to adore. 



Adresser, v. a. 1. to address, (»') 

ref. to apply. 
Affectation, n. f. affectation. 
Affiige, p. & acy. v. grieved^ *f- 

flicted. 
Agacer, v. a. to entice, to tease. 
Agile, adj. nimble, light. 
Agiter, v. a. to agitate. 
Agneau, n. m. lamb. 
Ah ! int. Ah. 
Aigle, n. m. eagle. 
Aile, n. f. wing. 
Aimer, V. a. 1. to love, to like. 
Ainsi, adv. thus, so. 
Air, n. m. air. 
Airain, n. m. brass. 
Aisement, adv. easily. 
Ajouter, v. a. 1. to add. 
Alarm, n. f. alarm. 
Allegorie, n. f. allegory. 
Alter, v. n. ir. 1. (ind. p. je vais,) 

to go. 
Alliance, n. f. alliance. 
Allumer, v. a. 1. to light, kindle. 
Alouette, n. f. lark. 
Ambassadeur, n. m. ambassador. 
Ambition, n. f. ambition. 
Ame, n. f. soul. 
Amer, e, adj. bitter. 
Amertume, n. f. bitterness, sorrow. 
Ami, e, n. m. &. f. friend. 



486 



AM-AU. 



AU-BL. 



Amour, n. m. love. 
An, n. m. annee, f. ysixr. 
Ancien, m. adj. ancient , old. 
Ange, n. m. angel. 
Animal, (pi. aux,) n. m. animal. 
Animer, v. a. 1. to animate, to excite. 
Annoncer, v. a. 1. to announce. 
Antique, adj. ancient, antique. 
A peine, adv. scarcely, hardly. 
Apercevoir, v. a. 3. to pe?ceive. 
Apologue, n. m. apologue. 
Apparence, n. f. appearance. 
Appartenir, v. n. ir. 2. (ind. p. j'ap- 

partiens), to belong. 
Appeler, v. a. 1. to call. 
Apprendre, v. a. 4. (p. appris), to 

learn. 
Approcher, v. a. 1. to bring near, (S*) 

v. r. to approach. 
Appuyer, v. a. 1. to lean. 
Apres, pre. after. 
Aquilon, n. m. north wind. 
Arbre, n. m. tree. 
Architecte, n. m. architect. 
Armer, v. a. 1. to arm, (s') v. r. to arm 

one's self. 
Arracher, v. a. 1. to tear. 
Arriver, v. n. 1. to arrive. 
Art, n. m. art. 
Article, n. m. article. 
Artifice, n. m. artifice, cunning, 

trick. 
Aspirer, v. n. 1. to aspire. 
Assembler, v. a. 1. to assemble. 
Asseoir, (s') v. r. ir. 3. (ind. p. je 

m'assieds, p. assis), to sit down. 
Association, n. f. association, com- 
pany. 
Assommer, v. a. 1. to strike down, to 

kill. 
Atteindre, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. j'at- 

teignis), to reach, to hit. 
Attendre, 4. to await, to expect. 
Attendri, e, a. v. p. moved, grieved, 
Attentif, ve, adj. attentive. 
Attraper, v. a. 1. to catch. 
Au, art. at, or to the. 
Aujourd'hui, adv. to-day. 
Auparavant, adv. before. 
Aupres, pre. & adv. near. 
Aurore, n. f. dawn, aurora. 
Aussi, conj. & adv. as, so, also, 
Aussitot, adv. immediately. 
Austral, e, adj, austral. 
Autant, adv. as much, as many 
Autel, n. m. altar. 



Auteur, n. m. author. 

Autour, pre. & adv. round, around, 

Autre, adj. other. 

Autrefois, adv. formerly. 

Autrui, prn. other, others. 

Avancer (s'), v. r. 1. to advance, 

approach. 
Avant, pre. before. 
Avare, n. & ad\j. miser, avaricious. 
Avec, pre. with. 
Avenir, n. m. future. 
Aveugle, adj. blind. 
Avide, adj. anxious, eager. 
Aviser (s') v. r. 1. to think, to talc* 

into one's head. 
Avoir, v. aux. & a. ir. (p. d. j'eus), 

to have. 
Avouer, v. a. 1. to confess. 



B. 

Badin, e, ac(j. playful. 

Baigner, v. a. 1. to bathe. 

Baillon, s. m. gag, 

Baiser, v. a. 1. to kiss. 

Balancer, v. n. 1. to balance, hesu 
tale. 

Balbutier, v. a, & n. 1. to stammer. 

Barque, n. f. bark, boat. 

Barriere, n. f. gate. 

Bataille, n. f. battle. 

Bataillon, n. m. battalion. 

Batir, v. a. 2. to build. 

Battre, v. a. ir. 4. (p. battu,) to beat, 

Baudet, n. m. donkey. 

Bavard, e, n. & adj. talkative, praU 
tier. 

Beau, bel, f. belle, adj. fine, hand- 
some. 

Beaucoup, adv. much, many. 

Beaute, n. f. beauty. 

Bee, n. m. beak. 

Bel esprit, n. m. wit. 

Benir, v. a. 2. to bless. 

Berger, n. m. shepJverd. 

Besoin, n. m. need, want. 

Beurre, n. m. butter. 

Bien, n. m. property, adv. well. 

Bien-etre, n. m. vielfare, comfort. 

Bienfaisance, n. f. beneficence, be- 
nevolence. 

Bienfait, n. m. benefit. 

Bientot, adv. soon. 

Billet, n. m. note. 

Blanc, blanche, actf. white. 



BO-CH. 



CH-€0. 



487 



Boire, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. je bus, p. 

bu), to drink. 
Bois, n. m. wood, forest. 
Bon, ne, adj. good, kind, simple. 
Bonheur, n. m. happiness. 
Bonne-chere, n. f. good living. 
Bonte, n. f. goodness, kindness. 
Bord, n. m. border, shore. 
Borner, v. a. 1. to confine ; to bound. 
Botte, n. f. boot, bundle. 
Bouche, n. f. mouth. 
Branche, n. f. branch. 
Bras, n. m. arm. 
Brave, adj. brave, worthy. 
Braver, v. a. 1. to brave, affront. 
Brebis, n. f. sheep. 
Brillant, e, adj. shining, brilliant. 
Briser, v. a. 1. to break. 
Brouter, v. a. & n. 1. to browse, to 

graze. 
Bruit, il m. noise. 
Buisson, n. m. bush. 



C. 

C, prn. it. 

Cacher, v. a. 1. to hide, conceal, (se) 

v. r. to hide one's self. 
Cage, n. f. cage. 
Calife, n. m. calif. 
Camp. n. m. camp. 
Campagne, n. f. country, campaign. 
Candidat, n. m. candidate. 
Caresse, n. f. caress. 
Causeur, se, ao\j. talker. 
Ce, prn. & adj. this, that. 
Celebre, adj. celebrated. 
Celeste, adj. celestial. 
Celui, prn. this, that. 
Censurer, v. a. 1. to censure. 
Cent, adj. num. hundred. 
Centre, n. m. centre. 
Cependant, conj. however. 
Certain, adj. certain. 
Cesse (sans) without ceasing. 
Cbaleur, n. f. heat. 
Champ, n. m. field. 
Changer, v. a. & n. 1. to change* 
Chant, n, m. song, singing. 
Chanter, v. a. & n. 1. to sing. 
Chaos, n. m. chaos. 
Chaque, adj. each. 
Charger, v. a. 1. to charge, load. 
Charme, n. m. charm. 
Cliarrier, v. a. 1. to transport, carry. 



Chasser, v. a. & n. 1. to hunt, to chase, 

to drive awojy. 
Chateau, n. m. castle, villa. 
Chaume, n. m. thatch. 
Chanmiere, n. f. cottage. 
Chef, n. m. chief. 
Chemin, n. m. way, road. 
Chene, n. m. oak. 
Cher, e, adj. dear. 
Chercher, v. a. to seek. 
Cheveux, n. m. pi. hair. 
Chevre, n. f. goat. 
Chien, n. m. dog. 
Chiffre. n. m. figure. 
Choeur, n. m. choir, chorus. 
Choisir, v. a. 2. to choose. 
Chose, n. f. thing. 
Chute, n. f. fall. 
Ciel, n. ni, (pi. cieux,) heaven. 
Cime, n. f. peak, top. 
Circonference, n. f. circumference* 
Cite, n. f. city. 
Citoyen, n. m. citizen, 
Clair, e, adj. clear, n. m. light. 
Clameur, n. f. cry, clamor. 
Cceur, n. m. heart. 
Cohorte, n. f. cohort. 
Coin, n. m. corner. 
Colline, n. f. hill. 
Commander, y. a. 1. to command, U 

order. 
Combattre, v. a. & n. 4. to combat, 

to fight. 
Combien, adv. how much, hov) many. 
Comme, adv. & conj. as, tike, when* 
Commencement, n. m. beginning. 
Commencer, v. a. 1. to begin. 
Comment, adv. how. 
Commission, n. f. commission. 
Commodite, n. f. convenience. 
Commun, e, adj. common, usual. 
Compagne, n. f. companion. 
Complice, n. m. accomplice. 
Composer, v. a. 1. to compose. 
Comprendre, v. a. ir. 4. to under- 

derstand, to comprise. 
Comptant, adj. & adv. ready, for cash, 
Compter, v. a. 1. to count, to intend. 
Concevoir, v. a. 3. to conceive. 
Conclure, v. a. ir. 1. to conclude. 
Concours, n. m. concourse, assembly. 
Condamner, v. a. 1. to condemn. 
Condition, n. f. condition. 
Conduire, v. a ir. 4. to conduct. 
Confiance, n. f. confidence, defen* 

dence. 



488 



co-cu. 



CW-D1. 



Conner, t. a. 1. to trust, to confide. 

Confrere, n. m. brother , fellow . 

Coiifusemcnt, adv. confusedly. 

Conjure, a. v. sworn together. 

Connaitre, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. je con- 
lius. p. connu). tc know, to be ac- 
quainted with. 

Con que, n. f. shell. 

Couquerant, n. m. conqueror. 

Ccnscience, n. f. conscience. 

Conseil, n. m. advice, counsel. 

Consentir, v. n. 2. to consent, agree. 

Conserver, v. a. 1. to preserve. 

Consolation, n. f. consolation. 

Constant, e», acy. constant. 

Consternation, n. f. consternation. 

Content, e, adj. pleased, content. 

Continuellement, adv. continually. 

Contracter, v. a. 1. to contract. 

Centre, pre. against. 

Contree, n. f. country, district. 

Contre-temps, n. m. disappointment. 

Convaincre, v. a. ir. 4. to convince. 

Convenir, v. n. 2. to agree, to suit, 
to confess. 

Conversation, n. f. conversation. 

Convier, v. a. 1. to invite. 

Corps, n. m. body, corps. 

Cortege, n. m. retinue. 

Cote, n. f. coast. 

Cote, n. m. side. 

Couchant, n. m. West. 

Coucher (se), v. ref. 1. to lie down. 

Couleuvre, n. f. snake, adder. 

Coup, n. m. blow. 

Coupe, n. f. cup, vessel. 

Couper, v. a. 1. to cut. 

Cour, n. f. court. 

Courage, n. m. courage. 

Courber, v. a. 1. to bend, to bow. 

Courroux, n. m. anger. 

Court, e, adj. short. 

Cours, n. m. course. 

Courtisan, n. m. courtier. 

C outer, v. n. 1. to cost. 

Couvrir, v. a. ir. 2. to cover. 

Craindre, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. je craignis, 
p. craint), to fear.' 

Creer, v. a. 1. to create. 

Crier, v. n. 1. to cry. 

Croiie, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. je crus, p. 
cru). to believe. 

Croquer, v. a. 1 . to eat greedily. 

Cueillir, v. a. ir. 2. to gather, to 
pick. 

Cuitiver, t. a. 1. to cultivate. 



Curiosity, n. f. cit^wsUf 
Cytise, n. m. cytisus. 



D. 

Dans, pre. in, into. 
Davantage, adv. more. 
De, pre. of or from. 
Debarquer, v. a. & n. 1. to land. 
Deborder, v. n. 1. to run over, 
Debout, adv. standing. 
Decapiter, v. a. 1. to behead, 
Deceler, v. a. 1. to discover, 
Dechirer, v. a. 1. to tear. 
Decision, n. f. decision. 
Declin, n. m. decline, fall. 
Decouvrir, v. a. ir. 2. to discover, wt* 

cover. 
Dedaigner, v. a. 1. to disdain. 
Defaut, n. m. defect. 
Defendre, v. a. 1. to defend, to forbid, 
Defenseur, n. m. defender, protector, 
Deguiser, v. a. 1. to disguise. 
Deja, adv. already. 
Delicat. e, adj. delicate. 
Delicatement, adv. delicately. 
Delice, n. m. delight. ' 
Delices, n. f. pi. delights. 
Delicieux, se, adj. delightful, deh* 

cious. 
Demande, n. f. request, question. 
Demander, v. a. 1. to ask, to req 
Demeure, n. f. abode, dwelling. 
Demon, n. m. demon. 
Deniers, n. m. p. money, means. 
Deploy er, v. a. 1. to display. 
Depuis, pre. since. 
Deranger, v. a. 1. to disturb, to put 

out of order. 
Dernier, e, adj. last, latter. 
Derober, v. a. 1. to steal, to conceal. 
Derviche, n. m. dervise. 
Des, pre. from. 

Desagreable, adj. disagreeable, 
Desarme, adj. v. disarmed. 
Descendre, v. n. 4. to descend, t» 

come down. 
Desert, n. m. detert. 
Desirer, v. a. 1. to wish, desire, 
Desormais, adv. hencefiith. 
Dessecher, v. a. 1. U diy iff, U 

drain. 
Dessous, adv. undei , 
Dessus, adv. above. 
Destinec, n. f. fate. 



DE-EF. 



EF-EP. 



489 



0estiner, v. a. 1. to destine . 
Detacher, 1. a. 1. to detach, to sepa- 
rate. 
Dctruire, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. je de- 

truisis), to destroy. 
Devancer, v. a. 1. to outstrip \ to come 

before* 
Devant, pre. before, opposite. 
Devenir, v. n. 2, to become, 
Devoir, v. a. ir. 3. to owe. 
Devorer, v. a. 1. to devour. 
Dieu, n. m. God. 
Digne, adj. worthy. 
Diminuer, v. a. 1. to diminish. 
Dire, v. a. ir. 4. (p. dit.), to say, tell. 
Discourir, v. n. ir. 2. to discourse. 
Discipline, n. f. discipline. 
Disparaitre, v. n. ir. 4. to disappear. 
Disperser, v. a. 1. to disperse. 
Distance, n. f. distance. 
Divers, adj. diverse, different. 
Divin, e, adj. divine. 
Docteur, n. m. doctor. 
Dome, n. m. dome. 
Don, n. m. gift. 
Done, conj. therefore, then. 
Donner, v. a. l.'to give. 
Dont, prn. ofvjhich, of whom. 
Dormir, v. n. ir. 2. to sleep. 
Doucement, adv. softly, sweetly. 
Douceur, n. f. softness, sweetness. 
Doux. ce, adj. soft, sweet. 
Drapeaux, m. p. colors, standards. 
Droit, n. m. right. 
Droit, adj. straight. 
Due, n. m. duke. 
Duree, n. f. duration. 
Durer, v. n. 1. to last, to endure. 



E. 

Eau, n. f. water. 
Echapper, v. n. 1. to escape. 
Echo, n. rn. echo. 
Eclairer, v. a. 1, to light. 
Eclat, n. m. brightness, splendor. 
Eclore, v. n. ir. 4. to hatch. 
Ecouler. (s') 3 v. r. 1. to elapse, to 

pass. 
ficouter, v. a. 1. to listen, to hear. 
ficraser, v. a. 1. to crush. 
ficriei (s'), v. r. 1. to exclaim. 
Ecrire, v. a. ir. 4. to write. 
Edifice, n m. edifice, 
Effacer, v. a. to efface. 

21 



Effet, n. m. effect. 

Effleurer. v. a. 1. to graze, to touch 
slightly. 

Effort, n. m. effort, endeavor. 

Eflrayer, v. a. 1. to frighten, (a') ref. 

^ to be frightened. 

Egorger, v. a. 1. to slaughter ; to mwr~ 
der, to cut the ttiroat. 

Eh bien ! int. well I 

Elever, v. a. 1. to raise. 

Embrasser, v. a. 1. to embrace , U* 
kiss. 

Elle, prn. she, it. 

Eloquence, n. f. eloquence. 

Embellir. v. a. 2. to embellish. 

Emblematique, adj. emblematical. 

Emigre, n. & adj. emigrant. 

Empecher, v. a. 1. to prevent. 

Empire, n. m. empire. 

Employer, v. a. 1. to employ, to use 

Empreinte, n. f. marl, print, 

Emprunter, v. a. 1. to borrow. 

En, pre. in, into, at, to. 

En, rel. prn. of it, of them, &c. 

Encenser, v. a. 1. to flatter, to adore, 

Enchainer, v. a. 1. to chain. 

Enchantement, n. m. encliantment s 
charm. 

Encore, adv. yet, still, again. 

Endormir, v. a. ir. 2. to put or luU 
to sleep, (s') ref, to go to sleep 

Endroit, n. m. spot, place 

Enfant, n. m. child. 

Enfanter, v. a. to produce. 

Enfer, n. m. hell. 

Enfin, adv. at last, finally. 

Enfler. (s') v. r. 1. to swell, to increase, 

Engloutir, v. a. 2. to swallow up. 

Enivrer, v. a. 1. to intoxicate. 

Enlever, v. a. 1. to take or carry 
away. 

Ennemi, n. m. & adj. enemy, in- 
imical. 

Ennuyeux, se, adj. tiresome, weari- 
some. 

Ensemble, adv. together. 

Entraves, n. f. pf. bands, obstacles, 
stocks. 

Entrer, v. n. 1. to enter, to go in* 

Envers, pre. towards, to. 

Envoler (s'), v. r. 1. to fly away. 

Envoyer, v. a. 1. to send. 

Epargner, v. a. 1. to spare. 

Epaule, n. f. shoulder. 

Epouvanter, v. a. 1. tofiighien. 

fipous, se, n. m. & f. husband, wife. 



490 



EP-FA. 



FA-GA. 



fipuisei, v a. 1. to e :ha%st. 

Erreur, 11. f. error. 

Eselave, n. m. slave. 

Espace. n. m. space. 

Espe ranee, n. f. hope. 

Esperer, v. a. 1. to hope. 

Esprit, n. m. wit, mind. 

Essay er, v. a. 1. a> try, attempt. 

Et. conj. and. 

Etablir, v. a. 2. to establish. 

Etat, n. m. state, condition, trade. 

Ete. n. m. summer. 

Eteindre, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. j'eteignis), 

to extinguish, put out. 
Etendard, n. m. standard. 
Etendue, n. f. extent. 
Eternel, le, adj. & n. eternal. 
Etonner, v. a,. 1. to astonish. 
Etourdir, v. a. 2. to stun, to disturb. 
Etre, v. aux. & n. ir. 4. (ind. p. je 

suis, p. d. je fus), to be. 
Etre, n. m. being. 
Europeen, ne, n. & adj. European. 
Eux, prn. m. pi. them. 
Eveiller, v. a. 1. to awake. 
Eviter, v. a. 1. to avoid. 
Exactement, adv. exactly. 
Examiner, v. a. 1. to examine. 
Excellent, e, adj. excellent. 
Excessif, ve, adj. excessive. 
Exciter, v. a. 1. to excite. 
Exemple, n. m. example. 
Exile, n. m. & adj. exile, exiled. 
Expirant, adj. v. expiring, dying. 
Expirer, v. n. 1. to expire. 
Exterieur, n. m. outside, exterior, 
Exterieur, e, adj. exterior. 
Extremite, n. f. extremity. 



Fache, e, adj. v. angry, sorry. 

Fa^on, n. f. fashion, way. 

Faction, n. f. faction, watch. 

Faible, ac$. weak, feeble. 

Faim, n. f. hunger. 

Faire, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. je fis), to 

make, to do, to cause. 
Falloir, v. unip. ir. 3. (ind. p. il 

faut), to be necessary, 
Famille, n. f. family. 
Farce, n. f. farce, trick. 
Farouche, adj. wild, stem. 
Fatigue, n. f. fatigue, weariness. 
Faussement ; adv, falsely. . 



Faux, se, adj. false. 

Felicitc, n. f. hajrpiness, felicity. 

Femme, n. f. woman, wife. 

Fers. n. m. pi. chains, irons. 

Fertile, ad], fruitful, fertile. 

Feu, n. in. fire. 

Feuillage, n. m. foliage. 

Feuille, n. f. 'leaf. 

Festin, n. m. sumptuous meal, repass. 

Fidele, n. m. & adj. faithful. 

Fier, e, adj. p? mid, formidable. 

Fier (se), v. r. 1. to trust, to confide 

Fille, n. f. daughter, girl. 

Fils, n. m. son. 

Flatterie, n. i. flattery. 

Fleau, n. m. scourge^ 

Fletrir, v. a. & n. 2. to fade, wvtkei , 

Fleur, n. £ flower. 

Fleuve, n. m. river, stream. 

Flotter, v. n. 1. to float, to wave. 

Foi, n. f. faith. 

Fois, n. f. time. 

Folie, n. f. folly. 

Fond. n. m. bottom. 

Fonder, v. a. 1. to found. 

Fontaine, n. f. fountain, spring. 

Force, n. f. strength, force. 

Foret, n. f. forest, wood. 

Former, v. a. 1. to form. 

Fort, e, adj. strong. 

Fortune, n. f. fortune. 

Foudre, n. f. thunderbolt. 

Fou, folle, adj. & n. m. & f. fool^ 
foolish. 

Fouler, v. a. 1. to tread under foot. 

Foyer, n. m. hearth. 

Foyers, n. m. pi. hearth, home, na- 
tive country. 

Franchement, adv. frankly. 

Franchir, v. a. 2. to step over, to pas, 
over. 

Frapper, v. a. 1. to strike. 

Fraternite, n. f. brotherhood.^ 

Froid, n. m. cold. 

Fromage, n. m. cheese. 

Front, n. m. forehead, brow. 

Fruit, n. m. fruit. 

Fugitif, ve, adj. fugitive. 

Fuite, n. f. flight. 

Fumer, v. n. & a. 1. to smoke 

Fusil, n. m. gun. 



Gagner, v. a. 1. to win, gam. 



GA-HO. 



HO- IV. 



491 



Garde, n. f. guard, watch, care. 

Gate adj. v. spoiled. 

Gelee, n. {.frost. 

Gemir, v. n. 2. to moan, groan. 

General n. m. & adj. general. 

Generation, n. f. generation. 

Genie, n. m. genius. 

Genou, n. m. knee. 

Gens. n. pi. people. 

Gestes, n. m. pi. gestures. 

Glace, n. f. ice, looking-glass. 

Glaneur, n. m. gleaner. 

Globe, n. m. globe. 

Gloire. n. f. glory. 

Glorifier, v. a. 1. to glorify, praise. 

Goutte, n. f. drop. 

Gouverner, v. a. 1. to govern. 

Graces, n f. pi. graces, thanks. 

Graine, n. f. grain. 

Grand, e. adj. great, large. 

Grandir, v. n. 2. to grvw. 

Grimaces, n. f. pi. grimaces, faces. 

Gronder, v. a. & ■ n. 1. to scold, to 

roar. 
Gros, se. adj. large. 
Grossier, e, adj. coarse. 
Grue, n. f. crane. 
Guere, adv. bat little, but few. 
Guerre, n, f. war. 
Guerner, n. m. warrior. 
Guide, n. m. guide. 



H. 

Habitant, n. m. inhabitant. 

Habiter, v. a. 1. to inhabit. 

Habituel, le, adj. usual, habitual. 

Hache, n. f. axe. 

Hameau, n. m. hamlet. 

Harangueur. n. m. orator. 

Hardiesse, n. f. boldness. 

Hardiment, adv. boldly. 

Harpe, n. f. harp. 

Hasard, n. m. chance. 

Hauteur, n. f. height, haughtiness. 

Herbe, n. f. Kerb, grass. 

Heros, n. m. hero. 

Heure, n. f. hour. 

Heritage, n. m. inheritance, property. 

Heureux, se, adj. happy, fortunate. 

Hibou, n. m. owl. 

Hirondelle, n. f. swallow. 

Hiver, n. m. winter. 

Homme, n. m. man. 

Honnete, adj. honest, polite. 



Honneur, n. m. honor. 

Honte, n. f. shame. 

Horde, n. f. horde, troop. 

Huissier, n. m. doorkeepej, attendant, 

Humain, e, adj. human, humane, 

Humblement, adv. humbly. 



I. 



Idole, n. f. idol. 

Ignoble, adj. mean, low, debasing, 

11, ils, prn. he, it, they. 

Image, n. f. image, resemblance. 

Imiter, v. a. 1. to imitate. 

Immense, adj. immense, vast. 

Immortel, le, adj. immortal. 

Impenitent, adj. impenitent, unr* 

penting. 
Importun, e, adj. importunate, trou- 
blesome. 
Impur, e, adj. impure. 
Incomparable, adj. incomparable^ 

matchless. 
Inconnu, e, adj. unknown. 
Inconstant, e, adj. inconstant, 

changeable. 
Indiquer, v. a. 1. to indicate, tc 

point out. 
Industrie, n. f. industry. 
Infatigable, adj. indefatigable, un~ 

tiring. 
Infernal, e, adj. infernal. 
Inflexible, adj. inflexibk, unbend* 

ing. 
Ingenieux, se, adj. ingenious. 
Ingrat, e, adj. & n. ungrateful. 
Ingratitude, n. f. ingratitude. 
Innocence, n. f. innocence. 
Inscrire, v. a. ir. 4. to inscribe. 
Insecte, n. m. insect. 
Insensibilite, n. f. insensibility. 
Inspirer, v. a. 1. to inspire. 
Instant, n. m. instant, moment. 
Intention, n. f. intention, meaning. 
Interieur, e, adj. & n. interior, in* 

side. 
Interrompre, v. a. ir. 4. to inter* 

rupt. 
Intime, adj. intimate, close. 
Intitule, adj. v. entitled, called. 
Intrepide, adj. intrepid. 
Introduire, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. j'intro- 

duisisj, 1 7 introduce. 
Ivresse, n f. intoxication, exctssivt 
joy. 



402 



JA-LE. 



LE-ME. 



Jadis, adv. formerly. 
Jamais, adv. never. 

Jardin, n. m. garden. 

Jaseur, se, n. m. & f. talker, prat- 
tler. 

Je, j', prn. J. 

Jeter, v. a. 1. to throw, cast. 

Jeunesse, n. f. youth. 

Joie, n. f. joy. 

Joindre, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. je joigris, 
p. joint), to join, to connect, to add. 

Joli, e, acjj. pretty. 

Jouet, n. m. plaything, sport. 

Joug, n. m. yoke, subjection. 

Jour, n. m. day, light. 

Journee, n. f. day, day's work. 

Joyeux, se, adj. joyful, glad. 

Juge, n. m. judge. 

Jugement, n. m. judgment, deciden. 

Juger, v. a. 1. to judge, to decide. 

Jurer, v. a. & n. 1. to swear, to promise. 

Jusque, pre. as far, as far as. 

Juste, adj. & n. just. 

Justice, d. f. justice. 



La, T, art. the. 

La, Y, prn. her, it. 

La, adv. there; la-bas, yonder. 

Laboureur, n. m. husbandman. 

Lac, n. m. lake. 

Lacher, v. &. 1. to loose hold of to 

let go. 
Laid, e, adj. ugly. \ 
Laine, n. f. wool. 
Laisser, v. a,. 1. to leave, to let. 
Lait, n. m. t milk. 
Lambris, n. m. wainscot. 
Lampe, n. f.lamp. v 

Lancer, v. a. 1. to dart, to send forth 

with violence, to launch. 
Langue, n. f. tongue, language. 
Laurier, n. m. laurel. 
Le, 1', les, art. the. 
Le, T, les, prn. it, them. 
Leger, e, adj. light. 
Lendemain, n. m. next day, morrow. 
Les, art. pi. the, les, prn. them. 
Leur, adj. pi. their. 
Leur, prn. to them. 
Lever, v. a. 1. to raise, (se) v. r. to 

lise, to arise. 



Lever, n. m. rising. 
Liberte, n. f. liberty, freedom. 
Libre, adj. /zee. 
Lieu, n. m piace, spot. 
Lion, n. m. lion. 
Liqueur, n. f. liquor, liquid. 
Livre, n. m. book. 
Loi, n. f. law. 
Loin, adv. far. 

Lointain, e, adj. remote, distant. 
Long, ue, adj. long. 
Long-temps, adv. long, long time. 
Loup, n. m. wolf. 
Lugubre, adj. mournful, sad. 
Lui, prn. to him, to her. 
Lumiere, n. f. light. 
Lrnaties, n. f. pi. spectacles. 
Lutter, v. n. 1. to contend wtih, U 
wrestle. 



M. 

Ma, adj. pot. f. my. 

Machine, n. f. machine. 

Magnamme, adj. magnanimous. 

Magnificence, n, f. magnificence 

Main, n. f. hand. 

Maintenir, v. a. ir. 2. (ind. p. jo 
maintiens, p. d. je maintins), to 
maintain. 

Mais, conj. but. 

Maison, n. f. house. 

Maitre, n. m. master. 

Mai, n. m. evil, adv. badly. 

Malade, n. & adj. patient, sick. 

Male, adj. manly, dignified. 

Malgre, pre. in spite of. 

Malice, n. f. cunning, mii:ce. 

Malin, gne, adj. sarcastic, sly. 

Manant, n. m. peasant, clown. 

Manger, v. a. 1. to eat. 
Manifester, v. a. 1. to manifest, to tes* 

tify, to show. 
Manquer v. a. & n. 1. to miss, to fail 
Marge, n. f. margin. 
Marque, n. f. mark. 
Marseillaise, n. f. Marseillaise Sy*n% 
Matelot, n. m. sailor. 
Matiere, n. f. matter. 
Mauvais, e, adj. bad. 
Me, prn. me, to me. 
Melodieux, se, adj. melodious. 
Meme. adj. & adv. same, self, even. 
Menacer, v. a. 1. to threaten. 
Mendiant, n m. beggtr. 



MK-MY. 



KA-OT. 



493 



Menor, v. a. to lead, to take. 
Mensonge, n. m. falsehood. 
Mentir, v. n. ir. 2. to lie, tc tell a 

falsehood. 
Menu, e, adj. small, short. 
Mepris, n. m. contempt. 
Mepriser, v. a. 1. to despise 
Mer. n. f. sea. 

Mercenaire, adj. mercenary 
Mere, n. f. mother. 
Merite, n. m. merit. 
Meriter, v. a. 1. to merit, to deserve. 
Mes, adj. pos. pi. my. 
Mesurer, v. a. 1. to measure. 
Metier, n. m. trade, occupation. 
Mettre, v. a. ir. 4. (ind. p. je mets, 

p. d. je mis, p. mis), to put, to 

set. 
Meubler, v. a. 1. to furnish. 
Midi. n. m, south, noon. 
Mignon, ne, ac^. delicate, pretty. 
Milieu n. m. middle. 
Mille, adj. num. thousand. 
Ministre, n. m. minister. 
Mobile, adj. movable, light. 
Modeste, adj. modest. 
Moeurs, n. f. pi. morals, manners. 
Moi, prn, me. 
Moindre, adj. lesser, less. 
Moins, adv. less, (au) at least. 
Mois, n. m. month. 
Moissonneur, n. m. harvest-man, 

reaper. 
Moment, n. m. moment. 
Monde, n. m. world, people, (tout le) 

every body. 
Monnaie, n. f. money, change. 
Monstre, n. m. monster. 
Montagnard, n. m. mountaineer. 
Montague, n. f. mountain. 
Monter, v. a. & n. 1. to ascend, to 

mount. 
Montrer, v. a. 1. to show, to point 

out. 
Monument, n. m. monument. 
Moquer (se), v. r. 1. to laugh at, to 

mock. 
Morceau, n. m. piece, morsel. 
Mort, n. f. death, n. m. dead. 
Mosquee, n. f. mosque. 
Mot, n. m. word. 
Mouche, n. f.fly. 
Mourir, v. n. ir. 2. to die. 
Mouton, n. m. sheep. 
Magir, v. n. 2. to roar. 
Mysterieux, ac\j. mysterious. 



N. 

Naif, ve, adj. arilesi unaffeaeu,, 

simple, innocent. 
Naissance, n. f. birth. 
Naissant, e, adj. v. rising, growing. 
Naitre, v. n. ir. 4. (ind. p. je nais, 

p. d. je naquis, p, ne), to be born 
Nation, n. f. nation. 
Navire, n. m. ship, vessel. 
Ne, adv. not. 
Ne. p. born. 
Ne — pas, adv. not. 
Ne — que, adv. only, but. 
Neant, n. m. nothingness. 
Ni. conj. nor, neither. 
Nocturne, adj. nocturnal, nightly. 
Noisette, n. f. hazel-nut. 
Nombre, n. m. number. 
Nommer, v. a. 1. to name, to call. 
Non, adv. no. 

Nourrir, v. a. 2. to feed, to nourish, 
Nouveau, nouvel, nouvelle, adj 

new. 
Nouvelle, n. f. news. 



O. 

Obeir, v. n. 2. to obey. 
Obscur, e, adj. dark, obscure. 
Observer, v. a. 1. to observe, to takt 

notice of. 
Obtenir, v. a. ir. 2. (ind. p. j'ob- 

tiens, p. d. j'obtins), to obtain. 
Odieux, se, adj. odious, hateful. 
Oeil, n. m. (pi. yeux), eyes. 
Oiseau, n. m. bird. 
Ombrage, n. m. shade. 
Ombrager, v. a. 1. to shad*, to shelter. 
Ombre, n. f. shade, shadow. 
On, prn. indefinite, one, they, we, 

people ; on dit, it is sold {one says). 
Onde, n. f. wave, water. 
Opprime. adj. v. oppressed. 
Opprobre, n. m. opp? obrium, shame 
Opulent, e, adj. rich, wealthy. 
Or, n. m. gold. 
Orage, n. m. storm. 
Ordinairement, adv. commonly. 
Ordre, n. m. order. 
Oreille, n. f. ear. 
Orgueil, n. m. pride. 
Orphelin, e. n. m. & f. orphan. 
6ter, v. a. 1. to take away, U> de* 

prive of. 



494 



OU-PB, 



PE-PO. 



On, ccnj. or. 

Ou. adv. where ^ in which wlveretn 

Oublier, v. a. 1. to for gel to ncgltzi. 

Outrage, n. m. outrage, offence, shame. 

Ou vert ure. n. f. opening, 

Ouvrage, n. m. work. 

Ouvrier, n. m. workman. 



Paitre, v. a. & n. 4. to graze. 

Paix, n. f. peace. 

Palais, n. m. palace. 

Par, pre. by. 

Paraitre, v. n. ir. 4. (p. paru), to ap- 
pear. 

Pareourir, v. a. ir. 2. to travel over, 
to cross, to look over. 

Pareil, le, adj. equal, similar. 

Parer (se), v. r. 1. to adorn one's 
self. 

Paresseux, se, adj. idle, lazy, indo- 
lent. 

Parler, v. n. 1. to speak, 

Parmi, pre. among, amongst. 

Parole, n. f. word. 

Parricide, adj. parricidal. 

Parti, n. m. part, party, resolution. 

Partir, v. n. ir. 2. to set out, to leave, 
to depart. 

Partout, adv. everywhere. 

Parvenu, adj. v. (used as a noun), 
upstart. 

fas, adv. not, n. m. step, pace. 

Passer, v. n. 1. to pass. 

Passereau, n. m. sparrow. 

Passion, n. f. passion. 

Patre, n. m. herdsman, shepherd. 

Patrie, n. f. country, native country. 

Patte, n. f. paw. 

Paturage, n. m. pasture, pasturage. 

Paj 7 s, n. m. country. 

Paysan, n. m. peasant, countryman. 

Peage, n. m. toll. 

Peau, n. f. skin. 

Peindre, v. a. ir. 4. (ind. p. je peins, 
p. d. je peignis), to paint, describe. 

Peine, n. f. trouble, pain. 

Peine (a), adv. hardly, scarcely. 

Penible. adj. laborious, painful. 

Pendant, pre. during. 

Pendre, v. a. 4. fa hang. 

Penetration, n. f. penetration. 

Penetrer, 1 , a. 1. to penetrate. 

Penser, v. n. 1. to think. 



Pere, n. m. father. 

Perfide, adj. perfidious, treacherous. 

Perdre, v. a. 4. to lose. 

Permettre, v. a. ir. 4. to permit, ai 

low. 
Perroquet, n. m. parrot. 
Personne, prn. ind. nobody. 
Pervers, adj. perverse. 
Petit, e, adj. small, little. 
Pesant, adj. v. heavy. 
Peu, adv. little. 
Peuple, n. m. people. 
Peupler, v. a. 1. to people. 
Phalange, n. m. phalanx. 
Philosophie, n. f. philosophy. 
Phrase, n. f. phrase, sentence. 
Piece, n. f. piece. 
Pied, n. m. foot. 
Piege. n. m. trap, snare. 
Pis, adv. worse, tant pis, so much the 

worse. 
Pitie, n. f. pity. 
Place, n. f. place, spot. 
Placer, v. a. 1. to place. 
Plafond, n. m. ceiling. 
Plage, n. f. shore, beach. 
Plaindre (se), v. r. ir. (ind. p. je me 

plains, p. d. je me plaignis), to 

complain. 
Plaine, n. f. plain. 
Plaire, v. n. ir. 4. (p. d. je plus, p. 

plu), to please. 
Plaisant, n. m. wag, joker. 
Plein, e, Sidj.full, open. 
Pleurer, v. a. & n. 1. to weep, U 

mourn. 
Plier, v. a. 1. to bow, to bend. 
Pluie, n. f. rain. 
Plume, n. f. feather, pen. 
Plupart (la), n. col. the most, most. 
Plus, adv. more. 
Plusieurs, adj. several. 
Point, n. m. point, adv. not. 
Poisson, n. m. fish. 
Pole, n. m. pole. 
Poli, e, adj. polite, polished. 
Politesse, n. f. politeness. 
Porphyre, n. m. porphyry. 
Port, n. m. port. 
Porter, v. a. 1. to carry, to bear. 
Portique, n. m. portico. 
Poser, v. a. 1. to lay, tc set, to piact 
Posseder, v. a. 1. to possess 
Possible, adj. possible. 
Poteau, n. m. stake, posi. 
Pour, pre. for. 



PO-QU. 



QtJ-RE. 



495 



Pousser, v. a. 1. to push, to hasten. 

Pouvoir, v. n. ir. (ind. p. je puis, p. 
d. je pus. p. pu), to be able. 

Prairie, n. f. meadow. 

Prealablement, adv. previously. 

Precipiter, v. a. 1. to hasten, precipi- 
tate, 

Preferer, v. a. 1. to prefer. 

Preliminaire, n. & adj. preliminary . 

Premier, e, adj. first. 

Prendre, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. je pris, p. 
pris), to take, (s'y) ref. to go about 
it, to open the matter. 

Preparer, v. a. 1. to prepare. 

Pres de, pre. near, nearly. 

President, n. m. president. 

Presence, n. f. presence. 

Present, n. m. present. 

Presenter (se), v. r. 1. to present 
one's self. 

Presque, adv. almost. 

Presser, v. a. & r. (se) to hasten, to 
press. 

Pret. e, adj. ready, prepared. 

Prier, v. a. & n. 1. to pray, to entreat. 

Priere, n. f. prayer. 

Prince, n. m. pri.xe. 

Printemps, n. m. spring. 

Prisonnier, n. m. prisoner. 

Prix, n. m. price, prize. 

Produire, v. a. ir. 4. to produce. 

Proferer, v. a. 1. to utter, to 

Profession, n. f. profession. 

Projet, n. m. project. 

Promener, v. a. 1. to carry about. 

Prononcer, v. a. 1. to pronounce. 

Protestation, n, f. protest, protesta- 
tion. 

Province, n. f. province, district. 

Publier, v. a. 1. to publish. 

Puis. adv. then. 

Puiser, v. a. 1. to dip, to find. 

Puisque, conj. since. 

Puissance, n. f. power. 

Puissant ; e, adj. powerful. 



q. 

Quand, adv. when. 

Quatre. adj. num. four. 

Qu\ que, conj. that, prn. which, 

ii'hom. 
Quel. adj. what, vjhich. 
Quelque, adj. some, adv. however. 
Quelque chose, n. m. something. 



Quelquefois, adv. sometime* 

Qui, prn. who, which. 

Quoi, prn. which, what. 

Quoi ! int. what ! 

Quoique, conj. although, though. 



R. 

Radoteur, se, n. m. & f . dotard. 

Raison, n. f. reason, right. 

Ramasser, v. a. 1. to pick up, to col- 
lect. 

Rameau, n. m. branch. 

Rappeler, v. a. 1. to recall, to re- 
mind, (se) v. r. to remember, to 
recollect. 

Rapporter, v. a. 1. to bring back, to 
relate. 

Rapprocher, v. a. 1. to bring near 
or together. 

Rarement, adv. rarely, seldom. 

Rassembler, v. a. 1. to collect, te 
bring together. 

Rassurer (se), v. r. 1. to take cour- 
age, to cheer up, to settle. 

Re ce voir, v. a. 3. to receive. 

Rechigne, adj. gruff, awkward, re- 
pulsive. 

Recipiendaire, n. m. candidate, one 
chosen to a post. 

Reconnaitre, v. a. ir. 4. to recognize^ 
know again. 

Redire, v. a. ir. to say again, re- 
peat. 

Redoute, adj. v. dreaded, feared. 

Reduire, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. je redui- 
sis), to reduce, to compel. 

Reellement, adv. really. 

Refuge, n. m. refuge, asylum. 

Refuser, v. a. 1. to refuse. 

Regard, n. m. look. 

Registre, n. m. register, book. 

Regner, v. n. 1. to reign, to prevail. 

Regret, n. m. regret. 

Reine. n. f. queen. 

Religion, n. f. religion. 

Relever, v. a. 1. to raise again. 

Relief, n. m. en relief, raised, em* 
bossed. 

Remerciment, n. m. thank. 

Remettre, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. je re- 
mis, p. remis), to replace, to give 
to hand, to deliver. 

Remplir, v. a. 2. to fill, to fulfil. 

"Remuer, v. a. 1. t,9 move, to <&ir. 



RE-RI. 



RI-SK. 



Renccntrer, v. a. 1. to meet. 
Rendre, v. a. 4. to render, to return, 

to give back. 
Renfermer, v. a. to inclose, to con- 

tain. 
Renommee, n. f. fame, report. 
Renvoyer, v. a. ir. 1. to send back, 

to send again. 
Repandre, v. a. 4. to spread, spill } 
' shed. 

Repas, n. m. repast, meal. 
Repentir (se), v. r. to repent. 
Re peter, v. a. 1. to repeat. 
Repliquer, v. a. 1. to reply. 
Replonger, v. a. 1. plunge, or cast 

again. 
Repondre, v. a. 4. to answer, reply. 
Reponse, n. f. reply. 
Reproduire, v. a. ir. 4. to reproduce. 
Reptile, n. m. reptile. 
Republicain, n. & adj. republican. 
Reserver, v. a. 1. to reserve, to keep. 
Resister, v. n. 1. to resist. 
Resoudre, v. a. & n. ir. 4. (p. d. jo 

resolus, p. resolu), to resolve, to 

decide. 
Ressemblance; n. f. resemblance, 

likeness. 
Reste, n. m. rest, remainder, remnant, 
Reste (de), adv. sufficiently, fully, 

besides. 
Rester, v. n. 1. to remain, to dwell. 
Retentir, v. n. 2. to resound. 
Retentissant, adj. v. resounding. 
Retirer (se), v. r. 1. to retire, with- 

dravj. 
Retour, n. m. return. 
Retourner, v. n. 1. to return, to go 

back. 
Reussir, v. n. 1. to succeed,. 
Reveil, n. m. act of awaking. 
Re veil] er (se), v. r. 1. to awake. 
Revenir, v. n. ir. 2. to return, come 

back. 
Rever, v. n. 1. to dream, to think. 
Revers, n. ta. reverse, wrong side. 
Revetir. v. a. ir. 2. (ind. p. je re- 
vets), to clothe, invest. 
Revoir, v. a. ir. (p. revu), to see 

again. 
Riaiit, adj. v. laughing, smiling, 

pleasant, cheerful. 
Riche, adj. rich, loealthy. 
Ridicule, n. m. ridicule, adj. ridicu- 
lous. 
Ridieulement, adv. ridiculously. 



Rfen, adv. nothing. 

Rite, n. m. rite. 

Rivage, n. m. bank, shore. 

Rive, n. f. bank, shore. 

Rire, v. n ir. 4. (ind. p. je rla, | 

ri), to laugh. 
Roche r, n. m. rock. 
Roi, n. m. king. 
Rose, n. f. rose. 
Roseau, n. m. reed. 
Rosee, n. f. dew. 
Route, n. f. road, way, path. 
Roulement, n. m. rolling. 
Rouler, v. a. 1. to roll. 
Royal, e, adj. royal, kingly. 
Rumeur, n. f. rumor ', report, noit* 



S. 

Sa, adj. poss. f. his, her, Us. 

Sable, n. m. sand. 

Sac, n. m. sack, bag. 

Sacre, e, adj. sacred, holy. 

Sage, adj. wise, good. 

Sagesse, n. f. wisdom. 

Sain, e, adj. healthy, wholesome. 

Saint, e, adj. holy. 

Saison, n. f. season. 

Salle, n. f hall, parlor, room. 

Salut ! int. Hail ! good luck ! 

Sang, n. m. blood. 

Sanguinaire, adj. bloodthirsty, so* 

guinary. 
Sanglant, e, adj. bleeding, bloody. 
Sans, pre. without. 
Sante, n. f. health. 
Sauvage, adj. wild, savage. 
Savant, adj. & n. m. learned, learne* 

man. 
Savoir, v a. ir. 3. (ind. p. je sais, p 

d. je sus, p. su), to know. 
Science, n. f. knowledge, science. 
Scier, v. a. 1. to sav). 
Se, prn. him, her, himself, h/aself. 
Seigneur, n. m. Lord. 
Sein, n. m. bosom. 
Selon, pre. according to. 
Sembler, v. n. & unip. 1. to seem, U 

appear. 
Semence, n. f. teed. 
Semer, v. a. 1 . to sow, to scatter. 
Sentiment, n. m. sentiment thought 
Sentinelle, n. f. st ntinel. 
Sentir, v. a. ir. 2 (ind. p. je sens^ 

to feel t smell. 



BE-SO. 



SO-TE. 



497 



S£raphm, n, m, seraphim. 
Serpolet, n. m wild thyme. 
Servage, n. m. bondage. 
Servir, v. a. & n. (ind. p. je sers), to 

serve, to be used. 
Servitude, n. f. servitude, slavery. 
Ses. adj. pos. pi. Ms, her, its. 
Seuil, n. m. threshold, door-step, sill. 
Si, conj. if, adv. so. 
Siecle, n. m. age, time, century. 
Signe, n. m. sign. 
Signer, v. a. 1. to sign. 
Silence, n. m. silence. 
Silencieux, se, adj. silent, not loqua- 
cious. 
Sillon, n. m. furrow. 
Simple, adj. simple. 
Singe, n. m. ape, monkey. 
Sinueux, se, adj. sinuous, winding. 
Situation, n. f. situation. 
Soigne ux, se, adj. careful. 
Soi-meme, prn. himself, one's self. 
Soin, n. m. care. 
Soir, n. m. evening. 
Soldat, n. m. soldier. 
Soleil, n. m. sun. 
Solide. adj. strong, solid. 
Solitude, n. f. solitude. 
Sombre, adj. dark, gloomy, sad. 
Sommeil, n. m. sleep. 
Sommet, n. m. summit, top, pinnacle. 
Son, n. m. sound. 
Son, adj. pos. m. s. his, her, its. 
Songer, v. n. 1. to dream, to think. 
Sonner, v. n. 1. to ring. 
Sort, n. m. lot, fate. 
Sorte, n. f. kind, de sorte, adv. so 

that. 
Sortir, v. n. ir. 2. (ind. p. je sors), 

to go out. 
Sot, sotte, n. & h,dj. fool, foolish. 
Sottise, n. f. nonsense. 
Soudain, e, adj. sudden, unexpected, 

adv. suddenly. 
Souffle, n. m. breath, wind. 
Souffrir, v. a. ir. 1. to suffer, to bear. 
Souhaiter, v. a. 1. to wish, to desire. 
Soulier, n. m. shoe. 
Soup^onner, v. a. 1. to suspect. 
Souplesse, n. f. suppleness, docility. 
Sourd, e, adj. deaf 
Sous, pre. under. 
Boutenir, v. a. ir. 3. (ind. je sou- 

tiens), to sustain* to support, to 

bear, to maintain. 
Soutien, n. m. support. 



Souvenance, n. f. remembrance, re 

collection. 

Souvenir, n. m. remembrance, recoU 
lection. 

Souvenir (se), v. r. ir. 2. (ind. p. je me 
souviens), to remember, recoiled. 

Souvent, adv. often. 

Spirale (en), winding. 

Splendeur, n. f. brilliancy, splendor. 

Statut. n. m. statute. 

Stratageme, n. m. stratagem, trick. 

Stupide, adj. stupid, silly. 

Succomber, v. n. 1. to fall. 

Suivre, v. a. ir. 4. (ind. p. je suis), 
to follow. 

Sujet, adj. & n. subject. 

Superbe, adj. proud, superb, mag- 
nificent. 

Sur, e, adj. sure, certain, safe. 

Sur, pre. on, upon. 

Sur-le-champ, adv. immediately. 

Surface, n. f. surface. 

Surnumeraire, adj. supernumerary. 

Surpasser, v. a. 1. to surpass. 

Surprendre, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. je sur- 
pris, p. surprise to surprise. 

Surpris, e, adj. v. surprised. 

Surtout, adv. above all. 

Surveillance, n. f. watch, care. 

Symbol, n. m. symbol. 

Sycomore, n. m. sycamore. 

Sympathie, n. f. sympathy. 



T 

Tableau, n. m. vu&e, picture. 

Tacher, v. n. 1. to endeavor, to try. 

Tailler, v. a. 1. to cut, to shape. 

Talent, n. m. talent. 

Tandis, adv. while. 

Tanner, v. a. 1. to tan. 

Tant, adv. so much. 

Tant mieux, adv. so much the better 

Tant pis, adv. so much the worse. 

Tard, adv. late. 

Te, prn. thee. 

Tel, telle, acy. such. 

Tempere, e, adj. temperate. 

Tempete, n. f. tempest. 

Temps, n. m. time, weather. 

Tendre, adj. tender, kind. 

Tenir, v. a. ir. 2. (ind. p. je tiens, p, 

d. je tins, p. tenu), to hold. 
Tenter, v. a. 1 . to tempt, to attempt 

to try. 



498 



TE—TY. 



UN-VI. 



Terme, n. m. term, end, expression. 

Terrasser, v. a. 1. to throw down, 

Terre, n. f. land, earth. 

Teneur, n. f. fear, terror. 

Terrible, adj. terrible. 

Tete, n. f. head. 

Tkym, n. m. thyme. 

Tige, n. f. stalk, stem. 

Tigre. n. m. tiger. 

Tirer, v. a. 1. io draw, to extract, to 
fire, to shoot. 

Toison, n. f.Jleecf. 

Toit, ii. m. roof. 

Tomber, v. n. 1 . to fall. 

Toimerre, n. m, thunder. 

Tort, n. m. m-ong. 

Toucher, v. a. 1. to touch, 

Toujours, adv. always. 

Tour, n. f. tower. 

Tour, n. m. trick, turn. 

Tourmenter, v, a. 1. to torment, to 
tease, 

Tourner, v, a. 1. to turn. 

Tout, e, adj. all every. 

Tout, adv. "entinly, quite. 

Tracer, v. a. 1. to trace, to mark. 

Trahir, v. a. 2. to betray. 

Trait, n. m. feature, trait, arrow, 

Traii^ment, n. m. treatment. 

Traitre, n. m. & adj. traitor, treacher- 
ous. 

Trame, n. f. woof, plot. 

Tranquille, adj. quiet, tranquil. 

Tranquillemsnt, adv. quietly, tran- 
quilly. 

Transport, n. m. transport, carriage. 

Travail, n. m. work, labor. 

Travers (a), pre. through, across. 

Trembler, T. n. 1. to tremble, shud- 
der. 

Tres, adv. very. 

Tresor, n. m. treasure. 

Tribu, n. f. tribe. 

Triomphe, n. m. triumph. 

Triste, adj. sad, sorrowful. 

Trois, adj. num. three. 

Trone, n. m. throne. 

Trop, adv. too much, too many. 

Trouble, n. m. trouble, vexation, dis- 
turbance. 

Troupeau, n. m. flock, herd. 

Trouver, v. a. 1. to find, (se) v. r. 
to happen to be, to be present, to 
appear. 

Tuer, v. a. 1. to kill, slay, 

Tyrannie, n. f. tyranny. 



u. 

Un, une, adj. num. one, a, an. 
Univers, n. m. universe. 
Usage, n. m. custom, use. 
Usurper, v. a. 1. to usurp. 
Utile, adj. useful. 



Vacant, e, adj. vacant, unoccupied. 

Vache, n. f. cow. 

Vague, n. f. wave, billow. 

Vain, e, adj. vain. 

Vaincre, v. a. ir. 4. (ind. p. je vaincs, 

p. d. je vainquis, p. vaincu), ts 

vanquish, to conquer, to overcome, 
Vaisseau, n. m. vessel, ship. 
Vallon, n. m. valley, vale. 
Valoir, v. n. ir. 3. (ind. je vaux, p. 

d. je valus), to be worth, 
Vanite, n. f. vanity. 
Vanneur, n. m. winnower 
Vanter (se), v. r. to boast. 
Vaquer, v. unip. & n. to be vacant 
Vase, n. m. vase, vessel, 
Vaste, adj. vast. 
Vengeur, n. m. avenger. 
Venir, v. n. ir. 2. (ind. p. je vieng, p 

d. je vins), to come. 
Vent, n. m. wind. 
Verger, n. m. orchard. 
Verite, n. f. truth. 
Vermeil, n."m. silver gilded. 
Vers, pre. towards. 
Vert, adj. green. 
Vertueux, se, adj. virtuous. 
Vetement, n. m. garment. 
Vetir, v. a. ir. 2. to cUthe. 
Vice, n. m. vice. 
Victime, n. f. victim. 
Vide, adj. empty, n. m. empty space* 
Vie, n. f. life. 
Vieux, vieil, vieille, adj. old, antu 

quated. 
Vif, ve, adj. lively, quick. 
Vigilance, n. f. vigilance. 
Vil, e, adj. vile, mean, low. 
Village, n. m. village. 
Ville, n. f. town, city. 
Virilement, adv. manfully, courts 

geously. 
Visir, n. m. vizier. 
Visiter, v. a. 1. to visit. 
Vivacite, n f. vivacity. 



▼I-YO* 



TR-HL 



499 



Vivant, e, ad[j. t. livtnj. 

Vivre, v. n. ir. 4. (ind. p. je vis, p. 

d. je vecus, p. vecu), to live. 
Voeu, n. m. vow, wish. 
Voici, pre. here is, this is. 
Voila, pre. there is, that is. 
Voler, v. n. 1. to fly, v. a. 1. to steal. 
Voir, v. a. ir. (p. d. je vis, p. vu), to 

see, to perceive. 
Voisin, n. m. neighbor. 
Voix, n. f. voice. 
Vorace, adj. greedy, voracious. 
Vos, ac(j. pos. pi. your. 
Votre, adj. p. your. 
Vouloir, v. a. & n. ir. 3. (ind. p. je 

veux, p. d. je voulus, p. voulu), 

to wish, to be willing. 
Vous, prn. you. 
Voute, n. £ vault, arch. 
Voyager, v. n. 1. to travel. 



Vrai, e, adj. true. 
Vraiment, adv. truly. 
Vue, n. f. view, sight. 



Y. 

Y, adv. there. 

Y, prn. to it, to them, at it, at them, 

in it, in them. 
Y avoir, v. unip. il y a, there is 

there are; il y a nn an, a yeaf 

ago. 
Yeux, n. m. p. (plural of ceil), eyesc 



Z. 

Zephyr, n. m. light wind, zepniff 
Z6ro f n. m. zero, naught. 



',. 






Sfc- 



A'MEBl DUCATIOiVAL SERIES. 



Itwt-lofflts in tire Sunt us. 

Among v/hii-U yn: Home of the al popular scientific treatises extant Professor 

Gray's Botanies commended as the best works on that subject, by Professor Agassiz, 

Dr. Torrey, Professor Silliman, and many of the first botanists of the country, and have been re- 
cently adopted by a large number of the most important Seminaries, Normal Schools, and Gol- 
■ v's Chemistry has passed throi . The new vrork laas been entirely 

re-written, ; u -lusions of the science. 

Hitch< • i . luable as a text- 

book for its nimii cdven to American geology. 

Wells'' advantage of following oth< 's distinguished f 

of the principles of philosophy, by references to the useful arts and the 
necessil life* The books of this department, thus far, are: 



Gray's Youth's Botany — " How plants 
grow." Illustrated, -- $0 50 

Gray's Lessons in Botany,- - - - - - 1 00 

Gray's Manual of Botany for Schools, - 150 

Gray's Manual, with Mosses. Illustrated, 2 50 

Gray's Structural Botany. (Text Book,) - 2 00 
Gray and Well's New Chemistry, - - - 1 00 



Wells' Natural Philosophy, $1 00 

Wells' Science of Common Things,- - - 75 

Hitchcock's Geology, --125. 

Hitchcock's School Physiology. (Jn Press.) 

Kiddle's Astronomy, 38 

The Young Geographer, ----.- 50 
Hart's Geographical Exercises, - - - - 33 



^Int-§Mlts in IWyttoru ;tiU inglislr flriULaga. 

\ Embracing, among others, Porter's Rhetorical Reader, which has passed through more than 300 
S editions; Newman's Rhetoric, which has passed through more than sixty editions; Yf ells' 
) Grammar, more than 200. editions ; the American Debater; Sanders' School Speaker; Oldham's 
S Humorous Series, etc. Dr. McElligott's works have been strongly commended by eminent edu- 
p cators, among whom are President Fkei.ingiiuyse:?, Chancellor Fekbis, President Andeews, the 
} late Dr. McKre-n, Superintendent of New York. The " Debater" is a most useful manual for 
( public speakers, and is highly approved. The " School Speaker" is a work of careful and intelli- 
S gent study. It is composed of pieces adapted to declamation, and to bring out the various prin- 
) ciples of Elocution, and the points of a good speaker. The Series embraces : 



S Sanders' School Speaker, - 
£ Newman's Rhetoric,- - - 
s: Porter's Rhetorical Render, 
\ Porter's Rhetorical I 
S Wells' (V, IT.) 
/ McElligott's Analytic 
< McElligott's "toung k 



Enlarged, 
aar, ge'visc 



$1 00 i McElligott's American Debater, 

75 Oldham's Humorous Speaker, - - - - 
63 Oldham's Amusing Reader, - - - - - 
00 ! Scripture School Reader, ------ 

, 38 | Sill's Synthesis of the English Sentence, - 

X5 ?k (to accompany), - - 

1 Grammar, - - - - 



- - $1 00 

- - 1 00 



T5 
38 
18 
38 




Works on 
eularlv ad: 



X in ||il0Sff^|g \\\x\ (Btlfits. 



enc are not only profound and consistent trea- 
d philosophical arrangement, to the uses 
. t-books in Colleges and Academies, and 

srs, Professor Siiedd, the Bibliotheaa Sacra, tiie 

Englander, and other competent author- 

" the first pliiiosopher of France." Also 

' far, consists of: 



• $1 



Analogy, - - 



m 



C 1 



*• • » * A -c. *7?77* &* ^ *° • * * A ^ 







' \ / V^k ^ ^ '*« 



4°, . 






«5 °* - 






'♦. ^ 













W 



"^ 9 - 




> V 

* «? ^. oviaW » AV "5*>. ©IKS * «? ^ 










• ■»• „A <* *'TV 







0^ t'^ll* "**< 






v^ v 














* G ... °^ '"•'* A \ A <* ^^ A^ \ 




> ^ 




o « o 

















• «-*C<Vv J* *» 



C. J> 

*0 ,^ fc o*«- <*» 






S\ 




